dickimaw (9feb14)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@32925 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

161 files changed, 34175 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/ERRATA b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/ERRATA
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..92cb6bea003
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/ERRATA
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+(Thank you to Boris Veytsman for pointing out these errors. They'll
+be fixed in the next edition.)
+
+TeX glue is a metaphor invented by Prof Knuth and doesn't hark back
+to manual typesetting days.
+
+\begin{displaymath} ... \end{displaymath} is defined to use \[ ... \]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b61c6022341
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/README
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+These are some of the books and tutorials that form part of the
+"Dickimaw LaTeX Series". Only the A4 PDF is included here. Other
+formats, such as HTML or a screen optimized PDF, are available from
+http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/
+
+License: GNU Free Documentation License (GNU FDL)
+
+Documents:
+
+ * dickimaw-novices.pdf
+   "LaTeX for Complete Novices"
+   Home page: http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/
+   Also available as a paperback, ISBN 978-1-909440-00-5
+
+   An introductory guide to LaTeX.
+
+ * dickimaw-thesis.pdf
+   "Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis"
+   Home page: http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/thesis/
+   Also available as a paperback, ISBN 978-1-909440-02-9
+
+   A follow-on from "LaTeX for Complete Novices" geared towards
+   students who want to use LaTeX to write their PhD thesis.
+
+ * dickimaw-minexample.pdf
+   "Creating a LaTeX minimal example"
+   Home page: http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/minexample/
+
+   Describes how to create a minimal example, which can be used as
+   a debugging aid when you encounter errors in your LaTeX documents.
+
+The document source files required to generate the above PDFs are in
+the src subdirectory.  The full book sources, including the code to
+generate the HTML and screen PDF versions that aren't provided in this
+distribution, are available from the book home pages.
+
+The paperbacks can be order through most booksellers or from the
+Dickimaw Books Store (http://www.dickimaw-books.com/shop/). TUG and
+UK TUG members are eligible for a 25% discount on the LaTeX books
+from the Dickimaw Store.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-minexample.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-minexample.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0a9b1326a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-minexample.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-novices.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-novices.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8668ad76669
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-novices.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-thesis.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-thesis.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9146ab3eb7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/dickimaw-thesis.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/fdl.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/fdl.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5a3cea7c082
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/fdl.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+\label{sec:fdl}\markright{GNU Free Documentation License}
+
+ \begin{center}
+
+       Version 1.2, November 2002
+
+
+ Copyright \copyright{} 2000,2001,2002  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 
+ \bigskip
+ 
+     51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+  
+ \bigskip
+ 
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+\end{center}
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\bfseries\large Preamble}
+\end{center}
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document ``free'' in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.  It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does.  But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book.  We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS\par}
+\end{center}
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein.  The ``\textbf{Document}'', below,
+refers to any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as ``\textbf{you}''.  You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A ``\textbf{Modified Version}'' of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A ``\textbf{Secondary Section}'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
+(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
+within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document is in part a
+textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
+mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The ``\textbf{Invariant Sections}'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License.  If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The ``\textbf{Cover Texts}'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License.  A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A ``\textbf{Transparent}'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text.  A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``\textbf{Opaque}''.
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.  Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The ``\textbf{Title Page}'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page.  For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section ``\textbf{Entitled XYZ}'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as ``\textbf{Acknowledgements}'',
+``\textbf{Dedications}'', ``\textbf{Endorsements}'', or ``\textbf{History}''.)  
+To ``\textbf{Preserve the Title}''
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document.  These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 2. VERBATIM COPYING\par}
+\end{center}
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies.  If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section~3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies.  The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible.  You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 4. MODIFICATIONS\par}
+\end{center}
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it.  In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[A.] 
+   Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+   from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+   (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+   of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous version
+   if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+   
+\item[B.]
+   List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+   responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+   Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+   Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+   unless they release you from this requirement.
+   
+\item[C.]
+   State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+   Modified Version, as the publisher.
+   
+\item[D.]
+   Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+   
+\item[E.]
+   Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+   adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+   
+\item[F.]
+   Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+   giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+   terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+   
+\item[G.]
+   Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+   and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+   
+\item[H.]
+   Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+   
+\item[I.]
+   Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
+   to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+   publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+   there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
+   stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+   given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+   Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+   
+\item[J.]
+   Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+   public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+   the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+   it was based on.  These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
+   You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+   least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+   publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+   
+\item[K.]
+   For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'',
+   Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+   the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+   and/or dedications given therein.
+   
+\item[L.]
+   Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+   unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
+   or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+   
+\item[M.]
+   Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''.  Such a section
+   may not be included in the Modified Version.
+   
+\item[N.]
+   Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements''
+   or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+   
+\item[O.]
+   Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+\end{itemize}
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section~4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''.  You must delete all sections
+Entitled ``Endorsements''.
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS\par}
+\end{center}
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section~3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 8. TRANSLATION\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section~4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section~4) to Preserve
+its Title (section~1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 9. TERMINATION\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License.  However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE\par}
+\end{center}
+
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation.  If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+\begin{center}
+{\Large\bfseries ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents\par}
+\end{center}
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+\bigskip
+\begin{quote}
+    Copyright \copyright{}  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
+    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+    under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+    or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+    with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+    A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
+    Free Documentation License''.
+\end{quote}
+\bigskip
+    
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the ``with \dots\ Texts.'' line with this:
+
+\bigskip
+\begin{quote}
+    with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+    Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+\end{quote}
+\bigskip
+    
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/dickimaw-minexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/dickimaw-minexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e852fee7c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/dickimaw-minexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,751 @@
+% This is the source code for "Creating a LaTeX minimal example"
+
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+\documentclass[abstract=on,index=totoc,bibliography=totoc]{scrartcl}
+
+\usepackage{minexample}
+\onlinetrue
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage{datetime}
+\usepackage{alltt}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+
+\makeindex
+
+\latex{%
+  \ifpdf
+   \pdfinfo{
+       /Author (Nicola Talbot)
+       /Title  (Creating a LaTeX Minimal Example)
+       /CreationDate (D:20081114000000Z)
+       /ModDate (D:\pdfdate)
+       /Subject (LaTeX)
+       /Keywords (LaTeX;debug)
+    }
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\baseurl}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/minexample}
+
+\title{Creating a LaTeX Minimal Example}
+\author{Nicola L C Talbot}
+\date{17th January 2014 (version 1.2)}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+Debugging LaTeX errors often requires creating a minimal (or
+minimum) example. This is particularly important when posting a bug
+report or request for help, as it facilitates the diagnostic
+process. Creating a minimal example will often help you identify the
+problem, without having the hassle of posting your query and waiting
+until you get a reply. This document illustrates how to create a
+minimal example.  See also \htmladdnormallink{Need More
+Help?}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/help.html}
+
+The home page for this document is \url{\baseurl/}.
+\casemedia{}{}{This document is also available in PDF formatted either in 
+\htmladdnormallink{A4 for printing}{\baseurl/minexample-a4.pdf} or 
+\htmladdnormallink{6inx4in for on-line viewing}{\baseurl/minexample-screen.pdf}. }
+The source code for this document is available as
+\htmladdnormallink{a ZIP archive}{\baseurl/minexample.zip}.
+\end{abstract}
+
+Copyright \copyright\ 2008 Nicola L. C. Talbot Permission is granted to copy,
+distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU
+Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or any later version
+published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant
+Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of
+the license is included in the section entitled \htmlref{\qt{GNU Free
+Documentation License}}{sec:fdl}. 
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setnode{introduction}
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{sec:intro}
+
+A minimal example is the smallest possible complete document that
+illustrates a problem. A minimal example file should not include any
+packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must
+include a document class and the document environment. 
+
+There are two approaches to creating a minimal example: \qt{building
+up} and \qt{hacking down}. This document illustrates both
+approaches. Creating the minimal example may lead you to the
+solution, but if you are still stuck, you can then post the minimal
+example. (Remembering first to search for the solution in the
+\htmlref{documentation}{sec:documentation} and on the Internal, for
+example, in newsgroup archives or on forums or Q\&A sites.)
+
+Many package authors (including me) read messages on sites such as
+\htmladdnormallink{The \LaTeX\
+Community}{http://www.latex-community.org/forum/}, 
+\htmladdnormallink{\TeX\ on
+StackExchange}{http://tex.stackexchange.com/} or on newsgroups such
+as \htmladdnormallink{comp.text.tex}{news:comp.text.tex}, so if
+you have a problem you can't solve it's generally a good idea to
+post your query in one of those places (remembering to paste the
+contents of your minimal file in your message). If you've made a
+mistake in your code, then someone may be able to point it out,
+which may mean that you get a reply quicker than you would if you
+posted your query directly to the author. Also, other people will be
+able to see your query and learn from it. Remember that no one is
+being paid or is otherwise obliged to answer your query, so be
+careful not to make your query sound like a demand or an accusation. 
+
+Note that when posting your query, you also need to give a brief
+description of the problem, and list the methods that you have tried
+to trace the problem. Don't go into a long rambling description of
+your project, as it generally doesn't help to identify the problem,
+and too much information can put people off reading your request.
+It's also a good idea to first search the
+\htmladdnormallink{comp.text.tex
+archives}{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/} or use the
+search box on sites like \htmladdnormallink{The \LaTeX\
+Community}{http://www.latex-community.org/forum/},
+\htmladdnormallink{\TeX\ on
+StackExchange}{http://tex.stackexchange.com/} to find out if anyone
+else has asked the same question. If you ask a
+\htmladdnormallink{frequently asked
+question}{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}, you may get a curt reply from
+people who are tired of answering the same old question, so check
+first. 
+
+\setnode{buildingup}
+\section{Building Up}
+\label{sec:buildingup}
+
+With the building up approach, you start with the document:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+and add to it until you encounter your problem. If your problem
+requires the use of \cs{chapter}, then replace \cls{article} with
+either \cls{report} or \cls{book}. 
+
+This section illustrates the building up approach with an example.
+Suppose your problem document looks something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{myuniversityscustomclass}
+
+\usepackage[french,USenglish]{babel}
+\usepackage[mmddyyyy]{datetime}
+\usepackage{nonstandardpackage}
+\usepackage{anothernonstandardpackage}
+% lots of other packages that may or may not be standard
+
+% lots of your own definitions
+
+\author{John Doe}
+\title{Astounding Discoveries}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+
+% 300 or so pages of text, graphics, tables, bibliography and
+% sundry other stuff
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Let's suppose that your problem is that the date on the title page
+looks like November 14, 2008, but you are expecting it to appear in
+the form 11/14/2008. You have already checked that you used the
+option \texttt{mmddyyyy} when you loaded the \sty{datetime} package,
+so what's gone wrong? 
+
+Since you haven't used \cs{date}, the date on the title page is
+generated using \cs{today}, so the fault must lie in the definition of
+\cs{today}. It looks like it might be a bug in the \sty{datetime} package, so
+what should you do? This happens to be one of my packages, but if
+you send me your entire 300 page document plus several hundred
+graphics files and a large bibliography file, I won't be best
+pleased. Aside from filling up my inbox, I don't have your
+university's custom class file, nor am I likely to have the 
+non-standard packages installed on my system, so I won't be able to test
+the document. At which point you'll either get a request for a
+minimal example, or I'll think \qt{forget that, I'll look at it some
+other day} (or words to that effect) and then several days, or
+possibly weeks, later you'll get a request for a minimal
+example.\footnote{Actually, these days I'll just ask you to post
+your bug report on \htmladdnormallink{my bug report
+form}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/bug-report.html}.} 
+
+You've already worked out that the problem must lie with the command
+\cs{today}. So that needs to go in the minimal example. You want to use
+the \sty{datetime} package to change the format of this command, so that
+package needs to go in the minimal example, with the package options
+you have specified in your original document:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[mmddyyyy]{datetime}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Call this file, say, \texttt{test.tex}, and run \LaTeX\ on it. Have a look at
+the output. The output looks fine, so perhaps one of the other
+packages you have loaded has caused the problem. One by one try each
+of the packages you have in your problem document, in the same
+order. If adding the package has no effect on the output, then
+delete that package from the test file, and go on to the next one.
+For example, the problem document loads the babel package, so add
+that package to the test file using the same options that you used
+in your problem document. The minimal example should now look like: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[french,USenglish]{babel}
+\usepackage[mmddyyyy]{datetime}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now run it through \LaTeX, and check the result. The output has
+changed to November 14, 2008, instead of 11/14/2008. This test file
+now reproduces the error, but is only six lines instead of several
+hundred or possible thousand lines. 
+
+What next? Check the \sty{datetime}
+\htmlref{documentation}{sec:documentation} to see if it mentions
+the \sty{babel} package. The \sty{datetime} documentation comes in both PDF and
+HTML format. Most PDF and HTML viewers have a function that allows
+you to search the document or page for a given word, so search for
+the word \qt{babel}. This should lead you to the sentence which states
+that the babel package must be loaded before the \sty{datetime} package.
+Check the test file. In this test file, the \sty{babel} package has been
+loaded first.
+
+Now what?  In this case, there is a FAQ for the \sty{datetime} package
+(\url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/faqs/datetimefaq.html}) so that's the next
+place to look. This FAQ covers the most commonly used packages that
+I have written.\footnote{or more precisely, it covers the packages
+that I get the most post about.} If you look at the table of contents for the
+\sty{datetime} section, you should see the entry \qt{The date is in another
+language or in the wrong format}. This fits the problem, so click on
+that link and have a look at the answer. The answer indicates that
+there was a bug in an earlier version of the \sty{datetime} package that
+caused a problem when used in conjunction with the \sty{babel} package,
+but the bug has been fixed. So the next thing to do is check which
+version you are using. Add the command \cs{listfiles} to the test file: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\listfiles
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[french,USenglish]{babel}
+\usepackage[mmddyyyy]{datetime}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+At the end of the log file there should now be a list of all the
+files that have been loaded, along with their release dates and
+versions. Check the version of the \sty{datetime} package. Is it the
+latest version? If not, download the latest version and try again.
+If it is the latest version, then send the author (me, in the case
+of the \sty{datetime} package) the test file and its log file.
+If you check the package documentation, you should either find the
+author's contact details or a link to a bug reporting tool.
+
+If the conflicting package is one that is not publicly available
+(for example, it's your university's custom package that can only be
+downloaded from a restricted site) then send your query to the
+author of that package. If the conflicting package is publicly
+available, but is not on \htmladdnormallink{CTAN}{http://ctan.org/}, 
+then specify from where it can be downloaded. 
+
+\setnode{hackingdown}
+\section{Hacking Down}
+\label{sec:hackingdown}
+
+The \htmlref{previous section}{sec:buildingup} illustrated how to
+build up a minimal example. This section shows how to hack down a
+minimal example. Again, we are going to start with a 300 page
+document which contains many images, tables and a bibliography. 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{myuniversityscustomclass}
+
+\usepackage{nonstandardpackage}
+\usepackage{anothernonstandardpackage}
+% lots of other packages
+
+\usepackage{glossaries}
+
+% lots of your own command and environment definitions
+
+\newglossaryentry{minex}{name={Minimal Example},
+description={A small document illustrating failing behaviour},
+text={minimal example}}
+
+% lots more glossary definitions
+
+\author{John Doe}
+\title{Astounding Discoveries}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+
+% 300 or so pages of text, graphics, tables and
+% sundry other stuff
+
+% Somewhere in the document is the following:
+A \gls{minex is essential when encountering a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ 
+error you don't understand.
+
+% Lots more text, figures, tables and a bibliography
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+This document is causing the following error:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Runaway argument?
+{minexam is essential when encountering a \TeX \ or \LaTeX \^^Merror
+\ETC.
+! Paragraph ended before \\@gls was complete.
+<to be read again>
+                   \par
+\end{verbatim}
+Suppose you don't understand what the error is or whereabouts in the
+document it is occurring\footnote{Actually, in this example it
+should print the line number in the error message since \cs{gls} is a
+short command, but not all runaway argument errors give a helpful
+line number, so let's pretend it hasn't. }.
+
+Since you don't know what command is causing the problem, you can't
+use the approach illustrated in the previous section. So you will
+need to use the hacking down approach.
+
+Before doing anything else, \textbf{make a copy} of the problem document.
+Call the copy, say, \texttt{test.tex}, and only edit this. Don't start
+messing around with the original document until you've solved the
+problem, otherwise you could lose your work! 
+
+One way of tracking down the problem is to use a binary search.
+Suppose your document contains 1000 lines of source code, then go to
+line 500 of your test document (i.e.\ half-way through it) and insert
+the line\footnote{\LaTeX\ will finish the document when it reaches the
+first \cs{end}\texttt{\{document\}}, and ignore everything that comes after it.}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+(Make sure you don't put it inside a group or environment.)
+
+Now pass the test document to LaTeX. You may get some warning
+messages as a result of omitting half the document, but don't worry
+about that for now.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item If the error still occurs, then the problem is in the first
+half of the document. In which case, delete everything after the
+first \verb|\end{document}| (in your test file), and repeat the process. 
+
+ \item If the error goes away, then the problem is in the second
+half of the document. In which case, delete everything after
+\verb|\begin{document}| up to, and including, the first
+\verb|\end{document}| (in your test file), and repeat the process. 
+\end{itemize}
+
+Continue the process until you only have one paragraph left in your
+document. If this has an \cs{input} or \cs{include} command, first
+remove (or comment out) the command. If the problem goes away then
+the error is in that file, in which case replace the \cs{input} or
+\cs{include} command with the contents of the relevant file in your
+test file, and repeat the process. Once you have finished, it's a
+good idea to add \cs{listfiles}. 
+
+Let's suppose we now have a test file that looks like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\listfiles
+\documentclass{myuniversityscustomclass}
+
+\usepackage{nonstandardpackage}
+\usepackage{anothernonstandardpackage}
+% lots of other packages
+
+\usepackage{glossaries}
+
+% lots of your own command and environment definitions
+
+\newglossaryentry{minex}{name={Minimal Example},
+description={A small document illustrating failing behaviour},
+text={minimal example}}
+
+% lots more glossary definitions
+
+\begin{document}
+
+A \gls{minex is essential when encountering a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ 
+error you don't understand.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+It may be that you can now identify the problem, but let's suppose
+you still don't know what's wrong. The next thing to do is to remove
+unnecessary information in the preamble. If you have defined any
+commands or environments in the preamble that aren't used in the
+problem paragraph, then delete them. This includes any new theorems
+or glossary entries and so on. In this example, the problem
+paragraph contains a glossary entry, so keep the definition for that
+entry, and delete all the others: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\listfiles
+\documentclass{myuniversityscustomclass}
+
+\usepackage{nonstandardpackage}
+\usepackage{anothernonstandardpackage}
+% lots of other packages
+
+\usepackage{glossaries}
+
+\newglossaryentry{minex}{name={Minimal Example},
+description={A small document illustrating failing behaviour},
+text={minimal example}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+A \gls{minex is essential when encountering a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ 
+error you don't understand.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+Now, one by one, remove any packages that aren't contributing to the
+problem. Each time you remove a package, run the test file through
+\LaTeX. If the error goes away, then put the package back in. If
+removing a package causes an \qt{Undefined control sequence} error,
+then remove the undefined command as well. If the problem goes away,
+add the command and package back again. For example, if I remove the
+line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{glossaries}
+\end{verbatim}
+then I will get an error as neither \cs{newglossaryentry} nor
+\cs{gls} will be defined. If I remove those commands, the original
+error message will go away. So I have to leave those commands in and
+keep the glossaries package in the test file. 
+
+Next, try substituting the class file for the \cls{article} or
+\cls{report} class file. If the error goes away, then the original
+class file is contributing to the problem, in which case put it back
+again. If this class file is not publicly available (for example, it
+may be an in-house class file, such as a university thesis, which
+has restricted access) then contact the author of the class file,
+and send the test file and log file. (Remembering, of course, to
+first search the \htmlref{documentation}{sec:documentation}.)
+
+If you followed all of the above steps, then the test file should
+now look like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\listfiles
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{glossaries}
+
+\newglossaryentry{minex}{name={Minimal Example},
+description={A small document illustrating failing behaviour},
+text={minimal example}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+A \gls{minex is essential when encountering a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ 
+error you don't understand.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this example, you should now be able to work out that there is a
+missing closing brace to the argument of \cs{gls}. If, however, you
+still can't work out the problem, then (assuming that you've already
+read the \htmlref{documentation}{sec:documentation} and searched
+relevant forums or newsgroup archives) copy and paste the test file
+in a message to somewhere like \htmladdnormallink{\TeX\ on
+StackExchange}{http://tex.stackexchange.com/} or
+\htmladdnormallink{The \LaTeX\ Community}{http://www.latex-community.org/forum/}
+or \htmladdnormallink{comp.text.tex}{news:comp.text.tex}.
+
+\setnode{additionalfiles}
+\section{Additional Files}
+\label{sec:additionalfiles}
+
+You've tried \htmlref{building up}{sec:buildingup} or
+\htmlref{hacking down}{sec:hackingdown} a minimal example, but the
+problem is caused by an additional file which you can't copy and
+paste into the minimal example file, so what do you do? 
+
+If the file is a graphics file, replace the command with a rule of
+the same dimension. For example, if your image is 4in wide by 3in
+high, then replace: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics{myImage}
+\end{verbatim}
+with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\rule{4in}{3in}
+\end{verbatim}
+Alternatively, the \sty{mwe} package comes with some sample images
+that you can use instead. For example, you could replace
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics{myImage}
+\end{verbatim}
+with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics[height=3in]{example-image}
+\end{verbatim}
+(There are other test images provided by that package. See the
+\sty{mwe} documentation for further details.)
+
+If the file is a Bib\TeX\ file, then make a copy of the file, and
+remove the entries one by one until you are left with the entry that
+causes the problem. If the file is a CSV file, make a copy of the
+file, and remove the rows one by one until you are left with the
+problem row (but keep the header row if there is one.) You can then
+send this abridged file with the minimal example or you can embed it
+in the minimal example file using the \env{filecontents} or
+\env{filecontents*} environment\footnote{The starred form doesn't
+write extra comments in the file}. This environment takes one
+argument which must be the name of the file. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\begin{filecontents*}{test.bib}
+@article{sample,
+ author={Ann Other},
+ title={Sample Title},
+ journal={Journal of Something},
+ year=2014
+}
+\end{filecontents*}
+
+\begin{document}
+\cite{sample}
+
+\bibliography{test}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\setnode{dummytext}
+\section{Dummy Text}
+\label{sec:dummytext}
+
+Sometimes a problem may only occur at a certain place or after a
+certain point, in which case you may need to create some dummy text
+to pad out your example. If so, the \sty{lipsum} package is a useful tool.
+This provides the command \cs{lipsum} which has an optional argument
+that specifies the paragraph or the range of paragraphs to typeset. 
+
+For example, suppose you are using the \cls{book} class and you don't
+understand why the page number appears on the bottom of the first
+page of the chapter and at the top of the second page. Then you
+could illustrate this as follows: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{book}
+
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{Sample}
+
+\lipsum[1-4]
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will produce enough text to generate two pages. 
+
+There is another dummy text package called \sty{blindtext} that
+provides the commands \cs{blindtext} (for short blocks of text) and 
+\cs{Blindtext} (for longer blocks of text). For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{book}
+
+\usepackage{blindtext}
+
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{Sample}
+
+\Blindtext
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+The \sty{blindtext} package also provides other commands to provide
+a random document, dummy lists etc. See the \sty{blindtext}
+documentation for further details.
+
+\setnode{documentation}
+\section{Where Do I Find Package Documentation?}
+\label{sec:documentation}
+
+These days most package documentation is provided as a PDF file and,
+if it is installed on your system, it can usually be obtained using
+the \htmladdnormallink{texdoc
+application}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/texdoc.html}. 
+If you have a \htmladdnormallink{terminal or command
+prompt}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/terminal.html},
+you can access it by typing \texttt{texdoc} followed by the name of the
+package. For example, to obtain the documentation for the
+\sty{datetime} package run: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc datetime
+\end{verbatim}
+Sometimes this may produce just the documented code rather than the
+user manual. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc flowfram
+\end{verbatim}
+will display the documented code. However, in this instance, the
+first paragraph of that document tells you that the user manual is
+in \texttt{ffuserguide.pdf} in which case
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc ffuserguide
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce the user manual.
+
+In some cases (especially for older packages) the documentation may
+be contained in a \texttt{README} file in the documentation directory or it
+may be embedded as comments either at the start or the end of the
+\texttt{.sty} or \texttt{.cls} file. 
+
+Alternatively, if the documentation was not installed on your system,
+you can obtain it from \htmladdnormallink{CTAN}{http://ctan.org/}.
+You can either use the search box on the CTAN home page or you can use the URL
+\texttt{http://ctan.org/pkg/}\meta{name} where \meta{name} is the name of the package.
+For example, to obtain information on the \sty{glossaries} package, you
+can use the URL \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/glossaries} and it will
+provide links to the documentation for that package. 
+
+\setnode{errormessages}
+\section{Understanding Error Messages}
+\label{sec:errormessages}
+
+\TeX\ and \LaTeX\ error messages can be cryptic, but sometimes it's
+possible to at least find out where things have gone wrong by
+studying the message. 
+
+Consider the following document: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\newcommand{\example}[1]{#1}
+
+\begin{document}
+This is a sample document that contains a long 
+command \example{with an error.
+
+This is the next paragraph
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+This produces the following error message: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+Runaway argument?
+{with an error. \par This is the next paragraph \end {document}
+! File ended while scanning use of \example.
+<inserted text>
+                \par
+\end{verbatim}
+The first line (\qt{Runaway argument?}) indicates the type of error.
+A runaway argument is usually caused by a missing closing brace. The
+next line indicates where \TeX\ got up to before things started to
+go wrong. In this error message there is no line number but you can
+use the information that has been supplied to help you track where
+the error might be. Copy the first part of this line (say
+\verb|{with an error|) and paste it into your editor's search
+function. This should take you to the relevant line where you can
+see that there is no closing brace.
+
+Suppose, instead, the document looked like: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\newcommand*{\example}[1]{#1}
+
+\begin{document}
+This is a sample document that contains a short 
+command \example{with an error.
+
+This is the next paragraph
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this case the error message is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Runaway argument?
+{with an error.
+! Paragraph ended before \example was complete.
+<to be read again>
+                   \par
+l.8
+\end{verbatim}
+In this example, the error message includes the line number where
+things started to go wrong (l.8) so I can use my text editor's \qt{go
+to line} function. 
+
+Sometimes the line number given in the error message doesn't
+correspond to the line number where the error actually occurs. For
+example, consider the following document: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{report}
+
+\author{A.N. Author}
+\title{A sample document with a \badcommand}
+\date{14th November, 2008}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this document the error is an undefined command (\cs{badcommand})
+occurring on line~4. However, the error message is: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Undefined control sequence.
+\@title ->A sample document with a \badcommand
+
+l.8 \maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+which indicates that the problem occurs on line~8. This is because
+\TeX\ doesn't actually try to interpret \cs{badcommand} until line~8 when
+\cs{maketitle} tries to typeset the title page. 
+
+When this type of situation occurs, it may be necessary to do a
+little bit of detective work to try to trace the problem. In the
+above example, there are two methods to try: 
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The first line of the error message states the nature of the
+error (an undefined control sequence) and the second line indicates
+that the undefined control sequence is \cs{badcommand}. You can then use
+your text editor to search for any instances of \cs{badcommand} and
+replace it with the correct command. Alternatively, if you have
+forgotten to use a package that defines the command or, in the case
+of a custom command, you have forgotten to define the command, then
+do so. 
+
+\item The last line of the error message states that the problem was
+encountered on line~8 which contains the command \cs{maketitle}. What
+commands affect \cs{maketitle}? For the standard classes, such as
+report, these are: \cs{author}, \cs{title} and \cs{date}, so inspect the code
+where these commands are used. Try commenting out all but one of the
+commands and see if the error still occurs. For example, if I
+comment out the lines containing the title and date, the error goes
+away, but if I comment out the author and date instead, the error
+remains. This means that the error is in the title. 
+\end{enumerate}
+For further information on understanding error messages, see
+\htmladdnormallink{How
+to approach
+errors}{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=erroradvice} on the UK TeX FAQ. There is also a list of some
+\htmladdnormallink{common error
+messages}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/html/commonerrors.html}
+in the document \htmladdnormallink{LaTeX for Complete
+Novices}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/}
+which is available from the same site as this document. 
+
+\setnode{license}
+\section{GNU Free Documentation License}
+\input{../fdl}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/minexample.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/minexample.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9b9865bddae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/minexample/minexample.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+% This is the source code for "Creating a LaTeX minimal example"
+% It includes some code that was used to generate other formats of
+% this tutorial that aren't included in this distribution.
+\ProvidesPackage{minexample}
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+
+\newenvironment{result}%
+{\par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespaces}%
+{\par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newcommand\ps@online{
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{}
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{}
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\hfill
+   \Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}{Previous}
+   \Acrobatmenu{NextPage}{Next}
+   \Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}{First}
+   \Acrobatmenu{LastPage}{Last}
+   \Acrobatmenu{GoBack}{Back}
+   \Acrobatmenu{GoForward}{Forward}\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+\newcommand{\setonlineps}{%
+  \pagestyle{online}%
+  \let\ps@plain\ps@online
+  \let\ps@mpety\ps@online
+}
+
+\newif\ifonline
+
+% \casemedia{a4}{online}{html}
+\newcommand*{\casemedia}[3]{%
+  \ifonline
+    #2%
+  \else
+    #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\providecommand{\latexhtml}[2]{#1}
+
+\providecommand{\latex}[1]{#1}
+\providecommand{\html}[1]{}
+
+\newlength\imgHeight
+\newlength\maxImageHeight
+
+\setlength{\maxImageHeight}{0.8\textheight}
+
+\newlength\imgWidth
+\newlength\maxImageWidth
+\setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\textwidth}
+
+\define@key{Gin}{alt}{}
+
+\newcommand{\incGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+  \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+      \includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+     \includegraphics[#1]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newsavebox{\boxcontents}
+
+\newcommand*{\includeteximage}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+    \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+    \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+  \begingroup
+    \@tempswafalse
+    \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+    \toks@{\InputIfFileExists{#2}{}{\@warning{File `#1' not found}}}%
+    \setkeys{Gin}{#1}%
+    \Gin@esetsize
+    \sbox\boxcontents{\the\toks@}%
+    \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \settodepth{\@ff@tmp@y}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \addtolength{\imgHeight}{\@ff@tmp@y}%
+    \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+      \ifdim\maxImageHeight<\maxImageWidth\relax
+        \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+          \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \else
+          \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+       \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \usebox\boxcontents
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\incPgfOrGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \IfFileExists{#2}{\includeteximage[#1]{#2}}{\incGraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@html@nodename}{\jobname}
+\newcommand*{\setnode}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@html@nodename}{#1}}
+
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+\string\html{\string\gdef\string\newlabelxx
+\string#1\string#2\string#3\string#4\string#5\string#6{%
+\string\oldnewlabel{\string#1}{{\string#2}{\string#3}}%
+\string\sectionlabel{\string#1}{\string#4}}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\sectionref}[2][]{\htmlref{Section~\ref*{#2}}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand*{\qt}[1]{``#1''}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\meta}[1]{\textnormal{\ensuremath{\langle}\emph{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cls}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\env}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\htmladdnormallink}[2]{\href{#2}{#1}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/dickimaw-novices.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/dickimaw-novices.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b1ce901b1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/dickimaw-novices.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,11105 @@
+% This is part of the source code for "LaTeX for Complete Novices"
+% It includes some code that was used to generate other formats of
+% this tutorial that aren't included in this distribution. That code
+% will be skipped by the current class settings.
+
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: bibtex
+% arara: makeglossaries
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeglossaries
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeindex: { style: novices-index.ist }
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeindex: { style: novices-index.ist }
+% arara: pdflatex
+
+% Multiple pdflatex runs are required to ensure the flow frame switches occur
+% correctly before and after the summary and index
+\documentclass[report]{novices}
+
+\usepackage{fancybox}
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usetikzlibrary{shapes}
+\usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing}
+\usepackage{caption,subcaption}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage{alltt}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{amsfonts}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{rotating}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{pifont}
+
+\usepackage{cmap}
+
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[math]{anttor}
+\usepackage{libris}
+\renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{txtt}
+
+\newcommand*{\docdate}{\formatdate{25}{9}{2012}}
+
+\authordetails{1970}{Talbot}{Nicola L.~C.}
+\title[LaTeX for Complete Novices]{\LaTeX\ for Complete Novices}
+\version{1.4}
+\edition{1}
+\volume{1}
+\series{The Dickimaw \LaTeX\ Series}
+\seriesurl{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/}
+\affiliation
+ {Dickimaw Books}
+ {http://www.dickimaw-books.com/}
+ {Saxlingham Nethergate}
+\keywords{LaTeX,beginners,introduction,typesetting}
+\subject{LaTeX}
+\date{\docdate}
+
+\html{\input{htmlonly}}
+
+\makeindex
+\makeglossaries
+
+\input{keywords}
+\input{glsentries}
+
+\newacr{ctan}{CTAN}
+ {the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}
+ {http://mirror.ctan.org/}
+
+\newacr{tug}{TUG}%
+ {\TeX\ User Group}%
+ {http://tug.org/}
+
+\newacr{uktug}{UK TUG}%
+ {UK \TeX\ User Group}%
+ {http://uk.tug.org/}
+
+\newacr{ukfaq}{UK FAQ}%
+ {UK List of \TeX\ Frequently Asked Questions}%
+ {http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}
+
+\newacrx{tds}{TDS}{\TeX\ Directory Structure}
+
+\newacrnocite{gui}{GUI}{graphical user interface}
+
+\definecolor{midgray}{gray}{0.4}
+
+\indexpreamble{\latexhtml{Page numbers}{Locations} in \textit{italic} indicate the primary
+reference. \latexhtml{Page numbers}{Locations} in \textbf{bold} indicate the entry
+definition in the summary.}
+
+\newcommand{\xtableref}[1]{\objectref{Table}{#1}}
+
+% \figconts[graphics opts]{image}{caption}{label}
+\newcommand{\figconts}[4][]{%
+  \begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}\figuretop{#4}
+  \centering
+  \incPgfOrGraphics[#1]{#2}%
+  #3% caption
+  \label{#4}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\latexbook}{\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}~\cite{lamport94}}
+\newcommand{\latexcomp}{\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}~\cite{goossens94}}
+\newcommand{\latexguide}{\emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}~\cite{kopka95}}
+\newcommand{\latexgraphic}{\emph{The \LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}~\cite{goossens97}}
+\newcommand{\latexweb}{\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}~\cite{goossens99}}
+
+\newcommand{\baseurl}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com}
+\newcommand{\packageurl}{\baseurl/latex/packages}
+\newcommand{\exerciseurl}{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/exercises}
+
+\newcommand{\pderiv}[2]{\frac{\partial #1}{\partial #2}}
+\newcommand{\e}{\mathrm{e}}
+
+\newcommand{\koma}{KOMA-Script}
+
+\newcommand*{\backcovertext}{If you choose to buy a copy of this book, 
+Dickimaw Books asks for your support through buying the Dickimaw
+Books edition to help cover costs.}
+
+\copyrighttext{%
+  Copyright \textcopyright\ 2004  Nicola L.~C. Talbot
+
+  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+  document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+  Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+  Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
+  one Back-Cover Text: \dq{\backcovertext} A copy of the license is included in
+  the section entitled \htmlref{\dq{GNU Free Documentation
+  License}}{sec:fdl}.
+
+  \doifnotbook
+  {%
+     The base URL for this document is: \url{\baseurl/latex/novices/}
+  }%
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossaryname}{Summary}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\frontmatter
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\setnode{contents}
+\tableofcontents
+\setnode{listoffigures}
+\listoffigures
+\setnode{listoftables}
+\listoftables
+
+\setnode{listofexercises}
+\listofexercises
+
+\mainmatter
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INTRODUCTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{introduction}
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\label{ch:intro}
+
+The aim of this book is to introduce \LaTeX\ to a non-technical
+person.  \LaTeX\ is excellent for producing professional looking
+documents, however it is a \emph{language} not a word 
+processor\faq{Why is TeX not a WYSIWYG system?}{notWYSIWYG}, so
+it can take a bit of getting used to, particularly if you have never
+had any experience using programming languages.  
+
+\LaTeX\ does take a while to learn, so why should you use it? Here are
+a few reasons but it is not an exhaustive list:
+
+\LaTeX\ is far better at typesetting mathematical equations
+than word processors. I~wrote my Ph.D. thesis back in the days of
+\LaTeX2.09 (the old version of \LaTeX) and given the high quantity of
+mathematics that I~had to typeset, it would have taken me considerably
+longer to write it in a word processor, and the resulting document
+wouldn't have looked nearly as good. Even Microsoft have
+acknowledged \glsterm{tex}'s high-quality mathematical
+typography~\cite{sargentiii}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Here's an equation taken from some kernel survival analysis:
+\begin{result}[latexintromaths.html]
+\newcommand{\me}{\mathrm{e}}
+\newcommand{\pfrac}[2]{\frac{\partial #1}{\partial #2}}
+\[
+\pfrac{^2\mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =
+-\pfrac{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}\left(\pfrac{v_i}{\rho_i}\frac{\me^{v_i}}{1-\me^{v_i}}
++v_i\frac{\me^{v_i}\pfrac{v_i}{\rho_i}(1-\me^{v_i})+\me^{2v_i}\pfrac{v_i}{\rho_i}}{(1-\me^{v_i})^2}\right)
+\]
+\end{result}
+(You can find out how to create this equation \latexhtml{on
+page~\pageref{introeq} in \sectionref{sec:delimiters}}{\htmlref{later}{introeq}}.)
+
+That's all very well and good if you want to typeset some equations,
+but if your work doesn't involve maths, does that mean that \LaTeX\
+is not for you? Although I~am a mathematician, I~have written plenty
+of documents with no maths in at all, including prose, poetry,
+newsletters, posters and brochures, but I~still opt for \LaTeX\
+because using \LaTeX\ ensures consistent formatting, and the style
+of the document can be completely changed by simply using a
+different \glsterm{cls}, or loading additional \htmlref{packages}{sec:packages}. This
+means that I~can concentrate on writing the document, rather than
+worrying about how it will look. It also means that if, after having
+written a 200 page document, I~then find that I~need to change all
+the figure captions so that they are labelled \dq{Fig} instead of
+\dq{Figure}, all I~need to do is edit a single line, rather than
+going through 200 pages to individually edit every single figure
+caption.\footnote{Sure, you could use a search and replace function,
+but a sweeping replace-all can have unexpected side effects. For
+example, your document may include the sentence, \dq{Figures from
+the last quarter showed improvement}, which would get changed to,
+\dq{Figs from the last quarter showed improvement}.}
+
+Serious fiction writers are taught never to remind the reader that
+they're reading a book. Poor formatting is just as much a reminder
+of this as authorial intrusion.
+
+\LaTeX\ makes it very easy to cross-reference chapters, sections,
+equations, figures, tables etc, and it also makes it very easy to
+generate a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+index, glossary\footnote{Glossaries are covered in \latexthesis.}\ and 
+bibliography. You don't need to worry about numbering anything,
+as this is done automatically, which means that you can insert new
+sections or swap sections around without having to worry about
+updating all the section numbering etc. Furthermore, if you use
+\BiBTeX\footnote{Automating bibliographies is covered in
+\latexthesis.}\ in combination with \LaTeX, and you have, say, 100
+or more citations, it doesn't matter if you are then told that the
+citations have to be re-ordered (say, in order of citation rather
+than alphabetically). All that is required is a minor edit to change
+the appropriate style file rather than ploughing through the entire
+document changing all the citations by hand.
+
+When you are editing a document using a word processor, the
+word processor has to work out how to reformat the document every time
+you type something.  If you have a large document with a great many
+inserted objects (such as figures and equations), the response to
+keyboard input can become very slow.  You may find that after typing
+a few words you will have to wait until the computer catches up
+before you can see what you have typed.  With \LaTeX\ you type in your
+code using an ordinary text editor.  The document 
+doesn't get formatted until you pass it to \LaTeX, which means that 
+you are not slowed down by constant reformatting.
+
+Lastly, there's the fact that \LaTeX\ follows certain typographical
+rules, so you can leave most of the typesetting to \LaTeX. You
+rarely need to worry about minor things such as
+\glstext{intersentencespacing}. The default is English spacing, but
+if you have a publisher who disapproves of this, you can switch if
+off with a single command. (See \sectionref{sec:intersentencespacing}.)
+
+\LaTeX\ will also automatically deal with
+f-ligatures.\footnote{Ligatures can be suppressed using the
+\isty{microtype} package if necessary} That is, if any of the
+following combination of letters are found: \texttt{fl},
+\texttt{ffl}, \texttt{ff}, \texttt{fi}, \texttt{ffi}, they will
+automatically be converted into the corresponding ligatures:
+% Using CMR as the ligatures are more noticeable than with anttor.
+% make latex2html convert this text into an image
+\makeimg{fl ligature}{\cmr{fl}},
+\makeimg{ffl ligature}{\cmr{ffl}},
+\makeimg{ff ligature}{\cmr{ff}},
+\makeimg{fi ligature}{\cmr{fi}},
+\makeimg{ffi ligature}{\cmr{ffi}}.
+  Note the difference between
+\makeimg{fl-ligature u ffi-ligature e r}{\cmr{fluffier}} (2
+ligatures) and \makeimg{fluffier}{\cmr{f{}l{}uf{}f{}i{}er}} (no ligatures).  These
+points may seem minor but they all contribute towards the impact of
+the entire document.  When writing technical documents, the
+presentation as well as the content is important.  All too often
+examiners or referees are put off reading a document because it is
+badly formatted.  This provokes an immediate negative reaction and
+provides little desire to look favourably upon your work.
+
+To give you an idea of what you can do with \LaTeX, this book was
+written in \LaTeX.\footnote{The source code is available at
+\url{\baseurl/latex/novices/}, but it really is
+\emph{not} the place to start if you are a beginner, as it contains
+\LaTeX\ and \glsterm{perl} code beyond the scope of this tutorial.}  The PDF
+versions (including \ifbookorother{this}{the} paperback version) were generated using PDF\LaTeX\ and \appname{makeindex} and
+the HTML version was generated using the
+\latexhtml
+ {\LaTeX2HTML\footnote{\url{http://www.latex2html.org/}}}%
+ {\htmladdnormallink{\LaTeX2HTML}{http://www.latex2html.org/}}%
+\faq{Conversion from (La)TeX to HTML}{LaTeX2HTML} converter. 
+
+For more reasons as to why you might want to use \LaTeX\ instead
+of a word processor, have a look at
+\ifbookorother
+  {\url{http://www.ctan.org/what_is_tex.html\#whytex}.}%
+  {\htmladdnormallink{Why TeX?}{http://www.ctan.org/what_is_tex.html\#whytex}}
+
+\setnode{texdoc}
+\section{Class and Package Documentation}
+\label{sec:texdoc}
+
+There are hundreds of \htmlref{classes}{sec:cls} and
+\htmlref{packages}{sec:packages} available on \gls{ctan}. These are
+made available by many volunteers. Some provide detailed
+documentation to accompany their contribution, while others only
+provide a few notes in a README file or comments in the source
+files. This book only provides an introductory
+look at a small selection of these contributions. If you want
+further details on how to use a particular class or package you
+should check the documentation that accompanies it. You can use the
+\iappname{texdoc} application to search for the documentation. This
+is a command line application, which means you need a terminal or
+command prompt (see \sectionref{sec:terminal}).
+
+To use \appname{texdoc}, you need to
+type (at the command prompt) \appname{texdoc} followed by a space followed by the name of
+the class or package you want information about. 
+For example, to read the \icls{memoir}
+documentation, type the following at the \htmlref{command prompt}{sec:terminal} (press the
+return/enter key \enter\ at the end of the line):
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc memoir
+\end{verbatim}
+Some packages come with more than one set of documentation. For
+example, the \isty{glossaries} package comes with the main user
+manual, a short guide for beginners and the documented code for
+advanced users. Just doing
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc glossaries
+\end{verbatim}
+will display the advanced documented code. To list all available
+documentation for a package, use the \texttt{-l} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc -l glossaries
+\end{verbatim}
+Then type the number corresponding to the file you want to view. If
+you can remember the file name (for example \texttt{glossaries-user}) 
+you can type that next time you want to view it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc glossaries-user
+\end{verbatim}
+There is also a \glsterm{perl}/Tk-based \gls{gui} called \iappname{texdoctk},
+which is distributed with \texdistro{TeX~Live},
+that you can use instead of \appname{texdoc} if you can't work out
+how to use a \glsterm{terminal} or prefer a \gls*{gui} approach.
+
+Failing that, you can also check on \gls{ctan} using the URL
+\texttt{ctan.org\slash pkg\slash}\meta{name}, where \meta{name} is the name of
+the package or class. For example, if you want to look up the
+documentation for the \icls{memoir} package, you can find it at
+\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/memoir} or go to
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/} and search for the package or class.
+
+Another alternative recently made available is to use the URL
+\texttt{texdoc.net\slash pkg\slash}\meta{name}. For example, 
+\url{http://texdoc.net/pkg/memoir} will 
+fetch the documentation for the \icls{memoir} class.
+
+However, it's better to use \appname{texdoc} or \appname{texdoctk} to 
+read the documentation installed with the
+class or package on your computer to ensure it
+matches the installed class or package version.
+
+Note that it is important to remember that the \glsterm{tex} world is mostly
+supported by volunteers. \gls{ctan} itself is maintained by a very small
+group (currently two people). It's not like a commercial company
+with 24/7 support and hundreds of paid employees constantly updating
+the software. At its core, \TeX\ is a community effort. While some
+volunteers actively maintain and update their classes or packages,
+some people move on to other things and stop maintaining their work.
+Occasionally, if the class or package is popular, someone else
+might take over maintenance. There is no dedicated helpdesk to go
+to, but there are many ways of getting help, see
+\appendixref{ch:help}
+
+\setnode{overview}
+\section{Overview}
+
+This document is structured as follows:
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:def}]
+defines terms that will be used throughout this document.  I
+strongly suggest that you look through this
+\latexhtml{chapter}{section} before you start so that you understand
+the terminology used in this document. At the very least, you should
+read the first part that details how corresponding input and output
+is displayed in this document\dash you need to understand the
+difference between \dq{input} (source code) and \dq{output} (how the
+source code will appear in the typeset document).\html{ Note that it
+is not always possible to reproduce an exact replica of the output
+in the HTML version, so if in doubt, look at one of the PDF versions
+instead, which can be downloaded from this 
+book's \htmladdnormallink{home page}{../index.html}.}
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:tex2pdf}] details the software that you will
+need to use \LaTeX\ and describes how to use the software.
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:simpledoc}] shows you how to create a very
+basic document.  
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:sections}] 
+shows you how to create chapters and other sectional units so that
+you end up with a fully structured document.
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:graphicx}]
+shows you how to include external image files and how to scale and
+rotate text.
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:floats}]
+describes how to create figures and tables.
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:newcom}]
+describes how to define your own commands, and redefine existing
+commands.
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:maths}] describes how
+to typeset mathematics.  
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:newenv}] describes how to define new
+environments.  
+
+\item[\chapterref{ch:counters}]
+discusses how numbers are stored in counters, how to change their
+values, and how to define your own counter.
+
+\item[\appendixref{ch:installsty}] shows you how
+to download and install additional
+packages that weren't installed with your \TeX\ distribution.
+
+\item[\appendixref{ch:errors}]
+documents possible errors you may encounter, and gives advice on how
+to fix them.
+
+\item[\appendixref{ch:help}] gives pointers on where to go for help.
+
+\end{description}
+
+Throughout this document there are pointers to related topics
+in the \gls{ukfaq}.
+\latexhtml{These are displayed in the margin in
+square brackets, as illustrated on the 
+\ifbookorother{\ifthispageodd{right}{left}}{right}.}{%
+These are displayed in the text like this:}%
+\faq{What is LaTeX?}{latex} You may find these resources useful in
+answering related questions that are not covered in this 
+book.
+\begin{latexonly}
+\doifbook{%
+  To find the resources, go to \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq} and
+  either look for the question title in the list, or enter a keyword
+  in the search field.%
+}
+
+This book and associated files, including  
+solutions to the exercises, are available on-line at:
+\url{\baseurl/latex/novices/}. 
+\doifnotbook
+{%
+  The links in this document are colour-coded: internal links are 
+  blue, external links are magenta.
+}%
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\setnode{reading}
+\section{Recommended Reading}
+
+This document is designed as an introductory text, not a
+comprehensive guide.  For further reading try some of the
+following\faq{Books on LaTeX}{latex-books}:
+
+\latexbook\ is the user guide and reference manual for \LaTeX, and
+is a good basic text for anyone starting out, however it doesn't
+cover AMS\TeX\faq{What are the AMS packages?}{AMSpkg}, so anyone who
+needs to typeset more than basic mathematics may prefer either
+\latexguide\ or \latexcomp.  Both these books cover AMS\TeX,
+\iBiBTeX\ and \appname{makeindex}.
+
+In the same series as \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}, there is also 
+\latexgraphic\ which details how to illustrate
+documents with \LaTeX\ and PostScript, including a chapter on colour
+(coloured text, background, tables and slides).  This is recommended
+to anyone who is contemplating heavy use of graphics, but you do need
+a basic knowledge of \LaTeX\ before delving into it.  
+
+The final book in the \dq{Companion} series which you may find useful
+is \latexweb. This is recommended for those interested in creating
+documents for the web, either as HTML or PDF.  It details how
+to convert \LaTeX\ documents into HTML using various applications
+such as \appname{LaTeX2HTML} and \appname{TeX4ht}, and how to create
+PDF documents using \iPDFLaTeX\faq{What is PDFTeX?}{whatpdftex},
+including how to create active links within your document using the
+\isty{hyperref} package.
+
+There are two new \LaTeX\ books that I haven't read but have
+been recommended to me: \emph{\LaTeX\ Beginner's
+Guide}~\cite{kottwitz} and \emph{\LaTeX\ and
+Friends}~\cite{vandongen}.
+
+Note that the \gls{uktug} has a 25\% book discount scheme
+for members. See \url{http://uk.tug.org/membership} for more details
+of that and other associated benefits. If you're not in the
+UK, have a look at \url{http://www.tug.org/usergroups.html} to see
+if there is a local user group in your area.
+
+There is also a wealth of \LaTeX-related information on the
+Internet\faq{How to get help}{gethelp}. \reportlinebreak\Gls{ctan} is a good place
+to start. You can check the on-line catalogue~\cite{texcat} for
+information about available software and, as mentioned earlier, there is also the list of
+\htmladdnormallink{frequently asked
+questions}{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq} which I~recommend you try if
+you have any queries. See also \appendixref{ch:help}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DEFINITIONS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{definitions}
+\printkeywords
+\html{\input{novices.hkls}}
+
+
+\glsaddall[types=keywords]
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SOURCE TO PDF %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{fromsource2output}
+\chapter{From Source Code to Typeset Output}
+\label{ch:tex2pdf}
+
+Every time you want to create or edit a \LaTeX\ document, there are three
+basic steps you will always need to follow:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item\label{itm:step1} Write or edit the \gls{source}.
+
+\item\label{itm:step2} Pass the source code to the \iappname{latex} or \iappname{pdflatex} application (\dq{\LaTeX\ the document}).
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If there are any error messages, return to \objectref{Step}{itm:step1}.
+\item If there are no error messages, a 
+\glslink{output}{PDF file}\indexPDF\ is created.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item\label{itm:step3} View the \glslink{output}{PDF file} to check
+the result.  If you need to modify your document, go back to
+\objectref{Step}{itm:step1}. 
+\end{enumerate}
+
+You will therefore need:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item A text editor  (to perform \objectref{Step}{itm:step1}). For
+example \iappnamelink[,]{Vim}{http://www.vim.org/} 
+\iappnamelink{Emacs}{http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/} or
+\iappnamelink[.]{Gedit}{http://projects.gnome.org/gedit/}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:MiKTeX}%
+\item The \gls{tex} software\faq{(La)TeX for different
+machines}{TeXsystems} (to perform \objectref{Step}{itm:step2}). If
+you don't already have \TeX\ on your machine, you will need to
+install it. The most convenient way to do this is
+to install from the \TeX\ Collection DVD ROM, which is distributed
+to all \gls{tug} members, but you can also download and install free
+\TeX\ distributions, such as \itexdistro{TeX~Live},
+\itexdistro{MiKTeX} or \itexdistro{MacTeX}, from the Internet (see
+\xpageref{below}{obj:install}).  There is also \itexdistro{proTeXt},
+an enhancement of \texdistro{MiKTeX} that aims to be an
+easy-to-install \TeX\ Distribution.  For more information including
+up-to-date links, go to \url{http://www.ctan.org/starter.html}.
+
+\item A PDF viewer (to perform
+\objectref{Step}{itm:step3}). For example 
+\iappnamelink[,]{Adobe Reader}{http://www.adobe.com/} 
+\iappnamelink[,]{Sumatra}{http://blog.kowalczyk.info/software/sumatrapdf/free-pdf-reader.html}
+\iappnamelink{Evince}{http://projects.gnome.org/evince/} or
+\iappnamelink[.]{Okular}{http://okular.kde.org/}
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+This can be rather complicated for a beginner, especially for those
+with no experience writing computer code. Fortunately, there are
+some all-in-one applications (often called a \keyword{front-end})
+that provide a text editor (for \objectref{Step}{itm:step1}),
+buttons or menu items to run the \appname{latex} or
+\appname{pdflatex} \glslink{terminal}{command-line application} (for
+\objectref{Step}{itm:step2}) and, in some cases, a viewer to perform
+\objectref{Step}{itm:step3}.
+
+\sectionref[The next section]{sec:texworks} describes one such front-end called
+\iappnamelink[.]{TeXWorks}{http://www.tug.org/texworks/} I~have chosen
+to describe TeXWorks because it is a free, cross-platform
+application. Binaries are available for Microsoft Windows, Mac~OS~X
+and GNU/Linux. The screen shots of TeXWorks in this
+book were taken from the Linux version running
+under Fedora. If you run TeXWorks on other operating systems, it may
+have a slightly different look, but it has the same functionality.
+
+New versions of \texdistro{TeX~Live} and \texdistro{MiKTeX} include TeXWorks for MS~Windows,
+and new versions of \texdistro{MacTeX} include TeXWorks for Mac~OS~X users.
+GNU/Linux users can use their Add\slash Remove Software utility to 
+install TeXWorks. Alternatively, you can download TeXWorks by
+following the links provided at \url{http://www.tug.org/texworks/}.
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:install}%
+If you're confused by all the options, let's keep
+things as simple as possible:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item MS~Windows:
+
+ You have a choice between \texdistro{MiKTeX} (or \texdistro{proTeXt}) and 
+ \texdistro{TeX~Live}. \texdistro{MiKTeX} provides a
+ smaller and quicker installation, but the downside is that you may
+ not have the classes or packages you want to use. \texdistro{MiKTeX} can
+ install these whenever you try to \LaTeX\ a document that uses them, 
+ but you need an Internet connection while it does this. 
+ \texdistro{TeX~Live} installs everything, so it takes longer and needs 
+ more space, but you should have the majority of packages and classes that you need.
+
+ \begin{description}
+
+   \item[TeX~Live:]\mbox{}
+
+   \begin{enumerate}
+    \item Fetch and unpack
+     \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip}
+
+    \item Run \iappname{install-tl} and follow the instructions.
+     This can take an hour or more.
+   \end{enumerate}
+
+   \item[proTeXt:]\mbox{}
+
+   \begin{enumerate}
+    \item Go to \url{http://tug.org/protext/}
+
+    \item Click on the \dq{download the self-extract protext.exe} link
+     to download and run the executable.
+   \end{enumerate}
+
+   \item[MiKTeX:]\mbox{}
+
+   \begin{enumerate}
+    \item Go to \url{http://www.miktex.org/}
+
+    \item In the left-hand panel, there is a link to the download page
+     for the latest version. At time of writing, it is \texdistro{MiKTeX}~2.9.
+     Click on that link.
+
+    \item Scroll down to the section \dq{Installing a basic
+      \texdistro{MiKTeX} system}.
+
+    \item If you're happy with the selected mirror location, click on the 
+      \dq{Download} button.
+
+    \item Run the executable.
+   \end{enumerate}
+ \end{description}
+
+\item Mac~OS~X:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+  \item Go to \url{http://tug.org/mactex/}
+
+  \item Follow the instructions on that page.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+\item GNU/Linux:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+  \item Fetch and unpack
+    \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz}
+
+  \item Follow the instructions at
+    \url{http://tug.org/texlive/quickinstall.html}
+
+  \item Once \texdistro{TeX~Live} has finished installing, run your
+   system's \dq{Add\slash Remove Software} tool.
+
+  \item Find \dq{texworks}, select the newest version and install.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+If you run into problems, there are mailing lists at
+\url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/tex-live} and
+\url{http://docs.miktex.org/manual/lists.html} for
+\itexdistro{TeX~Live} and \itexdistro{MiKTeX}, and
+\itexdistro{MacTeX} help at \url{http://www.tug.org/mactex/help/}.
+There is also a list of places where you can ask for help in
+\appendixref{ch:help}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% TeXWorks %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{texworks}
+\section{TeXWorks}
+\label{sec:texworks}
+
+Hopefully you've managed to successfully install \gls{tex} and TeXWorks as
+described \latexhtml{above}{in the \htmlref{previous
+section}{ch:tex2pdf}}, so let's test it out.
+
+First run TeXWorks. On Windows, you can access it via the
+\menu{Start} menu. On GNU/Linux, it's probably located in
+\menu{Applications}\menuto\menu{Office}, or you can type
+\iappname{texworks} in a \gls{terminal}. You should now see the TeXWorks
+window. The button marked
+with a grey triangle in a green circle is the build or typeset function. It
+runs the application in the drop-down list next to it. This is set to
+pdfLaTeX, which is what we want for now.
+
+It's a good idea to switch on the syntax highlighting, if it isn't
+already on. This is done via the \menu{Format}\menuto\menu{Syntax
+Coloring} sub-menu. Make sure the \menu{LaTeX} item is selected.
+
+Next, type in the following sample source code, as shown in \figureref{fig:texworks2}
+(the commands used here will be described in more detail in
+\chapterref{ch:simpledoc}):
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{scrartcl}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+This is an example document.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+\textbf{Pay close attention to the backslashes at the start of each
+command name.} If you find the font is a bit too small for you,
+you can make it larger using the \menu{Format}\menuto\menu{Font} menu item.
+\emph{This doesn't affect the font size in your PDF file, just the
+font size of your code.} This displays the \dq{Select Font} dialog
+box. Set the font size as appropriate.
+
+Then save the document, using the
+\menu{File}\menuto\menu{Save As} menu item. I~called my document
+\texttt{example1.tex} (remember the \texttt{.tex} extension and
+stick to file names that only consist of alphabetical characters,
+digits and hyphens\dash don't uses spaces or underscores).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks2}
+  {%
+    \caption[Source Code for an Example Document]{Source Code for an 
+     Example Document. (Syntax highlighting switched on.)}%
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks2}
+\end{figure}
+
+Now that you have saved the file, you can run pdfLaTeX. Make sure
+the drop-down list next to the build button has \dq{pdfLaTeX}
+selected and click on the build button. If all goes well, a new
+window should open displaying the typeset document
+(\figureref{fig:texworks3}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks3}
+  {%
+    \caption{The Typeset Document}
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks3}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks4}
+  {%
+    \caption{The Source Code Has a Misspelt Command}
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks4}
+\end{figure}
+
+Now let's see what happens if there is an error in the source code.
+In \figureref{fig:texworks4} I~have misspelt the
+\glsni{documentclass} command. This time, when I~click on the
+build button, I~get the error message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Undefined control sequence.
+l.1 \documentclas
+                 {scrartcl}
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+(Shown in \figureref{fig:texworks5}.)
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks5-annote}
+  {%
+     \caption{An Error Message is Displayed}%
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks5}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+Here \dq{Undefined control sequence} means an unrecognised command,
+and below that message, \dq{\texttt{l.1}} means the error was encountered on
+line~1. An input line at the bottom of the window has appeared with a
+cursor. \LaTeX\ is in interactive mode
+and is awaiting a response. There are several responses, but I'm
+only going to mention two of them:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Type \texttt{h} and press the Return/Enter key \enter. This displays
+a short help message and awaits a new response (see
+\figureref{fig:texworks6}).
+
+\item Type \texttt{x} and press Return/Enter. This aborts the
+\LaTeX\ run.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Notice that the green circle button with the grey triangle has turned
+into a red stop button. This button can be used to abort the
+process instead of typing \texttt{x}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks6}
+  {%
+    \caption{A Short Help Message}%
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks6}
+\end{figure}
+
+Now, there is a second tab at the bottom of the TeXWork's window
+(\figureref{fig:texworks7}). This lists the error message and
+provides a link to the line where the error occurred. Clicking on
+this link highlights line~1. Next I~need to fix the error by
+correcting the spelling of the command. Once it's fixed, I~can click
+on the build button.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks7}
+  {%
+    \caption{Error Tab}%
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks7}
+\end{figure}
+
+Here's another error you might encounter: I'm now going to misspell
+the class name. It should be \texttt{scrartcl}, but in
+\figureref{fig:texworks8} it has been misspelt. This time, when I
+click on the build button, I~get the error:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! LaTeX Error: File `scrartc.cls' not found.
+\end{verbatim}
+I~have two choices: type in the correct name on the line below
+\dq{Enter file name:} or I~can abort the process using the red abort
+button. In either case I~need to go back and fix the error in my
+code.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks8}
+  {%
+   \caption{Misspelt Class File}%
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks8}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%% CREATING A SIMPLE DOCUMENT %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{simpledoc}
+\chapter{Creating a Simple Document}
+\label{ch:simpledoc}
+
+Having installed and tested the software, let's now look at how to
+actually write the \gls{source}.  The very first line of any document that you create must have
+the \gls{command}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{\meta{option-list}}\marg{\meta{class-name}}
+\end{definition}%
+This tells \LaTeX\ what type of document you want to create
+(for example an article, a technical report or correspondence).  The
+\glsni{documentclass} command takes one \gls{mandatory}, \meta{class-name},
+that specifies the \gls{cls}.
+
+There are many class files available, and some publishers,
+institutions or journals provide their own custom classes (for
+example, the \icls{jmlr} class for the Journal of Machine Learning
+Research). Popular classes include \icls{memoir} (for books and
+reports) and those supplied in the \koma\ bundle (for books,
+reports, articles and correspondence). There's also \icls{beamer}
+(for presentations) as well as classes for typesetting exams,
+flashcards, concert programmes etc. For simplicity, this
+book will concentrate on three of the
+\koma\ classes \icls{scrartcl} (for articles), \icls{scrreprt}
+(for technical reports, theses etc) and \icls{scrbook} (for books).
+
+We'll start with a very simple document, so let's use the
+\icls{scrartcl} class file.  In this case the very first line of the
+\gls{source} should be:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+The \glsni{documentclass} command also takes an 
+\gls{optional}, \meta{option-list},
+which should be a comma separated list of options to be passed to the
+class file.  This allows you to override the class file defaults.
+For example, the \icls{scrartcl} class file by default uses A4 
+paper, but if you are in the USA you will probably want to use
+letter paper.  This can be achieved
+using the option \clsopt{letterpaper}.  So you would need to edit the
+above line to:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{letterpaper}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:sizeopt}%
+Let's change another option.  The normal font size is \clsopt{11pt}
+by default, but we have the option to change it, so let's use
+\clsopt{12pt}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{letterpaper,12pt}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+You can also change your document so that it is in a two-column
+format using the \clsopt{twocolumn} option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{letterpaper,12pt,twocolumn}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+
+After deciding what type of document you want, you now need to specify
+the contents of the document.  This is done inside the \gls{env-document}
+\gls{environment}.  The document is started with the
+command:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{codeS}
+and ended with
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{codeS}
+(\LaTeX\ stops reading the file when it reaches the above line, so
+anything occurring after it is ignored.)
+
+My \gls{source} now looks like:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{documentclass}[12pt]\marg{scrartcl}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{code}
+Every document you create must have this form.  You can't simply
+start typing the document text.  You must first specify
+your class file\indexCLS, and then place the contents of the document
+inside the \glsni{env-document} environment.\screenpagebreak
+
+So far so good, but at the moment we have an empty document, so we
+won't get any output.  Let's now put some text into our document:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+This is a simple document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+
+Here is the second paragraph. As you
+can       see it's 
+a rather 
+short paragraph, but not as short as the previous one.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Top Five Mistakes Made by New Users}
+I first started teaching \LaTeX\ in 1998, and these are the most
+common errors I've seen when people start learning \LaTeX:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Missing out the backslash \glsni{backslashchar} at the start
+of one or more of the \glspl{command}.
+
+\item Using a forward slash \glsni{slashchar} instead of a backslash
+\glsni{backslashchar}.
+
+\item Forgetting \texttt{\glsni{end}\marg{document}}.
+
+\item Misspelling \dq{document} (in
+\texttt{\glsni{begin}\marg{document}} and
+\texttt{\glsni{end}\marg{document}}).
+
+\item Missing a closing brace \glsni{rightbracechar}.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+If you encounter any problems when you start out, go through that check list first.
+Then check \appendixref{ch:errors}.
+
+Whenever you start a new document, always type in the
+\glsni{documentclass}, \texttt{\glsni{begin}\marg{document}} and
+\texttt{\glsni{end}\marg{document}} commands first
+(\figureref{fig:newdoc-1}). Then move your cursor between the
+\glsni{begin} and \glsni{end} lines and type the document text
+(\figureref{fig:newdoc-2}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/newdoc-1}
+  {%
+    \caption[Starting a New Document (1)]{Starting a New Document: 
+    always type these three lines first.}%
+  }%
+  {fig:newdoc-1}
+
+\ifscreenorother
+{%
+  \end{figure}
+  \begin{figure}[htbp]
+}%
+{%
+  \strut
+}
+
+\figconts
+  {pictures/newdoc-2}
+  {%
+    \caption[Starting a New Document (2)]{Starting a New Document: 
+     move the cursor inside the \glsni{env-document} environment and 
+     start typing the document text.}%
+  }%
+  {fig:newdoc-2}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Simple Document}{ex:simpledoc}
+
+Try typing the code in the above example into TeXWorks or the editor
+of your choice (see \chapterref[the previous section]{ch:tex2pdf} if
+you can't remember what to do.) You can also \download{simpledoc} a
+copy of this file, but I~recommend that you try typing it in to give
+yourself some practice.
+
+Things to note while you are typing: firstly, when you press the
+return character at the end of a line this end-of-line character is
+converted into a space in the \gls{output}.  So the
+fact that I~have some very ragged lines in my \gls{source} has
+no effect on the final result. (Note that some front-ends will 
+reformat your lines as you type.) Whereas a completely blank line
+will be converted into a paragraph break (\gls{par} has the same
+effect).
+
+Secondly, multiple \Index{spaces} are converted into a single space,
+so the large gap between the words \dq{\texttt{can}} and \dq{\texttt{see}} is
+no different from having a single space.
+
+Once you have typed up your \gls{source}, save your file 
+(called, for example, \texttt{exercise1.tex}), and run PDF\LaTeX\ as described in 
+\sectionref{sec:texworks}. If all goes well, TeXWorks should display
+the resulting PDF file in a new window, usually alongside the window
+containing the source code.
+
+\xminisec{Notes:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Each paragraph automatically starts with an indentation in the
+PDF.
+
+\item There is no blank line between the paragraphs in the PDF
+document. (See what happens if you add the \koma\ class option
+\scrclsopt[full]{parskip}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt,parskip=full}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+and rebuild the PDF.)
+
+\item Move the mouse over one of paragraphs in the PDF viewer and
+pop-up the context menu (usually a right mouse click). Select
+\menu{Jump to Source}. The window containing the source code should
+now gain the focus and the line of code matching the typeset line you clicked on
+in the PDF should now be highlighted.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Simple Commands %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{simplecommands}
+\section{Using Simple Commands}
+\label{sec:simple}
+
+\faq{Typesetting all those TeX-related logos}{logos}Now let's try
+adding a few simple \glspl{command} to our
+document. The command \gls{LaTeX} produces the
+\makeimg{ALT=LaTeX}{\LaTeX} logo and the command \gls{today} prints
+the current date. \LaTeX\ always ignores any spaces that follow a
+command name that consists of letters, as it uses the space to
+indicate the end of the command name. This means that if we want a
+space to occur immediately after the command, we need to explicitly
+say so using the command \gls{spacesym} (recall from
+\ifscreenorother{\htmlref{earlier}{obj:visiblespace}}{page~\pageref{obj:visiblespace}}
+\gls{visiblespace} indicates a space character). So, for example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}logo
+\end{codeS}%
+produces the output:
+\begin{resultS}[LaTeX logo]
+\LaTeX\ logo
+\end{resultS}%
+Some people when starting out can get a bit confused by this and
+read it as the entity \dq{\cmdname{LaTeX}\cmdname{}} whereas it is
+in fact two commands: \dq{\cmdname{LaTeX}} (print the \LaTeX\ logo)
+followed \dq{\cmdname{\ }} (print a space.)
+
+Let's also try using a command that takes an 
+\gls{argument}.  The command 
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{footnote}\refstepcounter{object}\label{cmd:footnote}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+takes one argument that specifies the text that should
+appear in the footnote.  This command must be placed where you want
+the footnote marker to appear.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Using Simple Commands}{ex:simple}
+
+Edit the document you created in \exerciseref{ex:simpledoc},
+so that it looks like the following: (You can \download{simple} it if
+you like, but again it is better if you try typing it in yourself.)
+\begin{bcode}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrartcl}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.
+Here is the first paragraph.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}. 
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not 
+as short as the previous one. This document was 
+created on: \glsni{today}.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{bcode}
+
+Now \htmlref{\LaTeX\ your document}{ch:tex2pdf} and view the result.
+(Remember to check \appendixref{ch:errors}
+if you have a problem.) You should see the \LaTeX\ logo, the footnote
+marker and the current date.  If you scroll down to the bottom of the
+page, you should see the footnote.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PACKAGES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{packages}
+\section{Packages}
+\label{sec:packages}
+
+Packages\indexSTY\ are files with the extension \texttt{.sty} that
+either define new \glspl{command} or redefine
+existing commands\faq{What are LaTeX classes and packages?}{clsvpkg}.
+They're like a type of add-on or plug-in. Most of the commonly used
+packages should have been installed when you installed your \gls{tex}
+distribution (see \chapterref{ch:tex2pdf}).
+\appendixref{ch:installsty} covers how to install new packages.
+Most packages come with documentation that can be accessed using the
+\iappname{texdoc} application described in \sectionref{sec:texdoc}.
+
+Packages are loaded in the \gls{preamble} (after
+\gls{documentclass} and before \glsni{begin}\marg{document}) using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{usepackage}\oarg{\meta{option list}}\marg{\meta{package}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{package} is the name of the package and \meta{option
+list} is a list of comma-separated options. For example, to load the
+package \isty{graphicx} with the \istyopt{graphicx}{draft} option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{draft}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{codeS}
+Any applicable class options are also passed to packages, so in
+\begin{code}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{draft}\marg{scrartcl}\newline
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{code}
+the \clsopt{draft} option is set for both the \icls{scrartcl} class
+and the \isty{graphicx} package.
+
+You can specify more than one package in the argument of
+\glsni{usepackage}, where each package name is separated by a
+comma. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{amsmath,amsfonts}
+\end{codeS}
+The \isty{graphicx} package is covered in \chapterref{ch:graphicx}
+and the \isty{amsmath} package is covered in \chapterref{ch:maths},
+so let's start out with a~relatively simple example.
+
+\setnode{datetime}
+\subsection{Changing the Format of
+\latexhtml{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cmdname{today}}{\protect\textbackslash
+today}}{\protect\cmdname{today}}}
+\label{sec:today}
+
+In the \htmlref{previous exercise}{ex:simple}, we used the
+\gls{today} command to produce the current date. By default, this
+command displays the date in US format. To illustrate how to use
+packages, this section will look at how to use the \isty{datetime}
+package to change the way that \gls{today} displays the date.
+
+The \isty{datetime} package has various options that can be used to
+change the format of \gls{today}.  For example, by default the
+\isty{datetime} package redefines \gls{today} to display the
+date in the form: {\showdowtrue\longdate
+\renewcommand{\fmtord}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}\docdate}. The option
+\istyopt{datetime}{short} will produce an abbreviated form, (for
+example {\shortdate\docdate}) and the option \istyopt{datetime}{nodayofweek}
+won't display the day of the week (for example
+{\showdowfalse\docdate}).
+For those who don't like the raised ordinal, there is the
+\istyopt{datetime}{level} option.
+These can be passed as a comma separated list in the
+\gls{optional} to the
+\gls{usepackage} command.  It is also possible to use a
+declaration instead. For example, to redefine \gls{today} to
+display the date in the form {\ddmmyyyydate\docdate}, you can either do
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{ddmmyyyy}\marg{datetime}
+\end{codeS}%
+or
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+\gls{ddmmyyyydate}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+The \isty{datetime} package also defines the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{currenttime}
+\end{definition}
+which displays the current time, where again
+the format can be changed by the package options. So the option
+\istyopt{datetime}{12hr} will cause \glsni{currenttime} to display
+the date in 12 hour format (for example, \ampmtime) and the option
+\istyopt{datetime}{24hr} will cause \glsni{currenttime} to display
+the date in 24 hour format (for example, \xxivtime).
+
+\begin{exercise}{Using the datetime Package}{ex:datetime}
+
+Edit your document from \exerciseref{ex:simple} so that it uses the \isty{datetime}
+package. Experiment with the different package options, for example
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{short,nodayofweek,level,12hr}\marg{datetime}
+\end{codeS}
+and add the current time
+\begin{codeS}
+This document was created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+\end{codeS}
+You can \downloadorview{datetime} an example.
+For a full list \isty{datetime} of package options, see the
+\sty{datetime} \htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc}.
+\latex{(Refer to \sectionref{sec:texdoc} on how to find package
+documentation.)}
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special Characters %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{symbols}
+\section{Special Characters and Symbols}
+\label{sec:chars}
+
+You can use most of the standard characters that you find on your keyboard, but the 
+10 symbols shown in \tableref{tab:specialchars} have a special
+meaning.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Special Characters}
+\label{tab:specialchars}
+\centering
+\begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}
+\glsi{leftbracechar} \glsi{rightbracechar} 
+\glsi{percentchar}
+\glsi{ampchar} 
+\glsi{dollarchar} 
+\glsi{hashchar} 
+\glsi{underscorechar}
+\glsi{circumchar} 
+\glsi{tildechar} 
+\glsi{backslashchar}
+\end{table}
+
+We have already used the curly braces \gls{leftbracechar} and
+\gls{rightbracechar}. The percent symbol \gls{percentchar} is a
+comment character. Everything from the percent symbol up to the end
+of line is ignored by \LaTeX. This means you can have comments in
+your \gls{source} to remind you what a particular part of your code
+is doing. We have also used the backslash symbol
+\glsni{backslashchar} which indicates that we are using a \LaTeX\
+command, as in \glstext{LaTeX} or \glstext{today}. The meaning of
+the other special characters will be covered later.
+
+So what do you do if you want one of these symbols to actually appear
+in your document? \faq{Where can I find the symbol for
+\ldots?}{symbols} \tableref{tab:symbols} lists commands that produce
+these and other symbols\faq{How to get copyright, trademark,
+etc}{tradesyms}. Note that some of the commands have short cuts, such
+as \glsni{emdash} instead of \glsni{textemdash} and
+\glsni{questiondown} instead of \glsni{textquestiondown}.
+
+The symbol \texttt{`} is the backtick (or grave) symbol, as
+opposed to the apostrophe symbol~\texttt{'}.  \latexhtml{The backtick
+symbol usually looks like~\texttt{\`{}} on a keyboard, and on}{On}
+most UK keyboards it is situated to the left of the \texttt{1}~key.
+The opening double quote is created using two adjacent backtick
+symbols and the closing double quote with two adjacent
+apostrophe symbols. This gives 66 and 99 style quotes, which you
+wouldn't get using the double quote symbol on your keyboard.
+
+Note that the symbols \gls{barchar} \gls{ltchar} and \gls{gtchar} have to
+be created using \glsni{textbar}, \glsni{textless} and
+\glsni{textgreater} when in normal text mode. If you try to enter
+them using the corresponding keyboard characters you may get
+\makeimg{em dash}{\textemdash} \makeimg{upside down exclamation
+mark}{\textexclamdown} and \makeimg{upside down question
+mark}{\textquestiondown}. (They do however work if you are in
+\htmlref{maths mode}{ch:maths}.\footnote{There are also some text
+fonts that will display them correctly, but don't rely on it.}) The
+slash character \gls{text.slash} may be used directly, as in
+\dq{\texttt{and\glsni{text.slash}or}}, but no line break will be permitted at the slash,
+whereas \glsni{slash} (as in \dq{\texttt{and\glsni{slash}\glsni{visiblespace}or}}) will allow a
+line break at that point.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Symbols}
+\label{tab:symbols}
+\centering
+\begin{latexonly}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}ll@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}ll@{}}
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbackslash}\end{inlinedef} & \textbackslash&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{slash}\end{inlinedef} & \slash &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textgreater}\end{inlinedef} & \textgreater \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textasciicircum}\end{inlinedef} & \textasciicircum & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dollar}\end{inlinedef} & \$ &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbar}\end{inlinedef} & \textbar \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textasciitilde}\end{inlinedef} & \textasciitilde&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{leftbrace}\end{inlinedef} & \{ &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textless}\end{inlinedef} & \textless \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{pounds}\end{inlinedef} & \pounds &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rightbrace}\end{inlinedef} & \} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dag}\end{inlinedef} & \dag \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textregistered}\end{inlinedef}& 
+\textregistered&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{hash}\end{inlinedef} & \# &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{ddag}\end{inlinedef} & \ddag \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{texttrademark}\end{inlinedef} & \texttrademark &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{percent}\end{inlinedef} & \% &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quoteright}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquoteright}\end{inlinedef} & \textquoteright\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{copyright}\end{inlinedef} & \copyright &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{amp}\end{inlinedef} & \& &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quoteleft}\end{inlinedef} 
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquoteleft}\end{inlinedef} & \textquoteleft \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbullet}\end{inlinedef} & \textbullet & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{i}\end{inlinedef} & \i & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quotedblright}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquotedblright}\end{inlinedef} & \textquotedblright\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{questiondown}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquestiondown}\end{inlinedef} & ?` &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{j}\end{inlinedef} & \dotlessj & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quotedblleft}\end{inlinedef} 
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquotedblleft}\end{inlinedef} & \textquotedblleft\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{exclamdown}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textexclamdown}\end{inlinedef} & !` &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dash}\end{inlinedef} & - &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{endash}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textendash}\end{inlinedef} & \textendash \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{emdash}\end{inlinedef}
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textemdash}\end{inlinedef} & \textemdash &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{S}\end{inlinedef} & \S &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textperiodcentered}\end{inlinedef} &
+\textperiodcentered\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{ldots}\end{inlinedef} & \ldots  &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{P}\end{inlinedef} & \P &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{underscore}\end{inlinedef} 
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textunderscore}\end{inlinedef}& \_ 
+\end{tabular}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+\begin{tabular}{ll|ll}
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbackslash}\end{inlinedef} &
+\textbackslash&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{underscore}\end{inlinedef}\space 
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textunderscore}\end{inlinedef}& \_ \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dash}\end{inlinedef} & - &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{endash}\end{inlinedef}\space
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textendash}\end{inlinedef} & \makeimg{en dash character}{\textendash} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{emdash}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textemdash}\end{inlinedef} & \makeimg{em dash character}{\textemdash} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{P}\end{inlinedef} & \P \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textasciicircum}\end{inlinedef} & \textasciicircum & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dollar}\end{inlinedef} & \$ \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{S}\end{inlinedef} & \S &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textasciitilde}\end{inlinedef} & \textasciitilde\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{leftbrace}\end{inlinedef} & \{ &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{ldots}\end{inlinedef} & \ldots \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{pounds}\end{inlinedef} & \pounds &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rightbrace}\end{inlinedef} & \} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{dag}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{dagger symbol}{\dag} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{questiondown}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquestiondown}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{upside-down question mark}{?`} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textregistered}\end{inlinedef}& 
+\makeimg{registered symbol}{\textregistered}&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{hash}\end{inlinedef} & \# \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{ddag}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{double dagger symbol}{\ddag} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{exclamdown}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textexclamdown}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{upside-down exclamation mark}{!`} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{texttrademark}\end{inlinedef} & \texttrademark &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{percent}\end{inlinedef} & \% \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quoteright}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquoteright}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{closing single quote}{\textquoteright}&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quotedblright}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquotedblright}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{closing double quote}{\textquotedblright}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{copyright}\end{inlinedef} & \copyright &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{amp}\end{inlinedef} & \& \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quoteleft}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquoteleft}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{opening single quote}{\textquoteleft} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{quotedblleft}\end{inlinedef}\space  
+or \begin{inlinedef}\gls{textquotedblleft}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{opening double quote}{\textquotedblleft}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbullet}\end{inlinedef} & \makeimg{bullet point}{\textbullet} & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{i}\end{inlinedef} & \makeimg{dotless i}{\i} \\ 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{j}\end{inlinedef} & \makeimg{dotless j}{\dotlessj} & 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbar}\end{inlinedef} & \textbar\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textperiodcentered}\end{inlinedef} &
+\middot &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textless}\end{inlinedef} & \textless\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textgreater}\end{inlinedef} & \textgreater&
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{slash}\end{inlinedef} & / \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\end{table}
+
+Ligatures and special symbols are shown in \tableref{tab:ligatures}.
+(Note that, as mentioned in the \htmlref{introduction}{ch:intro}, the
+f-ligatures are automatically converted.)  When using a command in
+the middle of a word, take care that the command doesn't run into the
+rest of the word.  For example, the British spelling of the word
+man\oe{}uvre has an
+\latexhtml{\oe}{oe}-ligature in the middle of it.
+You will get an error if you try:
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+man\cmdname{oe}uvre
+\end{alltt}
+as \LaTeX\ will interpret it as the command
+\verb|\oeuvre| which doesn't exist.
+
+There are several ways to code this in \LaTeX:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Place a space after the command:
+\begin{codeS}
+man\glsni{oe}\glsni{visiblespace}uvre
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Place an empty brace after the command:
+\begin{codeS}
+man\glsni{oe}\marg{}uvre
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Group the command:
+\begin{codeS}
+man\marg{\glsni{oe}}uvre
+\end{codeS}
+(This can adversely affect the kerning so is best avoided.)
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption[Ligatures and Special Symbols]{Ligatures and Special Symbols (Computer Modern Font)}
+\label{tab:ligatures}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{3\tabcolsep}}ll@{\hspace{3\tabcolsep}}ll@{\hspace{3\tabcolsep}}ll}
+\gls{AE} & 
+  \makeimg{upper case AE ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\AE} &
+\gls{ae} & 
+  \makeimg{lower case ae ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\ae} &
+\gls{OE} & 
+  \makeimg{upper case OE ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\OE} &
+\gls{oe} & 
+  \makeimg{lower case oe ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\oe}\\
+\Indextt{fi} & 
+  \makeimg{fi ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont fi} &
+\Indextt{ffi} & 
+  \makeimg{ffi ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont ffi} &
+\Indextt{fl} & 
+  \makeimg{fl ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont fl} &
+\Indextt{ffl} & 
+  \makeimg{ffl ligature}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont ffl}\\
+\gls{AA} & \makeimg{upper case A ring}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\AA} &
+\gls{aa} & \makeimg{lower case a ring}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\aa} &
+\gls{L} & \makeimg{upper case L with a stroke}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\L} &
+\gls{l} & \makeimg{lower case l with a stroke}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\l}\\
+\gls{O} & \makeimg{upper case slashed O}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\O}&
+\gls{o} & \makeimg{lower case slashed o}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\o} &
+\gls{SS} & \makeimg{upper case Eszett}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\SS} &
+\gls{ss} & \makeimg{lower case eszett}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\ss}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:accents}%
+English speakers are by and large very lackadaisical when it comes
+to accents, but accents affect pronunciation, and so are just as
+important as the correct spelling. There is a big difference
+between putting your knife into someone's p\^at\'e (meat paste), and
+putting your knife into someone's pate (head)!
+
+Accented letters are created by specifying which accent you want, and
+the letter on which to put the accent.  The accent commands are
+listed in \xtableref{tab:accents}, and each command takes one
+\gls{mandatory}.  The command indicates
+what accent to use, and the argument indicates the letter on which to put
+the accent.
+
+You may have noticed in \tableref{tab:symbols} the commands \gls{i}
+and \gls{j} which produce a dotless i and j (\i\ and \dotlessj).
+With old versions of \LaTeX\ (or \TeX) an accent over a normal
+\dq{i} or \dq{j} left the original dot in, which is incorrect, so a
+dotless \dq{\i} or \dq{\dotlessj} were required. With modern
+distributions, an accented \dq{i} or \dq{j} is correctly rendered.
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+It's na\glsni{doublequote}ive to think that eating mouldy 
+p\glsni{circum}at\glsni{acute}e won't result in food poisoning.
+\end{code}%
+Result:
+\begin{resultS}[naive.html]
+It's na\"{\i}ve to think that eating mouldy p\^at\'e won't result in food poisoning.
+\end{resultS}%
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Accent Commands}
+\label{tab:accents}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llc@{\hspace{3\tabcolsep}}llc}
+\toprule
+  & \multicolumn{2}{c@{\hspace{3\tabcolsep}}}{Example} &
+  & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Example} \\
+ Definition & Input & Output & Definition & Input & Output\\\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{acute}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\'{c}| & \makeimg{c with an acute accent}{\'{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{macron}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\={c}| & \makeimg{c with a macron accent}{\={c}} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{grave}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\`{c}| & \makeimg{c with a grave accent}{\`{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{period}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\.{c}| & \makeimg{c with a dot over it}{\.{c}} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{circum}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\^{c}| & \makeimg{c with a circumflex}{\^{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{tilde}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\~{c}| & \makeimg{c with a tilde above}{\~{c}} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{doublequote}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\"{c}| & \makeimg{c with an umlaut}{\"{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{v}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\v{c}| & \makeimg{c with a caron accent}{\v{c}} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{u}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\u{c}| & \makeimg{c with a breve accent over it}{\u{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{H}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\H{c}| & \makeimg{c with double acute accent}{\H{c}} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{t}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\t{xy}| & \makeimg{x and y with a tie over them}{\t{xy}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{c}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\c{c}| & \makeimg{c with a cedilla}{\c{c}}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{d}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\d{c}| & \makeimg{c with a dot under it}{\d{c}} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{b}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\b{c}| & \makeimg{c with a bar under it}{\b{c}}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{r}\marg{\meta{object}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\r{c}| & \makeimg{c with a ring above}{\r{c}} & & &\\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+This book only covers a very small subset of available symbol
+commands. If the command you want isn't here, try Scott~Pakin's
+comprehensive symbol list~\cite{pakin09}. Another useful resource is
+\iappnamelink[.]{detexify}{http://detexify.kirelabs.org/classify.html}
+
+\setnode{inputenc}
+\subsection{The \sty{inputenc} Package}
+\label{sec:inputenc}
+
+Instead of using the accent and ligature commands described
+\htmlref{above}{sec:chars}, you can use the \isty{inputenc} package
+and enter the character directly, but you must ensure you match the
+encoding with that used by your text editor. For example, this book
+uses UTF8 encoding so I~have loaded the \sty{inputenc} package in
+the \glsterm{preamble} with the \istyopt{inputenc}{utf8} option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{utf8}\marg{inputenc}
+\end{codeS}
+Note that it's a good idea to also use the \isty{fontenc} package as
+well. For example, if you want to use Type~1 fonts:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{T1}\marg{fontenc}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{utf8}\marg{inputenc}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+Returning to an earlier example, 
+I~can directly enter the Unicode character (U+0153) for the
+lower case \oe\ ligature:
+\bookpagebreak
+% actually I can't do it because latex2html won't like it, but lets
+% pretend I have
+\begin{codeS}
+man\oe uvre
+\end{codeS}
+Note that if you are collaborating on a document and you want to
+use this approach, you must ensure that all your co-authors use the
+same input encoding. For example, suppose you decide to use
+ISO~Latin~1 encoding (\istyopt{inputenc}{latin1} option):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{latin1}\marg{inputenc}
+\end{codeS}
+but your co-author is using a UTF-8 editor and types:
+\begin{codeS}
+na\"ive
+\end{codeS}
+where \texttt{\"i} is the Unicode character U+00EF\@. UTF-8 characters
+use one to four 8-bit bytes whereas ISO Latin~1 uses an 8-bit
+single-byte character set. So the U+00EF binary sequence is
+interpreted by ISO Latin~1 encoding as two characters: \~A\ (0xC3)
+and \={ } (0xAF)\@.  Therefore the resulting PDF file will end up
+containing the rather odd looking:
+\begin{flushleft}\wrong
+na\~A\={ }ve
+\end{flushleft}\html{\par}%
+(If you are using TeXWorks, you can set your preferred encoding
+using \menu{Edit}\menuto\menu{Preferences} and select the \dq{Editor} tab 
+where there is an \dq{Encoding} setting. Make sure this setting
+matches the \isty{inputenc} option you use in your document.)
+
+\begin{exercise}{Using Special Characters}{ex:spchar}
+Start a new file in TeXworks, and
+see if you can write the source code to create the output below.
+\doifnotbook{(Ignore any \gls{hyphenation} that may appear below, \LaTeX\ does
+that automatically where necessary, see \sectionref{sec:hyphenation}. Likewise, 
+ignore where the line breaks occur, except for the paragraph break.) }Choose 
+whether you want to use the \isty{inputenc} package or if you
+want to use commands such as \gls{c}, but in either case you need to
+be careful of the \htmlref{special characters}{tab:specialchars}\doifbook{\ 
+listed in \tableref{tab:specialchars}}.
+
+\begin{result}[spcharex.html]\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}%
+Item \#1: Our travel expenditure came to \$2000.00 
+\& our equipment expenditure came
+to \pounds 100.00 plus VAT @ 17.5\%.
+
+Chlo\"e collected Zo\"e from the cr\`eche. They stopped to
+admire the fa\c{c}ade of a new caf\'e and then went to a matin\'ee.
+\end{result}
+
+You can \downloadorview{spchar} the source code if you can't work out
+how to do it, and remember to check \appendixref{ch:errors} if you have a problem.
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Lists %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{lists}
+\section{Lists}
+\label{sec:lists}
+
+Now you've had a go at using some \glspl{command},
+let's use some \glspl{environment}\latex{ (recall
+\sectionref{sec:environment})}. A good example of environments are the list
+making environments. There are three basic list making environments:
+\glsni{env-itemize} (for unordered lists),
+\glsni{env-enumerate} (for ordered lists) and
+\glsni{env-description} (for lists where you want to specify
+your own label.)
+
+In each of these environments, each item in the list must be started
+with the command: 
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{item}\oarg{\meta{marker}}
+\end{definition}
+The optional argument \meta{marker} can be used to override 
+the default marker for that particular item. (For example, to replace
+the bullet point for an individual item in an \htmlref{unordered
+list}{sec:itemize} to make that item stand out from all the other
+items.) We will be looking at how to change the default marker
+in \sectionref{sec:renewcom}.
+
+\xminisec{Related \gls{ukfaq} topics:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \faqlink{Perhaps a missing \cmdname{item}?}{errmissitem}
+\item \faqlink{Fancy enumeration lists}{enumerate}
+\item \faqlink{How to adjust list spacing}{complist}
+\item \faqlink{Interrupting enumerated lists}{interruptlist}
+\item \faqlink{\dq{Too deeply nested}}{toodeep}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%---------------------- Itemize --------------------------
+
+\setnode{itemize}
+\subsection{Unordered Lists}
+\label{sec:itemize}
+
+Unordered lists are created using the \gls{env-itemize} environment.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\glsni{item} Vegetable\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[itemize.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Animal
+\item Vegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Another Example:}
+
+Changing the default markers is covered in \sectionref{sec:renewcom}, 
+but it's also possible to override the default marker for a
+particular item, as in this example (recall the double-dagger
+symbol command \gls{ddag} from \tableref{tab:symbols}):
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\glsni{item}\oarg{\glsni{ddag}} Vegetable\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{result}[itemizedag.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Animal
+\item[\ddag] Vegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+Be careful about using square brackets
+\gls{text.opensq}\gls{text.closesq} inside an optional
+argument. Grouping is required, as in:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\glsni{item}\oarg{\marg{\gls{text.opensq}X\gls{text.closesq}}} Vegetable\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{result}[itemizesqbr.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Animal
+\item[{[X]}] Vegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+Similarly if the item starts with an open square bracket
+\glsni{opensq}, as in:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\glsni{item} \marg{\gls{text.opensq}sic\gls{text.closesq}} Wegetable\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[itemizetextsqbr.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Animal
+\item {[sic]} Wegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{nesteditemize}
+\subsubsection{Nested Lists}
+\label{sec:nesteditemise}
+
+It is also possible to nest \glsni{env-itemize} environments.
+The following example has three levels, each using its own default marker.
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Mammals\newline
+\glsni{item} Birds\newline
+\glsni{item} Reptiles. For example:\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} dinosaurs\newline
+\glsni{item} crocodiles\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Vegetable\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Cultivated\newline
+\glsni{item} Wild\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[nesteditemize.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Animal
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Mammals
+\item Birds
+\item Reptiles. For example:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item dinosaurs
+\item crocodiles
+\end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+\item Vegetable
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Cultivated
+\item Wild
+\end{itemize}
+\item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+You might have noticed the code in the above example is a little
+difficult to read. Each new list item starts a new paragraph, so it
+doesn't matter if we have blank lines before each item. Also, recall
+from \chapterref{ch:def} that spaces at the start of each line of
+code are ignored, so it's possible to make the code more readable
+without affecting the final result:
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item} Animal
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+      \glsni{item} Mammals
+
+      \glsni{item} Birds
+
+      \glsni{item} Reptiles. For example:
+
+      \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+         \glsni{item} dinosaurs
+
+         \glsni{item} crocodiles
+
+       \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item} Vegetable
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+      \glsni{item} Cultivated
+
+      \glsni{item} Wild
+
+   \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item} Mineral
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+It's now a little easier to see which \verb|\begin{itemize}| matches
+up with the corresponding \verb|\end{itemize}|.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Four Levels)}
+
+This example has four levels, which is the maximum allowed by most
+classes.
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+ \glsni{item} Animal
+
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+   \glsni{item} Mammal
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+    \glsni{item} Placental
+
+    \glsni{item} Monotreme
+
+    \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+      \glsni{item} Platypus
+    \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+    \glsni{item} Marsupial
+
+    \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+     \glsni{item} Kangaroo
+
+     \glsni{item} Koala
+    \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+   \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item} Reptile
+ \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+ \glsni{item} Vegetable
+
+ \glsni{item} Mineral
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[fourlevelitemize.html]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Animal
+ \begin{itemize}
+   \item Mammal
+
+   \begin{itemize}
+    \item Placental
+
+    \item Monotreme
+    \begin{itemize}
+      \item Platypus
+    \end{itemize}
+
+
+    \item Marsupial
+
+    \begin{itemize}
+     \item Kangaroo
+
+     \item Koala
+    \end{itemize}
+   \end{itemize}
+
+   \item Reptile
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \item Vegetable
+
+ \item Mineral
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+If you try adding a further level, \LaTeX\ will give a \dq{Too
+deeply nested} error.
+
+%---------------- Enumerate -------------------------
+
+\setnode{enumerate}
+\subsection{Ordered Lists}
+\label{sec:enumerate}
+
+Ordered lists are created using the \gls{env-enumerate} 
+environment.
+It has exactly the same format as the \gls{env-itemize} environment
+described \htmlref{above}{sec:itemize}.
+
+We can use the same example as before, only this time use
+\glsni{env-enumerate} instead of \gls{env-itemize}.
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+  \glsni{item} Animal
+  \glsni{item} Vegetable
+  \glsni{item} Mineral
+\glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+The above input will produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[enumerate.html]
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Animal
+\item Vegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{result}
+
+As before, the marker for a particular item can be overridden:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{item}\oarg{\marg{\gls{text.opensq}X\gls{text.closesq}}} Vegetable\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{result}[enumeratesqbr.html]
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Animal
+\item[{[X]}] Vegetable
+\item Mineral
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Nested):}
+
+As with the \gls{env-itemize} environment, most classes allow a
+maximum of four nested \gls{env-enumerate} environments.
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+ \glsni{item} Animal
+
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+   \glsni{item} Mammal
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+    \glsni{item} Placental
+
+    \glsni{item} Monotreme
+
+    \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+      \glsni{item} Platypus
+    \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+
+    \glsni{item} Marsupial
+
+    \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+     \glsni{item} Kangaroo
+
+     \glsni{item} Koala
+    \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+   \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+
+   \glsni{item} Reptile
+ \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+
+ \glsni{item} Vegetable
+
+ \glsni{item} Mineral
+\glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[nestedenumerate.html]
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Animal
+ \begin{enumerate}
+   \item Mammal
+
+   \begin{enumerate}
+    \item Placental
+
+    \item Monotreme
+    \begin{enumerate}
+      \item Platypus
+    \end{enumerate}
+
+
+    \item Marsupial
+
+    \begin{enumerate}
+     \item Kangaroo
+
+     \item Koala
+    \end{enumerate}
+   \end{enumerate}
+
+   \item Reptile
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \item Vegetable
+
+ \item Mineral
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{result}
+
+%--------------------- Description -------------------------
+
+\setnode{description}
+\subsection{Description Environment}
+\label{sec:description}
+
+The \gls{env-description} environment has the same format as
+the \gls{env-itemize} environment described in
+\sectionref{sec:itemize}, only this time you need to
+specify a marker as an \gls{optional} to
+the \gls{item} command, since there is no default marker
+for this environment. The marker may be a textual label, and most
+classes will typeset it in bold. The \koma\ classes, such as
+\icls{scrartcl}, default to a bold sans-serif font, as illustrated
+in this next example:
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{description}
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Animal} Living being
+
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Vegetable} Plant
+ 
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Mineral} Natural inorganic substance
+\glsni{end}\marg{description}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[description.html]
+\dodescriptionexample
+\end{result}
+
+The \koma\ classes provide a way of changing the font style in
+the \glsni{env-description} label markers. (The font changing commands
+\glsni{normalfont} and \glsni{scshape} will be covered in 
+\sectionref{sec:fonts}, and the \koma\ command
+\glsni{addtokomafont} in \sectionref{sec:section}.)
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{addtokomafont}\marg{descriptionlabel}\marg{\glsni{normalfont}\glsni{scshape}}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{description}
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Animal} Living being
+
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Vegetable} Plant
+
+  \glsni{item}\oarg{Mineral} Natural inorganic substance
+\glsni{end}\marg{description}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[descriptionkoma.html]
+% Make sure LaTeX2HTML doesn't think this should be the same
+% image as the previous example
+\dodescriptionkomaexample
+\end{result}
+
+It is possible to nest all the listing environments, as long as you
+don't exceed four \gls{env-itemize} and four \gls{env-enumerate}
+environments. The \gls{env-description} environment has no
+restriction on the number of times it can be nested. However, just
+because you can do something, doesn't mean you should. In general
+it's best to avoid an excessively complicated block of text in your
+document.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Assorted Nesting):}
+
+This example uses each of the listing environments described above.
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{description}
+
+   \glsni{item}\oarg{Animal} Living being
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+      \glsni{item} Mammals
+
+      \glsni{item} Birds
+
+      \glsni{item} Reptiles. For example:
+
+      \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+
+         \glsni{item} dinosaurs
+
+         \glsni{item} crocodiles
+
+       \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+
+   \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item}\oarg{Vegetable} Plant
+
+   \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+      \glsni{item} Cultivated. For example:
+
+      \glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+
+         \glsni{item} Carrots
+
+         \glsni{item} Broccoli
+
+         \glsni{item} Potatoes
+
+      \glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+
+      \glsni{item} Wild
+
+   \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item}\oarg{Mineral} Natural inorganic substance
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{description}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\begin{result}[nestedlists.html]
+\begin{description}
+
+   \item[Animal] Living being
+
+   \begin{itemize}
+
+      \item Mammals
+
+      \item Birds
+
+      \item Reptiles. For example:
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+         \item dinosaurs
+
+         \item crocodiles
+
+       \end{enumerate}
+
+   \end{itemize}
+
+   \item[Vegetable] Plant
+
+   \begin{itemize}
+
+      \item Cultivated. For example:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+         \item Carrots
+
+         \item Broccoli
+
+         \item Potatoes
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+
+      \item Wild
+
+   \end{itemize}
+
+   \item[Mineral] Natural inorganic substance
+
+\end{description}
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Lists}{ex:lists}
+
+Try writing the \gls{source} that will create
+the output shown below.
+
+\begin{result}[listex.html]
+\begin{description}
+\item[Village] A small collection of dwelling places.
+Examples:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Marlingford
+\item Saxlingham Nethergate
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\item[Town] A large collection of dwelling places.
+Examples:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Great Yarmouth
+\item Beccles
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\item[City] A large town, usually containing a cathedral.
+Examples:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Norwich
+\item Birmingham
+\item London
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{description}
+\end{result}\bookpagebreak
+You can \downloadorview{lists} the answer if you can't work out how to do it.
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Font Changing Commands %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{fontcommands}
+\section{Fonts}
+\label{sec:fonts}
+
+\LaTeX\ uses Donald~Knuth's Computer Modern fonts by
+default\faq{Using PostScript fonts with TeX}{usepsfont}. This
+supplies three font families: serif, sans-serif and a typewriter (or
+monospaced) font (as well as the maths
+fonts which are discussed in
+\sectionref{sec:mathsfonts}). With each font family, you can
+change the shape and weight, as well as the size.
+
+\reportpagebreak
+\setnode{fontstyle}
+\subsection{Changing the Font Style}
+\label{sec:fontstyle}
+
+There are two basic ways of changing fonts: you can either change
+the font for a small selection of text, for example, if you want to
+\emph{emphasize} a word, or you may wish to change the font \dq{from
+this point onwards}. The \glspl{command} shown in
+\tableref{tab:fontsI} are of the first type (text-block
+commands\index{command!text-block|hyperpage}), whereas those shown
+in \tableref{tab:fontsII} are of the second type\dash a
+\gls{declaration} (or modal command\index{command!modal|hyperpage}).
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning Don't be tempted to use \cmdname{bf}, \cmdname{md}, \cmdname{it}, 
+\cmdname{sl}, \cmdname{sc}, \cmdname{sf}, \cmdname{tt} or \cmdname{rm}. 
+These commands are \textbf{obsolete}~\cite{l2tabu}.\faq{What's wrong with \cmdname{bf}, \cmdname{it}
+etc.?}{2letterfontcmd}
+
+If you use an italic or slanted font declaration, such as
+\glsni{itshape}, you will need to add an \keyword{italic correction}
+\gls{itcorr} at the end of the block of text, when the last letter
+of the sloping text leans too far over. This isn't necessary for
+text-block commands, such as \glsni{textit}, just for the modal
+commands. The effect is more noticeable when part of a word is
+stressed, particularly with certain fonts.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+In the code below, the first instance of \dq{repeated} doesn't have an italic
+correction but the second does: 
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsni{itshape} repeated}ly \marg{\glsni{itshape}
+repeated\glsni{itcorr}}ly
+\end{codeS}%
+Using Computer Modern:
+\begin{resultS}[repeatedly repeatedly]\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont
+{\itshape repeated}ly {\itshape repeated\/}ly
+\end{resultS}
+Using Helvetica:
+\begin{resultS}[repeatedly repeatedly]\fontfamily{phv}\selectfont
+{\itshape repeated}ly {\itshape repeated\/}ly
+\end{resultS}
+Using Antykwa Toru\'nska typeface:
+\begin{resultS}[repeatedly repeatedly]
+{\itshape repeated}ly {\itshape repeated\/}ly
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{table}[tp]
+\caption{Font Changing Text-Block Commands}
+\label{tab:fontsI}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Corresponding output\\
+& & (Computer Modern)\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textrm}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textrm{roman} text| & \makeimg{Roman text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont roman} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textsf}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textsf{sans serif} text| & \makeimg{sans serif text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont{\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont sans serif} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{texttt}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\texttt{typewriter} text| & \makeimg{typewriter text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont{\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont typewriter} text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textmd}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textmd{medium} text| & \makeimg{medium text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textmd{medium} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textbf}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textbf{bold} text| & \makeimg{bold text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textbf{bold} text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textup}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textup{upright} text| & \makeimg{upright text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textup{upright} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textit}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textit{italic} text| & \makeimg{italic text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textit{italic} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textsl}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textsl{slanted} text| & \makeimg{slanted text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textsl{slanted} text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textsc}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textsc{Small Caps} text| &
+\makeimg{Small Caps text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\textsc{Small Caps} text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{emph}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\emph{emphasized} text| &
+\makeimg{emphasized text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\emph{emphasized} text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{textnormal}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\textnormal{default} text| &
+\makeimg{default text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont default text}
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Note that if you want to typeset an URL, rather than using
+\glsni{texttt} it is better to use\bookpagebreak
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{url}\marg{\meta{address}}
+\end{definition}
+which is defined in the \isty{url} package. For example:
+\begin{codeS}%
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{url}\marg{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/\glsnl{tildechar}nlct/}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}
+produces:
+\begin{resultS}[http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/\tildesym nlct/]
+% simulate to prevent link, which might confuse the reader into
+% thinking links automatically occur.
+\texttt{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/\tildesym nlct/}
+\end{resultS}
+(Note there is no need to do anything with the \gls{tildechar}
+(tilde) \htmlref{special character}{sec:chars} if you use it in the argument of \glsni{url}.)
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption{Font Changing Declarations}
+\label{tab:fontsII}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Declaration & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Corresponding output\\
+& & (Computer Modern)\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rmfamily}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\rmfamily roman text| &
+\makeimg{Roman text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont roman text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{sffamily}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\sffamily sans serif text| &
+\makeimg{sans serif text}{\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont sans serif text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{ttfamily}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\ttfamily typewriter text| &
+\makeimg{typewriter text}{\fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont typewriter text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mdseries}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\mdseries medium text| &
+\makeimg{medium text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\mdseries medium text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{bfseries}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\bfseries bold text| &
+\makeimg{bold text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\bfseries bold text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{upshape}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\upshape upright text| &
+\makeimg{upright text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\upshape upright text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{itshape}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\itshape italic text| &
+\makeimg{italic text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\itshape italic text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{slshape}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\slshape slanted text| &
+\makeimg{slanted text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\slshape slanted text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{scshape}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\scshape Small Caps text| &
+\makeimg{Small Caps text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\scshape Small Caps text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{em}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\em emphasized text| & 
+\makeimg{emphasized text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\em emphasized text}\\[5pt]
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{normalfont}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\normalfont default text| &
+\makeimg{default text}{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont default text}
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+
+\end{table}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:fontenv}\Glspl{environment} can be used instead.
+Each \gls{environment} has the same name as its corresponding
+declaration, but \emph{without} the preceding backslash. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sffamily}Some sans-serif text.\glsni{end}\marg{sffamily}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}%
+yields:
+\begin{resultS}[Some sans-serif text.]
+\begin{sffamily}Some sans-serif text.\end{sffamily}
+\end{resultS}
+
+You can combine a font family with a given shape and weight using
+a variety of methods.
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Localised declarations:
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsni{sffamily}\glsni{slshape} Some slanted sans-serif text.}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Declarations that later get explicitly reset:
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{sffamily}\glsni{slshape} Some slanted sans-serif
+text.\glsni{normalfont}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\item Mixing text-block and modal commands:
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{slshape} Some slanted sans-serif text.}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Nested commands:
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{textsl}\marg{Some slanted sans-serif text.}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Mixing environments and declarations:
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sffamily}\glsni{slshape} Some slanted sans-serif 
+text.\glsni{end}\marg{sffamily}
+\end{code}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+All of the above produce the same output:
+\begin{resultS}[Some slanted sans-serif text.]
+\textsf{\slshape Some slanted sans-serif text.}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\faq{Warning: \dq{Font shape \ldots\ not
+available}}{fontunavail}Note that some combinations are not
+available, in which case \LaTeX\ will give a warning message, and
+will substitute the font for what it considers to be the closest
+available match.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textsc}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Text}
+\end{codeS}
+With the Antykwa Toru\'nska typeface, this appears as:
+\begin{resultS}[Text (in bold small caps)]
+\textsc{\bfseries Text}
+\end{resultS}\bookpagebreak\noindent
+whereas with Computer Modern, the result is:
+\begin{resultS}[Text (in bold)]\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont
+\textsc{\bfseries Text}
+\end{resultS}
+This is because Computer Modern doesn't have a bold small-caps
+font, so it just uses bold. \LaTeX\ gives the following warning:
+\begin{verbatim}
+LaTeX Font Warning: Font shape `T1/cmr/b/sc' undefined
+(Font)              using `T1/cmr/b/n' instead on input line 2792.
+\end{verbatim}
+Most sans-serif fonts don't provide a small-caps variant, so 
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{scshape} Text}
+\end{codeS}
+will either appear in regular sans-serif or small-caps serif,
+depending on the font in use. Using Libris sans-serif the result is:
+\begin{resultS}[Text (in sans-serif)]
+\textsf{\scshape Text}
+\end{resultS}
+whereas using Computer Modern Sans, the result is:
+\begin{resultS}[Text (in small caps)]
+\fontfamily{cmss}
+\scshape Text
+\end{resultS}
+
+\setnode{emph}
+\subsubsection{Emphasizing Words or Phrases}
+\label{sec:emph}
+
+The \gls{command} \gls{emph},
+the \gls{declaration} \gls{em} and the
+\gls{environment} \gls{env-em} behave slightly
+differently to the corresponding \gls{textit} command,
+\gls{itshape} declaration and \gls{env-itshape} environment.
+The latter group simply use an italic font, whereas the former will toggle
+between sloping and upright.  So if the surrounding font is upright
+then \gls{emph}, \gls{em} and \glsni{env-em} will use the
+sloping font, but if the surrounding font is italic or slanted,
+\gls{emph}, \gls{em} and \glsni{env-em} will use an upright
+font.  This is particularly useful in abstracts where the
+\Index{abstract} font varies between \glspl{cls}.  It is recommended that if your intention
+is to emphasize something, you should use \gls{emph} etc.\ rather
+than \gls{textit} etc.\screenpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Emphasized text in upright surrounding:
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{emph}\marg{emphasized} text.
+\end{codeS}%
+yields
+\begin{resultS}[Some emphasized text.]
+Some \emph{emphasized} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\item Emphasized text in italic surrounding:
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsni{itshape} Some \glsni{emph}\marg{emphasized} text.}
+\end{codeS}%
+yields
+\begin{resultS}[Some emphasized text]
+{\itshape Some \emph{emphasized} text.}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\item Emphasized text in upright sans-serif surrounding:
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsni{sffamily} Some \glsni{emph}\marg{emphasized} text.}
+\end{codeS}%
+yields
+\begin{resultS}[Some emphasized text]
+{\sffamily Some \emph{emphasized} text.}
+\end{resultS}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\setnode{fontsize}
+\subsection{Changing the Font Size}
+\label{sec:fontsize}
+
+When you start writing a document, you need to decide what the base
+font size should be. The \koma\ classes default to 11pt, but this can
+be changed using the class options \scrclsopt{8pt}, \scrclsopt{9pt},
+\clsopt{10pt}, \clsopt{12pt}, \scrclsopt{14pt}, \scrclsopt{17pt} or
+\scrclsopt{20pt}.
+
+You can then change the font size \emph{relative to} the base size,
+using one of the declarations shown in \tableref{tab:fontsize}. That
+way, if you later decide to change the normal font size from, say,
+11pt to 12pt, all you need do is change the class option (see
+\latexhtml{page~\pageref{obj:sizeopt}}{\htmlref{earlier}{obj:sizeopt}})
+and re-run \LaTeX. Note that there are no equivalent text-block
+commands.
+
+\begin{table}[tbhp]
+\caption{Font Size Changing Declarations}
+\label{tab:fontsize}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Declaration & \bfseries Example Input & 
+\bfseries Corresponding Output\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{tiny}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\tiny tiny text| & \makeimg{tiny text}{\tiny tiny text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{scriptsize}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\scriptsize script size| &
+\makeimg{script size}{\scriptsize script size}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{footnotesize}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\footnotesize footnote size| &
+\makeimg{footnote size}{\footnotesize footnote size}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{small}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\small small text| &
+\makeimg{small text}{\small small text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{normalsize}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\normalsize normal size| &
+\makeimg{normal size}{\normalsize normal size}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{large}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\large large text| &
+\makeimg{large text}{\large large text}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Large}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\Large even larger| &
+\makeimg{even larger}{\Large even larger}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{LARGE}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\LARGE larger still| &
+\makeimg{larger still}{\LARGE larger still}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{huge}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\huge huge| & \makeimg{huge}{\huge huge}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Huge}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|\Huge extra huge| &
+\makeimg{extra huge}{\Huge extra huge}
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+
+\end{table}
+
+Again, \glspl{environment} can be used instead, where
+each \gls{environment} has the same name as its corresponding
+declaration, but \emph{without} the preceding backslash.
+Font environments may be nested, for example:%
+\indexEnv{itshape}\indexEnv{Large}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itshape} Some italic text.
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Large}This text is large.\glsni{end}\marg{Large}
+\glsni{end}\marg{itshape} Back to normal.
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{resultS}[Some italic text. This text is large. Back to
+normal.]
+\begin{itshape} Some italic text.
+\begin{Large}This text is large.\end{Large}
+\end{itshape}
+Back to normal.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\setnode{documentfonts}
+\subsection{Changing Document Fonts}
+\label{sec:changingfonts}
+
+\faq{Choice of scalable outline fonts}{psfchoice}What if you don't
+want to use the default Computer Modern fonts? Some publishers and
+institutions insist on a combination of Times Roman (serif),
+Helvetica (sans-serif) and Courier (typewriter). To do this, you can
+load the following packages:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\isty{mathptmx}] (Times) Only affects \gls{rmfamily} and
+\gls{textrm}.
+
+\item[\isty{helvet}] (Helvetica) Only affects \gls{sffamily} and
+\gls{textsf}.
+
+\item[\isty{courier}] (Courier) Only affects \gls{ttfamily}
+and \gls{texttt}.
+\end{description}
+
+\xminisec{Notes:}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item \warning Don't be tempted to use the \sty{times} package. It's
+obsolete~\cite{l2tabu}. Use \isty{mathptmx} instead.
+
+\item Although Times and Helvetica are commonly used together, they
+don't match, as illustrated below (temporarily switching from this
+book's fonts to Times and Helvetica):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{rmfamily} xx \glsni{sffamily} xx
+\end{codeS}
+Results in:
+\begin{resultS}[xx xx]
+\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont xx \fontfamily{phv}\selectfont xx
+\end{resultS}
+The first two x's are in Times Roman and the second two are in
+Helvetica, which are somewhat larger. To compensate for this you
+need to scale the Helvetica font using the \istyopt{helvet}{scaled}
+option:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{scaled=0.9}\marg{helvet}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Loading \isty{helvet} or \isty{courier} doesn't change the
+default font family. Consider the following:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{helvet}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+This is a sample document.
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+Here, the text \dq{This is a sample document} will be typeset in
+Computer Modern Roman. This is because \gls{rmfamily} is the default
+font and \isty{helvet} only affects \gls{sffamily}, which hasn't
+been used. (See \sectionref{sec:renewcom} to find out how to change
+the default font family.)
+\end{enumerate}
+\latexhtml{This book}{The PDF version of this document} has used the following packages:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{T1}\marg{fontenc}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{math}\marg{anttor}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{libris}
+\end{alltt}
+The \isty{fontenc} package is used to switch to Type~1 font
+encoding\faq{Why bother with \sty{inputenc} and \sty{fontenc}?}{why-inp-font},
+the \isty{anttor} package is used to set the serif family to Antykwa
+Toru\'nska typeface, and the \isty{libris} package is used to set
+the sans-serif family to the Libris ADF typeface.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Fonts}{ex:fonts}
+
+Go back to the document you created in \exerciseref{ex:simpledoc} and
+change the first paragraph to a large bold font and the second
+paragraph to normal size italic.  Emphasize the words \dq{simple} and
+\dq{short}.  (Again, you can \downloadorview{fonts} the solution.)
+
+If you like, you can try experimenting with loading
+different font packages, such as \isty{mathptmx}, to change the
+default typeface. The \LaTeX\ Font Catalogue~\cite{fontcat} provides
+a useful list of fonts, although you may not have all of them
+installed.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Aligning Material in Rows and Columns %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{tabular}
+\section{Aligning Material in Rows and Columns}
+\label{sec:tabular}
+
+Text can be aligned in rows and columns using the \gls{env-tabular}
+environment.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{column specifiers}}
+\end{definition}%
+This \glsterm{environment} has a
+\glsterm{mandatory} \meta{column specifiers}
+that specifies how to align each column. Within \meta{column
+specifiers}, there must be a specifier for each column. The three
+basic are: \texttt{r} (right aligned), \texttt{l} (left aligned) and
+\texttt{c} (centred).
+(Make sure you don't confuse \texttt{l} (the letter \dq{ell}) with \texttt{1} 
+(the digit one).)
+The optional argument \meta{pos} is covered 
+\latexhtml{in \sectionref{sec:boxes}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:boxes}}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Three columns (\underline{l}eft, \underline{c}entred, \underline{c}entred):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lcc}
+\end{codeS} 
+
+\xminisec{Another Example:}
+Four columns (\underline{l}eft, \underline{c}entred, \underline{c}entred, \underline{r}ight):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lccr}
+\end{codeS} 
+
+The \texttt{r}, \texttt{l} and \texttt{c} specifiers don't allow
+line breaks or paragraphs within a cell. It's not a good idea to
+have too much text in a cell, but if it's required you can use
+\begin{definition}
+p\marg{\meta{width}}
+\end{definition}
+which indicates a paragraph cell of the given width.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Three columns (\underline{p}aragraph of width 1in,
+\underline{c}entred, \underline{r}ight):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{p\marg{1in}cr}
+\end{codeS}
+The paragraph cell will be formatted fully justified, which is often
+inappropriate for a narrow block of text. The \isty{array} package
+provides
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{gtcol}\marg{\meta{declaration}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used directly in front of the \texttt{l}, \texttt{c},
+\texttt{r} or \texttt{p} column specifiers. This inserts
+\meta{declaration} in front of the entries for that column, so it
+can be used to insert, say, \gls{raggedright}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Three columns, the first \underline{l}eft justified where each entry
+is in bold, the second a \underline{p}aragraph column of width 1in set to
+ragged right and the third \underline{c}entered:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{\glsni{gtcol}\marg{\glsni{bfseries}}l\glsni{gtcol}\marg{\glsni{raggedright}}p\marg{1in}c}
+\end{codeS}
+
+The \isty{array} package also provides
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{ltcol}\marg{\meta{declaration}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used directly after the \texttt{l}, \texttt{c},
+\texttt{r} or \texttt{p} column specifiers. This inserts
+\meta{declaration} after the entries for that column.
+
+\xminisec{Inter-Column Gap:}
+
+The gap between columns is given by twice the value of the
+\gls{length} register:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{tabcolsep}
+\end{definition}
+A gap of \glsni{tabcolsep} is
+also inserted before the first column and after the last column.
+This length can be changed using one of the commands described in
+\sectionref{sec:length}. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{setlength}\marg{\glsni{tabcolsep}}\marg{4pt}
+\end{codeS}
+This will put an 8pt gap between columns and a 4pt gap before the
+first column and after the last column.
+
+The column specifiers can also include:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{atchar}\marg{\meta{inter-column text}}
+\end{definition}
+This inserts \meta{inter-column text} at that place on each row of
+the table, replacing the default inter-column gap.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+Suppose we want a centred first column, a right justified second
+column and a left justified third column with a dot between the
+second and third columns:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{cr\glsni{atchar}\marg{.}l}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}
+Alternatively, you may want a larger gap between groups of columns,
+for example, two groups of three left justified columns:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lll\glsni{atchar}\marg{\glsni{hspace}\marg{4\glsni{tabcolsep}}}lll}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}
+This uses the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{hspace}\marg{\meta{length}}
+\end{definition}
+which inserts a horizontal space of a given \gls{length}. In this
+case, four times the value of \glsni{tabcolsep}. This makes the gap
+between the third and fourth columns twice as wide as the gap
+between the other columns.
+
+\setnode{rowscols}
+\subsection{Column and Row Separation}
+\label{sec:rowscols}
+
+Remember the \latexhtml{special characters mentioned in
+\sectionref{sec:chars}}{\htmlref{special characters}{sec:chars}}?
+The ampersand character \gls{ampchar} is used to separate column
+entries. Rows are separated using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}\oarg{\meta{vertical space}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{vertical space} is extra vertical spacing between rows,
+if required. There is also a longer equivalent:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{tabularnewline}
+\end{definition}
+\faq{Alignment tab changed to \cmdname{cr}}{altabcr}%
+If you have used something like
+\texttt{\gls{gtcol}\marg{\gls{raggedright}}p\marg{\meta{length}}}
+as the specifier for your last column, you must use
+\glsni{tabularnewline} instead of \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+to indicate the row break otherwise you will get the following
+error:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Extra alignment tab has been changed to \cr.
+<recently read> \endtemplate
+\end{verbatim}
+\screenpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example:} 
+
+Let's have two columns, the first left justified and the second right justified:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}\newline
+Video \glsni{ampchar}
+8.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+CD \glsni{ampchar} 9.11\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+DVD \glsni{ampchar}
+15.00\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Total \glsni{ampchar} 33.10\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}
+
+\begin{result}[tabular1.html]
+\begin{tabular}{lr}
+Video & 8.99\\
+CD & 9.11\\
+DVD & 15.00\\
+Total & 33.10
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+Recall from \chapterref{ch:def} that \LaTeX\ ignores spaces at the start of a line and
+treats multiple spaces as a single space, so I~could just have
+easily done:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}\newline
+\strut~~Video \glsni{ampchar} 8.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~CD~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 9.11\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~DVD~~~\glsni{ampchar} 15.00\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~Total \glsni{ampchar} 33.10\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}%
+and still have got the same result, but now the code is easier to
+read.
+
+Entries form implicit \glsing{group}, so
+\glspl{declaration} made
+within a \gls{env-tabular} environment only have an effect up to the
+next \gls{ampchar} or \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}.  
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}\newline
+\strut~~Video~\glsni{ampchar} 8.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~CD~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 9.11\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~DVD~~~\glsni{ampchar}
+15.00\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{bfseries} Total \glsni{ampchar} 33.10\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}%
+Output:\screenpagebreak
+\begin{result}[Image: as the previous example except that the word
+Total has appeared in bold]
+\begin{tabular}{lr}
+Video & 8.99\\
+CD & 9.11\\
+DVD & 15.00\\
+\bfseries Total & 33.10
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+Let's add an extra column and a header row:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}\newline
+\strut~~Item~~\glsni{ampchar} ex VAT \glsni{ampchar} inc
+VAT\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~Video~\glsni{ampchar}~~~8.99 \glsni{ampchar}~~10.56 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~CD~~~~\glsni{ampchar}~~~9.11 \glsni{ampchar}~~10.70 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~DVD~~~\glsni{ampchar}~~15.00 \glsni{ampchar}~~17.63 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{bfseries} Total \glsni{ampchar}~~33.10 \glsni{ampchar}~~39.89\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{result}[tabular2.html]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+Item  & ex VAT & inc VAT\\ 
+Video & 8.99 & 10.56\\
+CD & 9.11 & 10.70\\
+DVD & 15.00 & 17.63\\
+\bfseries Total & 33.10 & 39.89
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+
+\xminisec{Example (Aligning on a Decimal Point):}
+
+\label{xmp:decpt}If you want to align on the decimal point, it's best to use the
+\isty{siunitx} package. That's beyond the scope of this
+book, but for simple data this can be achieved
+using the \gls{atchar} inter-column specifier. For example:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr\glsni{atchar}\marg{.}l}\newline
+\strut~~Video \glsni{ampchar} 8 \glsni{ampchar} 99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~CD~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 9 \glsni{ampchar} 11\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~DVD~~~\glsni{ampchar} 15 \glsni{ampchar} 00\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{bfseries} Total \glsni{ampchar} 33 \glsni{ampchar} 10\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}%
+Output:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{result}[Image: as the second example but the decimal points
+are aligned]
+\begin{tabular}{lr@{.}l}
+Video & 8 & 99\\
+CD & 9 & 11\\
+DVD & 15 & 00\\
+\bfseries Total & 33 & 10
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+
+\setnode{multicolumn}
+\subsection{Spanning Columns}
+\label{sec:multicolumn}
+
+You may have noticed I~omitted the column headers in the \htmlref{above
+example}{xmp:decpt}. \faq{Merging cells in
+a column of a table}{multirow}
+The problem with rewriting the table using 
+\texttt{r\glsni{atchar}\marg{.}l} to align the decimal point is that the header
+now needs to span the last two columns.
+This can be done using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{multicolumn}\marg{\meta{cols spanned}}\marg{\meta{col specifier}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+The first \gls{mandatory} \meta{cols spanned} is the number of
+columns you want to span, the second argument \meta{col specifier}
+indicates how to align this column-spanning entry, the third
+argument \meta{text} indicates what should go in this entry. Note
+that \meta{col specifier} should only have a single column
+specifier, such as \texttt{\marg{c}} or \texttt{\marg{r}}.  We can
+use \glsni{multicolumn} to modify an earlier example as
+follows:\screenpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{Price (\glsni{pounds})}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~Item~~\glsni{ampchar} ex VAT \glsni{ampchar} inc
+VAT\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~Video~\glsni{ampchar}~~~8.99 \glsni{ampchar}~~10.56 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~CD~~~~\glsni{ampchar}~~~9.11 \glsni{ampchar}~~10.70 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~DVD~~~\glsni{ampchar}~~15.00 \glsni{ampchar}~~17.63 \glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{bfseries} Total \glsni{ampchar}~~33.10 \glsni{ampchar}~~39.89\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{result}[tabular2multicol.html]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+ & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Price (\pounds)}\\
+Item  & ex VAT & inc VAT\\ 
+Video & 8.99 & 10.56\\
+CD & 9.99 & 11.74\\
+DVD & 15.00 & 17.63\\
+\bfseries Total & 33.98 & 39.93
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+Here we are spanning two columns, so the first argument to \glsni{multicolumn} is \verb|{2}|,
+we want the entry centred, so the second argument is \verb|{c}| and the text to go in this entry 
+is simply \texttt{\marg{Price (\gls{pounds})}}.
+
+\faq{How to alter the alignment
+of tabular cells}{tabcellalign}The \glsni{multicolumn} command can also be used to override
+the alignment of individual entries.  Consider
+the following example:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar} Year1   \glsni{ampchar} Year2
+\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Travel~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar}
+110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000  \glsni{ampchar} 60,000\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}
+Output:
+\begin{result}[tabular3.html]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+ & Year1 & Year2 \\
+Travel & 100,000 & 110,000\\
+Equipment & 50,000 & 60,000
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}%
+In this example, the headers \dq{Year1} and \dq{Year2} would look
+better centred, but the rest of the entries in the second
+and third columns look best right aligned.  We can
+use \glsni{multicolumn} to span just one column, and
+use the second argument of \glsni{multicolumn} to override
+the column specification:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Travel~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000  \glsni{ampchar} 60,000\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}
+Output:
+\begin{result}[Image: as the previous example except that the words
+'Year1' and 'Year2' have been centred in their columns]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+ & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year1} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year2} \\
+Travel & 100,000 & 110,000\\
+Equipment & 50,000 & 60,000
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{tabrules}
+\subsection{Rules}
+\label{sec:rules}
+
+In general, vertical rules are considered superfluous~\cite{oxford}.
+Although Turabian~\cite{turabian96} allows for the possibility of
+vertical rules for tabulated material containing more than two
+columns but still advises against having too many and deprecates
+the use of them at either end.
+
+Horizontal rules may be used at the top and bottom of the
+tabulated material, but other horizontal rules should be kept to a
+minimum. In general, the top and bottom rule should be thicker than
+the mid rules.
+
+The \isty{booktabs} package provides:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{toprule}\oarg{\meta{wd}}
+\end{definition}
+for the top horizontal rule,
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{bottomrule}\oarg{\meta{wd}}
+\end{definition}
+for the bottom horizontal rule, and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{midrule}\oarg{\meta{wd}}
+\end{definition}
+for horizontal rules in between rows, such as after the header row.
+
+These commands should all go at the start of the appropriate row.
+This means that if you want a bottom rule, you need to add
+\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} followed by \glsni{bottomrule} at the end of
+the tabulated material.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}\newline
+\glsni{toprule}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar}
+\glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1}\newline
+\strut~~~~~~~~~~\glsni{ampchar}
+\glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}%
+\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\glsni{midrule}\newline
+Travel~~~~\glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar}
+110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000  \glsni{ampchar} 60,000%
+\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\glsni{bottomrule}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\end{code}
+results in:
+\begin{result}[Image: as previous example but with horizontal rules
+at the start and end and between the first and second rows.]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+\toprule
+          & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year1} 
+          & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year2} \\
+\midrule
+Travel    & 100,000 & 110,000\\
+Equipment & 50,000  & 60,000
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}
+
+The thickness of the top and bottom rule is given by
+the \gls{length} register \booklinebreak\gls{heavyrulewidth}, and the thickness of
+the mid rule is given by the \gls{length} register
+\gls{lightrulewidth}. These rule thicknesses can be overridden using the
+optional argument \meta{wd} for \glsni{toprule}, \glsni{midrule}
+and \glsni{bottomrule}.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Aligning Material}{ex:tabular}
+Go back to the document you created in \exerciseref{ex:simple} (and later modified in \exerciseref{ex:datetime}),
+and add the following: 
+\begin{result}[tabex.html]
+\begin{tabular}{lrr}
+ & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries Expenditure (\pounds)}\\
+ & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year1} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Year2} \\
+\bfseries Travel & 100,000 & 110,000\\
+\bfseries Equipment & 50,000 & 60,000
+\end{tabular}
+\end{result}
+
+Note that the \gls{env-tabular} environment
+doesn't create a caption, all it does is arrange its contents in
+rows and columns. You can find out how to turn your
+\gls{env-tabular} environment into a table 
+in \sectionref{sec:tables}.
+
+You can \downloadorview{tabular} the solution to this exercise. (Remember to check
+\appendixref{ch:errors} if you encounter an error message.)
+\end{exercise}
+
+For more information about using the \gls{env-tabular} environment see \latexbook,
+\latexguide\ or \latexcomp.  \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} also describes how
+to span rows using the \isty{multirow}
+\htmlref{package}{sec:packages}.  For information on how to create
+coloured tables using the \isty{colortbl}
+\htmlref{package}{sec:packages}, see \latexgraphic.
+
+\xminisec{Related \gls{ukfaq} topics:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \faqlink{How to change a whole row of a table}{wholerow}
+\item \faqlink{Merging cells in a column of a table}{multirow}
+\item \faqlink{Fixed width tables}{fixwidtab}
+\item \faqlink{Variable-width columns in tables}{varwidcol}
+\item \faqlink{Spacing lines in tables}{struttab}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Boxes and Mini-Pages %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{boxes}
+\section{Boxes and Mini-Pages}
+\label{sec:boxes}
+
+\gls{tex} views everything on a page as a form of box. Each box has an
+associated width, height and depth, and the boxes are placed together
+on the page with \keyword{glue}. This is reminiscent of the days
+of manual typesetting, where each letter or symbol was on a wooden
+block, and the wooden blocks were glued in place. The simplest form
+of box is a single letter. Some letters, such as \dq{a} only have a
+height and width, whereas other letters, such as \dq{y} have a
+height, width and depth (see \figureref{fig:letterbox}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts[alt=Image of the letters y and a illustrating their
+height depth and width. The letter a has zero depth as it does not
+extend below the baseline.]
+  {pictures/letterbox}%
+  {%
+    \caption{\texorpdfstring{\protect\TeX}{TeX}\protect\space Views Each Letter as a Box}%
+  }%
+  {fig:letterbox}%
+\end{figure}
+
+For example, the phrase \dq{cabbages and peas} is made up of 15 boxes:
+\begin{center}
+\makeimg{c a b b a g e s a n d p e a s}{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0.5pt}%
+\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.1pt}\LARGE
+\fbox{c}\fbox{a}\fbox{b}\fbox{b}\fbox{a}%
+\fbox{g}\fbox{e}\fbox{s}~\fbox{a}\fbox{n}\fbox{d}~\fbox{p}\fbox{e}%
+\fbox{a}\fbox{s}}
+\end{center}
+whereas the word \dq{cauliflower} consists of 10 boxes:\footnote{The 
+fl-ligature is a single character, and so is one box not
+two.}
+\begin{center}
+\makeimg{c a u l i fl-ligature o u r}{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0.5pt}%
+\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.1pt}\LARGE
+\fbox{c}\fbox{a}\fbox{u}\fbox{l}\fbox{i}%
+\fbox{fl}\fbox{o}\fbox{w}\fbox{e}\fbox{r}}
+\end{center}
+
+More complicated boxes are made up of smaller boxes. We have already
+encountered one of these more complicated boxes: the 
+\gls{env-tabular} environment, discussed in the 
+\htmlref{previous section}{sec:tabular}. This type of box is called
+a \keyword{horizontal box}, which means that it can go in a line
+of text. For example:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+Here is some text.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{cc}\newline
+A \glsni{ampchar} B\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+C \glsni{ampchar} D\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}\newline
+The rest of the line.
+\end{code}
+produces:
+\begin{result}[Image illustrating the typeset output: the tabulated
+material is centred vertically within the line of text.]
+Here is some text.
+\begin{tabular}{cc}
+A & B\\
+C & D
+\end{tabular}
+The rest of the line.
+\end{result}
+Recall from \htmlref{the previous section}{sec:tabular} that the 
+\gls{env-tabular} environment had an optional argument
+\meta{pos}. This governs the vertical alignment when the
+\gls{env-tabular} environment occurs within a line of text.
+This can be one of \texttt{c} (centred\dash the default, as illustrated
+above), \texttt{t} (top) and \texttt{b} (bottom). For example,
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+Here is some text.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\oarg{b}\marg{cc}\newline
+A \glsni{ampchar} B\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+C \glsni{ampchar} D\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}\newline
+The rest of the line.
+\end{code}%
+produces:
+\begin{result}[Image illustrating the typeset output: the last row
+of the tabulated material rests on the baseline of the text outside it.]
+Here is some text.
+\begin{tabular}[b]{cc}
+A & B\\
+C & D
+\end{tabular}
+The rest of the line.
+\end{result}
+
+Since a box can't be broken across a line of text, you can use
+the box making command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{mbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+to prevent \meta{text} from spanning a line break.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Compare:
+\begin{code}
+\gls{raggedright}
+Some text at the beginning of a paragraph. Some
+text in the middle of the paragraph. Some more text.
+\glsni{par}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image of typeset output: paragraph is left-justified]
+\raggedright
+Some text at the beginning of a paragraph. Some text in the
+middle of the paragraph. Some more text.
+\par
+\end{result}
+with:
+\begin{code}
+\gls{raggedright}
+Some text at the beginning of a paragraph. \glsni{mbox}\marg{Some
+text in the middle of the paragraph.} Some more text.
+\glsni{par}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image of typeset output: line break occurs at the
+start of the second sentence leaving a large white space at the end
+of the first line.]
+\raggedright
+Some text at the beginning of a paragraph. \mbox{Some text in the
+middle of the paragraph.} Some more text.
+\par
+\end{result}
+(If \gls{raggedright} had not been used, the text in the \glsni{mbox}
+would've spilt out over the edge of the page.)
+
+Another type of box which can again be placed in a line of text,
+is the \gls{env-minipage} environment.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\oarg{\meta{height}}%
+\marg{\meta{width}}
+\end{definition}
+As the name suggests, this environment creates a \dq{mini-page}
+of the given width.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+Some text.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{2in}\newline
+This is a mini-page. The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default\gls{footnote}\marg{and 
+this is how a footnote appears}.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\newline
+The rest of the line.
+\end{code}%
+which produces:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{result}[Image: the contents of the minipage including
+footnote have been typeset in a rectangular block within the outer
+line of text.]
+Some text.
+\begin{minipage}{2in}
+This is a mini-page. The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.
+
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default\mpexfootnote{and 
+this is how a footnote appears}.
+\end{minipage}
+The rest of the line.
+\end{result}
+
+You can optionally specify a height, and how
+the mini-page is aligned with the rest of the text. As with
+the \gls{env-tabular} environment, the alignment
+option \meta{pos} can be one of \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} (centred)
+or \texttt{b} (bottom). The default is \texttt{c}, which is why
+the above example has the mini-page centred vertically. This
+can be changed, for example:
+\begin{code}
+Some text.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\oarg{t}\marg{2in}\newline
+This is a mini-page. The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default\gls{footnote}\marg{and 
+this is how a footnote appears}.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\newline
+The rest of the line.
+\end{code}
+which produces
+\begin{result}[Image: as previous example but the first line of the
+minipage is aligned with the outer text.]
+\begin{makeimage}
+Some text.
+\begin{minipage}[t]{2in}
+This is a mini-page. The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.
+
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default\mpexfootnote{and this
+is how a footnote appears}.
+\end{minipage}
+The rest of the line.
+\end{makeimage}
+\end{result}
+
+Note that the width can be specified relative to the current
+line width, using the \gls{length} register \gls{linewidth}. For example,
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+\end{alltt}
+will start a mini-page that is half the width of the current
+line.
+
+There is also a corresponding command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{parbox}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\oarg{\meta{height}}%
+\marg{\meta{width}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+which behaves in a similar way. So the above example can be 
+rewritten using a \glsni{parbox}:
+\begin{code}
+Some text.\newline
+\glsni{parbox}[t]\marg{2in}\marg{This is a parbox. 
+The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default.}\newline
+The rest of the line.
+\end{code}
+which produces
+\begin{result}[Image: as previous example but without a footnote]
+Some text.
+\parbox[t]{2in}{This is a parbox. 
+The text inside
+it is formatted as usual.
+
+Paragraph breaks can also be used, but 
+there is no indentation by default.}
+The rest of the line.
+\end{result}
+You may have noticed that the \gls{footnote} command has
+not been used in the above example.  The \glsni{parbox} command 
+is more restricted than the
+\gls{env-minipage} environment, so you can't use the 
+\gls{footnote} command in it. There are also certain 
+environments, such as the 
+\htmlref{list-making
+environments}{sec:lists}\latex{\ifscreenorother{}{\ 
+described in \sectionref{sec:lists}}}, that can be
+used in a \gls{env-minipage} but not in a \glsni{parbox}.
+
+\setnode{fbox}
+\subsection{Framed Boxes}
+\label{sec:fbox}
+
+Recall the \gls{framebox} command described in \sectionref{sec:optional}:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{framebox}\oarg{\meta{width}}\oarg{\meta{align}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+This treats \meta{text} as a box of width \meta{width} and puts a frame around it.
+The second optional argument may be one of: \texttt{c} (centred
+contents), \texttt{l} (left-aligned contents), \texttt{r}
+(right-aligned contents).
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{framebox}\oarg{2in}\marg{framed} text.
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is inside a 2
+inch wide box)]
+Some \framebox[2in]{framed} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+There is a shorter related command with no optional arguments:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{fbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+
+The \isty{fancybox} package provides some additional framing
+commands:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{shadowbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Puts a shadow-style frame around its contents:\bookpagebreak
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{shadowbox}\marg{framed} text.
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is in a 
+box with a shadow)]
+Some \shadowbox{framed} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{doublebox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Puts a double-lined frame around its contents:
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{doublebox}\marg{framed} text.
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is in a 
+box with a double lined frame)]
+Some \doublebox{framed} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{ovalbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Puts a thin-lined oval frame around its contents:
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{ovalbox}\marg{framed} text.
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is in a 
+a box with rounded corners)]
+Some \ovalbox{framed} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{Ovalbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Puts a thick-lined oval frame around its contents:
+
+\begin{codeS}
+Some \glsni{Ovalbox}\marg{framed} text.
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is in a 
+a thick bordered box with rounded corners)]
+Some \Ovalbox{framed} text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+If you want a different frame effect, you will need to use a
+graphical package, such as \isty{pgf}/\isty{tikz}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This example uses commands beyond the scope of this book,
+but gives you an idea of what's possible.
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{scrartcl}
+
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usetikzlibrary{shapes}
+\usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+Some
+\begin{tikzpicture}[baseline=(n.base),decoration=bumps]
+\node[draw,ellipse,decorate] (n) {framed};
+\end{tikzpicture}
+text.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Some framed text (the word 'framed' is in a 
+decorated with a wiggly border)]
+Some
+\begin{tikzpicture}[baseline=(n.base),decoration=bumps]
+\node[draw,ellipse,decorate] (n) {framed};
+\end{tikzpicture}
+text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+For further details, see the \isty{pgf} \htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc}. 
+
+\xminisec{Related \gls{ukfaq} topics:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \faqlink{Automatic sizing of minipage}{varwidth}
+\item \faqlink{Float(s) lost}{fllost}
+\item \faqlink{Perhaps a missing \cmdname{item}?}{errmissitem}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% CHAPTERS, SECTIONS ETC %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{structure}
+\chapter{Structuring Your Document}
+\label{ch:sections}
+
+Let's go back to the document we modified in \exerciseref{ex:tabular}.
+In this \latexhtml{chapter}{section} we shall edit that document
+step by step until we have a fully-fledged document with title,
+abstract, table of contents, sections etc.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Maketitle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{title}
+\section{Author and Title Information}
+\label{sec:title}
+
+The term \keyword{title page} is used to indicate the author, title and
+date information that can appear either on the front cover by itself
+or along the top of the first page of text.  In order to do this, you
+must first specify the information.  Once this information has been
+specified it can then be displayed.
+
+The author, title and date are entered using the 
+\glspl{command}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{author}\marg{\meta{author names}}
+\\%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}
+\gls{title}\marg{\meta{title text}}
+\\%\end{definition}
+%\begin{definition}
+\gls{date}\marg{\meta{document date}}
+\end{definition}%
+The \koma\ classes also define:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{titlehead}\marg{\meta{Title heading}}\\
+\gls{subject}\marg{\meta{Subject}}\\
+\gls{subtitle}\marg{\meta{Subtitle}}\\
+\gls{publishers}\marg{\meta{Publisher}}
+\end{definition}
+
+\faq{The style of document titles}{titlsty}All these title-related
+commands only \emph{store} information, they don't actually display
+anything. These commands can be put in the \gls{preamble}. With most
+classes, you will typically need to use at least \glsni{author} and
+\glsni{title}.
+
+Once you have used these commands, you can then
+display the information using the command:\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:maketitle}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{maketitle}
+\end{definition}
+This command should be placed where you want the title page to
+appear, which is normally at the start of the \gls{env-document}
+environment.
+
+Note that if you don't use the \glsni{date} command, the current 
+date will be inserted.  If you want no date to appear, you need to 
+specify an empty argument:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{date}\marg{}
+\end{codeS}
+\bookpagebreak
+Multiple authors should be separated by the command \gls{and}.
+For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{author}\marg{A. Jones\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}University of Somewhere \glsni{and}
+B. Smith\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}University of Somewhere Else}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Within these titling fields, you can also use the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{thanks}\marg{text}
+\end{definition}%
+which produces a special type of footnote. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Great Project\glsni{thanks}\marg{funded by XYZ}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Note that the footnote marker produced using \glsni{thanks}
+is considered to have zero width, so if it occurs in the middle
+of a line, rather than the end, you will need to insert some
+extra space using \gls{spacesym} (backslash space).
+The argument of \glsni{thanks} is a \glslink{fragile}{moving 
+argument}\index{argument!moving|hyperpage}.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating Title Pages}{ex:title}
+
+Try editing the document you modified in \exerciseref{ex:tabular} to
+include title information.  Modifications are illustrated in bold
+\modification{like this}:
+
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\modification{\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}}
+\modification{\glsni{author}\marg{Me}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\modification{\glsni{maketitle}}
+
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}.
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not
+as short as the previous one. This document was
+created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Expenditure}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1} \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Travel \glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000 \glsni{ampchar} 60,000
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+
+You can \download{title} this document.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Abstract %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{abstr}
+\section{Abstract}
+\label{sec:abstract}
+
+The \gls{env-abstract} \glsterm{environment} is used to
+create an \Index{abstract} for the document\faq{1-column abstract in
+2-column document}{onecolabs}.  The way in which the
+abstract is formatted depends on the class file\indexCLS.  The
+\icls{scrreprt} class file will put the abstract on a page by itself,
+some class files will indent the abstract and some will typeset the
+abstract in italic.  Note also that some class files (such as
+\icls{scrbook}) don't have an \glsni{env-abstract}
+environment.  Abstracts traditionally go at the start of the document
+after the title, so the \glsni{env-abstract} environment should go
+after the \gls{maketitle} command.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating an Abstract}{ex:abstr}
+
+Try editing your document so that it has an abstract:
+Modifications are illustrated \modification{like this}:
+
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\modification{\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}}
+\modification{A brief document to illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.}
+\modification{\glsni{end}\marg{abstract}}
+
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}.
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not
+as short as the previous one. This document was
+created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Expenditure}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1} \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Travel \glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000 \glsni{ampchar} 60,000
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+
+You can \download{abstr} this document.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Sections, Subsections etc %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{sectionunits}
+\section{Chapters, Sections, Subsections \ldots}
+\label{sec:section}
+
+Chapters, sections, subsections etc can be inserted using the
+commands:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{part}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{chapter}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{section}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{subsection}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{subsubsection}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{paragraph}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}\\
+\gls{subparagraph}\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}
+\end{definition}%
+All these commands have a \latexhtml{moving argument (see
+\sectionref{sec:fragile})}{\glslink{fragile}{moving
+argument}\index{argument!moving|hyperpage}}, so fragile commands will need to
+be protected using \gls{protect}. \faq{How to create a
+\cmdname{subsubsub\-section}}{subsubsub}The final two commands in the
+above list, \glsni{paragraph} and \glsni{subparagraph}, represent
+subsubsubsections and subsubsubsubsections, although most
+\glspl{cls} typeset their arguments as unnumbered running titles.
+
+Note that the availability of these commands depends on the
+\gls{cls} you are using. For example, the \icls{scrartcl} class
+file that we have been using is designed for articles, so the
+\glsni{chapter} command is not defined in that class, whereas it is
+defined in the \icls{scrreprt} and \icls{scrbook} class files.
+
+Each of the commands above has a \gls{mandatory} \meta{title} and an
+\gls{optional} \meta{short title}. The mandatory argument
+\meta{title} is simply the title of the chapter\slash section\slash subsection
+etc. For
+example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{section}\marg{Introduction}
+\end{codeS}%
+If you are using the \icls{scrartcl} class file, the output will look 
+like:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: The text '1 Introduction' is typeset in a
+large bold font]
+\textbf{\sffamily\Large 1\quad Introduction}
+\end{resultS}%
+Note that you don't specify the section number as \LaTeX\ does this
+automatically.  This means that you can insert a new section or
+chapter or swap sections around or even change a section to a
+subsection etc, without having to worry about updating all the
+section numbers\faq{The style of section headings}{secthead}.
+
+\renewcommand{\fmtord}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}%
+If you are using a class file\indexCLS\ that contains chapters as
+well as sections, the section number will depend on the chapter.  So,
+for example, the current section is the \ordinal{section}\ section
+of chapter~\arabic{chapter}, so the section number is \thesection.
+\faq{Why are my sections numbered 0.1 ...?}{zerochap}(Note that if
+you are using a class file where the section number depends on the
+chapter number, you must have a \gls{chapter} command before your
+first \gls{section} command, otherwise your section numbers will
+come out as 0.1, 0.2 etc.)
+
+Unnumbered chapters/sections etc are produced by placing an 
+asterisk \texttt{*} after the command name.  For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgements}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You can switch to appendices using the 
+command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{appendix}
+\end{definition}%
+then continue using \gls{chapter}, \gls{section} 
+etc\faq{Appendixes}{appendix}.  For example (using the \icls{scrreprt} class file):
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{appendix}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Derivations}
+Some derivations.
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Tables}
+Some tables.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+The \koma\ classes have another type of sectioning command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{minisec}\marg{\meta{heading}}
+\end{definition}\screenpagebreak
+This provides an unnumbered heading not associated with any of the
+structuring levels. For example, the above was produce using:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{minisec}\marg{Note:}
+The \koma\ classes have another type of sectioning command:
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The next note below was produced using:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{minisec}\marg{Important Note:}
+If you want to change the font style used by headings, 
+\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} do not} use font declarations in the sectioning
+command arguments.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Important Note:}
+If you want to change the font style used by headings, 
+\emph{\bfseries do not} use font declarations in the sectioning command
+arguments. Don't do, for example:
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{\glsni{itshape} Introduction}
+\end{alltt}
+The \koma\ classes provide the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{addtokomafont}\marg{\meta{element}}\marg{\meta{commands}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{element} is the name of a structuring element (no
+backslash) and \meta{commands} is the list of font changing
+declarations (see \tableref{tab:fontsII}) to apply to that element style.
+For example, \latexhtml{this book}{the PDF version of this document}
+uses the commands:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{addtokomafont}\marg{section}\marg{\glsni{rmfamily}\glsni{bfseries}}
+\glsni{addtokomafont}\marg{minisec}\marg{\glsni{rmfamily}\glsni{bfseries}\glsni{scshape}}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating Chapters, Sections etc}{ex:section}
+
+Let's try editing our document so that it now has chapters, sections
+and an appendix.  Since the \icls{scrartcl} class file doesn't have
+chapters, let's change to the \icls{scrreprt} class.  Changes from our
+previous document are shown \modification{like this}.
+
+\begin{bcode}%
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{\modification{scrreprt}}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}
+A brief document to illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.
+\glsni{end}\marg{abstract}
+
+\modification{\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}}
+
+\modification{\glsni{section}\marg{The First Section}}
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+
+\modification{\glsni{section}\marg{The Next Section}}
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}. 
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not 
+as short as the previous one. This document was 
+created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+
+\modification{\glsni{chapter}\marg{Another Chapter}}
+
+\modification{Here\textquoteright{}s another very interesting chapter.}
+\modification{We\textquoteright{}re going to put a picture here later.}
+
+\modification{\glsni{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgements}}
+
+\modification{I would like to acknowledge all those}
+\modification{very helpful people who have assisted me in my work.}
+
+\modification{\glsni{appendix}}
+
+\modification{\glsni{chapter}\marg{Tables}}
+\modification{We will turn this tabular environment into a table later.}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Expenditure}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1} \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Travel \glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000 \glsni{ampchar} 60,000
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+
+(You can \download{section} a copy of this file if you like, but
+I~recommend that you try editing the file yourself to give you
+practice.)
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{toc}
+\section{Creating a Table of Contents}
+\label{sec:toc}
+
+Once you have all your \htmlref{sectioning commands}{sec:section},
+such as \gls{chapter} and \gls{section},
+you can create a table of contents with the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{tableofcontents}
+\end{definition}%
+This command should go where you want your table of
+contents to appear (usually after \gls{maketitle}).\faq{The format of the
+Table of Contents, etc}{tocloft} The \koma\ classes provide two
+options that govern the format of the table of contents:
+\scrclsopt[graduated]{toc} and \scrclsopt[flat]{toc}. The first is the
+default and indents the different sectioning levels. The second
+doesn't use any indentation.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt,toc=flat}\marg{scrreprt}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You may recall from \htmlref{the previous section}{sec:section} that
+the sectioning commands all had an optional argument \meta{short
+title}.  If your chapter or section title is particularly long\faq{My
+section title is too wide for the page header}{runheadtoobig}, you
+can use \meta{short title} to specify a shorter title that should go
+in the table of contents.\footnote{\label{ftn:header}and in the page header, depending
+on the page style.}  The longer title (given by the other
+argument \meta{title}) will still appear in the section heading in
+the main part of the document.
+
+\LaTeX\ processes all source code sequentially, so when it first
+encounters the \glsni{tableofcontents} command, it doesn't yet
+know anything about the chapters, sections etc.  So the first time
+the \htmlref{document is \LaTeX{}ed}{ch:tex2pdf} the necessary
+information is written to the table of contents 
+(\texttt{.toc})\indexTOC\ file (see \sectionref{sec:auxiliary}).  The subsequent pass reads the
+information in from the \texttt{.toc}\indexTOC\ file, and generates
+the table of contents.  You will therefore need to \LaTeX\ your
+document twice to make sure that the table of contents is
+up-to-date\faq{Numbers too large in table of contents,
+etc}{tocloftwrong}.
+
+\xminisec{Adding Extra Information}
+
+The \htmlref{starred versions}{itm:starredcommand} of the sectional 
+commands (such as \glsnl{chapter}\texttt{*})
+don't get added to the table of contents. It may be that you want to
+add it, in which case you need to use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{addcontentsline}\marg{\meta{toc}}\marg{\meta{section
+unit}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+after the heading. The first argument \meta{toc} is the file
+extension without the dot. As mentioned above, the table of contents
+file has the extension \texttt{.toc}, so the first argument should
+be \texttt{toc} (\htmlref{later}{ch:floats}\latex{ in \chapterref{ch:floats}}, 
+we'll be adding a list of figures and a list of tables, and those
+have file extensions \texttt{.lof}\indexLOF\ and \texttt{.lot}\indexLOT, respectively).
+The second argument \meta{section unit} is the name of the section
+unit. This is just the name of the relevant sectioning command
+\emph{without} the backslash. The final argument \meta{text} is the
+entry text. For example (using \icls{scrreprt} class):
+\begin{code}
+\gls{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgments}\newline
+\glsni{addcontentsline}\marg{toc}\marg{chapter}\marg{Acknowledgements}
+\end{code}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating a Table of Contents}{ex:toc}
+
+Try modifying your document so that it has a table of contents.
+Modifications from the previous exercise are illustrated 
+\modification{like this}:
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrreprt}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\modification{\glsni{tableofcontents}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}
+A brief document to illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.
+\glsni{end}\marg{abstract}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{The First Section}
+
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.  Here is the first paragraph.
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{The Next Section}
+
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}. 
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not 
+as short as the previous one. This document was 
+created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Another Chapter}
+
+Here's another very interesting chapter.
+We're going to put a picture here later.
+
+\glsni{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+I would like to acknowledge all those
+very helpful people who have assisted
+me in my work.
+
+\glsni{appendix}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Tables}
+
+We will turn this tabular environment into a table later.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Expenditure}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1} \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Travel \glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000 \glsni{ampchar} 60,000
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+
+If your table of contents doesn't come out right, try \LaTeX{}ing it
+again.  (Again, you can \download{toc} this file.)
+
+You might want to try experimenting with the
+\scrclsopt[flat]{toc} class options to
+see what difference it makes:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt,toc=flat}\marg{scrreprt}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Cross-Referencing %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{crossref}
+\section{Cross-Referencing}
+\label{sec:crossref}
+
+We have already seen that \LaTeX\ takes care of all the numbering for
+the chapters etc, but what happens if you want to refer to a chapter
+or section?  There's no point leaving \LaTeX\ to automatically
+generate the section numbers if you have to keep track of them all,
+and change all your cross-references every time you add a new
+section.  Fortunately \LaTeX\ provides a way to generate the correct
+number. All you have to do is label the part of the document you want
+to reference, and then refer to this label when you want to
+cross-reference it\faq{Referring to labels in other
+documents}{extref}.  \LaTeX\ will then determine the correct number
+that needs to be inserted at that point.
+
+The first part, labelling the place you want to reference, is done 
+using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{label}\marg{\meta{string}}
+\end{definition}\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:label}%
+The \gls{argument} \meta{string} should be a
+unique textual label.  This label can be anything you like as long as
+it is unique, but it's a good idea to make it something obvious
+so that, firstly, you can remember the label when you want to 
+use it, and secondly, when you read through your code at some later
+date, it's immediately apparent to you to which part of the
+document you are referring.  People tend to have their own conventions
+for labelling.  I usually start the label with two or three letters
+that signify what type of thing I'm labelling.  For example, if I'm
+labelling a chapter I'll start with \texttt{ch}, if I'm labelling a
+section I'll start with \texttt{sec}. 
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Labelling a chapter:
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:intro}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\item Labelling a section:
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{section}\marg{Technical Details}
+\glsni{label}\marg{sec:details}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Note that the \glsni{label} command doesn't produce any text, it
+simply assigns a label.  You can now refer to that object
+using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{ref}\marg{\meta{string}}
+\end{definition}
+which will produce the relevant number.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+See Section \glsni{ref}\marg{sec:results} for an analysis
+of the results.
+\end{codeS}
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{cmd:tilde}%
+It is a typographical convention that you should never
+start a new line with a number.  For example,
+if you have the text \dq{Chapter~1} the \dq{1} must
+be on the same line as the \dq{Chapter}.  We can 
+do this by using an \keyword{unbreakable space}, which will
+put a space but won't allow \LaTeX\ to break the line at
+that point.  This is done using the tilde (\gls{tildechar}) 
+\htmlref{special character}{sec:chars},
+so the example above should actually be:\bookpagebreak
+\begin{codeS}
+See Section\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{sec:results} for an analysis
+of the results.
+\end{codeS}
+There is a similar command to reference the page number:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{pageref}\marg{\meta{string}}
+\end{definition}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+See Chapter\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ch:def} on
+page\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{pageref}\marg{ch:def} for a list of definitions.
+\end{code}
+The label \texttt{ch:def} obviously needs to
+be defined somewhere:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Definitions}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:def}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+In fact, I~have done this in my source code for \chapterref[the
+definitions section]{ch:def} of this document, so the above example
+would look like:
+\begin{resultS}[See Chapter 2 on page 8 for a list of definitions]
+See Chapter~\ref*{ch:def} on
+page~\pageref*{ch:def} for a list of definitions.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\faq{Referring to things by their name}{nameref}%
+It's not just chapters and sections that you can reference, most of
+the numbers that \LaTeX\ automatically generates can be
+cross-referenced. 
+
+\xminisec{Example:} 
+The source code for footnote~\ref{ftn:header} \latexhtml{on
+page~\pageref{ftn:header}}{in \sectionref{sec:toc}} is:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{footnote}\marg{\glsni{label}\marg{ftn:header}and in the page header, depending
+on the page style}
+\end{code}
+\latexhtml{and it was referenced above using:}{and can be referenced
+using:}
+\begin{code}
+The source code for footnote\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ftn:header} on
+page\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{pageref}\marg{ftn:header} is:
+\end{code}
+
+The \isty{varioref} package provides a more convenient way of doing this using the
+command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{vref}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+This is like \gls{ref} but also adds information about the location, 
+such as \dq{on page~\meta{n}} or \dq{on the following page}, if the
+corresponding \gls{label} occurs on a different page, so the above
+example can be changed to:
+\begin{codeS}
+The source code for footnote\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{vref}\marg{ftn:header} is:
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{latexonly}
+\ifscreenorother
+{%
+which produces
+\begin{resultS}
+The source code for footnote~\vref{ftn:header} is:
+\end{resultS}
+}%
+{%
+\bookpagebreak\noindent which still produces
+\begin{resultS}
+The source code for footnote~\vref{ftn:header} is:
+\end{resultS}
+Compare with a reference to one of the labels in the next example:
+\begin{codeS}
+See step\glsni{tildechar}\cmdname{vref}\marg{itm:edit}.
+\end{codeS}
+which produces:
+\begin{resultS}
+See step~\vref{itm:edit}.
+\end{resultS}
+}%
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+which produces
+\begin{resultS}[The source code for footnote 5.1 on page 110 is:]
+The source code for footnote~\vref{ftn:header} is:
+\end{resultS}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\xminisec{Caveat:}
+You can run into trouble if the \glsni{vref} command occurs on a
+page break. When it tries to insert the location information, such
+as \dq{on the next page}, the information is no longer correct. This
+can cause an \dq{Infinite loop} error. When this happens, either
+edit your paragraph so the reference no longer falls on the page
+break or use \gls{ref} instead of \glsni{vref} for that instance.
+
+\xminisec{Another Example:}
+
+The \gls{env-enumerate} environment \latex{\ifscreenorother{}{described 
+in \sectionref{sec:enumerate} }}%
+automatically numbers the items within an ordered list, so it's
+possible to label list items. Recall the numbered list of
+instructions at the start of
+\chapterref{ch:tex2pdf}. Here's the code:
+
+\begin{code}[0.9\linewidth]
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{enumerate}
+
+   \glsni{item}\glsni{label}\marg{itm:edit} Write or edit the source code.
+
+   \glsni{item} Pass the source code to the \glsni{texttt}\marg{latex} or \glsni{texttt}\marg{pdflatex} 
+        application (``\glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}the document'').
+
+      \glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+
+         \glsni{item} If there are any error messages, 
+               return to Step\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{itm:edit}.
+
+         \glsni{item} If there are no error messages, a PDF file
+               is created, go to Step\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{itm:view}.
+      \glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+
+   \glsni{item}\glsni{label}\marg{itm:view} View the PDF file to check the result.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{enumerate}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Output:
+\begin{result}[enumerateref.html]
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+   \item\label{itm:edit} Write or edit the source code.
+
+   \item Pass the source code to the \texttt{latex} or \texttt{pdflatex} application 
+        (\dq{\LaTeX\ the document}).
+
+      \begin{itemize}
+
+         \item If there are any error messages, 
+               return to Step~\ref*{itm:edit}.
+
+         \item If there are no error messages, a PDF file
+               is created, go to Step~\ref*{itm:view}.
+      \end{itemize}
+
+   \item\label{itm:view} View the PDF file to check the result.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{result}
+
+The \gls{ref} and \gls{pageref} commands may come before or
+after the corresponding \gls{label} command.  As with the table
+of contents, \LaTeX\ first writes out all the cross-referencing
+information to another file (the \iauxfile, see \sectionref{sec:auxiliary}) and then reads it in the
+next time, so you will need to \LaTeX\ your document twice to get
+everything up-to-date.
+
+If the references aren't up-to-date, you will see the following
+message at the end of the \LaTeX\ run:
+\begin{verbatim}
+LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. 
+Rerun to get cross-references right.
+\end{verbatim}
+The following warning
+\begin{verbatim}
+LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references.
+\end{verbatim}
+means that \LaTeX\ found a reference to a label that
+does not appear in the auxiliary file\indexAUX.  This could
+mean that it's a new label, and the warning
+will go away the next time you \LaTeX\ your document,
+or it could mean that either you've forgotten to
+define your label with the \gls{label} command,
+or you've simply misspelt the label. The undefined references
+will show up as two question marks \doublequestionmark\ in the \gls{output}.
+
+\faq{\dq{Rerun} messages won't go away}{rerun}Very occasionally, if you have cross-references
+and a table of contents, you might have to \LaTeX\ 
+your document three times to get everything up to
+date.  Just check to see if the \texttt{Label(s) may have changed}
+warning appears.
+
+If you find it inconvenient having to remember to click the typeset
+button twice, you can use \iappname{latexmk}. This will run \LaTeX\
+the required number of times to ensure the document is up-to-date.
+To do this in TeXWorks, change the drop-down menu to \dq{LaTeXmk}, as
+illustrated in \figureref{fig:latexmk}. Note that \appname{latexmk}
+is a \gls{perl} script, so you need to make sure you have
+\iappname{perl} installed (see \sectionref{sec:perl}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-latexmk}
+ {%
+   \caption{Selecting LaTeXmk in TeXWorks}
+ }%
+ {fig:latexmk}
+\end{figure}
+
+If \appname{latexmk} isn't listed in the drop-down menu, you can add
+it via \menu{Edit}\menuto\menu{Preferences}. This opens the dialog
+box shown in \figureref{fig:texworks-pref}. You can add a new tool
+as follows:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item To the right of the box
+labelled \dq{Processing Tools} there is a button marked with a plus
+(+) sign. Click on it to open the tool configuration dialog, shown
+in \figureref{fig:texworks-toolconfig}.
+
+\item Fill in the name \dq{LaTeXmk} in the box labelled \dq{Name} and either type
+in the location of \appname{latexmk} in the box labelled \dq{Program} 
+or use the \dq{Browse} button to locate it on your filing system.
+(See \figureref{fig:texworks-toolconfig2}.) This will vary depending
+on your operating system and \gls{tex}-distribution, but it will
+probably be in a subdirectory (folder) called \texttt{bin} somewhere
+in the \gls*{tex}-distribution tree.
+
+\item There are lots of options that can be passed to
+\appname{latexmk}, but if you want to produce PDF output you need to
+add \texttt{-pdf} as an argument. This is done by clicking on the
+button marked with a plus to the right of the \dq{Arguments} box and
+type \texttt{-pdf}, as shown in \figureref{fig:texworks-toolconfig3}.
+
+\item Another argument needs to be added that specifies the
+basename of the \LaTeX\ file. This is done by again clicking on the
+plus button and typing \verb|$basename|, as shown in
+\figureref{fig:texworks-toolconfig4} .
+
+\item Click on \dq{OK} to close the Tool Configuration dialog.
+
+\item If you want to set \appname{latexmk} to be your default
+processing tool, you can select it from the drop-down list labelled
+\dq{Default}.
+
+\item Click \dq{OK} when you're done.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-preferences}
+ {%
+    \caption{TeXWorks Preferences}
+ }
+ {fig:texworks-pref} 
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-toolconfig1}
+ {%
+    \caption{Tool Configuration Dialog}
+ }
+ {fig:texworks-toolconfig} 
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-toolconfig2}
+ {%
+    \caption{Tool Configuration Dialog: set the name and program
+location}
+ }
+ {fig:texworks-toolconfig2} 
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-toolconfig3}
+ {%
+    \caption{Tool Configuration Dialog: adding \protect\texttt{-pdf} argument}
+ }
+ {fig:texworks-toolconfig3} 
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-toolconfig4}
+ {%
+    \caption{Tool Configuration Dialog: adding \protect\texttt{\$basename} argument}
+ }
+ {fig:texworks-toolconfig4} 
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Cross-Referencing}{ex:crossref}
+
+Try modifying your code so that it has cross-references.
+Again, changes made from the previous exercise are
+illustrated \modification{like this}:
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrreprt}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\glsni{tableofcontents}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}
+A brief document to illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.
+\glsni{end}\marg{abstract}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\modification{\glsni{label}\marg{ch:intro}}
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{The First Section}
+
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.  Here is the first paragraph.
+\modification{The next chapter is Chapter\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ch:another}}
+\modification{and is on page\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{pageref}\marg{ch:another}.}
+\modification{The next section is Section\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{sec:next}.}
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{The Next Section}
+\modification{\glsni{label}\marg{sec:next}}
+
+Here is the second paragraph\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}. 
+As you can see it's a rather short paragraph, but not 
+as short as the previous one. This document was 
+created on: \glsni{today}\glsni{spacesym}at \glsni{currenttime}.
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Another Chapter}
+\modification{\glsni{label}\marg{ch:another}}
+
+Here's another very interesting chapter.
+We're going to put a picture here later.
+\modification{See Chapter\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ch:intro} for an }
+\modification{introduction.}
+
+\glsni{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+I would like to acknowledge all those
+very helpful people who have assisted
+me in my work.
+
+\glsni{appendix}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Tables}
+
+We will turn this tabular environment into a table later.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lrr}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Expenditure}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year1} \glsni{ampchar} \glsni{multicolumn}\marg{1}\marg{c}\marg{Year2}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Travel \glsni{ampchar} 100,000 \glsni{ampchar} 110,000\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{bfseries} Equipment \glsni{ampchar} 50,000 \glsni{ampchar} 60,000
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+(You can \download{crossref} a copy of this file.)
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{biblio}
+\section{Creating a Bibliography}
+\label{sec:bib}
+
+If you have a large number of citations in your document, it's best
+to use an external bibliographic application\faq{Creating a BibTeX
+bibliography file}{buildbib}, such as \iappname{bibtex} or
+\iappname{biber}. However, that is beyond the scope of this
+book (see, instead, \latexguide, \latexcomp\
+or \latexthesis). Therefore this section just gives a brief
+explanation of the \gls{env-thebibliography} environment, which is
+usually automatically generated using \appname{bibtex} or
+\appname{biber}.
+
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{\meta{widest tag}}
+\end{definition}
+This environment is very similar to the list making environments described
+in \sectionref{sec:lists}, but instead of \gls{item} use 
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{bibitem}\oarg{\meta{tag}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{key} is a unique keyword that identifies this
+item.  Your keyword can be anything you like, but as with
+\glsni{label} I~recommend that you use
+a short memorable keyword. I~tend to use the first author's surname
+followed by the year of publication. 
+
+The bibliography heading depends on the class file you are using.
+Most of the article-style classes, such as \icls{scrreprt}, use
+\glsi{refname} (which produces \dq{\refname}) in an unnumbered
+section, whereas the report and book-styles, such as \icls{scrreprt}
+and \icls{scrbook}, use \glsi{bibname} (which produces
+\dq{\bibname}) in an unnumbered chapter. See
+\tableref{tab:textlab} for the list of the common textual label
+commands.
+
+Most class files don't automatically add the bibliography to the
+table of contents. The \koma\ classes provide the
+\scrclsopt{bibliography} option. This can be
+\scrclsopt[totoc]{bibliography} (an unnumbered unit added to the
+table of contents), for example,
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{bibliography=totoc}\marg{scrreprt}
+\end{codeS}
+or \scrclsopt[totocnumbered]{bibliography} (a
+numbered unit added to the table of contents), for example,
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{bibliography=totocnumbered}\marg{scrreprt}
+\end{codeS}
+If you're not using
+one of the \koma\ classes, consult the 
+\htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc} for your class to see if
+there is an equivalent option. Failing that, you can use
+\gls{addcontentsline} (described in \sectionref{sec:toc}).
+For example (using a class that defines chapters):
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{addcontentsline}\marg{toc}\marg{chapter}\marg{\glsni{bibname}}\\
+\glsni{begin}\marg{bibliography}\marg{1}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+(This example uses the command \gls{LaTeXe} which produces the
+\LaTeXe\ logo. This indicates the current version of \LaTeX\ rather
+than the old 2.09 version.)\footnote{If a friend or colleague gives
+you a file containing \cmdname{documentstyle} instead of \cmdname{documentclass}
+they are nearly 20~years out of date.}
+The class style in use is \cls{scrbook}, so the title is
+given by \glsni{bibname} (\dq{Bibliography}).
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{3}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{lamport94} \glsni{quotedblleft}\glsni{LaTeX}: a document preparation 
+system\glsni{quotedblright}, Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition (updated for 
+\glsni{LaTeXe}), Addison-Wesley (1994).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{kopka95} \glsni{quotedblleft}A Guide to \glsni{LaTeX}: document 
+preparation for beginners and advanced users\glsni{quotedblright}, 
+Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, Addison-Wesley (1995).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{goossens94} \glsni{quotedblleft}The 
+\glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}Companion\glsni{quotedblright}, 
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and
+Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, (1994).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{thebibliography}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[references.html]
+\dobibexamplenumbered
+\end{result}
+
+You can cite an item in your bibliography with the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{cite}\oarg{\meta{text}}\marg{\meta{key list}}
+\end{definition}%
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+For more information about writing bibliographies see 
+Goossens \glsni{emph}\marg{et al.}\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{goossens94}.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{resultS}[cite.html]
+For more information about writing
+bibliographies see 
+Goossens \emph{et al.}~[3].
+\end{resultS}
+If you want to cite multiple works, use 
+a comma-separated list:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+For more information about writing bibliographies 
+see\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{kopka95,goossens94}.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{resultS}[mcite.html]
+For more information about writing bibliographies 
+see~[2,3].
+\end{resultS}
+The \gls{optional} \meta{text} to
+the \glsni{cite} command can be used to add text to the
+citation.  
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+For more information about writing bibliographies see 
+Goossens \glsni{emph}\marg{et al.}\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\oarg{Chapter~13}\marg{goossens94}.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{result}[chcite.html]
+For more information about writing bibliographies see 
+Goossens \emph{et al.}~[3, Chapter~13].
+\end{result}
+
+The \gls{env-thebibliography} environment has
+a \gls{mandatory}:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{\meta{widest tag}}
+\end{definition}%
+The argument \meta{widest tag} is the widest tag in the list of
+entries.  This helps \LaTeX\ to align the references correctly.  In
+the example above, the tags appeared as: [1], [2] and [3], and [3]
+is the widest so that was used as the argument. These tags can be
+changed from the default numbers to something else using
+the optional argument to the \gls{bibitem} command. 
+
+\xminisec{Example (Textual Tags):}
+
+This example uses the \gls{optional} of \gls{bibitem} to use textual
+rather than numerical tags.  The widest tag is [Goossens 1994]
+so that is chosen to be the argument of the \gls{env-thebibliography}
+environment:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{Goossens 1994}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}[Lamport 1994]\marg{lamport94} 
+\glsni{quotedblleft}\glsni{LaTeX}\cmdname{ } : a document 
+preparation system\glsni{quotedblright}, Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition 
+(updated for \glsni{LaTeXe}), Addison-Wesley (1994).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}[Kopka 1995]\marg{kopka95} 
+\glsni{quotedblleft}A Guide to \glsni{LaTeX}: document 
+preparation for beginners and advanced users\glsni{quotedblright}, Helmut Kopka 
+and Patrick W. Daly, Addison-Wesley (1995).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{bibitem}[Goossens 1994]\marg{goossens94} 
+\glsni{quotedblleft}The \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}Companion\glsni{quotedblright}, 
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and
+Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, (1994).\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{thebibliography}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[references2.html]
+\dobibexamplelabelled
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating a Bibliography}{ex:biblio}
+
+Try adding the following chapter to your document:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Recommended Reading}
+
+For a basic introduction to \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}see
+Lamport\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{lamport94}. For
+more detailed information about \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}and
+associated applications, consult Kopka and
+Daly\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{kopka95} or Goossens
+\glsni{emph}\marg{et
+al}\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{goossens94}.
+\end{code}% 
+and also add the bibliography shown above to the end of your
+document. You can \downloadorview{biblio} the solution, but have a
+go by yourself first. Remember that, as before, you will need to
+\LaTeX\ the document twice to get the references up-to-date, unless
+you're using \iappname{latexmk} (as described in
+\sectionref{sec:crossref}) in which case it will be done
+automatically.
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Page Styles %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{pagestyle}
+\section{Page Styles and Page Numbering}
+\label{sec:pagestyle}
+
+You may have noticed that the documents you have created
+have all had their page numbers automatically inserted 
+at the foot of most of the pages\faq{Page numbering 
+\dq{\meta{n} of \meta{m}}}{nofm}.  If you have created the document
+that has gradually been modified over the previous few
+sections, you may have noticed that the title page has
+no header or footer, the table of contents starts on page~1,
+the abstract page has no page number, and the pages after
+the abstract start on page~1 and continue incrementally
+onwards from that point.  All the page numbers are Arabic
+numerals.  This can be changed using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{pagenumbering}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{style} can be one of:
+\begin{fwlist}{\pagenumberingfmt{arabic}}
+\fwitem{\ipagenumbering{arabic}} Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, \ldots)
+\fwitem{\ipagenumbering{roman}} Lower case Roman numerals (i, ii, iii, \ldots)
+\fwitem{\ipagenumbering{Roman}} Upper case Roman numerals (I, II, III, \ldots)
+\fwitem{\ipagenumbering{alph}} Lower case alphabetical characters (a, b, c, \ldots)
+\fwitem{\ipagenumbering{Alph}} Upper case alphabetical characters (A, B, C, \ldots)
+\end{fwlist}
+
+Traditionally, the front matter (table of contents, list of figures
+etc) should have lower case Roman numeral page numbering, while the
+main matter should be in Arabic numerals\faq{Page numbering by
+chapter}{pagebychap}.  
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\glsni{pagenumbering}\marg{roman}
+\glsni{tableofcontents}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}
+This is the abstract.
+\glsni{end}\marg{abstract}
+
+\glsni{pagenumbering}\marg{arabic}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+The \icls{scrbook} class provides:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{frontmatter}
+\end{definition}
+which switches to lower case Roman numeral page numbering, and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{mainmatter}
+\end{definition}
+which switches to Arabic numeral page numbering.
+These two declarations also
+change the way the sectioning units, such as \gls{chapter} and
+\gls{section}, appear.  The former, \glsni{frontmatter},
+suppresses the numbering (regardless of whether or not you've used
+the \htmlref{starred version}{itm:starredcommand} of the sectioning commands). The latter,
+\glsni{mainmatter}, switches the numbering back on (unless
+otherwise suppressed by using the starred sectioning commands). 
+In addition, \icls{scrbook} provides
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{backmatter}
+\end{definition}
+which doesn't affect the page numbering but, like \glsni{frontmatter}, suppresses the 
+sectional unit numbering.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+The \gls{env-abstract} environment isn't defined by the \icls{scrbook} class, as 
+a book summary is usually incorporated into an introductory section.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\glsni{frontmatter}
+\glsni{tableofcontents}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Summary}
+A brief document to
+illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.
+
+\glsni{mainmatter}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:intro}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+The headers and footers can be changed using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{pagestyle}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}%
+Individual pages can be changed using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{thispagestyle}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}%
+Standard styles are:
+\begin{fwlist}{myheadings}
+\fwitem{\ipagestyle{empty}} No header or footer. 
+\fwitem{\ipagestyle{plain}} Header empty, page number in footer.
+\fwitem{\ipagestyle{headings}}  Header contains page number and various information, 
+ footer empty. 
+\fwitem{\ipagestyle{myheadings}} Header specified by user, footer empty.
+\end{fwlist}
+
+If the \ipagestyle{myheadings} style is used, the header information
+can be specified using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{markboth}\marg{\meta{left head}}\marg{\meta{right head}}
+\end{definition}%
+if the \clsopt{twoside} option has been passed to the
+\gls{cls} (default for \icls{scrbook}), or
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{markright}\marg{\meta{right head}}
+\end{definition}%
+if the \clsopt{oneside} option has been passed to the \gls{cls}
+(default for \icls{scrartcl} and \icls{scrreprt}).
+
+The \icls{scrreprt} class file uses the \pagestylefmt{empty} style
+for the \Index{title} and \Index{abstract} pages and
+\pagestylefmt{plain} for the first page of each new chapter.  By
+default the remaining pages are also \pagestylefmt{plain}, but
+these can be changed using the \glsni{pagestyle} command.
+The \icls{scrbook} class defaults to the \pagestylefmt{headings}
+style instead of \pagestylefmt{plain}.
+
+\faq{Alternative head- and footlines in LaTeX}{fancyhdr}%
+The \koma\ bundle provides a way to define new page
+styles, but that's beyond the scope of this introductory tutorial. 
+See the \koma\ documentation for further details if you are
+interested.
+
+\casemedia
+ {% A4
+  This book mostly uses the \pagestylefmt{headings} page style and the
+  \icls{scrbook} class with the 
+  \clsopt{oneside} option, so there is no difference between odd and
+  even page headers, whereas the paperback version uses the
+  \clsopt{twoside} option, so the odd pages display the chapter
+   number and title and the even pages display the current section
+   header and title. The on-screen PDF version of this book uses a page style 
+  I~defined myself that incorporates a navigation bar in the footer.
+ }%
+ {% screen
+   This screen version of the book uses a page style I~defined myself
+   that incorporates a navigation bar in the footer. 
+   The \htmladdnormallink{A4 version}{\baseurl/latex/novices/novices-a4.pdf} mostly uses
+   the \pagestylefmt{headings} page style. If you look at it, you
+   will see that the chapter number and title appear on the top left and
+   the page number appears in the top right of most pages.  The 
+   \clsopt{oneside} option was used, so there is no difference between
+   the formatting of odd and even numbered pages. Whereas the paperback
+   version uses the \clsopt{twoside} option so the odd and even page
+   headers are different.
+ }
+ {% book
+  This book mostly\footnote{I made some modifications to the page style 
+  for the footers in the summary and index.}\ uses the \pagestylefmt{headings} 
+  page style and the \icls{scrbook} class with the 
+  \clsopt{twoside} option, so the odd and even page headers are
+  different, whereas the A4 PDF version (available from
+  \url{\baseurl/}) uses the \clsopt{oneside} option, so the odd and
+  even page headers are the same.
+  The on-screen PDF version of this book uses a page style 
+  I~defined myself that incorporates a navigation bar in the footer.
+ }
+ {% html
+   The \htmladdnormallink{A4
+   version}{\baseurl/latex/novices/novices-a4.pdf} of this book
+   mostly uses the \pagestylefmt{headings} page style.  If you look at it, you
+   will see that the chapter number and title appear on the top left and
+   the page number appears in the top right of most pages.  The 
+   \clsopt{oneside} option was used, so there is no difference between
+   the formatting of odd and even numbered pages. Whereas the paperback
+   version uses the \clsopt{twoside} option, so the odd pages display the chapter
+   number and title and the even pages display the current section
+   header and title.
+   The \htmladdnormallink{on-screen PDF
+   version}{\baseurl/latex/novices/novices-screen.pdf} of this book
+   uses a page style I~defined myself that incorporates a navigation bar
+   in the footer. 
+ }
+
+\begin{exercise}{Page Styles and Page Numbering}{ex:pagestyle}
+
+Try modifying your code so that it uses the \icls{scrbook} class,
+\gls{frontmatter} and \gls{mainmatter}. Replace the
+\gls{env-abstract} environment with an unnumbered chapter, as shown
+below. Again, changes made from the previous document are illustrated
+\modification{like this}:\screenpagebreak
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt}\marg{\modification{scrbook}}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datetime}
+
+\modification{\glsni{pagestyle}\marg{headings}}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\modification{\glsni{frontmatter}}
+\glsni{tableofcontents}
+
+\modification{\glsni{chapter}\marg{Summary}}
+A brief document to
+illustrate how to use \glsni{LaTeX}.
+
+\modification{\glsni{mainmatter}}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:intro}
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{The First Section}
+
+This is a simple \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+The next chapter is Chapter\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ch:another}
+and is on page\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{pageref}\marg{ch:another}.
+The next section is Section\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{sec:next}.
+
+\glsni{percentchar} Rest of document unchanged but 
+\glsni{percentchar} omitted for brevity.
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+(You can \downloadorview{pagestyle} the edited
+document.)
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% babel %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{babel}
+\section{Multi-Lingual Support: using the 
+\texorpdfstring{\sty{babel}}{babel} package}
+\label{sec:babel}
+
+You may have noticed that the \gls{tableofcontents} and
+\gls{chapter} commands have produced English words like
+\dq{Contents} and \dq{Chapter}\faq{How to change LaTeX's \dq{fixed
+names}}{fixnam}. If you are writing in another language, this is not
+appropriate. In this case, you can use the \isty{babel} package,
+and specify which language you will be using, either as an option to
+the \isty{babel} package, or as an option to the class file\faq{Using
+a new language with Babel}{newlang}.  If you are writing in more than
+one language, list all the languages that you will be using where
+the last named language is the default language\faq{Parallel
+setting of text}{parallel}. For example:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{english,french}\marg{babel}
+\end{alltt}
+or
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{english,french}\marg{scrreprt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{babel}
+\end{alltt}
+You can then switch between the named languages either using the 
+\gls{declaration}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{selectlanguage}\marg{\meta{language}}
+\end{definition}%
+or the \gls{env-otherlanguage} \glsterm{environment}:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{otherlanguage}\marg{\meta{language}}
+\end{definition}%
+These will affect all translations, including the date format
+and predefined names like \dq{Chapter}. This also changes the
+\gls{hyphenation} patterns.\latex{ (See \sectionref{sec:hyphenation}.)}
+
+If you only want to set a short section of text in a different
+language, without affecting the date format or predefined names,
+then you can either use the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{foreignlanguage}\marg{\meta{language}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+or the starred version of the \glsni{env-otherlanguage} environment:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{otherlanguage*}\marg{\meta{language}}
+\end{definition}%
+You can test to see if a given language is currently selected
+using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{iflanguage}\marg{\meta{language}}\marg{\meta{true text}}%
+\marg{\meta{false text}}
+\end{definition}%
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{UKenglish,USenglish,french}\marg{scrartcl}
+\glsni{percentchar} french is the last named option, so that's the current language
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{T1}\marg{fontenc}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{utf8}\marg{inputenc}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{babel}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+Ce texte est en fran\glsni{c}\marg{c}ais. La date aujourd'hui est: \glsni{today}.
+
+\glsni{selectlanguage}\marg{USenglish}
+This text is in US English. Today's date is: \glsni{today}.
+
+\glsni{selectlanguage}\marg{UKenglish}
+This text is in UK English. Today's date is: \glsni{today}.
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[babel.html]
+Ce texte est en fran\c{c}ais. La date aujourd'hui est~: 
+{\datefrench\docdate}.
+
+This text is in US English. Today's date is: {\usdate\docdate}.
+
+This text is in UK English. Today's date is: {\ukenglishdate\docdate}.
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning If you are using the \istyopt{babel}{french} option, the
+colon character (\Indextt{:}) is made active (that is, it's turned
+into a special character) so if you are writing in French it's best
+not to use a colon in labels (so where I've used, say,
+\texttt{ch:def} you may need to change the colon to something else).
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% graphicx %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{graphicx}
+\chapter{The \texorpdfstring{\sty{graphicx}}{graphicx} Package}
+\label{ch:graphicx}
+
+It is possible to generate images using \LaTeX\ commands\faq{Drawing
+with TeX}{drawing} (See the \isty{pgf}\slash\isty{tikz} package or
+\latexgraphic) however most people find it easier to create a
+picture in some other application, and include that file into their
+\LaTeX\ document.
+
+PDF\LaTeX\ can insert PDF, PNG and JPG image files into your
+document. If your image file is in a different format, you may be
+able to find an application to convert it. \faq{Spawning programs
+from (La)TeX: \cmdname{write}18}{spawnprog}Modern
+\gls{tex}-distributions can automatically convert EPS\indexEPS\
+files to PDF during the \LaTeX\ run using the \gls{perl} script
+\iappname{epstopdf}. If your \gls{tex}-distribution doesn't support
+this, you can convert your EPS file using \appname{epstopdf}
+explicitly. For example, if you have an EPS image called, say,
+\texttt{sample-image.eps}, you can convert it to a PDF image called
+\texttt{sample-image.pdf}, by using the following command in a
+\glslink{terminal}{terminal or command prompt}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+epstopdf sample-image.eps
+\end{verbatim}
+or (full path name may be required)
+\begin{verbatim}
+perl epstopdf sample-image.eps
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To insert an image file into your document, you first need to specify that 
+you want to use the \isty{graphicx} package. So the following must 
+go in the \gls{preamble}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{codeS}
+The image can then be included in your document using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{includegraphics}\oarg{\meta{key-val options}}\marg{\meta{filename}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{filename} is the name of your image file \emph{without the file
+extension}\faq{\dq{Modern} graphics file names}{grffilenames}, and
+\meta{key-val options} is a comma-separated list of options that can be
+used to change the way the image is displayed. Note that if you have an 
+image where the file name contain spaces or multiple dots, you need to
+use the \isty{grffile} package:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx,grffile}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Example:} 
+
+Suppose you had a file called \texttt{shapes.pdf}, then to
+include it in your document you would do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}%
+which would produce:
+\begin{resultS*}
+\incGraphics[alt=Image of some shapes]{pictures/shapes}
+\end{resultS*}
+
+You can specify a full or relative pathname, but you must use a
+forward slash \gls{dir.slash} as the directory divider, even if you are using
+Windows. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{pictures\glsni{dir.slash}shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+means the file \texttt{pictures/shapes.pdf} on Unix-type systems,
+and it means the file \texttt{pictures\backslashsym shapes.pdf} on
+Windows.\footnote{Or \texttt{shapes.png} or \texttt{shapes.jpg} or
+\texttt{shapes.eps}. The example assumes a PDF image file.} This is
+mainly because the backslash character is a \LaTeX\ special
+character indicating a command, but it also helps portability
+between platforms.
+
+You can specify the order of the file types to look for with the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DeclareGraphicsExtensions}\marg{\meta{ext-list}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{ext-list} is a comma-separated list of extensions.  
+For example, 
+you might want to search first for PDF files, then for PNG files,
+then for JPG files and finally for EPS files:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{DeclareGraphicsExtensions}\marg{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.eps}
+\end{codeS}%
+The default for \iPDFLaTeX\ is:
+\begin{flushleft}\ttfamily
+.png\comma .pdf\comma .jpg\comma .mps\comma .jpeg\comma .jbig2\comma .jb2\comma .PNG\comma .PDF\comma .JPG\comma .JPEG\comma .JBIG2\comma .JB2\comma .eps
+\end{flushleft}
+
+The \gls{optional} \meta{key-val options}
+should be a comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}\texttt{=}\meta{value} pairs. Common options are:
+
+\begin{fwlist}{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{trim}=\meta{l} \meta{b} \meta{r} \meta{t}}
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{angle}=\meta{\mathorit{x}}} rotate the image
+by \degrees{x} anticlockwise.
+
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{width}=\meta{length}} scale the image so that the
+width is \meta{length}.  (Remember to specify the
+\htmlref{units}{tab:units}.)
+
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{height}=\meta{length}}  scale the image so that the
+height is \meta{length}.  (Remember to specify the
+\htmlref{units}{tab:units}.)
+
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{scale}=\meta{value}} Scale the image by \meta{value}
+
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{trim}=\meta{l} \meta{b} \meta{r} \meta{t}}  Specifies
+the amount to remove from each side.  For example
+\begin{codeS}
+ \glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{trim=1 2 3 4}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+crops the image by 1bp from the left, 2bp from the bottom, 3bp from
+the right and 4bp from the top. (Recall the \iunit{bp}{big point} unit
+from \tableref{tab:units}.)\reportpagebreak
+
+\fwitem{\ikeyvalopt{includegraphics}{draft}}  Don't actually print the image, just draw a
+box of the same size and print the filename inside it. 
+
+\end{fwlist}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This example first rotates the image by \degrees{45} anticlockwise,
+then scales it so that the width is 1~inch.
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{angle=45,width=1in}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\begin{resultS}[Image of shapes rotated then scaled]
+\includegraphics[angle=45,width=1in]{pictures/shapes}
+\end{resultS}
+
+Note that this isn't the same as scaling and then rotating:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{width=1in,angle=45}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\begin{resultS}[Image of shapes scaled then rotated]
+\includegraphics[width=1in,angle=45]{pictures/shapes}
+\end{resultS}
+
+You can also scale an image relative to the text area using the
+\gls{length} registers \gls{textwidth} and \gls{textheight}. For
+example, to scale a portrait image so that its height is
+three-quarters of the text area height, you can do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{height=0.75\glsni{textheight}}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+or to scale a landscape image so that its width is half the text
+area width, you can do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{height=0.5\glsni{textwidth}}\marg{shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+The \gls{includegraphics} command is another form of box (see
+\sectionref{sec:boxes}), and can be used in the middle of a line of
+text, just like the \gls{env-tabular} environment. See
+\sectionref{sec:figures} to find out how to put the image in a
+figure with a caption.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{example:inlinegraphic}%
+Recall the \iunit{ex}{relative unit} unit of measure from
+\tableref{tab:units}. This can be used to scale
+an image relative to the font size:
+\begin{code}
+An image can be inserted into a line
+of text like this:
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{height=2ex}\marg{shapes}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image of typeset output: the included image has been
+scaled so that it fits into the line of text]
+An image can be inserted into a line
+of text like this:
+\includegraphics[height=2ex]{pictures/shapes}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\setnode{graphictrans}
+\section{Graphical Transformations}
+\label{sec:graphtrans}
+
+The \isty{graphicx} package also provides commands to rotate, resize, 
+reflect and scale text.  They are as follows:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{rotatebox}\oarg{\meta{option list}}\marg{\meta{angle}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Rotates \meta{text} by \meta{angle} (degrees anti-clockwise by
+default). The optional argument \meta{option list} is a
+comma-separated list of any of the following options:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \ikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{units}=\meta{number}
+
+    The number of units in one full anti-clockwise rotation. So
+    \texttt{units=-360} means that \meta{angle} specifies degrees
+    clockwise whereas \texttt{units=6.283185} means that
+    \meta{angle} is in radians.
+
+  \item \ikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{origin}=\meta{label}
+
+    The point of rotation.
+    The value \meta{label} may contain one from either or both of
+    the two lists: \texttt{lrc} (left, right, centre) and \texttt{tbB}
+    (top, bottom, baseline). Alternatively the origin may be
+    specified using the following two keys:
+
+  \item \ikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{x}=\meta{dimen}
+
+  \item \ikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{y}=\meta{dimen}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+base line
+\glsni{rotatebox}\marg{45}\marg{Some text}
+\glsni{rotatebox}\oarg{units=-360}\marg{45}\marg{Some text}
+\glsni{rotatebox}\oarg{units=-360,origin=rB}\marg{45}\marg{Some text}
+\glsni{rotatebox}\oarg{x=3em,y=3em}\marg{45}\marg{Some text}
+base line
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\screenpagebreak
+\begin{result}[Image of typeset output: each occurrence of 'Some text' has been rotated]
+base line
+\rotatebox{45}{Some text}
+\rotatebox[units=-360]{45}{Some text}
+\rotatebox[units=-360,origin=rB]{45}{Some text}
+\rotatebox[x=3em,y=3em]{45}{Some text}
+base line
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{scalebox}\marg{\meta{h scale}}\oarg{\meta{v scale}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Scales \meta{text} by \meta{h scale} in both directions if \meta{v
+scale} omitted, otherwise scales \meta{text} by \meta{h scale}
+horizontally and \meta{y scale} vertically.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{scalebox}\marg{0.8}\marg{Some text}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some text (scaled by a factor of 0.8)]
+\scalebox{0.8}{Some text}
+\end{resultS}
+Compare with:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{scalebox}\marg{0.8}\oarg{1.2}\marg{Some text}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some text (aspect ratio changed)]
+\scalebox{0.8}[1.2]{Some text}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{reflectbox}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Reflects \meta{text} (equivalent to \glsni{scalebox}\marg{-1}\oarg{1}\marg{\meta{text}}).
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{reflectbox}\marg{Some text}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Some text (mirror image)]
+\reflectbox{Some text}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{resizebox}\marg{\meta{h length}}\marg{\meta{v length}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+Scales \meta{text} so that it is \meta{h length} wide and \meta{v
+length} high. To preserve the aspect ratio, use \gls{resizebox.exclamchar}
+instead of one of the dimensions.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{resizebox}\marg{12mm}\marg{1cm}\marg{Some text}
+\glsni{resizebox}\marg{\glsni{resizebox.exclamchar}}\marg{1cm}\marg{Some text}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of typeset output: two instances of 'Some text' scaled with and without changing the aspect ratio.]
+\dohtmlcolorbox{%
+\resizebox{12mm}{1cm}{Some text}
+\resizebox{!}{1cm}{Some text}
+}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\setnode{graphicxoptions}
+\section{Package Options}
+
+The \isty{graphicx} package can have the following options passed to 
+it:
+\begin{fwlist}{\optfmt{hiderotate}}
+\fwitem{\mdseries \istyopt{graphicx}{draft}} Don't actually display the
+images, just print the filename in a box of the correct size.  This
+is useful if you want to print out a draft copy of a document to
+check the text rather than the images.
+
+\fwitem{\mdseries \istyopt{graphicx}{final}} Opposite of 
+\istyopt{graphicx}{draft} (default).
+
+\fwitem{\mdseries \istyopt{graphicx}{hiderotate}} Don't show rotated
+text.
+
+\fwitem{\mdseries \istyopt{graphicx}{hidescale}} Don't show scaled text.
+
+\end{fwlist}
+
+Remember that relevant options passed to the class file\indexCLS\ also 
+affect packages.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Draft Mode):}
+
+Draft mode helps to speed up compilation of a large document when
+you are editing the text. In the preamble:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{draft}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{codeS}
+or
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{draft}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Later in the document:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{width=1in,angle=45}\marg{pictures/shapes}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Only bounding box and file name drawn]
+ \incGraphics{pictures/draftimage}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Using the \sty{graphicx} Package}{ex:graphicx}
+
+Download the image file
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{shapes.pdf}}{\exerciseurl/shapes.pdf}%
+\latex{ from \url{\exerciseurl/}} (or create your own image),
+and include it into your document. (You
+can \downloadorview{graphicx} an example solution.)
+\end{exercise}
+
+\bookpagebreak\screenpagebreak
+For more information on the \isty{graphicx} package see
+\latexgraphic\ or the \isty{graphicx} documentation.
+
+\xminisec{Related \gls{ukfaq} topics:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \faqlink{How to import graphics into (La)TeX documents}{impgraph}
+\item \faqlink{Imported graphics in PDFLaTeX}{pdftexgraphics}
+\item \faqlink{Imported graphics in dvips}{dvipsgraphics}
+\item \faqlink{Imported graphics in dvipdfm}{dvipdfmgraphics}
+\item \faqlink{Importing graphics from \dq{somewhere else}}{graphicspath}
+\item \faqlink{Portable imported graphics}{graph-pspdf}
+\item \faqlink{Repeated graphics in a document}{repeatgrf}
+\item \faqlink{Limit the width of imported graphics}{grmaxwidth}
+\item \faqlink{Top-aligning imported graphics}{topgraph}
+\item \faqlink{Labelling graphics}{labelfig}
+\item \faqlink{Graphics division by zero}{divzero}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FLOATS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{floats}
+\chapter{Floats}
+\label{ch:floats}
+
+Figures and tables are referred to as \dq{floats} because they are
+\emph{floated} to the nearest location. This prevents ugly large
+spaces appearing on the page if there isn't enough room for the
+figure or table before the page break. Floats have a caption and
+associated number\faq{The style of captions}{captsty}. It is
+customary for captions to appear at the bottom of figures but at the
+top of tables~\cite{turabian96,oxford}.
+
+For both figures and tables, the caption is generated using the 
+command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{caption}\oarg{\meta{short caption}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+Note that the \cmdname{caption} command has a
+moving argument\index{argument!moving|hyperpage}, so
+\glspl{fragile}\faq{Footnotes in captions}{ftncapt} will need to be
+protected using \gls{protect}.  The \glsterm{optional}
+\meta{short caption} is used to provide an alternative shorter
+caption for the list of figures or list of tables, akin to the
+optional argument to the \htmlref{sectioning
+commands}{sec:section}\latex{\ifscreenorother{}{\ described in
+\sectionref{sec:section}}}.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+Although the \glsni{caption} command can have an optional
+short title, in general, captions should be brief. They should not
+contain lots of description or background detail~\cite{turabian96}.
+That type of information should be placed in the main text not the
+caption.
+
+\xminisec{Positioning:}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:positioning}%
+\faq{Wide figures in two-column documents}{widefigs}Both the 
+\glsni{env-figure} and \glsni{env-table} environments have
+an optional argument \meta{placement specifiers}, which indicates
+permissible locations for the float. This may be a combination of
+\texttt{h} (\dq{here}), \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{b} (bottom) and
+\texttt{p} (page of floats.) Note that this only gives a general
+guideline as to where the float will end up. The final location is
+governed by other factors, such as space left on the page and the
+proportion of text to floats on the page. If you omit one or more of the
+placement specifiers, then you are prohibiting the float from being
+placed in that location. A common mistake is to do
+\begin{alltt}
+\wrong\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{h}
+\end{alltt}
+which says \dq{I~want the figure here and it can't go anywhere
+else!} If the figure \emph{can't} be placed exactly here (for
+example, there may not be enough room on the page), then you have
+given it no alternative location, which can result in this and all
+subsequent figures being dumped at the end of the chapter or
+document, or can result in a fatal error when running
+\LaTeX\faq{\dq{Too many unprocessed floats}}{tmupfl}. You may be
+able to manage with only one of the other options, for example,
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{t}
+\end{alltt}
+(In fact, modern \TeX\ distributions now replace \oarg{h} with
+\oarg{t} if the float can't be placed.)
+However, if you have a large number of floats it is advisable to
+provide as many options as possible:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}
+\end{alltt}
+Similarly for tables.
+
+If you are absolutely adamant that an image must go \dq{right here},
+then it's not a float, and you shouldn't be using the 
+\glsni{env-figure} environment. It's just a horizontal box, like the
+example \xpageref{earlier}{example:inlinegraphic}. Similarly for
+tabulated material.
+
+It's worth bearing in mind what the Oxford Style Manual~\cite{oxford} has to say:
+\begin{quote}
+\dq{Text must not be read into it so as to give [the figure] an
+explicit and fixed introduction, for example \sq{in the following
+figure}: the final placement is determined by page breaks, which
+cannot be anticipated before setting, and this makes rewording the
+text necessary if the illustration does not fit the make-up of the
+page.}
+\end{quote}
+Turabian~\cite{turabian96} gives the same advice (and reiterates it for 
+figures):
+\begin{quote}
+\dq{All text references to a table should be by a number, not by an
+introductory phrase such as \sq{in the following table}.}
+\end{quote}
+
+\setnode{figures}
+\section{Figures}
+\label{sec:figures}
+
+Figures are created using the \gls{env-figure} environment.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{\meta{placement specifiers}}
+\end{definition}%
+This environment may contain one or more captions (specified, as
+described \htmlref{above}{ch:floats}, with
+the \glsni{caption} command) but page breaks are not allowed in the
+contents of a \glsni{env-figure} environment. The optional argument
+\meta{placement specifiers} is as described
+\htmlref{above}{obj:positioning}.
+
+Recall from \chapterref{ch:graphicx} that we
+can include an image in our document with
+the command \gls{includegraphics} defined in the \isty{graphicx}
+package.  We can put our
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{shapes.pdf}}{\exerciseurl/shapes.pdf} image
+into a figure as follows:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{shapes}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{Some Shapes}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{code}%
+So far so good, but our picture needs to be centred.  This can
+be done using the \gls{centering} declaration mentioned in
+\sectionref{sec:declaration}:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{shapes}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{Some Shapes}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{code}
+The \gls{caption} command generates a number, just like
+\gls{section}, so we can
+\htmlref{cross-reference}{sec:crossref} it with \gls{ref} and
+\gls{label}.  First, let's label the figure:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{shapes}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{Some Shapes}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{label}\marg{fig:shapes}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{code}%
+Now we can reference it:
+\begin{codeS}
+Figure\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{fig:shapes} shows some shapes.
+\end{codeS}%
+(As \htmlref{before}{cmd:tilde} we use \gls{tildechar}
+to make an unbreakable space.)  This produces the following output
+in the text:
+\begin{resultS}[Figure 7.1 shows some shapes.]
+Figure~\ref*{fig:shapes} shows some shapes.
+\end{resultS}%
+and produces \figureref{fig:shapes}.
+
+\begin{figure}[hbtp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/shapes}
+  {%
+    \caption{Some Shapes}%
+  }%
+  {fig:shapes}
+\end{figure}
+
+\xminisec{Important Note:}
+
+If you want to change the caption font, \textbf{\em don't} do, e.g.:
+\begin{alltt}
+\wrong\glsni{caption}\marg{\gls{bfseries} Some Shapes}
+\end{alltt}
+Recall \gls{addtokomafont} from \sectionref{sec:section}. This can
+also be used to change the fonts used by the caption.\bookpagebreak
+\begin{alltt}
+\correct\glsni{addtokomafont}\marg{caption}\marg{\glsni{bfseries}}
+\end{alltt}
+Similarly for the caption label. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{addtokomafont}\marg{captionlabel}\marg{\glsni{scshape}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{List of Figures}
+
+Just as we were able to generate a \htmlref{table of
+contents}{sec:toc} using \gls{tableofcontents}, we can also
+generate a list of figures using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{listoffigures}
+\end{definition}
+This creates a file with the extension \texttt{.lof}\indexLOF\ (see
+\sectionref{sec:auxiliary}).
+As with \reportlinebreak\glsni{tableofcontents} you will need to \LaTeX\ your document twice to
+get the list of figures up-to-date, unless
+you're using \iappname{latexmk} (as described in
+\sectionref{sec:crossref}) in which case it will be done
+automatically.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating Figures}{ex:figures}
+
+If you did \exerciseref{ex:graphicx}, you should have a document
+with an image in it. You now need to put this image into a
+\gls{env-figure} environment. Remember to centre the image, and give
+the figure a caption. Next, try labelling the figure and referencing
+it in the text. You could also put in a list of figures after the
+table of contents.
+You can \downloadorview{figures} an example.
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+\setnode{sidebysidefigs}
+\subsection{Side-By-Side Figures}
+\label{sec:sidebysidefigs}
+
+Recall at the start of \sectionref{sec:figures}, I mentioned that
+the \gls{env-figure} environment may contain one or more captions.
+In most cases, you'll just have a single caption per
+\glsni{env-figure} environment, but sometimes you may want to have
+two figures side-by-side, in which case you'll need two captions
+within the same \gls{env-figure} environment in order to keep the
+figures together.
+
+To do this, we can use the 
+\gls{env-minipage} environment, which was covered 
+in \sectionref{sec:boxes}. Recall that 
+the \gls*{env-minipage} environment creates a 
+\Index{horizontal box}, which means that two mini-pages can
+be placed side-by-side on the same line. All you need to do 
+now, is place one image and caption in one mini-page, and the
+other image and caption in the neighbouring mini-page. (Do you remember what effect is obtained
+by placing a \htmlref{percent symbol}{obj:suppresseol} at the end of a
+line?)\doifbook{\footnote{See page~\pageref{obj:suppresseol}.}}\bookpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{circle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{A Circle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{label}\marg{fig:circle}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{rectangle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{A Rectangle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{label}\marg{fig:rectangle}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{code}%
+\latex{The above code produces 
+Figures~\ref{fig:circle-sbs} and~\vref{fig:rectangle-sbs}. }Note that each
+mini-page uses \gls{centering} to centre its contents, and the
+label is also placed in the same mini-page, after the
+\gls{caption} command. If the \gls{label} was not in the same
+\htmlref{scope}{sec:group} as the \gls{caption}, the
+cross-reference would be incorrect.
+
+A common mistake when trying to create side-by-side figures is
+to do:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}[htbp]
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+  \glsni{centering}
+  \glsni{includegraphics}\marg{circle}
+  \glsni{caption}\marg{A Circle}
+  \glsni{label}\marg{fig:circle}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{minipage}
+\wrong
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+  \glsni{centering}
+  \glsni{includegraphics}\marg{rectangle}
+  \glsni{caption}\marg{A Rectangle}
+  \glsni{label}\marg{fig:rectangle}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{minipage}
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{alltt}
+This produces one figure on top of the other, instead of
+side-by-side\html{, as illustrated in \figureref{fig:circle-sbs} and
+\figureref{fig:rectangle-sbs}}. This is because the blank
+line indicates a paragraph break, so each minipage is in a separate
+paragraph, so it's not possible for them to be on the same line.
+
+If you want a bit of spacing in your code to make it more readable,
+use \gls{percentchar} to comment out the paragraph break. For
+example:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{end}\marg{minipage}%
+\correct\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+\end{alltt}
+
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+  \begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+    \figuretop{fig:circle-sbs}
+    \centering
+    \incGraphics[alt=Image of a circle]{pictures/circle}
+    \caption{A Circle}
+    \label{fig:circle-sbs}
+  \end{minipage}%
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+    \figuretop{fig:rectangle-sbs}
+    \centering
+    \incGraphics[alt=Image of a rectangle]{pictures/rectangle}
+    \caption{A Rectangle}
+    \label{fig:rectangle-sbs}
+  \end{minipage}
+\end{figure}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Tables %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{tables}
+\section{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables are produced in much the same way as figures, except that the
+\gls{env-table} environment is used instead.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{table}\oarg{\meta{placement specifiers}}
+\end{definition}
+Where the optional argument \meta{placement specifiers} is as described
+\xpageref{earlier}{obj:positioning}.
+
+As mentioned at the \htmlref{start of this chapter}{ch:floats},
+tables typically have the caption at the top of the
+table~\cite{turabian96}. With the \koma\ classes, such as
+\icls{scrartcl}, \icls{scrreprt} and \icls{scrbook}, use the class
+option \scrclsopt[tableabove]{captions} to ensure that the vertical
+spacing appears correctly between the caption and the table content
+and put \gls{caption} at the start of the \envname{table}
+environment. \faq{Tables longer than a single page}{longtab}Page
+breaks are not permitted in the \glsni{env-table}
+environment. (The \isty{longtable} package can be used for that
+instead. See the \sty{longtable} \htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc} for 
+further details.)
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+In the \glsterm{preamble}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{captions=tableabove}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+Later in the document:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{table}\oarg{htbp}
+ \glsni{caption}\marg{A Sample Table} 
+ \glsni{label}\marg{tab:sample}
+ \glsni{centering}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}
+ Item  \glsni{ampchar} Cost\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ Video \glsni{ampchar} 8.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ CD    \glsni{ampchar} 9.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ DVD   \glsni{ampchar} 15.00
+ \glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+\glsni{end}\marg{table}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+This produces \tableref{tab:sample}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{A Sample Table}
+\label{tab:sample}
+\centering
+\begin{makeimage}
+\begin{tabular}{lr}
+Item & Cost\\
+Video & 8.99\\
+CD    & 9.99\\
+DVD   & 15.00
+\end{tabular}
+\end{makeimage}
+\end{table}
+
+Again, the \gls{centering} declaration is used to centre the
+\gls{env-tabular} environment.
+As with figures, you can create a list of tables using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{listoftables}
+\end{definition}
+This creates a file with the extension \texttt{.lot}\indexLOT\ (see
+\sectionref{sec:auxiliary}).
+As with the table of contents and list of figures, you will need to
+\LaTeX\ your document twice to get the list of tables up-to-date, unless
+you're using \iappname{latexmk} (as described in
+\sectionref{sec:crossref}) in which case it will be done
+automatically.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating Tables}{ex:tables}
+If you did \exerciseref{ex:tabular}, you should have 
+a \gls{env-tabular} environment in your document.  Try
+turning this into a table, and add \tableref{tab:sample}.  
+You could also try adding a list of tables.
+As before, you can \downloadorview{tables} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+\setnode{sidebysidetab}
+\subsection{Side-by-Side Tables}
+\label{sec:sidebysidetab}
+
+You can create side-by-side tables using an analogous method to 
+the side-by-side figures approach described
+\htmlref{above}{sec:sidebysidefigs}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This example is similar to the one in \sectionref{sec:sidebysidefigs}.
+Again, take care to ensure that there is no paragraph break between the
+two \gls{env-minipage} environments.
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{table}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+  \glsni{caption}\marg{Prices for 2011}
+  \glsni{label}\marg{tab:prices2011}
+  \glsni{centering}
+  \glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}
+   Item \glsni{ampchar} Price (\pounds)\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   Widgets \glsni{ampchar} 10.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   Whatsits \glsni{ampchar} 5.99
+  \glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{percentchar}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{minipage}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}
+  \glsni{caption}\marg{Prices for 2012}
+  \glsni{label}\marg{tab:prices2012}
+  \glsni{centering}
+  \glsni{begin}\marg{tabular}\marg{lr}
+   Item \glsni{ampchar} Price (\glsni{pounds})\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   Widgets \glsni{ampchar} 11.99\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   Whatsits \glsni{ampchar} 6.99
+  \glsni{end}\marg{tabular}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{minipage}\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{end}\marg{table}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This produces Tables~\ref{tab:prices2011} and~\vref{tab:prices2012}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+  \caption{Prices for 2011}
+  \label{tab:prices2011}
+  \centering
+  \begin{makeimage}
+  \begin{tabular}{lr}
+   Item & Price (\pounds)\\
+   Widgets & 10.99\\
+   Whatsits & 5.99
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{makeimage}
+ \end{minipage}%
+%
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+  \caption{Prices for 2012}
+  \label{tab:prices2012}
+  \centering
+  \begin{makeimage}
+  \begin{tabular}{lr}
+   Item & Price (\pounds)\\
+   Widgets & 11.99\\
+   Whatsits & 6.99
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{makeimage}
+ \end{minipage}%
+\end{table}
+
+\setnode{sidewaysfloats}
+\section{Sideways Floats}
+\label{sec:sidewaysfloats}
+
+The \isty{rotating} package provides the \gls{env-sidewaysfigure}
+environment:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sidewaysfigure}
+\end{definition}
+and the \gls{env-sidewaystable} environment:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sidewaystable}
+\end{definition}
+which are like \gls{env-figure} and \gls{env-table}, respectively, but rotate the
+entire float (including caption) sideways. This sideways float is
+always placed on a page of its own.
+
+If you have used the \clsopt{twoside} class option (or you are
+using a class like \icls{scrbook}, which defaults to that option)
+then the sideways floats will be rotated clockwise or
+anti-clockwise, depending on whether they fall on an even (verso) or
+odd (recto) numbered page. (Requires a second \LaTeX\ run to get it
+correct.) 
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sidewaysfigure}
+ \glsni{centering}
+ \glsni{includegraphics}\oarg{width=0.75\glsni{textheight}}\marg{shapes}
+ \glsni{caption}\marg{A Sideways Figure}
+ \glsni{label}\marg{fig:sideways}
+\glsni{end}\marg{sidewaysfigure}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The above code produces \figureref{fig:sideways}.
+
+\dosidewaysfigure
+ {fig:sideways}
+ {\includegraphics[width=0.75\textheight]{pictures/shapes}}
+ {A Sideways Figure}
+
+\begin{htmlonly}
+  \begin{figure}
+    \figuretop{fig:sideways}
+    \centering
+\makeimg{A sideways figure}{%
+\colorbox{white}{%
+    \rotatebox[br]{90}{%
+      \begin{tabular}{c}
+      \includegraphics{pictures/shapes}\\
+      {\usekomafont{captionlabel}Figure~\ref*{fig:sideways}}\captionformat A Sideways Figure
+      \end{tabular}
+    }%
+}%
+}
+    \caption{A Sideways Figure}
+    \label{fig:sideways}
+  \end{figure}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\setnode{subfloats}
+\section{Sub-Floats}
+\label{sec:subfloats}
+
+Some floats have sub-floats within them. For example, a figure may
+contain several sub-figures, each of which requires a caption.
+The simplest way to do this is to use the \isty{subcaption} package
+that provides the \gls{env-subfigure} and \gls{env-subtable} environments:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{subfigure}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{width}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{subtable}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{width}}
+\end{definition}
+Within these environments, you can use \gls{caption} to create a
+sub-caption. (In addition to the main \gls{caption} for the
+containing \gls{env-figure} or \gls{env-table}
+environment.)
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+The \isty{subcaption} package requires the \isty{caption} package,
+but doesn't automatically load it, so you'll need to load
+both:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{caption,subcaption}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This is very similar to the side-by-side figures example from
+\sectionref{sec:sidebysidefigs}.
+ 
+\begin{code}[0.9\linewidth]
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{begin}\marg{subfigure}\oarg{b}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{rectangle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{Rectangle}\glsni{label}\marg{fig:rectangle}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{end}\marg{subfigure}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{begin}\marg{subfigure}\oarg{b}\marg{0.5\glsni{linewidth}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{centering}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{circle}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{caption}\marg{Circle}\glsni{label}\marg{fig:circle}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{end}\marg{subfigure}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\glsni{caption}\marg{Two Shapes}\newline
+\glsni{label}\marg{fig:shape}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{figure}
+\end{code}
+
+This produces \figureref{fig:shapes2}.
+Elsewhere in the document, the figure and its components can be
+referenced:
+\begin{code}
+Figure\gls{tildechar}\gls{ref}\marg{fig:shapes2} shows some shapes.  
+Figure\gls{tildechar}\gls{ref}\marg{fig:rectangle} shows a rectangle and 
+Figure\gls{tildechar}\gls{ref}\marg{fig:circle} shows a circle.
+\end{code}
+which produces the following text:
+\begin{result}[Figure 7.5 shows some shapes. Figure 7.5a shows a
+rectangle and Figure 7.5b shows a circle.]
+Figure~\ref*{fig:shapes2} shows some shapes.
+Figure~\ref*{fig:rectangle} shows a rectangle and
+Figure~\ref*{fig:circle} shows a circle.\relax
+\end{result}
+
+You can also reference just the sub-float using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{subref}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+which is analogous to \gls{ref}, but only displays the sub-float
+number without the number associated with its containing float.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+Figure\glsni{tildechar}\cmdname{ref}\marg{fig:shapes2}
+shows: (\glsni{subref}\marg{fig:rectangle}) a rectangle and
+(\glsni{subref}\marg{fig:circle}) a circle.
+\end{code}
+produces
+\begin{resultS}[Figure 7.5 shows: (a) a rectangle and (b) a circle.]
+Figure~\ref*{fig:shapes2} shows: (\subref*{fig:rectangle}) a rectangle and (\subref*{fig:circle}) a circle.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}
+\figuretop{fig:shapes2}
+\centering
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \begin{subfigure}[b]{0.5\linewidth}
+   \centering
+   \includegraphics{pictures/rectangle}
+   \caption{Rectangle}\label{fig:rectangle}
+ \end{subfigure}%
+ \begin{subfigure}[b]{0.5\linewidth}
+   \centering
+   \includegraphics{pictures/circle}
+   \caption{Circle}\label{fig:circle}
+ \end{subfigure}%
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+\begin{tabular}{cc}
+\htmladdimg{exercises/rectangle.png} \hspace{0.8in}&
+\htmladdimg{exercises/circle.png}\\
+(a) Rectangle & (b) Circle
+\end{tabular}
+\end{htmlonly}
+\caption{Two Shapes}
+\label{fig:shapes2}
+\end{figure}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+The subfigure labels (a, b, etc) should typically be in
+italic~\cite{turabian96}. This can be achieved with the
+\isty{caption} package using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DeclareCaptionLabelFormat}\marg{\meta{format-name}}\marg{\meta{code}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{format-name} is the name for this new format and
+\meta{code} is the code used to format the label
+where \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}2} gets replaced by the reference number.
+
+Once you have defined a new format, you can then use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{captionsetup}\oarg{\meta{type}}\marg{\meta{options}}
+\end{definition}
+to switch to that new format. For subfloats, \meta{type} needs to be
+set to \texttt{sub}. The second argument \meta{options} is a
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} comma-separated list. The key that sets the format is
+\ikeyvalopt{captionsetup}{labelformat}. (For further details about
+both \glsni{DeclareCaptionLabelFormat} and \glsni{captionsetup}, see
+the \isty{caption} package \htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc}.)
+
+For example, to create a format called \texttt{em-noparens} that
+displays the number in an emphasized font without parentheses:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{DeclareCaptionLabelFormat}\marg{em-noparens}\marg{\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2}}
+\end{codeS}
+Now switch to that new format:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{captionsetup}\oarg{sub}\marg{labelformat=em-noparens}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Note that this only changes the caption label format. It doesn't affect the font 
+used by \gls{ref} or \glsni{subref}.  For \gls{ref}, you can use the 
+\isty{fncylab} package, which provides the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{labelformat}\marg{\meta{ctr}}\marg{\meta{defn}}
+\end{definition}
+Within \meta{defn}, use \glsni{hashchar}1 to represent the subfigure value
+and use \glsi{thefigure} for the encapsulating figure number. For
+example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{labelformat}\marg{subfigure}\marg{\glsni{thefigure}\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+\end{codeS}
+Now
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{ref}\marg{fig:circle}
+\end{codeS}
+will produce
+\begin{resultS}[7.5a (the letter a is emphasized)]
+\ref*{fig:shapes2}\emph{a}
+\end{resultS}
+Unfortunately, this doesn't work for \glsni{subref}. Instead you will have 
+to do, for example, the following in the text:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{subref}\marg{fig:circle}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+If you want to add parentheses, the above can be modified
+to:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{DeclareCaptionLabelFormat}\marg{em-parens}\marg{(\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2})}\newline
+\glsni{captionsetup}\oarg{sub}\marg{labelformat=em-parens}\newline
+\glsni{labelformat}\marg{subfigure}\marg{\glsni{thefigure}(\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1})}
+\end{code}
+For \glsni{subref}, you will have to do, for example, the following
+in the text:
+\begin{codeS}
+(\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{subref}\marg{fig:circle}})
+\end{codeS}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Creating Sub-Figures}{ex:subfloats}
+
+Download the image files
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{rectangle.pdf}}{\exerciseurl/rectangle.pdf}
+and \htmladdnormallink{\texttt{circle.pdf}}{\exerciseurl/circle.pdf}
+\latex{from \url{\exerciseurl/}} (or create your own images) and 
+add \figureref{fig:shapes2} to your document.  You can
+\downloadorview{subfloats} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DEFINING COMMANDS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{newcom}
+\chapter{Defining Commands}
+\label{ch:newcom}
+
+It's possible to define your own \glspl{command} or
+redefine existing ones.  Be very careful about redefining existing
+commands; don't redefine a command simply because you want to use the
+name, only redefine it if you are making a modification.  For
+example, if you want to change the format of the current date, you
+would redefine \gls{today}, but if you want to define a command
+to display a specific date, you should define a new command with a
+different name.
+
+There are several reasons why you might want to define
+a new command:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Reduce typing:
+
+Suppose you have a series of commands or text that
+you find yourself frequently using, then you could define
+a command to do all these other commands for you.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}  
+
+Suppose you want a lot of large bold slanted sans-serif
+portions of text within your document.  Every time you type those
+portions of text, you will have to do something like:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{large}\glsni{bfseries}\glsni{slshape} Some text}
+\end{codeS}%
+It would be much easier if you could use just one command
+to do all that, called, say, \cmdname{largeboldsfsl}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\largeboldsfsl{Some text}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}%
+or you could call it, say, \cmdname{lbsfsl} which is shorter,
+but slightly less memorable:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lbsfsl{Some text}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Ensure consistency:
+
+You may find that you want to format an object a certain
+way.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+Recall near the end of \sectionref{sec:subfloats}, I~suggested the
+following to reference a subfigure (when using \gls{subref} instead
+of \gls{ref}):
+\begin{codeS}
+(\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{subref}\marg{fig:circle}})
+\end{codeS}
+For consistency, you might want to define a command, say,
+\begin{alltt}
+\cmdname{formattedsubref}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{alltt}
+that was the same as 
+(\glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{subref}\marg{\meta{label}}}).
+
+\xminisec{Another Example}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{example:keywords}%
+Suppose your document has a lot of keywords
+in it, and you want to format these keywords in a different font,
+say sans-serif, so that they stand out.  You could just
+do:
+\begin{codeS}
+A \glsni{textsf}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+\end{codeS}%
+however, it is better to define a new command called, say,
+\cmdname{keyword} that will typeset its argument in a
+sans-serif font.  That way it becomes a lot easier
+to change the format at some later date.  For example,
+you may decide to splash out and have your keywords
+typed in a particular colour.  In which case, all you
+need to do is simply change the definition of the
+command \cmdname{keyword}, otherwise you'll have to 
+go through your entire document looking for keywords
+and changing each one which could be very time consuming if
+you have a large document.  You might also decide at some
+later date to make an index for your document.  Indexing
+all the keywords then becomes much simpler, as again all you'll
+need to do is modify the \cmdname{keyword} command.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+New commands are defined using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}%
+The first \gls{mandatory} \meta{cmd} is
+the name of your new command, which must start with a backslash.
+The \gls{optional} \meta{n-args} specifies
+how many arguments your new command must take.  The next
+optional argument \meta{default} will be discussed later.
+The final mandatory argument \meta{text} specifies what \LaTeX\ 
+should do every time it encounters this command.
+
+\xminisec{Example (No Parameters):}
+
+Let's begin with a trivial example.  Suppose I~wanted to write a
+document about a particular course, say \dq{Programming \textemdash\  Languages
+and Software Construction}, and I~had to keep writing the course
+title, then I~might decide to define a command that prints the course
+title rather than having to laboriously type it out every time.
+Let's call our new command \cmdname{coursetitle}.  We want the
+following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+The course \glsni{emph}\marg{\cmdname{coursetitle}} is an undergraduate course.
+\end{codeS}%
+to produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[coursetitle.html]
+The course \emph{Programming \textemdash\ Languages and Software Construction}
+is an undergraduate course.
+\end{result}%
+Clearly this command doesn't need any arguments, so we don't need to
+worry about the optional argument \meta{n-args} to
+\gls{newcommand}, and the only thing our new command needs to do
+is print:
+\begin{alltt}
+Programming \glsni{emdash} Languages and Software Construction
+\end{alltt}
+so we would define our new command as follows:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{coursetitle}}\marg{Programming \glsni{emdash} Languages and Software Construction}
+\end{code}%
+Commands must always be defined before they are used.  The
+best place to define commands is in the 
+\gls{preamble}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{coursetitle}}\marg{Programming \glsni{emdash} Languages 
+and Software Construction}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+\glsni{section}\marg{\cmdname{coursetitle}}
+
+The course \glsni{emph}\marg{\cmdname{coursetitle}} is an undergraduate course.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Example (One Mandatory Argument):}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{sec:newcomarg}%
+Now let's try defining a command that takes an \gls{argument} (or
+parameter).  Let's go back to our \htmlref{\cmdname{keyword}
+example}{example:keywords}\latex{ \vpageref{example:keywords}}.  This
+command needs to take one argument that is the keyword.  Let's
+suppose we want keywords to come out in
+\htmlref{sans-serif}{sec:fontstyle}, then we could do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+\end{codeS}%
+In this case we have used the optional argument \meta{n-args} to
+\gls{newcommand}.  We want our command \cmdname{keyword} to have
+one argument, so we have \texttt{[1]}.  In \texttt{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}} the
+\gls{hashchar}\texttt{1} represents the first argument.  (If we had
+more than one argument, \glsni{hashchar}\texttt{2} would represent the second
+argument, \glsni{hashchar}\texttt{3} would represent the third argument etc.\ up to a
+maximum of~9\faq{How to break the 9-argument limit}{moren9}.) So
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keyword{commands}
+\end{verbatim}
+will be equivalent to 
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{commands}
+\end{alltt}
+and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keyword{environment}
+\end{verbatim}
+will be equivalent to
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{environment}
+\end{alltt}
+and so on.
+Again, it's best to put the command definition in the preamble to
+ensure the command won't be used before it's defined.
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+A \cmdname{keyword}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+Now if we want to change the way the keywords are formatted,
+we can simply change the definition of \cmdname{keyword}.
+Let's modify our code so that the keyword is now in a 
+slanted sans-serif font:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{slshape} \glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+A \cmdname{keyword}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Let's go one stage further.  The \isty{color} 
+\htmlref{package}{sec:packages} provides the \gls{declaration}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{color}\marg{\meta{col-name}}
+\end{definition}
+which switches the foreground colour to \meta{col-name}. It also
+provides the text-block command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{textcolor}\marg{\meta{col-name}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+which sets \meta{text} in the colour given by \meta{col-name}.
+
+So let's use the \isty{color} package to make our keywords
+blue:\screenpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{color}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{slshape}\glsni{color}\marg{blue}\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+A \cmdname{keyword}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Or we could index the keywords.  To do this we need the
+\isty{makeidx} \htmlref{package}{sec:packages} and the commands 
+\gls{makeindex}, 
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{index}\marg{\meta{text}}\end{inlinedef}
+and \gls{printindex}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{makeidx}
+
+\glsni{makeindex}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{slshape} \glsni{hashchar}1}\glsni{index}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+A \cmdname{keyword}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+
+\glsni{printindex}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+For further information about how to create an index, 
+see \latexguide\ or \latexcomp.
+Alternatively, if you want a brief overview, try \latexthesis.
+
+Since it is unlikely that the keyword will contain a paragraph break,
+we should indicate that this is a 
+\gls{short} using the \htmlref{starred form}{itm:starredcommand}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{slshape} \glsni{hashchar}1}\glsni{index}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+\end{codeS}
+Now if you forget to add the closing brace, for example,
+\verb|\keyword{command|, then \gls{tex}['s] error checking mechanism will 
+pick up the error sooner. This will give an error message that
+looks like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Paragraph ended before \keyword was complete.
+<to be read again>
+                   \par
+l.604
+\end{verbatim}
+This at least gives you the line number (604 in this example) of the
+end of the paragraph where the error has occurred.
+
+If you don't used the starred form of \gls{newcommand}, then
+you will get the somewhat less than helpful error:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! File ended while scanning use of \keyword.
+\end{verbatim}
+If you have a very large document, it may take a while to track
+down where exactly you have missed a brace.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Defining a New Command}{ex:newcom}
+Try typing up the following code:
+\begin{bcode}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+A \cmdname{keyword}\marg{command} usually begins with a backslash.
+
+Segments of code may be \cmdname{keyword}\marg{grouped}.
+
+Some \cmdname{keyword}\marg{commands} take one or more \cmdname{keyword}\marg{arguments}.
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{bcode}
+
+Then modify your code so that the keywords are in a slanted
+sans-serif font or modify your code so that the keywords come out in
+blue (using the \isty{color} package as in the example earlier).
+Again you can \downloadorview{newcom} the result.
+
+\xminisec{For the more adventurous:}
+
+If you want to create an index as in the previous example, you will
+need to use the application \iappname{makeindex}. If you used
+\iappname{latexmk} back in \sectionref{sec:crossref}, you can just
+carry on using that as before. If not you need to do the following
+in TeXworks:
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item Create the PDF as described in \sectionref{sec:texworks}.
+
+  \item Select \menu{MakeIndex} from the drop-down list next to the
+   build (typeset) button (see \figureref{fig:texworks9}).
+
+  \item Click on the build button. If all goes well, you won't see
+    anything different. If you see something like the following:
+\begin{alltt}
+Couldn't find input index file exercise\theexercise\space nor exercise\theexercise.idx.
+\end{alltt}
+    then you probably forgot to add the command \gls{makeindex} to
+    the preamble. Add it in and go back to Step~1.
+
+  \item Select \menu{pdfLaTeX} from the drop-down list and build the
+    PDF file again. Move to the last page of the PDF, and you should
+    see the index.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/texworks9}
+  {%
+    \caption{Selecting MakeIndex in TeXWorks}
+  }%
+  {fig:texworks9}
+\end{figure}
+
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%% Defining Commands with an Optional Argument %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{newcomopt}
+\section{Defining Commands with an Optional Argument}
+\label{sec:newcomopt}
+
+As mentioned earlier, the \gls{newcommand} command has a second
+optional argument \meta{default}.  This allows you to define a
+command with an optional argument\faq{More than one optional
+argument}{twooptarg}.  For example, suppose we want a command called,
+say, \cmdname{price}.  Suppose we want the following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\price{100}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}%
+to produce the following output:
+\begin{resultS}[price.html]
+\pounds100 excl VAT @ 17.5\%\relax
+\end{resultS}%
+and let's suppose we want an optional argument
+so that we can change the VAT.  That is, we
+would want the following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\price[20]{30}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}%
+to produce the following output:
+\begin{resultS}[price2.html]
+\pounds30 excl VAT @ 20\%
+\end{resultS}%
+Therefore we want to define a command
+such that if the optional argument is absent 
+we will have \texttt{17.5}, and if it is present
+the optional argument will be substituted instead.
+This command can be defined as follows:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{price}}\oarg{2}\oarg{17.5}\marg{\glsni{pounds} \gls{hashchar}2 excl VAT @ \glsni{hashchar}1\glsni{percent}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Here, \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}1} represents the optional argument (by default
+\texttt{17.5}) and \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}2} represents the mandatory argument (the
+second argument if the optional argument is present, or the only
+argument if the optional argument is absent.)
+
+As before, since the argument is unlikely to contain a paragraph
+break, we should indicate that it is a \gls{short} using the \htmlref{starred form}{itm:starredcommand}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{price}}\oarg{2}\oarg{17.5}\marg{\glsni{pounds} \glsni{hashchar}2 excl VAT @ \glsni{hashchar}1\gls{percent}}
+\end{codeS}%
+
+\begin{exercise}{Defining Commands with an Optional Argument}{ex:newcomopt}
+In this exercise, you will need to define a slightly modified
+version of the above example.  Try defining a command called,
+say, \cmdname{cost}.  It should take one optional argument and
+one mandatory argument.  Without the optional argument, it
+behaves in the same way as the \cmdname{price} example above,
+so that, say,
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cost{50}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}%
+will produce
+\begin{resultS}[price3.html]
+\pounds50 excl VAT @ 17.5\%\null
+\end{resultS}%
+but with the optional argument, you can change the
+\verb|excl VAT @ 17.5\%| bit.  So that, say,
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cost[inc VAT]{50}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{codeS}%
+will produce
+\begin{resultS}[price4.html]
+\pounds50 inc VAT\mbox{}% LaTeX2HTML is getting confused!
+\end{resultS}
+
+You can \downloadorview{newcomopt} the solution.
+
+\xminisec{For the more adventurous:}
+If you did \exerciseref{ex:newcom} and you modified \cmdname{keyword}
+so that it indexed the keyword, you may have noticed that
+\begin{codeS}
+\verb|\keyword{command}|
+\end{codeS}
+and
+\begin{codeS}
+\verb|\keyword{commands}|
+\end{codeS}
+produced separate entries in the index. It would be better to have an
+optional argument to override the indexing mechanism. For example,
+\begin{codeS}
+\verb|\keyword{command}|
+\end{codeS}
+should print and index the word \dq{command},
+whereas
+\begin{codeS}
+\verb|\keyword[command]{commands}|
+\end{codeS}
+should print \dq{commands}
+and index \dq{command}. In other words, we need an optional
+argument that defaults to the mandatory argument if it is not
+present.
+This is how to achieve that type of effect:\footnote{Recall from \chapterref{ch:def} the percent symbol discards the space resulting from the end
+of line character.}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{keyword}}\oarg{2}\oarg{\cmdname{keywordentry}}\marg{\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\icmdname{def}\cmdname{keywordentry}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\gls{index}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+}
+\end{code}
+In this example, the default value for the optional argument
+is set to the command \cmdname{keywordentry}. At the start of 
+\cmdname{keyword} this is defined to be the mandatory argument 
+(as specified by \verb|#2|) using \gls{tex}['s] \cmdname{def}
+command:\footnote{\cmdname{def} is too complicated for an
+introductory \LaTeX\ guide but, if you're interested, read \emph{The
+\TeX{}book}~\cite{texbook}.}
+\begin{alltt}
+\cmdname{def}\cmdname{keywordentry}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2}
+\end{alltt}
+Then typeset the keyword (given in the mandatory
+argument \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}2}) in a sans-serif font:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{textsf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}2}
+\end{alltt}
+Now index the term using the optional argument (\texttt{\glsni{hashchar}1}):
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{index}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}
+\end{alltt}
+If an optional argument is specified, \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}1} will be the given
+argument, but if the optional argument is missing, \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}1} will
+be \cmdname{keywordentry}, which has earlier been set to
+the mandatory argument \texttt{\glsni{hashchar}2}.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Redefining Commands %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{renewcom}
+\section{Redefining Commands}
+\label{sec:renewcom}
+
+Commands can be redefined using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}\reportpagebreak\noindent
+This has exactly the same format as \gls{newcommand} but is
+used for redefining existing commands.
+Again there is a \htmlref{starred version}{itm:starredcommand} to indicate that the command
+is a \gls{short}.
+
+\xminisec{Caveat:}
+
+\warning Never redefine a command whose existing function is unknown
+to you or just because you want to use a particular command name,
+regardless of its previous function. By way of illustration: as a
+production editor, I~have to combine articles by different authors
+into a single book. Each author supplies the \LaTeX\ code for their
+own article. Every so often, I~get code that redefines a command for
+the convenience of the author. Later on another author tries to use
+the same command, on the assumption that the command behaves
+according to its original definition. This tends to involve the
+accent commands as they are short and that saves the author typing.
+It usually goes along these lines: author~A redefines \gls{c} (the
+cedilla accent command) to display a maths bold
+\dq{\boldc} to indicate a
+vector. Later, author~B, uses the cedilla accent, say, in the name
+Fran\c{c}ois:
+\begin{alltt}
+Fran\gls{c}\marg{c}ois
+\end{alltt}
+Author~A's hack turns this into
+Fran\boldc cois.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Redefining List Labels):}
+
+Recall the \gls{env-itemize} environment discussed in
+\sectionref{sec:itemize}.  You may have up to four nested
+\gls{env-itemize} environments, the labels for the outer environment
+are specified by the command \gls{labelitemi}, the labels for
+the second level are specified by \gls{labelitemii}, the third
+by \gls{labelitemiii} and the fourth by \gls{labelitemiv}.
+By default, \glsni{labelitemi} is a bullet point (\makeimg{bullet
+symbol}{\labelitemi}),
+\glsni{labelitemii} is an en dash (\makeimg{en dash}{\labelitemii}), 
+\glsni{labelitemiii} is an
+asterisk (\makeimg{asterisk}{\labelitemiii}) and 
+\glsni{labelitemiv} is a centred dot (\makeimg{centered
+dot}{\labelitemiv}).  These can be changed by redefining
+\glsni{labelitemi} etc.
+
+Recall from \tableref{tab:symbols} that the command
+\gls{dag} produces a dagger symbol, we can use this symbol
+instead of a bullet point:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{labelitemi}}\marg{\gls{dag}}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\gls{item} Animal\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{item} Vegetable\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{result}[List uses dagger symbol instead of a bullet point for
+the marker]
+\renewcommand*{\labelitemi}{\dag}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Animal
+
+\item Mineral
+
+\item Vegetable
+
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
+
+Here's another example, it uses the \Index{PostScript}
+font ZapfDingbats via the \isty{pifont} package:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{labelitemi}}\marg{\gls{ding}\marg{43}}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{item} Animal\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{item} Mineral\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{item} Vegetable\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{code}\bookpagebreak\noindent
+Output:
+\begin{result}[List uses a pointing finger instead of a bullet point
+for the marker]
+\renewcommand*{\labelitemi}{\ding{43}}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Animal
+
+\item Mineral
+
+\item Vegetable
+
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}%
+In the above example, it would actually be easier to use the
+\gls{env-dinglist} environment defined in the \isty{pifont} package:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{dinglist}\marg{43}
+
+\glsni{item} Animal
+
+\glsni{item} Mineral
+
+\glsni{item} Vegetable\screenpagebreak
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{dinglist}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+
+\xminisec{Example (Redefining the Default Font):}
+
+Recall from \sectionref{sec:changingfonts} that the default font
+family is usually the serif (Roman) family. So what happens if you
+need to write your entire document in, say, Helvetica?  The default
+font family name is stored in:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{familydefault}
+\end{definition}
+This command is usually
+defined to be just \gls{rmdefault}, which in turn stores the name of the
+default serif font (initially \texttt{cmr}, Computer Modern Roman). If 
+you want the default font to be sans-serif, all you
+need do is add the following line to the
+\glsterm{preamble}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{familydefault}}\marg{\gls{sfdefault}}
+\end{codeS}
+\glsni{sfdefault} stores the name of the default sans-serif font (initially \texttt{cmss},
+Computer Modern Sans-Serif) and
+the \isty{helvet} package redefines \glsni{sfdefault} to \texttt{phv},
+which is the identifier for the Helvetica font.
+So the following document will be in Helvetica:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{helvet}
+\glsni{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{familydefault}}\marg{\glsni{sfdefault}}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+This is a sample document.
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+Similarly, if you want the default font to be monospaced (typewriter) then you'd need to do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{familydefault}}\marg{\gls{ttdefault}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Incidentally, you may have noticed in \sectionref{sec:changingfonts}
+that although I~said I'd used the \isty{anttor} and
+\isty{libris} packages to set the serif and sans-serif families for
+\latexhtml{this book}{the PDF version of this book}, I
+didn't mention anything about the typewriter (monospaced) font. I~used
+the TXTT font, but that doesn't have a corresponding package. You
+just redefine \glsni{ttdefault} to \texttt{txtt}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{ttdefault}}\marg{txtt}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Redefining Fixed Names):}
+
+You may have noticed that \LaTeX\ automatically generates pieces of
+text such as \dq{Chapter}, \dq{Figure}, \dq{Bibliography}.  These are
+generated by the commands shown in \tableref{tab:textlab}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption[Predefined Names]{Predefined Names 
+(\supdag Book and report style classes (such as \icls{scrreprt} and \icls{scrbook}), 
+\supddag article-style classes (such as \icls{scrartcl}), 
+remainder book, report and article-style classes)}
+\label{tab:textlab}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Default Text\\
+\midrule
+\gls{contentsname} & \contentsname\\
+\gls{listfigurename} & \listfigurename\\
+\gls{listtablename} & \listtablename\\
+\gls{bibname}\supdag & \bibname\\
+\gls{refname}\supddag & \refname\\
+\gls{indexname} & \indexname\\
+\gls{figurename} & \figurename\\
+\gls{tablename} & \tablename\\
+\gls{partname} & \partname\\
+\gls{chaptername}\supdag & \chaptername\\
+\gls{appendixname} & \appendixname\\
+\gls{abstractname} & \abstractname
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+You can change the defaults using \gls{renewcommand}.  For
+example, suppose you want the table of contents to be labelled
+\dq{Table of Contents}, instead of the default \dq{Contents}, you
+would need to do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{contentsname}}\marg{Table of Contents}
+\end{codeS}
+\faq{Changing the words babel uses}{latexwords}In fact, the
+\isty{babel} package (see \sectionref{sec:babel}) uses this method
+to redefine the commands in \tableref{tab:textlab} whenever you
+switch language using \reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak
+\gls{selectlanguage} or within the contents of
+the \gls{env-otherlanguage} environment. This unfortunately has the
+side-effect that means if you try to redefine these commands,
+\sty{babel} will automatically overwrite your definition whenever
+there's a language change, which includes at the beginning of the
+\gls{env-document} environment. Instead you need to use
+\sty{babel}'s \glsni{addto} mechanism.
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{addto}\marg{\meta{command}}\marg{\meta{code}}
+\end{definition}
+This patches the definition of a command (specified in the first
+\gls{argument}) adding \meta{code} to the end of the command
+definition. Whenever \sty{babel} switches the current language, it
+uses the command \cmdname{captions}\meta{language}, which performs
+all the redefinitions of commands like those listed in
+\tableref{tab:textlab}. For example, if you are using \sty{babel}
+with the \istyopt{babel}{english} option and you want to change
+\glsni{contentsname} so that it does \dq{Table of Contents} instead
+of \dq{Contents}, you need to do:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{addto}\marg{\cmdname{captionsenglish}}\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  \glsni{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{contentsname}}\marg{Table of Contents}\glsni{percentchar}
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Notes:}
+
+\warning Take care if you want to patch an existing command. For
+example, suppose you want to append something to the action of a
+command. You might be tempted to do
+\begin{alltt}
+\wrong\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{foo}}\marg{\cmdname{foo} Something else}
+\end{alltt}
+This will cause an infinite loop where \cmdname{foo} recursively
+calls itself. Instead you should use one of the commands provided by
+the \isty{etoolbox} package (such as \gls{appto}, which has the same
+syntax as \sty{babel}'s \glsni{addto} described above). For further details,
+read the \sty{etoolbox} \htmlref{documentation}{sec:texdoc}.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Renewing Commands}{ex:renewcom}
+If you did Exercises~\ref{ex:figures} and \ref{ex:tables}, go back to
+that document and changed the figures and tables so that they
+are labelled \dq{Fig} and \dq{Tab} instead of \dq{Figure} and \dq{Table}.
+Hint: you need to redefine \glsni{tablename} and \glsni{figurename}.
+
+You can \downloadorview{renewcom} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MATHEMATICS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{mathematics}
+\chapter{Mathematics}
+\label{ch:maths}
+
+As mentioned in the \htmlref{introduction}{ch:intro}, \LaTeX\ is
+particularly good at typesetting mathematics.  In order to
+use any of the maths commands we need to be in one of the
+mathematics \glspl{environment}.  There are two
+basic types of mathematics: \keyword{in-line maths} and
+\keyword{displayed maths}. In-line maths is mathematics that
+occurs within a line of text, for example:
+\begin{resultS}[inlinemaths.html]
+The variable $x$ is transformed by the function $f(x)$.
+\end{resultS}%
+Displayed maths is mathematics that occurs on a line
+of its own.  For example:
+\begin{result}[displaymath.html]
+A polynomial is a function of the form
+\[
+f(x) = \sum_{i=0}^na_ix^i
+\]
+\end{result}
+The maths environments switch to \LaTeX's \dq{math mode}, which uses
+specialist maths fonts and spacing rather than just using an italic
+font.
+
+If you want to typeset any mathematics, I~strongly advise using the
+\istystart{amsmath} package:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{amsmath}
+\end{alltt}
+This patches some existing \LaTeX\ commands and environments and
+also provides many useful additions.
+
+This chapter is just an introduction to typesetting mathematics in
+\LaTeX. If you want a comprehensive guide, I~recommend you read \emph{Math Mode}
+by Herbert~Vo\ss~\cite{voss}, which can be access via
+\appname{texdoc} (see \sectionref{sec:texdoc}):
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc mathmode
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% In-Line Mathematics %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{inlinemaths}
+\section{In-Line Mathematics}
+\label{sec:inline}
+
+In-line mathematics is created using the \gls{env-math}
+environment. (Note U.S. spelling --- \dq{math} not \dq{maths}).
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+The variable \glsni{begin}\marg{math}x\glsni{end}\marg{math} is transformed
+by the function \glsni{begin}\marg{math}f(x)\glsni{end}\marg{math}.
+\end{code}
+It's somewhat cumbersome having to type
+\glsni{begin}\marg{math} and \glsni{end}\marg{math} and it also
+makes the \gls{source} a little difficult to read so there
+are shorthand notations that can be used instead:
+\gls{beginmath} is equivalent to \glsni{begin}\marg{math} and
+\gls{endmath} is equivalent to \glsni{end}\marg{math}.  So
+the example above can be rewritten:
+\begin{codeS}
+The variable \glsni{beginmath}x\glsni{endmath} is transformed by the function 
+\glsni{beginmath}f(x)\glsni{endmath}.
+\end{codeS}%
+There is an even shorter notation:
+The \htmlref{special character}{sec:chars} \gls{dollarchar} is equivalent
+to both \glsni{begin}\marg{math} and \glsni{end}\marg{math}:
+\begin{codeS}
+The variable \glsni{dollarchar}x\glsni{dollarchar} is transformed by the 
+function \glsni{dollarchar}f(x)\glsni{dollarchar}.
+\end{codeS}%
+This is considerably easier to type and
+to read, but you need to make sure that all your \glsni{dollarchar}
+symbols have matching pairs.  The above code will look like:
+\begin{resultS}[inlinemaths2.html]
+The variable $x$ is transformed
+by the function $f(x)$.
+\end{resultS}%
+The other advantage in using \glsni{dollarchar} over \glsni{beginmath} and
+\glsni{endmath} is that \glsni{dollarchar} is a \gls{robust}, 
+whereas \glsni{beginmath} and \glsni{endmath} are 
+\glspl{fragile} and
+will need to be protected if they occur in a \glslink{fragile}{moving
+argument}.\casemedia{}{}{ (See \sectionref{sec:fragile}.)}{}
+
+Note: you should always make sure you are in maths mode to
+typeset any variables (such as $x$, $y$, $z$), as this will
+ensure that the correct maths fonts are used, as well as the
+appropriate spacing. Similarly, don't use \glsni{dollarchar}
+as a short cut for an italic font.
+\begin{codeS}[\linewidth]
+Notice the \glsni{dollarchar}difference\glsni{dollarchar} between 
+\glsni{dollarchar}(x', y', z')\glsni{dollarchar} and
+\glsni{textit}\marg{(x', y', z')}.
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of result: the brackets are upright in the
+maths font but slanted in the italic font. The apostrophe becomes a
+prime in the maths font. The spacing is also
+different.]
+Notice the $difference$ between $(x', y', z')$ and
+\textit{(x', y', z')}.
+\end{resultS}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Displayed Mathematics %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{displayedmaths}
+\section{Displayed Mathematics}
+\label{sec:displayed}
+
+One-line unnumbered displayed mathematics can be created using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{begindispmath}\meta{maths}\gls{enddispmath}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{maths} is the mathematics to be displayed.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+A linear function is a function of the form
+\glsni{begindispmath} y = mx + c \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+Output:
+\begin{result}[displaymath2.html]
+A linear function is a function of the form
+\[ y = mx + c \]
+\end{result}%
+
+\warning Don't use the \envname{displaymath} environment or \verb|$$|\ldots\verb|$$|~\cite{l2tabu}.
+Use \glsni{begindispmath} and \glsni{enddispmath} with
+the \isty{amsmath} package.
+
+The \glsni{env-equation}\refstepcounter{object}\label{env:equation} 
+environment provides something similar to
+\glsni{begindispmath} \glsni{enddispmath}, except
+that the equation is numbered.  Modifying the above example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+A linear function is a function of the form
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+y = mx + c
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+results in the following output:
+\begin{result}[As before but the equation now has a number in
+brackets on the right.]
+A linear function is a function of the form
+\begin{equation}
+y = mx + c
+\end{equation}
+\end{result}
+Normal text can be inserted into the equation using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{text}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+which is provided by the \isty{amsmath} package.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} x = 2 \glsni{text}\marg{ and } y = -1 \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+results in the following output:
+\begin{result}[x equals 2 and y equals minus 1 (the word 'and' is in normal text font)]
+\[ x = 2 \text{ and } y = -1 \]
+\end{result}
+
+\faq{Re-using an equation}{reuseq}%
+Recall from \sectionref{sec:crossref} that we can
+\htmlref{cross-reference}{sec:crossref} most things that \LaTeX\
+automatically numbers using \gls{ref} and \gls{label}.
+Equations can be cross-referenced in the same way:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Equation\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{eqn:linear} is a linear function.
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+\glsni{label}\marg{eqn:linear}
+f(x) = mx + c
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}\screenpagebreak
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[eqref.html]
+Equation~\ref*{eqn:linear} is a linear function.
+\begin{equation}
+\label{eqn:linear}
+f(x) = mx + c
+\end{equation}
+\end{result}
+Equation numbers are usually given in parentheses, which can be done
+using:
+\begin{codeS}
+Equation\glsni{tildechar}(\glsni{ref}\marg{eqn:linear})
+\end{codeS}
+The \isty{amsmath} package provides a convenient short cut:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{eqref}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+So the above can be written as:
+\begin{codeS}
+Equation\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{eqref}\marg{eqn:linear}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Equation (9.2)]
+% fake it to suppress hyperlink
+Equation~(\ref*{eqn:linear})
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+Both the \gls{env-equation} environment and
+\gls{begindispmath}\ldots\gls{enddispmath} are only designed for one
+line of maths. Therefore you must not have any line breaks or
+paragraph breaks within them.
+The following will cause an error:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+\wrong
+f(x) = mx + c
+\wrong
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}
+\end{alltt}
+Either remove the blank lines or comment them out:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+\glsni{percentchar}\correct
+f(x) = mx + c
+\glsni{percentchar}\correct
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\setnode{align}
+\section{Multiple Lines of Displayed Maths}
+\label{sec:align}
+
+The \isty{amsmath} package provides the \gls{env-align}
+and \gls{env-align*} environments for aligned equations.
+The starred version doesn't number the equations. These environments 
+provide pairs of left- and right-aligned columns.
+As with the \gls{env-tabular} environment, use \gls{ampchar} to
+separate columns and \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} to separate rows.
+Unlike the \gls{env-tabular} environment, there is no argument as
+the column specifiers are predefined. Another difference is that no
+page breaks can occur in the \gls{env-tabular} environment, but it's
+possible to allow a page break in \glsni{env-align} or
+\glsni{env-align*} using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{displaybreak}\oarg{\meta{n}}
+\end{definition}
+immediately before the \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} where it is to take
+effect. The optional argument is a number from~0 to~4 indicating the
+desirability to break the page (from~0 the least to~4 the most).
+
+If you want to mix numbered and unnumbered rows, you can use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{notag}
+\end{definition}
+to suppress the numbering for a particular row in the \glsni{env-align} environment.
+This command must go before \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} at the end of the
+row. The default equation numbering can be overridden for a
+particular row using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{tag}\marg{\meta{tag}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{tag} is the replacement for the equation number.
+
+\screenpagebreak\warning Don't use the \envname{eqnarray} or \envname{eqnarray*}
+environments. They're obsolete~\cite{l2tabu}.
+
+
+\xminisec{Example (Unnumbered):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{align*}\newline
+y \glsni{ampchar}= 2x + 2\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{ampchar}= 2(x+1)\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{align*}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[align.html]
+\begin{align*}
+y &= 2x + 2\\
+  &= 2(x+1)
+\end{align*}
+\end{result}
+Note that the equals sign is placed at the start of the second
+column, \emph{after} the ampersand \gls{ampchar}. This ensures the
+correct amount of spacing on either side. If the first line of the
+above equation was changed to:\bookpagebreak
+\begin{alltt}
+\wrong y =\gls{ampchar} 2x + 2\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\end{alltt}
+there wouldn't be enough space on the right of the equal sign:
+\begin{htmlresult}{y equals 2x + 2}
+\begin{makeimage}
+\begin{align*}
+y =& 2x + 2
+\end{align*}
+\end{makeimage}
+\end{htmlresult}
+
+\xminisec{Example (One Row Numbered):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{align}\newline
+y \glsni{ampchar}= 2x + 2\glsni{notag}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{ampchar}= 2(x+1)\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{align}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image of result: as the earlier example but the second equation has been numbered]
+\begin{align}
+y &= 2x + 2\notag\\
+  &= 2(x+1)
+\end{align}
+\end{result}\screenpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example (Four Columns):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{align*}\newline
+y \glsni{ampchar}= 2x + 2 \glsni{ampchar} z 
+ \glsni{ampchar}= 6x + 3\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{ampchar}= 2(x+1) \glsni{ampchar}~~~\glsni{ampchar}= 3(2x+1)\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{align*}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[4colalign.html]
+\begin{align*}
+y &= 2x + 2 & z &= 6x + 3\\
+  &= 2(x+1) &  &= 3(2x+1)
+\end{align*}
+\end{result}
+
+As with \gls{env-equation}, you can cross-reference individual rows
+of an \glsni{env-align} environment, but you must remember to
+put \gls{label} \emph{before} the end of row \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+separator. You can reference a row in the \glsni{env-align*}
+environment if you have assigned it a tag with \gls{tag}, but don't
+try labelling a row in the \glsni{env-align} environment where the
+numbering has been suppressed with \gls{notag}.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Cross-Referenced):}
+
+This example has two numbered equations in an \gls{env-align} environment,
+both of which are labelled and referenced:
+\begin{code}
+The function \glsni{dollarchar}f(x)\glsni{dollarchar} is given in 
+Equation\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{eqref}\marg{eq:fx},
+and its derivative \glsni{dollarchar}f'(x)\glsni{dollarchar} is given in 
+Equation\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{eqref}\marg{eq:dfx}.
+\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{align}\newline
+f(x) \glsni{ampchar}= 2x + 1
+\glsni{label}\marg{eq:fx}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+f'(x) \glsni{ampchar}= 2 \glsni{label}\marg{eq:dfx}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{align}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[alignref.html]
+The function $f(x)$ is given in Equation~(\ref*{eq:fx}), and its
+derivative $f'(x)$ is given in Equation~(\ref*{eq:dfx}).
+\begin{align}
+f(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:fx}\\
+f'(x) &= 2 \label{eq:dfx}
+\end{align}
+\end{result}
+
+Recall the command \gls{text}\marg{\meta{text}} from the
+\htmlref{previous section}{sec:displayed}. This can be used
+within cells of the \glsni{env-align} and \glsni{env-align*}
+environments, but the \isty{amsmath} package also provides
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{intertext}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used for a line of interjection between the rows. This
+command may only go right after \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}.
+
+\xminisec{Example}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{align*}\newline
+y \glsni{ampchar}= 2x +
+2\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\glsni{intertext}\marg{Using the distributive law:}\newline
+  \glsni{ampchar}= 2(x+1)\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{align*}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[intertext.html]
+\begin{align*}
+y &= 2x + 2\\
+\intertext{Using the distributive law:}
+  &= 2(x+1)
+\end{align*}
+\end{result}\bookpagebreak
+
+There are other environments for multiple-line displayed maths, but
+they are beyond the scope of this book. See
+the \isty{amsmath} documentation for further details.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Mathematical Commands %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{mathscom}
+\section{Mathematical Commands}
+\label{sec:mathscom}
+
+Most of the \glspl{command} described in this
+section may only be used in one of the mathematics environments.  If
+you try to use a mathematics command outside a maths environment you
+will get a \dq{\texttt{Missing \$ inserted}} error message.
+
+%------------------ Maths Fonts ------------------
+
+\setnode{mathsfonts}
+\subsection{Maths Fonts}
+\label{sec:mathsfonts}
+
+Just as we are able to \htmlref{change text fonts}{sec:fonts} using
+the commands \gls{textrm}, \gls{textbf} etc, we can also
+use commands to change the maths font.  Basic maths font changing
+commands are shown in \tableref{tab:mathsfonts}.
+
+\begin{table}[tbhp]
+\caption{Maths Font Changing Commands}
+\label{tab:mathsfonts}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Corresponding Output\\
+ & & (Computer Modern)\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathrm}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathrm{xyz}$| & $\cmmathrm{xyz}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathsf}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathsf{xyz}$| & $\cmmathsf{xyz}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathtt}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathtt{xyz}$| & $\cmmathtt{xyz}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathit}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathit{xyz}$| & $\cmmathit{xyz}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathbf}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathbf{xyz}$| & $\cmmathbf{xyz}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{mathcal}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathcal{XYZ}$| & $\cmmathcal{XYZ}$
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+The calligraphic fonts via \glsni{mathcal} are only available for upper-case 
+characters\faq{Better script fonts for maths}{scriptfonts}.
+\tableref{tab:amsmathfont} lists additional font commands supplied 
+with the \isty{amsmath} and \isty{amsfonts} 
+\htmlref{packages}{sec:packages}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption[The amsfonts and amsmath Font Commands]{The 
+\isty{amsfonts}\supddag\ and \isty{amsmath}\supdag\ Font Commands}
+\label{tab:amsmathfont}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Example Output\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\supddag\gls{mathbb}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathbb{A+B=C}$| & $\mathbb{A+B=C}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\supddag\gls{mathfrak}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\mathfrak{A+B=C}$| & $\mathfrak{A+B=C}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\supdag\gls{boldsymbol}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\boldsymbol{A+B=C}$| & $\boldsymbol{A+B=C}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\supdag\gls{pmb}\marg{\meta{symbol}}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\pmb{+-=}$| & $\pmb{+-=}$
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+%----------------- Greek Letters -----------------------
+
+\setnode{greek}
+\subsection{Greek Letters}
+\label{sec:greek}
+
+Greek letters that differ from the corresponding Roman letters are
+obtained by placing a backslash in front of the name.\footnote{So,
+for example, there is no omicron since it looks the same as a Roman
+o.} Lower case and upper case Greek letters are shown in
+\tableref{tab:greek} and \tableref{tab:Greek}, respectively. There are
+also some variants of certain symbols, such as \glsni{vartheta} as
+opposed to \glsni{theta}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Lower Case Greek Letters}
+\label{tab:greek}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{alpha} & $\alpha$ &
+\gls{beta} & $\beta$ &
+\gls{gamma} & $\gamma$ \\
+\gls{delta} & $\delta$  &
+\gls{epsilon} & $\epsilon$ &
+\gls{varepsilon} & $\varepsilon$\\
+\gls{zeta} & $\zeta$ &
+\gls{eta} & $\eta$ &
+\gls{theta} & $\theta$ \\
+\gls{vartheta} & $\vartheta$ &
+\gls{iota} & $\iota$ & 
+\gls{kappa} & $\kappa$ \\
+\gls{lambda} & $\lambda$ &
+\gls{mu} & $\mu$ &
+\gls{nu} & $\nu$ \\
+\gls{xi} & $\xi$ &
+\gls{pi} & $\pi$ &
+\gls{varpi} & $\varpi$\\
+\gls{rho} & $\rho$ &
+\gls{varrho} & $\varrho$ &
+\gls{sigma} & $\sigma$ \\
+\gls{varsigma} & $\varsigma$ &
+\gls{tau} & $\tau$ &
+\gls{upsilon} & $\upsilon$ \\
+\gls{phi} & $\phi$ &
+\gls{varphi} & $\varphi$ &
+\gls{chi} & $\chi$ \\
+\gls{psi} & $\psi$ &
+\gls{omega} & $\omega$ 
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Upper Case Greek Letters}
+\label{tab:Greek}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{Gamma} & $\Gamma$ &
+\gls{Delta} & $\Delta$ &
+\gls{Theta} & $\Theta$ \\
+\gls{Lambda} & $\Lambda$ &
+\gls{Xi} & $\Xi$ &
+\gls{Pi} & $\Pi$ \\
+\gls{Sigma} & $\Sigma$ &
+\gls{Upsilon} & $\Upsilon$ &
+\gls{Phi} & $\Phi$ \\
+\gls{Psi} & $\Psi$ &
+\gls{Omega} & $\Omega$
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+The following code
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} x' = x + \glsni{Delta} x \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+produces:
+\begin{resultS}[x prime equals x plus capital Delta x]
+\[ x' = x + \Delta x \]
+\end{resultS}
+
+%------------- Subscripts and Superscripts ------------
+
+\setnode{subsupscripts}
+\subsection{Subscripts and Superscripts}
+\label{sec:scripts}
+
+Subscripts are obtained either by the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{sb}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}%
+or by the \htmlref{special character}{sec:chars}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{underscorechar}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}%
+Superscripts are obtained either by the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{sp}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}%
+or by the special character:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{circumchar}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}%
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item  This example uses \glsni{sb} and \glsni{sp}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}y = x\glsni{sb}\marg{1}\glsni{sp}\marg{2} +
+x\glsni{sb}\marg{2}\glsni{sp}\marg{2}\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+
+\item This example uses \glsni{underscorechar} and \glsni{circumchar}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}y = x\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2}
+ + x\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{2}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2}\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+
+\item Recall from 
+\latexhtml{page~\pageref{itm:argnogrp}}{\htmlref{earlier}{itm:argnogrp}} that
+\glspl{mandatory} only consisting of one
+character don't need to be grouped, so the above code can also be
+written as:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}y = x\glsni{underscorechar}1\glsni{circumchar}2 
+ + x\glsni{underscorechar}2\glsni{circumchar}2\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+This is simpler than the first two examples. However it's a good idea to be in the
+habit of always using braces in case you forgot them when they're
+needed.
+\end{enumerate}
+All three of the above examples produce the same output:
+\begin{resultS}[subsup.html]
+\[y = x_1^2 + x_2^2\]
+\end{resultS}%
+
+Notice how the subscript gets tucked under the slope of the $Y$ in:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+Y\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[ysubsup1.html]
+\[ Y_{1}^{2} \]
+\end{resultS}
+Compare with
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+Y\marg{}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[ysubsup2.html]
+\[ Y{}_{1}^{2} \]
+
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Nested)}
+
+Subscripts and superscripts can also be nested (note that
+it is now necessary to group the argument to the superscript command):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+ f(x) = e\glsni{circumchar}\marg{x\glsni{underscorechar}1}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+which produces
+\begin{resultS}[nestedsup.html]
+\[
+f(x) = e^{x_1}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+This example isn't quite right as e isn't actually a variable
+and shouldn't be typeset in italic.  The correct way to do this
+is:\bookpagebreak
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+ f(x) =
+\gls{mathrm}\marg{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{x\glsni{underscorechar}1}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+which results in:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as above but the letter e is upright]
+\[ f(x) = \mathrm{e}^{x_1} \]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:e}If you are going to use e a lot,
+it will be simpler to \htmlref{define a new command}{ch:newcom} to do
+this. The definition should go in the
+\glsterm{preamble}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{e}}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{e}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Then in the document:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} f(x\glsni{underscorechar}1, x\glsni{underscorechar}2) 
+ = \cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{x\glsni{underscorechar}1\glsni{circumchar}2} 
+  +
+\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{x\glsni{underscorechar}2\glsni{circumchar}2}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[nestedsup2.html]
+\[
+f(x_1, x_2) = \e^{x_1^2} + \e^{x_2^2}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+Take care when nesting subscripts or superscripts. The following
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+x\glsni{underscorechar}1\glsni{underscorechar}2
+\end{alltt}
+will give a \texttt{!\ Double subscript} error.
+
+%-------------- Functional Names --------------
+
+\setnode{functionnames}
+\subsection{Functional Names}
+\label{sec:funcnames}
+
+Functions such as log and tan can't simply be typed in as
+\texttt{log} or \texttt{tan} otherwise they will come out looking
+like the variables \mathorit{l} times
+\mathorit{o} times \mathorit{g} (\makeimg{l o g}{$ l o g$})
+or \mathorit{t} times \mathorit{a} times \mathorit{n} 
+(\makeimg{t a n}{$ t a n$}).  Instead you should use
+one of the commands listed in \tableref{tab:fnnames}.
+The functions denoted with \supdag\ can have limits by using
+the subscript command \gls{underscorechar} or the superscript command \gls{circumchar}\faq{Sub- and
+superscript positioning for operators}{limits}.
+In addition, the modulo commands listed in \tableref{tab:mod} are also available.
+
+\begin{table}[bhtp]
+\caption[Function Names]{Function Names (\supdag
+indicates command may have limits, \supddag defined
+by \protect\isty{amsmath}).}
+\label{tab:fnnames}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{arccos} & $\arccos$ &
+\gls{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ &
+\gls{arctan} & $\arctan$ \\
+\gls{arg} & $\arg$ &
+\gls{cos} & $\cos$ &
+\gls{cosh} & $\cosh$ \\
+\gls{cot} & $\cot$ &
+\gls{coth} & $\coth$ &
+\gls{csc} & $\csc$ \\
+\gls{deg} & $\deg$ &
+\gls{det}\supdag & $\det$ &
+\gls{dim} & $\dim$ \\
+\gls{exp} & $\exp$ &
+\gls{gcd}\supdag & $\gcd$ &
+\gls{hom} & $\hom$ \\
+\gls{inf}\supdag & $\inf$ &
+\gls{injlim}\supdagddag & $\injlim$ &
+\gls{ker} & $\ker$ \\
+\gls{lg} &  $\lg$ &
+\gls{lim}\supdag & $\lim$ &
+\gls{liminf}\supdag & $\liminf$ \\
+\gls{limsup}\supdag & $\limsup$ &
+\gls{ln} & $\ln$ &
+\gls{log} & $\log$ \\
+\gls{max}\supdag &  $\max$ &
+\gls{min}\supdag & $\min$ &
+\gls{Pr}\supdag & $\Pr$ \\
+\gls{projlim}\supdagddag & $\projlim$ &
+\gls{sec} & $\sec$ &
+\gls{sin} & $\sin$ \\
+\gls{sinh} & $\sinh$ &
+\gls{sup}\supdag & $\sup$ &
+\gls{tan} & $\tan$ \\
+\gls{tanh} & $\tanh$ &
+\gls{varinjlim}\supdagddag & $\varinjlim$ &
+\gls{varliminf}\supdagddag & $\varliminf$ \\
+\gls{varlimsup}\supdagddag & $\varlimsup$ &
+\gls{varprojlim}\supdagddag &  $\varprojlim$ &
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption[Modulo Commands]{Modulo Commands (\supddag
+defined by \protect\isty{amsmath} package)}
+\label{tab:mod}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Example Output\\
+\midrule
+\gls{bmod} & \verb|$m \bmod n$| & $m \bmod n$\\
+\gls{pmod}\marg{\meta{maths}} & \verb|$m \pmod{n}$| &$m \pmod{n}$\\
+\gls{mod}\marg{\meta{maths}}\supddag & \verb|$m \mod{n}$| &$m \mod{n}$\\
+\gls{pod}\marg{\meta{maths}}\supddag & \verb|$m \pod{n}$| &$m \pod{n}$
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Trigonometric Functions):}
+
+This example uses the cos and sin functions and also the 
+\htmlref{Greek letter}{sec:greek} theta.
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} z = r(\glsni{cos}\glsni{theta} + i\glsni{sin}\glsni{theta})
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: z equals r (cos theta plus i sign theta)]
+\[
+z = r(\cos\theta + i\sin\theta)
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Limit):}
+
+The command \gls{infty} is the 
+infinity symbol \makeimg{image of infinity symbol}{$\infty$}, and the command \gls{to} displays an 
+arrow pointing to the right.  Note the use of \gls{underscorechar} since the
+limit is a subscript.
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  \glsni{lim}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{x\glsni{to}\glsni{infty}} f(x) 
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: limit as x tends to infinity of f of x]
+\[
+\lim_{x\to\infty} f(x)
+\]
+\end{resultS}%
+The operators with limits behave differently depending on whether
+they are in \htmlref{displayed}{sec:displayed} or 
+\htmlref{in-line}{sec:inline} maths.
+Notice the difference when the same code appears in-line:
+\begin{codeS}
+In a line of text 
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{lim}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{x\glsni{to}\glsni{infty}}
+f(x)\glsni{dollarchar}
+\end{codeS}%
+which now displays as:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: the limit appears to the side of lim instead
+of below it.]
+In a line of text $\lim_{x\to\infty} f(x)$
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (With Subscript):}
+
+This is another example of a functional name using a subscript:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} \glsni{min}\glsni{underscorechar}x f(x) \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: the x appears below the word min.]
+\[
+\min_x f(x)
+\]
+\end{resultS}%
+Again, notice the difference when it is used in-line:
+\begin{codeS}
+In a line of text \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{min}\glsni{underscorechar}x 
+f(x)\glsni{dollarchar}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: the x appears to the side of the word min.]
+In a line of text $\min_x f(x)$
+\end{resultS}
+\bookpagebreak
+
+\setnode{declaremathop}
+\subsubsection{Defining New Functional Operators}
+\label{sec:declaremathop}
+
+It may be that you want a function that isn't specified in
+\tableref{tab:fnnames}. In this case, the \isty{amsmath} provides the
+\textbf{\em \gls{preamble} only} command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DeclareMathOperator}\marg{\meta{cmd}}\marg{\meta{operator
+name}}
+\end{definition}
+or its \htmlref{starred variant}{itm:starredcommand}
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{DeclareMathOperator}*\marg{\meta{cmd}}\marg{\meta{operator
+name}}
+\end{definition}
+\faq{Defining a new log-like function in LaTeX}{newfunction}%
+Both versions define a command called \meta{cmd}, which must start
+with a backslash, that typesets \meta{operator name} as a function
+name.  The starred version is for function names that can take
+limits (like \gls{lim} and \gls{min} described above).
+
+\xminisec{Example (Operator Without Limits):}
+
+Suppose I want a function called card, which represents the
+cardinality of a set $\mathcal{S}$. First I~need to define the new
+operator command (which I'm going to call \cmdname{card}) \emph{in
+the \gls{preamble}}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{DeclareMathOperator}\marg{\cmdname{card}}\marg{card}
+\end{codeS}
+This operator doesn't take any limits, so I~have used the unstarred
+version.
+
+Later in the document, I~can use this new operator command:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} n = \cmdname{card}(\glsni{mathcal}\marg{S}) \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: n equals card (S)]
+\[
+n = \card(\mathcal{S})
+\]
+\end{resultS}%
+In this example \gls{mathcal} is used as sets are
+typically represented in a calligraphic font.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Operator With Limits):}
+
+Suppose I~now want a function called mode, which represents the
+mode of a set of numbers. First, I~define the operator command in the
+preamble:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{DeclareMathOperator}*\marg{\cmdname{mode}}\marg{mode}
+\end{codeS}
+This operator needs to be able to have a subscript, so I~have used
+the starred version.
+
+Later in the document, I~can use this new operator command:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} x\glsni{underscorechar}m = 
+\cmdname{mode}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{x \glsni{in} \glsni{mathcal}\marg{S}}(x)
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: x subscript m equals mode of x in S of x]
+\[
+x_m = \mode_{x \in \mathcal{S}}(x)
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+%----------- Fractions ------------
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\setnode{fractions}
+\subsection{Fractions}
+\label{sec:fractions}
+
+Fractions are created using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{frac}\marg{\meta{numerator}}\marg{\meta{denominator}}
+\end{definition}
+The \isty{amsmath} package also provides the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{cfrac}\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{numerator}}\marg{\meta{denominator}}
+\end{definition}
+which is designed for continued fractions. The optional argument
+\texttt{pos} can be used for left (\texttt{l}) or right (\texttt{r})
+placement of any of the numerators. (The default is centred.)
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+A simple fraction:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} 
+ \glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x} 
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+Produces:
+\begin{resultS}[Image of fraction with 1 as the numerator and 1+x as
+the denominator.]
+\[ \frac{1}{1+x} \]
+\end{resultS}
+Compare with:
+\begin{codeS}
+In-line:
+\glsni{dollarchar} 
+ \glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x} 
+\glsni{dollarchar}
+\end{codeS}
+which produces:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as before but fraction is smaller.]
+In-line: $\frac{1}{1+x}$
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Nested):}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} 
+\glsni{frac}\marg{1+\glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{x}}\marg{1+x+x\glsni{circumchar}2}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of fraction with (1+1/x) as the numerator and
+(1 + x + x squared as the denominator.]
+\[
+\frac{1+\frac{1}{x}}{1+x+x^2}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Continued Fraction);}
+A continued fraction (example taken from \isty{amsmath}
+documentation and uses \glsni{sqrt}, described in \sectionref{sec:roots},
+and \glsni{dotsb}, described in
+\sectionref{sec:mathssym}):
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{cfrac}\marg{1}\marg{\glsni{sqrt}\marg{2}+
+\glsni{cfrac}\marg{1}\marg{\glsni{sqrt}\marg{2}+
+\glsni{cfrac}\marg{1}\marg{\glsni{sqrt}\marg{2}+\glsni{dotsb}
+}}}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\screenpagebreak
+\begin{result}[Image of a continued fraction (the denominator has a
+fraction with a fraction in its denominator etc).]
+\[
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+\dotsb
+}}}
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Example (A Derivative):}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} f'(x) = \glsni{frac}\marg{df}\marg{dx} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: f'(x) = d f by d x]
+\[
+f'(x) = \frac{df}{dx}
+\]
+\end{resultS}%
+As with \dq{e}, the differential operator \dq{d} should
+be in an upright font as it is not a variable:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  f'(x) = \glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{d}f}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{d}x}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as above but the letter d is upright]
+\[
+f'(x) = \frac{\mathrm{d}f}{\mathrm{d}x}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+The above example is rather cumbersome, particularly
+if you have a lot of derivatives, so it might be easier to
+\htmlref{define a new command}{ch:newcom}\latex{ (see \chapterref{ch:newcom})}. In the 
+\glsterm{preamble} define:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{deriv}}\oarg{2}\marg{\glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{d}\glsni{hashchar}1}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{d}\glsni{hashchar}2}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Then in the document:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} f'(x) = \cmdname{deriv}\marg{f}\marg{x} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: same as before]
+\newcommand{\deriv}[2]{\frac{\mathrm{d}#1}{\mathrm{d}#2}}
+
+\[ f'(x) = \deriv{f}{x} \]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Partial Derivative):}
+\label{itm:pderiv}%
+
+Partial derivatives can be obtained similarly
+using the command \gls{partial} to display the partial
+derivative symbol. As in the previous example, first define a new
+command to format a partial derivative in the
+\glsterm{preamble}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{pderiv}}\oarg{2}\marg{\glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{partial} \glsni{hashchar}1}{\glsni{partial} \glsni{hashchar}2}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Then in the document:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} f\glsni{underscorechar}x = \cmdname{pderiv}\marg{f}\marg{x} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: f subscript x = partial d f by partial d x]
+\[
+f_x = \pderiv{f}{x}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Double Partial Derivative):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  f\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{xy} = \glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{partial}\glsni{circumchar}2 f}\marg{\glsni{partial} x \glsni{partial} y}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: f subscript xy = partial d 2 f by partial d x partial d y.]
+\[
+f_{xy} = \frac{\partial^2 f}{\partial x \partial y}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (First principles):}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\mbox{}\qquad f'(x) = \gls{lim}\gls{underscorechar}\marg{\gls{Delta} x \gls{to}
+0}\newline
+\mbox{}\qquad \glsni{frac}\marg{f(x + \gls{Delta} x)-f(x)}\marg{\gls{Delta}
+x}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}
+\[
+f'(x) = \lim_{\Delta x\to0}
+  \frac{f(x+\Delta x) - f(x)}{\Delta x}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+%------------ Roots --------------
+
+\setnode{roots}
+\subsection{Roots}
+\label{sec:roots}
+
+Roots are obtained using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{sqrt}\oarg{\meta{order}}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}%
+without the optional argument \meta{order}
+it will produce a simple square root. Cubic roots etc
+can be obtained using the optional argument.
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item A square root:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} \glsni{sqrt}\marg{a+b} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: square root of (a + b)]
+\[
+\sqrt{a+b}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\item A cubic root:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} \glsni{sqrt}\oarg{3}\marg{a+b} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: cubic root of (a + b)]
+\[
+\sqrt[3]{a+b}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\item An \ensuremath{n}th root:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath} \glsni{sqrt}\oarg{n}\marg{a+b} \glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: the nth root of (a + b)]
+\[
+\sqrt[n]{a+b}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%-------- Mathematical Symbols -------------
+
+\setnode{mathssym}
+\subsection{Mathematical Symbols}
+\label{sec:mathssym}
+
+Relational symbols\faq{Where can I find the symbol for
+\ldots}{symbols} are shown in \tableref{tab:relsym}.  If you want a
+negation that is not shown, you can obtain it by preceding the
+symbol with the command \gls{not}.  For example:
+\glsni{not}\glsni{subset} produces the symbol 
+\makeimg{image of subset symbol with slash through it}{$\not\subset$}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption{Relational Symbols}
+\label{tab:relsym}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{approx} & $\approx$ &
+\gls{asymp} & $\asymp$ &
+\gls{bowtie} & $\bowtie$ \\
+\gls{cong} & $\cong$ &
+\gls{dashv} & $\dashv$ &
+\gls{doteq} & $\doteq$ \\
+\gls{equiv} & $\equiv$ &
+\gls{frown} & $\frown$ &
+\gls{ge} or \gls{geq} & $\geq$ \\
+\gls{gg} & $\gg$ &
+\gls{in} & $\in$ &
+\gls{le} or \gls{leq} & $\leq$ \\
+\gls{ll} & $\ll$ &
+\gls{mid} or \verb"|" & $\mid$ &
+\gls{models} & $\models$ \\ 
+\gls{neq} & $\neq$ &
+\gls{ni} & $\ni$ &
+\gls{notin} & $\notin$ \\
+\gls{parallel} & $\parallel$ &
+\gls{prec}& $\prec$ &
+\gls{preceq}& $\preceq$ \\
+\gls{perp} & $\perp$ &
+\gls{propto} & $\propto$ &
+\gls{sim} & $\sim$ \\
+\gls{simeq} & $\simeq$ &
+\gls{smile} & $\smile$ &
+\gls{sqsubseteq} & $\sqsubseteq$ \\
+\gls{sqsupseteq} & $\sqsupseteq$ &
+\gls{subset} & $\subset$ &
+\gls{subseteq} & $\subseteq$ \\
+\gls{succ} & $\succ$ &
+\gls{succeq} & $\succeq$ &
+\gls{supset} & $\supset$ \\
+\gls{supseteq} & $\supseteq$ &
+\gls{vdash} & $\vdash$ &
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Binary operator symbols are shown in \tableref{tab:binop}, and arrow
+symbols are shown in \xtableref{tab:arrows}. There are also over and
+under arrows (\xtableref{tab:overunderarrows}) that have an argument.
+The over arrows put an extendible arrow over their argument, and the
+under arrows put an extendible arrow under their argument. In
+addition, the \isty{amsmath} package provides extensible arrows that
+take a superscript and, optionally, a subscript:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{xleftarrow}\oarg{\meta{subscript}}\marg{\meta{superscript}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{xrightarrow}\oarg{\meta{subscript}}\marg{\meta{superscript}}
+\end{definition}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\mbox{}\qquad  A \glsni{xleftarrow}\marg{n+m-p} B  
+ \glsni{xrightarrow}\oarg{X}\marg{n+p} C\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image of result: the arrow subscripts and superscript are centred over the arrow.]
+\[
+  A \xleftarrow{n+m-p} B \xrightarrow[X]{n+p} C
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{table}[tbhp]
+\caption{Binary Operator Symbols}
+\label{tab:binop}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{amalg} & $\amalg$ &
+\gls{ast} & $\ast$ &
+\gls{bullet} & $\bullet$ \\
+\gls{bigcirc} & $\bigcirc$ &
+\gls{bigtriangledown} & $\bigtriangledown$ &
+\gls{bigtriangleup} & $\bigtriangleup$ \\
+\gls{cap} & $\cap$ &
+\gls{cdot} & $\cdot$ &
+\gls{circ} & $\circ$ \\
+\gls{cup} & $\cup$ &
+\gls{dagger} & $\dagger$ &
+\gls{ddagger} & $\ddagger$ \\
+\gls{diamond} & $\diamond$ &
+\gls{div} & $\div$ &
+\gls{mp} & $\mp$ \\
+\gls{odot} & $\odot$ &
+\gls{ominus} & $\ominus$ &
+\gls{oplus} & $\oplus$ \\
+\gls{oslash} & $\oslash$ &
+\gls{otimes} & $\otimes$ &
+\gls{pm} & $\pm$ \\
+\gls{setminus} & $\setminus$ &
+\gls{sqcap} & $\sqcap$ &
+\gls{sqcup} & $\sqcup$ \\
+\gls{star} & $\star$ &
+\gls{times} & $\times$ &
+\gls{triangleleft} & $\triangleleft$ \\
+\gls{triangleright} & $\triangleright$ &
+\gls{uplus} & $\uplus$ &
+\gls{vee} & $\vee$ \\
+\gls{wedge} & $\wedge$ &
+\gls{wr} & $\wr$
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}[tbhp]
+\caption{Arrow Symbols}
+\label{tab:arrows}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llll}
+\gls{downarrow} & $\downarrow$ &
+\gls{Downarrow} & $\Downarrow$ \\
+\gls{hookleftarrow} & $\hookleftarrow$ &
+\gls{hookrightarrow} & $\hookrightarrow$ \\
+\gls{leftarrow} or \gls{gets} & $\leftarrow$ &
+\gls{Leftarrow} & $\Leftarrow$ \\
+\gls{leftharpoondown} & $\leftharpoondown$ &
+\gls{leftharpoonup} & $\leftharpoonup$ \\
+\gls{leftrightarrow} & $\leftrightarrow$ &
+\gls{Leftrightarrow} & $\Leftrightarrow$ \\
+\gls{longleftarrow} & $\longleftarrow$ &
+\gls{Longleftarrow} & $\Longleftarrow$ \\
+\gls{longleftrightarrow} & $\longleftrightarrow$ &
+\gls{Longleftrightarrow} & $\Longleftrightarrow$ \\
+\gls{longmapsto} & $\longmapsto$ &
+\gls{longrightarrow} & $\longrightarrow$ \\
+\gls{Longrightarrow} & $\Longrightarrow$ &
+\gls{mapsto} & $\mapsto$ \\
+\gls{nearrow} & $\nearrow$ &
+\gls{nwarrow} & $\nwarrow$ \\
+\gls{rightarrow} or \gls{to} & $\to$ &
+\gls{Rightarrow} & $\Rightarrow$ \\
+\gls{rightharpoondown} & $\rightharpoondown$ &
+\gls{rightharpoonup} & $\rightharpoonup$ \\
+\gls{rightleftharpoons} & $\rightleftharpoons$ &
+\gls{searrow} & $\searrow$ \\
+\gls{swarrow} & $\swarrow$ &
+\gls{uparrow} & $\uparrow$ \\
+\gls{Uparrow} & $\Uparrow$ &
+\gls{updownarrow} & $\updownarrow$ \\
+\gls{Updownarrow} & $\Updownarrow$ &
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption[Over and Under Arrows]{Over and Under Arrows
+(\supdag defined by \protect\isty{amsmath})}
+\label{tab:overunderarrows}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Definition & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries Example}\\
+\midrule
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{overleftarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}
+  & \verb|\overleftarrow{ABC}| & $\overleftarrow{ABC}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{overrightarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}
+  & \verb|\overrightarrow{ABC}| & $\overrightarrow{ABC}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{overleftrightarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}\supdag
+  & \verb|\overleftrightarrow{ABC}| & $\overleftrightarrow{ABC}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{underleftarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}\supdag
+  & \verb|\underleftarrow{ABC}| & $\underleftarrow{ABC}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{underrightarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}\supdag
+  & \verb|\underrightarrow{ABC}| & $\underrightarrow{ABC}$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{underleftrightarrow}\marg{\meta{maths}}\end{inlinedef}\supdag
+  & \verb|\underleftrightarrow{ABC}| & $\underleftrightarrow{ABC}$
+\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Symbols with Limits}
+\label{tab:symlim}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllll}
+\gls{sum} & $\sum$ &
+\gls{int} & $\int$ &
+\gls{oint} & $\oint$ \\[5pt]
+\gls{prod} & $\prod$ &
+\gls{coprod} & $\coprod$ &
+\gls{bigcap} & $\bigcap$ \\[5pt]
+\gls{bigcup} & $\bigcup$ &
+\gls{bigsqcup} & $\bigsqcup$ &
+\gls{bigvee} & $\bigvee$ \\[5pt]
+\gls{bigwedge} & $\bigwedge$ &
+\gls{bigodot} & $\bigodot$ &
+\gls{bigotimes} & $\bigotimes$ \\[5pt]
+\gls{bigoplus} & $\bigoplus$ &
+\gls{biguplus} & $\biguplus$
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Symbols that can have limits are shown in \tableref{tab:symlim}.
+The size of these symbols depends on whether they are in displayed 
+maths or in-line maths. 
+
+\xminisec{Example (Displayed Summation and Product):}
+
+The limits of summations and products are placed above and below the
+symbol in displayed maths:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  f(x) = \glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{i=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n} x\glsni{underscorechar}i + \glsni{prod}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{i=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n} x\glsni{underscorechar}i
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: f(x) = sum from i equals 1 to n x subscript i
++ product from i equals 1 to n x subscript i.]
+\[
+f(x) = \sum_{i=1}^{n} x_i + \prod_{i=1}^{n} x_i
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (In-line Summation and Product):}
+
+The limits of summations and products are placed to the right of the
+symbol in in-line maths:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+In a line of text:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{math}
+  f(x) = \glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{i=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n} x\glsni{underscorechar}i + \glsni{prod}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{i=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n} x\glsni{underscorechar}i
+\glsni{end}\marg{math}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as before but summation and product symbols
+are smaller and limits are to the side instead of above and below]
+In a line of text:
+\begin{math}
+f(x) = \sum_{i=1}^{n} x_i + \prod_{i=1}^{n} x_i
+\end{math}
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Multiline Sub- or Superscripts}
+
+The \isty{amsmath} package provides the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{substack}\marg{\meta{maths}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used for multiline sub- or superscripts. Within the
+argument \meta{maths} use \gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} to separate
+rows. For example:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\strut~\glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{substack}\newline
+\strut~~\marg{\newline
+\strut~~~~i \glsni{in}
+\glsni{mathcal}\marg{I}\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~~~i \glsni{neq} 0\newline
+\strut~~}\newline
+\strut~}\newline
+\strut~x\glsni{underscorechar}i\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[substack.html]
+\[
+ \sum_{
+   \substack
+   {
+     i \in \mathcal{I}\\
+     i \neq 0
+   }
+ }
+ x_i
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{ellipses}
+\subsection{Ellipses}
+\label{sec:ellipses}
+
+Ellipsis (omission mark)\index{ellipses (omission marks)|hyperpage} commands are 
+shown in \tableref{tab:ellipsis}. The \isty{amsmath} package also
+provides: \glsni{dotsc} for dots with commas, \glsni{dotsb} for dots
+with binary operators/relations, \glsni{dotsm} for multiplication
+dots, \glsni{dotsi} for dots with integrals and \glsni{dotso} for other
+dots, which can be used as replacements for \glsni{ldots} and
+\glsni{cdots}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption[Ellipses]{Ellipses (\supdag\ provided by \sty{amsmath}
+package)}
+\label{tab:ellipsis}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}ll@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}llllll}
+\gls{vdots} & $\vdots$ &
+\gls{cdots} & $\cdots$ &
+\gls{dotsb}\supdag & $\dotsb$ &
+\gls{dotsi}\supdag & $\dotsi$ &
+\gls{dotsm}\supdag & $\dotsm$\\
+\gls{ddots} & $\ddots$ &
+\gls{ldots} & $\ldots$ &
+\gls{dotsc}\supdag & $\dotsc$ &
+\gls{dotso}\supdag & $\dotso$ 
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Low Ellipsis):}
+
+This example uses the command 
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{cmd:forall}\gls{forall} to produce
+the \dq{for all} symbol $\forall$, and it also uses 
+\glsni{spacesym} (backslash space) to make a space before the for all symbol. The
+\isty{amsmath} \dq{dots with commas} ellipsis \glsni{dotsc} is used rather
+than the standard \glsni{ldots}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+a\glsni{underscorechar}ix\glsni{underscorechar}i = b\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{spacesym}\glsni{forall} i = 1,\glsni{dotsc}, n
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[forall.html]
+\[
+a_ix_i = b_i\ \forall i = 1,\dotsc, n
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Centred ellipsis):}
+
+This example uses the \isty{amsmath} \dq{dots with binary operators\slash relations}
+\glsni{dotsb} instead of the standard \glsni{cdots}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+y = a\glsni{underscorechar}1 + a\glsni{underscorechar}2 + \glsni{dotsb} + a\glsni{underscorechar}n 
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[cdots.html]
+\[
+y = a_1 + a_2 + \dotsb + a_n 
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Maths: Fractions and Symbols}{ex:mathssym}
+This exercise uses a fraction, a square root, subscripts, 
+superscripts and symbols.
+Try to reproduce the following output:
+\begin{result}[maths1ex.html]
+The quadratic equation
+\[
+\sum_{i=0}^{2} a_i x^i = 0
+\]
+has solutions given by
+\[
+x = \frac{-a_1 \pm \sqrt{a_1^2 - 4 a_2 a_0}}{2a_2}
+\]
+\end{result}%
+Again you can \downloadorview{mathssym} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%---------- Delimiters ------------
+
+\setnode{delimiters}
+\subsection{Delimiters}
+\label{sec:delimiters}
+
+Placing brackets around a tall object in maths mode, such as
+fractions, does not look right if you use normal sized brackets.
+For example:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\strut~~(\glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x})\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}%
+results in:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: normal sized brackets around fraction.]
+\[
+(\frac{1}{1+x})
+\]
+\end{resultS}\bookpagebreak\noindent
+Instead, you can automatically resize the delimiters using the
+commands:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{left}\meta{delimiter}
+\end{definition}%
+and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{right}\meta{delimiter}
+\end{definition}%
+Rewriting the above example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  \glsni{left}( \glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x} \glsni{right})
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+produces:
+\begin{resultS}[Image: brackets now the same size as the fraction.]
+\[
+  \left( \frac{1}{1+x} \right)
+\]
+\end{resultS}%
+
+Note that you must always have matching \cmdname{left} and
+\cmdname{right} commands, although the delimiters used may be
+different. \refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:invisdelim}If you want
+one of the delimiters to be invisible, use a
+\gls{delimiter.periodchar}\ (full stop) as the delimiter. Available
+delimiters are shown in
+\tableref{tab:delimiters}. (Note for a vertical bar
+delimiter it's best to use \isty{amsmath}'s \glsni{lvert} command instead of
+\gls{delim.barchar} and \glsni{lVert} instead of \gls{csbar}.) Sometimes using \glsni{left} and
+\glsni{right} doesn't produce the optimal sized delimiters. In which
+case you can use additional commands provided by the \isty{amsmath}
+package shown in \tableref{tab:big}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption[Delimiters]{Delimiters (\supdag defined by
+\protect\isty{amsmath})}
+\label{tab:delimiters}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{llllllll}
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{openparen}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{open round bracket}{$($} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{closeparen}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{close round bracket}{$)$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{delimiter.opensq}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{open square bracket}{$[$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{delimiter.closesq}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{close square bracket}{$]$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{leftbrace}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{open curly brace}{$\{$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rightbrace}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{close curly brace}{$\}$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{lvert}\supdag\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{left vertical bar}{$\lvert$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rvert}\supdag\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{right vertical bar}{$\rvert$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{lVert}\supdag\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{left double vertical bar}{$\lVert$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rVert}\supdag\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{right double vertical bar}{$\rVert$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{langle}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{left angle bracket}{$\langle$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rangle}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{right angle bracket}{$\rangle$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{lfloor}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{left floor}{$\lfloor$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rfloor}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{right floor}{$\rfloor$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{lceil}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{left ceiling}{$\lceil$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{rceil}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{right ceiling}{$\rceil$}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{uparrow}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{up arrow}{$\uparrow$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{downarrow}\end{inlinedef} &
+\makeimg{down arrow}{$\downarrow$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Uparrow}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{double lined up arrow}{$\Uparrow$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Downarrow}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{double lined down arrow}{$\Downarrow$}\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{updownarrow}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{up down arrow}{$\updownarrow$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Updownarrow}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{double lined up down arrow}{$\Updownarrow$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{delim.slash}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{forward slash}{$/$} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{backslash}\end{inlinedef} & 
+\makeimg{backslash}{$\backslash$} 
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption[Delimiter Sizing]{Additional Commands Provided by
+\protect\isty{amsmath} for Delimiter Sizing}
+\label{tab:big}
+\centering
+\renewcommand*{\arraystretch}{2.2}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}ll@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{2}{c@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}}{\bfseries Definitions} &
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries Example}\\
+\midrule
+\multicolumn{2}{c@{\hspace{4\tabcolsep}}}{\em Default Size} & \verb|$( X )$| & $(X)$\\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{bigl}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{bigr}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\bigl( X \bigr)$| & 
+\makeimg{(X)}{$\bigl(X\bigr)$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Bigl}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Bigr}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\Bigl( X \Bigr)$| & 
+\makeimg{(X)}{$\Bigl(X\Bigr)$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{biggl}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{biggr}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\bigl( X \biggr)$| & 
+\makeimg{(X)}{$\biggl(X\biggr)$} \\
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Biggl}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\begin{inlinedef}\gls{Biggr}\meta{delim}\end{inlinedef} &
+\verb|$\Biggl( X \Biggr)$| & 
+\makeimg{(X)}{$\Biggl(X\Biggr)$} \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\renewcommand*{\arraystretch}{1}% Keep LaTeX2HTML happy
+\end{table}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Vertical Bar Delimiters):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\glsni{left}\glsni{lvert}\newline
+\glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x}\newline
+\glsni{right}\glsni{rvert}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: vertical bars same height as fraction.]
+\[
+\left\lvert\frac{1}{1+x}\right\rvert
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Delimiter with Subscript):}
+
+Delimiters can take limits:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\glsni{left}\glsni{lvert}\newline
+\glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x}\newline
+\glsni{right}\glsni{rvert}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{x=0}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}\reportpagebreak
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as before but the right vertical bar has a subscript.]
+\[
+\left\lvert\frac{1}{1+x}\right\rvert_{x=0}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Mismatch):}
+The left and right delimiters don't have to match:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{left}\glsni{delimiter.opensq}\glsni{frac}\marg{1}\marg{1+x}\glsni{right}\glsni{rangle}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: large open square bracket followed by
+fraction followed by large right angle bracket.]
+\[
+\left[\frac{1}{1+x}\right\rangle
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (An invisible delimiter):}
+
+Every \gls{right} must have a matching \gls{left} (and vice versa), so 
+use a \gls{delimiter.periodchar}\ (full stop) for an invisible
+delimiter.
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+ \glsni{left}\glsni{delimiter.periodchar}
+  \glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{partial} f}\marg{\glsni{partial} x}
+ \glsni{right}\glsni{rvert}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{x=0}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: partial fraction followed by large vertical
+line with a subscript.]
+\[
+\left.
+\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}
+\right\rvert_{x=0}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{introeq}
+We have now covered enough to reproduce the equation shown in 
+\chapterref{ch:intro}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{pderiv}}\oarg{2}\marg{\glsni{frac}\marg{\glsni{partial} \glsni{hashchar}1}\marg{\glsni{partial} \glsni{hashchar}2}}
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{e}}\marg{\glsni{mathrm}\marg{e}}
+
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{\glsni{circumchar}2\glsni{mathcal}\marg{L}}\marg{\marg{z\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{circumchar}\glsni{rho}}\glsni{circumchar}2} =
+-\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{z\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{circumchar}\glsni{rho}}
+\glsni{left}(
+  \cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i} \glsni{frac}\marg{\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}}\marg{1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}}
+  + v\glsni{underscorechar}i \glsni{frac}\marg{\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}(1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i})
+             +\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}}\marg{(1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i})\glsni{circumchar}2}
+\glsni{right})
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{result}[Image showing a second order partial derivative.]
+\[
+\pderiv{^2\mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =
+-\pderiv{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}
+\left(
+  \pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i} \frac{\e^{v_i}}{1-\e^{v_i}}
+  + v_i \frac{\e^{v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}(1-\e^{v_i})+\e^{2v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}}{(1-\e^{v_i})^2}
+\right)
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+The above code looks a bit complicated, and there are
+so many braces that it can be easy to lose track, so here are some
+ways of making it a little easier to type:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Whenever you start a new environment type in the
+\gls{begin} and \gls{end} bits first, and then insert
+whatever goes inside the environment.  This ensures that you always
+have a matching \gls{begin} and \gls{end}. The same goes for 
+\glsni{begindispmath} and \glsni{enddispmath}.
+
+\item Whenever you type any braces, always type the opening and
+closing braces first, and then insert whatever goes in between.  This
+will ensure that your braces always match up.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+So keeping these notes in mind, let's try typing in the code in a
+methodical manner:\screenpagebreak
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Start and end the displayed maths mode:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+
+\item We now need a partial derivative.
+(The command \cmdname{pderiv} is defined as described
+\htmlref{earlier}{itm:pderiv}\latex{\ifscreenorother{}{\ on 
+page~\pageref{itm:pderiv}}}. Make sure you remember to define it,
+preferably in the \gls{preamble}.)
+\begin{code}
+{\color{midgray}
+\glsnl{begindispmath}}\newline
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{}\marg{}\newline
+{\color{midgray}
+\glsnl{enddispmath}}
+\end{code}
+
+\item Let's do the first argument. This partial derivative is
+actually a double derivative, which means we need a squared bit on
+the top along with a calligraphic L:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+{\color{midgray}\glsnl{begindispmath}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\textcolor{black}{\glsni{circumchar}2 \glsni{mathcal}\marg{L}}}\marg*{}
+\glsnl{enddispmath}}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\item The second argument is the $z_i^\rho$ squared bit.  This is a 
+nested superscript
+\verb|{z_i^\rho}^2|:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\color{midgray}\glsnl{begindispmath}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\textasciicircum2 \cmdname{mathcal}\marg{L}}\marg*{\textcolor{black}{\marg{z\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{circumchar}\glsni{rho}}\glsni{circumchar}2}}
+\glsnl{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\item We can do the next partial derivative in the same way.  This 
+one is slightly easier to do:
+\begin{code}
+{\color{midgray}\glsnl{begindispmath}\newline
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\glsnl{circumchar}2 \glsnl{mathcal}{L}}\marg*{\marg*{z\glsnl{underscorechar}i\glsnl{circumchar}\glsnl{rho}}\glsnl{circumchar}2}} =\newline
+-\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{z\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{circumchar}\glsni{rho}}\newline
+{\color{midgray}\glsnl{enddispmath}}
+\end{code}
+
+\item Delimiters also need to occur in pairs, like curly braces and 
+\glsni{begin} and \glsni{end}, so let's do them next:
+\begin{code}
+{\color{midgray}\verb|\[|\\
+\verb|\pderiv{^2 \mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =|\\
+\verb|-\pderiv{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}|}\\
+\strut~~\glsni{left}(\\
+\strut~~\glsni{right})\\
+{\color{midgray}\verb|\]|}
+\end{code}\screenpagebreak
+
+\item Now we need to do the bits inside the brackets.  First of all 
+we have yet another partial derivative:
+\begin{code}
+{\color{midgray}\verb|\[|\\
+\verb|\pderiv{^2 \mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =|\\
+\verb|-\pderiv{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}|\\
+\strut~~\glsnl{left}\glsnl{openparen}}\\
+\strut~~~~\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}\\
+{\color{midgray}~~\glsnl{right}\glsnl{closeparen}\\
+\verb|\]|}
+\end{code}
+
+\item Now we have a fraction following the partial derivative from
+the previous step.
+(Make sure you use braces for the exponential bit: \verb|\e^{v_i}|
+($\e^{v_i}$) is not the same as \verb|\e^v_i| ($\e^v_i$). The
+command \cmdname{e} is defined as described
+\htmlref{earlier}{sec:scripts}\latex{ in \sectionref{sec:scripts}}.
+Make sure you define it, preferably in the \gls{preamble}.)
+\begin{code}
+{\color{midgray}\verb|\[|\\
+\verb|\pderiv{^2 \mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =|\\
+\verb|-\pderiv{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}|\\
+\strut~~\glsnl{left}\glsnl{openparen}\\
+\strut~~~~\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{v\glsnl{underscorechar}i}\marg*{\glsnl{rho}\glsnl{underscorechar}i}} \glsni{frac}\marg{\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}}\marg{1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}}\\
+{\color{midgray}~~\glsnl{right}\glsnl{closeparen}\\
+\verb|\]|}
+\end{code}
+
+\item This is followed by $v_i$ times another fraction:
+\begin{code}\par\noindent
+{\color{midgray}\verb|\[|\\
+\verb|\pderiv{^2 \mathcal{L}}{{z_i^\rho}^2} =|\\
+\verb|-\pderiv{\rho_i}{z_i^\rho}|\\
+\strut~~\glsnl{left}\glsnl{openparen}\\
+\strut~~~~\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{v\glsnl{underscorechar}i}\marg*{\glsnl{rho}\glsnl{underscorechar}i} \glsnl{frac}\marg*{\cmdname{e}\glsnl{circumchar}\marg*{v\glsnl{underscorechar}i}}\marg*{1-\cmdname{e}\glsnl{circumchar}\marg*{v\glsnl{underscorechar}i}}}\\
+\strut~~~~+ v\glsni{underscorechar}i \glsni{frac}\marg{}\marg{}\\
+{\color{midgray}~~\glsnl{right}\glsnl{closeparen}\\
+\color{midgray}\verb|\]|}
+\end{code}
+
+\item The bottom part of the
+fraction (the denominator) is easier than the top, so let's do that first:
+\begin{code}
+\color{midgray}\glsnl{begindispmath}\newline
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\textasciicircum2 \cmdname{mathcal}\marg*{L}}\marg*{\marg*{z\_i\textasciicircum\cmdname{rho}}\textasciicircum2} =\newline
+-\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\cmdname{rho}\_i}\marg*{z\_i\textasciicircum\cmdname{rho}}\newline
+\strut~~\cmdname{left}(\newline
+\strut~~~~\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{v\_i}\marg*{\cmdname{rho}\_i} \cmdname{frac}\marg*{\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg*{v\_i}}\marg*{1-\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg*{v\_i}}\newline
+\strut~~~~+ v\_i \cmdname{frac}\marg*{}\marg*{\textcolor{black}{(1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i})\glsni{circumchar}2}}\newline
+\strut~~\cmdname{right})\newline
+\glsnl{enddispmath}
+\color{black}
+\end{code}
+
+% Something weird is causing a shift in the 
+% frame here.
+% Compensating by ending and restarting enumerate
+% environment
+\breakenumi
+
+\item Now for the top part of the fraction (the numerator).
+To refresh your memory, it should look like:
+\[
+\e^{v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}(1-\e^{v_i})
++ \e^{2v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}
+\]
+That's a bit
+complicated, so let's break it down:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item The first term is:
+\begin{alltt}
+\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item The next term is another partial derivative:
+\begin{alltt}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Then we have:
+\begin{alltt}
+(1-\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i})
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Next we have to add on:
+\begin{alltt}
++\cmdname{e}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{2v\glsni{underscorechar}i}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item And finally we have:
+\begin{alltt}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\glsni{underscorechar}i}\marg{\glsni{rho}\glsni{underscorechar}i}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+So the numerator is:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\e^{v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}(1-\e^{v_i})
+  + \e^{2v_i}\pderiv{v_i}{\rho_i}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+
+Inserting this into our code:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\color{midgray}\glsnl{begindispmath}
+\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\textasciicircum2\cmdname{mathcal}\marg*{L}}\marg*{\marg*{z\_i\textasciicircum\cmdname{rho}}\textasciicircum2} =
+-\cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{\cmdname{rho}\_i}\marg*{z\_i\textasciicircum\cmdname{rho}}
+\cmdname{left}(
+  \cmdname{pderiv}\marg*{v\_i}\marg*{\cmdname{rho}\_i} \cmdname{frac}\marg*{\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg*{v\_i}}\marg*{1-\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg*{v\_i}}
+  \color{midgray}+ v\_i \cmdname{frac}\marg*{\textcolor{black}{\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg{v\_i}\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\_i}\marg{\cmdname{rho}\_i}(1-\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg{v\_i})
+             +\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg{2v\_i}\cmdname{pderiv}\marg{v\_i}\marg{\cmdname{rho}\_i}}}\marg*{(1-\cmdname{e}\textasciicircum\marg*{v\_i})\textasciicircum2}
+\cmdname{right})
+\glsnl{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\color{black}
+\end{code}
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+
+%----------- Arrays -------------
+
+\setnode{arrays}
+\subsection{Arrays}
+\label{sec:arrays}
+
+Mathematical structures such as matrices and vectors require elements
+to be arranged in rows and columns.  Just as we can align material in
+rows and columns in text mode using the
+\gls{env-tabular} environment (\sectionref{sec:tabular}), we can do the
+same in maths mode using the \gls{env-array} environment.  The
+\glsni{env-array} environment has the same format as the
+\gls{env-tabular} environment, however it must be in maths mode.
+The column half-gaps are given by the \gls{length} register
+\gls{arraycolsep} (analogous to \gls{tabcolsep}). 
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{rrr}\newline
+0 \gls{ampchar} 1 \gls{ampchar} 19\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+-6 \gls{ampchar} 10 \gls{ampchar} 200\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{array}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+
+\begin{result}[Image shows 3 columns and 2 rows.]
+\[
+\begin{array}{rrr}
+0 & 1 & 19\\
+-6 & 10 & 200
+\end{array}
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Adding Delimiters):}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{left}\glsni{openparen}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{rrr}
+   0 \glsni{ampchar} 1 \glsni{ampchar} 19\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+  -6 \glsni{ampchar} 10 \glsni{ampchar} 200
+ \glsni{end}\marg{array}
+\glsni{right}\glsni{closeparen}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as before but has large round brackets on either
+side.]
+\[
+\left(
+\begin{array}{rrr}
+0 & 1 & 19\\
+-6 & 10 & 200
+\end{array}
+\right)
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Adding a Vertical Rule:}
+
+A vertical rule can be added using \gls{array.barchar} in the column
+specifier. For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{left}\glsni{openparen}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{rr\glsni{array.barchar}r}
+   0 \glsni{ampchar} 1 \glsni{ampchar} 19\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+  -6 \glsni{ampchar} 10 \glsni{ampchar} 200
+ \glsni{end}\marg{array}
+\glsni{right}\glsni{closeparen}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: 3 columns and 2 rows with a vertical line
+between the second and third column.]
+\[
+\left(
+\begin{array}{rr|r}
+0 & 1 & 19\\
+-6 & 10 & 200
+\end{array}
+\right)
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Cases):}
+This example uses an 
+\htmlref{invisible delimiter}{obj:invisdelim}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+f(x) = 
+ \glsni{left}\glsni{leftbrace}
+  \glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{rl}
+   -1 \glsni{ampchar} x \glsni{ltchar} 0\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   0  \glsni{ampchar} x = 0\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   +1 \glsni{ampchar} x \glsni{gtchar} 0
+  \glsni{end}\marg{array}
+ \glsni{right}\glsni{delimiter.periodchar}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image: array has large open brace on the left and
+nothing on the right of it.]
+\[
+f(x) = 
+\left\{
+\begin{array}{rl}
+-1 & x < 0\\
+0 & x = 0\\
++1 & x > 0
+\end{array}
+\right.
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+This can be rewritten more compactly using the \isty{amsmath}
+\gls{env-cases} environment:
+\begin{code}
+\gls{begindispmath}\newline
+f(x) = \newline
+\strut~\glsni{begin}\marg{cases}\newline
+\strut~~-1 \glsni{ampchar} x < 0\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~0  \glsni{ampchar} x = 0\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}\newline
+\strut~~+1 \glsni{ampchar} x > 0\newline
+\strut~\glsni{end}\marg{cases}\newline
+\gls{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as previous example but first column is left
+aligned.]
+\[
+f(x) = 
+\begin{cases}
+-1 & x < 0\\
+0 & x = 0\\
++1 & x > 0
+\end{cases}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+The \isty{amsmath} package provides some convenient environments to
+typeset matrices: \gls{env-pmatrix}, \gls{env-bmatrix},
+\gls{env-Bmatrix}, \gls{env-vmatrix} and \gls{env-Vmatrix}. These
+are similar to the \gls{env-array} environment except there is no
+argument, and they add (respectively) $\bigl(~\bigr)$,
+$\bigl[~\bigr]$, $\bigl\{~\bigr\}$, $\bigl\lvert~\bigr\rvert$ and
+$\bigl\lVert~\bigr\rVert$ delimiters. There is also the
+\gls{env-matrix} environment that doesn't have any delimiters.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{pmatrix}
+  a \glsni{ampchar} b\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+  c \glsni{ampchar} d
+ \glsni{end}\marg{pmatrix}
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image: 2 by 2 matrix with round delimiters and an
+equation number.]
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{pmatrix}
+a & b\\
+c & d
+\end{pmatrix}
+\end{equation}
+\end{result}
+
+The \isty{amsmath} package also provides the environment
+\gls{env-smallmatrix} designed for in-line use. You need to add any
+delimiters explicitly.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Here is a small matrix
+\glsni{begin}\marg{math}
+ \glsni{left}\glsni{openparen}
+  \glsni{begin}\marg{smallmatrix}
+  a \glsni{ampchar} b\glsni{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+  c \glsni{ampchar} d
+  \glsni{end}\marg{smallmatrix}
+ \glsni{right}\glsni{closeparen}
+\glsni{end}\marg{math}
+in a line of text.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: matrix is small enough to fit into the line
+of text.]
+Here is a small matrix
+\begin{math}
+\left(
+\begin{smallmatrix}
+a & b\\
+c & d
+\end{smallmatrix}
+\right)
+\end{math}
+in a line of text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+
+%----------- Vectors ------------
+
+\setnode{vectors}
+\subsection{Vectors}
+\label{sec:vec}
+
+A variable representing a vector can be typeset using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{vec}\marg{\meta{variable}}
+\end{definition}\screenpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{vec}\marg{x}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: x with a small right arrow above it.]
+\[ \vec{x} \]
+\end{resultS}
+
+Vectors are often typeset in bold.  This can be 
+done by \htmlref{redefining}{sec:renewcom} the \glsni{vec}
+command\doifbook{ (see \sectionref{sec:renewcom})}.
+You could use \gls{mathbf}, for example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{vec}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{mathbf}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+  \glsni{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{cdot}\glsni{vec}\marg{\glsni{xi}} = z
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\bookpagebreak\noindent
+\begin{resultS}[Image: upright bold x centred dot xi equals z]
+\[
+\mathbf{x}\cdot\mathbf{\xi} = z
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{cmd:vec}However, as you may have
+noticed, the 
+Greek letter $\xi$ has not come out in bold.  Here's an alternative 
+(using \gls{boldsymbol} defined in the \isty{amsfonts} \htmlref{package}{sec:packages}):
+\begin{code}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{vec}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{boldsymbol}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}\newline
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{cdot}\glsni{vec}\marg{\glsni{xi}} = z\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[As before but x and xi in italic bold]
+\[
+\boldsymbol{x}\cdot\boldsymbol{\xi} = z
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+
+Located (or position) vectors, on the other hand, are usually typeset with a right
+arrow, but the default definition of \glsni{vec} produces an
+arrow that is too small:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{vec}\marg{OP}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: the letters O P with a small right arrow
+above them.]
+\[
+\vec{OP}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+Instead, use \gls{overrightarrow} (\tableref{tab:overunderarrows}):
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begindispmath}
+\glsni{overrightarrow}\marg{OP}
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{resultS}[Image: as above but with a longer arrow that spans
+both letters.]
+\[
+\overrightarrow{OP}
+\]
+\end{resultS}
+You might prefer to define separate commands for a located vector and a vector
+variable.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+In the \glsterm{preamble}, define \cmdname{lvec} for a
+located vector and \cmdname{bvec} for a vector variable:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{lvec}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{overrightarrow}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+\glsni{newcommand}*\marg{\cmdname{bvec}}\oarg{1}\marg{\glsni{boldsymbol}\marg{\glsni{hashchar}1}}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Later in the document:
+\begin{code}
+Let \glsni{dollarchar}\cmdname{bvec}\marg{u}=(x, y)\glsni{dollarchar}
+represent \glsni{dollarchar}\cmdname{lvec}\marg{OP}\glsni{dollarchar}, then\newline
+\glsni{begindispmath}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{lVert} \cmdname{bvec}\marg{u} \glsni{rVert}
+    = \glsni{sqrt}\marg{x\glsni{circumchar}2 + y\glsni{circumchar}2}\newline
+\glsni{enddispmath}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[Image: the vector u appeas in italic bold and the
+letters O P are as above.]
+\newcommand*{\lvec}[1]{\overrightarrow{#1}}%
+\newcommand*{\bvec}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}%
+Let $\bvec{u}=(x, y)$ represent $\lvec{OP}$, then
+\[
+  \lVert \bvec{u} \rVert = \sqrt{x^2 + y^2}
+\]
+\end{result}
+\bookpagebreak
+
+\begin{exercise}{Maths: Vectors and Arrays}{ex:vectors}
+Try to produce the following:
+\renewcommand{\vec}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}
+\begin{result}[maths2ex.html]
+\[
+\boldsymbol{A}\vec{x} =
+\begin{pmatrix}
+0 & 1\\
+2 & 3
+\end{pmatrix}
+\begin{pmatrix}
+1\\
+2
+\end{pmatrix}
+=
+\begin{pmatrix}
+2\\
+8
+\end{pmatrix}
+= \vec{y}
+\]
+\end{result}%
+As before, you can \downloadorview{vectors} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%--------------- Mathematical Spacing -------------------
+
+\setnode{mathssp}
+\subsection{Mathematical Spacing}
+\label{sec:mathsspacing}
+
+\LaTeX\ deals with mathematical spacing fairly well, but sometimes
+you may find you want to adjust the spacing yourself.  Available
+spacing commands are listed in \tableref{tab:spacing}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption[Mathematical Spacing Commands]{Mathematical Spacing Commands
+(\supdag provided by \protect\istyend{amsmath})}
+\label{tab:spacing}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Command & \bfseries Example Input & \bfseries Example Output\\
+\midrule
+ & \verb|$AB$| & $AB$ \\
+\gls{thinspace} or \gls{comma} & \verb|$A\,B$| & $A\,B$\\
+\gls{medspace}\supdag\ or \gls{colon} & \verb|$A\:B$| & $A\:B$\\
+\gls{thickspace}\supdag\ or \gls{semicolon} & \verb|$A\;B$| & $A\;B$\\
+\gls{quad} & \verb|$A\quad B$| & $A\quad B$\\
+\gls{qquad} & \verb|$A\qquad B$| & $A\qquad B$\\
+\gls{negthinspace} or \gls{exclam} & \verb|$A\!B$| & $A\!B$ \\
+\gls{negmedspace}\supdag & \verb|$A\negmedspace B$| & $A\negmedspace B$ \\
+\gls{negthickspace}\supdag & \verb|$A\negthickspace B$| & $A\negthickspace B$ \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{exercise}{More Mathematics}{ex:moremaths}
+This exercise uses the spacing command \glsni{qquad}. In addition,
+it has a
+\htmlref{function name}{sec:declaremathop}, diag, and it uses the
+\gls{forall} and \htmlref{ellipses}{sec:ellipses} symbols. It also
+\htmlref{redefines the \cmdname{vec}
+command}{cmd:vec}\indexCom{vec}, as was done in the previous
+section, uses the
+\gls{env-bmatrix} environment (see \sectionref{sec:arrays}), and has \htmlref{subscripts and superscripts}{sec:scripts}.
+
+Try to reproduce the following output:
+\begin{result}[maths3ex.html]
+\renewcommand{\vec}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}
+The set of linear equations:
+\[
+a_ix_i = b_i  \qquad \forall i=1, \ldots, n
+\]
+can be written as a matrix equation:
+\[
+\diag(\vec{a})\vec{x} = \vec{b}
+\]
+where $\vec{x} = (x_1, \ldots, x_n)^T$, $\vec{b} = (b_1, \ldots, b_n)^T$
+and
+\[
+\diag(\vec{a}) = 
+\begin{bmatrix}
+a_1 & 0 & \cdots & 0\\
+0 & a_2 & \ddots & \vdots\\
+\vdots & \ddots & \ddots & 0\\
+0 & \cdots & 0 & a_n
+\end{bmatrix}
+\]
+\end{result}
+
+Again, you can \downloadorview{moremaths} the solution.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DEFINING ENVIRONMENTS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{newenv}
+\chapter{Defining Environments}
+\label{ch:newenv}
+
+Just as you can \htmlref{define new commands}{ch:newcom}, you can 
+also define new \glspl{environment}.  The command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newenvironment}\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{\meta{end-code}}
+\end{definition}%
+is used to define a new environment. As with new commands, you can
+use the optional argument \meta{n-args} to define an environment with
+arguments, and \meta{default} to define an environment with an
+optional argument.
+
+The first argument \meta{env-name} is the name of your new
+environment.  Remember that the environment name must not have a
+backslash.  The mandatory arguments \meta{begin-code} and
+\meta{end-code} indicate what \LaTeX\ \reportlinebreak should do at the beginning and
+end of the environment. Note that although \meta{begin-code} can
+reference the arguments using \gls{hashchar}\texttt{1} etc, the
+\meta{end-code} part can't.
+
+\xminisec{Example (An Exercise Environment):}
+
+Let's first consider an example of an
+environment without any arguments.  Let's make an environment called,
+say, \envname{exercise} that prints \textbf{Exercise} in bold and
+typesets the contents of the environment in italic, with a gap
+between the title and the contents.  In other words,
+we want the following code:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{exercise}\newline
+This is a sample.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{exercise}
+\end{code}
+to produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[newenv1.html]
+\par\noindent
+\textbf{Exercise}
+\begin{itshape}
+\par
+\vspace{\baselineskip}%
+\noindent
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{result}
+(In the \htmlref{next chapter}{ch:counters} we will add numbering.)
+
+Let's first consider what we want this environment to do: we can get
+the word \dq{Exercise} in bold using \gls{textbf},
+and the italic font can be
+obtained by using the \gls{env-itshape} environment (recall
+\sectionref{sec:fonts}).  
+So, at the start of our
+new environment we need
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textbf}\marg{Exercise}\glsni{begin}\marg{itshape}
+\end{codeS}
+and at the end of our new
+environment we need to end the \glsni{env-itshape} environment:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{end}\marg{itshape}
+\end{codeS}
+Putting the above together into the new environment definition:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsni{newenvironment}\marg{exercise}\glsni{percentchar} environment name\newline
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar} begin code\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{textbf}\marg{Exercise}\glsni{begin}\marg{itshape}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\marg{\glsni{end}\marg{itshape}}\glsni{percentchar} end code
+\end{code}
+Let's try it out:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{exercise}
+This is a sample.
+\end{exercise}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}%
+\begin{resultS}[newenv2.html]
+\textbf{Exercise}
+\begin{itshape}
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{resultS}
+Not quite right.  Let's put a paragraph break after
+\textbf{Exercise}, and put one before it as well. The command
+\gls{par} can be used to make a paragraph break and the extra bit of
+vertical spacing can be produced using \glsni{vspace}. The
+\gls{length} \gls{baselineskip} is the interline spacing.
+Modifications are shown in bold \modification{like this}.
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsnl{newenvironment}\marg*{exercise}\glsnl{percentchar} environment name\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{percentchar} begin code\newline
+\strut~~\modification{\glsni{par}\glsni{vspace}\marg{\glsni{baselineskip}}\glsni{percentchar}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{textbf}\marg*{Exercise}\glsnl{begin}\marg*{itshape}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\modification{\glsni{par}\glsni{vspace}\marg{\glsni{baselineskip}}\glsni{percentchar}}\newline
+}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{end}\marg*{itshape}}\glsnl{percentchar} end code
+\end{code}%
+Let's have a look at the output now:
+\begin{result}
+\dohtmlcolorbox{%
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}%
+\textbf{Exercise}\begin{itshape}%
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+}
+\end{result}
+\faq{There's a space added after my environment}{spaftend}%
+The indent at the start of each line is caused by the normal
+paragraph indentation. This can be suppressed using \gls{noindent}.
+It's also a good idea to suppress
+any spaces immediately following \verb|\begin{exercise}| and \verb|\end{exercise}|, which can be done
+using \gls{ignorespaces} and \reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak\gls{ignorespacesafterend}.
+Modifications are again shown in bold \modification{like this}.
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsnl{newenvironment}\marg*{exercise}\glsnl{percentchar} environment name\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{percentchar} begin code\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{par}\glsnl{vspace}\marg*{\glsnl{baselineskip}}\modification{\glsni{noindent}}\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{textbf}\marg*{Exercise}\glsnl{begin}\marg*{itshape}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{par}\glsnl{vspace}\marg*{\glsnl{baselineskip}}\modification{\glsni{noindent}\glsni{ignorespaces}}\newline
+}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{percentchar} end code\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{end}\marg{itshape}\modification{\glsni{ignorespacesafterend}}\newline 
+}
+\end{code}%
+The \envname{exercise} environment now appears as:
+\begin{result}
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent
+\textbf{Exercise}\begin{itshape}%
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{result}
+
+Now let's modify our code so that the environment takes an
+argument.  The argument should indicate the exercise topic.
+For example, the following code:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{exercise}{An Example}
+This is a sample.
+\end{exercise}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}%
+should produce the following result:
+\begin{result}[newenv3.html]
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent\textbf{Exercise (An Example)}
+\begin{itshape}\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{result}%
+As with \gls{newcommand}, \gls{hashchar}\texttt{1} is
+used to indicate the first argument.  We can now modify the code as
+follows:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\glsnl{newenvironment}\marg*{exercise}\modification{\oarg{1}}\glsnl{percentchar} environment name\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{percentchar} begin code\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{par}\glsnl{vspace}\marg*{\glsnl{baselineskip}}\glsnl{noindent}\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{textbf}\marg*{Exercise\modification{ (\glsni{hashchar}1)}}\glsnl{begin}\marg*{itshape}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{par}\glsnl{vspace}\marg*{\glsnl{baselineskip}}\glsnl{noindent}\glsnl{ignorespaces}\newline
+}\glsnl{percentchar}\newline
+\marg*{\glsnl{percentchar} end code\newline
+\strut~~\glsnl{end}\marg*{itshape}\glsnl{ignorespacesafterend}\newline
+}
+\end{code}
+
+\setnode{renewenv}
+\section{Redefining Environments}
+\label{sec:renewenv}
+
+It is also possible to redefine an environment using:
+\begin{definition}[\linewidth]
+\gls{renewenvironment}\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{\meta{end-code}}
+\end{definition}%
+As with \gls{renewcommand}, only redefine an existing environment if
+you want a modified version of that environment rather than because
+you like the environment name.
+
+\begin{exercise}{Defining a New Environment}{ex:newenv}
+If you did any of the exercises from \exerciseref{ex:section}
+to \exerciseref{ex:tables}, go back to the document you
+created and define the \envname{exercise} environment as in
+the example above.  Then try creating some exercises using this
+environment. You could, maybe, put an exercise in the first
+chapter, and then another one in the second chapter.
+Again you can \downloadorview{newenv} an example.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Counters %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{counters}
+\chapter{Counters}
+\label{ch:counters}
+
+As we have seen, \LaTeX\ automatically generates numbers for
+chapters, sections, equations etc. These numbers are stored in
+\keyword{counters}. The names of these counters are usually the same
+as the name of the object with which it is associated but without
+any backslash. For example, the \gls{chapter} command has an associated
+counter called \icounter{chapter}, the \gls{footnote} command has an
+associated counter called \icounter{footnote}, the
+\gls{env-equation} environment has an associated counter called
+\icounter{equation}, the \gls{env-figure} environment has an associated counter
+called \icounter{figure} and the \gls{env-table} environment has an associated
+counter called \icounter{table}. There is also a counter called
+\icounter{page} that keeps track of the current page number.
+
+The value of a counter can be displayed using the command
+\begin{definition}
+\icmdname{the}\meta{counter}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{counter} is the name of the associated counter.  Note
+that \meta{counter} does not go in curly braces and adjoins
+\cmdname{the} (for example, \gls{thepage}\faq{Page number is wrong at
+start of page}{wrongpn}, \reportlinebreak\gls{thesection} or
+\gls{thechapter}).   In fact, we have already encountered
+\reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak\gls{thefigure} in \sectionref{sec:subfloats}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+This page is Page\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{thepage}.
+The current chapter is Chapter\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{thechapter}.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\label{example:thepage}%
+\begin{resultS}[This page is Page 226. The current chapter is Chapter 11.]
+% LaTeX2HTML doesn't store the page number in the image file
+% so use \pageref to fake \thepage instead
+This page is Page~\pageref*{example:thepage}.
+The current chapter is Chapter~\thechapter.
+\end{resultS}%
+New counters can be created using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newcounter}\marg{\meta{counter-name}}\oarg{\meta{outer-counter}}
+\end{definition}%
+The \gls{mandatory} \meta{counter-name}
+is the name of your new counter (no backslash in the name).  For
+example, let's define a counter called \texttt{exercise} to keep
+track of each exercise. (Recall the exercise example from
+\chapterref{ch:newenv}.)
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newcounter}\marg{exercise}
+\end{codeS}%
+We can now display the value of the counter using
+the command \cmdname{theexercise}.  At the moment the counter
+has the value zero, the value can be changed using one
+of the following commands:
+
+\begin{fwlist}{\cmdname{addtocounter}\marg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{num}}}
+\fwitem{\gls{stepcounter}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Increments 
+\meta{counter} by 1
+
+\fwitem{\gls{refstepcounter}\marg{\meta{counter}}} As above, but 
+allows you to cross-\reportlinebreak reference the counter using \gls{label} and 
+\gls{ref}
+
+\fwitem{\gls{setcounter}\marg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{num}}} 
+Sets the counter to \meta{num}
+
+\fwitem{\gls{addtocounter}\marg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{num}}} 
+Adds \meta{num} to \meta{counter}
+\end{fwlist}
+
+A couple of the commands above take a number \meta{num} as one of 
+the arguments.  If you want to use another counter for this argument, 
+you need to use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{value}\marg{\meta{counter}}
+\end{definition}%
+For example, if you want to set our new \texttt{exercise} counter to 
+the same value as the \texttt{page} counter, you would do
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{setcounter}\marg{exercise}\marg{\glsni{value}\marg{page}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Let's go back to the \envname{exercise} environment you
+created in \exerciseref{ex:newenv}.  The exercises really ought to have
+an associated number, and this number should be incremented each time 
+we use the exercise environment.  So let's modify our code to do this.
+Modifications are illustrated in bold \modification{like this}:
+\begin{code}\obeyspaces
+\modification{\cmdname{newcounter}\marg{exercise}}\newline
+\strut\newline
+\glsni{newenvironment}\marg{exercise}\oarg{1}\glsni{percentchar} environment name\newline
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar} begin code\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{par}\glsni{vspace}\marg{\glsni{baselineskip}}\glsni{noindent}\newline
+\strut~~\modification{\glsni{refstepcounter}\marg{exercise}}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{textbf}\marg{Exercise \modification{\cmdname{theexercise}\glsni{spacesym}}(\glsni{hashchar}1)}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{begin}\marg{itshape}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{par}\glsni{vspace}\marg{\glsni{baselineskip}}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{noindent}\glsni{ignorespaces}\newline
+}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar} end code\newline
+\strut~~\glsni{end}\marg{itshape}\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~\modification{\glsni{par}\glsni{vspace}\marg{\glsni{baselineskip}}\glsni{percentchar}}\newline
+\strut~~\modification{\glsni{noindent}}\glsni{ignorespacesafterend}\newline
+}
+\end{code}%
+Note that the counter needs to be incremented before it is used.  
+I've also added an extra \gls{vspace} at the end of the
+environment and a paragraph break.
+Since we've used \glsni{refstepcounter} instead of 
+\glsni{stepcounter} we can cross-reference our
+\envname{exercise} environment:\reportpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Exercise\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ex:simple} is a simple exercise.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{exercise}\marg{Simple Exercise}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ex:simple}\glsni{percentchar}
+This is a simple exercise.
+\glsni{end}\marg{exercise}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+This produces 
+the following output:
+\begin{result}[newcounter.html]
+Exercise~1 is a simple exercise.
+\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent\textbf{Exercise 1 (Simple Exercise)}%
+\begin{itshape}\par\vspace{\baselineskip}\noindent
+This is a simple exercise.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{result}
+
+The counter representation can be changed by redefining
+\cmdname{theexercise}\faq{Redefining counters'
+\cmdname{the}-commands}{the-commands} using the \gls{renewcommand}
+command described in \sectionref{sec:renewcom}.
+The following commands can be used to display the counter:
+
+\begin{fwlist}{\cmdname{fnsymbol}\marg{\meta{counter}}}
+\fwitem{\gls{arabic}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Arabic numeral (1, 2, 3, \ldots)
+
+\fwitem{\gls{Roman}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Upper case Roman numeral 
+(I, II, III, \ldots)
+
+\fwitem{\gls{roman}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Lower case Roman numeral 
+(i, ii, iii, \ldots)
+
+\fwitem{\gls{alph}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Lower case letter 
+(a, b, c, \ldots, z)
+
+\fwitem{\gls{Alph}\marg{\meta{counter}}} Upper case letter 
+(A, B, C, \ldots, Z)
+
+\fwitem{\gls{fnsymbol}\marg{\meta{counter}}}
+A footnote symbol 
+(\makeimg{asterisk dagger double dagger section mark
+paragraph mark double bar double asterisk two single daggers
+two double daggers}{\footnotesymbols})
+\end{fwlist}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+To make the chapter numbers appear as upper case Roman 
+numerals you would do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\gls{thechapter}}\marg{\glsni{Roman}\marg{chapter}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You may have noticed that \gls{newcounter} has an optional
+argument \meta{outer-counter}.  This is for use if you require the
+new counter to be reset every time \meta{outer-counter} is
+incremented\faq{Master and slave counters}{addtoreset}.  For example,
+the section numbers in the \icls{scrbook} class are dependent on the
+chapter numbers.  Each time a new chapter is started, the section
+numbers are reset.  Suppose we want our \texttt{exercise} counter to
+be dependent on the \icounter{chapter} counter, we would do
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{newcounter}\marg{exercise}\oarg{chapter}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Note that if you make a counter dependent on another counter like
+this, the default action of \cmdname{the}\meta{counter} remains the
+same, so \cmdname{theexercise} won't print the chapter number.
+To make the chapter number appear as well, we need to redefine
+\cmdname{theexercise} (recall \sectionref{sec:renewcom}):
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\cmdname{theexercise}}\marg{\glsni{thechapter}.\glsni{arabic}\marg{exercise}}
+\end{codeS}%
+Notice the use of \gls{thechapter} instead of,
+say, \verb|\arabic{chapter}|.  This way
+we don't need to keep track of the \icounter{chapter} counter format.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Footnote Markers):}
+
+The \icounter{footnote} counter is reset at the start of each
+chapter but by default the chapter number isn't displayed in
+\gls{thefootnote}. In \latexhtml{this book}{the PDF version of
+this document} \glsni{thefootnote} was redefined so that it
+displays the chapter number:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{renewcommand}\marg{\glsni{thefootnote}}\marg{\glsni{thechapter}.\glsni{arabic}\marg{footnote}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\begin{exercise}{Using Counters}{ex:counters}
+Modify the document from \exerciseref{ex:newenv} so that
+the \envname{exercise} environment has a counter.
+Make the counter dependent on the chapter.
+You can \downloadorview{counters} an example.
+\end{exercise}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% APPENDICES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\appendix
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Installing Packages %%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{installsty}
+\chapter{Downloading and Installing Packages}
+\label{ch:installsty}
+
+New \LaTeX\ packages are being created all the time\faq{Installing things
+on a (La)TeX system}{instpackages}, so you may find that there are some
+packages that you don't have on your installation. In this case, if
+you don't have the package you want, you can download
+it\faq{Installation using MiKTeX package manager}{inst-miktex*} from
+\gls{ctan}. Before discussing installing new packages, it is
+a good idea for you to understand the \gls{tds}\faq{What is the TDS?}{tds}.
+
+All the files that make up the \TeX\ distribution are stored in a
+standard hierarchical structure. The root directory of the main
+distribution is usually called \texttt{texmf} or \texttt{texmf-dist}. Its location
+depends on your system. For example, if you are using
+\itexdistro{TeX~Live}~2012 on UNIX/Linux, it will probably be located in
+\texttt{/usr\slash local\slash texlive\slash 2012\slash texmf-dist} or if you are using \itexdistro{MiKTeX} it
+may be located in \verb|c:\texmf| or \texttt{c:\backslashsym Program
+Files\backslashsym texmf}. Whichever system you are using, I~shall
+refer to this directory as \meta{TEXMF}. So, if you are using
+\texdistro{TeX~Live}~2012, \meta{TEXMF}\texttt{\slash doc} refers to the directory
+\texttt{/usr\slash local\slash texlive\slash 2012\slash texmf-dist\slash doc}, or if you are using
+\texdistro{MiKTeX}, \meta{TEXMF}\verb|\doc| refers to the folder
+\verb|c:\texmf\doc| or \texttt{c:\backslashsym Program
+Files\backslashsym texmf\backslashsym doc}.
+In general, you should not make any modifications to the
+\meta{TEXMF} directory tree as it will get overridden whenever you
+update your \TeX\ distribution.
+
+You should also have a local texmf tree. Again, the location of the
+local texmf tree depends on your system. If you are using
+\texdistro{TeX~Live}, it may be 
+\texttt{/usr\slash local\slash texlive\slash texmf-local}. 
+If you are using \texdistro{MiKTeX}, it
+may be \texttt{c:\backslashsym localtexmf} or
+\texttt{c:\backslashsym Program Files\backslashsym localtexmf}.
+Whichever system you are using, I~shall refer to this directory as
+\meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}. There is also the \meta{TEXMF-HOME} directory.
+On UNIX-like systems this is usually \verb|~/texmf|. On Windows it's
+usually in your user folder. This is the one where you typically
+install any new classes or packages.
+
+These directories must all have the same structure. The principle
+sub-directories relating to \LaTeX\ are illustrated in
+\figureref{fig:tds}. It may be that your \meta{TEXMF-HOME} directory
+doesn't exist or doesn't contain some of these sub-directories, if
+so, you will need to create them.
+
+You can use the \iappname{kpsewhich} application to find out the 
+locations of \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL} and
+\meta{TEXMF-HOME}. Since \appname{kpsewhich} is a command-line
+application, you will need a \htmlref{command prompt or terminal}{sec:terminal} 
+open\latex{ (see \sectionref{sec:terminal})}.
+At the command prompt, type
+\begin{verbatim}
+kpsewhich -var-value=TEXMFHOME
+\end{verbatim}
+to display the location of \meta{TEXMF-HOME} or
+\begin{verbatim}
+kpsewhich -var-value=TEXMFLOCAL
+\end{verbatim}
+to display the location of \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}.
+(Remember to press the enter \enter\ key at the end of the line.)
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:docdir}%
+The documentation for \LaTeX\ classes and packages can be found
+in the \texttt{doc\slash latex} sub-directories: \meta{TEXMF}\texttt{\slash doc\slash latex},
+\meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}\texttt{\slash doc\slash latex} and \meta{TEXMF-HOME}\texttt{\slash doc\slash latex}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+  {pictures/tds}
+  {%
+    \caption{The \protect\TeX\protect\space Directory Structure (TDS) Showing 
+    the Main \protect\LaTeX-Related Sub-Directories.}%
+  }%
+  {fig:tds}
+\end{figure}
+
+Some packages are supplied in this format.\footnote{Complete list at \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/install/macros/latex/contrib/}.} For example, the package
+\sty{sample-package} may be distributed in a compressed file \texttt{sample-package.tds.zip},
+which contains the files
+\begin{verbatim}
+doc/latex/sample-package/sample-package.pdf
+tex/latex/sample-package/sample-package.sty
+tex/latex/sample-package/sample-foo.sty
+tex/latex/sample-package/sample-bar.sty
+\end{verbatim}
+In this case all you need to do is decompress the contents of 
+the archive into the
+\meta{TEXMF-LOCAL} or \meta{TEXMF-HOME} directory.
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:runtexhash}%
+On older \TeX-distributions, you would then need to \htmlref{refresh the
+\TeX\ database}{sec:refresh}\latex{ (described in
+\sectionref{sec:refresh}\ifscreenorother{}{\ on
+page~\pageref{sec:refresh}})}. With new distributions, you don't
+need to do this if you are installing a new package into your
+\meta{TEXMF-HOME} directory.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Unix-Like):}
+To install \texttt{sample-package.tds.zip} (assuming you're in the
+same directory as that file):
+\begin{verbatim}
+unzip -d ~/texmf sample-package.tds.zip
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\setnode{dtxins}
+\section{DTX and INS Files}
+\label{sec:dtx}
+\faq{Documented LaTeX sources (.dtx files)}{dtx}Not all packages are
+provided in the \gls{tds} format. Instead (or additionally) many are supplied
+with the code and documentation all bundled together in one file.
+This file usually has the extension \texttt{.dtx}, and it usually
+comes with an installation script that has the extension
+\texttt{.ins}. Once you have downloaded the \texttt{.dtx} and
+\texttt{.ins} files, you will then have to extract the code before
+you can use it. Let's go back to the previous example. The package
+\sty{sample-package} is now distributed in a DTX file, so the
+\texttt{sample-package.zip} archive contains the files
+\begin{verbatim}
+sample-package.dtx sample-package.ins
+\end{verbatim}
+(with hopefully a \texttt{README} or \texttt{INSTALL} file). Note
+that this archive, unlike the TDS one, doesn't contain any
+\texttt{.sty} files. The documentation source and the package code
+(\texttt{sample-package.sty}, \texttt{sample-foo.sty} and
+\texttt{sample-bar.sty}) are all contained in the file
+\texttt{sample-package.dtx}. This is how to extract them:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Extract the contents of \texttt{sample-package.zip} to a
+temporary directory.
+
+\item\label{itm:ins} Run \LaTeX\ on the file \texttt{sample-package.ins}. If
+you are using a \latexhtml{terminal}{\htmlref{terminal}{sec:terminal}}, you can type the
+following at the command prompt:
+\begin{verbatim}
+latex sample-package.ins
+\end{verbatim}
+If you are using a front-end, such as TeXWorks, open the 
+\texttt{.ins} file
+(for example \texttt{sample-package.ins}), and click on the build/typeset button.
+
+This will create the files containing the package code. In this
+example it will create the main package file \texttt{sample-package.sty}
+and supplementary packages \texttt{sample-foo.sty} and \texttt{sample-bar.sty}.
+
+\item Make a sub-directory of \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}\texttt{/tex/latex}%
+\footnote{or \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}\texttt{\backslashsym tex\backslashsym latex} on 
+Windows} in which to place these files. In this example, the package is
+called \dq{sample-package}, so make a sub-directory called \texttt{sample-package}.
+
+\item Move the files created in \objectref{Step}{itm:ins} into
+the new sub-directory you created in the previous step.
+
+\item\label{itm:dtx} Run \iPDFLaTeX\ on the file \texttt{sample-package.dtx}.
+(The same as in \objectref{Step}{itm:ins}, but use the file
+\texttt{sample-package.dtx} instead of \texttt{sample-package.ins}.) This will 
+create a file called \texttt{sample-package.pdf}. You may need to repeat
+this step to ensure that the cross references are up-to-date.
+Check the \texttt{README} file or \texttt{INSTALL} file to see
+if there is anything else you need to do. (If you have downloaded
+the package from CTAN, it's possible that the documentation has 
+already been supplied, as package authors are encouraged to supply
+a PDF version of the documentation for on-line viewing. If so,
+you can omit this step.)
+
+\item  Make a sub-directory of \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}\texttt{/doc/latex}%
+\footnote{or \meta{TEXMF-LOCAL}\texttt{\backslashsym doc\backslashsym latex} on 
+Windows} in which to place the documentation. In this example, the package is
+called \dq{sample-package}, so make a sub-directory called
+\texttt{sample-package}.
+
+\item Move the files created in \objectref{Step}{itm:dtx} into
+the new sub-directory you created in the previous step.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+As mentioned \htmlref{above}{obj:runtexhash}, on older
+\TeX-distributions, you would then need to \htmlref{refresh the
+\TeX\ database}{sec:refresh}, but this isn't required for
+\meta{TEXMF-HOME} installs on new distributions.
+
+\setnode{texhash}
+\section{Refreshing the \texorpdfstring{\protect\TeX}{TeX}\protect\space Database}
+\label{sec:refresh}
+
+On older \gls{tex} distributions you had to refresh the \TeX\
+database whenever you installed new classes or packages. With newer
+installations you don't need to do this if you install them in your
+\meta{TEXMF-HOME} directory, except under certain circumstances (for
+example, you're using using a networked drive). If it turns out that
+\TeX\ can't find a new class or package you have installed in
+\meta{TEXMF-HOME} you will need to update the database using the
+\iappname{texhash} (or \iappname{mktexlsr}) application. This is a
+command-line application, so you need a \htmlref{terminal or command
+prompt}{sec:terminal}\latex{ (see \sectionref{sec:terminal})}.
+
+For example, on UNIX/Linux, to update \meta{TEXMF-HOME} (the
+directory \verb|~/texmf|) you need to type the following at the
+command prompt:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texhash ~/texmf
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you are using a modern \TeX\ distribution, such as
+\itexdistro{MiKTeX}, \itexdistro{TeX~Live} or \itexdistro{MacTeX} there 
+should be a package manager that has a package installation
+and refresh facility. For example, \texdistro{TeX~Live} comes with
+the TeX~Live Manager (\iappname{tlmgr} or \iappname{mactlmgr}) and
+recent versions of \texdistro{MiKTeX} have an application called
+\appname{MiKTeX Update Wizard} which can automatically download and
+install known packages.
+
+If you experience any problems, contact your system administrator for help
+or try one of the resources listed in \appendixref{ch:help}.
+
+\xminisec{Related \gls{ukfaq} topics:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \faqlink{Installing things on a (La)TeX system}{instpackages}
+\item \faqlink{Installing files \dq{where (La)TeX can find them}}{wherefiles}
+\item \faqlink{Installation using MiKTeX package manager}{inst-miktex*}
+\item \faqlink{\dq{Temporary} installation of (La)TeX files}{tempinst}
+\item \faqlink{\dq{Private} installations of files}{privinst}
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% ERRORS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{commonerrors}
+\chapter{Common Errors}
+\label{ch:errors}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+If you're running \LaTeX\ from a \gls{terminal} and the only message that gets displayed is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+latex: Command not found.
+\end{verbatim}
+or
+\begin{verbatim}
+Bad command or file name
+\end{verbatim}
+then you have either mistyped the command name, or you
+don't have \LaTeX\ installed on your computer, or your path hasn't
+been set up correctly.  First check that you have typed the command
+correctly, then check to see if you have \TeX\ installed.  Failing
+that, contact your system administrator for help or try one of the
+resources listed in \appendixref{ch:help}.
+
+\item
+If you're running \LaTeX\ from a \gls{terminal} and you get the message (or something similar):
+\begin{verbatim}
+This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.3.1)
+! I can't find file `sample'.
+<*> sample
+          
+Please type another input file name: 
+\end{verbatim}
+then you have either misspelt the filename or you are in the wrong
+directory.  If you have misspelt the filename, simply type in the
+correct name at the prompt.  If you are in the wrong directory or you
+want to quit, type \texttt{X} followed by the return character \enter.
+To check you are in
+the right directory, on a Unix-like system you can type:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ls
+\end{verbatim}
+This will list the contents of
+the directory.  If you are certain that you have spelt the filename
+correctly and that you are in the right directory, there may be
+something wrong with your path, in which case contact your system
+administrator.
+
+\item
+Error messages will usually look something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Undefined control sequence.
+l.1 \docmentclass
+                 [12pt]{scrartcl}
+? 
+\end{verbatim}
+The first line is the error message.  In this example I~have misspelt
+the command \cmdname{documentclass}.  The next line begins with
+\texttt{l.}\ followed by a number.  This is the line number in the
+source code where the error occurred.  In this case the error
+occurred on line~1.  Following the line number is the input line
+\LaTeX\ has processed so far, and staggered on the next line is the
+remainder of the input line.
+
+Here's another example.  Suppose line~8 of my 
+\gls{source}
+looks like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+The date today is: \toady, which is nice to know.
+\end{verbatim}
+The error in this case is the misspelling of the command 
+\cmdname{today}.  The error message will appear as follows:
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+\noindent
+\begin{tabular}{l@{}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{%
+\texttt{!\ Undefined control sequence.}\rlap{\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline=-1ex]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0ex) -- (4em,2ex);
+\pgftext[left,center,at={\pgfpoint{4em}{2ex}}]{Error Message}
+}}}\\
+\texttt{l.}\smash{\llap{\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0ex) -- (-3em,-4ex);
+\pgftext[right,top,at={\pgfpoint{-3em}{-3ex}}]{\shortstack{Line\\Number}}}}}%
+\texttt{8 The date today is }%
+\smash{\llap{\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0ex) -- (-3em,-3ex);
+\pgftext[right,top,at={\pgfpoint{-3em}{-3ex}}]{Error}}}}%
+\cmdname{toady}%
+\smash{\rlap{\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0ex) -- (0em,-6ex);
+\pgftext[left,top,at={\pgfpoint{0em}{-6.5ex}}]{This is how far \LaTeX\ has got}}}}\\
+ &\texttt{, which is nice to know.}\smash{\rlap{\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0.5ex) -- (3em,0.5ex);
+\pgftext[left,center,at={\pgfpoint{3em}{0.5ex}}]{\shortstack{Rest of\\the line}}}}}\\
+\texttt{?}\color{blue}%
+\tikz[baseline]{\draw[latex-] (0em,0ex) -- (2em,-4ex);
+\pgftext[left,top,at={\pgfpoint{2em}{-4ex}}]{\LaTeX\ prompt}}
+\end{tabular}
+
+\vspace{\baselineskip}
+\end{latexonly}
+\html{\htmladdimg[alt="annotated error message"]{pictures/errormessage.png}}
+
+At the \LaTeX\ prompt, you can either type \texttt{h} for a help 
+message, or type \texttt{x} to exit \LaTeX\ and go back to your 
+source code and fix the problem.
+\end{itemize}
+
+There follows below a list of common error messages. If your
+problem isn't listed there, try the \gls{ukfaq}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% * (No message) %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{asteriskprompt}
+\section{* (No message, just an asterisk prompt!)}
+
+You've gone into \gls{tex}!  This is probably because 
+you've forgotten the \texttt{\gls{end}\marg{document}}.  The asterisk is the 
+\TeX\ prompt.  At this point the best thing to do is to abort the
+\TeX\ run.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%% Argument of \cline has an extra } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{clineextrabrace}
+\section{Argument of \textbackslash cline has an extra \}}
+
+If this error occurred on the first line in your \gls{env-tabular}
+\glsterm{environment}, you may have forgotten the
+\glsterm{argument} to the \gls*{env-tabular} environment.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%% Argument of \multicolumn has an extra } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{multicolumnextrabrace}
+\section{Argument of \textbackslash multicolumn has an extra \}}
+
+If this error occurred on the first line in your \gls{env-tabular}
+\glsterm{environment}, you may have forgotten the
+\glsterm{argument} to the \gls*{env-tabular} environment.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \begin{...} ended by \end{...} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{mismatchedend}
+\section{\textbackslash begin\{\texorpdfstring{\ldots}{...}\} ended by 
+\textbackslash end\{\texorpdfstring{\ldots}{...}\}}
+
+The beginning of your environment doesn't have a matching end.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Check to make sure you have spelt the name of the environment 
+correctly.
+
+You will get this error message if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{end}\marg{docment}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Check that for every \gls{begin} you have a corresponding 
+\gls{end} with the same name.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Bad math environment delimiter %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{badmathdelim}
+\section{Bad math environment delimiter}
+
+Only a certain type of character may be used as a 
+\htmlref{delimiter}{sec:delimiters} (for example,
+\gls{openparen} \gls{closeparen} \gls{delimiter.opensq}
+\gls{delimiter.closesq}), check which one you have specified.  This error may 
+also occur if you have forgotten a \gls{right} or not used it in the
+same \glslink{group}{scope}.
+(Remember to use a \gls{delimiter.periodchar} if you want an invisible delimiter) or 
+you may have forgotten to end your array environment with 
+\verb|\end{array}|.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Can only be used in preamble %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{onlypreamble}
+\section{Can only be used in preamble.}
+
+Some commands, such as \gls{usepackage} may only appear in the 
+\gls{preamble}.  Check to see where you have put 
+it.  For example, this error will be caused by doing:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}\wrong
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{graphicx}\correct
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Command ... already defined %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{alreadydef}
+\section{Command \texorpdfstring{\protect\ldots}{...}\protect\space already defined}
+
+You have tried to define a \gls{command} which 
+already exists.  Try giving it a different name.  Remember never to
+redefine a command if you don't know what the command originally
+does.
+
+Alternatively, you have tried to define an
+\gls{environment} which already exists.  Give the new
+environment a different name.  Again, never redefine an environment
+where you don't know what the original environment does.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%% Display math should end with $$ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingenddispmath}
+\section{Display math should end with \$\$}
+
+You may have a dollar sign (\gls{dollarchar}) in a displayed maths
+environment, such as the \gls{env-equation} environment.  
+Remember that \verb|$| is short hand for \verb|\begin{math}| or 
+\verb|\end{math}|, so you can't end one of the other environments 
+with a \verb|$|. (This error message is in fact a bit confusing,
+as it seems to be suggesting that you end a displayed maths
+environment with \verb|$$| which you also shouldn't do\faq{Why use
+\glsnl{begindispmath}\ldots\glsnl{enddispmath} in place of \$\$\ldots\$\$}{dolldoll}.)
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Environment ... undefined %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{envundefined}
+\section{Environment \texorpdfstring{\protect\ldots}{...}\protect\space undefined}
+
+\LaTeX\ doesn't recognise the environment you have specified.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Check you have spelt the environment name correctly.
+
+You will get this error if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\marg{docment}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item If it's your own environment, check you have defined the
+environment before using it.
+
+\item If the environment is defined in a package, check you 
+have included the package using the 
+\htmlref{\cmdname{usepackage}}{sec:packages} command.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%% Extra alignment tab has been changed to \cr %%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{tab2cr}
+\section{Extra alignment tab has been changed to \textbackslash cr}
+
+You have too many ampersands (\gls{ampchar}) in one row.  The most 
+probable cause is that you have forgotten the end of row command
+\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar} on the previous row.  Remember also that if you have a
+\gls{multicolumn} command to span more than one column, you
+should have fewer \glsni{ampchar}s in that row. This error can also occur
+from a confusion over the two meanings of \gls{dbbackslashchar}: a
+line break within a paragraph cell and a row break.  In which case,
+you need to use \gls{tabularnewline} instead of
+\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Extra \right %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{extraright}
+\section{Extra \textbackslash right}
+
+There are a number of possible causes.  The most probable is that you
+have a \gls{right} that doesn't have a matching \gls{left}.
+(Remember left comes before right.)  Another possible cause is that
+you have missed out \verb|\end{array}|.  (Remember that
+\glspl{environment} provide implicit
+\glsing{group}, and \glsni{left} and its matching
+\glsni{right} must appear within the same group level.)
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% File ended while scanning use of ... %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{fileendedwhilescanning}
+\section{File ended while scanning use of \texorpdfstring{\ldots}{...}}
+
+The most usual cause of this error is a missing closing brace.
+
+You will get this error if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{end}\glsni{leftbracechar}document
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% File not found %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{filenotfound}
+\section{File not found}
+
+\LaTeX\ can't find the file you have specified.  You will be given
+the opportunity to type in the correct filename at the prompt.  If
+you want to quit, simply type \texttt{X} followed by the return
+character \enter.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Make sure that you have spelt the filename correctly.
+
+This error will be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\gls{documentclass}\marg{scrarticle}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\gls{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{alltt}
+
+If this is the case, simply type in the correct name at the prompt 
+(followed by the return character \enter) then go back and fix the
+spelling in the \gls{source}.
+
+\item Make sure that the file is in the same directory as your
+document or in the \LaTeX\ path.  If the file is in another directory
+(not in the \LaTeX\ path), you will need to specify the pathname, but
+remember that when using \LaTeX\ under Windows, you need to use a
+forward slash (\glsi{dir.slash}) as the directory divider, as a backslash would be
+interpreted as a command.  For example, if you have a file called
+\texttt{shapes.pdf} in the subdirectory \texttt{pictures} then you
+would get a \dq{file not found} error message if you did
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\gls{includegraphics}\marg{shapes}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\gls{includegraphics}\marg{pictures/shapes}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item If the file is a \htmlref{package}{sec:packages} or
+\htmlref{class file}{sec:cls}, it's possible that you don't have that
+file installed on your computer.  If this is the case you will need
+to download and install it as described in
+\appendixref{ch:installsty}.  Remember that you need to
+refresh the database after installing a new package or class file.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Illegal character in array arg %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{illegalarraychar}
+\section{Illegal character in array arg}
+
+You have used a character in the \gls{argument} of a
+\gls{env-tabular} or \gls{env-array} environment that is not
+allowed. The standard available characters are: \texttt{r} (right
+justified), \texttt{l} (left justified), \texttt{c} (centred) and
+\texttt{p}, as well as \gls{atchar}\marg{\meta{inter-col text}}.
+Remember that if you want to use the \gls{gtcol}\marg{\meta{decl}} or 
+\gls{ltcol}\marg{\meta{decl}} specifiers, you must include the
+\isty{array} package.
+
+This error will also occur if you have forgotten the argument to the
+\gls*{env-tabular} or \gls*{env-array} environment.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Illegal parameter number in definition %%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{illegalparamnum}
+\section{Illegal parameter number in definition}
+
+You have referred to a \htmlref{parameter (argument)
+number}{sec:newcomarg} that is greater than the number of parameters
+you have specified. For example, suppose you defined the command to
+have only one parameter, then you can't use \gls{hashchar}\texttt{2}
+which refers to the second, non-existent, parameter. Remember that
+you need to specify how many parameters you want in the
+\gls{optional} to \glsni{newcommand}, otherwise it will be assumed
+that the command has no arguments.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Illegal unit of measure %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{illegalunit}
+\section{Illegal unit of measure (pt inserted)}
+
+You have either not specified a unit when giving a \gls{length} (even zero
+lengths must have a unit) or you have specified an invalid unit or
+you have misspelt the unit.  Available units are listed in
+\tableref{tab:units}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Lonely \item %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{lonelyitem}
+\section{Lonely \textbackslash item}
+
+The command \gls{item} may only appear in one of the list making
+environments (such as \gls{env-itemize}).  Make sure you haven't
+forgotten your environment.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Misplaced alignment tab character & %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{misplacedtab}
+\section{Misplaced alignment tab character \&}
+
+You have used the special character \gls{ampchar} where you shouldn't
+have.  Recall from \sectionref{sec:chars} that if you want an \& sign 
+to appear you need to do \gls{amp} not just \glsni{ampchar}.
+
+You would have got this error message if you had done, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{ampchar} our equipment
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{amp} our equipment
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing } inserted %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingendbrace}
+\section{Missing \} inserted}
+
+You have missed a closing curly brace, or you may have missed out an
+argument.
+
+\xminisec{Example:} 
+If the following line occurs in a tabular environment:
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+ \gls{ampchar} \gls{multicolumn}\marg{2}\marg{c}\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+\end{alltt}
+this will produce the error. (The third argument to 
+\gls{multicolumn} has been omitted.)
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing $ inserted %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingdollar}
+\section{Missing \$ inserted}
+
+This message can be caused by a number of errors:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item You might have missed the beginning of one of the mathematics
+\glspl{environment} (that is, you've used a
+\gls{command} that must only appear in maths mode).
+
+\item You may have typed \gls{dollarchar} instead of \gls{dollar} (you
+actually want a dollar symbol to appear).  Recall from
+\sectionref{sec:chars} that if you
+want a \$ sign to appear you need to do \glsni{dollar} not just \glsni{dollarchar}.
+
+You would have got this error message if you had done, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+expenditure came to \glsni{dollarchar}2000.00
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+expenditure came to \glsni{dollar}2000.00
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item You may have missed the end of a mathematics environment, or
+you may have a paragraph break within an in-line or
+displayed maths environment, where it is
+not permitted.  Make sure you don't have any blank lines within the
+environment. If you want a blank line in your code to make it easier
+to edit, try having a percent sign at the start of an empty line to
+ensure that the line is ignored by \LaTeX. For example:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{equation}
+\glsni{percentchar}
+E = mc\glsni{circumchar}2
+\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{end}\marg{equation}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing \begin{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingbegindoc}
+\section{Missing \textbackslash begin\{document\}}
+
+You have put some text outside of the document 
+\glsterm{environment}.  Check the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item You have remembered \verb|\begin{document}|
+
+This error would be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+\wrong
+This is a simple document
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}\correct
+This is a simple document.
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item You haven't placed any text before \verb|\begin{document}|. 
+For example:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+This is a simple document\wrong 
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}\correct
+This is a simple document
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item You haven't missed out the backslash at the start of either 
+\gls{documentclass} or \glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+
+This error would be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+documentclass\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrartcl}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing delimiter %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingdelim}
+\section{Missing delimiter}
+
+You have forgotten to specify the type of delimiter you want (for
+example, 
+\gls{openparen} \gls{closeparen} \gls{delimiter.opensq} \gls{delimiter.closesq}
+\gls{leftbrace} \gls{rightbrace}). (Remember to use a \gls{delimiter.periodchar} if you want 
+an invisible delimiter, and remember that if you want a 
+curly brace, you must have a backslash followed by the curly brace.)
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This error will occur if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+f(x) = \glsni{left}\glsni{leftbracechar}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{ll}
+0 \glsni{ampchar} x \cmdname{leq} 0\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+1 \glsni{ampchar} x > 1
+\glsni{end}\marg{array}
+\glsni{right}.
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+f(x) = \glsni{left}\glsni{leftbrace}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{array}\marg{ll}
+0 \glsni{ampchar} x \cmdname{leq} 0\gls{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+1 \glsni{ampchar} x > 1
+\glsni{end}\marg{array}
+\glsni{right}.
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing \endcsname inserted %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingendcsname}
+\section{Missing \textbackslash endcsname inserted}
+
+This is a \gls{tex} error rather than a \LaTeX\ error
+which makes it harder to determine the cause, however it can be
+caused by placing a backslash in front of the name of an
+\gls{environment}.  (Remember that
+\gls{environment} names do not contain a backslash.)
+
+This error will be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\marg{\glsni{sffamily}}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{sffamily}
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing \endgroup inserted %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingendgroup}
+\section{Missing \textbackslash endgroup inserted}
+
+A number of things could have caused this.  You may have missed out
+the end of an \gls{environment}, or you may have an
+environment inside of another environment it's not allowed to be in.
+For example, this error can be caused by placing an
+\envname{eqnarray} environment inside a \envname{displaymath}
+environment, which is not allowed. (But, of course, you haven't
+used either of those obsolete environments~\cite{l2tabu}, have you?) 
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Missing number %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingnum}
+\section{Missing number, treated as zero}
+
+\LaTeX\ is expecting a number. If your command takes more than one
+\gls{argument}, check to make sure the arguments are in
+the correct order.  For example, if you are using a
+\gls{env-minipage} environment, you might have
+omitted the \gls{mandatory} which
+specifies the width of the minipage, or you may have the
+\glspl{optional} the wrong way round.  The placement specifier
+should come first, followed by the height.
+
+If you are using \gls{addtocounter} or \gls{setcounter} 
+remember that the second argument must be a number, so if you want 
+the value of a counter as the argument you must use \gls{value}.
+This error can be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{setcounter}\marg{exercise}\marg{chapter}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{setcounter}\marg{exercise}\marg{\glsni{value}\marg{chapter}}
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Paragraph ended %%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{parended}
+\section{Paragraph ended before \textbackslash begin was complete}
+
+You've probably missed a closing brace at the end of the argument to
+\gls{begin}.  This error will be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\glsni{leftbracechar}document
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Runaway argument %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{runawayarg}
+\section{Runaway argument}
+
+There are a number of possible causes of this error:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Paragraph breaks are not permitted in the
+\glspl{argument} of \glspl{short}.
+If there is a corresponding \gls{environment} then you
+should use that instead.  For example, this error message will be
+generated by doing, say,
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{textbf}\glsni{leftbracechar}This is a simple document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+\wrong
+Here is the second paragraph.\glsni{rightbracechar}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of\bookpagebreak
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{bfseries}
+This is a simple document.
+Here is the first paragraph.
+\correct
+Here is the second paragraph.
+\glsni{end}\marg{bfseries}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item The closing brace of a 
+\gls{mandatory} is missing:
+This error will be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{title}\glsni{leftbracechar}A Simple Document
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{title}\marg{A Simple Document}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item This error can also be caused by omitting the 
+\gls{mandatory} of an \gls{environment}.  For example, 
+this error will occur
+if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{kopka95} A Guide to \glsni{LaTeXe}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{1}
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{kopka95} A Guide to \glsni{LaTeXe}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{missingitem}
+\section{Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \textbackslash item}
+
+You may have missed an \gls{item} command.  The first object in
+a list environment must either be an \gls{item} command, or another
+list environment.
+
+This error will be caused by, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+Animal
+\glsni{item} Vegetable
+\glsni{item} Mineral
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+\glsni{item} Animal
+\glsni{item} Vegetable
+\glsni{item} Mineral
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\bookpagebreak
+This error can also be caused by a missing \gls{bibitem} in the
+\htmlref{bibliography}{sec:bib}.  For example, the error will occur
+if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{1}
+A Guide to \glsni{LaTeXe}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{begin}\marg{thebibliography}\marg{1}
+\glsni{bibitem}\marg{kopka95} A Guide to \glsni{LaTeXe}
+\end{alltt}
+
+See also \gls{ukfaq} entry: \faqlink{Perhaps a missing \cmdname{item}?}{errmissitem}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% There's no line here to end %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{nolinetoend}
+\section{There's no line here to end}
+
+You have placed a line breaking command (such as \gls{newline.dbbackslashchar},
+\gls{newline} or \gls{linebreak}) where it doesn't make
+sense to have one.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Undefined control sequence %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{csundefined}
+\section{Undefined control sequence}
+
+\LaTeX\ doesn't understand the \gls{command} you
+have used.  
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Check to see if you have misspelt the command name (remember
+that all \LaTeX\ command names are case-sensitive.)
+
+You will get this error if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+This is a simple \cmdname{Latex}\glsni{spacesym}document
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+This is a simple \gls{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}document
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Check that you have remembered the space when typing
+\gls{spacesym} (backslash space).
+For example, this error will occur if you do, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+This is a \cmdname{LaTeX}\cmdname{sample} document.
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+This is a \glsni{LaTeX}\glsni{spacesym}sample document
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item If you are using a command that is defined in a
+\htmlref{package}{sec:packages} make sure you have included the
+package using \gls{usepackage}.
+
+\item Check that your command name hasn't run into the next piece
+of text.  For example,
+you can do
+\begin{alltt}
+man\glsni{oe}\marg{}uvre
+\end{alltt}
+or
+\begin{alltt}
+man\glsni{oe} uvre
+\end{alltt}
+or (not recommended)
+\begin{alltt}
+man\marg{\glsni{oe}}uvre
+\end{alltt}
+but not
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+man\cmdname{oeuvre}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\item Check if you have used a backslash instead of a forward slash as a
+directory divider.  (Remember that when using \LaTeX\ under Windows,
+you need to use a forward slash (\glsi{dir.slash}) as the directory divider, as a
+backslash would be interpreted as a command.)
+
+For example, suppose you have a file called \texttt{shapes.pdf} in a 
+subdirectory called \texttt{pictures}, then you would get an error 
+if you did
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{pictures\cmdname{shapes}}
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\glsni{includegraphics}\marg{pictures/shapes}
+\end{alltt}
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%% You can't use `macro parameter character #' in horizontal mode %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{hashinhmode}
+\section{You can't use `macro parameter character \#' in horizontal mode}
+
+You have used the special character \gls{hashchar} where you shouldn't
+have.  Recall from \sectionref{sec:chars} that if you want a \# sign to appear you need
+to do \gls{hash} not just \glsni{hashchar}.
+
+This error message will be caused by doing, say,
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+Item \glsni{hashchar}1
+\end{alltt}
+instead of
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+Item \glsni{hash}1
+\end{alltt}
+
+\setnode{help}
+\chapter{Need More Help?}
+\label{ch:help}
+
+First, try to find your query in the \gls{ukfaq}. \Gls{tug}
+also has a list of useful resources at
+\url{http://tug.org/interest.html}. If you're still stuck, you can
+post your question on a (La)TeX forum, newsgroup or mailing list,
+such as those listed below. If you do post a question, remember
+you're asking people who only have an altruistic interest in
+helping. No one is paying them to help you. Most of the class files
+and packages were written for free by people who had a need to solve
+a particular problem and decided to make their work publicly
+available. So no matter how frustrated you're feeling, stick to
+being polite. If you can't work out how to use a particular class or
+package, don't start by heaping offensive, unconstructive criticism on it as there's a chance
+the author will read the message. There's no sense in alienating the
+person most qualified to answer your question. In your message,
+stick to the following guidelines:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Cut to the chase. In other words, be concise about the nature
+of the problem. Don't write lots of long-winded paragraphs.
+
+\item Provide a minimal
+example\footnote{see \url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/minexample/}} that 
+illustrates the problem.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{verbatim}
+I'm trying to use the \foo command in the "bar" package, 
+but I'm getting the following error message:
+! Undefined control sequence.
+l.4 \foo
+
+Here's a minimal example:
+\documentclass{scrartcl}
+\usepackage{bar}
+\begin{document}
+\foo{Blah}
+\end{document}
+
+I'm using bar version 1.0 (2012/06/30).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\xminisec{Another example:}
+\begin{verbatim}
+I'm using the \foo command in the "bar" package. According
+to the documentation, this command should display its argument
+in a bold font, but it's coming out in italic instead. 
+Anyone know why?
+
+Here's a minimal example:
+\documentclass{scrartcl}
+\usepackage{bar}
+\begin{document}
+\foo{Blah}
+\end{document}
+
+I'm using bar version 1.1 (2012/07/30).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+There's no guarantee that you will get an answer, but if you follow
+the above guidelines, you will increase your chances.
+
+\xminisec{Resources}
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item The \LaTeX\ Community (\url{http://www.latex-community.org/}).
+
+\item \TeX/\LaTeX\ on StackExchange
+(\url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/}).
+
+\item \htmladdnormallink{\texttt{comp.text.tex}
+newsgroup}{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex} (use a
+newsreader rather than the Google interface if you want to avoid the
+spam).
+
+\item \htmladdnormallink{\texttt{texhax} archives}{http://tug.org/pipermail/texhax/}\doifbook{~\cite{texhax}}.
+
+\end{itemize}
+I~strongly recommend that you also have a look at the On-Line
+Catalogue~\cite{texcat}.
+It's also a good idea to look at the documentation that was
+installed with your \TeX/\LaTeX\ distribution (see
+\sectionref{sec:texdoc}). If you are using \itexdistro{MiKTeX} you can access the
+on-line help via the Start Menu: \startmenu{MiKTeX \menuto\ Help}
+
+(Please don't send your problems to me, unless you want to hire a
+consultant. I~read both the \LaTeX\ Community Forum and
+\texttt{comp.text.tex} and answer relevant questions if I~have time,
+but it clogs up my inbox if people keep sending attachments that are in
+the order of several megabytes in size.) Besides, you'll reach a
+wide group of experts if you post to a newsgroup, forum or mailing
+list, rather than a single busy individual.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Supplemental Material %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\ifpdf\else\input{supplemental}\fi
+
+\backmatter
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\clearpage\phantomsection
+\setnode{bibliography}
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{novices}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% GLOSSARIES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{acronyms}
+\printglossary[type=acronym,nonumberlist,style=acronyms]
+
+\setnode{summary}
+\setdoublecolumnglo
+\printglossary[style=summary]
+
+\setnode{bookindex}
+\printindex
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% LICENCE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{licence}
+\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License}
+\input{../fdl}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% HISTORY %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{history}
+\chapter{History}\markright{History}
+
+\historyitem{25th Sept 2012 (Version 1.4)}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Paperback edition~1 produced.
+\item Added TeXWorks section.
+\item Moved \dq{Text editor and Terminal approach}, \dq{TeXnicCenter}
+and \dq{WinEdt} sections to new supplementary material.
+\item Added hardcopy-related code.
+\item Change to \koma\ classes (both for examples and for pdf
+versions of this document).
+\item Changed from using \sty{subfloat} to \sty{subcaption} package.
+\item Added section on inter-sentence spacing.
+\item Moved \dq{Errors} and \dq{Where to get Help?} to appendices.
+\item Moved section \dq{Downloading and Installing Packages} to
+new appendix chapter.
+\item Moved introduction to packages to \dq{Creating a Simple
+Document}.
+\item Moved datetime section to \dq{Creating a Simple Document}
+chapter. (Removed reference to ukdate package.)
+\item Moved babel section to \dq{Structuring Your Document} chapter.
+\item Moved graphicx section to its own chapter.
+\item Added section on align.
+\item Added \cmdname{cfrac}, \cmdname{substack} and \sty{amsmath} ellipses to maths chapter.
+\item Added extensible arrows and \cmdname{bigl} etc to maths
+chapter.
+\item Added booktabs.
+\item Moved lengths chapter to section in definitions.
+\item Added summary chapter with commands hyperlinked to their
+definitions in the summary.
+\item Changed definitions chapter to use a glossary structure.
+\item Moved bibliography into bib file.
+\item Added \sty{varioref}.
+\item Removed dependency on \sty{html} package (for pdf versions)
+to avoid conflict between \sty{html} and \sty{varioref}
+(\sty{html} package functions not defined by \sty{hyperref}
+now emulated; \sty{comment} package loaded to provide
+\envname{htmlonly} environment).
+\item Removed image of equation written in Word (Microsoft have
+improved their equation rendering) and added link to
+Murray Sargent~III blog~\cite{sargentiii}.
+\item Added section on what a terminal/command prompt is.
+\item Added section on auxiliary files.
+\item Added section on Perl.
+\item Added information about latexmk
+\item Mentioned grffile package.
+\item Mentioned on-the-fly EPS conversion.
+\item Mentioned \sty{etoolbox}'s \cmdname{appto} and \sty{babel}'s
+\cmdname{addto}.
+\item Changed to UTF-8 and mostly changed to using code points
+instead of named entities in HTML files.
+\item Moved the document's home page from
+\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/novices/} to
+\url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/novices/}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\historyitem{15th Jan 2008 (Version 1.3)}
+
+The main reason behind this change was to increase accessibility and
+conform to W3C guidelines. If you are experiencing problems relating
+to accessibility, please let me know (clearly stating the problem).
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Corrected error in the university's post code on the
+title page
+\item Added alternative text tags to more of the images, and made
+some of the images hyperlinks to a more detailed description of the
+image.
+\item Added information on how to break ligatures.
+\item Moved information on TeX to the introduction, and removed
+section on TeX that was in the "Some Definitions" chapter.
+\item Document nodes now have permanent names instead of the generic
+node\meta{n}.html which \LaTeX2HTML generates by default.
+\item Went back to using straight double quotes in the HTML document
+as the fancy typographic double quotes are nonstandard.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\historyitem{8th May 2007 (Version 1.2)}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Links to \gls{ukfaq} added.
+\item Overview made into a separate section, and tidied up a bit.
+\item Added some extra definitions: moving arguments and fragile
+commands, robust commands, short and long commands.
+\item Changed \dq{Text editor and Terminal approach} to deal with
+Unix-type systems rather than MS-DOS.
+\item Moved section on \envname{tabular} environment.
+\item Added section on boxes and mini-pages.
+\item Segmented section on font changing commands.
+\item Segmented section describing \sty{graphicx}.
+\item Added section on the \sty{babel} package.
+\item Updated and segmented section on downloading and installing
+new packages.
+\item Added section on side-by-side figures.
+\item Updated section on sub-figures to use the new \sty{subfloat}
+package instead of the obsolete \sty{subfigure} package.
+\item Added \dq{Need More Help?} chapter.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\backcoverheading
+(See \url{http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl-howto-opt.html#SEC2}.)
+
+\backcovertext
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/glsentries.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/glsentries.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..683140fcd6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/glsentries.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5157 @@
+\renewcommand{\summarypreamble}{%
+Commands or environments defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel are always
+available.%
+}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {backslashchar}
+ {\backslashsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Escape character (indicates a command).}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {dbbackslashchar}
+ {\dbbackslashsym}
+ {\oarg{\meta{height}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{height} Extra vertical space.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgchildactivechar
+ {newline.dbbackslashchar}
+ {dbbackslashchar}
+ {\dbbackslashsym}
+ {Breaks a line without justification (\protect\htmlref{starred form}{itm:starredcommand}
+   forbids a page break)}
+
+\defgchildactivechar
+ {tab.dbbackslashchar}
+ {dbbackslashchar}
+ {\dbbackslashsym}
+ {Starts a new row in tabular-style environments}
+
+\defgcs{tabularnewline}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Behaves like \nxglsi{tab.dbbackslashchar} in a
+   \nxglsni{env-tabular}-like environment but helps to disambiguate a
+    \nxglslink{newline.dbbackslashchar}{line break} in a paragraph
+    cell from a \nxglslink{tab.dbbackslashchar}{row separator}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {leftbracechar}
+ {\leftbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Marks the beginning of a \nxglsi{group}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {rightbracechar}
+ {\rightbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Marks the end of a \nxglsi{group}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {leftbrace}
+ {\leftbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Left brace \{ character. In math mode may be used as a delimiter.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {rightbrace}
+ {\rightbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Right brace \{ character. In math mode may be used as a delimiter.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {emdash}%
+ {\emDashcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Em-dash \textemdash\ symbol. (Normally used to
+  indicate omissions or interruptions or to highlight a parenthetical element.)
+  See also \nxglsni{textemdash}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {endash}%
+ {\enDashcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {En-dash \textendash\ symbol.  (Normally used for number ranges.)
+  See also \nxglsni{textendash}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {questiondown}%
+ {\questiondowncs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upside-down question mark \textquestiondown\ symbol. See also \nxglsni{textquestiondown}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ [!Y]
+ {exclamdown}%
+ {\exclamdowncs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upside-down exclamation mark \textexclamdown\ symbol. See also \nxglsni{textexclamdown}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quoteleft}%
+ {\quoteleftcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Open quote \textquoteleft\ symbol. See also \nxglsni{textquoteleft}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quotedblleft}%
+ {\quotedblleftcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Open double quote \textquotedblleft\ symbol. See also \nxglsni{textquotedblleft}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quoteright}%
+ {\quoterightcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Closing quote or apostrophe \textquoteright\ symbol in text mode 
+  or prime symbol \ensuremath{'} in math mode. See also \nxglsni{textquoteright}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quotedblright}%
+ {\quotedblrightcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Closing double quote \textquotedblright\ symbol in text mode
+  or double prime \ensuremath{''} in math mode. See also \nxglsni{textquotedblright}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {dash}%
+ {\dashcs}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Hyphen - in text mode or minus sign $-$ in math mode.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {exclam}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Negative thin space.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {exclamchar}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildidxactivechar
+ {sentence.exclamchar}
+ {exclamchar}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {Exclamation symbol (end of sentence marker)}
+ 
+
+\defgchildidxactivechar
+ {makeindex.exclamchar}
+ {exclamchar}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {\nxiappname{makeindex} sublevel special character}
+
+\defgchildidxactivechar
+ {resizebox.exclamchar}
+ {exclamchar}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {Used in \nxglsi{resizebox} to maintain aspect ratio}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {csbar}
+ {\vbarsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Double vertical bar \doublebar{} delimiter}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {barchar}
+ {\vbarsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildidxactivechar
+ {delim.barchar}
+ {barchar}
+ {\vbarsym}
+ {Delimiter. (Math mode only. Use \nxglsni{textbar} in text mode.)}
+
+\defgchildidxactivechar
+ {array.barchar}
+ {barchar}
+ {\vbarsym}
+ {Vertical rule specifier (\nxglsi{env-tabular} or
+   \nxglsi{env-array})}
+
+\defgchar
+ {slashchar}
+ {\slashsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {text.slash}
+ {slashchar}
+ {\slashsym}
+ {Forward slash symbol (see also \nxglsi{slash})}
+
+\defgxchildchar
+ {dir.slash}
+ {slashchar}
+ {\slashsym}
+ {Directory divider}
+ {directory divider}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {delim.slash}
+ {slashchar}
+ {\slashsym}
+ {Forward slash delimiter (math mode)}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ [!Z]
+ {visiblespace}
+ {\textvisiblespace}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {A visual indication of a space in the code. When you type up 
+   the code, replace all instances of this symbol with a space via the space bar on your 
+   keyboard.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {at}
+ {\atsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Used when a sentence ends with a capital letter.
+   This command should be placed after the letter and before the
+   punctuation mark.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {atchar}
+ {\atsym}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {%
+   Used in the argument of \nxglsi{env-tabular} or 
+   \nxglsi{env-array} like environments to specify text to insert between columns.%
+ }
+ {%
+     \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{text} Text to insert between columns
+     \EndArgList
+ }
+  
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {questionchar}
+ {\questionsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {Question mark (end of sentence marker).}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {ltchar}
+ {\lesssym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Less than symbol. (Use \nxglsni{textless} in text mode.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {gtchar}
+ {\greatersym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Greater than symbol. (Use \nxglsni{textgreater} in text mode.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {gtcol}
+ {\greatersym}
+ {\marg{\meta{decl}}}
+ {\nxisty{array} package}
+ {%
+   Used in \nxglsi{env-tabular} or \nxglsi{env-array} column specifiers before
+   \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{c}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or
+   \texttt{b} to insert \meta{decl} directly in front of the entry
+   for that column.%
+ }
+ {%
+     \BeginArgList
+       \csentryargitem{decl} The code to insert at the start of the
+         column.
+     \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgchar
+ {ltcol}
+ {\lesssym}
+ {\marg{\meta{decl}}}
+ {\nxisty{array} package}
+ {%
+   Used in \nxglsi{env-tabular} or \nxglsi{env-array} column specifiers after
+   \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{c}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or
+   \texttt{b} to insert \meta{decl} directly after the entry
+   for that column.%
+ }
+ {%
+     \BeginArgList
+       \csentryargitem{decl} The code to insert at the end of the
+         column.
+     \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{begin}%
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{env-option}}\marg{\meta{env-arg-1}}\ldots\marg{\meta{env-arg-n}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {%
+   Starts an environment. (Must have a matching \nxglsi{end}.)
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The name of the environment. (\emph{No
+      backslash.})
+    \csentryargitem{env-option} An optional argument that may be 
+      passed to the environment. Not all environments have optional
+      arguments.
+    \csentryargitem{env-arg-1}\ldots\meta{env-arg-n} Any mandatory
+      arguments required by the environment. Not all environments
+      require arguments.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{end}%
+  {\marg{\meta{env-name}}}%
+  {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+  {Ends an environment. (Must have a matching \nxglsi{begin}.)}
+  {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{env-name} The name of the environment.
+    \EndArgList
+  }
+
+\defgcs{documentclass}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{option-list}}\marg{\meta{class-name}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {%
+   Loads the document class file, which sets up the type of document
+   you wish to write.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{option-list} A comma-separated list of options to
+     pass to the class file or any packages that will later be
+     loaded.
+    \csentryargitem{class-name} The name of the document class. This
+    corresponds to a file called \meta{class-name}\texttt{.cls},
+    which must be installed. 
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{usepackage}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{option-list}}\marg{\meta{package-list}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {%
+   Loads the named packages.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{option-list} A comma-separated list of options to
+     pass to the package.
+    \csentryargitem{package-list} A comma-separated list of package
+     names (without the \texttt{.sty} extension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{footnote}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{number}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts a footnote.}%
+ {%
+  \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{number} Overrides the default footnote number with
+    the specified \meta{number}.
+    \csentryargitem{text} The footnote text.
+  \EndArgList
+ }%
+
+\defgcs{textbackslash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {Backlash \textbackslash\ symbol. (Use
+  \nxglsi{backslash} for math mode.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{backslash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Backslash \protect\ensuremath{\protect\backslash} symbol, which may be used
+  as a delimiter. (Use
+ \nxglsi{textbackslash} for text mode.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ [\underscoresym]
+ {underscore}
+ {\textunderscore}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Underscore \_ symbol (see also \nxglsni{textunderscore}).}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textunderscore}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Underscore \textunderscore\ symbol (see also \nxglsni{textunderscore}).}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\underscoresym]
+ {underscorechar}
+ {\_}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays its argument as a subscript.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The subscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textgreater}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {Greater than \textgreater\ symbol. (Just use \texttt{\textgreater} in math mode.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textless}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {Less than \textless\ symbol. (Just use \texttt{\textless} in math mode.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textasciicircum}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Circumflex \textasciicircum\ symbol.}%
+ {}%
+
+\defgcs[][cshyphenation]{hyphenation}
+ {\marg{\meta{word}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Specifies hyphenation points.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{word} Word with hyphen points indicated with a
+     dash (\texttt{-}).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[hyphen]{\dashcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Insert discretionary hyphen.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ {dollar}
+ {\dollarsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Dollar \$ symbol.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {dollarchar}
+ {\dollarsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches in and out of in-line math mode.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textasciitilde}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Tilde \textasciitilde\ symbol. (If you are typing an
+  URL, use the \nxisty{url} package, which provides \nxglsi{url}\marg{\meta{address}}
+  that allows you to directly type \textasciitilde\ in the address.)}%
+ {}%
+
+\defgcs{url}%
+ {\marg{\meta{address}}}%
+ {\nxisty{url} package}%
+ {Typesets an URL in a typewriter font and allows you to use
+  characters such as \textasciitilde.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{address} The web address.
+   \EndArgList
+ }%
+
+\defgcs{dag}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Dagger \dag\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ddag}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Double-dagger \ddag\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textregistered}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Registered \textregistered\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{texttrademark}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Trademark \texttrademark\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{copyright}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Copyright \copyright\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textquoteright}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Closing single quote (or apostrophe) \textquoteright\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textquoteleft}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Opening single quote \textquoteleft\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textquotedblright}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Closing double quote \textquotedblright\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textquotedblleft}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Opening double quote \textquotedblleft\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textbullet}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {Bullet \textbullet\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textquestiondown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upside-down question mark \textquestiondown\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textexclamdown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upside-down exclamation mark \textexclamdown\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textendash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {En-dash \textendash\ symbol. (Normally used for number ranges.)
+  See also \nxglsni{endash}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textemdash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Em-dash \textemdash\ symbol. (Normally used to
+  indicate omissions or interruptions or to highlight a parenthetical element.)
+  See also \nxglsni{emdash}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textperiodcentered}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {Centred period \textperiodcentered\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{i}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Dotless i character: \i.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{j}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Dotless j character: \dotlessj.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ {hash}
+ {\hashsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Hash \# symbol.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {hashchar}
+ {\hashsym}
+ {\meta{digit}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Replacement text for argument \meta{digit}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ {percent}
+ {\percentsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Percent \% symbol}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {percentchar}
+ {\percentsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Comment character used to ignore everything up to and including
+  the newline character in the \nxgls{source}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ {amp}
+ {\ampsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Ampersand \& symbol}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {ampchar}
+ {\ampsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Alignment tab.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{S}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sectional \S\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{P}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Paragraph \P\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{slash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Forward slash \slash\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{AE}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\protect\AE\ ligature.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ae}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\protect\ae\ ligature.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{OE}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\protect\OE\ ligature.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{oe}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\protect\oe\ ligature.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{AA}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upper case A-ring \AA\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{aa}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Lower case a-ring \aa\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{L}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upper case L-bar \L\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{l}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Lower case l-bar \l\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{O}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Upper case slashed-O \O\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{o}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Lower case slashed-o \o\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ss}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Eszett \ss\ character.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{SS}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {SS (upper case \ss).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{left}
+ {\meta{delimiter}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Indicates a left stretchable delimiter. Must have a matching
+  \nxglsi{right}.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{right}
+ {\meta{delimiter}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Indicates a right stretchable delimiter. Must have a matching
+  \nxglsi{left}.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bigl}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bigr}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Bigl}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Bigr}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{biggl}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{biggr}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Biggl}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Biggr}%
+ {\meta{delimiter}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right delimiter sizing.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pounds}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Pound \pounds\ symbol.}%
+ {}%
+
+
+\defgcs{v}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Caron diacritic over \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{v}\marg{o} produces \ocaron.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the caron
+      diacritic.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{u}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Breve diacritic over \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{u}\marg{o} produces \obreve.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the breve
+      diacritic.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{H}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Double acute diacritic over \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{H}\marg{o} produces \odoubleacute.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the double
+      acute diacritic.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{t}%
+ {\marg{\meta{characters}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Tie over \meta{characters}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{t}\marg{xy} produces \xytie.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{characters} The characters that require the tie.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{c}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Cedilla under \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{c}\marg{o} produces \ocedilla.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the cedilla.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{d}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Dot under \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{d}\marg{o} produces \odotunder.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the dot
+     under it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{b}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Bar under \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{b}\marg{r} produces \rbarunder.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the bar
+     under it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{r}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ring over \meta{c}. Example: 
+  \cmdname{r}\marg{u} produces \uring.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires the ring
+      over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[acute]{\quoterightcs}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Acute accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{'}\marg{o} produces \protect\'{o}.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires an acute
+     accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[grave]{\quoteleftcs}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Grave accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{`}\marg{o} produces \protect\`{o}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires a grave
+     accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[period]{\periodsym}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Dot over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{.}\marg{o} produces \odotover.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires a dot
+     over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgchar
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {sentence.periodchar}
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {period (full stop) or decimal point}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {delimiter.periodchar}
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {invisible delimiter}
+
+\defgsymcs[macron]{\equalsym}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Macron accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{=}\marg{o} produces \omacron.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires a macron
+     accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ [\circumsym\space]
+ {circum}
+ {\textasciicircum}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {%
+   Circumflex accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{\textasciicircum}\marg{o} produces \ocircum.%
+ }
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires a
+     circumflex accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\circumsym]
+ {circumchar}
+ {\textasciicircum}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays its argument as a superscript.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The superscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivecharcs
+ [\tildesym\space]
+ {tilde}
+ {\textasciitilde}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {%
+   Tilde accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{\textasciitilde}\marg{o} produces \otilde.%
+ }
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires a
+     tilde accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\tildesym]
+ {tildechar}
+ {\textasciitilde}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Unbreakable space.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {doublequote}
+ {\doublequotesym}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {%
+   Umlaut over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \quotecs\marg{o} produces \oumlaut.%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires an umlaut
+     over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{item}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{marker}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Specifies the start of an item in a list. (Only allowed inside one of
+  the list making environments.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{marker} If specified, the default item marker is
+     replaced with \meta{marker}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[itcorr]{\slashsym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Italic correction.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textrm}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} in the predefined serif font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Roman.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textsf}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} in the predefined sans-serif font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Sans.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{texttt}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} in the predefined monospaced font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Typewriter.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textmd}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with a medium weight in the current font
+  family.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textbf}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with a bold weight in the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textup}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with the upright form of the current font family.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textit}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with the italic form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textsl}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with the slanted form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textsc}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} with the small-caps form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{emph}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Toggles the upright and italic\slash slanted rendering of \meta{text}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textnormal}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Renders \meta{text} in the default font style.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ttdefault}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {The name of the default typewriter family as used by \nxglsni{ttfamily}. 
+  Defaults to \texttt{cmtt} (Computer Modern Typewriter).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rmdefault}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {The name of the default serif family as used by \nxglsni{rmfamily}. 
+  Defaults to \texttt{cmr} (Computer Modern Roman).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sfdefault}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {The name of the default sans-serif family as used by \nxglsni{sffamily}. 
+  Defaults to \texttt{cmss} (Computer Modern Sans-serif).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{familydefault}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Specifies the default font family. Defaults to
+   \nxglsi{rmdefault} but may be redefined by certain classes.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rmfamily}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the predefined serif font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Roman.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sffamily}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the predefined sans-serif font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Sans.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ttfamily}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the predefined monospaced font. (Defaults to
+  Computer Modern Typewriter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mdseries}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the medium weight in the current font
+  family.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bfseries}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the bold weight in the current font
+  family.}%
+ {}
+
+
+\defgcs{upshape}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the upright form of the current font family.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{itshape}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the italic form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{slshape}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the slanted form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{scshape}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the small-caps form of the current font family, if it exists.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{em}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Toggles the upright and italic\slash slanted form of the current font family.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{normalfont}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to the default font style.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tiny}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to tiny sized text.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{scriptsize}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to sub- or superscript sized text.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{footnotesize}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to footnote sized text.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{small}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to small sized text.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{normalsize}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches to normal sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{large}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to large sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Large}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to extra-large sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{LARGE}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to extra-extra-large sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{huge}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to huge sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Huge}%
+ {}%
+ {Most document classes}%
+ {Switches to extra-huge sized text.}%
+ {%
+ }
+
+\defgcs{multicolumn}%
+ {\marg{\meta{cols spanned}}\marg{\meta{col specifier}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Spans multiple columns in a tabular-style environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cols spanned} The number of columns to span.
+    \csentryargitem{col specifier} The alignment of this column-spanning entry.
+    \csentryargitem{text} The contents of this column-spanning entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{toprule}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{wd}}}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Horizontal rule for the top of a \nxglsi{env-tabular} environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{wd} Thickness of the rule (dimension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bottomrule}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{wd}}}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Horizontal rule for the bottom of a \nxglsi{env-tabular} environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{wd} Thickness of the rule (dimension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{midrule}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{wd}}}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Horizontal rule to go below headings row of a \nxglsi{env-tabular} environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{wd} Thickness of the rule (dimension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{cmidrule}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{wd}}\parg{\meta{trim}}\marg{\meta{n}-\meta{m}}}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Like \nxglsi{midrule} but only spans column \meta{n} to column
+  \meta{m}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{wd} Thickness of the rule (dimension).
+    \csentryargitem{trim} Trimming commands. Specifications:
+     \texttt{r}, \texttt{r}\marg{\meta{wd}}, \texttt{l} and
+      \texttt{l}\marg{\meta{wd}}
+    \csentryargitem{n} Index of start column.
+    \csentryargitem{m} Index of end column.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{heavyrulewidth}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {\nxGls{length} register specifying the thickness of \nxglsi{toprule} and
+ \nxglsi{bottomrule}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lightrulewidth}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {\nxGls{length} register specifying the thickness of \nxglsi{midrule}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{addlinespace}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{wd}}}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Adds extra vertical space (\meta{wd} if specified, otherwise
+  \nxglsi{defaultaddspace}) in a row of 
+  a \nxglsi{env-tabular} environment. (Must be inserted after
+  \nxglsi{dbbackslashchar} marker.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{wd} Height of space (dimension). Default is
+     \nxglsi{defaultaddspace}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{defaultaddspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{booktabs} package}%
+ {Default extra space before or after an adjacent rule.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{parbox}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{pos}}\oarg{\meta{height}}\marg{\meta{width}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Makes a box with line-wrapped contents. (More restrictive than
+  \nxglsi{env-minipage}.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{pos} The vertical alignment of the box relative to
+     the surrounding text. (Centred if omitted.)
+    \csentryargitem{height} The height of the box. (If omitted the
+     height is the natural height of the contents of the box.)
+    \csentryargitem{width} The width of the box.
+    \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{author}%
+ {\marg{\meta{name}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}%
+ {Specifies the document author (or authors). This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{name} The name (or names) of the document author
+     (or authors).
+   \EndArgList
+   Note that some classes, such as those supplied by journals or
+   conference proceedings, may also define an optional argument
+   that can be used to specify an abbreviated author list for the
+   page headers.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{title}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}%
+ {Specifies the document title. This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The title of the document.
+   \EndArgList
+   Note that some classes, such as those supplied by journals or
+   conference proceedings, may also define an optional argument
+   that can be used to specify an abbreviated title for the page
+   headers.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{date}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}%
+ {Specifies the document date. This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}. If omitted, most
+  classes assume the current date (as provided by \nxglsi{today}).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The document date.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{titlehead}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt}, \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {Specifies the title header (typeset at the top of the title page).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The title header text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subtitle}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt}, \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {Specifies the subtitle (typeset just below the title).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The subtitle text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subject}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt}, \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {Specifies the subject (typeset just above the title).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The subject.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{publishers}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt}, \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {Specifies the publisher (typeset after all the other titling
+   information).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The publisher text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{maketitle}%
+ {}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}%
+ {Generates the title page (or title block). This command is usually
+  placed at the beginning of the document environment.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thanks}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}%
+ {Inserts a special type of footnote in one of the titling fields,
+  such as \nxglsi{author} or \nxglsni{title}. Usually used for some form of
+  acknowledgement or affiliation.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{today}%
+ {}%
+ {Most of the commonly-used classes}%
+ {Inserts into the output file the date when the \LaTeX\ 
+  application created it from the source code.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{part}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a part sectional unit. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the part counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{chapter}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Book-style classes (such as \nxicls{scrbook} or \nxicls{scrreprt}) that have 
+  the concept of chapters}%
+ {Inserts a chapter heading. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the chapter counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{section}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a section header. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the section counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subsection}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a subsection header. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the subsection counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subsubsection}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a subsubsection header. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the subsubsection counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{paragraph}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a subsubsubsection header. Most classes default to an 
+  unnumbered running header for
+  this sectional unit. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the associated counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subparagraph}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts a subsubsubsubsection header. Most classes default 
+  to an unnumbered running header for
+  this sectional unit. \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving
+  argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the associated counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{minisec}%
+ {\marg{\meta{heading}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt} and
+  \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {An unnumbered heading not associated with any structuring level.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{heading} The heading text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{addtokomafont}%
+ {\marg{\meta{element name}}\marg{\meta{commands}}}%
+ {\nxicls{scrartcl}, \nxicls{scrreprt} and
+  \nxicls{scrbook} classes}%
+ {Sets the font characteristics for the given \koma\ element.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{element name} The element's name, for example
+      \texttt{chapter}. See the \koma\ manual for a full list
+      of defined elements.
+     \csentryargitem{commands} The font changing commands to apply
+      to that element.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{appendix}%
+ {}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Indicates (but doesn't print anything) that the document is
+  switching to the appendices. If chapters exist, the chapter
+  numbering is reset and switched to a different format
+  (usually upper case letters) otherwise the section numbering
+  is reset and switched to a different format.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tableofcontents}
+ {}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts the table of contents. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{addcontentsline}%
+ {\marg{\meta{toc}}\marg{\meta{section unit}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Adds a sectional unit header to the contents list.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{toc} The extension of the required external file
+    without the dot (for example, \texttt{toc} for the table of
+     contents or \texttt{lof} for the list of figures).
+    \csentryargitem{section unit} The name of the sectional unit (for
+     example, \texttt{chapter}).
+    \csentryargitem{text} The text to be added to the contents list.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{label}%
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Assigns a unique textual label linked to the most recently
+  incremented cross-referencing counter in the current \nxglslink{group}{scope} (see
+  also \nxglsi{ref}).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} A unique label that can be referenced
+     elsewhere in the document with \nxglsi{ref}. (It's best to 
+     just use alphanumerics and non-active punctuation characters in
+     the label.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ref}%
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {References the value of the counter linked to the given label.
+  A second (possibly third) run of \LaTeX\ is required to ensure the cross-references
+  are up-to-date.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pageref}%
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Similar to \nxglsi{ref} but inserts the page number where the given
+  label was defined.
+  A second (possibly third) run of \LaTeX\ is required to ensure the cross-references
+  are up-to-date.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{vref}%
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}%
+ {\nxisty{varioref} package}%
+ {Like \nxglsi{ref} but also adds information about the location, such
+  as \dq{on page~\meta{n}} or \dq{on the following page}.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bibitem}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{tag}}\marg{\meta{key}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Indicates the start of a new reference in the bibliography. May
+  only be used inside the contents of \nxglsi{env-thebibliography} environment}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{tag} If present, overrides the marker at the
+    start of the reference.
+    \csentryargitem{key} A unique key that identifies this reference so
+    it can be cited elsewhere in the document using \nxglsi{cite}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{cite}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{text}}\marg{\meta{key list}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts the citation markers of each reference identified in the
+  key list. A second run is required to ensure the reference is
+  correct.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{text} Additional text to insert into the citation
+       (such as the chapter number, or a particular page or
+       page range within the citation).
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys used in
+      the corresponding \nxglsi{cite}.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pagenumbering}%
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sets the style of the page numbers.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The page numbering style (e.g.\
+      \texttt{roman} for lower case Roman numerals).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pagestyle}%
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sets the style of the headers and footers.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The name of the page style. The \LaTeX\
+     kernel defines only two styles: \nxipagestyle{empty} and
+     \nxipagestyle{plain}. Most of the standard classes also provide
+     the \nxipagestyle{headings} style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{thispagestyle}%
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Like \nxglsi{pagestyle} but only affects the current page.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The name of the page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{markboth}%
+ {\marg{\meta{left head}}\marg{\meta{right head}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Specifies information for the left and right page headers. Not all
+   page styles use this information, in which case the arguments are
+   ignored.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{left head} Text for the left (even) page header,
+     if the document has been identified as a double-sided document
+     (usually with the \nxclsopt{twoside} class option).
+
+     \csentryargitem{right head} Text for the right page header,
+     if the \nxclsopt{twoside} option has been used. Otherwise used
+     for both odd and even page headers.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{markright}%
+ {\marg{\meta{right head}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Specifies information for the right (odd) page header. Not all
+  page styles use this information, in which case the argument is
+  ignored.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{right head} Text for the right page header,
+     if the \nxclsopt{twoside} option has been used. Otherwise used
+     for both odd and even page headers.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{includegraphics}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{key vals}}\marg{\meta{filename}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Inserts a graphics file into the document.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{key vals} Comma-separated list of options that can
+      be used to change the way the image is displayed.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{DeclareGraphicsExtensions}%
+ {\marg{\meta{ext-list}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Specify the file extensions to look for if no extension is used in
+ \nxglsi{includegraphics}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{ext-list} A comma-separated list of extensions.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{selectlanguage}
+ {\marg{\meta{language name}}}%
+ {\nxisty{babel} package}%
+ {Switches to the named language. Predefined textual elements, such
+  as the date given by \nxglsi{today} or prefixes like \dq{Chapter},
+  are redefined to those supplied by the given language.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{language} The language identifier.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{foreignlanguage}%
+ {\marg{\meta{language name}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{babel} package}%
+ {Typesets the given text using any predefined names or date formats supplied by the
+  given language.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{language} The language identifier.
+    \csentryargitem{text} The foreign text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{iflanguage}%
+ {\marg{\meta{language name}}\marg{\meta{true text}}\marg{\meta{false
+text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{babel} package}%
+ {Tests the current language.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{language} The language identifier.
+    \csentryargitem{true text} The text to typeset if true.
+    \csentryargitem{false text} The text to typeset if not true.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{caption}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{short caption}}\marg{\meta{caption text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts the caption for a float such as a figure or table. 
+  \textbf{This command has a \htmlref{moving argument}{sec:fragile}.}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{short caption} If provided, an abbreviated caption
+      to go in the list of figures\slash tables etc.
+    \csentryargitem{caption text} The caption contents.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{listoffigures}%
+ {}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts the list of figures. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{listoftables}%
+ {}%
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}%
+ {Inserts the list of tables. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{hspace}%
+ {\marg{\meta{length}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts a horizontal gap of the given width.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{length} The width of the horizontal gap.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{vspace}%
+ {\marg{\meta{length}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts a vertical gap of the given height.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{length} The \protect\htmlref{height}{sec:length} of the vertical gap.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{baselineskip}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A \nxglsi{length} register that stores the current interline spacing.
+  This is recalculated whenever the font changes.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{parskip}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A \nxglsi{length} register that stores the spacing between paragraphs.
+  (If you're using one of the \koma\ classes, use the \nxscrclsopt{parskip} 
+   option to set it to full or half line height.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{twocolumn}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{header text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Starts a new page and switches to two column mode.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{header text} If present, this header text will be
+    placed at the top of the page spanning both columns. (For
+    example, as used by \nxglsi{maketitle} in two column articles.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{onecolumn}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Starts a new page and switches to one column mode.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{TeX}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the \TeX\ logo.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{LaTeX}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the \makeimg{LaTeX}{\LaTeX}\ logo.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{LaTeXe}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the \makeimg{LaTeX2e}{\LaTeXe}\ logo.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{framebox}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{width}}\oarg{\meta{align}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Puts a frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{width} The width of the box. (If omitted, this value is
+      the natural width of the box contents.)
+     \csentryargitem{align} Horizontal alignment of box contents
+      (\texttt{c} if omitted).
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{fbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Puts a frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{shadowbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{fancybox} package}%
+ {Puts a shadow frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{doublebox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{fancybox} package}%
+ {Puts a double-lined frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ovalbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{fancybox} package}%
+ {Puts a thin-lined oval frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Ovalbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{fancybox} package}%
+ {Puts a thick-lined oval frame around its contents, prohibiting a line break in the
+  contents.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The contents of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{protect}%
+ {\meta{command}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Used in a moving argument to prevent a fragile command from expanding.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{command} The fragile command that needs protecting.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{par}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Insert a paragraph break.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{linewidth}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A length containing the desired current line width. This is
+  usually the width of the typeblock, but inside a \nxglsi{env-minipage}
+  or \nxglsi{parbox} it will be the width the box. Note that
+  the actual contents of the line may fall short of the line width
+  (underfull hbox) or extend beyond it (overfull hbox).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textwidth}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A length containing the width of the typeblock. Note that
+  the actual contents of the line may fall short of the line width
+  (underfull hbox) or extend beyond it (overfull hbox). This width
+  does not include the area for marginal notes.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textheight}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A length containing the height of the typeblock. Note that
+  the actual contents of the page may fall short of the text height
+  (underfull vbox) or extend beyond it (overfull vbox). This
+  measurement does not include the header and footer areas.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{and}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Used to separate authors in \nxglsi{author}}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{clearpage}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Inserts a page break and processes any unprocessed floats}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rotatebox}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{option list}}\marg{\meta{angle}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Rotates the given contents by the given angle.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{option list} A comma-separated list of options:
+      \protect\begin{itemize}
+       \protect\item \nxikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{origin}=\meta{label}
+       \protect\item \nxikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{x}=\meta{dimen}
+       \protect\item \nxikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{y}=\meta{dimen}
+       \protect\item \nxikeyvalopt{rotatebox}{units}=\meta{number}
+      \protect\end{itemize}
+
+     \csentryargitem{angle} The angle of rotation.
+
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text to be rotated.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{scalebox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{h scale}}\oarg{\meta{v scale}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Scales the specified contents.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{h scale} The horizontal scale factor.
+      \csentryargitem{v scale} The vertical scale factor. If omitted,
+       the same as \meta{h scale}.
+      \csentryargitem{text} The text to be scaled.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{reflectbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Reflects the specified contents in the \makeimg{y}{\ensuremath{y}}-axis.)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{text} The text to be reflected.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{resizebox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{h length}}\marg{\meta{v length}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{graphicx} package}%
+ {Scales the specified contents to the given dimensions.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{h length} The required width or \texttt{!} to keep
+      the aspect ratio.
+      \csentryargitem{v length} The required height or \texttt{!} to keep
+      the aspect ratio.
+      \csentryargitem{text} The text to be scaled.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{centering}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switches the paragraph alignment to centred.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newcommand}%
+ {\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Defines a new command.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cmd} The new command name (including initial backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new command
+     should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{text} What actions the command should perform.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{renewcommand}%
+ {\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Redefines an existing command.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cmd} The command name (including initial backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this command
+     should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{text} What actions the command should perform.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newenvironment}%
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{\meta{end-code}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Defines a new environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The new environment name (\emph{no} backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new
+     environment should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{begin-code} Actions to perform at the start of the
+      environment.
+    \csentryargitem{end-code} Actions to perform at the end of the
+      environment.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{renewenvironment}%
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{end-code}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Redefines an existing environment.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The environment name (\emph{no} backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new
+     environment should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{begin-code} Actions to perform at the start of the
+      environment.
+    \csentryargitem{end-code} Actions to perform at the end of the
+      environment.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{labelitemi}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes that define the \nxglsni{env-itemize} environment}%
+ {The default label for the first level \nxglsni{env-itemize}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{labelitemii}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes that define the \nxglsni{env-itemize} environment}%
+ {The default label for the second level \nxglsni{env-itemize}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{labelitemiii}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes that define the \nxglsni{env-itemize} environment}%
+ {The default label for the third level \nxglsni{env-itemize}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{labelitemiv}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes that define the \nxglsni{env-itemize} environment}%
+ {The default label for the fourth level \nxglsni{env-itemize}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mbox}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ensures that the given text doesn't contain a line break.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{text}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays its argument in the normal text font (as opposed to the
+  current maths font).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text to be displayed in the normal text font.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{intertext}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Used for a short interjection in the middle of a multi-line
+  displayed maths, such as in an \nxglsi{env-align} environment.
+  May only appear right after \nxglsi{dbbackslashchar}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The interjection text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{overleftarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible left arrow over \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths over which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{overrightarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible right arrow over \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths over which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{overleftrightarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible left-right arrow over \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths over which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{underleftarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible left arrow under \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths under which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{underrightarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible right arrow under \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths under which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{underleftrightarrow}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Puts an extendible left-right arrow under \meta{maths}}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths under which to put the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{xrightarrow}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{subscript}}\marg{\meta{superscript}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {An extendible right arrow with a superscript and optionally a
+  subscript.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{subscript} The subscript to go under the arrow.
+     \csentryargitem{superscript} The superscript to go over the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{xleftarrow}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{subscript}}\marg{\meta{superscript}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {An extendible left arrow with a superscript and optionally a
+  subscript.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{subscript} The subscript to go under the arrow.
+     \csentryargitem{superscript} The superscript to go over the arrow.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{rightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right arrow \ensuremath{\rightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{to}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right arrow \ensuremath{\to}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Rightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-lined right arrow \ensuremath{\Rightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{leftarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left arrow \ensuremath{\leftarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{gets}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left arrow \ensuremath{\gets}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Leftarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-lined left arrow \ensuremath{\Leftarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{downarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Down arrow \ensuremath{\downarrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Downarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-lined down arrow \ensuremath{\Downarrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{uparrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Up arrow \ensuremath{\uparrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Uparrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-lined up arrow \ensuremath{\Uparrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{updownarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-ended vertical arrow \ensuremath{\updownarrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Updownarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-ended double-lined vertical arrow \ensuremath{\Updownarrow}. (May be used as a delimiter.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{hookrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Hooked right arrow \ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{hookleftarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Hooked left arrow \ensuremath{\hookleftarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{leftharpoondown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left down harpoon \ensuremath{\leftharpoondown}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{leftharpoonup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left up harpoon \ensuremath{\leftharpoonup}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rightharpoondown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right down harpoon \ensuremath{\rightharpoondown}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rightharpoonup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right up harpoon \ensuremath{\rightharpoonup}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rightleftharpoons}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right-left harpoons \ensuremath{\rightleftharpoons}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{leftrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-ended horizontal arrow \ensuremath{\leftrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Leftrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Double-ended double-lined horizontal arrow \ensuremath{\Leftrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{longrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long right arrow \ensuremath{\longrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{longleftarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long left arrow \ensuremath{\longleftarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{longleftrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long double-ended horizontal arrow \ensuremath{\longleftrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Longrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long double-lined right arrow \ensuremath{\Longrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Longleftarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long double-lined left arrow \ensuremath{\Longleftarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Longleftrightarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long double-lined double-ended horizontal arrow \ensuremath{\Longleftrightarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{longmapsto}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Long mapping arrow \ensuremath{\longmapsto}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mapsto}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Mapping arrow \ensuremath{\mapsto}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{nearrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {North-East arrow \ensuremath{\nearrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{nwarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {North-West arrow \ensuremath{\nwarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{searrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {South-East arrow \ensuremath{\searrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{swarrow}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {South-West arrow \ensuremath{\swarrow}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{makeindex}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Preamble Only)}%
+ {Enables \nxglsi{index}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{index}%
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Adds indexing information to an external index file. The command
+   \nxglsi{makeindex} must be used in the preamble to enable
+   this command. The external index file must be post-processed with
+   an indexing application, such as \nxiappname{makeindex}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text to go in the index.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{printindex}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{makeidx} package}%
+ {Prints the index. Must be used with \nxglsi{makeindex} and \nxglsi{index}.
+ (The external index file must first be processed by an indexing application.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{alpha}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case alpha \ensuremath{\alpha}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{beta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case beta \ensuremath{\beta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{gamma}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case gamma \ensuremath{\gamma}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{delta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case delta \ensuremath{\delta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{epsilon}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case epsilon \ensuremath{\epsilon}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varepsilon}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Variant Greek lower case alpha \ensuremath{\varepsilon}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{zeta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case zeta \ensuremath{\zeta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{eta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case eta \ensuremath{\eta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{theta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case theta \ensuremath{\theta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vartheta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {A variant Greek lower case theta \ensuremath{\vartheta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{iota}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case iota \ensuremath{\iota}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{kappa}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case kappa \ensuremath{\kappa}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lambda}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case lambda \ensuremath{\lambda}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mu}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case mu \ensuremath{\mu}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{nu}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case nu \ensuremath{\nu}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{xi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case xi \ensuremath{\xi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{pi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case pi \ensuremath{\pi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varpi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Variant Greek lower case pi \ensuremath{\varpi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rho}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case rho \ensuremath{\rho}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varrho}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Variant Greek lower case rho \ensuremath{\varrho}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sigma}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case sigma \ensuremath{\sigma}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varsigma}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Variant Greek lower case sigma \ensuremath{\varsigma}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tau}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case tau \ensuremath{\tau}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{upsilon}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case upsilon \ensuremath{\upsilon}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{phi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case phi \ensuremath{\phi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varphi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Variant Greek lower case phi \ensuremath{\varphi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{chi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case chi \ensuremath{\chi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{psi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case psi \ensuremath{\psi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{omega}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek lower case omega \ensuremath{\omega}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Gamma}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case gamma \ensuremath{\Gamma}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Delta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case delta \ensuremath{\Delta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Theta}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case theta \ensuremath{\Theta}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Lambda}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case lambda \ensuremath{\Lambda}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Xi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case xi \ensuremath{\Xi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Pi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case pi \ensuremath{\Pi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Sigma}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case sigma \ensuremath{\Sigma}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Upsilon}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case upsilon \ensuremath{\Upsilon}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Phi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case phi \ensuremath{\Phi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Psi}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case psi \ensuremath{\Psi}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Omega}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Greek upper case omega \ensuremath{\Omega}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sb}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays its argument as a subscript.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The subscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{sp}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays its argument as a superscript.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The superscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pmod}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Modulo operator with parentheses.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The modulo (placed in parentheses).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mod}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Modulo operator without parentheses.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The modulo (placed in parentheses).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pod}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Modulo operator with parentheses but no \dq{mod}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The modulo (placed in parentheses).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bmod}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Modulo operator.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{arccos}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\arccos} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{arcsin}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\arcsin} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{arctan}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\arctan} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{arg}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\arg} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cos}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\cos} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cosh}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\cosh} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cot}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\cot} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{coth}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\coth} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{csc}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\csc} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{deg}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\deg} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{det}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\det} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dim}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\dim} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{exp}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\exp} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{gcd}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\gcd} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{hom}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\hom} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{inf}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\inf} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{injlim}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\injlim} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{projlim}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\projlim} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varlimsup}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\varlimsup} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varliminf}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\varliminf} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varinjlim}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\varinjlim} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{varprojlim}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\varprojlim} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ker}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\ker} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lg}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\lg} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lim}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\lim} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{liminf}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\liminf} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{limsup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\limsup} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ln}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\ln} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{log}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\log} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{max}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\max} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{min}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\min} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{Pr}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\Pr} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sec}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\sec} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sin}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\sin} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sinh}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\sinh} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\sup} function name (may have limits via \nxglsi{underscorechar} or \nxglsi{circumchar}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tan}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\tan} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tanh}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets \ensuremath{\tanh} function name.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{infty}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Infinity \ensuremath{\infty} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{partial}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Partial \ensuremath{\partial} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{subset}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Subset \ensuremath{\subset} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{approx}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\approx} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{asymp}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\asymp} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bowtie}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\bowtie} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cong}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\cong} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dashv}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\dashv} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{doteq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{equals symbol with dot on top}{\ensuremath{\doteq}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{equiv}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{equivalent}{\ensuremath{\equiv}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{frown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\frown} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ge}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{greater than or equal to}{\ensuremath{\ge}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{geq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{greater than or equal to}{\ensuremath{\geq}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{gg}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{much greater than}{\ensuremath{\gg}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{in}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\in} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{le}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{less than or equal to}{\ensuremath{\le}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{leq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{less than or equal to}{\ensuremath{\leq}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ll}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{much less than}{\ensuremath{\ll}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mid}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\mid} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{models}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\models} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{neq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{not equal to}{\ensuremath{\neq}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ni}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{contains element}{\ensuremath{\ni}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{notin}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{not element of}{\ensuremath{\notin}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{parallel}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\parallel} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{prec}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\prec} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{preceq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\preceq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{perp}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{perpendicular to}{\ensuremath{\perp}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{propto}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \makeimg{proportional to}{\ensuremath{\propto}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sim}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\sim} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{simeq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\simeq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{smile}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\smile} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sqsubseteq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\sqsubseteq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sqsupseteq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\sqsupseteq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{subseteq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\subseteq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{succ}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\succ} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{succeq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\succeq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{supset}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\supset} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{supseteq}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\supseteq} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vdash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Relational \ensuremath{\vdash} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{amalg}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\amalg} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ast}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \makeimg{asterisk}{\ensuremath{\ast}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bullet}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \makeimg{bullet point}{\ensuremath{\bullet}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigcirc}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\bigcirc} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigtriangledown}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\bigtriangledown} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigtriangleup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\bigtriangleup} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cap}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\cap} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cdot}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Centred dot \ensuremath{\cdot} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{circ}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Circle \ensuremath{\circ} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\cup} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dagger}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\dagger} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ddagger}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\ddagger} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{diamond}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\diamond} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{div}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Division operator \ensuremath{\div} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mp}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Minus or plus operator \makeimg{minus or plus}{\ensuremath{\mp}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{odot}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\odot} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ominus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\ominus} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{oplus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\oplus} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{oslash}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\oslash} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{otimes}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\otimes} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{pm}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \makeimg{plus or minus}{\ensuremath{\pm}} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{setminus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\setminus} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sqcap}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\sqcap} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sqcup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\sqcup} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{star}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\star} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{times}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\times} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{triangleleft}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\triangleleft} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{triangleright}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Binary operator \ensuremath{\triangleright} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{uplus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\uplus} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vee}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\vee} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{wedge}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\wedge} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{wr}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Operator \ensuremath{\wr} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sum}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Summation \ensuremath{\sum} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{int}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Integral \ensuremath{\int} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{oint}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Closed path integral \ensuremath{\oint} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{prod}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Product \ensuremath{\prod} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{coprod}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Co-product \ensuremath{\coprod} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigcap}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Collection intersection \ensuremath{\bigcap} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigcup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Collection union \ensuremath{\bigcup} symbol (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigsqcup}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigsqcup} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigvee}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigvee} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigwedge}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigwedge} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigodot}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigodot} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigotimes}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigotimes} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bigoplus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\bigoplus} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{biguplus}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Big operator \ensuremath{\biguplus} (may take limits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{not}%
+ {\meta{symbol command}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Negates the following symbol. Example: \cmdname{not}\nxglsi{subset} produces
+   \ensuremath{\not\subset}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{symbol command} The symbol to be negated.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ldots}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ellipses \ldots\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{cdots}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Centred ellipses \ensuremath{\cdots} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vdots}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Vertical ellipses \ensuremath{\vdots} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ddots}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Diagonal ellipses \ensuremath{\ddots} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dotsc}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Ellipses \ensuremath{\dotsc} for dots with commas.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dotsb}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Ellipses \ensuremath{\dotsb} for dots with binary
+  operators\slash relations.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dotsm}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Ellipses \ensuremath{\dotsm} for dots with multiplications.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dotsi}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Ellipses \ensuremath{\dotsi} for dots with integrals.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{dotso}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Ellipses \ensuremath{\dotso} for general dots.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{langle}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left-angled \ensuremath{\langle} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rangle}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right-angled \ensuremath{\rangle} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lfloor}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left floor \ensuremath{\lfloor} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rfloor}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right floor \ensuremath{\rfloor} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lceil}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left ceil \ensuremath{\lceil} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rceil}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right ceil \ensuremath{\rceil} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lvert}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left vertical bar \ensuremath{\lvert} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rvert}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right vertical bar \ensuremath{\rvert} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lVert}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Left double vertical bar \ensuremath{\lVert} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rVert}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Right double vertical bar \ensuremath{\rVert} delimiter.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vec}%
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets its argument as a vector (defaults to a right arrow
+   accent).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character or symbol that represents a vector.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{forall}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {\dq{For all} \ensuremath{\forall} symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+
+\defgcs{noindent}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Suppress the indentation that would usually occur at the start of
+  the next paragraph.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{refstepcounter}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Increments the value of the given counter by one and allows the
+  counter to be cross-referenced using \nxglsni{ref} and \nxglsi{label}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter that needs
+     incrementing.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{stepcounter}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Increments the value of the given counter by one.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter that needs
+     incrementing.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{setcounter}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{number}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sets the value of a counter.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter that needs
+     changing.
+    \csentryargitem{number} The new value. (Must be an integer.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{addtocounter}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{increment}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Increments the value of a counter by the given amount.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter that needs
+     changing.
+    \csentryargitem{number} The amount by which to increment the counter. (Must be an integer.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newcounter}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}\oarg{\meta{outer counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Defines a new counter.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the new counter.
+    \csentryargitem{outer counter} The name of the parent counter.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+
+\defgcs{value}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {References the value of the given counter where a number rather
+   than a counter name is required.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{parindent}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {A \nxglsi{length} register that stores the indentation at the start of paragraphs.}%
+ {}
+
+
+\defgcs{setlength}%
+ {\marg{\meta{register}}\marg{\meta{dimension}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sets the value of a length register.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{register} The name of the length register (for
+       example \nxglsi{parindent}).
+     \csentryargitem{dimension} The new dimension.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{addtolength}%
+ {\marg{\meta{register}}\marg{\meta{dimension}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Adds \meta{dimension} to the value of the given length register.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{register} The name of the length register (for
+       example \nxglsi{parindent}).
+     \csentryargitem{dimension} The dimension to add to the length.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{currenttime}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{datetime} package}%
+ {Inserts into the output file the time when the \LaTeX\ 
+  application created it from the source code.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ddmmyyyydate}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{datetime} package}%
+ {Changes the format of \nxglsi{today} so that it displays the date in
+  the form {\ddmmyyyydate\today} (day\slash month\slash year in digits).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{subref}%
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}%
+ {\nxisty{subcaption} package}%
+ {Analogous to \nxglsi{ref} but only references the subfigure
+  or subtable caption.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{label} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{eqref}%
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Short cut for \texttt{(\nxglsi{ref}\marg{\meta{label}})} for
+  referencing equations.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{label} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{frenchspacing}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switch to French spacing.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{nonfrenchspacing}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Switch to English spacing.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newline}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Forces a line break.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{linebreak}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{n}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Requests a line break, ensuring the paragraph remains justified.
+  This may cause excess white space in the paragraph.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{n} An integer from~0 to~4 indicating how strongly
+    you want a line break to occur. The higher the number, the
+    stronger the request to break the line.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{displaybreak}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{n}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Allows a page break in multi-lined maths environments, such as
+  \nxglsi{env-align}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{n} An integer from~0 to~4 indicating how strongly
+    you want a page break to occur. The higher the number, the
+    stronger the request.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[beginmath]{\openparensym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Equivalent to \nxglsni{begin}\marg{math}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[endmath]{\closeparensym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Equivalent to \nxglsni{end}\marg{math}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {openparen}
+ {\openparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {%
+   Opening parenthesis in text mode or left round bracket
+   delimiter in math mode.%
+ }
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {closeparen}
+ {\closeparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {%
+   Closing parenthesis in text mode or right round bracket
+   delimiter in math mode.%
+ }
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[begindispmath]{\opensqsym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (inconsistency corrected in \nxisty{amsmath})}%
+ {Starts an unnumbered single-line of displayed maths.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[enddispmath]{\closesqsym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (inconsistency corrected in \nxisty{amsmath})}%
+ {Ends an unnumbered single-line of displayed maths.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {opensq}
+ {\opensqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {opt.opensq}
+ {opensq}
+ {\opensqsym}
+ {Open delimiter of an \nxglsi{optional}}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {text.opensq}
+ {opensq}
+ {\opensqsym}
+ {Open square bracket in text mode}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {delimiter.opensq}
+ {opensq}
+ {\opensqsym}
+ {Left square bracket delimiter in math mode}
+
+\defgchar
+ {closesq}
+ {\closesqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {opt.closesq}
+ {closesq}
+ {\closesqsym}
+ {Closing delimiter of an \nxglsi{optional}}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {text.closesq}
+ {closesq}
+ {\closesqsym}
+ {Closing square bracket in text mode}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {delimiter.closesq}
+ {closesq}
+ {\closesqsym}
+ {Right square bracket delimiter in math mode}
+
+\defgsymcs[comma]{\commasym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Thin space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thinspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Thin space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[colon]{\colonsym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Medium space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{medspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Medium space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[semicolon]{\semicolonsym}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Thick space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thickspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Thick space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{qquad}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Horizontal spacing command (twice as wide as \nxglsni{quad}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[spacesym]{\textvisiblespace}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {(Backslash followed by space character.) Horizontal spacing command.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{enspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Horizontal spacing command (half as wide as \nxglsi{quad}).}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{quad}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Horizontal spacing command equal to the current font's \protect\htmlref{em}{sec:length} value.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{negthinspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Negative thin space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{negmedspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Negative medium space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{negthickspace}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Negative thick space.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{contentsname}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define a table of contents}%
+ {Text used for table of contents heading.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{listfigurename}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define a list of figures}%
+ {Text used for list of figures heading.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{listtablename}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define a list of tables}%
+ {Text used for list of tables heading.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bibname}%
+ {}%
+ {Report or book style classes that define a bibliography chapter}%
+ {Text used for bibliography chapter heading. (See also
+  \nxglsi{refname}.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{refname}%
+ {}%
+ {Article style classes that define a bibliography section}%
+ {Text used for bibliography section heading. (See also
+   \nxglsi{bibname}.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{indexname}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define an index section}%
+ {Text used for index heading.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{figurename}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define figures}%
+ {Number prefix used in figure captions.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tablename}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define tables}%
+ {Number prefix used in table captions.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{partname}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define parts with a number prefix}%
+ {Number prefix used in part headings.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{chaptername}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define chapters}%
+ {Number prefix used in chapter headings.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{appendixname}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define chapters}%
+ {Number prefix used in appendix headings.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{abstractname}%
+ {}%
+ {Classes or packages that define an \nxglsni{env-abstract}
+  environment}%
+ {Text used in abstract heading.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{addto}%
+ {\marg{\meta{command}}\marg{\meta{code}}}
+ {\nxisty{babel} package}
+ {Adds \meta{code} to the definition of \meta{command}. (See also \nxglsni{appto}.)}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{command} The command that needs patching.
+     \csentryargitem{code} The additional code to add to the command
+definition.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{appto}%
+ {\marg{\meta{command}}\marg{\meta{code}}}
+ {\nxisty{etoolbox} package}
+ {Adds \meta{code} to the definition of \meta{command}.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{command} The command that needs patching.
+     \csentryargitem{code} The additional code to add to the command definition.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathrm}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths serif font.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathsf}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths sans-serif font.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathtt}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths typewriter font.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathit}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths italic font.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathbf}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths bold font. (Doesn't
+  work with numbers and nonalphabetical symbols.) See also \nxglsi{boldsymbol}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{boldsymbol}%
+ {\marg{\meta{symbol}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Like \nxglsi{mathbf} but also works for numbers and
+   many nonalphabetical symbols. (See also \nxglsi{pmb}.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{symbol} The character or symbol on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pmb}%
+ {\marg{\meta{symbol}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {\dq{Poor man's bold.} Overlays multiple copies of the symbol to
+   produce a bold effect for symbols that don't work with
+   \nxglsi{boldsymbol}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{symbol} The symbol on which to apply the bold
+      effect.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathcal}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets its argument in the maths calligraphic font.
+  Example: \nxglsni{beginmath}\protect\cmdname{mathcal}\marg{S}\nxglsni{endmath} produces
+ \ensuremath{\mathcal{S}}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{maths} The maths to be displayed in a calligraphic
+      font.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathbb}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsfonts} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets its argument in the blackboard bold font.
+  Example: \nxglsni{beginmath}\protect\cmdname{mathbb}\marg{R}\nxglsni{endmath} produces
+  \ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{maths} The maths to be displayed in a blackboard
+      bold font.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{mathfrak}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsfonts} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {Typesets its argument in Euler Fraktur letters.
+  Example: \nxglsni{beginmath}\protect\cmdname{mathfrak}\marg{U}\nxglsni{endmath} produces
+  \ensuremath{\mathfrak{U}}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{maths} The maths to be displayed in Euler Fraktur
+      letters.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{DeclareMathOperator}%
+ {\marg{\meta{cmd}}\marg{\meta{operator-name}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Preamble Only)}%
+ {Defines a new maths operator. The starred version allows limits.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cmd} The name of the new operator command (must
+      begin with a backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{operator name} The name of the maths operator.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{frac}%
+ {\marg{\meta{numerator}}\marg{\meta{denominator}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays a fraction.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{numerator} The numerator (above the line).
+     \csentryargitem{denominator} The denominator (below the line).
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{cfrac}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{numerator}}\marg{\meta{denominator}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays a continued fraction.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{pos} May be \texttt{l} (left) or \texttt{r}
+      (right).
+     \csentryargitem{numerator} The numerator (above the line).
+     \csentryargitem{denominator} The denominator (below the line).
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{sqrt}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{order}}\marg{\meta{operand}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {Displays a root.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{order} The order of the root. (If omitted, a
+       square root).
+     \csentryargitem{operand} The operand.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{arabic}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as an Arabic number. (1, 2, 3, \ldots)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{roman}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as a lower case Roman number. (i, ii, iii, \ldots)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Roman}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as an upper case Roman number. (I, II, III, \ldots)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{alph}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as a lower case letter. (a, b, c, \ldots, z)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Alph}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as an upper case letter. (A, B, C, \ldots, Z)}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{fnsymbol}%
+ {\marg{\meta{counter}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays counter value as footnote symbol. (\makeimg{asterisk
+  dagger double dagger section mark
+  paragraph mark double bar double asterisk two single daggers
+  two double daggers}{\footnotesymbols})}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{counter} The name of the counter.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{bfseries}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the environment contents in a bold font.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{itshape}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the environment contents in an italic font.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{em}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Typesets the environment contents in an emphasized font. (Switches
+  to italic\slash slanted if the surrounding font is upright, or switches to
+  upright if the surrounding font is italic\slash slanted.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{itemize}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Unordered list.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{enumerate}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ordered list.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{description}%
+ {}%
+ {Most class files}%
+ {Labelled list.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{document}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {The body of the document.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{tabular}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{v-pos}}\marg{\meta{column specifiers}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Text Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Environment for lining things up in rows and columns.
+   Use \nxglsi{env-array} for math mode.
+ }%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{v-pos} Vertical alignment of the entire
+      environment with respect to the surrounding baseline. May be
+      one of \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{b} (bottom) or \texttt{c}
+      (centered).
+     \csentryargitem{column specifiers} Indicates how to align the
+     columns.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{array}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{v-pos}}\marg{\meta{column specifiers}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Environment for lining things up in rows and columns.
+   Use \nxglsi{env-tabular} for text mode.
+ }%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{v-pos} Vertical alignment of the entire
+      environment with respect to the surrounding baseline. May be
+      one of \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{b} (bottom) or \texttt{c}
+      (centered).
+     \csentryargitem{column specifiers} Indicates how to align the
+     columns.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{align}
+ {}
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}
+ {Used for numbered aligned equations.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{align*}
+ {}
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}
+ {Used for unnumbered aligned equations.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{minipage}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{pos}}\oarg{\meta{height}}\marg{\meta{width}}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Makes a box with line-wrapped contents. (See also \nxglsi{parbox}.)}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{pos} The vertical alignment of the box relative to
+     the surrounding text. (Centred if omitted.)
+    \csentryargitem{height} The height of the box. (If omitted the
+     height is the natural height of the contents of the box.)
+    \csentryargitem{width} The width of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{abstract}%
+ {}%
+ {Most article- or report-style classes, such as \nxicls{scrartcl} or
+  \nxicls{scrreprt}. Not usually defined in book-style classes, such
+  as \nxicls{scrbook}, but is defined in \nxicls{memoir}}%
+ {Displays its contents as an abstract.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{thebibliography}%
+ {\marg{\meta{widest entry label}}}%
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}%
+ {Bibliographic list. (See also \nxglsi{bibitem} and
+  \nxglsi{cite}).}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{widest entry label} The widest label in the
+     bibliography list.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{otherlanguage}
+ {\marg{\meta{language name}}}%
+ {\nxisty{babel} package}%
+ {Within the environment contents, predefined textual elements, such
+  as the date given by \nxglsi{today} or prefixes like \dq{Chapter},
+  are set to those supplied by the given language.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{language} The language identifier.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{figure}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}%
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}%
+ {%
+   Floats the contents to the nearest location according to the
+   preferred placement options, if possible. Within the environment,
+   \nxglsi{caption} may be used one or more times, as required.
+   The caption will usually include the prefix given by
+   \nxglsni{figurename}.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{placement} The preferred placement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{sidewaysfigure}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{rotating} package}%
+ {Like the \nxglsi{env-figure} environment but rotates the entire
+  figure (including caption) sideways.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{table}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}%
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}%
+ {%
+   Floats the contents to the nearest location according to the
+   preferred placement options, if possible. Within the environment,
+   \nxglsi{caption} may be used one or more times, as required.
+   The caption will usually include the prefix given by
+   \nxglsni{tablename}.
+ }%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{placement} The preferred placement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{sidewaystable}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{rotating} package}%
+ {Like the \nxglsi{env-table} environment but rotates the entire
+  table (including caption) sideways.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{subfigure}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{width}}}%
+ {\nxisty{subcaption} package}%
+ {Used to form a subfigure within a \nxglsi{env-figure}
+  environment. The \nxglsi{caption} command may be used in this
+  environment to produce a subcaption.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{pos} The vertical alignment of the box relative to
+     the surrounding text. (Centred if omitted.)
+    \csentryargitem{width} The width of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{subtable}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{pos}}\marg{\meta{width}}}%
+ {\nxisty{subcaption} package}%
+ {Used to form a subtable within a \nxglsni{env-table}
+  environment. The \nxglsi{caption} command may be used in this
+  environment to produce a subcaption.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{pos} The vertical alignment of the box relative to
+     the surrounding text. (Centred if omitted.)
+    \csentryargitem{width} The width of the box.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{equation}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays its contents as a single-lined numbered equation.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{displaymath}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays its contents as a single-lined unnumbered equation.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{math}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Sets its contents in in-line math mode.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{cases}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but adds a left
+   brace start delimiter and an invisible end delimiter.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{matrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{pmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument and adds round bracket delimiters.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{smallmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment but doesn't have an
+   argument and is designed for in-line maths.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{bmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument and adds square bracket delimiters.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{Bmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument and adds curly brace delimiters.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{vmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument and adds single vertical bar delimiters.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{Vmatrix}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package (Math Mode)}%
+ {%
+   Like the \nxglsi{env-array} environment, but doesn't have an
+   argument and adds double vertical bar delimiters.
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{raggedright}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ragged-right paragraph justification.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{raggedleft}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Ragged-left paragraph justification.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{frontmatter}
+ {}%
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \nxicls{scrbook}}%
+ {Switches to lower case Roman numeral page numbering. Also suppresses
+   chapter and section numbering, but still adds unstarred sectional
+   units to the table of contents. (See also \nxglsi{mainmatter}
+   and \nxglsi{backmatter}.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mainmatter}
+ {}%
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \nxicls{scrbook}}%
+ {Switches to Arabic page numbering and enables
+   chapter and section numbering. (See also
+   \nxglsi{frontmatter} and \nxglsi{backmatter}.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{backmatter}
+ {}%
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \nxicls{scrbook}}%
+ {Suppresses chapter and section numbering, but still adds unstarred
+  sectional units to the table of contents. (See also \nxglsi{frontmatter}
+  and \nxglsi{mainmatter}.)}%
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{dinglist}
+ {\marg{\meta{number}}}
+ {\nxisty{pifont} package}
+ {A list where the item marker is given by character \meta{number}
+  in the Zapf Dingbats font.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{number} The character code for the item marker.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{notag}%
+ {}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Suppresses equation numbering for the current row in environments such as
+   \nxglsi{env-align}.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tag}%
+ {\marg{\meta{tag}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Overrides equation numbering for the current row in environments such as
+   \nxglsi{env-align}.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{tag} The replacement for the equation number.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ding}%
+ {\marg{\meta{n}}}%
+ {\nxisty{pifont} package}%
+ {Inserts PostScript ZapfDingbats character with code \meta{n},
+   which must be an integer.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{n} The decimal code of the required character.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{color}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{model}}\marg{\meta{specs}}}%
+ {\nxisty{color} and \nxisty{xcolor} packages}%
+ {A declaration that switches the current foreground colour to the given specification.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{model} The colour model, for example
+      \texttt{rgb} or \texttt{named}.
+      \csentryargitem{specs} The colour specification for the
+      given model. For example, if the \texttt{rgb} model is chosen,
+      \meta{specs} must be a comma-separated list of three numbers
+      each between~0 and~1.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textcolor}%
+ {\oarg{\meta{model}}\marg{\meta{specs}}\marg{\meta{text}}}%
+ {\nxisty{color} and \nxisty{xcolor} packages}%
+ {Sets \meta{text} with the foreground colour according to the given \meta{specs}.}%
+ {%
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{\meta{model}} The colour model, for example
+      \texttt{rgb} or \texttt{named}.
+      \csentryargitem{\meta{specs}} The colour specification for the
+      given model. For example, if the \texttt{rgb} model is chosen,
+      \meta{specs} must be a comma-separated list of three numbers
+      each between~0 and~1.
+      \csentryargitem{\meta{text}} The text to be displayed in the
+      given colour.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{tabcolsep}
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\nxGls{length} register specifying half the gap between
+   columns in a \nxglsni{env-tabular} environment.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{arraycolsep}
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {\nxGls{length} register specifying half the gap between
+   columns in an \nxglsni{env-array} environment.}%
+ {}
+
+
+\defgcs{labelformat}%
+ {\marg{\meta{ctr}}\marg{\meta{defn}}}%
+ {\nxisty{fncylab} package}%
+ {Defines how the label for the counter \meta{ctr} should be
+ formatted. The definition \meta{defn} should use \texttt{\nxglsi{hashchar}1} to
+ indicate the label value.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{ctr} The name of the counter.
+     \csentryargitem{defn} How to display the value of the counter.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{thefootnote}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{footnote} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thechapter}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{chapter} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thesection}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{section} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thepage}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{page} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thefigure}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{figure} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{thetable}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the current value of the \nxicounter{table} counter}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ignorespaces}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Used in begin environment code to suppress any spaces occurring 
+  at the start of the environment (see also \nxglsni{ignorespacesafterend}).}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ignorespacesafterend}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Used in end environment code to suppress any spaces following the
+  end of the environment.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{textbar}%
+ {}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Vertical bar \textbar\ symbol.}%
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{the}%
+ {\meta{register}}%
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}%
+ {Displays the value of the given register (such as a \nxglsi{length} register).
+  Not to be confused with \cmdname{the}\meta{ctr} commands, such as \nxglsni{thefigure}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{register} The name of the register.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{substack}%
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}%
+ {\nxisty{amsmath} package}%
+ {Can be used to produce a multiline subscript or superscript. Lines
+  are separated using \nxglsi{tab.dbbackslashchar}.}%
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{maths} The subscript or superscript maths with rows
+      ended using \nxglsi{tab.dbbackslashchar}
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{DeclareCaptionLabelFormat}
+ {\marg{\meta{name}}\marg{\meta{code}}}
+ {\nxisty{caption}}
+ {Used to defined your own caption label formats.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{name} The name used to identify this new format
+     \csentryargitem{code} The code that defines this format
+     (\nxglsi{hashchar}1 gets replaced with the name and \nxglsni{hashchar}2
+     gets replaced with the reference number.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{captionsetup}
+ {\oarg{\meta{float type}}\marg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\nxisty{caption} package}
+ {Used to set up the options affecting float captions.}
+ {%
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{float type} The float type.
+     \csentryargitem{options} A \meta{key}=\meta{value}
+     comma-separated list of options.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/keywords.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/keywords.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..710054f547d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/keywords.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+\newkeyword[\glstockey={Source Code}]{source}{source code}
+
+\newkeyword[\glstockey={Output File}]{output}{output file}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [firstplural={\protect\emph{DVI (DeVice Independent) files}},
+  \glstockey={DVI File}]
+{dvi}{DVI file}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [\glsindexkey={auxiliary file (.aux)@auxiliary file (\texttt{.aux})},
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexaux},
+  name={Auxiliary Files},\glstockey={Auxiliary Files}]
+ {auxiliary}{auxiliary file}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Terminal or Command Prompt},%
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexterminal},
+  \glstockey={Terminal or Command Prompt}
+ ]
+{terminal}{terminal}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Commands},\glstockey={Commands}]
+ {command}{command}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Grouping (or Scope)},%
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexgroup},
+  \glstockey={Grouping (or Scope)}
+ ]
+ {group}{group}%
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Arguments (also called \dq{Parameters})},%
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexarg},
+  \glstockey={Arguments}
+ ]
+{argument}{argument}%
+
+\newkeyword
+ [parent=argument,
+  \glsindexkey={argument!mandatory},
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexmandatory},
+  first={mandatory (or compulsory) argument},
+  firstplural={mandatory (or compulsory) arguments},
+  name={Mandatory Arguments},
+  \glstockey={Mandatory Arguments}
+ ]
+{mandatory}{mandatory argument}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [parent=argument,
+  \glsindexkey={argument!optional},
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexoptional},
+  name={Optional Arguments},
+  \glstockey={Optional Arguments}
+]
+{optional}{optional argument}
+
+
+\newkeyword
+ [\glsextrakey={\extraindexfragile},
+  \glsindexkey={command!fragile},
+  \glstockey={Moving Arguments and Fragile Commands},
+   name={Moving Arguments and Fragile Commands}
+ ]
+{fragile}{fragile command}
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Robust Commands},
+  \glstockey={Robust Commands},
+  \glsindexkey={command!robust},
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexrobust}
+ ]
+{robust}{robust command}%
+
+\newkeyword
+ [name={Short and Long Commands},
+  \glstockey={Short and Long Commands},
+  \glsindexkey={command!short},
+  \glsextrakey={\extraindexshortlong}]
+{short}{short command}%
+
+
+\newkeyword
+[name={Declarations},\glstockey={Declarations}]
+{declaration}{declaration}
+
+
+\newkeyword
+[name={Inter-Sentence Spacing},
+ \glstockey={Inter-Sentence Spacing},
+ \glsindexkey={spacing!inter-sentence},
+ \glsextrakey={\extraindexsentencespacing}
+]
+{intersentencespacing}{inter-sentence spacing}%
+
+\newkeyword
+ [\glsingkey={hyphenating},
+  \glsdkey={hyphenated},
+  \glstockey={Hyphenation}]
+ {hyphenation}{hyphenation}
+
+\newkeyword
+[name={Environments},
+ \glstockey={Environments}]
+{environment}{environment}%
+
+\newkeyword
+[name={The Preamble},
+ \glstockey={The Preamble}]
+{preamble}{preamble}%
+
+
+\newkeyword
+[name={Lengths},\glstockey={Lengths}]
+{length}{length}
+
+\newkeyword[\glstockey={Class File}]{cls}{class file}%
+
+\newkeyword
+[\glsindexkey={TeX@\protect\TeX},\glstockey={\texorpdfstring{\protect\TeX}{TeX}}]
+{tex}{\TeX}
+
+\newkeyword{perl}{Perl}
+
+\glsaddall[types=keywords]
+\glsunsetall[keywords]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-a4paper.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-a4paper.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..83f13d7c143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-a4paper.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+% This is part of the source code for "LaTeX for Complete Novices"
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{novices-a4paper}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\PassOptionsToPackage{final}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{rotate}{\PassOptionsToPackage{rotate}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{norotate}{\PassOptionsToPackage{norotate}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbtitle}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbtitle}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnotitle}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnotitle}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnum}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnum}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnonum}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnonum}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{color}{\PassOptionsToPackage{color}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{nocolor}{\PassOptionsToPackage{nocolor}{flowfram}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{flowfram}
+\RequirePackage{pgf}
+\RequirePackage[a4paper,portrait]{geometry}
+\geometry{lmargin=72.0bp,rmargin=72.0bp,tmargin=72.0bp,bmargin=72.0bp}
+\newflowframe[none]{454.599976bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.5bp}{-1.008956bp}[title]
+
+\newflowframe[all]{411.496185bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.535362bp}{-1.008956bp}[main]
+
+\newdynamicframe[none]{87.388458bp}{699.400024bp}{424.311615bp}{-1.008956bp}[sidepanel]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{sidepanel}{valign=t}
+\newdynamicframe[all]{411.529968bp}{22.599998bp}{-0.561401bp}{711.79107bp}[header]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{header}{valign=t}
+\newdynamicframe[all]{411.529938bp}{22.600037bp}{-0.562958bp}{-37.008956bp}[footer]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{footer}{valign=t}
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.189491bp}{-1.008956bp}[left]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.863831bp}{699.400024bp}{215.810486bp}{-1.008956bp}[right]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{411.268066bp}{162.321106bp}{-0.430183bp}{535.4442bp}[header]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{522.889465bp}{-0.189491bp}{-1.157531bp}[leftshort]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{522.889465bp}{215.810516bp}{-1.157531bp}[rightshort]
+
+\renewcommand{\@dothehead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthehead}{%
+\@dynamicframeid{header}%
+\expandafter
+\def\csname @dynamicframe@\romannumeral\ff@id\endcsname{%
+\vfill\@thehead\vfill}%
+}%
+\renewcommand{\@dothefoot}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthefoot}{%
+\@dynamicframeid{footer}%
+\expandafter
+\def\csname @dynamicframe@\romannumeral\ff@id\endcsname{%
+\vfill\@thefoot\vfill}%
+}%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-index.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-index.ist
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7988340cddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices-index.ist
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+% MakeIndex style file novices.ist
+heading_prefix "\\indexheader{"
+heading_suffix "}\\relax "
+headings_flag 1
+
+group_skip ""
+item_0 "\n  \\mainindexitem{"
+delim_0 "}{"
+item_x1 "}\\relax\n   \\subindexitem{"
+delim_t "}\\relax "
+item_1 "\n     \\subindexitem{"
+item_2 "\n       \\subsubindexitem{"
+item_01 "\n    \\subindexitem{"
+item_12 "\n      \\subsubindexitem{"
+
+delim_1 "}{"
+delim_2 "}{"
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64667a11d43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+@preamble{"\latex{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}}
+\label{ch:bib}"}
+
+@book{lamport94,
+  author = "Leslie Lamport",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space: a document preparation system",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  edition="2nd",
+  year = 1994
+}
+
+@book{kopka95,
+  author = "Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly",
+  title = "A guide to {\LaTeXe}: document preparation
+           for beginners and advanced users",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1995
+}
+
+@book{goossens94,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1994
+}
+
+@book{goossens97,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space graphics companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1997
+}
+
+@book{goossens99,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and others",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space web companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1999
+}
+
+@book{kottwitz,
+  author = "Stefan Kottwitz",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space Beginner's Guide",
+  publisher = "Packt Publishing",
+  year = 2011
+}
+
+@book{vandongen,
+  author = "Marc van Dongen",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space and Friends",
+  publisher = "Springer",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@book{oxford,
+  author = "R. M. Ritter",
+  title = "Oxford Style Manual",
+  publisher = "Oxford University Press",
+  year = 2003
+}
+
+@book{turabian96,
+  author = "Kate L. Turabian",
+  title = "A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and
+    Dissertations",
+  edition = "sixth",
+  publisher = "The University of Chicago Press",
+  year = 1996
+}
+
+@book{texbook,
+  author = "Donald Ervin Knuth",
+  title = "The {\TeX{}book}",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1986
+}
+
+@book{thesis,
+  author = "Nicola L. C. Talbot",
+  title = "Using {\LaTeX}\space to Write a Ph.D. Thesis",
+  volume = 2,
+  publisher = "Dickmaw Books",
+  series = "The Dickimaw {\LaTeX}\space Series",
+  note = "\url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/}",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@article{pakin09,
+  author = "Scott Pakin",
+  title = "The Comprehensive {\LaTeX}\space Symbol List",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/symbols/comprehensive} or
+    \texttt{texdoc symbols}",
+  year = 2009
+}
+
+@article{l2tabu,
+  author = {Mark Trettin and J\"urgen Fenn},
+  title = "An essential guide to {\LaTeXe}\space usage: obsolete commands
+           and packages",
+  year = 2007,
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/english} or
+    \texttt{texdoc l2tabu-en}"
+}
+
+@misc{texarchive,
+  key = "UKTeX",
+  title = "The {UK} {\TeX}\space {Archive}",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}\index{TeX Archive@\TeX \ Archive}"
+}
+
+@misc{comptexttex,
+  key="comp.text.tex",
+  title = "The \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group",
+  note = "\url{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex}"
+}
+
+@misc{texhax,
+  key="texhax",
+  title = "The \texttt{texhax} archives",
+  note = "\url{http://tug.org/pipermail/texhax/}"
+}
+
+@misc{fontcat,
+  key="font",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space Font Catalogue",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/}"
+}
+
+@misc{ukfaq,
+  key="UKFAQ",
+  title = "{UK} List of {\TeX}\space Frequently Asked Questions",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}"
+}
+
+@misc{tds,
+  key="TDS",
+  title = "What is the {TDS}?",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds}"
+}
+
+@misc{ctan,
+  key="CTAN",
+  title = "The Comprehensive {\TeX}\space Archive Network",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{tug,
+  key="TUG",
+  title = "The {\TeX}\space User Group",
+  note = "\url{http://tug.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{uktug,
+  key="UKTUG",
+  title = "The {UK} {\TeX}\space User Group",
+  note = "\url{http://uk.tug.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{texcat,
+  author = "Graham Williams",
+  title = "{\TeX}\space Catalogue",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/}"
+}
+
+@misc{sargentiii,
+  author = "Murray {Sargent III}",
+  title = "High-Quality Editing and Display of Mathematical Text in
+Office 2007",
+  note =
+"\url{http://blogs.msdn.com/b/murrays/archive/2006/09/13/752206.aspx}",
+  month = SEP,
+  year = 2006
+}
+
+@misc{voss,
+  author = "Herbert {Vo\ss}",
+  title = "Math Mode",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/math/voss/mathmode/Mathmode.pdf}
+or \texttt{texdoc mathmode}",
+  year = 2010
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..85b732d5323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/novices.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,2828 @@
+% Class file for ``LaTeX for Complete Novices''
+% This is part of the source code for "LaTeX for Complete Novices"
+% It includes some code that was used to generate other formats of
+% this tutorial that aren't included in this distribution.
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{novices}
+
+\newif\ifscreen
+\screenfalse
+
+\newcommand*{\extra@stuff}{}
+
+\newcommand{\dosummarymark}[1]{%
+  \def\@summarymarker{#1}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@summarymarker
+  \edef\do@writeout{%
+     \noexpand\protected@write\noexpand\@auxout{}{%
+       \string\summarymarker{\noexpand\thepage}{\@summarymarker}%
+     }%
+  }%
+  \do@writeout
+}
+
+% Default is report
+\def\novices@loadsty{novices-a4paper}
+\def\novices@ptsize{12pt}
+\newcount\novicemedia
+\def\NOVICEreport{0}
+\def\NOVICEscreen{1}
+\def\NOVICEbook{2}
+\novicemedia=\NOVICEreport\relax
+\PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+
+\DeclareOption{report}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\novices@loadsty{novices-a4paper}%
+  \def\novices@ptsize{12pt}%
+  \novicemedia=\NOVICEreport\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{html}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\novices@loadsty{novices-html}%
+  \def\novices@ptsize{12pt}%
+  \novicemedia=\NOVICEreport\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+  \renewcommand*{\extra@stuff}{%
+    \hypersetup{linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,urlcolor=black}%
+    \renewcommand{\tableref}[1]{\tablename~\ref{##1}}%
+    \renewcommand{\vfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{##1}}%
+    \renewcommand{\figureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{##1}}%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand{\dosummarymark}[1]{}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{screen}{%
+  \screentrue
+  \def\novices@loadsty{novices-screen}%
+  \def\novices@ptsize{8pt}
+  \novicemedia=\NOVICEscreen\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=false,oneside,headings=small,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{book}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\novices@loadsty{novices-book}%
+  \def\novices@ptsize{10pt}
+  \novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,twoside,headings=normal,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{scrbook}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\LoadClass{scrbook}
+
+\expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter[\novices@ptsize]{extsizes}
+
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+
+% Requires at least version 1.08 of the flowfram package
+\RequirePackage{\novices@loadsty}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+ \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0.7in}
+ \newlength\@even@offset
+ \setlength{\@even@offset}{0.3in}
+
+ \setflowframe*{main,header,left,leftshort}{margin=outer}
+
+ \@flowframeid{right}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+ \@flowframeid{rightshort}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@flowframeid{left}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+ \@flowframeid{leftshort}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@flowframeid{main}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{header}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{footer}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{indextab}
+ \expandafter\computeleftedgeeven
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+% \expandafter\addtolength
+%   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+%   {0mm}%
+ \expandafter\addtolength
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @posx\endcsname
+   {3mm}%
+
+ \setdynamiccontents{\ff@id}{%
+   \color{white}\LARGE\bfseries\scshape\centering
+   \ifodd\c@page\relax
+     \hspace*{-1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{-90}{Index}%
+   \else
+     \hspace*{1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{90}{Index}%
+   \fi
+   \par
+ }
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{summarytab}
+ \expandafter\computeleftedgeeven
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+% \expandafter\addtolength
+%   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+%   {0mm}%
+ \expandafter\addtolength
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @posx\endcsname
+   {3mm}%
+
+ \setdynamiccontents{\ff@id}{%
+   \color{white}\LARGE\bfseries\scshape\centering
+   \ifodd\c@page\relax
+     \hspace*{-1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{-90}{Summary}%
+   \else
+     \hspace*{1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{90}{Summary}%
+   \fi
+   \par
+ }
+
+\fi
+
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\RequirePackage{pifont}
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{ifpdf}
+\RequirePackage{url}
+\RequirePackage[french]{datetime}
+\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
+\RequirePackage{makeidx}
+
+% html package conflicts with varioref+hyperref, so emulate it:
+\RequirePackage{comment}
+\specialcomment{htmlonly}{}{}
+\excludecomment{htmlonly}
+\newenvironment{latexonly}{\ignorespaces}{\ignorespacesafterend}
+\newenvironment{makeimage}{}{}
+\newcommand{\latex}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand{\latexhtml}[2]{#1}
+\newcommand{\html}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\htmlimage}[2]{}
+\newcommand{\mathorit}[1]{\ensuremath{#1}}
+
+\RequirePackage{varioref}
+\RequirePackage[hyperindex=false]{hyperref}
+\RequirePackage[toc,subentrycounter,
+   sanitizesort=false,
+   acronym,indexonlyfirst,
+   counter=section,numberedsection=nolabel,savewrites]{glossaries}
+\usepackage{glossary-inline}
+
+% don't check for makeindex special characters, as they're dealt
+% with explicitly
+\let\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@gobble
+
+\longdate
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \hypersetup{draft}
+\else
+  \hypersetup{colorlinks,plainpages=false,
+  linkcolor=blue,menucolor=blue,citecolor=blue,
+  urlcolor=magenta,filecolor=magenta}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\vfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\vref{#1}}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+ \newcommand{\figureref}[1]{\figurename~\vref{#1}}
+ \newcommand{\tableref}[1]{\tablename~\vref{#1}}
+\else
+  \newcommand{\figureref}[1]{\hyperlink{#1top}{\figurename~\ref*{#1}}}
+  \newcommand{\tableref}[1]{\htmlref{\tablename~\ref*{#1}}{#1}}
+\fi
+
+\extra@stuff
+
+\robustify\htmlref
+
+\renewcommand*{\headfont}{\em}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEscreen\relax
+  \renewcommand*{\footfont}{\small\scshape}
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\footfont}{\em}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\leftfootmark}{}
+\newcommand*{\rightfootmark}{}
+\renewcommand*{\ps@headings}{%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{\normalfont\headfont\thepage\hfill\leftmark}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\normalfont\headfont\rightmark\hfill\thepage}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\leftfootmark\@leftfoothook\hfill}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\hfill\normalfont\footfont\rightfootmark\@rightfoothook}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\ps@plain}{%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\mbox{}\hfill\thepage\@rightfoothook}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\thepage\hfill\mbox{}\@leftfoothook}%
+}
+
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+\newcommand*{\@leftfoothook}{}
+\newcommand*{\@rightfoothook}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\setleftfootmark}[1]{}
+
+\newcommand*{\@setleftfootmark}[1]{%
+  \gdef\leftfootmark{#1}%
+  \global\let\setleftfootmark\@gobble
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\setrightfootmark}[1]{}
+
+\newcommand*{\@setrightfootmark}[1]{%
+  \gdef\rightfootmark{#1}%
+}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \newcommand*{\enablefoothooks}{%
+    \let\setrightfootmark\@setrightfootmark
+    \let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    \renewcommand*{\@rightfoothook}{%
+      \global\let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    }%
+    \renewcommand*{\@leftfoothook}{%
+      \global\let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    }%
+  }
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\enablefoothooks}{}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\disablefoothooks}{%
+  \global\let\leftfootmark\@empty
+  \global\let\rightfootmark\@empty
+  \global\let\setrightfootmark\@gobble
+  \global\let\setleftfootmark\@gobble
+  \global\let\@leftfoothook\@empty
+  \global\let\@rightfoothook\@empty
+}
+
+\providecommand{\abstractname}{Abstract}
+
+\newcommand*{\@edition}{}
+\newcommand*{\edition}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@edition}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\theversion}{}
+\newcommand*{\version}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theversion}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\thevolume}{}
+\newcommand*{\volume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\thevolume}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\theseries}{}
+\newcommand*{\series}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theseries}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\theseriesurl}{}
+\newcommand*{\seriesurl}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theseriesurl}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\navigationbar}{{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\thepage}{a}}{\textcolor[gray]{.75}{Previous}}{%
+\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}{Previous}}\enspace
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{lastpg}}{\textcolor[gray]{.75}{Next}}{%
+\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}{Next}}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}{First}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{LastPage}{Last}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{GoBack}{Back}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{GoForward}{Forward}\enspace
+\htmlref{Summary}{ch:glossary}\enspace
+\htmlref{Index}{ch:index}}}
+
+\newcommand{\ps@online}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{{\normalfont\headfont\rightmark}\hfil}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{{\normalfont\hfil\headfont\leftmark}}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar
+\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+
+\ifscreen
+\pagestyle{online}
+
+\renewcommand{\ps@plain}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar
+\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+\renewcommand{\ps@empty}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar \hfill\mbox{}}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEscreen\relax
+  \renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+  \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\textup{\thechapter}.\enspace}
+  \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering\rmfamily\scshape}
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+  \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\thechapter}
+  \addtokomafont{chapter}{\raggedleft\rmfamily\scshape}
+\fi
+
+\addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\large\rmfamily\scshape}
+\addtokomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}{\large\rmfamily\upshape}
+\addtokomafont{section}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{subsection}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{subsubsection}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{minisec}{\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEreport
+  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstartvskip}{%
+    \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}%
+  }
+\fi
+
+\renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+  \ifnum\c@tocdepth>\m@ne
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty<20010
+      \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+    \fi
+    \vskip 1.0em \@plus \p@ 
+    \setlength \@tempdima{2em}%
+    \if@tocleft
+      \ifx\toc@l@number\@empty
+      \else
+        \setlength \@tempdima{0\toc@l@number}%
+      \fi
+    \fi 
+    \begingroup
+      \raggedchapterentry
+      \parindent\z@
+      \advance\rightskip\@pnumwidth 
+      \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+      \interlinepenalty\@M
+      \leavevmode
+      \advance\leftskip \@tempdima
+      \null\nobreak
+      \hskip -\leftskip
+      \usekomafont{chapterentry}%
+      {%
+        #1\nobreak
+        \usekomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}%
+        {%
+          \hfill
+          \nobreak
+          \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}%
+        }%
+      }%
+      \par
+      \ifnum\scr@compatibility>\@nameuse{scr@v@2.96}%
+       \relax
+       \endgroup
+       \penalty 20009
+     \else
+       \penalty\@highpenalty
+       \endgroup
+     \fi
+   \fi
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\l@section}{%
+  \bprot@dottedtocline {1}{1.5em}{3em}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\captionformat}{\space}
+
+\renewcommand{\title}[2][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdftitle}{#2}}{
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@pdftitle}{}}{\renewcommand{\@pdftitle}{#1}}{}}%
+\renewcommand{\@title}{#2}}
+
+\renewcommand{\author}[2][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@pdfauthor}{}}{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdfauthor}{#2}}{}}{\renewcommand{\@pdfauthor}{#1}}%
+\renewcommand{\@author}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\keywords}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pdfkeywords}{#1}}
+
+\providecommand{\subject}[1]{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdfsubject}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\@affiliation}{}
+\newcommand*{\thepublisher}{\@affiliation}
+\newcommand*{\@affiliationurl}{}
+\newcommand*{\@affiliationaddress}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\affiliation}[3]{%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliation}{#1}%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliationurl}{\url{#2}}%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliationaddress}{#3}%
+}
+
+\ifpdf
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg}
+\else
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.ps,.eps}
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  % book doesn't have sidepanel
+\else
+  % get the dimensions of sidepanel (values are stored in \ffareax, \ffareay, \ffareawidth and \ffareaheight)
+  \getdynamicbounds*{sidepanel}
+
+  % set the margin width to be the same as the width of sidepanel
+  \setlength{\marginparwidth}{\ffareawidth}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\index@preamble}{}
+\newcommand{\indexpreamble}[1]{%
+  \renewcommand{\index@preamble}{#1}%
+}
+
+% renew theindex environment so that it appears in the table of contents
+% and set up index frames
+
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+{%
+  \clearpage
+  \begingroup
+   \normalfont\sectfont
+   \chapterheadstartvskip
+   \phantomsection
+   \size@chapter{\indexname}%
+   \thispagestyle{plain}%
+   \label{ch:index}%
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+  \markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+  \parindent\z@
+  \index@preamble\par
+  \enablefoothooks
+%  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+  \let\item\@idxitem
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+    \setleftfootmark{\doindextopmark}%
+    \setrightfootmark{\doindexbottommark}%
+  \else
+    \setdynamiccontents*{sidepanel}{%
+      \hfil\ifscreen\normalsize\else\large\fi\indexbar\hfil}%
+  \fi
+  \ifscreen\small\fi
+  \newpage
+  \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+{%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endindex{\thepage}}%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@old@last@idx@page{\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \setrightfootmark{\doindexbottommark\disablefoothooks}%
+  \setleftfootmark{\doindextopmark\disablefoothooks}%
+}
+
+\newcount\@first@idx@page
+\newcount\@last@idx@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endindex}[1]{\global\@last@idx@page=#1\relax}
+
+\newcommand*{\@old@last@idx@page}{-1}
+\newcommand*{\@flow@old@last@idx@page}[1]{%
+  \gdef\@old@last@idx@page{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcount\@last@summary@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endsummary}[1]{%
+  \global\@last@summary@page=#1\relax
+  \global\@first@idx@page=\@last@summary@page
+  \global\advance\@first@idx@page by 1\relax
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+    \ifodd\@first@idx@page
+      \relax
+    \else
+      \global\advance\@first@idx@page by 1\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcount\@first@summary@page
+
+\newcount\@last@acr@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endacr}[1]{\global\@last@acr@page=#1\relax}
+
+\newcommand*{\@flow@startsummary}[1]{%
+  \global\@first@summary@page=#1\relax
+   \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+     \ifodd\@first@summary@page
+       \relax
+     \else
+       \global\advance\@first@summary@page by 1\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% Put glossary in double-column
+
+\newcommand*{\setdoublecolumnglo}{%
+  \let\glossarysection\dblglossarysection
+}
+
+\newcount\tmp@count
+
+\newcommand{\@setup@pages}{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+    \setdynamicframe*{summarytab}{pages={\number\@first@summary@page-\number\@last@summary@page}}%
+    \setdynamicframe*{indextab}{pages={\number\@first@idx@page-\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \else
+    \setdynamicframe*{sidepanel}%
+      {pages={\number\@first@summary@page-\number\@last@summary@page,%
+              \number\@first@idx@page-\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \fi
+  \ifnum\@first@summary@page>0\relax
+    \@ff@tmpN=\@first@summary@page
+    \advance\@ff@tmpN by 1\relax
+    \tmp@count=\@first@idx@page
+    \advance\tmp@count by 1\relax
+    \edef\@nv@set@flf{\noexpand\setflowframe*{left,right}%
+      {pages={\number\@ff@tmpN-\number\@last@summary@page
+             ,\number\tmp@count-\number\@last@idx@page}}}%
+    \@nv@set@flf
+    \setflowframe*{main}%
+      {pages={<\number\@last@acr@page,\number\@last@acr@page,>\number\@last@idx@page}}
+    \setflowframe*{header,leftshort,rightshort}%
+      {pages={\number\@first@summary@page,\number\@first@idx@page}}
+  \fi
+}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\@setup@pages}
+
+\newcommand*{\dblglossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+  \doifnotbook
+  {%
+    \setdynamiccontents*{sidepanel}{%
+      \hfil\ifscreen\normalsize\else\large\fi\summarybar\hfil}%
+  }%
+  \clearpage
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@startsummary{\thepage}}%
+  \begingroup
+  \normalfont\sectfont
+  \chapterheadstartvskip
+  \phantomsection
+  \size@chapter{#2}%
+  \thispagestyle{plain}%
+  \label{ch:glossary}%
+  \par
+  \endgroup
+  \markboth{\glossarytoctitle}{\glossarytoctitle}%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+  \vskip\baselineskip
+  \noindent
+  \emph{\summarypreamble}\par
+  \newpage
+}
+
+\def\summarypreamble{}
+
+\newif\iflastpg
+\AtEndDocument
+{%
+  \lastpgtrue
+  \ifnum\@last@idx@page=\@old@last@idx@page
+    \relax
+  \else
+    \ClassWarningNoLine{novices}{Rerun required to get frames up-to-date}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\maketitle}{%
+  \pagenumbering{alph}% for PDF bookmarks
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfinfo
+    {%
+       /Author (\@pdfauthor)
+       /Title  (\@pdftitle)
+       /Keywords (\@pdfkeywords)
+       /Subject  (\@pdfsubject)
+       /ModDate (D:\pdfdate)
+       /CreationDate (D:20040706000000)
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \begin{titlepage}%
+   \@maketitle
+  \end{titlepage}%
+  \thispagestyle{empty}%
+  \newpage
+  \bgroup
+    \thecopyrighttext
+    \par
+  \egroup
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+  \global\let\thetitle\@title
+  \global\let\theauthor\@author
+  \global\let\thanks\relax
+  \global\let\maketitle\relax
+  \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+  \global\let\@author\@empty
+  \global\let\@date\@empty
+  \global\let\@title\@empty
+  \global\let\title\relax
+  \global\let\author\relax
+  \global\let\date\relax
+  \global\let\and\relax
+  \normalfont
+}
+
+\providecommand{\theauthoryear}{}
+\providecommand{\theauthorsurname}{}
+\providecommand{\theauthorforenames}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\authordetails}[3]{%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthoryear}{#1}%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthorsurname}{#2}%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthorforenames}{#3}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@author}{#3\ #2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand\thetitle{\@title}
+
+\providecommand*{\maketitlehook}{}
+
+\providecommand{\thecopyrighttext}{}
+
+\newcommand{\copyrighttext}[1]{%
+  \appto\thecopyrighttext{#1}%
+}
+
+\ifcase\novicemedia
+
+  % report version
+  \newcommand{\indexbar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|c}
+      \idxheaderlink{Symbols} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{A} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{B} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{C} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{D} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{E} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{F} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{G} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{H} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{I} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{J} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{K} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{L} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{M} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{N} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{O} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{P} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Q} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{R} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{S} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{T} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{U} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{V} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{W} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{X} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Y} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\summarybar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|c}
+      \glsheaderlink{glssymbols} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{A} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{B} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{C} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{D} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{E} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{F} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{G} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{H} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{I} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{J} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{K} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{L} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{M} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{N} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{O} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{P} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Q} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{R} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{S} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{T} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{U} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{V} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{W} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{X} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Y} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \renewcommand{\@maketitle}{%
+  \let\footnotesize\small
+  \let\footnoterule\relax
+  \let \footnote \thanks
+  \null\vfil
+  \vskip 60\p@
+  \begin{center}%
+    {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+    \vskip 2ex%
+    {\large Version \theversion\par}%
+    \vskip 3em%
+    {\large
+     \lineskip .75em%
+      \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+        \@author
+      \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large 
+       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}
+       \@affiliation\\
+       \@affiliationurl
+       \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large \@date \par}%       % Set date in \large size.
+  \end{center}\par
+  \@thanks
+  \vfil\null
+}
+
+\or
+  % screen version
+  \newcommand{\indexbar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|cc}
+    \multicolumn{2}{|c}{\idxheaderlink{Symbols}}\\
+    \idxheaderlink{A} &
+    \idxheaderlink{N} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{B} &
+    \idxheaderlink{O} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{C} &
+    \idxheaderlink{P} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{D} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Q} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{E} &
+    \idxheaderlink{R} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{F} &
+    \idxheaderlink{S} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{G} &
+    \idxheaderlink{T} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{H} &
+    \idxheaderlink{U} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{I} &
+    \idxheaderlink{V} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{J} &
+    \idxheaderlink{W} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{K} &
+    \idxheaderlink{X} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{L} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Y} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{M} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\summarybar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|cc}
+    \multicolumn{2}{|c}{\glsheaderlink{glssymbols}}\\
+    \glsheaderlink{A} &
+    \glsheaderlink{N} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{B} &
+    \glsheaderlink{O} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{C} &
+    \glsheaderlink{P} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{D} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Q} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{E} &
+    \glsheaderlink{R} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{F} &
+    \glsheaderlink{S} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{G} &
+    \glsheaderlink{T} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{H} &
+    \glsheaderlink{U} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{I} &
+    \glsheaderlink{V} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{J} &
+    \glsheaderlink{W} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{K} &
+    \glsheaderlink{X} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{L} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Y} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{M} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \renewcommand\@maketitle{%
+  \let\footnotesize\small
+  \let\footnoterule\relax
+  \let \footnote \thanks
+  \null\vfil
+  \begin{center}%
+    {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+    \vskip 2ex%
+    {\large Version \theversion\par}%
+    \vskip 3em%
+    {\large
+     \lineskip .75em%
+      \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+        \@author
+      \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+      {\large
+       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}
+       \@affiliation\\
+       \@affiliationurl
+       \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large \@date \par}%       % Set date in \large size.
+  \end{center}\par
+  \@thanks
+  \vfil\null
+}
+
+\or
+ % book version
+
+ \let\indexbar\relax
+ \let\summarybar\relax
+
+ \renewcommand\@maketitle{%
+   \null\par
+   \vskip4ex
+   \centering
+   \bfseries\scshape
+   \Huge
+   \@title
+   \vskip4ex
+   \Large
+   \@author
+   \par
+   \vfill
+   \normalsize
+   Volume~\thevolume~of\par
+   \theseries
+   \par
+   \vfill
+   \maketitlehook
+   \Large
+   \mdseries
+   \vskip2ex
+   \@affiliation
+   \par
+   \vskip1ex
+   \small
+   \@affiliationaddress
+   \par
+   \vskip4ex
+   \par\null
+ }
+
+\fi
+
+\newlength\indexheaderskip
+
+\setlength{\indexheaderskip}{2ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+
+\newcommand{\indexheader}[1]{%
+ \par\noindent
+ \vskip\indexheaderskip
+ \makebox[\linewidth][c]%
+ {%
+   \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+     \textbf{#1}%
+   \else
+     \hypertarget{idx:#1}{\textbf{#1}}%
+     \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\idx@header{#1}}%
+   \fi
+ }%
+ \\*[\indexheaderskip]%
+}
+
+
+\newcommand*{\idx@header}[1]{%
+  \csgdef{idx@header@#1}{\hyperlink{idx:#1}{\textbf{#1}}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\gls@header}[1]{%
+  \csgdef{gls@header@#1}{\hyperlink{gls:#1}{\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{#1}}}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\idxheaderlink}[1]{%
+  \ifcsdef{idx@header@#1}%
+  {\csname idx@header@#1\endcsname}%
+  {\textbf{\color{gray}#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsheaderlink}[1]{%
+  \ifcsdef{gls@header@#1}%
+  {\csname gls@header@#1\endcsname}%
+  {\textbf{\color{gray}\glsgetgrouptitle{#1}}}%
+}
+
+\newtoks\indexmarktok
+
+\newcommand{\doindexmark}[1]{%
+  \def\@indexmarker{#1}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@indexmarker
+  \edef\do@writeout{%
+     \noexpand\protected@write\noexpand\@auxout{}{%
+       \string\indexmarker{\noexpand\thepage}{\@indexmarker}%
+     }%
+  }%
+  \do@writeout
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexmarker}[2]{%
+  \ifcsundef{@index@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}%
+  {\csgdef{@index@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}}%
+  {}%
+  \csgdef{@index@bottom@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doindextopmark}{%
+  \csname @index@top@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doindexbottommark}{%
+  \csname @index@bottom@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand{\summarymarker}[2]{%
+  \ifcsundef{@summary@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}%
+  {\csgdef{@summary@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}}%
+  {}%
+  \csgdef{@summary@bottom@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\dosummarytopmark}{%
+  \csname @summary@top@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\dosummarybottommark}{%
+  \csname @summary@bottom@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newlength\indexitemskip
+\setlength\indexitemskip{1pt plus .5pt}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+
+  \newcommand{\mainindexitem}[2]{%
+    \vbox{\item #1\doindexmark{#1}\space\hfill#2}%
+    \par\vskip\indexitemskip
+  }
+
+\else
+  \newcommand{\mainindexitem}[2]{%
+    \vbox{\item #1\space\hfill#2}\par
+    \par\vskip\indexitemskip
+  }
+
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\subindexitem}[2]{\vbox{\subitem #1\space\hfill #2}\par}
+\newcommand{\subsubindexitem}[2]{\vbox{\subsubitem #1\space\hfill #2}\par}
+
+% put headers and footers into the dynamic frames labelled
+% 'header' and 'footer'
+\renewcommand{\@dothehead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dothefoot}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthehead}{}
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthefoot}{}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+  \setdynamiccontents*{header}{\vfill\ifodd\c@page\relax\@oddhead\else\@evenhead\fi\vfill}
+  \setdynamiccontents*{footer}{\vfill\ifodd\c@page\relax\@oddfoot\else\@evenfoot\fi\vfill}
+\else
+  \setdynamiccontents*{header}{\vfill\@oddhead\vfill}
+  \setdynamiccontents*{footer}{\vfill\@oddfoot\vfill}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\@frontmatter}{\mbox{}\par\vfill\framebreak\clearpage
+\pagenumbering{roman}%
+\setflowframe*{title}{pages=none}}
+
+\@ifundefined{frontmatter}
+ {%
+   \let\frontmatter\@frontmatter
+ }
+ {%
+   \let\orgfrontmatter\frontmatter
+   \def\frontmatter{\@frontmatter\orgfrontmatter}
+ }
+
+\newwrite\tf@hloe
+
+\newcommand{\listofexercises}{%
+  \chapter*{List of Exercises}
+  \@starttoc{loe}
+  \immediate\openout\tf@hloe \jobname.hloe\relax
+  \immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\begin{exerciselist}}%
+}
+
+\AtEndDocument{\immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\end{exerciselist}}}
+
+\newcommand{\l@exercise}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+
+\newcommand*{\htmlexerciseref}[4]{\htmlref{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\htmlexerciseitem}{\item \htmlexerciseref}
+
+\newenvironment{exerciselist}{\begin{enumerate}}{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\newcommand*{\@html@nodename}{\jobname}
+\newcommand*{\setnode}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@html@nodename}{#1}}
+
+\newcounter{exercise}
+%\begin{exercise}[html backref]{title}{label}
+\newenvironment{exercise}[3][\@htmlex@backref]{%
+  \def\@htmlex@backref{\@html@nodename}%
+  \vskip10pt plus 5pt minus 1pt\relax
+  \par\noindent
+  \refstepcounter{exercise}\label{#3}%
+  \textbf{\large Exercise \theexercise\ (#2)}%
+  \par\nopagebreak
+  \vspace{10pt}\nopagebreak
+  \def\@the@exercisetitle{#2}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@the@exercisetitle
+  \immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\htmlexerciseitem{\@the@exercisetitle}{#3}{#1}{\theexercise}}%
+  \addcontentsline{loe}{exercise}{\protect\numberline{\theexercise}{\@the@exercisetitle}}\nopagebreak
+}%
+{%
+  \vskip5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\relax
+  \par\noindent\null\hfill
+  \rule{1in}{1pt}%
+  \hfill\null\par
+  \vskip5pt plus 5pt minus 1pt\relax
+}
+
+\newcommand{\faqlink}[2]{%
+  \href{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=#2}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\faq}[2]{%
+  \marginpar
+  {%
+    \parbox[t]{\marginparwidth}{%
+      \raggedright
+      \ifcase\novicemedia
+        \small
+      \or
+        \footnotesize
+      \or
+       \footnotesize\em
+      \fi
+      [FAQ: \faqlink{#1}{#2}]%
+    }\par
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\ukenglishdate}{%
+  \renewcommand{\fmtord}[1]{##1}%
+  \renewcommand*{\formatdate}[3]{%
+  \@day=##1\relax\@month=##2\relax\@year=##3\relax
+  \ordinalnum{\the\@day}\ \monthname[\@month] \the\@year}%
+}
+
+\DeclareMathOperator{\card}{card}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\diag}{diag}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{\mode}{mode}
+
+\newcommand*{\refname}{References}
+
+\newcommand*{\backslashcircumsort}{%
+  \string\~%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\backslashtildesort}{%
+  \string\~%
+}
+
+% option format
+\newcommand*{\optfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+% display and index class files:
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\icls}[1]{%
+  \cls{#1}%
+  \index{class files (.cls)@class files (\texttt{.cls})!#1@\cls{#1}|hyperpage}%
+  \index{#1@\cls{#1} class|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\clsopt}[1]{%
+ \optfmt{#1}%
+ \index{class file options!#1@\optfmt{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\let\nxclsopt\clsopt
+
+
+% display and index package:
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\isty}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1 package@\sty{#1}
+package|hyperpage}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istystart}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1
+package@\sty{#1} package|(hyperpage}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istyend}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1
+package@\sty{#1} package|)hyperpage}}
+
+% display option, index package and option
+% \istyopt{package}{option}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istyopt}[2]{\optfmt{#2}%
+\index{#1 package@\sty{#1} package!#2@\optfmt{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+% KOMA Script class option
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\scrclsopt}[2][]{%
+ \ifstrempty{#1}%
+ {%
+   \optfmt{#2}%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \optfmt{#2\discretionary{}{}{}=\discretionary{}{}{}#1}%
+ }%
+ \index{KOMA Script class options!#2@\optfmt{#2}|hyperpage}%
+ \index{class file options!#2@\optfmt{#2} (KOMA)|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\let\nxscrclsopt\scrclsopt
+
+% Command key-val option
+% \ikeyvalopt{csname}{key}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ikeyvalopt}[2]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}!#2@\texttt{#2}|hyperpage}\texttt{#2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\keyvalopt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+% index page style
+\newcommand{\idxpagestyle}[1]{\index{page
+style!#1@\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+% display and index page style
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ipagestyle}[1]{\pagestylefmt{#1}\idxpagestyle{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\pagestylefmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\pagenumberingfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% index page numbering
+\newcommand{\indexpagenumbering}[1]{%
+  \index{page numbering!#1@\pagenumberingfmt{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+% display page numbering
+\newcommand{\ipagenumbering}[1]{%
+  \pagenumberingfmt{#1}\indexpagenumbering{#1}%
+}
+
+% display and index unit of measurement
+\newcommand*{\iunit}[2]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 (#2)@\texttt{#1}
+(#2)|hyperpage}\index{units!#1 (#2)@\texttt{#1} (#2)|hyperpage}}
+
+\renewcommand{\see}[2]{\par\qquad\emph{\seename} #1}
+
+\newcommand{\ibackslashcircumdef}{\cmdname{\textasciicircum}%
+\index{\string\^@\protect\cmdname{\protect\textasciicircum}|indexdef}}
+
+\newcommand{\ibackslashtildedef}{\cmdname{\textasciitilde}%
+\index{\string\~@\protect\cmdname{\protect\textasciitilde}|indexdef}}
+
+\newcommand{\iquestiondowncmd}{\glsi{questiondown}}
+\newcommand{\iexclamdowncmd}{\glsi{exclamdown}}
+
+\newcommand*{\boldc}{\ensuremath{\boldsymbol{c}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\supdag}{\textsuperscript{\dag}}
+\newcommand*{\supddag}{\textsuperscript{\ddag}}
+\newcommand*{\supdagddag}{\textsuperscript{\dag\ddag}}
+
+\edef\percentsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\%}
+\edef\hashsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\#}
+\edef\ampsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\&}
+\edef\dollarsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\$}
+\edef\underscoresym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\_}
+\edef\circumsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\^}
+\edef\tildesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\~}
+\edef\leftbracesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\{}
+\edef\rightbracesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\}}
+\edef\dbbackslashsym{\string\\}
+\edef\backslashsym{\expandafter\@gobble\dbbackslashsym}
+
+% protected makeindex special characters
+\newcommand*{\pleftbracesym}{"\leftbracesym}
+\newcommand*{\prightbracesym}{"\rightbracesym}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\quotecs}{\cmdname{"}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\umlautaccent}[1]{\"{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\doublebar}[1]{\ensuremath{\|}}
+
+\newcommand{\exclamsym}{!}
+\newcommand{\questionsym}{?}
+\newcommand{\atsym}{@}
+\newcommand{\xatsym}{"@}
+\newcommand{\vbarsym}{|}
+\newcommand{\doublequotesym}{"}
+\newcommand{\slashsym}{/}
+\newcommand{\emDashcs}{-{}-{}-}
+\newcommand{\enDashcs}{-{}-}
+\newcommand{\dashcs}{-}
+
+\newcommand{\quoteleftcs}{`}
+\newcommand{\quotedblleftcs}{`{}`}
+\newcommand{\quoterightcs}{'}
+\newcommand{\quotedblrightcs}{'{}'}
+\newcommand{\questiondowncs}{?{}`}
+\newcommand{\exclamdowncs}{!{}`}
+\newcommand{\opensqsym}{[}
+\newcommand{\closesqsym}{]}
+\newcommand{\openparensym}{(}
+\newcommand{\closeparensym}{)}
+\newcommand{\commasym}{,}
+\newcommand{\colonsym}{:}
+\newcommand{\semicolonsym}{;}
+\newcommand{\lesssym}{<}
+\newcommand{\greatersym}{>}
+\newcommand{\periodsym}{.}
+\newcommand{\equalsym}{=}
+
+\newcommand{\dash}{\,---\,}
+
+\newcommand{\doublequestionmark}{%
+  ??\index{"?"? (undefined reference)}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\symbolcmddef}[1]{%
+ \cmdname{#1}%
+ \indexsymbolcmddef{#1}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexsymbolcmddef}[1]{%
+ \index{\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbolcmddef}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\cmdname{"#1}|indexdef}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbolcmd}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\cmdname{"#1}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\symbolcmd}[1]{%
+ \cmdname{#1}%
+ \indexsymbolcmd{#1}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexsymbolcmd}[1]{%
+  \index{\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+% index a command definition, but don't display it in the text
+\newcommand{\indexComdef}[1]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|indexdef}}
+
+% index a command name, but don't display it in the text
+\newcommand{\indexCom}[1]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbol}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\texttt{"#1}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\keywordfmt}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\keyword}[2][\keywordtext]{%
+ \def\keywordtext{#2}%
+ \keywordfmt{#1}\index{#2|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+  \def\@gls@title{#2}%
+  \protected@edef\do@def@glo@section{\noexpand\chapter[#1]{#2}}%
+  \do@def@glo@section
+}
+
+\newcommand{\enter}{\scalebox{0.8}{\input{pictures/entersymbol}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cmdname}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\parg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt(#1\texttt)}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\meta}[1]{\textnormal{\ensuremath{\langle}\emph{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}{%
+  \@ifstar\@smeta\@meta
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@meta}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\glsni{leftbracechar}#1\glsni{rightbracechar}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@smeta}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt{\leftbracesym}#1\texttt{\rightbracesym}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}{%
+  \@ifstar\@soarg\@oarg
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@oarg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\glsni{opt.opensq}#1\glsni{opt.closesq}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@soarg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt[#1\texttt]}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\comma}{,\discretionary{}{}{}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\envname}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cls}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\counter}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iappname}[2][\appnamesort]{%
+{\def\appnamesort{#2}%
+\appname{#2}%
+\index{#1@\appname{#2}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\newcommand{\texdistro}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\itexdistro}[2][\distrosort]{%
+{%
+  \def\distrosort{#2}%
+  \texdistro{#2}%
+  \index{#1@\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#1@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\perldistro}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\menuto}{\discretionary{}{}{}$\rightarrow$\discretionary{}{}{}}
+
+\newcommand{\startmenu}[1]{\begin{center}\sffamily Start$\rightarrow$ Programs $\rightarrow$ #1\end{center}}
+
+\newcommand{\menu}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BiBTeX}{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
+\newcommand{\PDFLaTeX}{PDF\LaTeX}
+
+\newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''}
+\newcommand{\sq}[1]{`#1'}
+
+\newcommand{\footnotesymbols}{%
+\@fnsymbol1 \@fnsymbol2 \@fnsymbol3 \@fnsymbol4 \@fnsymbol5
+\@fnsymbol6 \@fnsymbol7 \@fnsymbol8 \@fnsymbol9}
+
+\newlength\imgHeight
+\newlength\maxImageHeight
+
+\setlength{\maxImageHeight}{0.8\textheight}
+
+\newlength\imgWidth
+\newlength\maxImageWidth
+\setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\textwidth}
+
+\define@key{Gin}{alt}{}
+
+\newcommand{\incGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+  \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+      \includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+     \includegraphics[#1]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newsavebox{\boxcontents}
+
+\newcommand*{\includeteximage}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+    \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+    \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+  \begingroup
+    \@tempswafalse
+    \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+    \toks@{\InputIfFileExists{#2}{}{\@warning{File `#1' not found}}}%
+    \setkeys{Gin}{#1}%
+    \Gin@esetsize
+    \sbox\boxcontents{\the\toks@}%
+    \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \settodepth{\@ff@tmp@y}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \addtolength{\imgHeight}{\@ff@tmp@y}%
+    \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+      \ifdim\maxImageHeight<\maxImageWidth\relax
+        \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+          \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \else
+          \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+       \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \usebox\boxcontents
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\incPgfOrGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \IfFileExists{#2}{\includeteximage[#1]{#2}}{\incGraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexdef}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+
+% footnotes for minipage examples
+\newcommand{\mpexfootnote}[1]{%
+\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\textcolor{black}{\alph{mpfootnote}}}%
+\footnote{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\labelledbox}[2]{\begin{tabular}{r}\doublebox{#1}\\\scriptsize\textsf{#2}\end{tabular}}
+\newcommand{\labelled}[2]{\begin{tabular}{r}#1\\\scriptsize\textsf{#2}\end{tabular}}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \definecolor{inputcol}{gray}{0.6}
+  \definecolor{outputcol}{gray}{0.4}
+\else
+  \definecolor{inputcol}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0}
+  \definecolor{outputcol}{rgb}{0.6,0,1}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\inputlabelformat}[1]{\textcolor{inputcol}{\scriptsize\sffamily #1}}
+\newcommand{\outputlabelformat}[1]{\textcolor{outputcol}{\scriptsize\sffamily #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\toparrow}{\ensuremath{\overline\uparrow}}
+\newcommand{\botarrow}{\ensuremath{\underline\downarrow}}
+
+\newlength\minremainspace
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+
+  \newcommand*{\marginblocklabel}[2]{%
+    \ifthispageodd
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][l]{#1 #2}%
+    }%
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][r]{#2 #1}%
+    }%
+  }
+
+ \newcommand*{\marginlabel}[1]{%
+    \ifthispageodd
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][l]{#1}%
+    }%
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][r]{#1}%
+    }%
+ }
+
+ \setlength\minremainspace{50pt}
+
+\else
+ \newcommand*{\marginblocklabel}[2]{#1 #2}
+ \newcommand*{\marginlabel}[1]{#1}
+ \setlength\minremainspace{42pt}
+\fi
+
+% Changing the colour in the margin occasionally causes problems
+% so store the coloured marginal text in save boxes.
+
+\newsavebox\Input
+\newsavebox\Output
+\newsavebox\InputT
+\newsavebox\OutputT
+\newsavebox\CodeT
+\newsavebox\InputB
+\newsavebox\OutputB
+\newsavebox\CodeB
+\newsavebox\Code
+
+\sbox\Input{\inputlabelformat{Input}}
+\sbox\Output{\outputlabelformat{Output}}
+\sbox\Code{\inputlabelformat{Code}}
+
+\sbox\InputT{\inputlabelformat{%
+   \toparrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\OutputT{\outputlabelformat{%
+  \toparrow
+ }}
+
+\sbox\CodeT{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \toparrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\InputB{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\OutputB{\outputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\CodeB{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\newcommand{\inputruleB}{%
+ \vspace*{-5pt}\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\outputruleB}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{outputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\coderuleB}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\inputruleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\outputruleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{outputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\coderuleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\xminisec}[1]{%
+ \@check@remainingspace[3.5\baselineskip]%
+ \minisec{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@check@remainingspace}[1][\minremainspace]{%
+  \par
+  \mbox{}%
+  \@tempdimc\pagegoal
+  \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
+  \penalty -100\noindent
+  \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\@tempdimc\relax
+   \pagebreak
+  \else
+   \vskip-\baselineskip
+  \fi
+}
+
+% define commands governing how input code and 
+% corresponding output should be displayed
+
+\newenvironment{bcode}%
+ {%
+   \@check@remainingspace
+   \par\vspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}%
+   \coderuleT
+   \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+     \marginblocklabel{\usebox\CodeT}{\usebox\Code}}}%
+   \ttfamily\frenchspacing\obeyspaces\par\raggedright\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {%
+   \par\coderuleB
+   \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+     \marginblocklabel{\usebox\CodeB}{\usebox\Code}}}%
+   \par\vspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}%
+   \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+ }
+
+%Single line of input
+\newenvironment{codeS}[1][0.9\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \par
+  \vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \begin{minipage}{#1}\ttfamily\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+ \par\end{minipage}%
+ \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+ \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+%Multiple lines of input
+\newenvironment{code}[1][0.9\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \@check@remainingspace
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \inputruleT
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputT}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \nopagebreak
+  \begin{ttfamily}\nopagebreak\par\noindent\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+  \par\end{ttfamily}\nopagebreak
+  \inputruleB
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputB}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ltxresultwidth}{0.9\linewidth}
+
+%Single line of output
+\newenvironment{ltxresultS}[1][]%
+{%
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \par\noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \begin{minipage}{\ltxresultwidth}%
+}%
+{%
+  \end{minipage}%
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+%Multiple lines of output
+\newenvironment{ltxresultM}[1][]%
+{%
+  \@check@remainingspace
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \outputruleT
+  \nopagebreak
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\OutputT}{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \nopagebreak
+  \par\nopagebreak
+}%
+{%
+  \nopagebreak\outputruleB
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\OutputB}{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newenvironment{htmlresult}[1]{\ignorespaces}{\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{definition}[1][\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \par\vspace{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}%
+  \noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\scriptsize\sffamily Definition}}}%
+  \begin{lrbox}{\boxcontents}
+  \begin{minipage}{#1}\ttfamily\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+  \par
+  \end{minipage}\end{lrbox}%
+  \usebox{\boxcontents}%
+  \par\vspace{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\csentryargitem}[1]{\item{\meta{#1}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BeginArgList}{\begin{description}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\EndArgList}{\end{description}}
+
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+\string\html{\string\gdef\string\newlabelxx
+\string#1\string#2\string#3\string#4\string#5\string#6{%
+\string\oldnewlabel{\string#1}{{\string#2}{\string#3}}%
+\string\sectionlabel{\string#1}{\string#4}}}}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\appendixref}[2][]{Appendix~\ref{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\chapterref}[2][]{Chapter~\ref{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\sectionref}[2][]{Section~\ref*{#2}}
+\else
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\appendixref}[2][]{\htmlref{Appendix~\ref*{#2}}{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref*{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\chapterref}[2][]{\htmlref{Chapter~\ref*{#2}}{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref*{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\sectionref}[2][]{\htmlref{Section~\ref*{#2}}{#2}}
+\fi
+
+\renewcommand*{\thefootnote}{\thechapter.\arabic{footnote}}
+
+\let\@mkboth\markboth
+
+\newcommand*{\warning}{%
+ \marginpar
+ {%
+  \marginlabel
+  {%
+    {%
+      \LARGE
+      \fontencoding {U}%
+      \fontfamily{futs}\selectfont
+      \char 66\relax
+    }%
+  }%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\wrong}{\marginpar{\marginlabel{\LARGE\color{red}\ding{56}}}}
+\newcommand*{\correct}{\marginpar{\marginlabel{\LARGE\color{green}\ding{52}}}}
+
+% Computer Modern maths fonts
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathrm}{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathit}{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathtt}{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathsf}{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathbf}{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cmmathcal}{symbols}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cmmathnormal}{letters}
+
+\newcommand*{\cmr}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont #1}}
+
+% keywords stuff
+
+\newglossarystyle{keywords}%
+{%
+  \setglossarystyle{inline}%
+  \renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{%
+    \keywordpreamble
+    \renewcommand{\glssubentryitem}[1]{}%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinenameformat}[2]{%
+    \setnode{##1}%
+    \section[\glstoc{##1}]{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}%
+    \label{sec:##1}%
+    \index{\glsindex{##1}|indexdef}%
+    \glsextra{##1}%
+    \glsreset{##1}%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubnameformat}[2]{%
+    \setnode{##1}%
+    \subsection[\glstoc{##1}]{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}%
+    \label{sec:##1}%
+    \glsreset{##1}%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsinlineseparator}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsinlinesubseparator}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsinlineparentchildseparator}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\glspostinline}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinedescformat}[3]{##1}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubdescformat}[3]{##1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\keywordpreamble}{\input{term-defs/introduction}}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsd}[2][]{%
+  \ifglsused{#2}%
+  {%
+    \glsuseri[#1]{#2}\indexglsindex{#2}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \emph{\glsuseri[hyper=false,#1]{#2}}%
+    \glsunset{#2}%
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsing}[2][]{%
+  \ifglsused{#2}%
+  {%
+    \glsuserii[#1]{#2}%
+    \indexglsindex{#2}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \emph{\glsuserii[hyper=false,#1]{#2}}%
+    \glsunset{#2}%
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glstoc}[1]{\glsentryuseriii{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\glsterm}[2][]{\glsuseriv[#1]{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\glsindex}[1]{\glsentryuserv{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\glsextra}[1]{\glsdoifexists{#1}{\glsentryuservi{#1}}}
+
+\def\glsdkey{user1}
+\def\glsingkey{user2}
+\def\glstockey{user3}
+\def\glstermkey{user4}
+\def\glsindexkey{user5}
+\def\glsextrakey{user6}
+
+\newcounter{keyword}
+
+% \newkeyword[options][plural]{label}{name}
+
+\newcommand*{\newkeyword}[1][]{%
+  \def\keyword@options{#1}%
+  \@newkeyword
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@newkeyword}[3][\keyword@plural]{%
+  \def\keyword@plural{#3s}%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newkeyword{\noexpand\@@newkeyword
+    {\keyword@options}%
+    {#1}%
+    {#2}%
+    {#3}%
+  }%
+  \@do@newkeyword
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexglsindex}[1]{%
+  \index{\glsindex{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\four@digits}[1]{%
+ \ifnum #1<1000 0\fi\ifnum #1<100 0\fi\ifnum #1<10 0\fi \number #1%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@@newkeyword}[4]{%
+ \stepcounter{keyword}%
+  \newglossaryentry{#3}{%
+    sort={\four@digits{\c@keyword}},
+    type=keywords,
+    name={\protect\capitalisewords{#4}},
+    \glsindexkey={#4},
+    \glsextrakey={},
+    first={\protect\keywordfmt{#4}},
+    firstplural={\protect\keywordfmt{#2}},
+    text={#4\indexglsindex{#3}},
+    plural={#2\indexglsindex{#3}},
+    \glsdkey={#4ed},
+    \glsingkey={#4ing},
+    description={\protect\input{term-defs/#3}},
+    \glstockey={#4},
+    \glstermkey={#4},
+    #1
+  }%
+}
+
+\newglossary[klg]{keywords}{kls}{klo}{Some Definitions}
+
+\newcommand{\printkeywords}{%
+  \printglossary[type=keywords,style=keywords]
+}
+
+% \newacr{label}{short}{long}{url}
+
+\newcommand*{\newacr}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}{%
+    type=acronym,
+    sort={#2},
+    name={#2\gloindex{#2}},
+    text={#2\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}\latex{~\cite{#1}}},
+    first={#3\protect\footnote{\protect\url{#4}}\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}
+(#2)},
+    description={\makefirstuc{#3}. \protect\url{#4}}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \newacrx{label}{short}{long}
+
+\newcommand*{\newacrx}[3]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}{%
+    type=acronym,
+    sort={#2},
+    name={#2\gloindex{#2}},
+    text={#2\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}\latex{~\cite{#1}}},
+    first={#3\protect\index{#2|hyperpage} (#2)},
+    description={\makefirstuc{#3}.}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \newacrnocite{label}{short}{long}
+
+\newcommand*{\newacrnocite}[3]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}{%
+    type=acronym,
+    sort={#2},
+    name={#2\gloindex{#2}},
+    text={#2\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}},
+    first={#3\protect\index{#2|hyperpage} (#2)},
+    description={\makefirstuc{#3}.}
+  }%
+}
+
+\newglossarystyle{acronyms}{%
+  \setglossarystyle{list}%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
+  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
+    {\begin{description}}
+    {%
+      \end{description}%
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endacr{\thepage}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+% Code optimized for book, but some tweaking may be required
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\bookpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\booklinebreak}{\linebreak}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\bookpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\booklinebreak}{}
+\fi
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEreport
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\reportpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\reportlinebreak}{\linebreak}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\reportpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\reportlinebreak}{}
+\fi
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEscreen
+  \newcommand*{\screenpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \newcommand*{\screenlinebreak}{\linebreak}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\screenpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\screenlinebreak}{}
+\fi
+
+% index and display application name with hyperlink to application's
+% home page
+ \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+
+  \newcommand{\iappnamelink}[3][]{%
+   \appname{#2}#1\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+   \index{#2@\appname{#2}}}
+
+  \newcommand{\iperldistro}[3][]{%
+    \perldistro{#2}#1\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+    \index{#2@\protect\perldistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\itexdistrolink}[3][]{%
+  {%
+    \texdistro{#2}#3\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+    \index{#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+    \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }%
+ }
+
+ \else
+  \newcommand{\iappnamelink}[3][]{%
+   \htmladdnormallink{\appname{#2}}{#3}#1%
+   \index{#2@\appname{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+  \newcommand{\iperldistro}[3][]{%
+   \htmladdnormallink{\perldistro{#2}}{#3}#1%
+   \index{#2@\protect\perldistro{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+  \newcommand{\itexdistrolink}[3][]{%
+  {%
+    \htmladdnormallink{\texdistro{#2}}{#3}#1%
+    \index{#2@\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+    \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }%
+ }
+
+ \fi
+
+\newcommand{\suppmaterial}[2][]{#2#1\footnote{\url{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/supplemental.html}}}
+\newcommand{\suppref}[3][]{#2#1\footnote{\url{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/#3.html}}}
+
+\newcommand{\objectref}[2]{\htmlref{#1~\ref*{#2}}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\xfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\xpageref}[2]{\vpageref{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\figuretop}[1]{\hypertarget{#1top}{}}
+\newcommand{\makeimg}[2]{{#2}}
+\let\oelig\oe
+
+\newlength\rightmargini
+\newlength\rightmarginii
+\newlength\rightmarginiii
+\newlength\rightmarginiv
+
+\def\itemize{%
+  \ifnum\@itemdepth>\thr@@
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \setlength{\rightmargini}{5em}%
+    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+    \expandafter\list\csname\@itemitem\endcsname
+     {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\enumerate{%
+  \ifnum\@enumdepth>\thr@@
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \advance \@enumdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+    \expandafter\list\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname
+      {% 
+         \usecounter\@enumctr
+         \setlength{\rightmargin}%
+            {\csname rightmargin\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth\endcsname}%
+         \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+      }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fwitem}[1]{\item[{\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{#1}}]}
+
+\newenvironment{fwlist}[1]{%
+\begin{list}{}{%
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
+}{
+\end{list}}
+
+\newcommand{\exerciseref}[1]{\objectref{Exercise}{#1}%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+   \space (page~\pageref{#1})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\modification}[1]{\textbf{\ttfamily #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\comptexttex}{\texttt{comp.text.tex}~\cite{comptexttex}}
+\newcommand{\texhax}{\texttt{texhax}~\cite{texhax}}
+
+ \ifcase\novicemedia
+ % report
+   \newcommand{\latexthesis}{%
+     \htmladdnormallink{\emph{Using \LaTeX\ to Write a PhD Thesis}}%
+       {\baseurl/latex/thesis/index.html}~\cite{thesis}%
+   }
+ \or
+ % screen
+
+   \newcommand{\latexthesis}{%
+     \htmladdnormallink{\emph{Using \LaTeX\ to Write a PhD Thesis}}%
+       {\baseurl/latex/thesis/index.html}~\cite{thesis}%
+   }%
+ \or
+ % book
+
+   \newcommand{\latexthesis}{%
+     \emph{Using \LaTeX\ to Write a PhD Thesis}~\cite{thesis}%
+   }
+ \fi
+
+\newcommand{\latexpdfdoc}{%
+ \begin{em}%
+  \htmladdnormallink{Creating}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}
+  \htmladdnormallink{a}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}
+  \htmladdnormallink{PDF}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}
+  \htmladdnormallink{Document}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}
+  \htmladdnormallink{using}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}
+  \htmladdnormallink{PDFLaTeX}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}%
+ \end{em}%
+ \ifscreen\else \footnote{\url{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}}\fi
+}
+
+\newenvironment{resultS*}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultS}}%
+{\end{ltxresultS}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{resultS}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultS}}%
+{\end{ltxresultS}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{result}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultM}}%
+{\end{ltxresultM}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newcounter{object}
+
+\newenvironment{inlinedef}{\begin{ttfamily}}{\end{ttfamily}}
+
+% \casemedia{A4}{screen}{book}{html}
+\newcommand{\casemedia}[4]{%
+  \ifcase\novicemedia#1\or#2\or#3\fi%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\download}[1]{%
+\casemedia
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% report
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% screen
+ {download\footnote{\url{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}}% book
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% html
+}
+
+\newcommand{\downloadorview}[1]{%
+\casemedia
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% report
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% screen
+ {download\footnote{\url{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}}% book
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% html
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ifbookorother}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+   #1%
+  \else
+   #2%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ifscreenorother}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEscreen\relax
+   #1%
+  \else
+   \ifpdf
+    #2%
+   \else
+    #1%
+   \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifreport}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEreport\relax
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifbook}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifnotbook}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \else
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\breakenumi}{%
+  \xdef\currentenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+  \end{enumerate}
+  \begin{enumerate}
+  \setcounter{enumi}{\currentenumi}
+}
+
+%\dosidewaysfigure{label}{image}{caption}
+\newcommand*{\dosidewaysfigure}[3]{%
+  \ifscreenorother
+  {%
+    \begin{figure}
+      \figuretop{#1}
+      \rotatebox{90}%
+      {%
+        \begin{minipage}[c][\textwidth]{0.75\textheight}%
+         \centering
+         #2% image
+         \caption{#3}% caption
+         \label{#1}%
+        \end{minipage}
+      }
+    \end{figure}
+  }%
+  {%
+    \begin{sidewaysfigure}
+      \figuretop{#1}
+      \centering
+      #2% image
+      \caption{#3}% caption
+      \label{#1}%
+    \end{sidewaysfigure}
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\degrees}[1]{\ensuremath{#1^{\circ}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\idxcrossref}[2]{\see{#1}{#2}}
+
+% display and index a counter:
+\newcommand{\icounter}[1]{%
+\counter{#1}\index{counters!#1@\counter{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index BibTeX:
+\newcommand{\iBiBTeX}{\BiBTeX\index{BibTeX@\BiBTeX|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index PDFLaTeX:
+\newcommand{\iPDFLaTeX}{\PDFLaTeX\index{PDFLaTeX@\PDFLaTeX|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index text:
+\newcommand{\Index}[1]{#1\index{#1|hyperpage}}
+
+% index monospaced text:
+\newcommand{\indextt}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index monospaced text:
+\newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\indextt{#1}}
+
+% command definition: display and index
+\newcommand*{\cmddef}[1]{\cmdname{#1}\indexComdef{#1}}
+
+% index and display a command name
+\newcommand*{\icmdname}[1]{\cmdname{#1}\indexCom{#1}}
+
+% index an environment definition, but don't display it
+\newcommand*{\indexEnvdef}[1]{\index{#1@\envname{#1} environment|indexdef}}
+
+% index an environment, but don't display it
+\newcommand*{\indexEnv}[1]{\index{#1@\envname{#1}
+environment|hyperpage}}
+
+% environment definition: display and index
+\newcommand*{\envdef}[1]{\envname{#1}\indexEnvdef{#1}}
+
+% index and display environment
+\newcommand*{\ienvname}[1]{\envname{#1}\index{#1@\envname{#1} environment|hyperpage}}
+
+\newtoks\argsummarytok
+
+\newcommand*{\indexglo}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gloindex}[1]{\index{#1|indexglo}}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsi}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glshyperlink[\glsentrytext{#1}]{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsni}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glshyperlink[\glsentryuseriv{#1}]{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsnl}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glsentryuseriv{#1}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexuservi}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\index\expandafter{\glsentryuservi{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexdefuservi}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\index\expandafter{\glsentryuservi{#1}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+% \defgcs[extra][label]{name}{arg syntax}{location of definition}{summary}{arg
+% summary}
+\newcommand{\defgcs}[1][]{%
+ \def\@gcs@extra{#1}%
+ \@defgcs
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@defgcs}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     sort={#2},
+     name={\cmdname{#2}},
+     first={\protect\cmdname{#2}\indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}\indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\cmdname{#2}},
+     user5={\@gcs@extra},
+     user6={#2@\protect\cmdname{#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgchar[extra]{label}{char}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchar}[7][]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+   {
+     name={\texttt{#3}},
+     sort={#3},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#2}},
+     user1={#4},
+     user2={#5},
+     user3={#7},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#6},
+     user5={#1},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgchildchar{label}{parent}{char}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildchar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     description={#4},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \defgxchildchar{label}{parent}{char}{summary}{extra}
+\newcommand{\defgxchildchar}[5]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     description={#4},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}%
+      \protect\index{#5|hyperpage}%
+     },
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}%
+      \protect\index{#5|hyperpage}%
+     },
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \defgactivechar[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgactivechar}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+     \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+        name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand\protect\noexpand#3}},
+        sort={\@gcs@sort},
+        first={\noexpand\texttt{#3}%
+         \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+        text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{#3}%
+         \indexuservi{#2}},
+        user1={#4},
+        user2={#5},
+        user3={#7},
+        user4={\noexpand\texttt{#3}},
+        description={#6},
+        user6={\expandonce\@gcs@sort @\texttt{\protect#3}}
+      }%
+   }%
+   \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgchildactivechar{label}{parent}{cs}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildactivechar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#4},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgactivecharcs[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgactivecharcs}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+     \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+        name={\noexpand\cmdname{\noexpand\protect\noexpand#3}},
+        sort={\backslashsym#1},
+        first={\noexpand\cmdname{#3}%
+         \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+        text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\cmdname{#3}%
+         \indexuservi{#2}},
+        user1={#4},
+        user2={#5},
+        user3={#7},
+        user4={\noexpand\cmdname{#3}},
+        description={#6},
+        user6={\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{\string#3}}
+      }%
+   }%
+   \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgidxactivechar[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgidxactivechar}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \toks@{#6}%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+    \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+       name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+       sort={"\expandonce\@gcs@sort},
+       first={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+        \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+       text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+        \indexuservi{#2}},
+       user1={#4},
+       user2={#5},
+       user3={#7},
+       user4={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+       description={\the\toks@},
+       user6={"\expandonce\@gcs@sort @\texttt{\string#3}}
+   }%
+  }%
+  \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgchildidxactivechar{label}{parent}{cs}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildidxactivechar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={"#3},
+     parent={#2},
+     name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+     first={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#4},
+     user6={"#3@\texttt{\string#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgidxactivecharcs{label}{charcs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgidxactivecharcs}[6]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+   {%
+     name={\cmdname{\protect#2}},
+     sort={"\backslashsym"#2},
+     first={\cmdname{#2}%
+      \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     user3={#6},
+     user4={\cmdname{#2}},
+     description={#5},
+     user6={"\backslashsym"#2@\protect\cmdname{\string#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgsymcs[label]{sym}{syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgsymcs}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     name={\cmdname{#2}},
+     sort={\backslashsym#2},
+     first={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+       \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+       \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\cmdname{#2}},
+     user5={},
+     user6={\backslashsym#2@\protect\cmdname{#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgenv[label]{env name}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg
+% summary}
+\newcommand{\defgenv}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{env-#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     sort={#2},
+     name={\protect\cmdname{begin}\protect\texttt{\protect\marg{#2}}},
+     first={\protect\envname{#2}%
+        \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\envname{#2}%
+        \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\envname{#2}},
+     user5={},
+     user6={#2@\envname{#2} environment}
+   }%
+}
+
+\newlength\summaryskip
+\newlength\summarypostskip
+\newlength\summarypredescskip
+\newlength\summarypostnameskip
+
+\setlength{\summaryskip}{2ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\setlength{\summarypostskip}{.5ex plus .1ex minus .1ex}
+\setlength{\summarypredescskip}{1ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\setlength{\summarypostnameskip}{1ex plus .25ex minus .25ex}
+
+\newglossarystyle{summary}% Summary glossary style
+{%
+  \setglossarystyle{inline}%
+    \renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{\raggedright\enablefoothooks
+      \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook\relax
+        \setleftfootmark{\dosummarytopmark}%
+        \setrightfootmark{\dosummarybottommark}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+    \renewcommand{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+      \gls@inlinesep\def\gls@inlinesep{}%
+      \noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]%
+      {%
+        \ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+          \textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}%
+        \else
+          \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\gls@header{##1}}%
+          \hypertarget{gls:##1}{\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}%
+        \fi
+      }%
+      \\*[\summarypostskip]%
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinenameformat}[2]{%
+    \def\glsentrylabel{##1}%
+      \penalty\@lowpenalty\par\noindent
+      \glstarget{##1}{##2\glsentryuseri{##1}}%
+      \gloindex{\glsentryuservi{##1}}%
+      \dosummarymark{\glsuseriv{##1}}%
+      \ifcsempty{glo@##1@userii}%
+      {%
+        \\*[\summarypredescskip]%
+      }%
+      {%
+        \\*[\summarypostnameskip]%
+        \textbf{Defined in: }\glsentryuserii{##1}.%
+        \par
+        \vskip\summarypredescskip
+      }%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsinlinesubnameformat}[2]{\glstarget{##1}{\strut}}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinedescformat}[3]{##1\space[\S##3]\glsentryuserv{\glsentrylabel}}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlineseparator}{\par\vskip\summaryskip\noindent}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubseparator}{;\space}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubdescformat}[3]{##1\space[\S##3]}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlineparentchildseparator}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinepostchild}{.}%
+  \renewcommand{\glspostinline}{%
+%    \gappto\rightfootmark{\disablefoothooks}%
+%    \gappto\leftfootmark{\disablefoothooks}%
+    \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endsummary{\thepage}}%
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxipagestyle}[1]{\protect\ipagestyle{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxisty}[1]{\protect\isty{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\nxicls}[1]{\protect\icls{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\nxiappname}[1]{\protect\iappname{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxglsi}{\protect\glsi}
+\newcommand*{\nxglsni}{\protect\glsni}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxglslink}[2]{\protect\glslink{#1}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxGls}{\protect\Gls}
+\newcommand*{\nxgls}{\protect\gls}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxicounter}{\protect\icounter}
+
+\newcommand{\dohtmlcolorbox}[2][]{#2}
+
+\newcommand*{\ocaron}{\v{o}}
+\newcommand*{\ocedilla}{\c{o}}
+\newcommand*{\obarunder}{\b{o}}
+\newcommand*{\odotunder}{\d{o}}
+\newcommand*{\omacron}{\={o}}
+\newcommand*{\odoubleacute}{\H{o}}
+\newcommand*{\odotover}{\.{o}}
+\newcommand*{\otilde}{\~{o}}
+\newcommand*{\ocircum}{\^{o}}
+\newcommand*{\obreve}{\u{o}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\oumlaut}{\"{o}}
+\newcommand*{\uring}{\r{u}}
+\newcommand*{\rbarunder}{\b{r}}
+\newcommand*{\xytie}{\t{xy}}
+\newcommand*{\dotlessj}{\j}
+
+\newcommand{\indexEPS}{%
+ \index{Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file|hyperpage}%
+ \index{file formats!eps@\texttt{.eps}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexDVI}{%
+  \index{Device Independent (DVI) file|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!dvi@\texttt{.dvi}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexPDF}{%
+  \index{Portable Document Format (PDF) file|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!pdf@\texttt{.pdf}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexTOC}{%
+  \index{table of contents file (.toc)@table of contents file (\texttt{.toc})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!toc@\texttt{.toc}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOF}{%
+  \index{list of figures file (.lof)@list of figures file (\texttt{.lof})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!lof@\texttt{.lof}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOT}{%
+  \index{list of tables file (.lot)@list of tables file (\texttt{.lot})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!lot@\texttt{.lot}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOG}{%
+  \index{log file (.log)@log file (\texttt{.log})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!log@\texttt{.log}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexAUX}{%
+  \index{auxiliary file (.aux)@auxiliary file (\texttt{.aux})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!aux@\texttt{.aux}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\iauxfile}{auxiliary (\texttt{.aux}) file\indexAUX}
+
+\newcommand{\indexSYNCTEX}{%
+  \index{synctex file (.synctex.gz)@synctex file (\texttt{.synctex.gz})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!synctex.gz@\texttt{.synctex.gz}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexCLS}{%
+  \index{class files (.cls)@class files (\texttt{.cls})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!cls@\texttt{.cls}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexSTY}{%
+  \index{packages files (.sty)@package files (\texttt{.sty})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!sty@\texttt{.sty}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\TO}{\ensuremath{\Rightarrow}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexaux}{%
+ \index{file formats!aux@\texttt{.aux}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexsentencespacing}{%
+ \index{spacing!French|indexdef}%
+ \index{spacing!English|indexdef}%
+ \index{French spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, French}}%
+ \index{English spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, English}}%
+ \index{inter-sentence spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, inter-sentence}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexshortlong}{%
+  \index{short command|idxcrossref{command, short}}%
+  \index{long command|idxcrossref{command, long}}%
+  \index{command!long|indexdef}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexfragile}{%
+ \index{moving argument|idxcrossref{argument, moving}}%
+ \index{argument!moving|indexdef}%
+ \index{fragile command|idxcrossref{command, fragile}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexoptional}{%
+  \index{optional argument|idxcrossref{argument, optional}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexmandatory}{%
+  \index{mandatory argument|idxcrossref{argument, mandatory}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexrobust}{%
+  \index{robust command|idxcrossref{command, robust}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexarg}{%
+  \index{parameter|idxcrossref{argument}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexgroup}{%
+  \index{scope|idxcrossref{group}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexterminal}{%
+  \index{command prompt|idxcrossref{terminal}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\preambleillustration}{%
+\begin{ttfamily}
+\begin{tabbing}
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{\ldots}\=\\
+\>\rmfamily $\longleftarrow$ This bit in here is the preamble.\\
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{ttfamily}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dobibexamplenumbered}{%
+\noindent\textbf{\Large Bibliography}\relax % simulate thebibliography
+\begin{fwlist}{[3]}
+\fwitem{[1]} ``\LaTeX: a document preparation
+system'', Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition (updated for
+\LaTeXe), Addison-Wesley (1994).
+
+\fwitem{[2]} ``A Guide to \LaTeX: document
+preparation for beginners and advanced users'',
+Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, Addison-Wesley (1995).
+
+\fwitem{[3]} ``The \LaTeX\ Companion'',
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and
+Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, (1994).
+\end{fwlist}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dobibexamplelabelled}{%
+\par\noindent
+{\Large\bfseries \bibname}%
+\begin{fwlist}{[Goossens 1994]}
+\fwitem{[Lamport 1994]} ``\LaTeX\ : a document preparation
+system'', Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition (updated for
+\LaTeXe), Addison-Wesley (1994).
+
+\fwitem{[Kopka 1995]} ``A Guide to \LaTeX: document
+preparation for beginners and advanced users'',
+Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, Addison-Wesley (1995).
+
+\fwitem{[Goossens 1994]} ``The \LaTeX\ Companion'',
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and
+Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, (1994).
+\end{fwlist}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dodescriptionexample}{%
+\begin{description}
+\item[Animal] Living being
+
+\item[Vegetable] Plant
+
+\item[Mineral] Natural inorganic substance
+\end{description}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dodescriptionkomaexample}{%
+\addtokomafont{descriptionlabel}{\normalfont\scshape}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Animal] Living being
+
+\item[Vegetable] Plant
+
+\item[Mineral] Natural inorganic substance
+\end{description}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\doexerciseexample}{%
+\begin{result}
+\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}%
+\par\textbf{Exercise}
+\begin{itshape}\par\vspace{\baselineskip}
+This is a sample.
+\end{itshape}
+\end{result}}
+
+\newcommand*{\historyitem}[1]{\section*{#1}}
+
+\ifnum\novicemedia=\NOVICEbook
+  \newcommand*{\backcoverheading}{%
+    \newpage\thispagestyle{empty}%
+    \section*{Back Cover Text}%
+  }
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\backcoverheading}{\chapter*{Back Cover Text}}
+\fi
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/acrobat.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/acrobat.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..502b8b340ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/acrobat.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/backtic.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/backtic.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1d4588728fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/backtic.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/circle.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/circle.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d839ee6497
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/circle.pdf
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+%PDF-1.3
+%Çì�¢
+6 0 obj
+<</Length 7 0 R/Filter /FlateDecode>>
+stream
+xœÝ’Q
+Â0†ßsŠ<Æ¥ëšå>;<@q›°	Îûƒu,�(»€”ôOÒ~%?´ Æâ½�#<àÐxìžpJéÄ+i�iM:‚e¦Cî,WcrÝû·\|1Çt…
+ªƒÌƒL„2PåMGðZ‘zE!vŒ.©†\³ò¼ö\K(ÑÐÜ0ÖÓv²ÍÚû+³5‘¡ß^"´»·ÍñÏÝöpNÿé;2z endstream
+endobj
+7 0 obj
+175
+endobj
+8 0 obj
+<</R4
+4 0 R>>
+endobj
+5 0 obj
+<</Type/Page/MediaBox [0 0 75 75]
+/Rotate 0/Parent 3 0 R
+/Resources<</ProcSet[/PDF]
+/ExtGState 8 0 R
+>>
+/Contents 6 0 R
+>>
+endobj
+3 0 obj
+<< /Type /Pages /Kids [
+5 0 R
+] /Count 1
+>>
+endobj
+1 0 obj
+<</Type /Catalog /Pages 3 0 R
+>>
+endobj
+4 0 obj
+<</Type/ExtGState/Name/R4/TR/Identity/OPM 1/SM 0.02>>
+endobj
+2 0 obj
+<</Producer (GNU Ghostscript 6.51)
+>>endobj
+xref
+0 9
+0000000000 65535 f 
+0000000505 00000 n 
+0000000622 00000 n 
+0000000446 00000 n 
+0000000553 00000 n 
+0000000308 00000 n 
+0000000015 00000 n 
+0000000260 00000 n 
+0000000279 00000 n 
+trailer
+<< /Size 9 /Root 1 0 R /Info 2 0 R
+>>
+startxref
+674
+%%EOF
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5e880cffaac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5268c72a318
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9b256ba1a70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aa8a45152bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4c3e7849883
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom5.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom5.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c8eac6422b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom5.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom6.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom6.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..128700318c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom6.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom7.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom7.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ad1f8c0b25b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/cmdprom7.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dinglist.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dinglist.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..492741906d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dinglist.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41f4f5c21a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f9e83de400d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8573b6346be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ca10536cffd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/dirviewer4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/draftimage.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/draftimage.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..79715ee0e1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/draftimage.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/entersymbol.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/entersymbol.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..65b8afaa8f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/entersymbol.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+\begin{pgfpicture}{0bp}{0bp}{17.273bp}{7.051bp}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{\pgfarrowtriangle{4bp}}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{16.773bp}{6.551bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{16.773bp}{3.008bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2.6bp}{3.008bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\end{pgfpicture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/errormessage.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/errormessage.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..022e635a0c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/errormessage.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/exsamp.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/exsamp.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d9ee70b0c77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/exsamp.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..352fa2e2463
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..78281e7857a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/incgraph2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/letterbox.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/letterbox.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..99aec18d7eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/letterbox.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+\begin{pgfpicture}{0bp}{0bp}{341.494bp}{162.55bp}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfsetdash{{5.0bp}{5.0bp}}{0.0bp}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{96.08bp}{88.611bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{340.994bp}{88.611bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{163.104bp}{103.492bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{176.514bp}{137.467bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{178.224bp}{141.787bp}}{\pgfpoint{179.214bp}{145.837bp}}{\pgfpoint{179.214bp}{148.402bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{179.214bp}{152.452bp}}{\pgfpoint{177.054bp}{154.027bp}}{\pgfpoint{169.449bp}{155.467bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{169.449bp}{159.787bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{201.129bp}{159.787bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{201.129bp}{155.332bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{193.344bp}{153.442bp}}{\pgfpoint{189.879bp}{150.292bp}}{\pgfpoint{186.414bp}{142.237bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{161.529bp}{83.737bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{156.759bp}{72.217bp}}{\pgfpoint{153.744bp}{67.177bp}}{\pgfpoint{149.289bp}{62.587bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{144.519bp}{57.682bp}}{\pgfpoint{139.344bp}{55.252bp}}{\pgfpoint{133.584bp}{55.252bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{125.799bp}{55.252bp}}{\pgfpoint{120.039bp}{59.437bp}}{\pgfpoint{120.039bp}{65.017bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{120.039bp}{68.797bp}}{\pgfpoint{123.504bp}{72.082bp}}{\pgfpoint{127.689bp}{72.082bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{130.569bp}{72.082bp}}{\pgfpoint{132.009bp}{71.227bp}}{\pgfpoint{135.609bp}{67.357bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{137.454bp}{65.467bp}}{\pgfpoint{138.894bp}{64.612bp}}{\pgfpoint{140.334bp}{64.612bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{144.249bp}{64.612bp}}{\pgfpoint{149.289bp}{69.922bp}}{\pgfpoint{152.439bp}{77.707bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{156.039bp}{86.077bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{130.254bp}{146.242bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{127.554bp}{152.857bp}}{\pgfpoint{125.799bp}{154.297bp}}{\pgfpoint{118.734bp}{155.332bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{118.734bp}{159.787bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{152.304bp}{159.787bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{152.304bp}{155.467bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{146.679bp}{154.747bp}}{\pgfpoint{144.519bp}{153.172bp}}{\pgfpoint{144.519bp}{150.157bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{144.519bp}{149.122bp}}{\pgfpoint{144.654bp}{148.267bp}}{\pgfpoint{145.104bp}{147.277bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}\pgfseteorule\pgfusepath{fill}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{131.101bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{142.621bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{150.541bp}}{\pgfpoint{279.401bp}{155.581bp}}{\pgfpoint{269.186bp}{155.581bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{261.131bp}{155.581bp}}{\pgfpoint{254.651bp}{152.251bp}}{\pgfpoint{254.651bp}{148.066bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{254.786bp}{144.061bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{254.786bp}{140.011bp}}{\pgfpoint{251.501bp}{136.726bp}}{\pgfpoint{247.451bp}{136.726bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{243.716bp}{136.726bp}}{\pgfpoint{240.521bp}{139.606bp}}{\pgfpoint{240.521bp}{143.026bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{240.521bp}{148.066bp}}{\pgfpoint{245.426bp}{154.141bp}}{\pgfpoint{252.221bp}{157.156bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{257.981bp}{159.586bp}}{\pgfpoint{265.721bp}{161.341bp}}{\pgfpoint{271.931bp}{161.341bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{278.546bp}{161.341bp}}{\pgfpoint{286.061bp}{159.451bp}}{\pgfpoint{291.371bp}{156.436bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{297.266bp}{153.106bp}}{\pgfpoint{299.561bp}{148.651bp}}{\pgfpoint{299.561bp}{140.011bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{299.561bp}{109.501bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{299.561bp}{103.291bp}}{\pgfpoint{299.876bp}{101.446bp}}{\pgfpoint{300.866bp}{99.421bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{302.036bp}{96.946bp}}{\pgfpoint{304.601bp}{95.371bp}}{\pgfpoint{307.661bp}{95.371bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{310.091bp}{95.371bp}}{\pgfpoint{311.666bp}{96.091bp}}{\pgfpoint{314.141bp}{98.251bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{316.841bp}{94.516bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{312.836bp}{90.646bp}}{\pgfpoint{308.066bp}{88.891bp}}{\pgfpoint{302.036bp}{88.891bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{293.531bp}{88.891bp}}{\pgfpoint{288.626bp}{92.221bp}}{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{100.006bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{276.251bp}{91.906bp}}{\pgfpoint{269.186bp}{88.891bp}}{\pgfpoint{259.556bp}{88.891bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{246.731bp}{88.891bp}}{\pgfpoint{237.371bp}{96.406bp}}{\pgfpoint{237.371bp}{106.756bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{237.371bp}{116.386bp}}{\pgfpoint{245.561bp}{123.451bp}}{\pgfpoint{261.581bp}{127.501bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{267.881bp}{129.076bp}}{\pgfpoint{268.601bp}{129.211bp}}{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{131.101bp}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{106.486bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{126.061bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{264.146bp}{124.171bp}}{\pgfpoint{252.041bp}{117.826bp}}{\pgfpoint{252.041bp}{108.196bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{252.041bp}{101.266bp}}{\pgfpoint{257.666bp}{95.821bp}}{\pgfpoint{264.596bp}{95.821bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{271.796bp}{95.821bp}}{\pgfpoint{277.826bp}{98.836bp}}{\pgfpoint{285.881bp}{106.486bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}\pgfseteorule\pgfusepath{fill}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{119.228bp}{160.172bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{119.228bp}{54.234bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{202.464bp}{54.234bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{202.464bp}{160.172bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{119.228bp}{160.172bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{237.008bp}{162.05bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{237.008bp}{88.349bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{317.072bp}{88.349bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{317.072bp}{162.05bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{237.008bp}{162.05bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}\pgfsetendarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{74.411bp}{159.216bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{74.411bp}{88.611bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}\pgfsetendarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{74.411bp}{88.611bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{74.411bp}{55.968bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{2}{-0}{0}{2}{\pgfpoint{-0.375bp}{111.572bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}height}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{2}{-0}{0}{2}{\pgfpoint{-0.175bp}{60.879bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}depth}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{2}{-0}{0}{2}{\pgfpoint{129.963bp}{0.625bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}width}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}\pgfsetendarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{119.809bp}{27.622bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{201.278bp}{27.622bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{2}{-0}{0}{2}{\pgfpoint{247.878bp}{-0.25bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}width}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}\pgfsetendarrow{{\pgfarrowsingle}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{239.7bp}{26.747bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{314.991bp}{26.747bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\end{pgfpicture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/maths.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/maths.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a630825f36c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/maths.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/miktex1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/miktex1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..152e864bbc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/miktex1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..49b19eb2ae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..429bddf758e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/newdoc-2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e9595050e41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..836bb82b619
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/notepad2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rectangle.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rectangle.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ac58edb74f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rectangle.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/reflbox.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/reflbox.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3ed90dea801
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/reflbox.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/resizbox.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/resizbox.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7825129ae93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/resizbox.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rotbox.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rotbox.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90355ea3b2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/rotbox.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/scalbox.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/scalbox.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bddd9dae82b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/scalbox.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/shapes.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/shapes.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..423637db0a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/shapes.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/tds.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/tds.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a98aad68770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/tds.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+\begin{pgfpicture}{0bp}{0bp}{129.708bp}{92.568bp}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{-0.422bp}{36.243bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{29.156bp}{3.852bp}}{%
+\pgftext[right,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}texmf}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{56.271bp}{70.841bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{3.789bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}bibtex}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{55.599bp}{28.116bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{3.789bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}doc}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{93.644bp}{28.116bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{3.789bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}latex}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{93.644bp}{-0.125bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{3.789bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}latex}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{55.724bp}{-0.125bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{3.188bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,center]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}tex}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{114.068bp}{84.615bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}bib}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1}{-0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{114.068bp}{56.454bp}}
+\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0bp}{0bp}}{%
+\pgftext[left,base]{\rmfamily \mdseries \upshape \normalsize
+\color[rgb]{0,0,0}bst}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{31.269bp}{39.001bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{38.355bp}{39.001bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{52.528bp}{3.568bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{38.355bp}{3.568bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{38.355bp}{74.435bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{52.528bp}{74.435bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{38.355bp}{31.915bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{52.528bp}{31.915bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{109.221bp}{88.608bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{95.048bp}{88.608bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{95.048bp}{60.261bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{109.221bp}{60.261bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{87.962bp}{74.435bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{95.048bp}{74.435bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{73.788bp}{31.915bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{87.962bp}{31.915bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfsetstartarrow{{}}\pgfsetendarrow{{}}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{73.788bp}{3.568bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{87.962bp}{3.568bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\end{pgfpicture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal-texdoc.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal-texdoc.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..293e0761ff4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal-texdoc.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..198bbeae706
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b4bb682f84b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal10.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal10.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2da44b17a4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal10.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal11.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal11.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..75335d1a96f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal11.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..519b4e51583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b09a37fbcc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..00f3f485336
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal5.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal5.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7fc4194b015
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal5.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal6.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal6.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a9d807a94d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal6.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal7.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal7.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f11f93f6675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal7.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal8.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal8.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1729cb8652
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal8.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal9.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal9.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..76d3aa79b34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/terminal9.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8325d351c0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-preferences.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-preferences.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ab4ed7bc4e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-preferences.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd0f073ebba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..92435ede768
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d49e9ad540b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4b1715c60b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks-toolconfig4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80e3903fe95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9201293ff43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1d7f8107d5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bcaa5e63488
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5-annote.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5-annote.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5b2cb4155e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5-annote.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+\begin{pgfpicture}{0bp}{0bp}{397.030728bp}{428.611259bp}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{0.48}{-0.0}{0.0}{0.48}{\pgfpoint{95.590728bp}{428.611259bp}}
+\pgflowlevelsynccm\pgfputat{\pgfpoint{0pt}{0pt}}{\pgftext[top,left]{\includegraphics[width=628.0bp,height=828.0bp]{pictures/texworks5}}}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{67.836299bp}{370.226417bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{106.339252bp}{394.599448bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+% marker type 7
+{\begin{pgfscope}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}\pgfpathqmoveto{108.029128bp}{395.669174bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{103.409057bp}{388.010521bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{103.804427bp}{392.994865bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{99.130172bp}{394.770042bp}
+\pgfclosepath
+\pgfusepathqfill
+\end{pgfscope}}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{62.18613bp}{365.372901bp}}
+\pgftext[center,top]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\fontsize{12pt}{12pt}\selectfont
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}Abort}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{54.842204bp}{151.926712bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{97.087775bp}{113.423759bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+% marker type 7
+{\begin{pgfscope}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}\pgfpathqmoveto{98.565948bp}{112.07653bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{89.958816bp}{114.509056bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{94.870513bp}{115.444603bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{95.347686bp}{120.421776bp}
+\pgfclosepath
+\pgfusepathqfill
+\end{pgfscope}}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{46.326591bp}{158.184094bp}}
+\pgftext[center,base]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\fontsize{12pt}{12pt}\selectfont
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}Error Message}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{293.174889bp}{106.325822bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{293.174889bp}{100.124864bp}}{\pgfpoint{244.838536bp}{98.092072bp}}{\pgfpoint{186.136006bp}{98.092072bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{127.43346bp}{98.092072bp}}{\pgfpoint{80.59417bp}{100.124864bp}}{\pgfpoint{80.59417bp}{106.325822bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{80.59417bp}{112.526811bp}}{\pgfpoint{128.181984bp}{114.559572bp}}{\pgfpoint{186.884529bp}{114.559572bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{245.587059bp}{114.559572bp}}{\pgfpoint{293.174889bp}{112.526811bp}}{\pgfpoint{293.174889bp}{106.325822bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{1.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{48.105492bp}{60.60683bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{92.596634bp}{82.734291bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+% marker type 7
+{\begin{pgfscope}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}\pgfpathqmoveto{94.387389bp}{83.624901bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{89.005614bp}{76.480919bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{89.910506bp}{81.398369bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{85.44313bp}{83.643943bp}
+\pgfclosepath
+\pgfusepathqfill
+\end{pgfscope}}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{48.940581bp}{56.501838bp}}
+\pgftext[center,top]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\fontsize{12pt}{12pt}\selectfont
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}Line Number}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{116.523304bp}{91.355363bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{116.523304bp}{86.394578bp}}{\pgfpoint{110.491046bp}{82.373063bp}}{\pgfpoint{103.049884bp}{82.373063bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{95.608707bp}{82.373063bp}}{\pgfpoint{89.57645bp}{86.394578bp}}{\pgfpoint{89.57645bp}{91.355363bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{89.57645bp}{96.316118bp}}{\pgfpoint{95.608707bp}{100.337633bp}}{\pgfpoint{103.049884bp}{100.337633bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{110.491046bp}{100.337633bp}}{\pgfpoint{116.523304bp}{96.316118bp}}{\pgfpoint{116.523304bp}{91.355363bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{1.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetrectcap 
+\pgfsetmiterjoin \pgfsetmiterlimit{10.0}
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{148.735905bp}{13.870117bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{106.490334bp}{52.37307bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+% marker type 7
+{\begin{pgfscope}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}\pgfpathqmoveto{105.012161bp}{53.720298bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{113.619292bp}{51.287773bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{108.707595bp}{50.352226bp}
+\pgfpathqlineto{108.230422bp}{45.375053bp}
+\pgfclosepath
+\pgfusepathqfill
+\end{pgfscope}}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{213.832152bp}{11.309725bp}}
+\pgftext[right,top]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\fontsize{12pt}{12pt}\selectfont
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}Input Line}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\end{pgfpicture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..78ddb664bea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks5.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks6.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks6.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e9557706b35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks6.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks7.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks7.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..840c2759f90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks7.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks8.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks8.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..78f4689d701
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks8.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks9.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks9.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a816e4ecad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/texworks9.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/yap1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/yap1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..821a3c9f972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/pictures/yap1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/argument.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/argument.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16690f2c547
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/argument.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+Some \glspl{command} take one or more \glspl*{argument}. This
+provides a way to give \LaTeX\ additional information so that it is
+able to carry out the command. There are two types of arguments:
+\glslink{mandatory}{mandatory} and \glslink{optional}{optional}.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/auxiliary.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/auxiliary.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2f8b6335781
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/auxiliary.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+When \LaTeX\ creates your \gls{output}, it not only creates a PDF
+file but also creates other associated files. The most common of these are
+the log file\indexLOG, which has the extension \texttt{.log}, and
+the \gls*{auxiliary}, which has the extension \texttt{.aux}.
+
+The log file contains a transcript of the most recent \LaTeX\ run.
+It lists all the files that have been loaded, including the \glsterm{cls} 
+and any \htmlref{packages}{sec:packages} that your document has used.
+There should also be the class or package version number and date,
+although this is dependent on the class or package author. If you
+ever want \htmlref{to ask for help}{ch:help}, you need to say what
+version you are using.
+
+For example, this book uses the \icls{scrbook}
+class, so the log file includes the lines:
+\begin{flushleft}\ttfamily
+\noindent
+(\slash usr\slash local\slash texlive\slash 2010\slash texmf-dist\slash tex\slash latex\slash koma-script\slash scrbook.cls\par
+\noindent
+Document Class:\ scrbook 2010\slash 06\slash 17 v3.06 KOMA-Script document class (book)\par
+\end{flushleft}
+(This is actually now out-of-date as the latest version at the time
+of writing this is version~3.11a dated 2012/07/05.)
+
+Error messages, warnings and general information messages are also
+written to the log file as well as the document statistics. You can
+delete this log file if you like. It will be created again the next
+time you run \LaTeX.
+
+The auxiliary file contains all the information needed for
+cross-referencing (covered in \sectionref{sec:crossref}). This is
+needed to ensure all your cross-references are up-to-date. You can
+delete this file, but you will need at least two \LaTeX\ runs to
+ensure your cross-references are correct the next time you create
+your \gls{output}.
+
+\htmlref{TeXWorks}{sec:texworks} also creates a file with the extension
+\texttt{.synctex.gz}\indexSYNCTEX. This file allows you to jump to
+and from the \gls{source} and the appropriate part of the
+\gls{output}. If you delete this file, you will have to run \LaTeX\
+again before you can use this function.
+
+Other files that may be created include the table of contents file
+(\texttt{.toc})\indexTOC, the list of figures file
+(\texttt{.lof})\indexLOF\ and the list of tables file (\texttt{.lot})\indexLOT.
+Some \glsunset{cls}\glspl{cls}\glsreset{cls} or \htmlref{packages}{sec:packages} create 
+additional files. If your operating system
+hides file extensions, you might want to switch off this behaviour,
+if possible, to make it easier to distinguish between all the
+various files.
+
+TeXWorks has a menu item \menu{File}\menuto\menu{Remove AUX Files}
+that will remove the auxiliary files.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/cls.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/cls.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..53d0bae7187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/cls.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+The \gls*{cls} (\texttt{.cls}) defines the page layout, heading
+styles and various \glspl{command} and \glspl{environment} needed for a
+particular type of document.  The class file is specified using the
+command
+\begin{definition}
+\glsentrytext{documentclass}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{class-name}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{class-name} is the name of the
+file without the \texttt{.cls} extension.  All \LaTeX\ documents
+must start with this command. This book uses the
+\icls{scrbook} class.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/command.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/command.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14533118720
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/command.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+A \gls*{command} is used to tell \LaTeX\ to do a particular thing
+at that point in the document. These are the basic forms a command
+can take:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \label{itm:controlword}\textbf{A Control Word.}\index{command!control word|hyperpage}
+
+This is a backslash \gls{backslashchar} followed by letters (A,\ldots,Z,a,\ldots,z). \faq{Commands gobble following space}{xspace}There can be no
+non-alphabetical characters in the command, apart from the initial
+backslash, and the name is always \textbf{case-sensitive} so, for example, \glsni{gamma}
+and \glsni{Gamma} have different meanings. One command
+that often trips up new users is \gls{LaTeX}, which prints the
+LaTeX logo: \makeimg{LaTeX logo}{\LaTeX}. This command has three
+captial letters and two lower case letters. If you get the case
+of any of the letters incorrect, you will get an \dq{undefined
+control sequence} error.
+
+\strut\warning There must be no space between the backslash and the
+start of the command name. Some command names are made up of two
+or more names joined together, such as \glsni{tableofcontents}.
+\emph{Make sure you don't insert any spaces in the control word.} This will
+either lead to an error or an unexpected result.
+For example, 
+\begin{alltt}\correct
+\cmdname{appendixname}
+\end{alltt}
+displays \dq{\appendixname} but 
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\cmdname{appendix name}
+\end{alltt}
+switches to the appendices and then prints the word \dq{name}.
+
+Most \LaTeX\ commands have fairly self-explanatory names. 
+(For example, \booklinebreak\glsni{chapter} starts a new chapter and 
+\glsni{rightarrow} prints an arrow pointing to the right.)
+However, in most cases, you need to use U.S. spelling
+(for example, \glsni{color} rather than \cmdname{colour}).
+
+This is the most common form of command. Any spaces immediately
+following a command of this type are ignored, so for example
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{TeX} nician
+\end{codeS}%
+  will produce
+\begin{resultS}[TeXnician (where the TeX logo is written with a dropped E)]
+\TeX nician
+\end{resultS}%
+  whereas
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{TeX}\marg{} nician
+\end{codeS}%
+  will produce
+\begin{resultS}[TeX nician (where the TeX logo is written with a dropped E)]
+\TeX{} nician
+\end{resultS}%
+\bookpagebreak
+  But the following will cause an \dq{undefined control sequence}
+  error:
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\cmdname{TeXnician}
+\end{alltt}
+
+There is one command that you must use in every document you create,
+and that is the \glsi{documentclass} command.  This command
+must be placed at the very start of your document, and indicates what
+type of document you are creating.  This command is described in more detail
+\latex{in }\chapterref[later]{ch:simpledoc}.
+
+\item \label{itm:starredcommand}\textbf{A Starred Command}\index{command!starred|hyperpage}
+
+Some commands have variants that are indicated by an asterisk at the
+end of the name. For example, \verb|\chapter| makes a numbered
+chapter whereas \verb|\chapter*| is makes an unnumbered chapter.
+A \keyword{starred command} is the version of the command with the
+asterisk. (On a UK keyboard the asterisk character is usually
+located on the same key as the digit~\texttt{8}.)
+
+This may seem like a different form to a control word, described
+above. After all, I've just said that a control word can only
+contain alphabetical characters. However a starred command is actually a control
+word (such as \glsi{chapter}) followed by an asterisk. The
+control word checks to see if the next character is
+an asterisk. If it is, it performs one action, otherwise it performs
+another action.
+
+This type should therefore just come under the previous category,
+but as you will often hear of \dq{starred commands} it seemed better
+to have a separate category. 
+
+\item \label{itm:controlsymbol}\textbf{A Control Symbol.}\index{command!control
+symbol|hyperpage}
+
+This is a backslash followed by a single non-alphabetical character.
+For example \glsi{percent} will print a percent symbol.
+Spaces are
+not ignored after this type of command, for example
+\begin{codeS}
+17.5\glsi{percent} VAT
+\end{codeS}%
+will produce
+\begin{resultS}[vat.html]
+17.5\% VAT
+\end{resultS}
+
+It's also possible to have starred forms of control symbols. For
+example \glsi{newline.dbbackslashchar} forces a line break. If it's
+not followed by an asterisk a page break is allowed at that line
+break, but if it is followed by an asterisk \verb|\\*| no page break is allowed
+at that line break. (If a page break is needed, it will be made at
+the end of the previous line instead.)
+
+\item \label{itm:charactersequence}\textbf{Character Sequence.}\index{command!character
+sequence|hyperpage}
+
+Some special sequences of characters combine to form an instruction. For example \texttt{ffi}
+is the command to produce the \makeimg{ffi}{ffi} ligature, and the sequence
+of symbols \iexclamdowncmd\ is the command to produce the upside
+down exclamation mark !`
+
+\item \textbf{An Internal Command.}\index{command!internal|hyperpage}
+
+This is like the first type, a control word, but the
+\texttt{@}\index{"@ in a command name@\texttt{"@} (in a command name)|hyperpage}
+character appears in the command name (for example
+\cmdname{c@section}) \emph{however} internal commands should only be
+used in \htmlref{class files}{sec:cls} or
+\htmlref{packages}{sec:packages}. The @ symbol takes on a special
+meaning when a file is included using \glsi{documentclass} (a
+class file) or \glsi{usepackage} (a package).
+
+For example, in a class file or package \cmdname{c@section} is an
+internal representation of the section
+\htmlref{counter}{ch:counters}, whereas in a \texttt{.tex} file
+\cmdname{c@section} is interpreted as the command \cmdname{c} (the
+cedilla \htmlref{accent command}{obj:accents}) that takes the
+character @ as its argument, followed by \texttt{section}, which
+produces the rather odd looking 
+\makeimg{@ with a cedilla section}{\c{@}section}\faq{\textbackslash @ and @ in macro
+names}{atsigns}.
+
+Don't be tempted to use internal commands until you have first
+grasped the basics. You have been warned!
+
+\end{enumerate}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/declaration.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/declaration.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..beea9b3a2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/declaration.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+The term \gls*{declaration} is used to refer to a \gls{command} that
+affects the document from that point onwards. The declaration itself
+does not produce any text and, in most cases, its effect can be
+localised by placing the declaration within a \gls{group}. For
+example, \glsi{bfseries} is a declaration that switches the
+current font weight to bold, so the following code
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Here is some normal text.
+\glsni{bfseries} Here is some bold text.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+will appear in the typeset document looking like:
+\begin{resultS}[declaration.html]
+Here is some normal text. \bfseries Here is some bold text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+Some declarations don't immediately have a visible effect. For
+example, the declarations
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{raggedright}
+\gls{raggedleft}
+\gls{centering}
+\end{definition}
+only set the paragraph justification to ragged-right,
+ragged-left or centred, respectively, if the
+declaration is still in effect at the end of the paragraph.
+That is, if it is still in effect at the next \glsni{par} or blank line.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+This is an example paragraph illustrating the paragraph justification declarations. The default justification is fully justified.
+\glsni{raggedright} The paragraph justification can be switched to
+ragged-right or \glsni{raggedleft} ragged-left.
+\glsni{par}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[raggedleft.html]
+This is an example paragraph illustrating the paragraph justification declarations. The default justification is fully justified.
+\raggedright The paragraph justification can be switched to
+ragged-right or \raggedleft ragged-left.
+\par
+\end{result}
+Above, the justification at the paragraph break is ragged-left, so
+that's the justification used for the entire paragraph.
+Compare with:
+\begin{code}
+\marg{This is an example paragraph illustrating the paragraph justification declarations. The default justification is fully
+justified.
+\glsni{raggedright} The paragraph justification can be switched to
+ragged-right or \glsni{raggedleft} ragged-left.}
+\glsni{par}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}[fullyjustified.html]
+\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}% For the benefit of LaTeX2HTML
+{This is an example paragraph illustrating the paragraph justification declarations. The default justification is fully justified.
+\raggedright The paragraph justification can be switched to
+ragged-right or \raggedleft ragged-left.}\relax
+\par
+\end{result}
+Above, the justification at the paragraph break is fully-justified,
+since both the declarations \glsni{raggedright} and
+\glsni{raggedleft} are cancelled when their local scope (signified
+by the curly braces) ends.
+This type of mistake most often occurs when people try to centre
+text doing something like:
+\begin{alltt}
+\marg{\glsni{centering} Some text that is supposed to
+be centred.
+}
+\wrong
+Next paragraph.
+\end{alltt}
+The paragraph break (blank line) must go before the closing brace.
+\begin{alltt}
+\marg{\glsni{centering} Some text that is supposed to
+be centred.
+\correct
+}
+Next paragraph.
+\end{alltt}
+
+\warning While we're on the subject of centred text, don't be
+tempted to use \cmdname{centerline}. It's obsolete~\cite{l2tabu}.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/dvi.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/dvi.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34cfb3a3d43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/dvi.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+\glsterm{tex} (and subsequently \LaTeX) originally created \glspl*{dvi} 
+instead of PDF files.\footnote{There was no PDF
+back then.} However, although there are free DVI viewers, not many
+people have them installed, so it's really only \TeX\ users who
+can read them. Also, you can't embed image files in a DVI file or
+have fancy effects, such as rotation. Instead, people can use
+\TeX\slash \LaTeX\ to create
+a DVI file and then use an application to convert the DVI file to
+PostScript.
+
+These days PDF is the preferred platform-independent format, and
+with the advent of PDF\TeX, modern \TeX\slash \LaTeX\ users can
+directly create PDF documents rather than going through the DVI
+route. Some people still prefer to create DVI files as an
+intermediate step, particularly if they want to embed PostScript
+instructions (as is done by the \isty{pstricks} package). For
+simplicity, this book assumes that you have a modern \TeX\
+distribution and are using PDF\LaTeX\ rather than \LaTeX\TO DVI.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/environment.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/environment.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d4b8f0aa3a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/environment.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+An \gls*{environment} is a block of code contained within the
+\glspl{command}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{begin}\marg{\meta{env-name}}
+\end{definition}%
+and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{end}\marg{\meta{env-name}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{env-name} is the
+name of the environment.  The block of code is then formatted in a
+method specific to that environment.  For example, the
+\gls{env-bfseries}\footnote{Note there is no backslash in
+the
+environment name.}\ environment will typeset the contents of the
+environment in a bold font. The following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{bfseries}Here is some bold text.\glsni{end}\marg{bfseries}
+\end{codeS}%
+will appear in the typeset document looking like:
+\begin{resultS}[Here is some bold text. (The entire sentence is in a
+bold font.)]
+\begin{bfseries}Here is some bold text.\end{bfseries}
+\end{resultS}
+
+Some environments also supply \glspl{command} that may only be used
+within that environment. 
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+The \glsni{env-itemize} environment provides a command called
+\glsni{item} so that you can specify individual items within
+an unordered list:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Shopping List:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{itemize}
+  \glsni{item} Cabbages
+  \glsni{item} Bananas
+  \glsni{item} Apples
+\glsni{end}\marg{itemize}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+The above will produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[shoppinglist.html]
+Shopping List:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Cabbages
+\item Bananas
+\item Apples
+\end{itemize}
+\end{result}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/fragile.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/fragile.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..115f9561576
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/fragile.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Certain types of \glspl{command}, called \glspl*{fragile}, can
+seriously mess things up when they are used in what is termed a
+\emph{moving argument}. These types of
+\gls{argument}
+are generally those whose contents are copied to another part of the
+document. For example, section headings appear at the start of a
+section, but they can also appear in the table of contents. The
+\glsi{footnote} command is a fragile command, so
+\begin{alltt}\wrong
+\glsni{section}\marg{A heading\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}}
+\end{alltt}
+will cause an error\faq{An extra `\rightbracesym'??}{extrabrace}.
+
+If there is no other command to use in its place, you should
+use \gls{protect} immediately before the
+fragile command:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{section}\marg{A heading\glsni{protect}\glsni{footnote}\marg{with a footnote}}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}%
+\faq{Footnotes in LaTeX section headings}{ftnsect}This, however, is
+a contrived example, because it isn't a good idea to have a footnote
+in a
+section heading, as it will also end up in the table of contents,
+and possibly in page headings.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/group.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/group.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2604ce6db39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/group.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+ A segment of code may be \glsd[hyper=false]{group} by placing it
+ within \gls{leftbracechar} and \gls{rightbracechar} (curly braces).
+ Most \glspl{command} that occur within a group will be
+ local to that group.  For example, \glsi{bfseries} changes
+ the font weight to bold, so the following segment of code:
+\begin{code}
+Here is some text. \marg{This text \glsi{bfseries} is in a 
+group.} Here is some more text.
+\end{code}%
+will appear in the typeset document looking like:
+\begin{resultS}[grouping.html]
+Here is some text. {This text \bfseries is in a group.}
+Here is some more text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+As can be seen, the font change only stays in effect until it
+reaches the end of the group (signified by the closing curly brace
+\glsni{rightbracechar}.) For a command to be in the same
+\keywordfmt{scope} as another command, both commands must be within the same group.
+For example, in the following, \glsi{bfseries} and
+\glsi{itshape} are in the same scope:
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsi{bfseries} Some bold \glsi{itshape}
+and italic text}
+\end{codeS}
+But below, they are in different scopes:
+\begin{codeS}
+\marg{\glsni{bfseries} Some bold text}
+\marg{\glsni{itshape} and some italic text}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\Glsplural{environment} form an implicit scope.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/hyphenation.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/hyphenation.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1bf2a2649e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/hyphenation.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Words sometimes require \gls*{hyphenation} to help justify paragraphs
+and prevent overly large areas of white space or protrusions into
+the right margin. Some word processors by default don't hyphenate
+words in fully-justified paragraphs, which has led some people to
+believe that hyphenation is bad. Just because word processors do
+something a certain way, doesn't mean that it's the correct way.
+\TeX\ has an excellent hyphenation algorithm, but the default
+hyphenation pattern is designed for English. If you are writing in
+another language, use the \isty{babel} package to switch the
+hyphenation pattern (see \sectionref{sec:babel}).
+
+Despite using an excellent algorithm, \TeX\ occasionally gets the
+hyphenation wrong, particularly where the hyphenation is context
+sensitive. There are two ways of setting the hyphenation for a given
+word.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item For all occurrences of the word, use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{cshyphenation}\marg{\meta{hyphenated word}}
+\end{definition}
+inserting a hyphen \Indextt{-} at all possible hyphenation
+points. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{cshyphenation}\marg{gal-axy}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item For a particular instance of a word, use \gls{hyphen} at the
+hyphenation point within the word. For example:
+\begin{code}
+There once was a little alien called Uiop who lived in the faraway gal\glsni{hyphen}axy of
+Zxcv.
+\end{code} 
+\end{enumerate}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/intersentencespacing.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/intersentencespacing.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a91f4f9a96e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/intersentencespacing.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+\Gls*{intersentencespacing} refers to the default type of space
+to be inserted between adjacent sentences within a paragraph. There is
+disagreement over what size this space should be. French spacing
+uses the same space as used between words. English spacing uses an
+\Index{en-space} (half an \htmlref{em}{tab:units}\doifbook
+ {\csname footnote\endcsname{see \sectionref{sec:length}}}-space). With proportional
+fonts\latex{ (such as this one)}, the en-space is slightly larger than a
+single space. The difference is shown here:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+X X
+
+X\gls{enspace} X
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}
+X X
+\glspar
+X\enspace X
+\end{result}
+(Note that with fully-justified paragraphs, in both cases the spaces
+may be stretched to ensure the sides of the paragraph are flushed.)
+
+\TeX\ (and \LaTeX) defaults to English spacing, but you can switch
+to French spacing using the declaration:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{frenchspacing}
+\end{definition}
+and switch back again using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{nonfrenchspacing}
+\end{definition}
+
+There was no en-space on a typewriter, so typists started using two
+spaces in an attempt to emulate that slightly larger than one space
+look. This habit has spread to word-processor users as well, and now
+many people incorrectly assume English spacing means adding two
+spaces after a full stop, which is too wide and looks ugly, but this
+error shouldn't be used as a criticism against English spacing.
+
+There has been a gradual trend towards French spacing over the last
+century, and some publishers insist on it. I~think this may in part
+be due to a backlash against the ugliness of two spaces in
+typewritten and word-processed documents. In fact the Oxford Style
+Manual~\cite{oxford} simply states, \dq{In text, only use a single
+space after all sentence punctuation.}
+
+Personally, I~prefer English spacing, particularly in reference
+books. I~have many reference books on my shelf, but I~haven't read
+any of them from cover-to-cover. I~flick to a particular section and
+skim through the paragraphs until I~reach the desired bit of
+information. Sometimes I've already looked something up, so I~have a vague
+idea as to where to find the information. The extra space between
+sentences makes it easier to locate a particular sentence.
+
+This isn't so much of an issue with books designed to be read from
+beginning to end, such as a novel. However, I~have read one such
+book that used a font where the commas had tiny tails and most of
+the sentences contained multiple proper nouns, which made it very
+difficult to read as it wasn't clear where the sentences ended. Is
+that a full stop followed by a new sentence that happens to start
+with a proper noun, or is it a comma whose tiny tail is blurred by
+my short-sighted eyes followed by a clause that happens to start
+with a proper noun? A~well-written, well-presented document should
+not interrupt the reader, forcing them to continually go back to
+re-parse a sentence.
+
+However, if you are writing a document, whether prose or technical,
+with the intention of having it published you must check with the
+publisher's guidelines to see if they insist on a particular style.
+\xminisec{Notes:}
+An end of sentence punctuation mark can be one of: a full stop
+(\gls{sentence.periodchar}), exclamation mark
+(\gls{sentence.exclamchar}) or question mark (\gls{questionchar}).
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item If an end of sentence punctuation mark follows a lower case
+character, \TeX\ assumes the punctuation mark indicates the end of
+the sentence. For example, as in:
+\begin{codeS}
+Did you see that? I certainly did.
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Where this isn't the case, use \gls{spacesym} (backslash
+followed by a space).
+\begin{code}
+This can happen when a sentence contains
+a lower case abbreviation, e.g.\glsni{spacesym}like this
+one.
+\end{code}
+
+\item If an end of sentence punctuation mark follows an upper case
+character, \TeX\ assumes the sentence hasn't ended at that point.
+For example, as in:
+\begin{codeS}
+The G.P. said it was only hypochondria.
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item Where the sentence actually ends with an upper case letter,
+add \gls{at} after the letter and before the punctuation mark.
+\begin{code}
+Yesterday, I saw my G.P\glsni{at}. Tomorrow I'm going to see the
+specialist.
+\end{code}
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\xminisec{Note on Typewriter Fonts}
+
+Note that \gls{nonfrenchspacing} in a monospaced font will insert
+two spaces between sentences, emulating a typewritten document.
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{ttfamily}
+\glsni{nonfrenchspacing} x. x.
+
+\glsni{frenchspacing} x. x.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\begin{result}\ttfamily
+\nonfrenchspacing x. x.
+
+\frenchspacing x. x.
+\end{result}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/introduction.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/introduction.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b1077d07b41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/introduction.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+\label{ch:def}%
+
+As mentioned in \chapterref[the introduction]{ch:intro}, \LaTeX\ is a
+language, so you can't simply start typing and expect to see your
+document appear before your very eyes\faq{Why is TeX not a WYSIWYG system?}{notWYSIWYG}.  You need to know a few things
+before you can get started, so it's best to define a few terms first.
+Don't worry if there seems a lot to take in, there will be some
+practical examples later, which should hopefully make things a little
+clearer.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+Throughout this book, \glstext{source} is
+illustrated in a typewriter font with the word
+\inputlabelformat{Input} placed in the margin, and the corresponding
+output (how it will appear in the PDF document) is typeset with the word \outputlabelformat{Output} in the
+margin.  
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+A single line of code is displayed like this:
+\end{latexonly}
+\html{Throughout this document, \glstext{source} is
+illustrated in the form:}
+\begin{codeS}
+This is an \glsni{textbf}\marg{example}.
+\end{codeS}%
+The corresponding 
+\glslink{output}{output}\html{ (how it will appear in the PDF document)\footnote{This HTML version of the book uses bitmaps to illustrate the output, which doesn't look as good as the actual PDF version.}}\ is illustrated like this:
+\begin{resultS}[exampleoutput.html]
+This is an \textbf{example}.
+\end{resultS}%
+\begin{latexonly}%
+Segments of code that are longer than one line are bounded above and below, illustrated as follows:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Line one\glsni{par}
+Line two\glsni{par}
+Line three.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+with corresponding output:
+\begin{result}
+Line one\par
+Line two\par
+Line three.
+\end{result}%
+\end{latexonly}%
+Take care not to confuse a backslash~\glsni{backslashchar}
+with a forward slash~\gls{text.slash} as they have different meanings.
+\doifnotbook
+{%
+  (Commands typeset in blue, such as \glsni{par}, indicate a hyperlink to
+  the command definition in the
+\latexhtml{\htmlref{summary}{ch:glossary}}{\htmladdnormallink{summary}{summary.html}}.)
+}
+
+\Glstext{command} definitions are shown in a typewriter font in the form:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{class file}}
+\end{definition}%
+In this case the command being defined is called
+\cmdname{documentclass} and text typed \meta{like this} (such as
+\meta{options} and \meta{class file}) indicates the type of thing you
+need to substitute. (Don't type the angle brackets!) For example, if you want the \icls{scrartcl}
+\glstext{cls} you would substitute \meta{class file} with
+\texttt{scrartcl} and if you want the \clsopt{letterpaper} option you
+would substitute \meta{options} with \texttt{letterpaper}, like this:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsnl{documentclass}\oarg*{letterpaper}\marg*{scrartcl}
+\end{codeS}
+But more on that later.
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:visiblespace}%
+Sometimes it can be easy to miss a space character when you're
+reading this kind of \latexhtml{book}{document}. When it's important
+to indicate a space, the visible space symbol~\gls{visiblespace} is used. For
+example:
+\begin{codeS}
+A\glsni{visiblespace}sentence\glsni{visiblespace}consisting\glsni{visiblespace}of\glsni{visiblespace}six\glsni{visiblespace}words.
+\end{codeS}
+When you type up the code, replace any occurrence of
+\glsni{visiblespace} with a space.
+
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:comment}
+One other thing to mention is the comment character~\gls{percentchar}
+(the percent symbol). Anything from the percent symbol up to, and
+including, the end of line character is ignored by \LaTeX. Thus
+\begin{code}
+A simple \glsni{percentchar} next comes a command to make some bold text\newline
+\glsni{textbf}\marg{example} 
+\end{code}%
+will produce the output
+\begin{resultS}[commentexample.html]
+A simple % next comes a command to make some bold text
+\textbf{example} 
+\end{resultS}%
+\refstepcounter{object}\label{obj:suppresseol}%
+The percent symbol is often used to suppress unwanted space 
+resulting from line breaks\footnote{\LaTeX\ treats the end-of-line
+character as a space.}\ in the \glstext{source}.
+For example, the following code
+\begin{code}
+Foo\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+Bar
+\end{code}%
+will produce the output:
+\begin{resultS}[FooBar (single word)]
+Foo%
+Bar
+\end{resultS}%
+as opposed to
+\begin{code}
+Foo\newline
+Bar
+\end{code}%
+which will produce the output:
+\begin{resultS}[Foo Bar (two words)]
+Foo\ Bar\relax% LaTeX2HTML is getting confused!
+\end{resultS}%
+On the other hand, spaces at the start of a line of input are
+ignored, so
+\begin{code}
+Foo\glsni{percentchar}\newline
+\strut~~Bar
+\end{code}
+still produces:
+\begin{resultS}[FooBar]
+Foo%
+  Bar
+\end{resultS}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/length.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/length.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38471d48825
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/length.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+A \gls{length} register stores dimensions (such as 1in, 5cm,
+8.25mm). Like \glslink{command}{control words}, length registers
+start with a backslash and only contain alphabetical characters in
+their name. These registers are used to determine page layouts etc.
+For example, the paragraph indentation is given by the length
+register \gls{parindent}. Acceptable units of measurement are listed
+in \tableref{tab:units}. The two relative units \dq{em} and \dq{ex} are 
+dependent on the current font. (The em-value used to be the
+width of an \dq{M} and the ex-value was the height of the letter
+\dq{x}, but these days the values are more
+arbitrary~\protect\cite{texbook}.) Use \texttt{em} for widths and
+\texttt{ex} for heights if you want to use relative values.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Units of Measurement}
+\label{tab:units}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\iunit{pt}{\protect\TeX\ point} & \TeX\ point: 72.27pt = 1in\\
+\iunit{in}{inch} & inch: 1in = 25.4mm\\
+\iunit{mm}{millimetre} & millimetre: 1mm=2.845pt\\
+\iunit{cm}{centimetre} & centimetre: 1cm = 10mm\\
+\iunit{ex}{relative unit} & the \dq{x-height} of the current font\\
+\iunit{em}{relative unit} & the width of a \dq{quad} in the current font\\
+\iunit{sp}{scaled point} & scaled point: 1sp = 65536pt\\
+\iunit{bp}{big point} & big point (or \Index{PostScript} point): 72bp = 1in\\
+\iunit{dd}{did\^ot point} & did\^ot point: 1dd=0.376mm\\
+\iunit{pc}{pica} & pica: 1pc=12pt\\
+\iunit{cc}{cicero} & cicero: 1cc=12dd\\
+\iunit{mu}{math unit} & math unit: 18mu = 1em
+\end{tabular}
+\par
+\end{table}
+
+To change a length you can use the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{setlength}\marg{\meta{cmd}}\marg{\meta{length}}
+\end{definition}%
+where \meta{cmd} is the register (for example, \glsni{parindent})
+and \meta{length} is the new length. Alternatively, you can add a
+value to a length using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{addtolength}\marg{\meta{cmd}}\marg{\meta{length increment}}
+\end{definition}
+The value of a length register can be displayed in your document using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{the}\meta{register}
+\end{definition}
+
+A \keyword{rubber length} is a length that has a certain amount of
+elasticity. This enables you to specify your desired length but
+allows \LaTeX\ to stretch or contract the space to get the body of
+text as flushed with the margins as possible.
+
+\faq{Zero paragraph indent}{parskip}For example, the paragraph gap \gls{parskip} is usually set to
+\texttt{0pt plus 1pt}.  This means that the preferred gap is
+0pt but \LaTeX\ can stretch it up to 1pt to help prevent the
+page from having a ragged bottom. For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{setlength}\marg{\glsni{parindent}}\marg{0pt}
+\glsni{setlength}\marg{\glsni{parskip}}\marg{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+
+This is the first paragraph.
+
+This is the second paragraph.
+The paragraph indentation is \glsni{the}\glsni{parindent}.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+This now produces:
+\begin{result}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+
+This is the first paragraph.
+
+This is the second paragraph.
+The paragraph indentation is \the\parindent.
+\end{result}%
+In this example, the preferred paragraph gap is 10pt but
+it will allow for a deviation of up to plus or minus 1pt.
+
+\warning Note that it's generally best not to change \glsni{parskip}
+explicitly as it can cause unexpected complications. If you use one
+of the \koma\ classes, such as \icls{scrreprt}, you can use the
+\scrclsopt{parskip} class option that can take the following values:
+\texttt{parskip=full} (a full line height) \texttt{parskip=half}
+(half a line height).\footnote{There are also variants that have
+\texttt{+}, \texttt{-} or \texttt{*} as a suffix. See the 
+\koma\ documentation for further details.}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{parskip=full}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+
+If you want to change any of the page layout lengths (such as
+\gls{textwidth}), the easiest way to do it is to use the
+\isty{geometry} \htmlref{package}{sec:packages}.  This package should have been installed
+when you installed your \TeX\ distribution. For example: suppose you want the total text
+area to be 6.5in wide and 8.75in high with a left margin of 0.4in, then you would do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{body=\marg{6.5in,8.75in}\comma left=0.4in}\marg{geometry}
+\end{codeS}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/mandatory.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/mandatory.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0630fadd030
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/mandatory.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+\Glspl*{mandatory} are arguments that \emph{have} to be
+specified.
+\glspar
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item If you want a footnote, you need to use the
+\glsi{footnote} command, which has a mandatory argument that
+specifies the contents of the footnote. Like this:
+\begin{codeS}
+Here is a footnote.\glsni{footnote}\marg{This is the
+footnote
+text.}
+\end{codeS}
+\begin{latexonly}
+\begin{resultS}
+Here is a footnote.\footnotemark
+\end{resultS}
+\footnotetext{This is the footnote text.}%
+\doifnotbook{(By default you
+won't get a hyperlink. This book uses the \sty{hyperref} package,
+which generates the hyperlinks.)}
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\item If you want to start a new chapter, you need to use the
+\glsi{chapter} command, but you also need to tell \LaTeX\
+the
+title of this new chapter.  So the \glsi{chapter} command
+takes
+one mandatory argument that specifies the title.
+
+For example, the following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Some Definitions}
+\end{codeS}%
+was used to generate the heading for
+\latexhtml{the current chapter (at the top of
+page~\pageref{ch:def})}{\chapterref[the definitions chapter]{ch:def}
+of this document}.
+\item The command \glsi{textbf} typesets its argument in a
+bold
+font (as opposed to the
+\glsterm{declaration}
+\glsi{bfseries} which switches to a bold font.)
+
+For example, the following code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textbf}\marg{Some bold text.}
+\end{codeS}%
+produces the output
+\begin{resultS}[Some bold text. (All the text is in bold.)]
+\textbf{Some bold text.}
+\end{resultS}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\xminisec{Notes:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item\label{itm:argnogrp} \LaTeX\ takes the first non-space object
+following the command name as the argument, which is why in the
+above
+examples the arguments have to be \glsd{group}.
+
+Suppose the last example above didn't have a group, so instead the
+code was:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{textbf} Some bold text.
+\end{codeS}%
+then only the \dq{S} would be the argument because it's the first
+object
+following the command, in which case the output would look like:
+\begin{resultS}[Some bold text. (Only the letter S is bold.)]
+\textbf Some bold text.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\item If you want the argument to be blank, use empty braces:
+\gls{leftbracechar}\gls{rightbracechar}.  For example, suppose you
+want to have a
+chapter without a title\protect\footnote{The numbers for chapters, sections
+etc are automatically inserted by \LaTeX, so this example would
+produce a numbered chapter without a title.}\ you would need to do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsnl{chapter}\marg{}
+\end{codeS}
+\end{enumerate}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/optional.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/optional.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2cbb56233d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/optional.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+Some \glspl{command} may have one or more \glspl*{optional}. Unlike
+\glspl{mandatory}, optional arguments must always be enclosed in
+square brackets \gls{opt.opensq}~\gls{opt.closesq}.
+\xminisec{Example:}
+The command \gls{newline.dbbackslashchar} ends a line.
+So the following segment of code:
+\begin{codeS}
+Line one\glsni{newline.dbbackslashchar}Line two.
+\end{codeS}%
+will produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[Line one <newline> Line two]\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}%
+Line one\\Line two.
+\end{result}%
+However the \glsni{newline.dbbackslashchar} command also
+has an optional
+argument that allows you to specify how big the gap between the two
+lines should be. So the following segment of code:
+\begin{codeS}
+Line one\glsni{newline.dbbackslashchar}\oarg{1cm}Line two.
+\end{codeS}%
+will produce the following output:
+\begin{result}[Line one <1cm vertical gap> Line two]\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}%
+Line one\\[1cm]Line two.
+\end{result}
+Incidentally, note the
+difference between the previous example, and the following example:
+\begin{codeS}
+Line one\glsni{newline.dbbackslashchar}\marg{[1cm]} Line two.
+\end{codeS}\screenpagebreak
+\begin{result}[newlineargs.html]\setlength{\parindent}{1.5em}%
+Line one\\{[1cm]} Line two.
+\end{result}%
+\faq{Start of line goes awry}{newlineargs}In this example the \texttt{[1cm]} has been placed inside a group, so
+it is no longer considered to be an optional argument, and since the
+command \glsni{newline.dbbackslashchar} does not take a
+mandatory argument,
+the \texttt{[1cm]} is simply interpreted as ordinary text.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+The command \glsi{framebox} (which will be covered later in
+\sectionref{sec:fbox}) takes a
+\gls{mandatory} and two optional arguments.
+\glsni{framebox} puts a frame around the contents of its
+mandatory argument:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{framebox}\marg{Some Text}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of the words 'Some Text' inside a rectangular
+box where there is a narrow gap between the edge of the text and the
+frame]
+\framebox{Some Text}
+\end{resultS}
+The first optional argument can be used to make the box a specified
+width:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{framebox}\oarg{4cm}\marg{Some Text}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of the words 'Some Text' centred inside a
+rectangular box of width 4cm (plus a narrow gap)]
+\framebox[4cm]{Some Text}
+\end{resultS}
+The second optional argument specifies the
+justification of the text (\underline{l}eft, \underline{r}ight or
+\underline{c}entred) within the box:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{framebox}\oarg{4cm}\oarg{r}\marg{Some Text}
+\end{codeS}%
+\begin{resultS}[Image of the words 'Some Text' right justified inside a
+rectangular box of width 4cm (plus a narrow gap)]
+\framebox[4cm][r]{Some Text}
+\end{resultS}
+\glspar
+In general, if a command has both optional and mandatory arguments,
+the optional arguments are usually specified first (although there
+are a few exceptions).
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/output.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/output.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6b7149fe72b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/output.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+  The \LaTeX\ application reads in your \glsterm{source} 
+  and creates the typeset document, the
+  \gls*{output}. This book assumes that you will be using the
+  version of \LaTeX\ that produces PDF files (PDF\LaTeX). If you are
+  using TeXWorks (see \chapterref{ch:tex2pdf}), you need to select the
+  \mbox{\dq{PDFLaTeX}} item from the drop-down list. If you are using
+  TeXnicCenter, select the \mbox{\dq{LaTeX\TO PDF}} build
+  profile. If you are
+  using WinEdt, when you want to build your document click on the
+  button marked \dq{PDFLaTeX} rather than the one marked \dq{LaTeX}.
+  If you are using a terminal or command prompt, use the command
+  \texttt{pdflatex} rather than \texttt{latex}. (TeXnicCenter, WinEdt
+  and using the terminal or command prompt approach are described in
+  the \suppmaterial[.)]{supplemental material}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/perl.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/perl.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..73837d06157
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/perl.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+\glsterm{tex}-distributions such as \itexdistro{TeX~Live} and \itexdistro{MiKTeX} also 
+include some helper applications that you may find useful. For example,
+\iappname{texdoc} (\sectionref{sec:texdoc}) helps you access
+installed documentation and \iappname{makeindex} helps generate an
+index for your document. Some of the helper applications are
+written in a scripting language called \gls*{perl}, and you must
+have the \iappname{perl} application installed to be able to use
+them. Unix-like operating systems should already have it installed.
+Windows users can choose between several Perl distributions. The
+most popular seem to be \iperldistro{Strawberry Perl}{http://strawberryperl.com/} and 
+\iperldistro[.]{Active Perl}{http://www.activestate.com/activeperl} Perl scripts that come
+with \glsterm{tex} include: \iappname{epstopdf} (converts Encapsulated
+PostScript (EPS)\indexEPS\ files to PDF), \iappname{pdfcrop} (crops
+a PDF file), \iappname{xindy} (a more flexible indexing application
+than \iappname{makeindex}), \iappname{texcount} (counts the number
+of words in a \LaTeX\ document) and \iappname{latexmk} (runs \LaTeX\
+and any associated applications, such as \iappname{bibtex}, the
+required number of times to ensure the document is fully
+up-to-date).
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/preamble.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/preamble.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..262f13a1126
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/preamble.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+The \gls*{preamble} is the part of the \gls{source} that comes
+after the \screenlinebreak\reportlinebreak\glsi{documentclass}
+\gls{command} and before
+\glsni{begin}\marg{\texttt{document}} (the start of the
+\glsi{env-document} \gls{environment}).  Only
+a few
+special commands may be placed in the preamble (such as \glsni{title}), and there are a few
+special commands that may only go in the preamble (such as \glsi{usepackage}).
+Nothing that generates text (for example, \glsi{maketitle}) may go in the preamble.
+
+\preambleillustration
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/robust.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/robust.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3f73e1a0661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/robust.tex
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+A \gls*{robust} is a \gls{command} that is not a \glsni{fragile}.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/short.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/short.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7ab189d4595
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/short.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+A \gls*{short} is a \gls{command} whose \gls{argument} may not
+contain a paragraph break (either as a blank line or using
+\glsi{par}.) Conversely, a \keywordfmt{long command} is a command whose
+\gls{argument} may contain a paragraph break.
+
+Using short commands helps to test for forgotten braces, so it is
+recommended that when you \htmlref{define a new
+command}{ch:newcom}\latex{ (see \chapterref{ch:newcom})} you should
+always make the command a short command, unless there is a chance
+that the argument may need to contain a paragraph break.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/source.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/source.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..50a3f0a6af4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/source.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+  The \gls*{source} consists of all the text and \LaTeX\
+  \glslink{command}{commands} that make up an entire document.
+  The source code is typed in using a text
+  editor\faq{TeX-friendly editors and shells}{editors}, and saved with
+  the file extension \texttt{.tex}.  The source code may be contained
+  in just one file, or it might be split across several files.%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/terminal.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/terminal.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6303062ea2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/terminal.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+Sometimes you may find that you need to use a command-line
+application. This is an application that doesn't have a graphical
+user interface. This isn't specific to \glsterm{tex}, but the \TeX\
+distribution comes with a number of them. In fact, front-ends (such
+as TeXWorks) run some of these applications for you when click on
+the typeset or build button.
+
+Most operating systems provide a \gls*{terminal} or command prompt where
+you can type the command-line application name and any associated
+information. For example, \xfigureref{fig:terminal} shows a terminal
+running under Fedora on Linux.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[Windows] To open the MSDOS Prompt, go to the Start menu, then
+\dq{All Programs}, then \dq{Accessories} and click on \dq{MSDOS
+Prompt}.
+
+\item[Mac OSX] To open the Mac Terminal, go to your
+\dq{Applications} folder, open \dq{Utilities} and double click on \dq{Terminal}.
+
+\item[Unix etc] The Terminal is usually located either in the \dq{Applications}
+menu or in the \dq{System Tools} subdirectory of the
+\dq{Applications} menu.
+\end{description}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/terminal}
+ {%
+   \caption{A Terminal}
+ }
+ {fig:terminal}
+\end{figure}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+One such command-line application you are likely to need is
+\iappname{texdoc}. This is mentioned in more detail in
+\sectionref{sec:texdoc}, but to use \iappname{texdoc} you need to
+open the terminal or command prompt as described above and type
+\texttt{texdoc} followed by a package or class name, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+texdoc scrbook
+\end{verbatim}
+(see \figureref{fig:terminal-texdoc})
+then press the Enter or Return \enter\ key.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/terminal-texdoc}
+ {%
+   \caption{Running texdoc From a Terminal}
+ }
+ {fig:terminal-texdoc}
+\end{figure}
+
+Other \glsterm{tex}-related command-line applications include
+\iappname{pdflatex}, \iappname{bibtex}, \iappname{makeindex},
+\iappname{xindy} and \iappname{kpsewhich}.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/tex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/tex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..29c6fbe47db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/novices/term-defs/tex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+\gls*{tex}\faq{What is TeX?}{whatTeX}\ is the typesetting language
+written by
+\htmladdnormallink{Donald~Knuth}{http://www-cs-faculty.stanford.edu/~knuth/}.
+He wrote a format of \TeX\ called Plain \TeX, but many people find
+Plain \TeX\faq{Should I use Plain TeX or LaTeX?}{plainvltx}\
+complicated, so Leslie~Lamport wrote a format of \TeX\ called
+\LaTeX\ to make it a bit easier to use\faq{How does LaTeX relate to
+Plain TeX?}{LaTeXandPlain}.  You can think of \LaTeX\ as a
+go-between converting your instructions into \TeX.  This
+\latexhtml{book}{document} mostly uses the term \LaTeX, even if the
+matter is more general to \TeX, to avoid complicating matters.  Some
+error messages you may see will be \LaTeX\ messages, some will be
+\TeX\ messages.  \LaTeX\ error messages tend to be a bit easier to
+understand than \TeX\ messages.  There are other formats of \TeX,
+such as ConTeXt\faq{What is ConTeXt?}{context}, but this book
+does not cover them.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimaw-thesis.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimaw-thesis.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68028c2a7b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimaw-thesis.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5418 @@
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: bibtex
+% arara: makeglossaries
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeglossaries
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeindex: { style: thesis-index.ist}
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: pdflatex
+% arara: makeindex: { style: thesis-index.ist}
+% arara: pdflatex
+\documentclass[report]{dickimawthesis}
+
+\usepackage{scrhack}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{amsfonts}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+\usepackage{listings}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{alltt}
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+\usepackage{array}
+
+\usepackage{cmap}
+
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[math]{anttor}
+\usepackage{libris}
+\renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{txtt}
+
+\showdowfalse
+\newcommand*{\bookdocdate}{\formatdate{16}{03}{2013}}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossaryname}{Summary of Commands and
+Environments}
+
+% document information
+
+\authordetails{1970}{Talbot}{Nicola L.~C.}
+\title[Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis]{Using \LaTeX\ to Write a~PhD Thesis}
+\version{1.3}
+\volume{2}
+\series{The Dickimaw \LaTeX\ Series}
+\seriesurl{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/}
+
+\date{\bookdocdate}
+\keywords{LaTeX,typesetting,thesis,tutorial}
+\affiliation
+  {Dickimaw Books}
+  {www.dickimaw-books.com}
+  {Saxlingham Nethergate}
+
+\subject{Thesis writing}
+
+% this is for LaTeX2HTML's benefit:
+%\manscreenpdf{thesis_screen.pdf}
+%\manscreenlog{thesis_screen.log}
+%\manpaperpdf{thesis_a4.pdf}
+%\manpaperlog{thesis_a4.log}
+
+% ensure that the index and glossary information is written to the appropriate files
+\makeindex
+\makeglossaries
+
+% Acronyms
+
+\newacr{ctan}{CTAN}
+ {the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}
+ {http://mirror.ctan.org/}
+
+\newacr{ukfaq}{UK FAQ}
+ {UK List of \TeX\ Frequently Asked Questions}
+ {http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}
+
+\newcommand{\koma}{KOMA-Script}
+
+\input{glsentries}
+
+% shortcuts to other documents
+
+\newcommand*{\latexbook}{the \LaTeX\ user's guide~\cite{lamport94}}
+\newcommand*{\Latexbook}{The \LaTeX\ user's guide~\cite{lamport94}}
+\newcommand*{\latexcomp}{\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}~\cite{goossens94}}
+\newcommand*{\latexguide}{\emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}~\cite{kopka95}}
+
+\newcommand*{\baseurl}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com}
+
+\newcommand*{\packageurl}{\baseurl/latex/packages}
+
+\newcommand*{\packagecls}[1]{%
+\htmladdnormallink{\cls{#1}}{\packageurl/index.html\##1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\packagesty}[1]{%
+\htmladdnormallink{\sty{#1}}{\packageurl/index.html\##1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\downloadurl}{\baseurl/latex/thesis/examples}
+
+\newcommand*{\texdoc}{\htmladdnormallink{texdoc}{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/texdoc.html}}
+
+\indexpreamble{\latexhtml{Page numbers}{Locations} in \textbf{bold}
+indicate the entry
+definition in the summary.}
+
+\newcommand{\xtableref}[1]{\objectref{Table}{#1}}
+
+% \figconts[graphics opts]{image}{caption}{label}
+\newcommand{\figconts}[4][]{%
+  \begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}\figuretop{#4}
+  \centering
+  \incPgfOrGraphics[#1]{#2}%
+  #3% caption
+  \label{#4}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fboxfigconts}[4][]{%
+  \begin{makeimage}\end{makeimage}\figuretop{#4}
+  \centering
+  \incFboxPgfOrGraphics[#1]{#2}%
+  #3% caption
+  \label{#4}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\backcovertext}{If you choose to buy a~copy of this
+book,
+Dickimaw Books asks for your support through buying the Dickimaw
+Books edition to help cover costs.}
+
+\copyrighttext{%
+  Copyright \textcopyright\ 2007  Nicola L.~C. Talbot
+
+  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+  document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+  Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+  Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
+  one Back-Cover Text: \dq{\backcovertext} A copy of the license is
+included in
+  the section entitled \htmlref{\dq{GNU Free Documentation
+  License}}{sec:fdl}.
+
+  \doifnotbook
+  {%
+     The base URL for this document is: \url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/}
+  }%
+}
+
+
+\html{\input{htmlonly}}
+
+% Need a long table for the required and optional fields (for screen format), but it's
+% confusing LaTeX2HTML.
+
+\newenvironment{FieldTabA4}
+ {\begin{table}[htbp]
+  \caption{Required and Optional Fields}\label{tab:reqopt}
+  \centering
+  \begin{tabular}{lp{0.4\textwidth}>{\raggedright}p{0.4\textwidth}}
+  \bfseries Entry Type & \bfseries Required Fields & \bfseries
+Optional Fields\tabularnewline
+ }
+ {
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{table}
+ }
+
+\newenvironment{FieldTabScr}
+ {\newpage\begin{longtable}{lp{0.4\textwidth}>{\raggedright}p{0.4\textwidth}}
+  \caption{Required and Optional
+Fields}\label{tab:reqopt}\tabularnewline
+  \bfseries Entry Type & \bfseries Required Fields & \bfseries
+Optional Fields\tabularnewline
+  \endfirsthead
+  \caption*{Required and Optional Fields Cont.}\tabularnewline
+  \bfseries Entry Type & \bfseries Required Fields & \bfseries
+Optional Fields\tabularnewline
+  \endhead
+  \endfoot
+ }
+ {\end{longtable}}
+
+\newenvironment{FieldTab}
+ {\ifscreen\begin{FieldTabScr}\else\begin{FieldTabA4}\fi}
+ {\ifscreen\end{FieldTabScr}\else\end{FieldTabA4}\fi}
+
+\newenvironment{fieldtab}{\latexhtml{\begin{FieldTab}}{\begin{FieldTabA4}}}{\latexhtml{\end{FieldTab}}{\end{FieldTabA4}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\frontmatter
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\setnode{contents}
+\tableofcontents
+\setnode{listoffigures}
+\listoffigures
+\setnode{listoftables}
+\listoftables
+\listofexamples
+
+\chapter{Abstract}
+
+This book is aimed at PhD students who want to use \LaTeX\ to typeset their PhD thesis.
+If you are unfamiliar with \LaTeX\, I~recommend
+that you first read Volume~1: \latexnovices.
+
+\begin{htmlonly}
+The examples given in this document can be download from the 
+\htmladdnormallink{examples directory}{examples/index.html}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\mainmatter
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INTRODUCTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\setnode{introduction}
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\label{ch:intro}
+
+
+Many PhD students in the sciences are encouraged to produce their
+PhD thesis in \LaTeX, particularly if their work involves a~lot of
+mathematics. In addition, these days, \LaTeX\ is no longer the sole
+province of mathematicians and computer scientists and is now
+starting to be used in the arts and social sciences (see, for
+example, some of the topics listed in the \TeX\ online
+catalogue~\cite{texcattopic}). This book is intended as a~brief
+guide on how to typeset the various components that are usually
+required for a~thesis. If you have never used \LaTeX\ before, I
+recommend that you first read Volume~1: \latexnovices, as this book
+assumes you have a~basic knowledge of \LaTeX. As with Volume~1, I'll
+be using PDF\LaTeX\ and TeXWorks. If you are creating a~DVI file or
+you are using a~different editor, you'll have to adapt the
+instructions.
+
+\warning
+If you are unfamiliar with terms such as \dq{preamble}, read
+\novices[ch:def]{definitions}. If you don't know how to find package
+documentation, read \novices{texdoc}.
+
+Throughout this document there are pointers to related topics
+in the \gls{ukfaq}.
+\latexhtml{These are displayed in the margin in
+square brackets, as illustrated on the
+\ifbookorother{\ifthispageodd{right}{left}}{right}.}{%
+These are displayed in the text like this:}%
+\faq{What is LaTeX?}{latex} You may find these resources useful in
+answering related questions that are not covered in this
+book.
+\doifbook{%
+  To find the resources, go to \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq} and
+  either look for the question title in the list, or enter a~keyword
+  in the search field.%
+}
+\latex{%
+
+On-line versions of this book, along with associated files, are available at:
+\url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/}.
+\doifnotbook
+{%
+  The links in this document are colour-coded: internal links are
+  blue, external links are magenta.
+}%
+}
+
+\latexhtml
+{%
+To refresh your memory or for those who haven't read Volume~1, 
+throughout this book source code is
+illustrated in a~typewriter font with the word
+\inputlabelformat{Input} placed in the margin, and the corresponding
+output (how it will appear in the PDF document) is typeset with the
+word \outputlabelformat{Output} in the margin.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+A single line of code is displayed like this:
+}%
+{%
+To refresh your memory or for those who haven't read 
+\htmladdnormallink{Volume~1}{\baseurl/latex/novices/}, 
+throughout this book, source code is
+illustrated in the form:}
+\begin{codeS}
+This is an \gls{textbf}\marg{example}.
+\end{codeS}%
+The corresponding
+output\html{ (how it will appear in the PDF
+document)\footnote{This HTML version of the book uses bitmaps to
+illustrate the output, which doesn't look as good as the actual PDF
+version.}}\ is illustrated like this:
+\begin{resultS}[exampleoutput.html]
+This is an \textbf{example}.
+\end{resultS}%
+\begin{latexonly}
+Segments of code that are longer than one line are bounded above and
+below, illustrated as follows:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Line one\gls{par}
+Line two\glsni{par}
+Line three.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}%
+with corresponding output:
+\begin{result}
+Line one\par
+Line two\par
+Line three.
+\end{result}%
+\end{latexonly}%
+\doifnotbook
+{%
+  (Commands typeset in blue, such as \glsni{par}, indicate a
+  hyperlink to the command definition in the
+  \latexhtml{\htmlref{summary}{ch:glossary}}{\htmladdnormallink{summary}{summary.html}}.)
+}
+
+Command definitions are shown in a~typewriter font in the
+form:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{documentclass}\gls{opt.opensq}\meta{options}\gls{opt.closesq}\gls{leftbracechar}\meta{class file}\gls{rightbracechar}
+\end{definition}%
+In this case the command being defined is called
+\cmdname{documentclass} and text typed \meta{like this} (such as
+\meta{options} and \meta{class file}) indicates the type of thing
+you
+need to substitute. (Don't type the angle brackets!) For example, if
+you want the \icls{scrbook}
+class file you would substitute \meta{class file} with
+\texttt{scrbook} and if you want the \clsopt{letterpaper} option
+you
+would substitute \meta{options} with \texttt{letterpaper}, like
+this:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsnl{documentclass}\oarg*{letterpaper}\marg*{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+When it's important to indicate a~space, the visible space
+symbol~\gls{visiblespace} is used. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+A\glsni{visiblespace}sentence\glsni{visiblespace}consisting\glsni{visiblespace}of\glsni{visiblespace}six\glsni{visiblespace}words.
+\end{codeS}
+When you type up the code, replace any occurrences of
+\glsni{visiblespace} with a~space.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning Be careful of the dangers of obsolete code propagation.
+It often happens that students pass on their \LaTeX\ code to new
+students who, in their turn, pass it on to the next lot of students,
+and so on. You're told \dq{use this magic bit of code to format your
+thesis} without knowing what it does. Ancient buggy code that's
+20~years out-of-date festers in university departments
+refusing to die. But if it worked for previous students, what's the
+problem? The problem is that it may stop working a~week before your
+submission date and when you go for help, you may be told you're
+using obsolete packages and there's nothing for it but to rewrite
+your thesis using the modern alternatives.
+
+How do you know if a~package is obsolete? Some of the obsolete
+packages and commands are listed in l2tabu~\cite{l2tabu}, or you can
+check to see if a~package is listed in \gls{ctan}['s] obsolete
+tree (\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/}). Stefan~Kottwitz also
+has a~list of obsolete classes and packages in his
+\htmladdnormallinkfoot{TeXblog}{http://texblog.net/latex-articles/packages/}.
+The other thing to do is check the package's entry on \gls{ctan} to
+see if it has been deprecated. For example, suppose someone tells
+you to use the \sty{glossary} package. If you go to
+\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/glossary} it will tell you that the
+\sty{glossary} package is no longer supported and that it's been
+replaced by the \sty{glossaries} package. Similarly, if you go to
+\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/epsfig} it will tell you that the
+\sty{epsfig} package is obsolete and you should use \sty{graphicx}
+instead.
+
+\setnode{build}
+\section{Building Your Document}
+\label{sec:build}
+
+To \dq{typeset}, \dq{build}, \dq{compile} or \dq{LaTeX} your
+document means to run the \iappname{pdflatex} (or \iappname{latex})
+executable on your document source code. If you are using a
+front-end, such as TeXworks, WinEdt, TeXstudio, or TeXnicCenter,
+this usually just means clicking on the appropriate button or
+selecting the appropriate menu item.
+(See \novices[ch:tex2pdf]{fromsource2output} for further details.)
+
+It's important to remember that a~front-end is an
+\keyword{interface}. It's not, for example, TeXworks that is
+creating your PDF. When you click on the \dq{typeset} button, 
+TeXworks tells the operating system to run the required executable.
+This is usually \appname{pdflatex}, but there are other executables
+that may need to be used to help create your document, such as
+\iappname{bibtex} or \iappname{biber} (discussed in
+\chapterref{ch:citations}) and \iappname{makeindex} or
+\iappname{xindy} (discussed in \chapterref{ch:indgloss}).
+
+For example, if your document has a~bibliography and you are using
+TeXworks, you first need to make sure the drop-down menu is set to
+\dq{pdfLaTeX} (see \figureref{fig:texworks-pdflatex}) and click on
+the green \dq{Typeset} button. Then you need to select \dq{BibTeX}
+from the drop-down menu (see \figureref{fig:texworks-bibtex}) and
+click on the green \dq{Typeset} button. Then again select \dq{pdfLaTeX}
+(\figureref{fig:texworks-pdflatex}) and click the \dq{Typeset}
+button. Finally, to ensure your cross-references are all up-to-date,
+you need to click on the \dq{Typeset} button again. If you are using
+\iappname{biber} instead of \iappname{bibtex} (see
+\sectionref{sec:biblatex}), then you have to replace the above
+\dq{BibTeX} step with \dq{Biber} instead.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-pdflatex}
+ {\caption{Selecting pdfLaTeX from the Drop-Down Menu}}
+ {fig:texworks-pdflatex}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-bibtex}
+ {\caption{Selecting BibTeX from the Drop-Down Menu}}
+ {fig:texworks-bibtex}
+\end{figure}
+
+If the tool you require isn't listed in the drop-down box, you will
+have to add it. For example, to add \iappname{makeglossaries} to the
+list of available tools in TeXworks, you need to select
+\menu{Edit}\menuto\menu{Preferences}, which will open the
+\dq{TeXworks Preferences} dialog. Make sure the \dq{Typesetting} tab
+is selected and click on the lower
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} button
+next to the \dq{Processing tools} list. This will open the \dq{Tool
+Configuration} dialog. Set the \dq{Name} field to the name of the
+application, as you want it to appear in the tool list (for example
+\dq{MakeGlossaries}). Then click on the \dq{Browse} button to find
+the application on your computer. Next you need to click on the
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} button
+next to the \dq{Arguments} list. Set the argument to
+\verb|$basename|. Since \appname{makeglossaries} doesn't modify the
+PDF, uncheck the \dq{View PDF after running} box (see
+\figureref{fig:texworks-makeglossaries}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-makeglossaries}
+ {\caption{Adding Makeglossaries to the list of tools in TeXworks}}
+ {fig:texworks-makeglossaries}
+\end{figure}
+
+This is a~bit of a~hassle (if not downright confusing for a
+beginner) and even more so when you have glossaries and an index in
+your document as well as a~bibliography. Fortunately there are ways
+of automating this process so that you only need one button press to
+perform all those different steps. There are several applications
+available to do this for you, and I~strongly recommend you try one
+of them, if possible, to reduce the complexity involved in building
+a~document.
+
+\novices{crossref} mentioned \iappname{latexmk}, which is available
+on \gls{ctan}. This is a~Perl script, so it will run on any
+operating system that has Perl installed (see \novices{perl}).
+Since Volume~1 was published, a~Java alternative called
+\iappname{arara} has arrived on \gls*{ctan}. Java applications will
+run on any operating system that has the \htmladdnormallinkfoot{Java
+Runtime Environment}{http://www.java.com/getjava/} installed, so
+both \appname{latexmk} and \appname{arara} are multi-platform
+solutions to automated document compilation.
+\sectionref{sec:latexmk} gives a~brief introduction to
+\appname{latexmk}, and \sectionref{sec:arara} gives a~brief
+introduction to \appname{arara}.
+
+\setnode{latexmk}
+\subsection{LaTeXmk}
+\label{sec:latexmk}
+
+As mentioned \latexhtml{above}{\htmlref{in the previous
+section}{sec:build}}, \iappname{latexmk} is a~Perl script that
+automates the process of building a~\LaTeX\ document. In order to
+use \appname{latexmk}, you must have Perl installed (see
+\novices{perl}). Both TeX~Live and MikTeX come with
+\appname{latexmk} but, if for some reason you don't have it
+installed, you can use the TeX~Live or MikTeX update manager to
+install it. Alternatively, you can download
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/support/latexmk.zip} and install it
+manually.
+
+Once \appname{latexmk} is installed, you then need to add it to the
+list of available tools in TeXworks\footnote{If you are using a
+different front-end, you will have to consult your front-end's
+manual.}. This is done via the \menu{Edit}\menuto\menu{Preferences}
+menu item. This opens TeXwork's Preferences dialog box. Make sure
+the \dq{Typesetting} tab is selected (\figureref{fig:texworks-pref}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/texworks-pref}
+ {\caption{TeXwork's Preferences Dialog Box}}
+ {fig:texworks-pref}
+\end{figure}
+
+To add a~new tool, click on the lower
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} 
+button next to the list of processing tools. This opens the tool
+configuration dialog box (\figureref{fig:texworks-latexmkbibtex}).
+
+\begin{figure}
+  \figconts
+  {pictures/texworks-latexmkbibtex}
+  {\caption{Adding LaTeXmk in the TeXWorks Tool Configuration Dialog}}
+  {fig:texworks-latexmkbibtex}
+\end{figure}
+
+Type \dq{LaTeXmk} in the \dq{Name} box, then use the \dq{Browse}
+button to locate \appname{latexmk} on your computer. Next you need
+to click on the
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} button
+to add each argument. The argument list should consist of the
+following (in the order listed):
+\begin{verbatim}
+-e
+$pdflatex=q/pdflatex $synctexoption %O %S/
+-pdf
+-bibtex
+$fullname
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Once you've done this, click \dq{Okay} to close the tool
+configuration dialog, and click \dq{Okay} to close the Preferences
+dialog box. LaTeXmk should now be listed in the drop-down menu next
+to the green \dq{Typeset} button. Now, if you have LaTeXmk selected
+and you click on the \dq{Typeset} button \appname{pdflatex} and
+\appname{bibtex}\slash\appname{biber} will be run as necessary to
+create an up-to-date PDF.
+
+Unfortunately, adding \iappname{makeindex}, \iappname{texindy} or
+\iappname{makeglossaries} to LaTeXmk's set of rules is more
+complicated. For this you need to create a~configuration\slash initialisation (RC) file\footnote{There are some example RC files
+available at:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/support/latexmk/example_rcfiles/}.}. The
+name and location of this file depends on your operating system. For
+example, on a~Unix-like operating system, this may be
+\verb|$HOME/.latexmkrc|. You will need to consult the
+\appname{latexmk} manual~\cite{latexmk} for further details.
+
+Once you've found out the name and location of the RC file for your
+operating system, you can use the text editor of your choice to
+create this file. To add \iappname{makeglossaries}, you need to type
+the following in the RC file:
+\begin{verbatim}
+add_cus_dep('glo', 'gls', 0, 'makeglossaries');
+add_cus_dep('acn', 'acr', 0, 'makeglossaries');
+sub makeglossaries{
+  system( "makeglossaries \"$_[0]\"" );
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To add \iappname{makeindex}, you need to type the following:
+\begin{verbatim}
+add_cus_dep('idx', 'ind', 0, 'makeindex');
+sub makeindex{
+  system("makeindex \"$_[0].idx\"");
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you prefer to use \iappname{texindy} instead of
+\appname{makeindex}, you will need to replace the above lines with
+(change the language as appropriate):
+\begin{verbatim}
+add_cus_dep('idx', 'ind', 0, 'texindy');
+sub texindy{
+  system("texindy -L english \"$_[0].idx\"");
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Now select \dq{LaTeXmk} from the drop-down menu next to the green
+\dq{Typeset} button in TeXworks (\figureref{fig:texworks-latexmk}),
+and you're ready to build your documents.
+
+\begin{figure}
+  \figconts
+  {pictures/texworks-latexmk}
+  {\caption{LaTeXmk Tool Selected in TeXworks}}
+  {fig:texworks-latexmk}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+\setnode{arara}
+\subsection{Arara}
+\label{sec:arara}
+
+As mentioned in \sectionref{sec:build}, \iappname{arara} is a~Java
+application that automates the process of building a~\LaTeX\
+document. In order to use \appname{arara}, you must have the
+\htmladdnormallink{Java Runtime
+Environment}{http://www.java.com/getjava/} installed. The latest
+TeX~Live distribution includes \appname{arara}, so you can install
+it via the TeX~Live package manager.
+
+Alternative, you can install \appname{arara} manually as follows:
+fetch the installer
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{arara-3.0\booklinebreak-installer.jar}}{https://github.com/cereda/arara/blob/master/releases/arara-3.0-installer.jar} 
+(or
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{arara-3.0-installer.exe}}{https://github.com/cereda/arara/blob/master/releases/arara-3.0-installer.exe})
+from \url{https://github.com/cereda/arara/tree/master/releases}.
+On Windows, run \reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak\texttt{arara-3.0-installer.exe}. On other operating
+systems run \reportlinebreak\texttt{arara-3.0-\screenlinebreak installer.jar} in privileged mode.
+For example, on a~Unix-based system:
+\begin{verbatim}
+sudo java -jar arara-3.0-installer.jar
+\end{verbatim}
+(If you are doing a~manual install make sure you check the box to add the predefined rules, as shown
+in \figureref{fig:arara-installer}.)
+
+\begin{figure}
+  \figconts
+  {pictures/arara-installer}
+  {\caption{Arara Installer}}
+  {fig:arara-installer}
+\end{figure}
+
+Once \appname{arara} has been installed, you can add it to the list
+of tools in TeXworks. As \htmlref{before}{sec:latexmk}, open the
+TeXwork's Preferences dialog box using
+\menu{Edit}\menuto\menu{Preferences} and select the \dq{Typesetting}
+tab (\figureref{fig:texworks-pref}).
+
+To add a~new tool, click on the lower
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} 
+button next to the list of processing tools. This opens the tool
+configuration dialog box (\figureref{fig:texworks-arara}). Type
+\dq{Arara} in the \dq{Name} box and use the \dq{Browse} button to
+find the \appname{arara} application on your computer. Use the 
+\incGraphics[alt=+,height=2ex]{pictures/texworks-addbutton} 
+button to add \verb|$basename| to the list
+of arguments, as shown in \figureref{fig:texworks-arara}.
+
+\begin{figure}
+  \figconts
+  {pictures/texworks-arara}
+  {\caption{Adding Arara in the TeXWorks Tool Configuration Dialog}}
+  {fig:texworks-arara}
+\end{figure}
+
+Unlike \iappname{latexmk}, \appname{arara} doesn't read the log file
+to determine what applications need to be run. Instead, you tell
+\appname{arara} how to build your document by placing special comments 
+in your source code. For example, if your document contains the
+following:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} bibtex
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Then running \appname{arara} on the document will run
+\appname{pdflatex}, \appname{bibtex}, \appname{pdflatex} and
+\appname{pdflatex} on your document. \appname{Arara} knows the rules
+\dq{pdflatex} and \dq{bibtex}. It also knows the rules \dq{biber},
+\dq{makeglossaries} and \dq{makeindex}.
+So, if your document has a~bibliography, an index and glossaries,
+you need to put the following comments in your source code
+(replace \texttt{bibtex} with \texttt{biber} if required):
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }\newline
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} bibtex\newline
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} makeglossaries\newline
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} makeindex\newline
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }\newline
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }\newline
+\glsni{documentclass}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{code}
+Now you just need to select \dq{Arara} from the drop-down list in
+TeXworks (\figureref{fig:texworks-arara2}) and click the green
+\dq{Typeset} button, and \appname{arara} will do all the work for
+you.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning If you don't add these arara comments to your source code,
+nothing will happen when you run \appname{arara} on your document!
+You must remember to provide \appname{arara} with the rules to build
+your document.
+
+\begin{figure}
+  \figconts
+  {pictures/texworks-arara2}
+  {\caption{Using Arara in TeXworks}}
+  {fig:texworks-arara2}
+\end{figure}
+
+Unfortunately \appname{arara} (v3.0) doesn't have a~rule for
+\iappname{texindy}, but you can add one by creating a~file called
+\texttt{texindy.yaml} that contains the following:\footnote{Thanks to
+Paulo Cereda for supply this.}\screenpagebreak
+\begin{alltt}
+!config
+\# TeXindy rule for arara
+\# requires arara 3.0+
+identifier: texindy
+name: TeXindy
+command: <arara> texindy @\{german\} @\{language\} @\{codepage\} @\{module\}\bookcontinueline\reportcontinueline\screencontinueline @\{input\} @\{options\} "@\{getBasename(file)\}.idx"
+arguments: 
+- identifier: german
+  flag: <arara> @\{isTrue(parameters.german,"-g")\}
+- identifier: language
+  flag: <arara> -L @\{parameters.language\}
+- identifier: codepage
+  flag: <arara> -C @\{parameters.codepage\}
+- identifier: module
+  flag: <arara> -M @\{parameters.module\}
+- identifier: input
+  flag: <arara> -I @\{parameters.input\}
+- identifier: options
+  flag: <arara> @\{parameters.options\}
+\end{alltt}
+\latex{(The symbol \continuesymbol\ above indicates a~line wrap.
+Don't insert a~line break at that point.) }This file should be saved in the \texttt{rules} subdirectory of the
+\texttt{arara} installation directory. (For example, on Unix-like
+systems \texttt{/usr/local/arara/\reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak rules/texindy.yaml}.)
+
+So if you'd rather use \appname{texindy} instead of
+\appname{makeindex} you can replace the 
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} makeindex
+\end{alltt}
+directive with
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} texindy: \marg*{ language: english, codepage: latin1 }
+\end{alltt}
+(Change the language and encoding as appropriate.)
+
+\setnode{start}
+\chapter{Getting Started}
+\label{ch:start}
+
+There are many different thesis designs, varying according to
+university or discipline~\cite{thesistemplates}. If you have been told to use a~particular
+class file, use that one. If not, there are a~selection of thesis
+class files available on \gls{ctan} and listed in the
+\htmladdnormallinkfoot{OnLine \TeX\ Catalogue's Topic
+Index}{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html\#theses}~\cite{texcattopic}.
+Since there are so many to choose from, I'm just going to follow on
+from \htmladdnormallink{Volume~1}{\baseurl/latex/novices/} of this series and use one of the \koma\ class files.
+But which one? The \icls{scrreprt} class is the one usually
+recommended for a~report or thesis. It defaults to one-sided and has
+an \gls{env-abstract} environment, but it doesn't define
+\gls{frontmatter}, \gls{mainmatter} or \gls{backmatter}. The
+\icls{scrbook} class does define those commands, but it doesn't
+provide an \glsni{env-abstract} environment and defaults to two-sided
+layout. So, you can either do:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{documentclass}\marg{scrreprt}
+\gls{title}\marg{A Sample Thesis}
+\gls{author}\marg{A.N. Other}
+
+\gls{begin}\marg{document}
+\gls{maketitle}
+
+\gls{pagenumbering}\marg{roman}
+\gls{tableofcontents}
+
+\gls{chapter}*\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{abstract}
+This is the abstract
+\gls{end}\marg{abstract}
+
+\glsni{pagenumbering}\marg{arabic}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+...
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\bookpagebreak\noindent
+or you can do:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+\gls{title}\marg{A Sample Thesis}
+\gls{author}\marg{A.N. Other}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\gls{maketitle}
+
+\gls{frontmatter}
+\gls{tableofcontents}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Abstract}
+This is the abstract
+
+\gls{mainmatter}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+...
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+I'm going to use the second approach simply out of personal
+preference. The \koma\ options mentioned in this book are available
+for both \icls{scrreprt} and \icls{scrbook}, so choose whichever
+class file you feel best suits your thesis.
+
+Unless you have been told otherwise, I~recommend that you start
+out with a~skeletal document that looks something like the
+following:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis1.tex}\label{ex:thesis1}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\gls{title}\marg{A Sample Thesis}
+\gls{author}\marg{A.N. Other}
+\gls{date}\marg{July 2013}
+\gls{titlehead}\marg{A Thesis submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy}
+\gls{publishers}\marg{School of Something\gls{dbbackslashchar}University of Somewhere}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\gls{maketitle}
+
+\gls{frontmatter}
+\gls{tableofcontents}
+\gls{listoffigures}
+\gls{listoftables}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+I would like to thank my supervisor, Professor Someone. This
+research was funded by the Imaginary Research Council.
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Abstract}
+
+A brief summary of the project goes here.
+
+\gls{percentchar} A glossary and list of acronyms may go here
+\glsni{percentchar} or may go in the back matter.
+
+\gls{mainmatter}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:intro}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Technical Introduction}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:techintro}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Method}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:method}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Results}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:results}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Conclusions}
+\glsni{label}\marg{ch:conc}
+
+\gls{backmatter}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} A glossary and list of acronyms may go here
+\glsni{percentchar} or may go in the front matter after the abstract.
+
+\glsni{percentchar} The bibliography will go here
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+If you do this, it will help ensure that your document has the
+correct structure before you begin with the actual contents of the
+document. (Note that the chapter titles will naturally vary
+depending on your subject or institution, and you may need a
+different paper size if you are not in Europe. I~have based the
+above on my own PhD thesis which I~wrote in the early to mid
+1990s in the Department of Electronic Systems Engineering at
+the University of Essex, and it may well not fit your own
+requirements.)
+
+If you haven't started your thesis yet, go ahead and try this.
+Creating a~skeletal document can have an amazing psychological
+effect on some people: for very little effort it can produce a
+document several pages long, which can give you a~sense of
+achievement that can help give you sufficient momentum to get
+started (but of course, it's not guaranteed to work with
+everyone). Remember that if you want to use \iappname{arara} 
+(see \sectionref{sec:arara}) you must add the build rules to the
+document:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+(I'll add the \appname{arara} rules to sample listings, in the event
+that you want to use \appname{arara}. Since they are comments, they
+will be ignored if you use \iappname{pdflatex} explicitly or if you
+use another automation method, such as \iappname{latexmk}.)
+
+Now think about other requirements. What font size have you been
+told to use?
+\begin{description}
+\item[10pt] Use the \clsopt{10pt} class option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,10pt}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item[11pt] Use the \clsopt{11pt} class option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,11pt}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item[12pt] Use the \clsopt{12pt} class option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,12pt}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+\end{description}
+Have you been told to have a~blank line between paragraphs and no
+paragraph indentation? If so, use the \scrclsopt[full]{parskip} class
+option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,12pt,parskip=full}\marg{scrbook}
+\end{codeS}
+\label{geometry}%
+\faq{Changing the margins in \LaTeX}{changemargin}Have you been told to have certain sized margins? If so, you can use
+the \isty{geometry} package. For example, if you have been told you
+must have 1~inch margins, you can do
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{usepackage}\oarg{margin=1in}\marg{geometry}
+\end{codeS}
+Changing the default fonts is covered in \novices[sec:changingfonts]{documentfonts}.
+Other possible formatting requirements, such as double-spacing, are
+covered in \chapterref{ch:formatting}.
+
+\setnode{include}
+\chapter{Splitting a~Large Document into Several Files}
+\label{ch:include}
+
+Some people prefer to place each chapter of a~large document in a
+separate file and then input the file into the main document.
+
+There are two basic ways of including the contents of an external
+file:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{input}\marg{\meta{filename}}
+\end{definition}
+and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{include}\marg{\meta{filename}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{filename} is the name of the file. (The \texttt{.tex}
+extension may be omitted in both cases.) The differences between the
+two commands are as follows:
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\glsni{input}] acts as though the contents of the file were
+  typed where the \glsni{input} command was. For example, suppose my
+  main file contained the following:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Here is a short paragraph.
+
+\glsni{input}\marg{myfile}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+and suppose the file \texttt{myfile.tex} contained the following
+lines:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Here is some sample text.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+then the \glsni{input} command behaves as though you had simply
+typed the following in your main document file:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+Here is a short paragraph.
+
+Here is some sample text.
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+ \item[\glsni{include}] does more than just input the contents of
+ the file. It also starts a~new page (using \gls{clearpage}) and creates an auxiliary file
+ associated with the included file. It also issues another \glsni{clearpage}
+ once the file has been read in. Using this approach, you can also
+ govern which files to include using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{includeonly}\marg{\meta{file list}}
+\end{definition}
+in the preamble, where \meta{file list} is a~comma-separated list of
+files you want included. This way, if you only want to work on one
+or two chapters, you can only include those chapters, which will
+speed up the document build.  \LaTeX\ will still read in all the
+cross-referencing information for the missing chapters, but won't
+include those chapters in the PDF file.  There is a~definite advantage to this
+if you have, say, a~large number of images in your results chapter,
+which you don't need when you're working on, say, the technical
+introduction.  You can still reference all the figures in the
+omitted chapter, as long as you have previously 
+\htmladdnormallink{\LaTeX{}ed the
+document}{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/fromsource2output.html\#itm:step2}
+without the \glsni{includeonly} command.
+
+The \sty{excludeonly} package provides the logically opposite
+command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{excludeonly}\marg{\meta{file list}}
+\end{definition}
+
+\end{description}
+
+The \htmlref{previous example}{ex:thesis1}\doifbook{ \vpageref{ex:thesis1}} can 
+now be split into various files:
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{thesis.tex}]{thesis2.tex}\label{ex:thesis2}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\gls{documentclass}\oarg{oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\gls{title}\marg{A Sample Thesis}
+\gls{author}\marg{A.N. Other}
+\gls{date}\marg{July 2013}
+\gls{titlehead}\marg{A Thesis submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy}
+\gls{publishers}\marg{School of Something\gls{dbbackslashchar}University of Somewhere}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\gls{maketitle}
+
+\gls{frontmatter}
+\gls{tableofcontents}
+\gls{listoffigures}
+\gls{listoftables}
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Acknowledgements}
+
+I would like to thank my supervisor, Professor Someone. This
+research was funded by the Imaginary Research Council.
+
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Abstract}
+
+A brief summary of the project goes here.
+
+\gls{mainmatter}
+
+\glsni{include}\marg{intro}
+
+\glsni{include}\marg{techintro}
+
+\glsni{include}\marg{method}
+
+\glsni{include}\marg{results}
+
+\glsni{include}\marg{conc}
+
+\gls{backmatter}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{intro.tex}]{intro.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Introduction}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:intro}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{techintro.tex}]{techintro.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Technical Introduction}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:techintro}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{method.tex}]{method.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Method}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:method}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{results.tex}]{results.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Results}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:results}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\begin{codelisting}[\texttt{conc.tex}]{conc.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{chapter}\marg{Conclusions}
+\gls{label}\marg{ch:conc}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+If you only want to work on, say, the Method and Results chapters,
+you can place the following command in the preamble:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{includeonly}\marg{method,results}
+\end{codeS}
+
+% Formatting
+
+\setnode{formatting}
+\chapter{Formatting}
+\label{ch:formatting}
+
+It used to be that in order to change the format of chapter and
+section headings, you needed to have some understanding of the
+internal workings of classes such as \icls{report} or \icls{book}.
+Modern classes, such as \icls{memoir} and the \koma\ classes,
+provide a~much easier interface. However, I~recommend that you first
+write your thesis, and then worry about changing the document style.
+The ability to separate content from style is one of the
+advantages of using \LaTeX\ over a~word processor. Remember that
+writing your thesis is more important than the layout. Whilst it may
+be that your school or department insists on a~certain style, it
+should not take precedence over the actual task of writing.
+
+\setnode{docstyles}
+\section{Changing the Document Style}
+\label{sec:docstyles}
+
+If you are using a~custom thesis class file provided by your
+department or school, then you should stick to the styles set up in
+that class. If not, you may need to change the default style of your
+chosen class to fit the requirements. \novices[sec:section]{sectionunits} described 
+how to change the fonts used by chapter and section headings for the
+\koma\ classes. For example, if the chapter headings must be set in
+a~large, bold, serif font you can do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{addtokomafont}\marg{\gls{large}\gls{bfseries}\gls{rmfamily}}
+\end{codeS}
+The headings in the \koma\ classes default to ragged-right
+justification (recall \gls{raggedright} from
+\xrsectionref{Declarations}{declaration} of Volume~1) which is done via
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{raggedsection}
+\end{definition}
+This can be redefined as required. For example, suppose you are
+required to have centred headings, then you can do:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{raggedsection}}\marg{\gls{centering}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\setnode{newpagestyle}
+\section{Changing the Page Style}
+\label{sec:newpagestyle}
+
+\novices{pagestyle} described the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{pagestyle}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used to set the page style. The \icls{scrbook} class
+defaults to the \ipagestyle{headings} page style, but if this isn't
+appropriate, you can use the \isty{scrpage2} package, which comes
+with the \koma\ bundle. This package provides its own versions of
+the \ipagestyle{plain} and \pagestylefmt{headings} page styles, called
+\ipagestyle{scrplain} and \ipagestyle{scrheadings}.
+
+For simplicity, I'm assuming that your thesis is a~one-sided
+document. If this isn't the case and your odd and even page styles
+need to be different, you'll need to consult the \koma\
+documentation~\cite{koma}.
+
+With the \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style, the page header and
+footer are both divided into three areas
+(\figureref{fig:pagestyle}): the inner (left) head/foot, the centre
+head/foot and the outer (right) head/foot.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/pagestyle}
+ {\caption{Page Header and Footer Elements}}
+ {fig:pagestyle}
+\end{figure}
+
+These elements can be set using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{ihead}\oarg{\meta{scrplain inner head}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings inner head}}\\
+\gls{chead}\oarg{\meta{scrplain centre head}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings centre head}}\\
+\gls{ohead}\oarg{\meta{scrplain outer head}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings outer head}}\\
+\gls{ifoot}\oarg{\meta{scrplain inner foot}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings inner foot}}\\
+\gls{cfoot}\oarg{\meta{scrplain centre foot}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings centre foot}}\\
+\gls{ofoot}\oarg{\meta{scrplain outer foot}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings outer foot}}
+\end{definition}
+In each case, the optional argument indicates what to do if the
+\pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style is in use and the mandatory
+argument indicates what to do if the \pagestylefmt{scrheadings}
+page style is in use. (If the optional argument is missing, no
+modification is made to the \pagestylefmt{scrplain} style.) 
+Within both types of argument, you can use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{pagemark}
+\end{definition}
+to insert the current page number and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{headmark}
+\end{definition}
+to insert the running heading. For example, suppose you are required
+to put your registration number on the bottom left of each page and
+the page number on the bottom right, and you are also required to put
+the current chapter or section heading at the top left of each page,
+unless it's the first page of a~chapter. Then you can do:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-pagestyles.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{scrpage2}
+
+\gls{pagestyle}\marg{scrheadings}
+
+\gls{newcommand}\marg{\cmdname{myregnum}}\marg{123456789}\glsni{percentchar} registration number
+
+\glsni{ihead}\marg{}
+\glsni{chead}\marg{}
+\glsni{ohead}\oarg{}\marg{\glsni{headmark}}
+\glsni{ifoot}\oarg{\cmdname{myregnum}}\marg{\cmdname{myregnum}}\glsni{percentchar} registration number
+\glsni{cfoot}\oarg{}\marg{}
+\glsni{ofoot}\oarg{\glsni{pagemark}}\marg{\glsni{pagemark}}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+Note that the above don't use any font changing commands. If you
+want to change the font for the header and footer, you need to
+redefine \gls{headfont}. The page number style is given by
+\gls{pnumfont}. So for italic headers and footers with bold
+page numbers, you can redefine these commands as follows:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{headfont}}\marg{\gls{normalfont}\gls{itshape}}\newline
+\glsni{renewcommand}*\marg{\glsni{pnumfont}}\marg{\glsni{normalfont}\glsni{bfseries}}
+\end{code}
+
+\setnode{setspace}
+\section{Double-Spacing}
+\label{sec:setspace}
+
+Whilst double-spacing is usually frowned upon in the world of modern
+typesetting, it is usually a~requirement for anything that may need
+hand-written annotations, which can include theses. This extra space
+gives the examiners room to write comments.\footnote{Despite the
+current digital age, many people still use hand-written annotations
+on manuscripts. It's unlikely that your examiners have pens
+that are incompatible with your paper.}
+
+Double-spacing can be achieved via the \isty{setspace} package. You
+can either set the spacing using the package options \istyopt{setspace}{singlespacing},
+\istyopt{setspace}{onehalfspacing} or \istyopt{setspace}{doublespacing},
+or you can switch via the declarations:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{singlespacing}\newline
+\gls{onehalfspacing}\newline
+\gls{doublespacing}
+\end{definition}
+So, if your thesis has to be double-spaced, you can do:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-doublespaced.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{doublespacing}\marg{setspace}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\setnode{titlepagelayout}
+\section{Changing the Title Page}
+\label{sec:titlepage}
+
+\novices{title} described how to lay out the title page using
+\gls{maketitle}. If this layout isn't appropriate for your
+school or department's specifications, you can lay out the title page
+manually using the \gls{env-titlepage} environment instead of
+\gls{maketitle}. Within this environment, you can use
+\gls{hspace}\marg{\meta{length}} and \gls{vspace}\marg{\meta{length}}
+to insert horizontal and vertical spacing. (The unstarred versions
+are ignored if they occur at the start of a~line or page,
+respectively. The starred versions will insert the given
+spacing, regardless of their location.) You can also use \gls{hfill}
+and \gls{vfill}, which will expand to fill the available space
+horizontally or vertically, respectively.
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-titlepage.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{titlepage}
+ \gls{centering}
+ \glsni{vspace}*\marg{1in}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{Large}\glsni{bfseries}
+  A Sample PhD Thesis\glsni{par}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{Large}
+ \glsni{vspace}\marg{1.5in}
+ \glsni{begin}\marg{large}\glsni{bfseries}
+  A. N. Other\glsni{par}
+ \glsni{end}\marg{large}
+ \glsni{vfill}
+ A Thesis submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
+ \glsni{par}
+ \glsni{vspace}\marg{0.5in}
+ School of Something
+ \glsni{par}
+ University of Somewhere
+ \glsni{par}
+ \glsni{vspace}\marg{0.5in}
+ July 2013
+ \glsni{par}
+\glsni{end}\marg{titlepage}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+The result is shown in \figureref{fig:titlepage}.
+(If you require \htmlref{double-spacing}{sec:setspace}, you may need
+to wait until after the title page before switching to
+double-spacing.)
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\fboxfigconts
+ {pictures/titlepage}
+ {\caption{Sample Title Page}}
+ {fig:titlepage}
+\end{figure}
+
+\setnode{verbatim}
+\section{Listings and Other Verbatim Text}
+\label{sec:verbatim}
+
+\faq{Code listings in \LaTeX}{codelist}There may be times when you want to include text exactly as you have
+typed it into your source code. For example, you may want to include
+a~short segment of computer code. This can be done using the \gls{env-verbatim}
+environment.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+Note how I~don't need to worry about \htmladdnormallink{special
+characters}{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/symbols.html}, such as
+\gls{hashchar}, within the \glsni{env-verbatim} environment:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{verbatim}
+\#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */
+
+int main()
+\marg*{
+   printf("Hello World\cmdname{n}");
+
+   return 1;
+}
+\glsni{end}\marg{verbatim}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This just produces:
+\begin{result}[verbatim.html]
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */
+
+int main()
+{
+   printf("Hello World\n");
+
+   return 1;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{result}
+
+A more sophisticated approach is to use the \isty{listings} package.
+With this package, you first need to specify the programming
+language. For example, the above code is in C, so I~need to specify
+this using:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{lstset}\marg{language=C}
+\end{codeS}
+Now I~can use the \gls{env-lstlisting} environment to typeset my 
+C~code:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{lstlisting}
+\#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */
+
+int main()
+\marg*{
+   printf("Hello World\cmdname{n}");
+
+   return 1;
+}
+\glsni{end}\marg{lstlisting}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The resulting output looks like:
+\begin{result}[The keywords 'include' 'int' and 'return' are rendered in bold. The normal serif font is used.]
+\lstset{language=C}
+\lstinputlisting{listing-samples/helloworld.c}
+\end{result}
+I~can also have inline code snippets using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{lstinline}\oarg{\meta{options}}\meta{char}\meta{code}\meta{char}
+\end{definition}
+This is different syntax to the usual forms of command argument.
+You can chose any character \meta{char} that isn't
+the open square bracket \gls{opt.opensq}
+and that doesn't occur in
+\meta{code} to delimit the code, but the start and end \meta{char}
+must match. (The optional argument is discussed below.) So the following are all equivalent:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \meta{char} is the exclamation mark character:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{lstinline}!\#include <stdio.h>!
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item \meta{char} is the vertical bar character:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{lstinline}|\#include <stdio.h>|
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item \meta{char} is the double-quote character:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{lstinline}"\#include <stdio.h>"
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item \meta{char} is the plus symbol:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{lstinline}+\#include <stdio.h>+
+\end{codeS}
+
+\end{enumerate}
+And so on, but \meta{char} can't be, say, \verb|#| as that occurs in
+\meta{code}. Example:
+\begin{code}
+The stdio header file (required for the \glsni{lstinline}+printf+
+function) is loaded using the directive
+\glsni{lstinline}!\#include <stdio.h>! on the
+first line.
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[The keyword 'include' is rendered in bold.]
+\lstset{language=C}%
+The stdio header file (required for the \lstinline+printf+ function)
+is loaded using the directive
+\lstinline!#include <stdio.h>! on the
+first line.
+\end{result}
+
+Another alternative is to input the code from an external file. For
+example, suppose my C~code is contained in the file
+\texttt{helloworld.c}, then I~can input it using:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{lstinputlisting}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{helloworld.c}
+\end{codeS}
+(Remember to use a~forward slash \texttt{/} as the directory
+divider, even if you are using Windows.)
+
+All the above (\glsni{lstinline}, \glsni{lstinputlisting} and the 
+\glsni{env-lstlisting} environment) have an optional argument
+\meta{options} that
+can be used to override the default settings. These are
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options.  There are a~lot of options
+available, but I'm only going to cover a~few. If you want more
+detail, have a~look at the \sty{listings}
+documentation~\cite{listings}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{title}=\marg{\meta{text}}] is used to
+set an unnumbered and unlabelled title. If \meta{text} contains a
+comma or equal sign, make sure you enclose \meta{text} in curly
+braces \gls{leftbracechar} and~\gls{rightbracechar}.
+
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{caption}=\marg{\oarg{\meta{short}}\meta{text}}] is
+used to set a~numbered caption. The optional part \meta{short} is an
+alternative short caption for the list of listings, which can be
+produced using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{lstlistoflistings}
+\end{definition}
+As above, if the caption contains a~comma or equal sign, make sure
+you enclose it in curly braces \glsni{leftbracechar} and
+\glsni{rightbracechar}.
+
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{label}=\marg{\meta{text}}] is used to
+assign a~label to this listing so the number can be referenced via
+\gls{ref}.
+
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{numbers}=\marg{\meta{setting}}]
+The value \meta{setting} may be one of: \texttt{none} (no line
+numbers), \texttt{left} (line numbers on the left) or 
+\texttt{right} (line numbers on the right). 
+
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{mathescape}] This is a~boolean
+key that can either be \texttt{true} (dollar
+\gls{dollarchar} character acts as the usual math mode shift) or \texttt{false} 
+(deactivates the usual behaviour of \glsni{dollarchar}).
+
+\item[\ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{basicstyle}=\marg{\meta{declaration}}]
+The value (one or more declarations) is used 
+at the start of the listing to set the basic font style. For
+example, \meta{declaration} could be \gls{ttfamily} (which actually
+makes more sense for a~listing).
+
+\end{description}\reportpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning If you set \ikeyvalopt{lstinputlisting}{basicstyle} to
+\glsni{ttfamily} and you want bold keywords, make sure you are using a
+typewriter font that supports bold, as not all of them do. (Recall
+from \novices[sec:changingfonts]{documentfonts} how to change the font family.) This
+book uses txtt (see \novices{renewcom}). Other possibilities include 
+\sty{beramono}, \sty{tgcursor}, \sty{courier}, \sty{DejaVuSansMono}
+(or \sty{dejavu} to load the serif and sans-serif DejaVu fonts as
+well), \sty{lmodern} and \sty{luximono}.
+
+\xminisec{KOMA and \sty{listings}}
+\warning If you want to use the \sty{listings} package with one of
+the \koma\ classes, you need to load \sty{scrhack} \emph{before}
+\sty{listings}, otherwise you will get a~warning that looks like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Class scrbook Warning: Usage of deprecated \float@listhead!
+(scrbook)              You should use the features of package `tocbasic'
+(scrbook)              instead of \float@listhead.
+(scrbook)              Definition of \float@listhead my be removed from
+(scrbook)              `scrbook' soon, so it should not be used  on input 
+line 57.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-listings.tex}
+\null\par
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{lstlisting}\oarg{language=C\comma basicstyle=\glsni{ttfamily}\comma mathescape=true}\newline
+\#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */\newline
+\#include <math.h> /* needed for sqrt */\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+int main()\newline
+\marg*{\newline
+\mbox{}~~~double x = sqrt(2.0); /* \glsni{dollarchar}x = \gls{sqrt}\marg{2}\glsni{dollarchar} */\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\mbox{}~~~printf("x = \%f\cmdname{n}", x);\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\mbox{}~~~return 1;\newline
+}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{lstlisting}
+\end{codelisting}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[The formula in the comment is typeset in math mode and spaces in the string are displayed with the visible space symbol]
+\lstinputlisting[language=C,basicstyle=\ttfamily,mathescape=true]{listing-samples/sqrt.c}
+\end{result}
+If you are using \htmlref{double-spacing}{sec:setspace}, you may
+need to temporarily switch it off in the listings. You can do this
+by adding \gls{singlespacing} to the \ikeyvalopt{lstset}{basicstyle} setting.
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{lstset}\marg{basicstyle=\marg{\glsni{ttfamily}\glsni{singlespacing}}}
+\end{codeS}
+(Check with your supervisor to find out if listings should be
+double- or single-spaced.)
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+It is not usually appropriate to have reams of listings in
+your thesis. It can annoy an examiner if you have included every
+single piece of code you have written during your PhD, as it comes
+across as padding to make it look as though your thesis is a~lot
+larger than it really is. (Examiners are not easily fooled, and it's
+best not to irritate them as it is likely to make them less
+sympathetic towards you.) If you want to include listings in your
+thesis, check with your supervisor first to find out whether or not
+it is appropriate. 
+
+\warning
+Be careful when you use verbatim-like environments or commands, such
+as \gls{env-verbatim}, \gls{env-lstlisting}, \gls{lstinline} and
+\gls{lstinputlisting}. In general, they can't be used in the
+argument of another command.\faq{Why doesn't verbatim work within
+\ldots?}{verbwithin}
+
+\setnode{tabbing}
+\section{Tabbing}
+\label{sec:tabbing}
+
+The \gls{env-tabbing} environment lets you create tab stops so that you
+can tab to a~particular distance from the left margin.  Within the
+tabbing environment, you can use the command \gls{tabstop} to set a~tab
+stop, \gls{greaterthan} to jump to the next tab stop, \gls{lessthan} to go
+back a~tab stop, \gls{plus} to shift the left border by one tab stop
+to the right, \gls{hyphen-tab} to shift the left border by one tab stop to
+the left. In addition, \gls{dbbackslashchar} will start a~new line and
+\gls{kill} will set any tabs stops defined in that line, but will
+not typeset the line itself.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning You may recall two of the above commands from Volume~1:
+\gls{hyphen-discretionary} was described as a~discretionary hyphen
+in \xrsectionref{Hyphenation}{hyphenation} and \gls{macron} was
+described as the macron accent command in
+\xrsectionref[sec:chars]{Special Characters and Symbols}{symbols}.
+These two commands take on different meanings when they are used in
+the \glsni{env-tabbing} environment.\faq{Accents misbehave in 
+\envname{tabbing}}{tabacc} If you want accents in your
+\glsni{env-tabbing} environment, either use the \isty{inputenc}
+package (see \novices{inputenc}) or use \gls{a}\meta{accent symbol}\marg{\meta{c}}, 
+for example \verb|\a"{u}| instead of
+\verb|\"{u}|.\reportpagebreak\screenpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabbing}
+Zero \glsni{tabstop}One \glsni{tabstop}Two \glsni{tabstop}Three\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}First tab stop\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}A\glsni{greaterthan}\glsni{greaterthan}B\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}\glsni{greaterthan}Second tab stop
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabbing}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This produces the following output:
+\begin{result}
+\begin{tabbing}
+Zero \=One \=Two \=Three\\
+\>First tab stop\\
+\>A\>\>B\\
+\>\>Second tab stop
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{result}
+
+\xminisec{Another Example:}
+This example sets up four tab stops, but ignores the
+first line:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabbing}
+AAA \glsni{tabstop}BBBB \glsni{tabstop}XX \glsni{tabstop}YYYYYY \glsni{tabstop}Z \glsni{kill}
+\glsni{greaterthan}\glsni{greaterthan}\glsni{greaterthan}Third tab stop\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}a \glsni{greaterthan}b \glsni{greaterthan} \glsni{greaterthan}c
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabbing}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This produces the following output:
+\begin{result}[The first line isn't shown]
+\begin{tabbing}
+AAA \=BBBB \=XX \=YYYYYY \=Z \kill
+\>\>\>Third tab stop\\
+\>a \>b \> \>c
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{newtheorem}
+\section{Theorems}
+\label{sec:newtheorem}
+
+A PhD thesis can often contain theorems, lemmas, definitions etc.
+The \LaTeX\ kernel comes with the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newtheorem}\marg{\meta{name}}\oarg{\meta{counter}}\marg{\meta{title}}\oarg{\meta{outer counter}}
+\end{definition}
+which can be used to create an environment called \meta{name} that
+has an optional argument. Each instance of the environment starts
+with \meta{title} followed by the associated counter value. If
+\meta{counter} is present, the new environment uses that counter
+instead of having a~new counter defined for it. If \meta{outer
+counter} is present, the environment counter is reset every time
+\meta{outer counter} is incremented. The optional arguments are
+mutually exclusive.
+
+In the example below, I've use \glsni{newtheorem} to define a~new
+environment called \envname{theorem}, which has an associated
+counter, also called \counter{theorem}, that is dependant on the
+\counter{chapter} counter.\bookpagebreak
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{theorem}\marg{Theorem}\oarg{chapter}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{theorem}
+If proposition \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a tautology 
+then \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a contradiction,
+and conversely.
+\glsni{end}\marg{theorem}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Resulting output:
+\begin{result}[theorem.html]
+\begin{theorem}
+If proposition $P$ is a tautology then $\sim P$ is a contradiction,
+and conversely.
+\end{theorem}
+\end{result}
+The optional argument to the new environment can be used to add a
+caption. Modifying the above example (changes shown \modification{like this}):
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{theorem}\marg{Theorem}\oarg{chapter}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{theorem}\modification{\oarg{Tautologies and Contradictions}}
+If proposition \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a tautology 
+then \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a contradiction,
+and conversely.
+\glsni{end}\marg{theorem}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\reportpagebreak\noindent
+Resulting output:
+\begin{result}[As the previous example except the code in the optional argument is added in paretheses to the running header]
+\begin{theorem}[Tautologies and Contradictions]
+If proposition $P$ is a tautology then $\sim P$ is a contradiction,
+and conversely.
+\end{theorem}
+\end{result}
+Here's an example that uses the first optional argument of
+\glsni{newtheorem}:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{exercise}\marg{Exercise}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{suppexercise}\oarg{exercise}\marg{Supplementary Exercise}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{exercise}
+This is an example of how to create a theorem-like environment.
+\glsni{end}\marg{exercise}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{suppexercise}
+This is another example of how to create a theorem-like environment.
+\glsni{end}\marg{suppexercise}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[extheorem.html]
+\begin{Exercise}
+This is an example of how to create a theorem-like environment.
+\end{Exercise}
+\begin{Suppexercise}
+This is another example of how to create a theorem-like environment.
+\end{Suppexercise}
+\end{result}
+
+Unfortunately there isn't a~great deal of flexibility with the
+environment appearance. \faq{Theorem bodies printed in a~roman
+font}{theoremfmt}However there are various packages available that
+provide enhancements to this basic command, allowing you to adjust
+the appearance to suit your requirements.  There seem to be two main
+contenders: \isty{amsthm} and \isty{ntheorem}. Both have advantages
+and disadvantages. For example, \sty{ntheorem} is more flexible but
+\isty{amsthm} is more robust. Therefore I'm going to describe both,
+and you will have to decide which one you prefer.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning If you are using either packages with \isty{amsmath}, you must
+load \sty{amsmath} first:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{usepackage}\marg{amsmath}
+\gls{usepackage}\marg{ntheorem}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+or
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{usepackage}\marg{amsmath}
+\gls{usepackage}\marg{amsthm}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+With both \sty{amsthm} and \sty{ntheorem}, you can still define new
+theorem-like environments using \gls{newtheorem}, but there is also
+a~starred version of that command, which can be used to define
+unnumbered theorem-like environments.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+Suppose I~want to have an unnumbered \envname{remark} environment, 
+I~can define the environment like this:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\glsni{newtheorem}*\marg{note}\marg{Note}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{note}
+This is a note about something.
+\glsni{end}\marg{note}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[Similar to before but the header text is just 'Note' without a number]
+\begin{plainnote}
+This is a note about something.
+\end{plainnote}
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{amsthm}
+\subsection{The \sty{amsthm} Package}
+\label{sec:amsthm}
+
+The \isty{amsthm} package provides three predefined theorem styles:
+\texttt{plain}, \texttt{definition} and \texttt{remark}. When you define a
+new theorem-like environment with \gls{newtheorem}, it is given
+the style \emph{currently in effect}. You can change the
+current style with:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{theoremstyle}\marg{\meta{style name}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{style name} is the name of the theorem style.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+This example defines six theorem-like environments: \envname{theorem},
+\envname{lemma}, \envname{defn}, \envname{conj}, \envname{note} and
+\envname{remark}. The \envname{note} environment is unnumbered as
+it's defined using the starred version of \glsni{newtheorem}.
+The definitions have been arranged according to the required theorem style.
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{plain}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{theorem}\marg{Theorem}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{lemma}\marg{Lemma}
+
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{definition}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{defn}\marg{Definition}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{conj}\marg{Conjecture}
+
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{remark}
+\glsni{newtheorem}*\marg{note}\marg{Note}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{remark}\marg{Remark}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\label{amsthm-proof}%
+The \sty{amsthm} package also provides the \gls{env-proof} environment,
+which can be used for typesetting proofs.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{proof}\oarg{\meta{title}}
+\end{definition}
+The optional argument \meta{title} is a replacement for the default
+title. This environment automatically inserts a~QED symbol at
+the end of it, but if the default location isn't appropriate (which
+can happen if the proof ends with an equation) then use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{qedhere}
+\end{definition}
+where you want the QED symbol to appear. The symbol is given by
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{qedsymbol}
+\end{definition}
+This defaults to an unfilled square $\openbox$, but you can redefine
+\glsni{qedsymbol} to something else if you prefer. (Recall
+redefining commands from \novices{renewcom}.)
+
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-amsthm.tex}
+\null\par
+
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{amsthm}\newline
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{plain}\newline
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{theorem}\marg{Theorem}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{definition}\newline
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{defn}\marg{Definition}\newline
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{xmpl}\marg{Example}\oarg{chapter}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{remark}\newline
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{remark}\marg{Remark}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{defn}\oarg{Tautology}\glsni{label}\marg{def:tautology}\newline
+A \gls{emph}\marg{tautology} is a proposition that is always true for any
+value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{defn}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{defn}\oarg{Contradiction}\glsni{label}\marg{def:contradiction}\newline
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{contradiction} is a proposition that is always false for any
+value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{defn}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{theorem}\newline
+If proposition \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a tautology 
+then \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a contradiction,
+and conversely.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{proof}\newline
+If \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a tautology, then all
+elements of its truth table are true (by Definition\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{def:tautology}), 
+so all elements of the truth table for \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} 
+are false, therefore \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a
+contradiction (by Definition\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{def:contradiction}).\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{proof}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{theorem}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{xmpl}\glsni{label}\marg{ex:rain}\newline
+\gls{quotedblleft}It is raining or it is not raining\gls{quotedblright} is a tautology,
+but \glsni{quotedblleft}it is not raining and it is raining\glsni{quotedblright} is a
+contradiction.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{xmpl}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{remark}\newline
+Example\gls{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ex:rain} used De Morgan\gls{quoteright}s Law
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} (p \gls{vee} q) \gls{equiv} \glsni{sim} p \gls{wedge} \glsni{sim} q\glsni{dollarchar}.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{remark}
+\end{codelisting}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[amsthm.html]
+\noindent\textbf{Definition \refstepcounter{defn}\thedefn\label{def:tautology}} (Tautology). A \emph{tautology} is a
+proposition that is always true for any of its variables.
+\par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+\textbf{Definition \refstepcounter{defn}\thedefn\label{def:contradiction}} (Contradiction). A \emph{contradiction} is a
+proposition that is always false for any value of its variables.
+\par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+\textbf{Theorem \refstepcounter{theorem}\thetheorem.} \emph{If proposition $P$ is a tautology then 
+$\sim P$ is a contradiction, and conversely.}
+\par\vskip\baselineskip
+\noindent\emph{Proof.} If $P$ is a tautology, then all elements of
+its true table are true (by Definition~\ref*{def:tautology}), so all elements of the
+truth table for $\sim P$ are false, therefore $\sim P$ is a
+contradiction (by
+Definition~\ref*{def:contradiction}).\hfill$\openbox$\par
+\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+\textbf{Example~\refstepcounter{Example}\theExample\label{ex:rain}.} ``It is raining or it is not raining'' is a
+tautology, but ``it is not raining and it is raining'' is a
+contradiction.
+\par\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
+\emph{Remark}~\refstepcounter{Remark}\theRemark. Example~\ref*{ex:rain} used De~Morgan's Law 
+$\sim (p \vee q) \equiv \sim p \wedge \sim q$.
+\end{result}
+
+A new theorem style can be created using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newtheoremstyle}\marg{\meta{name}}\marg{\meta{space
+above}}\marg{\meta{space below}}\marg{\meta{body
+font}}\marg{\meta{indent}}\marg{\meta{head
+font}}\marg{\meta{post head punctuation}}\marg{\meta{post head
+space}}\marg{\meta{head spec}}
+\end{definition}
+This defines a~new theorem style called \meta{name}, which can later be set
+using \booklinebreak\gls{theoremstyle}. The other arguments are as follows:
+\begin{fwlist}{\meta{post head punctuation}}
+\fwitem{\meta{space above}} the amount of space above the
+theorem-like environment
+\fwitem{\meta{space below}} the amount of space below the
+theorem-like environment
+\fwitem{\meta{body font}} the font to be used in the main theorem
+body
+\fwitem{\meta{indent}} the amount of indentation (empty means
+no indent or use \nxgls{parindent} for normal paragraph
+indentation)
+\fwitem{\meta{head font}} the font to be used in the theorem
+header
+\fwitem{\meta{post head punctuation}} the punctuation to be inserted
+after the theorem head
+\fwitem{\meta{post head space}} the space to put
+after the theorem head (use \texttt{\marg{\glsni{visiblespace}}} for a~normal interword space or
+\gls{newline} for a~linebreak)
+\fwitem{\meta{head spec}} the theorem head spec
+\end{fwlist}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+This example creates a~new style called \texttt{note} that inserts a
+space of 2ex above the theorem and 2ex below.\footnote{Recall the \Indextt{ex} unit from
+\novices{length}.}  The body font is just
+the normal font. There is no indent, the theorem header is in small
+caps, a~full stop is put after the theorem head and a~line break is
+inserted between the theorem head and body:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newtheoremstyle}\marg{note}\glsni{percentchar} style name
+\marg{2ex}\glsni{percentchar} above space
+\marg{2ex}\glsni{percentchar} below space
+\marg{}\glsni{percentchar} body font
+\marg{}\glsni{percentchar} indent amount
+\marg{\gls{scshape}}\glsni{percentchar} head font
+\marg{.}\glsni{percentchar} post head punctuation
+\marg{\glsni{newline}}\glsni{percentchar} post head punctuation
+\marg{}\glsni{percentchar} head spec
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Once you have defined the style, you can now use it. For example (in
+the preamble):
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{theoremstyle}\marg{note}
+\gls{newtheorem}\marg{scnote}\marg{Note}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This defines a~theorem-like environment called \envname{scnote}. You
+can now use it later in the document:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{scnote}
+This is an example of a theorem-like environment.
+\glsni{end}\marg{scnote}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+This produces:
+\begin{result}[The header is in small-caps followed by a number and a full stop. The body of the environment starts on the next line and is in the normal font.]
+\vspace{2ex}
+\noindent
+\textsc{Note 1.}
+
+\vspace{2ex}
+\noindent
+This is an example of a theorem-like environment.
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{ntheorem}
+\subsection{The \sty{ntheorem} Package}
+\label{sec:ntheorem}
+
+The \isty{ntheorem} package provides nine predefined theorem styles, listed 
+in \tableref{tab:ntheoremstyles}. The 
+default is \texttt{plain}. When you define a
+new theorem-like environment with \booklinebreak\gls{newtheorem}, it is given
+the style \emph{currently in effect}. You can change the
+current style with:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{theoremstyle}\marg{\meta{style name}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{style name} is the name of the theorem style.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption[Theorem Styles]{Predefined Theorem Styles Provided by \sty{ntheorem}}
+\label{tab:ntheoremstyles}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{lp{0.7\linewidth}}
+\texttt{plain} & Like the original \LaTeX\ style\\
+\texttt{break} & Header is followed by a~line break\\
+\texttt{change} & Like \texttt{plain} but header and number interchanged\\
+\texttt{changebreak} & Combination of \texttt{change} and \texttt{break}\\
+\texttt{margin} & Number is set in the margin\\
+\texttt{marginbreak} & Like \texttt{margin} but header followed by
+a~line break\\
+\texttt{nonumberplain} & Like \texttt{plain} but without the number\\
+\texttt{nonumberbreak} & Like \texttt{break} but without the number\\
+\texttt{empty} & No number and no name. Only the optional argument
+is used in the header.
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+In addition to these styles, you can also use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{theoremheaderfont}\marg{\meta{declarations}}
+\end{definition}
+to set the header font to \meta{declarations}, which should consist
+of font declaration commands such as \gls{normalfont},
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{theorembodyfont}\marg{\meta{declarations}}
+\end{definition}
+to set the body font to \meta{declarations}, and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{theoremnumbering}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}
+to set the appearance of the theorem number, where \meta{style} may be one
+of: \texttt{arabic}, \texttt{roman}, \texttt{Roman}, \texttt{alph},
+\texttt{Alph}, \texttt{greek}, \texttt{Greek} or \texttt{fnsymbol}.
+Remember that the above commands all need to be used before the new
+theorem-like environment is defined.
+For additional commands that affect the style of the theorems, see the \isty{ntheorem}
+documentation~\cite{ntheorem}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{marginbreak}
+\glsni{theorembodyfont}\marg{\glsni{normalfont}}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{note}\marg{Note}\oarg{chapter}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{note}
+This is a sample note. The number is in the margin.
+\glsni{end}\marg{note}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Result\html{ (the vertical line in the image below indicates the boundary of the text
+area and won't appear in the PDF)}:
+\begin{result}
+\begin{note}
+This is a sample note. The number is in the margin.
+\end{note}
+\end{result}
+
+If you use the \istyopt{ntheorem}{standard} package option to
+\sty{ntheorem}, it will automatically define the following
+environments: \envname{Theorem}, \envname{Lemma},
+\envname{Proposition}, \envname{Corollary}, \envname{Satz},
+\envname{Korollar}, \envname{Definition}, \envname{Example},
+\envname{Beispiel}, \envname{Anmerkung}, \envname{Bemerkung},
+\envname{Remark}, \gls*{env-Proof} and
+\envname{Beweis}.
+
+\warning Unlike \isty{amsthm}'s \gls{env-proof} environment,
+\isty{ntheorem}'s \gls{env-Proof} environment appends its optional
+argument in parentheses, if present, to the proof title. (Recall
+from \htmlref{earlier}{amsthm-proof}\doifbook{
+\vpageref{amsthm-proof}} that \isty{amsthm}'s \gls{env-proof}
+environment uses its optional argument as a replacement for the
+default proof title.)
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-ntheorem.tex}
+\null\par
+
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{standard}\marg{ntheorem}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Tautology}\glsni{label}\marg{def:tautology}\newline
+A \gls{emph}\marg{tautology} is a~proposition that is always true for any
+value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Contradiction}\glsni{label}\marg{def:contradiction}\newline
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{contradiction} is a~proposition that is always false for any
+value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Theorem}\newline
+If proposition \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a~tautology 
+then \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a~contradiction,
+and conversely.\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Proof}\newline
+If \glsni{dollarchar}P\glsni{dollarchar} is a~tautology, then all
+elements of its truth table are true (by Definition\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{def:tautology}), 
+so all elements of the truth table for \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} 
+are false, therefore \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} P\glsni{dollarchar} is a
+contradiction (by Definition\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{def:contradiction}).\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Proof}\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Theorem}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Example}\glsni{label}\marg{ex:rain}\newline
+\glsni{quotedblleft}It is raining or it is not raining\glsni{quotedblright} is a~tautology,
+but \glsni{quotedblleft}it is not raining and it is raining\glsni{quotedblright} is a~contradiction.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Example}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Remark}\newline
+Example\gls{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{ex:rain} used De
+Morgan\glsni{quoteright}s Law
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{sim} (p \gls{vee} q) \gls{equiv} \glsni{sim} p \gls{wedge} \glsni{sim} q\glsni{dollarchar}.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Remark}\newline
+\end{codelisting}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[ntheorem.html]
+\begin{Definition}[Tautology]\label{nthm:def:tautology}
+A \emph{tautology} is a~proposition that is always true for any
+value of its variables.
+\end{Definition}
+
+\begin{Definition}[Contradiction]\label{nthm:def:contradiction}
+A \emph{contradiction} is a~proposition that is always false for any
+value of its variables.
+\end{Definition}
+
+\begin{Theorem}
+If proposition $P$ is a~tautology 
+then $\sim P$ is a~contradiction,
+and conversely.
+\begin{Proof}
+If $P$ is a tautology, then all elements of its truth table are
+true (by Definition~\ref{nthm:def:tautology}), so all elements of the
+truth table for $\sim P$ are false,
+therefore $\sim P$ is a contradiction (by
+Definition~\ref{nthm:def:contradiction}).
+\end{Proof}
+\end{Theorem}
+
+\begin{Example}\label{ex:rain2}
+``It is raining or it is not raining'' is a~tautology,
+but ``it is not raining and it is raining'' is a~contradiction.
+\end{Example}
+
+\begin{Remark}
+Example~\ref*{ex:rain2} used De Morgan's Law
+$\sim (p \vee q) \equiv \sim p \wedge \sim q$.
+\end{Remark}
+
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{algorithms}
+\section{Algorithms}
+\label{sec:algorithms}
+
+If you want to display an algorithm, such as pseudo-code, you can
+use a~combination of the \gls{env-tabbing} environment (described in
+\sectionref{sec:tabbing}) and a~theorem-like environment (described
+above in \sectionref{sec:newtheorem}). 
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} in the preamble:
+\gls{theoremstyle}\marg{break}
+\gls{theorembodyfont}\marg{\glsni{normalfont}}
+\gls{newtheorem}\marg{algorithm}\marg{Algorithm}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+\glsni{begin}\marg{algorithm}\oarg{Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{tabbing}
+1. \gls{tabstop}For \glsni{dollarchar}k=1\glsni{dollarchar} to maximum number of iterations\gls{dbbackslashchar}
+\gls{greaterthan}2. For \glsni{tabstop}\glsni{dollarchar}i=1\glsni{dollarchar} to \glsni{dollarchar}n\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}\glsni{greaterthan}Set 
+\glsni{begin}\marg{math}
+x\gls{underscorechar}i\gls{circumchar}\marg{(k)} = 
+\gls{frac}\marg{b\glsni{underscorechar}i-\gls{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{j=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{i-1}a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij}x\glsni{underscorechar}j\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k)}
+         -\glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{j=i+1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n}a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij}x\glsni{underscorechar}j\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k-1)}}\glsni{percentchar}
+     \marg{a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ii}}
+\glsni{end}\marg{math}
+\glsni{dbbackslashchar}
+\glsni{greaterthan}3. If \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{lvert}\gls{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k)}-\glsni{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k-1)}\gls{rvert} < \gls{epsilon}\glsni{dollarchar}, 
+where \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{epsilon}\glsni{dollarchar} is a specified stopping criteria, stop.
+\glsni{end}\marg{tabbing}
+\glsni{end}\marg{algorithm}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{result}
+\begin{algorithm}[Gauss-Seidel Algorithm]
+\begin{tabbing}
+1. \=For $k=1$ to maximum number of iterations\\
+\>2. For \=$i=1$ to $n$\\
+\>\>Set
+\begin{math}
+x_i^{(k)} =
+\frac{b_i-\sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)}
+-\sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}%
+{a_{ii}}
+\end{math}
+\\
+\>3. If $\lvert\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)}\rvert < \epsilon$,
+where $\epsilon$ is a specified stopping criteria, stop.
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{algorithm}
+\end{result}
+(See \novices[sec:vec]{vectors} to find out how to redefine 
+\glsni{vec} to display its argument in bold.)
+
+If you want a~more sophisticated approach, there are some packages
+available on \gls{ctan}, such as \isty{alg}, \isty{algorithm2e},
+\isty{algorithms} and \isty{algorithmicx}. I'm going to briefly
+introduce the \sty{algorithm2e} package here. This provides the
+\gls{env-algorithm} floating environment. Like the 
+\gls{env-figure} and \gls{env-table} environments described in 
+\novices[ch:floats]{floats}, the \glsni{env-algorithm} environment has an optional argument that
+specifies the placement.
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{algorithm}\oarg{\meta{placement}}
+\end{definition}
+If you are using a~class or package that already defines an
+\envname{algorithm} environment, you can use the
+\istyopt{algorithm2e}{algo2e} package option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{algo2e}\marg{algorithm2e}
+\end{codeS}
+This will define an environment called \gls{env-algorithm2e} instead
+of \glsni{env-algorithm} to avoid conflict.
+
+Within the body of the environment, you must mark the end of each
+line with \gls{algo2e.semicolon} regardless of whether you want a
+semi-colon to appear. To suppress the default end-of-line
+semi-colon, use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DontPrintSemicolon}
+\end{definition}
+To switch it back on again, use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{PrintSemicolon}
+\end{definition}
+There are a~variety of commands that may be used within the 
+\glsni{env-algorithm} environment. Some of the commands are
+described below, but for a~complete list you should consult the
+\sty{algorithm2e} documentation~\cite{algorithm2e}.\bookpagebreak
+
+First there are the commands for the algorithm input, output and
+data:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{KwIn}\marg{\meta{input}}\newline
+\gls{KwOut}\marg{\meta{output}}\newline
+\gls{KwData}\marg{\meta{input}}\newline
+\gls{KwResult}\marg{\meta{output}}
+\end{definition}
+Next there are commands for basic keywords:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{KwTo}\newline
+\gls{KwRet}\marg{\meta{value}}\newline
+\gls{Return}\marg{\meta{value}}
+\end{definition}
+There are a~lot of conditionals, but here's a~selection:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{If}\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{then block}}\newline
+\gls{uIf}\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{then block without end}}\newline
+\gls{ElseIf}\marg{\meta{else-if block}}\newline
+\gls{uElseIf}\marg{\meta{else-if block without end}}\newline
+\gls{Else}\marg{\meta{else block}}
+\end{definition}
+Similarly there are a~lot of loops, but here's a~selection:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{For}\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{body}}\newline
+\gls{While}\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{body}}
+\end{definition}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+The above algorithm can be written using the \gls{env-algorithm2e}
+environment as follows (this document has used the
+\istyopt{algorithm2e}{algo2e} package option):
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-algorithms.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{algorithm2e}
+\gls{caption}\marg{Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\gls{label}\marg{alg:gauss-seidel}
+\glsni{KwIn}
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+ scalar \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{epsilon}\glsni{dollarchar},
+ matrix \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{mathbf}\marg{A} = (a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij})\glsni{dollarchar}, 
+ vector \glsni{dollarchar}\gls{vec}\marg{b}\glsni{dollarchar}
+ and initial vector \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{vec}\marg{x}\gls{circumchar}\marg{(0)}\glsni{dollarchar}
+}
+\glsni{For}\marg{\glsni{dollarchar}k\gls{leftarrow} 1\glsni{dollarchar} \glsni{KwTo} maximum iterations}
+\marg{
+   \glsni{For}\marg{\glsni{dollarchar}i\glsni{leftarrow} 1\glsni{dollarchar} \glsni{KwTo} \glsni{dollarchar}n\glsni{dollarchar}}
+   \marg{
+      \glsni{dollarchar}
+      x\glsni{underscorechar}i\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k)} =
+      \glsni{frac}
+      \marg{
+        b\glsni{underscorechar}i-\glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{j=1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{i-1}a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij}x\glsni{underscorechar}j\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k)}
+        -\glsni{sum}\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{j=i+1}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{n}a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij}x\glsni{underscorechar}j\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k-1)}
+      }\glsni{percentchar}
+      \marg{a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ii}}
+      \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{algo2e.semicolon}
+   }
+   \glsni{If}\marg{\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{lvert}\glsni{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k)}-\glsni{vec}\marg{x}\glsni{circumchar}\marg{(k-1)}\glsni{rvert} < \glsni{epsilon}\glsni{dollarchar}}
+   \marg{Stop}
+}
+\glsni{end}\marg{algorithm2e}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+The result is shown in Algorithm~\ref{alg:gauss-seidel}.
+
+\begin{algorithm2e}
+\caption{Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\label{alg:gauss-seidel}
+\KwIn
+{%
+ Scalar $\epsilon$,
+ matrix $\mathbf{A}=(a_{ij})$,
+ vector $\vec{b}$
+ and initial vector $\vec{x}^{(0)}$
+}
+\For{$k\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo maximum iterations}
+{
+   \For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}
+   {
+     $
+      x_i^{(k)} =
+      \frac{b_i-\sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)}
+      -\sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}%
+      {a_{ii}}
+      $\;
+   }
+   \If{$\lvert\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)}\rvert < \epsilon$}{Stop}
+}
+\end{algorithm2e}
+
+The \gls{env-algorithm} environment (as defined by \sty{algorithm2e} 
+without the \istyopt{algorithm2e}{algo2e} option) or \gls{env-algorithm2e}
+environment (as defined with the \optfmt{algo2e} option)
+uses the \icounter{algocf} counter.  So in this document, to ensure
+that the \envname{algorithm} environment defined with
+\gls{newtheorem} used the same counter as \gls{env-algorithm2e},
+I~had the following in my preamble:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{ntheorem}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{algo2e}\marg{algorithm2e}
+
+\glsni{theoremstyle}\marg{break}
+\glsni{theorembodyfont}\marg{\glsni{normalfont}}
+\glsni{newtheorem}\marg{algorithm}\oarg{algocf}\marg{Algorithm}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\setnode{siunitx}
+\section{Formatting SI Units}
+\label{sec:siunitx}
+
+If you need to typeset numbers and units then I~strongly recommend
+that you use the \isty{siunitx} package. This section just provides
+a~brief introduction to that package. You will need to read the
+\sty{siunitx} package documentation~\cite{siunitx} if you want
+further details.
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{num}\marg{\meta{number}}
+\end{definition}
+This command typesets \meta{number}, adding appropriate spacing between
+number groups where necessary. It also adds a~leading zero if
+omitted before the decimal point and identifies exponents. Note that
+the command recognises both \dq{\texttt{.}} and \dq{\texttt{,}} as the
+decimal marker. If you want one of these characters between number
+groups (instead of the default space) you can change the settings,
+but it's best to stick to the default settings unless instructed to
+do otherwise.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{code}
+Out of \glsni{num}\marg{12890} experiments, \glsni{num}\marg{1289} of them had a mean
+squared error of \glsni{num}\marg{.346} and \glsni{num}\marg{128} of them had a mean squared
+error of \glsni{num}\marg{1.23e-6}.
+\end{code}\reportpagebreak\noindent
+Result:
+\begin{result}[sinum.html]
+Out of \num{12890} experiments, \num{1289} of them had a mean
+squared error of \num{.346} and \num{128} of them had a mean squared
+error of \num{1.23e-6}.
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{ang}\marg{\meta{angle}}
+\end{definition}
+This command typesets an angle. The argument \meta{angle} may be a
+single number or three (some possibly empty) values separated by
+semi-colons.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+The result formed an arc from \glsni{ang}\marg{45} to \glsni{ang}\marg{60;2;3}.
+\end{codeS}
+Result:
+\begin{resultS}[siang.html]
+The result formed an arc from \ang{45} to \ang{60;2;3}.
+\end{resultS}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{si}\marg{\meta{unit}}
+\end{definition}
+This command typesets a~unit. The \meta{unit} can be formed from
+commands like \gls{metre}, \gls{gram}, \gls{second} or \gls{kilo}.
+(See the \sty{siunitx} documentation~\cite{siunitx} for the full
+list.)\bookpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+The distance was measured in \glsni{si}\marg{\glsni{kilo}\glsni{metre}} and the
+area in \glsni{si}\marg{\glsni{kilo}\glsni{metre}\gls{squared}}.
+The acceleration was given in \glsni{si}\marg{\glsni{metre}\gls{per}\gls{square}\glsni{second}}.
+\end{code}\screenpagebreak
+Result:
+\begin{result}[siunit.html]
+The distance was measured in \si{\kilo\metre} and the
+area in \si{\kilo\metre\squared}.
+The acceleration was given in \si{\metre\per\square\second}.
+\end{result}
+
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{SI}\marg{\meta{number}}\marg{\meta{unit}}
+\end{definition}
+This combines the functionality of \glsni{num} and \glsni{si} so
+that you can typeset both a~number and a~unit.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{code}
+The acceleration was approximately \glsni{SI}\marg{9.78}\marg{\glsni{metre}\glsni{per}\glsni{square}\glsni{second}}.
+\end{code}
+Result:
+\begin{resultS}[sinumunit.html]
+The acceleration was approximately \SI{9.78}{\metre\per\square\second}.
+\end{resultS}
+
+% Generating a~Bibliography
+
+\setnode{citations}
+\chapter{Generating a~Bibliography}
+\label{ch:citations}
+
+\novices[sec:bib]{biblio} introduced the 
+\gls{env-thebibliography} environment. While it is 
+possible to write this environment yourself, as was done in
+Volume~1, it's not practical with a~large number of citations.
+
+Instead, the preferred method is to create an external database
+of bibliographic data and use an application that fetches the relevant
+information from that database and writes a~file containing
+the \glsni{env-thebibliography} environment, which can then be input
+into your document. This means that:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Only the references that you cite are included in the
+bibliography.  (Examiners tend to fault uncited references\footnote{%
+When your examiners read through your thesis, they can check off each
+citation they encounter against your bibliography. When they reached
+the end of the thesis, they can then look through the bibliography
+for unchecked entries. One or two may appear the result of 
+carelessness, whereas a~large quantity will look like padding and
+may lead the examiners to suspect a~certain amount of duplicity
+on your part.}.)
+
+\item References are displayed in a~consistent manner.
+
+\item Entries can be sorted in order of citation or alphabetically.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+Traditionally the \iappnamelink{bibtex}{http://www.bibtex.org/} application 
+is used to generate the \glsni{env-thebibliography} environment. It
+comes with \TeX\ distributions and most books on \LaTeX\ cover
+\appname{bibtex}.  Unfortunately \appname{bibtex} has some
+drawbacks, most notably the complexity of creating your own custom
+style. UTF-8 has also been a~problem, although newer versions of
+\appname{bibtex} apparently fix this.
+
+In 2006, Philipp Lehman brought out the \isty{biblatex} package to
+provide a~more flexible way of typesetting bibliographies. This
+originally used \appname{bibtex} to just sort the entries and used \LaTeX\ macros to deal
+with the actual formatting, but it is now moving over to using
+\iappnamelink{biber}{http://biblatex-biber.sourceforge.net/} instead
+of \appname{bibtex}.
+
+Since some journals, conferences or other types of scientific
+publishers require you to use \appname{bibtex},
+\sectionref{sec:bibtex} provides a~brief introduction to
+\appname{bibtex} and then \sectionref{sec:biblatex} discusses
+\sty{biblatex} and \appname{biber}. But first
+\sectionref{sec:creatingbibfile} covers creating the actual
+database, which is required for both methods.
+
+\setnode{creatingbibfile}
+\section{Creating a~Bibliography Database}
+\label{sec:creatingbibfile}
+
+This section covers creating a~\texttt{.bib} file that contains the
+bibliographic information you want to cite in your documents.
+You can use an ordinary text editor to create a~bibliographic
+database (as described in \sectionref{sec:bibformat}) but it can be
+difficult to remember the names of the required fields and it's easy
+to make syntactic mistakes. It can also be hard to keep track of
+entries in a~large database. To make life easier, there are a~number
+of bibliography reference managers available that provide a
+convenient graphical interface. One such application is
+\appname{JabRef} and is described \htmlref{next}{sec:jabref}.
+
+\setnode{jabref}
+\subsection{JabRef}
+\label{sec:jabref}
+
+I've chosen to describe \iappname{JabRef} here because it's an open
+source Java application that can run on any operating system that
+has the \htmladdnormallinkfoot{Java Runtime
+Environment}{http://www.java.com/getjava/} installed (at least
+version 1.5). You can download \appname{JabRef} from
+\url{http://jabref.sourceforge.net/download.php}. Linux users may
+also be able to install it via their \dq{Add/Remove Software} tool.
+(If you have successfully been using
+\htmlref{\appname{arara}}{sec:arara}, you already have Java
+installed.)
+
+Once you have installed it, run \appname{JabRef} and select
+\menu{File}\menuto\menu{New database} to create a~new database
+(see \figureref{fig:jabref1}). When you save your data, it's saved as a
+BibTeX (\texttt{.bib}) file.
+
+Note that if you use the \isty{inputenc} package in 
+your thesis (see \novices{inputenc}) you'll have to make sure
+\appname{JabRef} is using the same encoding as your document. You
+can do this by selecting \menu{Options}\menuto\menu{Preferences} to
+open the Preferences dialog box and set the default encoding as
+appropriate. For example, I~use UTF-8 so I've set that as the default
+encoding (see \figureref{fig:jabref-pref}). I~also need to change
+the database encoding in the \dq{Database properties} dialog, 
+\figureref{fig:jabref-dataprop}, which
+can be opened using \menu{File}\menuto\menu{Database properties}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref1}
+ {\caption{JabRef}}
+ {fig:jabref1}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref-pref}
+ {\caption{JabRef Preferences}}
+ {fig:jabref-pref}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref-dataprop}
+ {\caption{JabRef Database Properties}}
+ {fig:jabref-dataprop}
+\end{figure}
+
+To create a~new entry you can select \menu{BibTeX}\menuto\menu{New
+entry}, which will open the dialog box shown in
+\figureref{fig:jabref2}. Now you need to click on the button
+appropriate to the entry. For example, click on \dq{Article} for an
+article in a~journal or click on \dq{Inproceedings} for a~paper
+in a~conference proceedings. 
+
+\xminisec{Example (Book):}
+
+Suppose I~want to enter information about a
+book. I~need to select \menu{BibTeX}\menuto\menu{New entry} and then click on the button labelled \dq{Book}. This now displays fields in
+which I~can enter the relevant information (see \figureref{fig:jabref3}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref2}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Select Entry Type)}}
+ {fig:jabref2}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref3}
+ {\caption{JabRef (New Entry)}}
+ {fig:jabref3}
+\end{figure}
+
+Next I~need to enter information in the \dq{Required fields} tab. This will
+usually include the title and the author. I~also need to specify a
+key that uniquely identifies this entry. If you have read 
+\novices[sec:bib]{biblio} this key corresponds to the mandatory argument 
+of \gls{bibitem} and is also used in \glsi{cite}.
+\figureref{fig:jabref4} shows the details for my new entry. I've set
+the key to the author's surname followed by the year to make it easy
+to remember. This key won't appear anywhere in the document, it's
+just used to identify the entry, just like the \gls{label}/\gls{ref}
+mechanism. Alternatively, I~can click on the \dq{Generate BibTeX
+Key} button \incGraphics{pictures/generatekey} to automatically
+insert a~unique key.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref4}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Entering the Required Fields)}}
+ {fig:jabref4}
+\end{figure}
+
+There are also optional fields you can specify as well. In
+\figureref{fig:jabref5}, I've added the book's edition.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref5}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Entering Optional Fields)}}
+ {fig:jabref5}
+\end{figure}
+
+\xminisec{Example (Journal Article):}
+
+Now I~want to enter an article in a~journal. So I~need to go back
+to \menu{BibTeX}\menuto\menu{New entry} and click on \dq{Article}.
+This time I've used the \dq{Generate BibTeX Key} button to generate
+the key to save me typing. (See \figureref{fig:jabref6}.) I've also
+used the \dq{General} tab to enter the DOI for this article. The
+entry now has an icon \incGraphics{pictures/doibutton} next to it. I~can
+click on this button to direct my web browser to the article's entry
+on the Internet.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref6}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Adding an Article)}}
+ {fig:jabref6}
+\end{figure}
+
+BibTeX uses the European assumption\faq{\BiBTeX\ sorting and name
+prefixes}{bibprefixsort} that names are composed of
+forenames, an optional \dq{von} part which starts with a~lower case
+letter, a~surname and an optional \dq{jr} part. In order to enable
+BibTeX to correctly identify these components, names in the author
+or editor fields must be entered in one of the formats listed in
+\tableref{tab:bibnameformats}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Name Formats for Bibliographic Data}
+\label{tab:bibnameformats}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{l}
+\meta{forenames} \meta{von} \meta{surname}\\
+\meta{von} \meta{surname}, \meta{forenames}\\
+\meta{von} \meta{surname}, \meta{jr}, \meta{forenames}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\bookpagebreak
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Entry & \bfseries Abbreviated as\\
+\midrule
+\ttfamily Alex Thomas von Neumann & A.T. von Neumann\\
+\ttfamily John Chris \{Smith Jones\} & J.C. Smith Jones\\
+\ttfamily van de Klee, Mary-Jane & M.-J. van de Klee\\
+\ttfamily Smith, Jr, Fred John & F.J. Smith, Jr\\
+\ttfamily \verb|Maria {\MakeUppercase{d}e La} Cruz| & M. De La Cruz\\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+Compare the last example with: \texttt{Maria De La Cruz} which would
+be abbreviated to: M.~D.~L.~Cruz, which is incorrect. Let's analyse
+this last example in more detail: BibTeX always expects the \dq{von}
+part to start with a~lower case letter, but \dq{De} and \dq{La} both
+start with an upper case letter, so BibTeX will assume that these
+form part of the forenames. However, BibTeX will ignore any \LaTeX\
+commands such as \faq{Case-changing
+oddities}{casechange}\gls{MakeUppercase} in
+\verb|\MakeUppercase{d}e| since it assumes that the command is an
+accent command\faq{Accents in bibliographies}{bibaccent}. So when it
+parses \verb|\MakeUppercase{d}e| it will skip \glsni{MakeUppercase}
+and look at the following letter. In this case it is \dq{d} which is
+lower case, so from BibTeX's point of view the word
+\verb|\MakeUppercase{d}e| starts with a~lower case letter (\dq{d}),
+so it is therefore the \dq{von} part. You can either do the same
+with the \dq{La} part, or, as in the above example, you can place it
+in the same group as \verb|\MakeUppercase{d}e|.
+
+Multiple authors should be separated by the keyword
+\dq{and}. \textbf{Don't use a~comma to separate the authors.}  
+Here is an example with three authors:
+\begin{codeS}
+Gavin C. Cawley and Nicola L. C. Talbot and Mark Girolami
+\end{codeS}
+If the author is an institution or company that
+happens to have the word \dq{and} in its name, such as \dq{Smith and
+Jones Inc}, then you need to group the \dq{and} to indicate that you
+mean the word \dq{and} rather than the keyword:
+\begin{codeS}
+Smith \marg{and} Jones Inc
+\end{codeS}
+
+\figureref{fig:jabref7} shows the entry for a~paper in a~conference
+proceedings, so for that one I~used \menu{BibTeX}\menuto\menu{New
+entry} and clicked on the \dq{Inproceedings} button.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref7}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Adding a~Conference Paper)}}
+ {fig:jabref7}
+\end{figure}
+
+Notice the way I've written the title for this entry:
+\begin{code}
+Sparse multinomial logistic regression via \marg{Bayesian} \marg{L1}
+regularisation
+\end{code}
+BibTeX automatically converts the title to lower case (apart from
+the initial letter) but here both \dq{Bayesian} and \dq{L1} should
+begin with a~capital. I~therefore need to enclose those words in
+braces to instruct BibTeX not to convert their case.
+
+Multiple editors must also be separated by the \dq{and} keyword, as
+shown in \figureref{fig:jabref8}. For that entry, the editors are
+listed as:
+\begin{codeS}
+Bernhard Sch\"{o}lkopf and John Platt and Thomas Hofmann
+\end{codeS}
+Note that if I~don't use the \isty{inputenc} package, I~need to
+change this to:
+\begin{codeS}
+Bernhard Sch\gls{doublequote}\marg{o}lkopf and John Platt and Thomas Hofmann
+\end{codeS}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref8}
+ {\caption{JabRef (Adding Editor List)}}
+ {fig:jabref8}
+\end{figure}
+
+It's also possible to import entries from other formats, such as
+Copac or ISI, using \menu{File}\menuto\menu{Import into new database} or
+\menu{file}\menuto\menu{Import into current database}.
+Alternatively, you can copy and paste a~plain text reference using
+\menu{BibTeX}\menuto\menu{New entry from plain text}. This again
+opens the dialog box where you need to click on the entry type, but
+then it opens the \dq{Plain text import} window. 
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+Suppose I~want to add an entry for an article whose DOI
+is 10.1007/s10994-008-5055-9. First, I~direct my browser to
+\htmladdnormallink{\texttt{http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/\reportlinebreak\screenlinebreak s10994-008-5055-9}}{http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10994-008-5055-9}, which takes me to
+the article's web page. In this case, it's in a~journal published by
+Springer, so my browser is redirected to the SpringerLink cite.
+There I~can use the export as text only option, then copy and paste
+the reference into \appname{JabRef}'s import window, as shown in 
+\figureref{fig:jabref-textimport1}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref-textimport1}
+ {\caption{Importing a~Plain Text Reference}}
+ {fig:jabref-textimport1}
+\end{figure}
+
+Next, I~need to select text, for example an author's name, and select the
+appropriate field in the \dq{Work options} list. Then click on the
+\dq{Insert} button. For example, in
+\figureref{fig:jabref-textimport2} I~have selected an author's name
+then I~selected the \dq{author} field in the \dq{Work options} list.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref-textimport2}
+ {\caption{Importing a~Plain Text Reference (Selecting a~Field)}}
+ {fig:jabref-textimport2}
+\end{figure}
+
+Next I~clicked on the \dq{Insert} button. Now the author's name is
+highlighted in red and the author field has a~tick next to it (see
+\figureref{fig:jabref-textimport3}). I~can repeat this process for
+the next author. (Just make sure the \dq{Append} rather than
+\dq{Override} radio button is selected.)
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref-textimport3}
+ {\caption{Importing a~Plain Text Reference (Field Selected)}}
+ {fig:jabref-textimport3}
+\end{figure}
+
+I~can repeat this for all the different fields. Each time, I~select
+the text in the raw source panel, then select the appropriate field from
+the \dq{Work options} list and then click \dq{Insert}. Once I~have
+finished, I~then need to click \dq{Accept}.
+
+\setnode{bibformat}
+\subsection{Writing the .bib File Manually}
+\label{sec:bibformat}
+
+It may be that you don't want to or can't use a~bibliography
+management application, such as
+\htmlref{\appname{JabRef}}{sec:jabref}. In which case,
+you can create the \texttt{.bib} file in an ordinary text editor,
+such as the one you use to write your \LaTeX\ documents.
+When you save the file, make sure you give it the extension
+\texttt{.bib}.  Entries in this file should have the following 
+form\faq{Creating a~BibTeX bibliography}{buildbib}:
+
+\vbox{\begin{ttfamily}
+\begin{tabbing}
+xxx\=\kill
+@\meta{entry type}\{\meta{keyword},\\
+   \>\meta{field name} \== "\meta{text}",\\
+   \>\>   \vellipsis\\
+   \>\meta{field name} = "\meta{text}"\\
+\}
+\end{tabbing}
+\end{ttfamily}}
+\noindent where \meta{entry type} indicates the type of entry (e.g.\ book or article).
+Standard entry types are listed in \tableref{tab:entrytype}.
+
+\begin{table}[htbp]
+\caption{Standard BiBTeX entry types}
+\label{tab:entrytype}
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\toprule
+\bfseries Entry Name & \bfseries Description\\
+\midrule
+\ibibentry{article} & Article from a~journal\\
+\ibibentry{book} & Published book\\
+\ibibentry{booklet} & Printed work without a~publisher\\
+\ibibentry{conference} & Identical to \ibibentry{inproceedings}\\
+\ibibentry{inbook} & Part, chapter, section etc of a~book\\
+\ibibentry{incollection} & A chapter of a~book with its own author and title\\
+\ibibentry{inproceedings} & An article in a~conference proceedings\\
+\ibibentry{manual} & Technical documentation\\
+\ibibentry{mastersthesis} & A master's thesis\\
+\ibibentry{misc} & Non-standard work\\
+\ibibentry{phdthesis} & PhD thesis\\
+\ibibentry{proceedings} & Conference proceedings\\
+\ibibentry{techreport} & Report published by an institution\\
+\ibibentry{unpublished} & Unpublished work with an author and
+title\\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Within an entry, \meta{keyword} is a~short label that is used to cite
+this work with the \glsi{cite} command. If you have written
+bibliographies with the \gls{env-thebibliography}
+environment, it's the same as the
+argument to \gls{bibitem}.  There then follows a~comma-separated
+list of fields of the form \meta{field name} \texttt{=} \meta{value}.
+The \meta{field name} indicates what kind of field it is, e.g.\
+\ibibfield{title} or \ibibfield{author}.  \tableref{tab:fields} lists
+the standard fields.  Note that some bibliography styles may define
+additional non-standard fields, such as \texttt{email} or 
+\texttt{url}.\faq{URLS in BibTeX bibliographies}{citeURL}
+See the Bib\TeX\ documentation~\cite{bibtex} for information about other fields not
+listed in \tableref{tab:fields}.
+
+\begin{table}[hbtp]
+\caption{Standard BiBTeX fields}
+\label{tab:fields}
+\centering\latex{\ifscreen\small\fi}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\ibibfield{address} & Publisher/Institution's address\\
+\ibibfield{author} & Author names\\
+\ibibfield{booktitle} & Title of book where only a~part of the book is being cited\\
+\ibibfield{chapter} & Chapter or section number\\
+\ibibfield{edition} & The edition of the book\\
+\ibibfield{howpublished} & How a~non-standard work was published\\
+\ibibfield{institution} & The institute sponsoring the work\\
+\ibibfield{journal} & The name of the journal\\
+\ibibfield{month} & The month the work was published\\
+\ibibfield{note} & Any additional information\\
+\ibibfield{number} & The number of the journal, technical report etc\\
+\ibibfield{organization} & Organization sponsoring conference or manual\\
+\ibibfield{pages} & Page number or page range\\
+\ibibfield{publisher} & Publisher's name\\
+\ibibfield{school} & Academic institution where thesis was written\\
+\ibibfield{series} & Name of a~series\\
+\ibibfield{title} & The title of the work\\
+\ibibfield{type} & The type of technical report\\
+\ibibfield{volume} & The volume number.
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+The required and optional fields for the standard entry types are
+listed in \tableref{tab:reqopt}.  If an entry has a~field that is
+neither required nor optional, BibTeX will ignore it.  This means
+that you can have a~field called, say, \ibibfield{abstract}, which will
+be ignored by the standard bibliography styles, but will be included if
+you use a~bibliography style that has an \ibibfield{abstract} field.
+So you can store additional information in the database that won't
+appear in the bibliography.
+
+\begin{fieldtab}
+\ibibentry{article} & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{journal}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{volume}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note},
+\ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{pages} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{book} & 
+\ibibfield{author} or \ibibfield{editor}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{publisher}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{edition}, \ibibfield{volume} or
+\ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note},
+\ibibfield{pages}, \ibibfield{series} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{booklet} & \ibibfield{title} &
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{howpublished},
+\ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note}, \ibibfield{year}
+\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{inbook} & 
+\ibibfield{author} or \ibibfield{editor}, \ibibfield{chapter} or \ibibfield{pages}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{publisher}, 
+\ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{edition}, \ibibfield{volume} or \ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note}, 
+\ibibfield{series}, \ibibfield{type} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{incollection} & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{booktitle}, \ibibfield{publisher}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{chapter}, \ibibfield{editor}, \ibibfield{edition}, \ibibfield{volume} or \ibibfield{number}, 
+\ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note}, \ibibfield{pages},
+\ibibfield{series}, \ibibfield{type} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{inproceedings} & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{booktitle}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{editor}, \ibibfield{volume} or \ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note}, 
+\ibibfield{organization}, \ibibfield{pages}, \ibibfield{publisher},
+\ibibfield{series}, \ibibfield{type} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{manual} & \ibibfield{title} & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{edition}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note}, \ibibfield{organization}, 
+\ibibfield{year}\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{mastersthesis} & \ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{school}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note},
+\ibibfield{type}\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{misc} & --- & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{howpublished}, \ibibfield{month},
+\ibibfield{note}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{year}\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{phdthesis} & \ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{school}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note},
+\ibibfield{type}\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{proceedings} & \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{year} & 
+\ibibfield{editor}, \ibibfield{organization}, \ibibfield{address}, \ibibfield{volume} or \ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{series},
+\ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{publisher},
+\ibibfield{note}\tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{techreport} & 
+\ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{institution}, \ibibfield{year} &
+\ibibfield{type}, \ibibfield{number}, \ibibfield{address},
+\ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{note} \tabularnewline
+\ibibentry{unpublished} & \ibibfield{author}, \ibibfield{title}, \ibibfield{note} &
+\ibibfield{month}, \ibibfield{year}
+\end{fieldtab}\screenpagebreak
+
+The \ibibfield{author} and \ibibfield{editor} fields have the same
+format as described in \sectionref{sec:jabref}. That is, each
+name should be in one of the forms listed in \tableref{tab:bibnameformats},
+and multiple authors or editors must be separated with the keyword
+\dq{and}.
+
+\xminisec{Example (Multiple Authors):}
+
+This example uses the \ibibentry{book} entry:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book{goossens97,
+   author = "Goossens, Michel and Rahtz, Sebastian and
+             Mittelbach, Frank",
+   title = "The \LaTeX\ graphics companion: illustrating
+            documents with \TeX\ and {PostScript}",
+   publisher = "Addison Wesley Longman, Inc",
+   year = 1997
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+In this example, the \meta{keyword} is \verb|goossens97|. That is
+the identifying key used in \glsi{cite}, described \htmlref{below}{sec:bibtex}.
+The standard bibliography styles usually convert titles to lower case, 
+so the name PostScript is enclosed in curly braces to prevent this from
+happening.
+
+Note that curly braces \verb|{}| can be used instead of double quotes.
+The above example can just as easily be written:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+@book{goossens97,
+   author = {Goossens, Michel and Rahtz, Sebastian and
+             Mittelbach, Frank},
+   title = {The \LaTeX\ graphics companion: illustrating
+            documents with \TeX\ and {PostScript}},
+   publisher = {Addison Wesley Longman, Inc},
+   year = 1997
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+
+Numbers (such as the year 1997) don't need to be delimited with quotes 
+or braces.  So you can have
+\begin{codeS}
+pages = 10
+\end{codeS}
+but a~page range would need to be delimited:
+\begin{codeS}
+\begin{alltt}
+pages = "10\gls{endash}45"
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Bibliography styles always have three-letter abbreviations for months:
+\texttt{jan}, \texttt{feb}, \texttt{mar}, etc.  These should be used
+instead of typing them in explicitly, as their format depends on the
+bibliography style.  These abbreviations should be entered without
+quotes. For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{verbatim}
+@inproceedings{talbot97,
+   author    = "Talbot, Nicola and Cawley, Gavin",
+   title     = "A fast index assignment algorithm for
+                robust vector quantisation of image data",
+   booktitle = "Proceedings of the I.E.E.E. International
+                Conference on Image Processing",
+   address   = "Santa Barbara, California, USA",
+   month     = oct,
+   year      = 1997
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{code}
+
+\setnode{bibtex}
+\section{BibTeX}
+\label{sec:bibtex}
+
+Now that we've created a~\texttt{.bib} file (as described 
+\htmlref{above}{sec:creatingbibfile}) we next need to look at how to
+incorporate the information in the database into a~\LaTeX\ document.
+As mentioned in \novices[sec:bib]{biblio}, entries are cited in the document using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{cite}\oarg{\meta{text}}\marg{\meta{key list}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{key list} is a~comma-separated list of keys. Each key
+uniquely identifies an entry in the database. If you used
+\appname{JabRef} (\sectionref{sec:jabref}), this is the key you
+entered in the \dq{Bibtexkey} field. If you wrote the \texttt{.bib}
+file in a~text editor (\sectionref{sec:bibformat}) it's the 
+\meta{keyword} bit at the start of the list of fields for the entry.
+
+Next you need to specify what type of bibliography style you want to
+use.  There are many available, but the basic ones 
+are:\faq{Choosing a~bibliography style}{whatbst}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ibst{abbrv}] Entries sorted alphabetically with abbreviated
+first names, months and journal names.
+
+\item[\ibst{alpha}] Entries sorted alphabetically with the citation
+represented by abbreviated author surname and year instead of a~number.
+
+\item[\ibst{plain}] Entries sorted alphabetically, with the citation
+represented by a~number.
+
+\item[\ibst{unsrt}]  Entries sorted according to citation with the
+citation represented by a~number.
+
+\end{description}
+The style is specified in your \LaTeX\ document with the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{bibliographystyle}\marg{\meta{style}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{style} is the name of the style. Some people put this
+command in the document's preamble and some people put it near their
+bibliography, but wherever you choose to put it, this command
+should only be used once.
+
+The actual bibliography itself is input into the document using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{bibliography}\marg{\meta{database}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{database} is the name of the database \emph{without the
+\texttt{.bib} extension}. In fact, this argument can be a
+comma-separated list of databases if your entries are stored across
+multiple files.
+
+Recall the example thesis in \listingref{ex:thesis1} ended with:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} The bibliography will go here
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}\bookpagebreak\noindent
+If my references are stored in the file \examplecode{thesis-ref.bib},
+then I~can replace the above comment as follows:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-biblio.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{bibliographystyle}\marg{plain}
+\glsni{bibliography}\marg{thesis-ref}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+Elsewhere in my document I~need some citations. For example:
+\begin{code}
+See Turabian\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{cite}\marg{turabian96} for 
+a~comprehensive guide on preparing a~thesis.
+\end{code}
+If you are using \iappname{arara} (see \sectionref{sec:arara}) you
+need the following lines in your source code:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{bibtex}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+If you are using \iappname{latexmk} (see \sectionref{sec:latexmk})
+make sure you are using the \texttt{-bibtex} argument
+(\figureref{fig:texworks-latexmkbibtex}).
+
+If you are not using either \appname{latexmk} or \appname{arara},
+you will need to run \PDFLaTeX, then run Bib\TeX, then run
+\PDFLaTeX\ twice more (see \sectionref{sec:build}).
+
+If your citations appear as two question marks ?? in your PDF, then
+the citation key you used hasn't been recognised. This could be that
+you've forgotten the Bib\TeX\ and subsequent \emph{two} \PDFLaTeX\
+calls, or it could be that the key hasn't been defined, or you have
+misspelt it.
+
+Recall from \novices[sec:bib]{biblio} that the bibliography doesn't
+usually get added to the table of contents for most class files, but
+the \koma\ classes provide the options \scrclsopt[totocnumbered]{bibliography} and
+\scrclsopt[totoc]{bibliography}, that add a~numbered or
+unnumbered bibliography to the table of contents.
+
+You can add backlinks from your bibliography back to the section or page where
+the entries were cited using the \istyopt{hyperref}{backref} option
+of the \isty{hyperref} package. (The \sty{hyperref} package should
+usually be loaded last.) For example, to have backreferences to the
+pages on which the citation occurs:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{usepackage}\oarg{backref}\marg{hyperref}
+\end{codeS}
+The \sty{hyperref} package is covered in more detail in
+\latexpdfdoc.
+
+\setnode{natbib}
+\subsection{Author--Year Citations}
+\label{sec:natbib}
+
+The default behaviour of citations with bibliography styles such as
+\texttt{plain} is to produce a~numerical reference in square brackets.
+If you're using \iappname{bibtex} (rather than \isty{biblatex},
+described \htmlref{below}{sec:biblatex}) you
+can override this using a~number of packages. One such package is
+\isty{natbib}. This comes with some drop-in replacements for the
+standard bibliography styles: \ibst{plainnat}, \ibst{unsrtnat}
+and \ibst{abbrvnat}. The \sty{natbib} package comes with a~variety of
+package options, but I'm just going to mention a~few of them:
+\istyopt{natbib}{authoryear} for author--year citations (default),
+\istyopt{natbib}{numbers} for numerical citations,
+\istyopt{natbib}{super} for superscripted numerical citations,
+\istyopt{natbib}{round} for round parentheses,
+\istyopt{natbib}{square} for square parentheses
+and \istyopt{natbib}{sort\&compress} which sorts multiple citations
+and compresses consecutive numbers into a~range. For example, 
+[4,2,8,3] will become [2--4,8].
+
+So for citations that give the author and year rather than a~number,
+you need to load \sty{natbib} in the preamble:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{round}\marg{natbib}
+\end{codeS}
+and specify one of the \sty{natbib} bibliography styles:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{bibliographystyle}\marg{plainnat}
+\end{codeS}
+There are two main replacements for \gls{cite}:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{citet}\oarg{\meta{pre}}\oarg{\meta{post}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}
+for textual citations and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{citep}\oarg{\meta{pre}}\oarg{\meta{post}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}
+for parenthetical citations.
+
+Unlike \glsni{cite}, these commands have two optional arguments. The
+second \meta{post} is a~suffix, the same as \glsni{cite}'s only optional
+argument. The first optional argument \meta{pre} is a~prefix. If
+only one optional argument is present, it is assumed to be
+\meta{post}, so if you only want a~prefix and no suffix, you have to
+specify an empty argument for \meta{post}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+(Using the same \examplecode{thesis-ref.bib} database as earlier.)
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-nat.tex}
+\null\par
+A textual citation \glsni{citet}\marg{turabian96}
+and a~parenthetical citation \glsni{citep}\oarg{see}\oarg{Chapter
+9}\marg{goossens97}.
+\end{codelisting}
+Result:
+\begin{result}[natbib.html]
+A textual citation Turabian (1996) and a~parenthetical citation
+(see Goossens et al., 1997, Chapter 9).
+\end{result}
+
+\setnode{bibtextroubleshooting}
+\subsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{sec:bibtextroubleshooting}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \BiBTeX\ writes the \gls{env-thebibliography} environment to
+a~\texttt{.bbl} file, which is then input into the document by 
+\gls{bibliography}. If you have made a~\LaTeX\ error in the
+\texttt{.bib} file, this error will be copied to the \texttt{.bbl}
+file. If you have corrected the error in the \texttt{.bib} file,
+but you are still getting an error when you \LaTeX\ your document,
+try deleting the \texttt{.bbl} file. (In TeXworks, you can use the
+menu item \menu{File}\menuto\menu{Remove Aux Files}.)
+
+ \item Remember to use double quotes or braces to delimit the field
+names in your \texttt{.bib} file.
+
+ \item Remember to put a~comma at the end of each field entry (except the
+last).
+
+ \item It is better to only use alphanumerical characters in the
+keywords. Some punctuation characters such as \texttt{.} (full stop)
+should be fine (unless you're using a~package such as \sty{babel}
+that makes them active), but spaces are not recommended, and commas
+should definitely be avoided.
+
+ \item If you have entered a~field in the \texttt{.bib} file, but it
+doesn't appear in the bibliography, check to make sure that the
+field is required or optional for that type of entry, and check the
+spelling. (You can avoid this problem by using a~bibliography
+management system such as \htmlref{JabRef}{sec:jabref}.)
+
+ \item Check the \BiBTeX\ log file (\texttt{.blg}) for messages.
+
+ \item If you get an error that looks something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ERROR - Cannot find control file 'thesis-ref.bcf'! - did you pass
+the "backend=biber" option to BibLaTeX?
+\end{verbatim}
+then you have inadvertently used \iappname{biber} (see
+\htmlref{below}{sec:biblatex})
+instead of \iappname{bibtex}.
+
+  \item If you get an error that looks something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+I found no \citation commands---while reading file thesis1.aux
+I found no \bibdata command---while reading file thesis1.aux
+I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file thesis1.aux
+\end{verbatim}
+then you probably forgot to use the \gls{bibliography} and
+\gls{bibliographystyle} commands in
+your document.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\setnode{biblatex}
+\section{Biblatex}
+\label{sec:biblatex}
+
+The \istystart{biblatex} package is a~reimplementation of \LaTeX's
+bibliographic facilities. The formatting of the bibliography is
+governed by \LaTeX\ commands instead of selecting a~BibTeX style
+(as was done with \gls{bibliographystyle} described \htmlref{above}{sec:bibtex}).
+This package uses
+\iappnamelink{biber}{http://biblatex-biber.sourceforge.net/} instead
+of BibTeX to process the bibliographic database and sort the
+entries. Legacy BibTeX is also supported, but with a~reduced feature
+set. The \sty{biblatex} package also supports multiple
+bibliographies, for example a~bibliography for each chapter in the
+document. The \sty{biblatex} package requires e-\TeX, so make sure
+you have a~recent \TeX\ distribution. Biber comes with the
+latest version of \TeX~Live.
+
+If you are using \iappname{JabRef} (described in
+\sectionref{sec:jabref}) there is a~BibLaTeX mode option in the
+Advanced tab of the \appname{JabRef} preferences dialog, illustrated in
+\figureref{fig:jabref9}. (Use \menu{Options}\menuto\menu{Preferences} to
+open the dialog.) You will have to quit and restart \appname{JabRef}
+after enabling this option. When you restart, you should find extra
+fields when you edit an entry or create a~new entry, as illustrated
+in \figureref{fig:jabref10}. You should also find that there are
+more entry types available (see \figureref{fig:jabref11}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref9}
+ {\caption{JabRef Advanced Preferences}}
+ {fig:jabref9}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref10}
+ {\caption{JabRef in BibLaTeX Mode}}
+ {fig:jabref10}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref11}
+ {\caption{JabRef in BibLaTeX Mode (Select Entry Type)}}
+ {fig:jabref11}
+\end{figure}
+
+With BibTeX, there was a~\ibibfield{month} and \ibibfield{year}
+field. BibLaTeX provides a~replacement \ibibfield{date} field,
+although if this field is missing it will fall back on the
+\bibfield{month} and \bibfield{year} fields. In
+\figureref{fig:jabref12}, I've edited my earlier example to use the
+new \bibfield{date} field. Note that the date should be specified as
+\meta{year}\texttt{-}\meta{month}\texttt{-}\meta{day} where
+\texttt{-}\meta{day} or \texttt{-}\meta{month}\texttt{-}\meta{day}
+maybe omitted. A slash \texttt{/} should be used to indicate a
+range, for example \texttt{2002-01/2002-02}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\figconts
+ {pictures/jabref12}
+ {\caption{JabRef in BibLaTeX Mode (Setting the Publication Date)}}
+ {fig:jabref12}
+\end{figure}
+
+Recall from \figureref{fig:jabref-pref} and \figureref{fig:jabref-dataprop} that
+I~set the default encoding to UTF-8. With BibLaTeX and \appname{biber}, my
+UTF-8 bibliography can be correctly sorted, but I~need to make sure
+that I~load the \isty{inputenc} package before \sty{biblatex} in my
+document:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{utf8}\marg{inputenc}\newline
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{code}
+
+\sectionref{sec:natbib} described the \isty{natbib} package.
+BibLaTeX has a~compatibility module:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{natbib}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+This provides the same commands (such as \gls{citet} and \gls{citep}) that 
+\isty{natbib} provides.
+
+The default sorting order is name, title and year. This can be
+changed using the \istyopt{biblatex}{sorting} package option. For
+example, to sort by name, year and title:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{sorting=nyt}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+Or you can suppress the sorting, so that all entries are in citation
+order:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{sorting=none}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+For other possible values, see the \sty{biblatex}
+documentation~\cite{biblatex}.
+
+If you want a~list of back-references in the bibliography, referring
+to the pages on which the entries were cited, you can use the
+\istyopt{biblatex}{backref} option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{backref}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+
+The default database backend is \iappname{biber}, which is
+recommended, but if for some reason you want to stick to using
+\iappname{bibtex} you can use the \istyopt{biblatex}{backend}
+option to switch to \optfmt{bibtex}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{backend=bibtex}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+There are also options that govern whether certain fields are
+printed in the bibliography, such as \istyopt{biblatex}{isbn},
+\istyopt{biblatex}{url} or \istyopt{biblatex}{doi}. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{isbn,url,doi}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+The style can be set using the \istyopt{biblatex}{style} option. The
+default is \optfmt{numeric}, which produces a~numeric citation, such
+as [1]. There is also \optfmt{numeric-comp}, which is like
+\isty{natbib}'s \istyopt{natbib}{sort\&compress} option, described
+in \sectionref{sec:natbib}, or \optfmt{authoryear} which displays
+\meta{author} \meta{year} citations.
+
+There are many other citation styles. For these and for other
+package options, see the \sty{biblatex} documentation~\cite{biblatex}.
+
+With BibLaTeX, you don't use the \gls{bibliography} command,
+described in \sectionref{sec:bibtex}. Instead, you add the bib file
+as a~resource \emph{in the preamble} using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{addbibresource}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{resource}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{resource} is the name of the bib file \emph{including
+the file extension}. However, the resource doesn't have to be a~bib file.
+You can only add one resource at a~time:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{addbibresource}\marg{bibfile1.bib}\newline
+\glsni{addbibresource}\marg{bibfile2.bib}
+\end{code}
+The resource can be a~remote one, in which case you need to use the
+\ikeyvalopt{addbibresource}{location} option with the value
+\texttt{remote} and specify the URL:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{addbibresource}\oarg{location=remote}\marg{http://www.somewhere.com/bibfile2.bib}
+\end{code}
+This is only available if you use \iappname{biber} as the backend.
+Another option is \ikeyvalopt{addbibresource}{datatype} which
+specifies the format of the resource. The default is
+\texttt{bibtex}, but it can also be \Indextt{ris},
+\Indextt{zoterordfxm} or \Indextt{endnotexml}. See the \sty{biblatex}
+and \sty{biber} documentation~\cite{biber} for further details.
+
+The bibliography itself is displayed using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{printbibliography}\oarg{\meta{options}}
+\end{definition}
+This should go in the document where you want the bibliography to be
+displayed.
+
+Like the \isty{natbib} commands described in
+\sectionref{sec:natbib}, the \sty{biblatex} commands generally have two
+optional arguments, indicating the prenote and postnote, and a
+mandatory argument specifying the key or a~comma-separated list of
+keys. If you want a~prenote but not a~postnote, you need to give an
+empty second optional argument. The basic commands are:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{cite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}\newline
+\gls{Cite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}
+These are bare citation commands. The latter is provided if the
+citation occurs at the start of a~sentence.
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{parencite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}\newline
+\gls{Parencite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}
+These commands are like \glsni{cite} and \glsni{Cite} but enclose
+the citation in parentheses (square if the numeric style is used).
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{textcite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}\newline
+\gls{Textcite}\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}
+\end{definition}
+These commands are used for citations in the flow of text. The
+latter is provided if the citation occurs at the start of a
+sentence. For other citation commands, see the \sty{biblatex}
+documentation~\cite{biblatex}.
+
+So, the example document from \listingref{ex:thesis1}, can now be
+edited so that the preamble looks like:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-biblatex.tex}\label{ex:thesis-biblatex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{biber}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{backend=biber}\marg{biblatex}
+
+\glsni{addbibresource}\marg{thesis-refs.bib}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+(where \examplecode{thesis-refs.bib} is the name of my bibliography
+database, see \sectionref{sec:creatingbibfile}) and the end of the
+document looks like:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{printbibliography}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Elsewhere in the document, I~need to cite some of the entries in my
+bibliography database:
+\begin{code}
+\null
+
+First of all, let's cite a
+book\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{parencite}\marg{wainwright93} now let's
+cite a~journal paper and a~conference
+proceedings\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{parencite}\marg{cawley96,talbot97}.
+Finally, let's cite a~chapter in a
+book\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{parencite}\oarg{Chapter 9}\marg{goossens97}.
+
+\null
+\end{code}
+
+If you want to build the document using \iappname{arara}
+(\sectionref{sec:arara}) remember to
+include the \gls{percentchar.arara} comments (as shown
+above). If you are using \iappname{latexmk} (\sectionref{sec:latexmk})
+remember to use the \texttt{-bibtex} option as illustrated in
+\figureref{fig:texworks-latexmkbibtex}. 
+
+If you're not using an automated method, such as \appname{arara}
+or \appname{latexmk}, you need a~\PDFLaTeX\ run, a
+\appname{biber} run (or \appname{bibtex} if you've chosen that as
+your backend) followed by two more \PDFLaTeX\ runs. 
+
+\setnode{biblatextroubleshooting}
+\subsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{sec:biblatextroubleshooting}
+
+Most of the comments from the 
+\htmlref{\BiBTeX\ troubleshooting 
+section}{sec:bibtextroubleshooting}\doifbook{ (see
+page~\pageref{sec:bibtextroubleshooting})}
+also apply here.
+If you get an error that looks like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+I found no \citation commands---while reading file thesis-biblatex.aux
+I found no \bibdata command---while reading file thesis-biblatex.aux
+I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file thesis-biblatex.aux
+\end{verbatim}
+then you have inadvertently used \iappname{bibtex} instead of
+\iappname{biber}. If you actually want to use \appname{bibtex} with
+the \istyend{biblatex} package remember that you have to specify
+\appname{bibtex} using:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{backend=bibtex}\marg{biblatex}
+\end{codeS}
+
+
+% Indexes and Glossaries
+
+\setnode{indgloss}
+\chapter{Generating Indexes and Glossaries}
+\label{ch:indgloss}
+
+Most theses will need a~glossary of terms or a~list of acronyms or
+notation. It's less likely that you'll need an index in your thesis,
+but since the same mechanism is used to generate glossaries and
+indexes, both topics are covered in this chapter. There are two
+basic methods of generating a~glossary or index:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item The glossary or indexing information is written to a~temporary
+file by \LaTeX\ while the document is being built. An external
+application is then used to collate and sort the entries defined in
+that temporary file and \LaTeX\ code to display the result is
+written to another file. You then need to run (PDF)\LaTeX\ on your
+document to ensure the sorted and collated glossary or index is
+displayed. (You may then need an additional \LaTeX\ run to ensure
+the table of contents is up-to-date.) This is similar to the way you
+had to use \appname{bibtex} or \appname{biber} between LaTeX runs in
+the \htmlref{previous chapter}{ch:citations}.
+
+\item The glossary or indexing information is collated and sorted by
+\LaTeX\ during the document build. (At least two runs are required,
+but no external indexing application is needed.)
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The first approach (see \sectionref{sec:makeindexglos}) is more
+efficient, but a~lot of users, especially beginners, have difficulty
+with the intermediate step where the external indexing application
+is run. The second approach (see \sectionref{sec:datagidx}) is
+slower, but you don't need to worry about running an indexing
+application. If you're not writing in English (in particular if you
+are not using the Latin alphabet) you're better off using the first
+approach with \iappname{xindy}. In this chapter I'll describe both
+approaches and you can choose which you prefer.
+
+\setnode{makeindexglos}
+\section{Using an External Indexing Application}
+\label{sec:makeindexglos}
+
+This section describes how to create indexes 
+(\sectionref{sec:makeidx}) or glossaries
+(\sectionref{sec:makeglossaries}) using an
+external indexing application. There are two popular indexing
+applications: \iappname{makeindex} and \iappname{xindy}. All \TeX\
+distributions should come with \appname{makeindex}. The \TeX~Live
+distribution also comes with \appname{xindy}, but if you have a
+different \TeX\ distribution (such as MikTeX) you may need to
+fetch \iappname{xindy} from \url{http://www.xindy.org/}.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+You must have Perl installed in order to use \iappname{xindy} as it's
+a~Perl script. (See \xrsectionref{Perl}{perl} from Volume~1.) If you
+have successfully been using
+\htmlref{\appname{latexmk}}{sec:latexmk}, you already have Perl
+installed.
+
+\setnode{makeidx}
+\subsection{Creating an Index (\texorpdfstring{\sty{makeidx}}{makeidx} 
+package)}
+\label{sec:makeidx}
+
+\novices[ch:newcom]{newcom}
+introduced the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{index}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+to index the word given in \meta{text}. For example, if
+\verb|\index{circuit}| occurs on page~42, then \dq{42} will be added to
+the \keyword{location list} for the term \dq{circuit}.  
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning
+\glsni{index} doesn't display any text. It just adds a~line to the
+index file with the information required by \appname{makeindex} or
+\appname{xindy} to sort and collate the information.
+
+The default action of \glsni{index} simply ignores its argument. To
+ensure the indexing mechanism works, you must activate it by placing
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{makeindex}
+\end{definition}
+in the document preamble.
+
+Finally, you need to use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{printindex}
+\end{definition}
+(defined in the \isty{makeidx} package) to display the index.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+\warning
+\glsni{printindex} won't produce any text until
+you have run the external indexing application.
+
+Here's an example document:
+\begin{codelisting}{sample-index.tex}\label{ex:sample-index}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{makeindex}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt,oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{makeidx}
+
+\glsni{makeindex}
+
+\glsni{title}\marg{Sample Document}
+\glsni{author}\marg{Me}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{document}
+\glsni{maketitle}
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Sample}
+
+Stuff about eigenvectors\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvector} and
+eigenvalues\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvalue}.
+
+\glsni{chapter}\marg{Another Sample}
+
+Some more stuff about eigenvectors\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvector} and
+eigenvalues\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvalue}. Something about
+eigen-decomposition\glsni{index}\marg{eigen-decomposition}.
+
+\glsni{backmatter}
+
+\glsni{printindex}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+If you are using \iappname{arara} to build your document (see
+\sectionref{sec:arara}), remember to include the
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} comments, as shown in the above listing.
+If you are using \iappname{latexmk} to build your document, remember
+to include the \texttt{.idx} custom dependency to your RC file, as
+described in \sectionref{sec:latexmk}.
+
+If you aren't using an automated method to build your document, you
+will need to run \PDFLaTeX, then run \iappname{makeindex}, and 
+then run \PDFLaTeX\ again (see \sectionref{sec:build}).
+
+If you prefer to use \iappname{xindy} instead of
+\iappname{makeindex}, you need to run \iappname{texindy} (a
+\appname{xindy} wrapper customised for \LaTeX\ documents).
+If you are using \iappname{arara}, change the line:
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} makeindex
+\end{alltt}
+to (change the language as required):
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{percentchar.arara} texindy: \marg*{ language: english }
+\end{alltt}
+(Make sure you have added the \appname{texindy} rule as described in
+\sectionref{sec:arara}.) If you are using \iappname{latexmk} to
+build your document, you will need to change the custom dependency
+for \texttt{.idx} files, as described in \sectionref{sec:latexmk}.
+
+\setnode{makeindexindexsort}
+\subsubsection{Overriding the Default Sort}
+\label{sec:makeindexsort}
+
+By default the index entry will be sorted according to the word
+being indexed. However, you can override this by writing the
+argument of \glsni{index} in the form:
+\begin{definition}
+\meta{sort}\gls{atchar}\meta{word}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{sort} is how to sort the term and \meta{word} is how the
+term should appear in the index.
+
+The \iappname{makeindex} application doesn't understand \LaTeX\
+commands. It simply sorts the term as is. So, for example, if you do
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{\gls{AE} olian}
+\end{codeS}
+then \iappname{makeindex} will sort it according to the characters 
+\gls{backslashchar}, A, E, \glsni{visiblespace} (space), o, l, i, a,
+n. Since \appname{makeindex} sorts symbols (such as \glsni{backslashchar}) 
+before letters, it will put
+\texttt{\glsni{AE}\glsni{visiblespace}olian} before, say,
+\texttt{adze}, since \glsni{backslashchar} comes before \dq{a}.
+
+To get around this, you need to specify the sort key:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{AEolian\glsni{atchar}\glsni{AE} olian}
+\end{codeS}
+Now \appname{makeindex} will put \dq{\AE olian} after \dq{adze}.
+Here's another example that indexes a~function or method:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{sqrt()\glsni{atchar}\gls{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You will also need to do something similar if you are entering the
+character directly via the \sty{inputenc} package:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{elite\glsni{atchar}\'elite}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Note, however, that you don't need to do this if you are using
+\iappname{xindy}. You just need to make sure you match the input
+encoding. For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{texindy}: \marg{ language: english, codepage: latin1}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{12pt,oneside}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{latin1}\marg{inputenc}
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{makeidx}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Later in the document:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{\'elite}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\setnode{makeindexformat}
+\subsubsection{Setting the Location Format}
+\label{sec:makeindexformat}
+
+Each index entry has an associated \keyword{location list} that
+directs the reader to the pages in the document associated with that
+entry. For example, if you look up \gls*{index} in this book's
+\latexhtml{\htmlref{index}{ch:index}}{\htmladdnormallink{index}{bookindex.html}},
+the entry's location list will include this page. If the location
+list is long, it's helpful to highlight a~particular location to
+direct the reader to the principle definition or discussion related
+to that term. This is usually done by formatting the relevant
+location in a~different font, for example bold or italic.
+
+\bookpagebreak
+You can specify the format for the location by writing
+the argument of \glsni{index} in the form:
+\begin{definition}
+\meta{word}\gls{index.barchar}\meta{format}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{format} is the name of a~text-block command \emph{without}
+the leading backslash. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvector\glsni{index.barchar}textbf}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You can combine \gls{atchar} and \glsni{index.barchar}. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{sqrt()\glsni{atchar}\gls{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}\glsni{index.barchar}textbf}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning
+Make sure the format you use is the name of a~command that takes an
+argument. While it won't cause an error to use, say,
+\texttt{bfseries} instead of \texttt{textbf}, it will cause the
+unexpected side-effect of rendering the rest of your index in that
+font, instead of just that particular location.
+
+You can also use \meta{format} to cross-reference another entry.
+If you have an entry that's just a~synonym for another entry, you
+can use:
+\begin{definition}
+\meta{word}\glsni{index.barchar}see\marg{\meta{name}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{name} is the other entry. If you want to direct the
+reader to a~similar topic, you can use:
+\begin{definition}
+\meta{word}\glsni{index.barchar}seealso\marg{\meta{topic}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{topic} is the other entry.
+
+For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{eigenvector\glsni{index.barchar}seealso\marg{eigenvalue}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\setnode{makeindexsublevels}
+\subsubsection{Sub Levels}
+\label{sec:makeindexsublevels}
+
+An entry in the index may have sub-items. With \iappname{makeindex}
+you can have a~maximum of three levels. With \iappname{xindy}
+you can have an arbitrary number of levels. However, it's a~good
+idea to consider the advice in the Oxford Style
+Manual~\cite{oxford}: \dq{In all but the most complex indexes,
+subentries within subentries (\emph{sub-subentries}) should be
+avoided.} In other words, just because it's possible to do something
+doesn't mean you should do it.
+
+To indicate a~subentry, the argument of \gls{index} should be in the
+form:
+\begin{definition}
+\meta{main entry}\gls{makeindex.exclamchar}\meta{subentry}
+\end{definition}
+For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{reptile\glsni{makeindex.exclamchar}caiman}
+\end{codeS}\bookpagebreak
+If you really must have a~sub-subentry:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{reptile\glsni{makeindex.exclamchar}crocodylian\glsni{makeindex.exclamchar}caiman}
+\end{codeS}
+
+You can combine \gls{atchar}, \gls{index.barchar} and
+\glsni{makeindex.exclamchar}. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{index}\marg{methods\glsni{makeindex.exclamchar}sqrt()\glsni{atchar}\glsni{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}\glsni{index.barchar}textbf}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\listingref{ex:thesis-biblatex} can now be modified as 
+follows (download the document for the complete
+code):\reportpagebreak
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-index.tex}\label{ex:thesis-index}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} In the preamble:
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} biber
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{makeindex}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,12pt}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{makeidx}
+\gls{makeindex}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} Later in the document:
+
+Some sample code is shown in Listing\gls{tildechar}\gls{ref}\marg{lst:sample}.  
+This uses the function \gls{lstinline}"sqrt()"\glsni{percentchar}
+\gls{index}\marg{sqrt()\gls{atchar}\glsni{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}}\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{index}\marg{functions\gls{makeindex.exclamchar}sqrt()\glsni{atchar}\glsni{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}}\glsni{percentchar}
+\glsni{index}\marg{square root\gls{index.barchar}see\marg{\glsni{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}}}.
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Tautology}
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{tautology}\glsni{index}\marg{tautology\glsni{index.barchar}textbf} is a proposition 
+that is always true for any value of its variables.
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}
+
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Contradiction}
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{contradiction}\glsni{index}\marg{contradiction\glsni{index.barchar}textbf} is 
+a proposition that is always false for any 
+value of its variables.
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} At the end of the document:
+
+\glsni{printbibliography}
+\glsni{printindex}
+
+\glsni{end}\marg{document}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+The index for the above document looks like:
+\begin{result}[sampleindex.html]
+\begin{simtheindex}
+
+  \item contradiction, \textbf{2}
+
+  \indexspace
+
+  \item functions
+    \subitem \texttt{sqrt()}, 2
+
+  \indexspace
+
+  \item \texttt{sqrt()}, 2
+  \item square root, \see{\texttt{sqrt()}}{2}
+
+  \indexspace
+
+  \item tautology, \textbf{2}
+
+\end{simtheindex}
+\end{result}
+
+
+\setnode{makeindextroubleshooting}
+\subsubsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{sec:makeindextroubleshooting}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item My index hasn't appeared.
+
+  \begin{enumerate}
+   \item Make sure you have the command \gls{printindex} at the
+place where you want the index to appear (this command is defined in
+the \isty{makeidx} package).
+
+   \item Make sure you have the command \gls{makeindex} in the
+preamble.
+
+   \item If you are building the document using \iappname{arara}
+make sure you included all the \gls{percentchar.arara} directives as
+shown in \listingref{ex:thesis-index}. If you are using
+\iappname{latexmk}, make sure you have included the \texttt{.idx}
+dependency, as described in \sectionref{sec:latexmk}. If you're not
+using an automated tool, make sure you run (PDF)\LaTeX, then
+\iappname{makeindex} and then (PDF)\LaTeX\ again (see
+\sectionref{sec:build}).
+
+   \item Check \appname{makeindex}'s log file (which has the
+extension \texttt{.ilg} by default) for error messages.
+  \end{enumerate}
+
+  \item I~want to index the character \gls{makeindex.doublequote},
+    \gls{atchar}, \gls{makeindex.exclamchar} or \gls{index.barchar}
+    but it's not working.
+
+  If you want any of these symbols in your index, you will need to
+prefix the character with the double-quote symbol
+\glsni{makeindex.doublequote}. For example to index the
+\glsni{atchar} symbol:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{index}\marg{\glsni{makeindex.doublequote}\glsni{atchar}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\item I~have multiple entries of the same item. For example:
+
+\null~~~identity matrix, 10, 22--30\newline
+\null~~~identity matrix, 4\newline\null
+
+Check to make sure the sort argument to each of the corresponding
+\glsni{index} commands is the same. Pay particular attention to
+spaces as \iappname{makeindex} will treat the following entries
+differently:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{index}\marg{identity\glsni{visiblespace}matrix}
+\glsni{index}\marg{identity\glsni{visiblespace}\glsni{visiblespace}matrix}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+\LaTeX\ however treats multiple spaces the same as a~single space,
+so the text will appear the same in the index.
+
+\item \LaTeX\ says that the command \gls{printindex} is undefined.
+
+You have forgotten to load the \sty{makeidx} package.
+\end{itemize}
+
+% Generating glossaries
+
+\setnode{makeglossaries}
+\subsection{Creating Glossaries, Lists of Symbols or Acronyms 
+(\texorpdfstring{\sty{glossaries}}{glossaries} package)}
+\label{sec:makeglossaries}
+
+There are a~number of packages available to assist producing a~list
+of acronyms (such as the \isty{acronym} package) or a~glossary (such
+as the \isty{nomencl} package). You can see a~list of available
+packages in the \htmladdnormallinkfoot{OnLine \TeX\ Catalogue's
+Topic
+Index}{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html\#index}~\cite{texcattopic}.
+Here, I've chosen to describe the \isty{glossaries} package.
+Firstly, it encompasses the functionality of both \sty{acronym} and
+\sty{nomencl} as \isty{glossaries} allows you to define multiple
+lists of acronyms, lists of symbols or glossaries. Secondly, I~wrote
+the \sty{glossaries} package, so it's the one with which I~am most
+familiar.
+
+The \sty{glossaries} package is very flexible, but the downside to
+that is that it has too many features to cover briefly. I'm
+therefore only going to introduce the basics here. If you want more
+detail you'll have to read the user
+manual~\cite{glossaries}. I~will
+use the term \dq{glossary} to mean a~list of terms or a~list of
+notation or a~list of symbols or a~list of acronyms.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning If you want to use both \isty{glossaries} and
+\isty{hyperref}, you must load \sty{hyperref} \emph{before}
+\sty{glossaries}. This is an exception to the usual advice of
+loading \sty{hyperref} last.
+
+\setnode{newglossaryentry}
+\subsubsection{Defining Glossary Entries}
+\label{sec:newglossaryentry}
+
+Firstly, in order to make the glossary (or glossaries, if you have
+more than one) appear, you must use the command
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{makeglossaries}
+\end{definition}
+in the preamble. This is analogous to the \glsni{makeindex} command
+described in \sectionref{sec:makeidx}.
+
+Next you need to define the terms you want to appear in the
+glossary. This is done using the command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newglossaryentry}\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{\meta{key-val list}}
+\end{definition}
+The first argument \meta{label} is a~unique label so that you can
+refer to this entry in your document text. The entry will only
+appear in the glossary if you have referenced it in the document
+using one of the commands listed later. The second argument is a
+comma-separated list of \meta{key}=\meta{value} options. Common keys
+are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{name}
+
+ The name of the entry (as it will appear in the glossary).
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{description}
+
+ A brief description of this entry (to appear in the glossary).
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{text}
+
+ How this entry will appear in the document text where the singular
+form is required. If this key is omitted the value of 
+\keyvalopt{name} will be used.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{first}
+
+ How this entry will appear in the document text the first time it
+is used, where the first use requires the singular form. If this key
+is omitted the value of \keyvalopt{text} is used.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{plural}
+
+ How this entry will appear in the document text where the plural
+form is required. If this key is omitted, the value is obtained by
+appending the letter \dq{s} to the value of the 
+\keyvalopt{text} key.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{firstplural}
+
+How this entry will appear in the document text the first time it is
+used, where the first use requires the plural form. If this field is
+omitted, the value is obtained by appending the letter \dq{s} to the
+value of the \keyvalopt{first} key.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{symbol}
+
+This key is provided to allow the user to specify an associated
+symbol, but most glossary styles ignore this value.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{sort}
+
+This value indicates how to sort this entry (analogous to using the
+\gls{atchar} character in the argument of \gls{index}, as described
+in \sectionref{sec:makeidx}). If this key is omitted the value of
+\keyvalopt{name} is used.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{type}
+
+This is the glossary type to which this entry belongs (see
+\sectionref{sec:newglossary}). If omitted the main (default) glossary 
+is assumed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+The following defines the term \dq{set} and assigns a
+brief description. The term is given the label \texttt{set}. This is the
+minimum amount of information you must give: 
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{newglossaryentry}\marg{set}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  name=\marg{set},\glsni{percentchar} the term
+  description=\marg{a collection of objects}\glsni{percentchar} a brief description
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The following entry also has an associated symbol:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{U}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  name=\marg{universal set},\glsni{percentchar} the term
+  description=\marg{the set of all things},\glsni{percentchar} a brief description
+  symbol=\marg{\gls{ensuremath}\marg{\gls{mathcal}\marg{U}}}\glsni{percentchar} the associate symbol
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The plural of the word \dq{matrix} is \dq{matrices} not \dq{matrixs},
+so the term needs the plural form set explicitly: 
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{matrix}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{name=\marg{matrix},\glsni{percentchar} the term
+ description=\marg{a rectangular table of elements},\glsni{percentchar} brief description
+ plural=\marg{matrices}\glsni{percentchar} the plural
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+The \sty{glossaries} package also provides the shortcut command:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newacronym}\oarg{\meta{key-val
+list}}\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{\meta{abbrv}}\marg{\meta{long}}
+\end{definition}
+The default behaviour of this command is equivalent to:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{name=\marg{\meta{abbrv}}\comma
+description=\marg{\meta{long}}\comma
+text=\marg{\meta{abbrv}}\comma
+first=\marg{\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})}\comma
+plural=\marg{\meta{abbrv}s}\comma
+firstplural=\marg{\meta{long}s (\meta{abbrv}s)}\comma
+\meta{key-val list}}
+\end{code}
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newacronym}\marg{svm}\marg{SVM}\marg{support vector machine}
+\end{codeS}
+is equivalent to 
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{svm}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  name=\marg{SVM},\glsni{percentchar}
+  description=\marg{support vector machine},\glsni{percentchar}
+  first=\marg{support vector machine (SVM)},\glsni{percentchar}
+  firstplural=\marg{support vector machines (SVMs)},\glsni{percentchar}
+  text=\marg{SVM},\glsni{percentchar}
+  plural=\marg{SVMs}\glsni{percentchar}
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+There are some package options that modify the behaviour of
+\glsni{newacronym}. For example, the package option
+\istyopt{glossaries}{description} changes \glsni{newacronym} so that
+you need to explicitly set the description in the optional argument.
+For example:
+\begin{code}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{description}\marg{glossaries}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{newacronym}\oarg{description=\marg{a~statistical pattern
+recognition technique}}\marg{svm}\marg{SVM}\marg{support vector
+machine}
+\end{code}
+
+Another package option is \istyopt{glossaries}{footnote} which will
+modify the behaviour of \glsni{newacronym} so that the long form is
+displayed as a~footnote on first use. For a~full list of available
+options, see the \sty{glossaries} documentation~\cite{glossaries}.
+
+\setnode{glslink}
+\subsubsection{Displaying Terms in the Document}
+\label{sec:glslink}
+
+Any glossary term that has been defined using
+\gls{newglossaryentry} or \reportlinebreak\gls{newacronym}, as described above,
+can be displayed in the document using one of the commands described
+in this section. (There are other less commonly used commands
+available as well, see the \sty{glossaries}
+documentation~\cite{glossaries} for
+details of them.)
+
+Each term has an associated \keyword{first use flag}. This is a
+boolean (true\slash false) switch that determines whether or not the entry has
+been used. This is how the \sty{glossaries} package determines
+whether to display the value of the
+\ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{first} key or to display the value of
+the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{text} key. You can reset this flag
+using:\bookpagebreak
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsreset}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+Conversely, you can unset it using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsunset}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+
+To display a~term that has previously been defined using either
+\reportlinebreak\gls{newglossaryentry} or \gls{newacronym} you can use one of the
+following commands:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{gls}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glspl}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{Gls}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{Glspl}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+These commands all have the same syntax: \meta{label} is the label
+that uniquely identifies the term (as supplied in
+\gls{newglossaryentry} or \gls{newacronym}), \meta{insert} is
+additional text to insert after the term (but inside the hyperlink,
+if used with the \isty{hyperref} package), and \meta{options} is a
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} list of options. Available options are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \ikeyvalopt{gls}{format}
+
+This specifies how to format the associated location for this
+entry. It is analogous to the \gls{index.barchar} special character
+used in \gls{index} (see \sectionref{sec:makeindexformat}). As with
+\glsni{index}, the format must not include the initial backslash.
+For example, \booklinebreak\texttt{format=textbf} indicates that the location
+should be displayed in bold. (If you are using the \isty{hyperref}
+package, you should use the \texttt{hyper}\meta{xx} formats instead,
+such as \texttt{hyperbf}, see the \sty{glossaries}
+documentation~\cite{glossaries} for
+further detail.)
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{gls}{counter}
+
+This specifies which counter to use for the associated location
+in the glossary. This is usually the page number, but can be
+changed to, say, the section in which the term is used.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{gls}{hyper}
+
+This is a~boolean key which can be used to enable/disable the
+hyperlink to the relevant entry in the glossary. Note that setting
+\texttt{hyper=true} will only have an effect if hyperlinks are
+supported (through loading the \isty{hyperref} package before
+loading the \isty{glossaries} package). The above commands all have
+starred versions that are a~shortcut for \texttt{hyper=false}. For
+example \texttt{\glsni{gls}*\marg{svm}} is equivalent to
+\texttt{\glsni{gls}\oarg{hyper=false}\marg{svm}}.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+The above commands \glsni{gls} and \glsni{Gls} will display the value of
+the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{first} or
+\ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{text} key, depending on whether or not
+the entry has already been used. Similarly, \glsni{glspl} and
+\glsni{Glspl} will display the value of the
+\ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{firstplural} or
+\ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{plural} key, depending on whether or
+not the entry has already been used.
+The upper case forms, \glsni{Gls} and \glsni{Glspl},
+will capitalise the first letter.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+Suppose I~have defined the following entry:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{matrix}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{name=\marg{matrix},\glsni{percentchar} the term
+ description=\marg{a rectangular table of elements},\glsni{percentchar} brief description
+ plural=\marg{matrices}\glsni{percentchar} the plural
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Then (later in the document)
+\begin{code}
+\gls{Glspl}\marg{matrix} are usually denoted by a~bold capital letter, such as 
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{A}\glsni{dollarchar}.
+The \gls{gls}\marg{matrix}\oarg{'s} \glsni{dollarchar}(i,j)\glsni{dollarchar}th
+element is usually denoted
+\glsni{dollarchar}a\gls{underscorechar}\marg{ij}\glsni{dollarchar}.
+\gls{Gls}\marg{matrix}
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{I}\glsni{dollarchar} is the
+identity \gls{gls}\marg{matrix}.
+\end{code}
+will display:
+\begin{result}[matrix.html]
+Matrices are usually denoted by a~bold capital letter, such as
+$\mathbf{A}$. The matrix's $(i,j)$th element is usually denoted
+$a_{ij}$.
+Matrix $\mathbf{I}$ is the identity matrix.
+\end{result}
+
+If you have used the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{symbol} key when
+you defined a~term, you can access its value with:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glssymbol}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+This has the same syntax as commands like \gls{gls} but it doesn't
+affect or query the first use flag.
+
+Terms that have been defined using \gls{newacronym} can also be
+referenced using the commands:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{acrshort}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}\newline
+\gls{Acrshort}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{acrlong}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}\newline
+\gls{Acrlong}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{acrfull}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}\newline
+\gls{Acrfull}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}
+\end{definition}
+\emph{These commands don't affect the first use flag.} The first two
+(\glsni{acrshort} and \glsni{Acrshort}) will display the
+abbreviation only, the middle two (\glsni{acrlong} and
+\glsni{Acrlong}) will display the long form only, and the last two
+(\glsni{acrfull} and \glsni{Acrfull}) display both the long and
+short form. These commands have the same syntax as \glsni{gls}
+and \gls{Gls}.
+
+If you find these commands a~little long-winded to type, you can use
+the package option \istyopt{glossaries}{shortcuts}, which will
+provide shorter synonyms, such as \gls{acs}, \gls{acl} and
+\gls{acf}. This option also defines \gls{ac} which is equivalent to
+\gls{gls}. See the glossaries user guide~\cite{glossaries} for
+further details.
+
+\xminisec{Another Example:}
+
+Suppose I~have defined an acronym as follows:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newacronym}\marg{svm}\marg{SVM}\marg{support vector machine}
+\end{codeS}
+Then (later in the document):
+\begin{code}
+First use: \gls{gls}\marg{svm}\gls{at}. Next use: 
+\gls{gls}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Short: \glsni{acrshort}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Long: \glsni{acrlong}\marg{svm}.
+Full: \glsni{acrfull}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+\end{code}
+produces:
+\begin{result}[svm.html]
+First use: support vector machine (SVM)\@. Next use: SVM\@.
+Short: SVM\@. Long: support vector machine. Full:
+support vector machine (SVM)\@.
+\end{result}
+(Recall \glsni{at} from \novices{intersentencespacing}.)
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning Avoid using commands like \gls{gls} in section headings or
+captions. Instead, use commands like:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsentrytext}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+(displays the value of the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{text} key
+without a~hyperlink) or
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsentryfirst}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+(displays the value of the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{first} key
+without a~hyperlink). These commands don't affect the first use
+flag. For related commands, see the glossaries user
+guide~\cite{glossaries}.
+
+\warning Take care if you want to use the uppercase variants, such
+as \gls{Gls} or \gls{Acrlong}. If the first letter is an accent
+(either entered using accents commands such as
+\texttt{\gls{acute}\marg{e}} or entered directly such as
+\texttt{\'{e}} with the \isty{inputenc} package) then you must group
+that letter when you define the term.\bookpagebreak
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{newglossaryentry}\marg{elite}\glsni{percentchar} label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  name=\marg{\marg{\'{e}}lite},\glsni{percentchar}
+  description=\marg{select group or class}\glsni{percentchar}
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+\setnode{newglossary}
+\subsubsection{Defining New Glossaries}
+\label{sec:newglossary}
+
+If you want the list of acronyms to be separate from the main
+glossary, you need to use the package option
+\istyopt{glossaries}{acronym}. This will change the effect of
+\gls{newacronym} so that it adds the term to the list of acronyms
+instead of to the main glossary.
+
+You can also define your own custom glossaries using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newglossary}\oarg{\meta{log-ext}}\marg{\meta{name}}\marg{\meta{in-ext}}\marg{\meta{out-ext}}\marg{\meta{title}}\oarg{\meta{counter}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{name} is a~label that uniquely defines this new glossary
+and \meta{title} is the title to be used when the glossary is
+displayed in the document via \glsi{printglossary} or
+\glsi{printglossaries}, see \sectionref{sec:printglossaries}.
+The other mandatory arguments, \meta{in-ext} and \meta{out-ext},
+specify the file extensions to give to the input and output files
+for this new glossary. The first optional argument \meta{log-ext} is
+the extension for the log file. This information is provided for the
+benefit of the \iappname{makeglossaries} application. The final
+optional argument \meta{counter} is the name of the counter used by
+default in the location lists for this new glossary. If omitted, the
+\icounter{page} counter is used (unless overridden by the
+\istyopt{glossaries}{counter} package option).
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning All glossaries must be defined before \gls{makeglossaries}
+to ensure that the relevant output files are opened.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}
+
+The following defines a~new glossary called \dq{notation}:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newglossary}\oarg{nlg}\marg{notation}\marg{not}\marg{ntn}\marg{Notation}
+\end{codeS}
+When it gets displayed (using \glsni{printglossary} or
+\glsni{printglossaries}) the title will default to \dq{Notation}.
+I~now need to use the \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{type} key if 
+I~want to define an entry to go in this new glossary:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\gls{newglossaryentry}\marg{not:set}\glsni{percentchar} label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  type=notation,\glsni{percentchar} glossary type
+  name=\marg{\glsni{dollarchar}\gls{mathcal}\marg{S}\glsni{dollarchar}},\glsni{percentchar}
+  description=\marg{A set},\glsni{percentchar}
+  sort=\marg{S}\glsni{percentchar}
+}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+Later in the document I~can use this entry:
+\begin{codeS}
+A \gls{gls}\marg{not:set} is a~collection of objects.
+\end{codeS}
+
+\setnode{printglossaries}
+\subsubsection{Displaying Glossaries}
+\label{sec:printglossaries}
+
+Now that you know how to define entries and how to use them in the
+document text, let's now look at the more complicated task of
+displaying the glossaries. To display all the defined glossaries
+use:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{printglossaries}
+\end{definition}
+To only display a~particular glossary use:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{printglossary}\oarg{\meta{options}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{options} is a~comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options. Available keys:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{type}
+
+The glossary to print. If omitted, the main (default) glossary is
+assumed.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{style}
+
+The glossary style to use. There are a~lot of predefined styles to
+choose from, such as \texttt{list}, \texttt{long} or \texttt{tree}.
+See the \sty{glossaries} user manual~\cite{glossaries} for further
+details.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{title}
+
+Overrides the default title for this glossary.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{toctitle}
+
+Overrides the default title for the table of contents.
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{numberedsection}
+
+Put this glossary in a~numbered section (instead of an unnumbered
+section).
+
+\item \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{nonumberlist}
+
+Suppress the location lists for this glossary.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning By default, the glossaries aren't added to the table of
+contents. If you want them added to the table of contents use the
+package option \istyopt{glossaries}{toc}.\bookpagebreak
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{toc}\marg{glossaries}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Only those entries that have been used in the document (via commands
+like \gls{gls}) are displayed in the glossary. If you want to add an
+entry without displaying it in the document, use
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsadd}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{label} is the unique label identifying the entry. The
+optional argument \meta{options} is the same as for commands like
+\glsni{gls} except there is no \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{hyper}
+key.
+
+Alternatively, you can add all defined entries using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsaddall}\oarg{\meta{options}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{options} is the same as for \glsni{glsadd} except that
+there is also a~\ikeyvalopt{glsaddall}{types} key where the value
+should be a~comma-separated list of all the glossaries to iterate
+over. For example, to add all entries defined in the \dq{acronym}
+glossary and the \dq{notation} glossary, but not the \dq{main}
+glossary:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{glsaddall}\oarg{types=\marg{acronym,notation}}
+\end{codeS}
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning As with \gls{printindex}
+the glossaries won't be displayed until the relevant files have been
+created either by \iappname{makeindex} or by \iappname{xindy}.
+Unlike in \sectionref{sec:makeidx}, if you want to use
+\appname{xindy} to create your glossary files, you can't use the
+\iappname{texindy} wrapper but must either use \appname{xindy}
+directly or use the \iappname{makeglossaries} wrapper, described
+below. If you want to use \appname{xindy} with the \isty{glossaries}
+package, you must use the \istyopt{glossaries}{xindy} package option:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{xindy}\marg{glossaries}
+\end{codeS}
+If omitted, \iappname{makeindex} will be assumed.
+
+If you have Perl installed, you can use the \iappname{makeglossaries}
+application that comes with the \isty{glossaries} package. If you
+have been using \iappname{latexmk} or \appname{xindy}, then you
+already have Perl installed. If you don't want to install Perl for
+some reason, there's a~Java alternative to \appname{makeglossaries}
+called \iappname{makeglossariesgui} that's available from
+\gls{ctan}. However, if you don't install Perl, you are restricting
+your options as you won't be able to use \appname{xindy}\footnote{or
+a~lot of other useful Perl scripts, such as \appname{epstopdf}}.
+
+If you are using \iappname{arara} (see \sectionref{sec:arara}), then
+all you need to do is add another \gls{percentchar.arara} directive
+in your source code:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{makeglossaries}
+\end{codeS}
+If you are using \iappname{latexmk}, then make sure you have added
+the custom dependencies for \texttt{.gls} as described in
+\sectionref{sec:latexmk}. If you are not using any automated tool to
+build your document, you will have to invoke
+\iappname{makeglossaries} between (PDF)\LaTeX\ runs (see
+\sectionref{sec:build}).
+
+Adding to \listingref{ex:thesis-index}:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-glossaries.tex}\label{ex:thesis-glossaries}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar} In the preamble:
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} biber
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} \iappname{makeglossaries}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} makeindex
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,12pt}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\oarg{toc,acronym}\marg{glossaries}
+
+\glsni{newglossary}\oarg{nlg}\marg{notation}\marg{not}\marg{ntn}\marg{Notation}
+
+\gls{makeglossaries}
+
+\glsni{newglossaryentry}\marg{matrix}\glsni{percentchar} the label
+\marg{name=\marg{matrix},\glsni{percentchar} the term
+ description=\marg{a rectangular table of elements},\glsni{percentchar} brief description
+ plural=\marg{matrices}\glsni{percentchar} the plural
+}
+
+\glsni{newacronym}\marg{svm}\marg{SVM}\marg{support vector machine}
+
+\gls{newglossaryentry}\marg{not:set}\glsni{percentchar} label
+\marg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  type=notation,\glsni{percentchar} glossary type
+  name=\marg{\glsni{dollarchar}\gls{mathcal}\marg{S}\glsni{dollarchar}},\glsni{percentchar}
+  description=\marg{A set},\glsni{percentchar}
+  sort=\marg{S}\glsni{percentchar}
+}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} Later in the document:
+
+\end{alltt}
+\gls{Glspl}\marg{matrix} are usually denoted by a bold capital
+letter, such as \glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{A}\glsni{dollarchar}. The \gls{gls}\marg{matrix}\oarg{'s}
+\glsni{dollarchar}(i,j)\glsni{dollarchar}th element is usually
+denoted
+\glsni{dollarchar}a\gls{underscorechar}\marg{ij}\glsni{dollarchar}.
+\gls{Gls}\marg{matrix}
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{I}\glsni{dollarchar} is the
+identity \gls{gls}\marg{matrix}.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+First use: \gls{gls}\marg{svm}\gls{at}. Next use: 
+\gls{gls}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Short: \gls{acrshort}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Long: \gls{acrlong}\marg{svm}.
+Full: \gls{acrfull}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+A \gls{gls}\marg{not:set} is a collection of objects.
+\begin{alltt}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} At the end of the document:
+
+\glsni{backmatter}
+
+\glsni{printglossaries}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+\setnode{glossariestroubleshooting}
+\subsubsection{Troubleshooting}
+\label{sec:glossariestroubleshooting}
+
+If you run into difficulties with the \isty{glossaries} package,
+first consult the \htmladdnormallinkfoot{glossaries
+FAQ}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/faqs/glossariesfaq.html}\@.
+You can also check my \htmladdnormallinkfoot{bug
+tracker}{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/cgi-bin/bugtracker.cgi?category=glossaries}
+if you think you've stumbled on a~bug. If you are using TeXnicCenter
+instead of TeXworks, there are instructions on how to get
+TeXnicCenter to run \iappname{makeglossaries} in an article I~wrote
+on the \LaTeX\ Community's Know How
+section~\cite{latexcommunitygloss}.
+
+If you're completely confused about how to generate the glossary
+files, you might want to consider using \sty{datagidx} instead,
+described \htmlref{next}{sec:datagidx}.
+
+% Using datagidx
+
+\setnode{datagidx}
+\section{Using \LaTeX\ to Sort and Collate Indexes or Glossaries
+(\sty{datagidx} package)}
+\label{sec:datagidx}
+
+\sectionref{sec:makeindexglos} described how to create an index or
+glossaries using an external indexing application. Some users
+stumble when it comes to invoking the indexing application. There is
+an alternative where \TeX\ does the sorting and collating. This
+by-passes the need to use \iappname{makeindex}, \iappname{xindy} or
+\iappname{makeglossaries}, but it's less efficient and takes longer
+to build your document. This section describes how to do this using
+the \isty{datagidx} package. This package comes with my
+\isty{datatool} bundle (at least version 2.13). The documentation
+for \sty{datagidx} is included in the \sty{datatool} user
+manual~\cite{datatool}.
+
+The \sty{datatool} package allows you to define databases that you
+can access in your document. The \sty{datagidx} package has a~special
+interface to this facility that allows you to define databases for
+the purposes of indexing. These databases and their definitions must
+be defined in the preamble. In this section, the term \dq{indexing}
+will be used to refer to either indexes or glossaries, as the same
+mechanism is used for both tasks.
+
+A new indexing database is defined using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newgidx}\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{\meta{title}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{label} is a~label that uniquely identifies this database
+and \meta{title} is the title to be used when the index (or
+glossary) is displayed. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{index}\marg{Index}
+\end{codeS}
+creates a~new database labelled \texttt{index}. When the index is
+displayed, it will have the section heading \dq{Index}.
+
+As in \sectionref{sec:makeindexglos}, each term in the index (or
+glossary) database has an associated location list. This list is
+initially null. The locations are added to terms used in the
+document on \emph{the second} \LaTeX\ run. When you display the
+index, only those entries with a~non-null location list or a
+cross-reference will be shown. The default location is the page
+number on which the entry was referenced. The \sty{datagidx} package
+knows about the following page numbering styles: \texttt{arabic},
+\texttt{roman}, \texttt{Roman}, \texttt{alph} and \texttt{Alph}. If
+your document has another type of numbering style, or if you want to
+use a~different counter for the location, consult the \sty{datagidx}
+section of the \sty{datatool} manual~\cite{datatool}.
+
+Once you have defined the indexing database, you can now define
+terms associated with that database using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newterm}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{name}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{name} is the term and \meta{options} is a~list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options. The following keys are available:
+\begin{itemize}
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{database}
+
+ Identifies the database in which to store this term. For example:
+\begin{definition}
+\glsni{newterm}\oarg{database=index}\marg{eigenvalue}
+\end{definition}
+It can be somewhat cumbersome having to type the database for each
+new term. Instead you can define the default database using:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+For example:
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{index}\marg{Index}
+\glsni{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{index}
+
+\glsni{newterm}\marg{eigenvalue}
+\glsni{newterm}\marg{eigenvector}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{label}
+
+A label uniquely identifying this
+term. If omitted the label is extracted from \meta{name}.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{sort} 
+
+The sort key. If omitted this is extracted from \meta{name}.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{parent}
+
+The parent entry, if this is a~sub-term. (The value should be the
+label identifying the parent, which must already be defined.)
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{text}
+
+How the entry should appear in the document text. If omitted,
+\meta{name} is used. If present, \meta{name} indicates how the term
+should appear in the index\slash glossary.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{description}
+
+An optional associated description.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{plural}
+
+The plural form of this term. If omitted this value is obtained by
+appending \dq{s} to \meta{name} (or the value of \keyvalopt{text} if
+supplied).
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{symbol}
+
+An optional associated symbol.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{short}
+
+An associated short form, if required. (Defaults to \meta{name} if
+omitted.)
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{long}
+
+An associated long form, if required. (Defaults to \meta{name} if
+omitted.)
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{shortplural}
+
+The plural of the associated short form. If omitted, the value is
+obtained by appending \dq{s} to the short form.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{longplural}
+
+The plural of the associated long form. If omitted, the value is
+obtained by appending \dq{s} to the long form.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{see}
+
+A cross-reference to a~synonym. The value should be the label of
+another entry. This entry will not have a~location list, just the
+reference to the other term.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{seealso}
+
+A cross-reference to a~closely related term. Both this term and the
+cross-referenced term should have a~location list.
+
+\end{itemize}
+It's also possible to add your own custom keys. See the
+\sty{datagidx} section of the \sty{datatool} user
+guide~\cite{datatool} for further details.
+
+As with \gls{newglossaryentry}, discussed in
+\sectionref{sec:newglossaryentry}, if the term starts with an
+accented letter (or a~ligature) the letter must be grouped.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}\label{ex:elite}
+
+\begin{code}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newterm}\oarg{label=elite,sort=elite}\marg{\marg{\'{e}}lite}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   plural=\marg{\marg{\oe}sophagi},
+   label=\marg{oesophagus},
+   sort=\marg{oesophagus},
+   description=\marg{tube connecting throat and stomach}
+ }
+ \marg{\marg{\oe}sophagus}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{code}
+
+There is a~shortcut command for defining acronyms:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{newacro}\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{short}}\marg{\meta{long}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{short} is the abbreviation and \meta{long} is the long
+form. The optional argument \meta{options} is the same as for 
+\glsni{newterm}. This is equivalent to:
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   description=\marg{\glsni{capitalisewords}\marg{\meta{long}}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   short=\marg{\glsni{acronymfont}\marg{\meta{short}}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   long=\marg{\meta{long}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   text=\marg{\glsni{DTLgidxAcrStyle}\marg{\meta{long}}\marg{\glsni{acronymfont}\marg{\meta{short}}}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   plural=\marg{\glsni{DTLgidxAcrStyle}\marg{\meta{long}s}\marg{\glsni{acronymfont}\marg{\meta{short}s}}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   sort=\marg{\meta{short}},\glsni{percentchar}
+   \meta{options}\glsni{percentchar}
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{\glsni{MakeTextUppercase}\marg{\meta{short}}}
+\end{alltt}
+where
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{DTLgidxAcrStyle}\marg{\meta{long}}\marg{\meta{short}}
+\end{definition}
+formats the full version of the acronym. This defaults to:
+\meta{long} (\meta{short}), and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{acronymfont}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+is the font used to format acronyms. By default this just displays
+its argument, but can be redefined if you want the acronyms
+formatted in a~particular style or font (such as small-caps).
+The other commands used above are:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{MakeTextUppercase}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+This is defined by the \isty{textcase} package and converts
+\meta{text} to uppercase.
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{capitalisewords}\marg{\meta{text}}
+\end{definition}
+This is defined by the \isty{mfirstuc} package and capitalises the
+first letter of each word in \meta{text}.
+
+\xminisec{Example:}\label{ex:svm}
+
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{newacro}\marg{svm}\marg{support vector machine}
+\end{codeS}
+
+Once you have defined the terms in the preamble, you can later use
+them in the document:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.glspl}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.Gls}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.Glspl}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+These are similar to those described in \sectionref{sec:glslink},
+but they have a~different syntax. Here \meta{format} is the name of
+a~text-block commands (such as \gls{textbf}) \emph{without}
+the initial backslash that should be used to format the location for
+this reference. This is analogous to the \gls{index.barchar}
+special character described in \sectionref{sec:makeindexformat}.
+
+There are also commands associated with acronyms:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.acr}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.acrpl}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.Acr}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.Acrpl}\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+\warning
+Unlike the \isty{glossaries} package, described in
+\sectionref{sec:makeglossaries}, there is a~difference between
+\isty{datagidx}'s \glsni{datagidx.gls} and \glsni{datagidx.acr}.
+Here \glsni{datagidx.gls} will always display the value of the
+\ikeyvalopt{newterm}{text} field, whereas \glsni{datagidx.acr} will
+display the full form on first use (the \ikeyvalopt{newterm}{text}
+field) and the abbreviation on subsequent use (the
+\ikeyvalopt{newterm}{short} field).
+
+You can also add terms to the index without creating any link text:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.glsadd}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+This adds the term uniquely identified by \meta{label}.
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{datagidx.glsaddall}\marg{\meta{database name}}
+\end{definition}
+This adds all the terms defined in the database uniquely identified
+by \meta{database name}.
+
+\xminisec{Note:}
+
+\warning Unlike most commands, the optional part of the above
+commands occurs \emph{inside} the mandatory argument.
+
+\xminisec{Examples:}
+
+Given the \texttt{elite} and
+\texttt{oesophagus} examples defined \xpageref{earlier}{ex:elite}, I~can reference those entries in the text as
+follows:
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{datagidx.Gls}\marg{elite} and
+\gls{datagidx.glspl}\marg{oesophagus}.
+\end{codeS}
+This produces:
+\begin{resultS}[Elite and oesophagi]
+\'{E}lite and \oe sophagi.
+\end{resultS}
+Elsewhere, I~might have the main topic about \oe sophagi:
+\begin{code}
+The \gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{\oarg{textbf}oesophagus} connects
+the throat and the stomach.
+\end{code}
+This produces:
+\begin{resultS}[The oesophagus connects the throat and the stomach.]
+The \oe sophagus connects the throat and the stomach.
+\end{resultS}
+and the associated location will be typeset in bold.
+
+Here's an example using the \texttt{svm} example defined
+\xpageref{earlier}{ex:svm}:
+\begin{code}
+First use: \gls{datagidx.acr}\marg{svm}\gls{at}.
+Subsequent use: \gls{datagidx.acr}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Full form:  \gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{svm}.
+\end{code}
+This produces:
+\begin{result}[datagidx-svm.html]
+First use: support vector machine (SVM)\@.
+Subsequent use: SVM\@.
+Full form: support vector machine (SVM).
+\end{result}
+
+You can unset and reset acronyms using
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsunset}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+and
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{glsreset}\marg{\meta{label}}
+\end{definition}
+
+To display the index or glossary or list of acronyms use:
+\begin{definition}
+\gls{printterms}\oarg{\meta{options}}
+\end{definition}
+where \meta{options} is a~comma-separated \meta{key}=\meta{value} list.
+Common options are:
+\begin{itemize} 
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{printterms}{database}
+
+ The label uniquely identifying the database containing the relevant
+terms.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{printterms}{postdesc}
+
+ This may have the value \optfmt{dot} (put a~full stop after the
+description, if there is a~description) or \optfmt{none} (don't put
+a~full stop after the description).
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{printterms}{columns}
+
+ This value must be an integer greater than or equal to 1,
+indicating the number of columns for the page layout.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{printterms}{style}
+
+ The style to use. There are a~number of predefined styles, such as
+\texttt{index} or \texttt{gloss}. See the user guide~\cite{datatool}
+for further details.
+
+ \item \ikeyvalopt{printterms}{namecase}
+
+ Indicates whether any case change should be applied to the entry's
+name. Available values are: \optfmt{nochange} (no change),
+\optfmt{uc} (convert to uppercase), \optfmt{lc} (convert to lower
+case), \optfmt{firstuc} (convert the first letter to uppercase)
+and \optfmt{capitalise} (capitalise each initial letter using
+\gls{capitalisewords}).
+
+\end{itemize}
+For a~full list of options see the \sty{datagidx} section of the
+\sty{datatool} user guide~\cite{datatool}.
+
+\listingref{ex:thesis-glossaries} can now be rewritten as follows:
+\begin{codelisting}{thesis-datagidx.tex}
+\begin{alltt}
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} biber
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{percentchar.arara} pdflatex: \marg{ synctex: on }
+\glsni{documentclass}\oarg{oneside,12pt}\marg{scrbook}
+
+\glsni{usepackage}\marg{datagidx}
+
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{index}\marg{Index}
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{glossary}\marg{Glossary}
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{acronym}\marg{Acronyms}
+\glsni{newgidx}\marg{notation}\marg{Notation}
+
+\glsni{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{glossary}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   description=\marg{a rectangular table of elements},\glsni{percentchar} brief description
+   plural=\marg{matrices}\glsni{percentchar} the plural
+ }%
+ \marg{matrix}% the name
+
+\glsni{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{acronym}
+
+\glsni{newacro}\marg{svm}\marg{support vector machine}
+
+\glsni{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{notation}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+  label=\marg{not:set},\glsni{percentchar} label
+  description=\marg{A set},\glsni{percentchar}
+  sort=\marg{S}\glsni{percentchar}
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{\gls{ensuremath}\marg{\gls{mathcal}\marg{S}}}
+
+\glsni{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}\marg{index}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   label=\marg{function},\glsni{percentchar}
+   text=\marg{function}\glsni{percentchar}
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{functions}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   see=\marg{sqrt},\glsni{percentchar}
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{square root}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   label=\marg{fn.sqrt},
+   parent=\marg{function}
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{\glsni{texttt}\marg{sqrt()}}
+
+\glsni{newterm}
+ \oarg{\glsni{percentchar}
+   label=\marg{sqrt},
+ }\glsni{percentchar}
+ \marg{\texttt{sqrt()}}
+
+\glsni{newterm}\marg{tautology}
+\glsni{newterm}\marg{contradiction}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} later in the document:
+
+\end{alltt}
+\glsni{datagidx.Glspl}\marg{matrix} are usually denoted by a~bold capital letter, such as
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{A}\glsni{dollarchar}. 
+The \glsni{datagidx.gls}\marg{matrix}'s
+\glsni{dollarchar}(i,j)\glsni{dollarchar}th element is usually
+denoted
+\glsni{dollarchar}a\glsni{underscorechar}\marg{ij}\glsni{dollarchar}.
+\glsni{datagidx.Gls}\marg{matrix}
+\glsni{dollarchar}\glsni{mathbf}\marg{I}\glsni{dollarchar} is the identity
+\glsni{datagidx.gls}\marg{matrix}.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+First use: \gls{datagidx.acr}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}. 
+Next use: \gls{datagidx.acr}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.
+Full: \gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{svm}\glsni{at}.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+A \gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{not:set} is a~collection of
+objects.\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\ldots\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+Some sample code is shown in
+Listing\glsni{tildechar}\glsni{ref}\marg{lst:sample}.
+This uses the function
+\gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{fn.sqrt}.\gls{datagidx.glsadd}\marg{sqrt}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\ldots\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Tautology}\newline
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{\glsni{datagidx.gls}\marg{\oarg{textbf}tautology}} is a~proposition
+that is always true for any value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}\newline
+\mbox{}\newline
+\glsni{begin}\marg{Definition}\oarg{Contradiction}\newline
+A \glsni{emph}\marg{\gls{datagidx.gls}\marg{\oarg{textbf}contradiction}} is a
+proposition that is always false for any
+value of its variables.\newline
+\glsni{end}\marg{Definition}
+\begin{alltt}
+
+\glsni{percentchar} At the end of the document:
+\glsni{backmatter}
+
+\glsni{printterms}\oarg{database=glossary}
+\glsni{printterms}\oarg{database=acronym}
+\glsni{printterms}\oarg{database=notation}
+
+\glsni{printbibliography}
+
+\glsni{printterms}\oarg{database=index}
+\end{alltt}
+\end{codelisting}
+
+Note that there is now no need to call either \iappname{makeindex}
+or \iappname{makeglossaries}. The only external application 
+being called is \iappname{biber} for the bibliography.
+
+\appendix
+
+\setnode{generaladvice}
+\chapter{General Advice}
+\label{ch:generaladvice}
+
+If you encounter any \LaTeX\ problems, check 
+\latexhtml{Appendix~\ref{nov-ch:errors} (Common Errors)
+and Appendix~\ref{nov-ch:help} (Need More Help?) in \latexnovices.}{%
+\xrsectionref{Common Errors}{commonerrors} and
+\xrsectionref{Need More Help?}{help}}
+
+\setnode{toomanyunprocessedfloats}
+\section{Too Many Unprocessed Floats}
+\label{sec:toomanyunprocessedfloats}
+
+A common problem PhD student's encounter when writing a~thesis is
+the \dq{too many unprocessed floats} error.\faq{Too many unprocessed
+floats}{tmupfl} This is usually caused by having too many figures
+and tables in the results chapter and not enough surrounding text.
+If this happens, there are a~number of things you can try doing:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item Make sure you haven't been too restrictive in where you want
+your floats to go. If you use a~placement specifier, give LaTeX as
+many options as possible. For example:
+\begin{codeS}
+\glsni{begin}\marg{figure}\oarg{htbp}
+\end{codeS}
+which indicates that the figure can be placed \dq{here}
+(\texttt{h}), at the top of a~page (\texttt{t}), at the bottom of
+the page (\texttt{b}) or on a~page solely consisting of floats
+(\texttt{p}). If you just use the \texttt{h} placement specifier
+then you are stating: \dq{I~want it \emph{here} and \emph{nowhere
+else}!} If \TeX\ can't put it \emph{exactly here}, then you have
+given no alternative place to put it, and it won't get placed
+anywhere, unless a~\gls{clearpage} command is issued, at which point
+all remaining unprocessed floats will be dumped at that point. If
+you are determined that an image must be placed \emph{exactly here}
+then it should not be placed in a~floating environment. 
+
+\item Try increasing the amount of text in the chapter. Remember
+that you should never simply print all the figures and tables in a
+results chapter without discussing them to some extent.
+
+\item If all else fails, try using the \glsni{clearpage} command. This
+forces all unprocessed floats to be processed immediately, and start
+a~new page. This may result in the page ending prematurely, if you
+wish to avoid this, you can use the \isty{afterpage} package, and
+use the command: 
+\begin{codeS}
+\gls{afterpage}\marg{\gls{clearpage}}
+\end{codeS}
+\end{enumerate}
+For other problems, check the FAQ~\cite{ukfaq}.
+
+\setnode{thesiswritingadvice}
+\section{General Thesis Writing Advice}
+\label{sec:thesiswritingadvice}
+
+This section is not specific to \LaTeX. Some of the points have
+already been mentioned in asides or footnotes. Remember that each
+college or university or even school within a~university may have
+different requirements, and requirements will also vary according to
+country, so some of this advice may not apply to you. I~am writing
+from the point of view of an English scientist, and am basing it on
+my own experience and on the comments of English science-based PhD
+examiners and supervisors. I~cannot guarantee that your own
+department or university will agree with them. \emph{If in doubt,
+check with your supervisor.}
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item Find out the thesis style requirements from your supervisor or
+your department's website. Many universities still require
+\htmlref{double-spaced}{sec:setspace}, single-sided documents 
+with \htmlref{wide margins}{geometry}.
+Double-spacing is by and large looked down on in the world of
+typesetting, but this requirement for a~PhD thesis has nothing to do
+with \ae sthetics or readability. In England the purpose of the PhD
+viva is to defend your work\footnote{I~gather this is not the case
+in some other countries, where the viva is more informal, and the
+decision to pass or fail you has already been made before your viva.}. Before your viva, paper copies of
+your thesis are sent to your examiners. The double spacing and wide
+margins provide the examiners room to write the comments and
+criticisms they wish to raise during the viva, as well as any
+typographical corrections. Whilst they could write these comments on
+a~separate piece of paper, cross-referencing the page in
+the thesis, it is more efficient for the comments to actually be on
+the relevant page of the thesis. That way, as they go through the
+manuscript during your viva, they can easily see the comments,
+questions or criticisms they wish to raise alongside the
+corresponding
+text. If you present them with a~single-spaced document with narrow
+margins, you are effectively telling them that you don't want them
+to criticise your work!
+
+\item Don't try to pad your thesis with irrelevant information. This
+includes adding items in your bibliography that are not referenced
+in the text, adding figures or tables that are not explained in the
+text, and supplying all the source code you have written. The
+outcome of your viva will not depend on the physical size of your
+thesis, but on the clarity of your writing and on the quality of
+your work.
+
+\item Clearly delineate your thesis through the use of chapters and
+sections, outlining your original aims and objectives, an overview
+of the subject matter including references to other people's work in
+the area, the methods you employed to extend or innovate the field,
+your results and conclusions. 
+
+\item Make sure your references include some recent journal or
+conference papers to illustrate that you are aware of new
+developments in your field. Remember that due to the nature of
+publishing, most books are dated by the time they reach the book
+shelves. Journal and conference papers are likely to be more
+up-to-date\footnote{Having said that, I~know someone who submitted
+an article to a~journal, and it took three and a~half years before
+the reviewers came back with comments. In the end, the author
+withdrew the manuscript because by that time the topic was out of
+date.}.
+
+\item Always explain acronyms, technical terms and symbols. It is a
+good idea to include a~glossary of terms, list of notation or list
+of acronyms to avoid confusion (see \chapterref{ch:indgloss}).
+
+\item If you have equations, make sure you explain the variables
+used, and how you go from one equation to the next. Depending on
+your field, you might also consider clarifying the mathematics by
+providing graphical representations of the equations\footnote{When I
+was a~PhD student, I~was once rendered speechless when asked to
+provide a~graphical illustration of an equation involving a
+quadruple summation that had no graphical meaning from my point of
+view. Perhaps this was a~drawback of being a~mathematician doing a
+PhD in an electronics department.}.
+
+\item If you include any graphs, bar charts, pie charts or any other
+form of data plot, make sure it is clearly labelled and no
+distortion is introduced (such as using three-dimensional bar charts
+or pie charts\footnote{The sole purpose of 3D pie charts or bar
+charts appears to be to look pretty and impress people who have no
+understanding of mathematics.}.) 
+
+\item If you have used a~computer application to generate numerical
+results, make sure you have some understanding of the underlying
+process and what the results mean. This doesn't necessarily mean
+that you need to understand complex computer code, or complex
+algorithms, but what you shouldn't do is say something along the
+lines of, \dq{well, I~clicked on this button, and it said $m=0.678$.}
+What is the purpose of the button? What does $m$ represent? What
+does the result $ m=0.678$ signify? What value were you expecting or
+hoping to get? Numbers on their own are meaningless. If I~ran into a
+room shouting \dq{I've got 42!} What does that mean? Forty-two what?
+Forty-two brilliant reviews? (Great!) Forty-two percent in an exam?
+(Not good.) Forty-two spots on my face? (Very bad!) 
+
+\item\label{itm:gcc1} Don't waste time worrying about the best way
+to word your thesis in your first draft. Write first, then edit it
+later or you will never get started. 
+
+\item\label{itm:gcc2} If your supervisor offers to critique chapters of
+your thesis, don't say no! Such offers are not made
+out of politeness, but a~desire to ensure that you pass. Don't be
+embarrassed and worry that it's not good enough, that's the whole
+point in your supervisor helping you improve it\footnote{but don't
+expect your supervisor to actually write your thesis!}. 
+
+\item Write in a~clear concise manner. A thesis is a~technical
+document, not a~novel, so don't be tempted to write something along
+the lines of: \dq{I~awaited with bated breath, my whole body quivering
+with excitement at the eager anticipation that my algorithm would
+prove superior to all others, and, oh joy, my experiments proved me
+right.} 
+
+\item Don't decorate your thesis with irrelevant clip art. It is
+unprofessional and highly inappropriate in the sciences.
+
+\item Make regular backups of your work. Be prepared for any of the
+following: accidentally deleting your thesis, accidentally
+overwriting your thesis with another file, software failure,
+hardware failure, viruses, fire and theft. Consider using at least
+a~two-tier system where you keep one backup in a safe place where
+you live and ask a close relative or friend to take care of another backup.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+Items~\ref{itm:gcc1} and~\ref{itm:gcc2} above were supplied by
+Dr~Gavin Cawley\footnote{School of Computing Sciences, University of
+East Anglia} who has been both a~PhD supervisor and examiner. 
+
+\backmatter
+
+\clearpage\phantomsection
+\setnode{bibliography}
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{thesis}
+
+\setnode{acronyms}
+\printglossary[type=acronym,nonumberlist,style=acronyms]
+
+\setnode{summary}
+\setdoublecolumnglo
+\printglossary[style=summary]
+
+\setnode{bookindex}
+\printindex
+
+\setnode{licence}
+\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License}
+\input{../fdl}
+
+\setnode{history}
+\chapter{History}\markright{History}
+
+\historyitem{\protect\bookdocdate\ (Version 1.3)}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Added recap on building the document.
+ \item Added sections on \appname{latexmk} and \appname{arara}.
+ \item Changed examples to use KOMA.
+ \item Added sections on \appname{jabref}, \sty{natbib} and \sty{biblatex}.
+ \item Added information about the \sty{listings}, \sty{siunitx},
+  \sty{amsthm}, \sty{ntheorem} and \sty{algorithm2e} packages.
+ \item Added section on \sty{datagidx} to the chapter on indexes and
+glossaries.
+ \item Added summary section.
+ \item Some sections have been reordered.
+ \item Removed section on modifying textual tags such as
+\cmdname{contentsname} (now in Volume~1).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\backcoverheading
+(See \url{http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl-howto-opt.html#SEC2}.)
+
+\backcovertext
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimawthesis.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimawthesis.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..33b7e96fde4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/dickimawthesis.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,2852 @@
+% Class file for ``Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis''
+% This is part of the source code for "Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis"
+% It includes some code that was used to generate other formats of
+% this tutorial that aren't included in this distribution.
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{dickimawthesis}
+
+\newif\ifscreen
+\screenfalse
+
+\newcommand*{\extra@stuff}{}
+
+\newcommand{\dosummarymark}[1]{%
+  \def\@summarymarker{#1}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@summarymarker
+  \edef\do@writeout{%
+     \noexpand\protected@write\noexpand\@auxout{}{%
+       \string\summarymarker{\noexpand\thepage}{\@summarymarker}%
+     }%
+  }%
+  \do@writeout
+}
+
+% Default is report
+\def\thesis@loadsty{thesis-a4paper}
+\def\thesis@ptsize{12pt}
+\newcount\thesismedia
+\def\THESISreport{0}
+\def\THESISscreen{1}
+\def\THESISbook{2}
+\thesismedia=\THESISreport\relax
+\PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+
+\DeclareOption{report}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\thesis@loadsty{thesis-a4paper}%
+  \def\thesis@ptsize{12pt}%
+  \thesismedia=\THESISreport\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{html}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\thesis@loadsty{thesis-html}%
+  \def\thesis@ptsize{12pt}%
+  \thesismedia=\THESISreport\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,oneside,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+  \renewcommand*{\extra@stuff}{%
+    \hypersetup{linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,urlcolor=black}%
+    \renewcommand{\tableref}[1]{\tablename~\ref{##1}}%
+    \renewcommand{\vfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{##1}}%
+    \renewcommand{\figureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{##1}}%
+    \renewcommand{\listingref}[1]{Listing~\ref{##1}}%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand{\dosummarymark}[1]{}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{screen}{%
+  \screentrue
+  \def\thesis@loadsty{thesis-screen}%
+  \def\thesis@ptsize{8pt}
+  \thesismedia=\THESISscreen\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=false,oneside,headings=small,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{book}{%
+  \screenfalse
+  \def\thesis@loadsty{thesis-book}%
+  \def\thesis@ptsize{10pt}
+  \thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+  \PassOptionsToClass{chapterprefix=true,twoside,headings=normal,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot}{scrbook}%
+}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{scrbook}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\LoadClass{scrbook}
+
+\expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter[\thesis@ptsize]{extsizes}
+
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{ntheorem}
+\usepackage[algo2e]{algorithm2e}
+
+% Requires at least version 1.08 of the flowfram package
+\RequirePackage{\thesis@loadsty}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+ \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0.7in}
+ \newlength\@even@offset
+ \setlength{\@even@offset}{0.3in}
+
+ \setflowframe*{main,header,left,leftshort}{margin=outer}
+
+ \@flowframeid{right}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+ \@flowframeid{rightshort}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@flowframeid{left}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+ \@flowframeid{leftshort}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@flowframeid{main}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname col@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{header}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{footer}
+ \expandafter\addtolength\csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname{\@even@offset}
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{indextab}
+ \expandafter\computeleftedgeeven
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+% \expandafter\addtolength
+%   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+%   {3mm}%
+ \expandafter\addtolength
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @posx\endcsname
+   {3mm}%
+
+ \setdynamiccontents{\ff@id}{%
+   \color{white}\LARGE\bfseries\scshape\centering
+   \ifodd\c@page\relax
+     \hspace*{-1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{-90}{Index}%
+   \else
+     \hspace*{1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{90}{Index}%
+   \fi
+   \par
+ }
+
+ \@dynamicframeid{summarytab}
+ \expandafter\computeleftedgeeven
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+% \expandafter\addtolength
+%   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @evenx\endcsname
+%   {3mm}%
+ \expandafter\addtolength
+   \csname @df@\romannumeral\ff@id @posx\endcsname
+   {3mm}%
+
+ \setdynamiccontents{\ff@id}{%
+   \color{white}\LARGE\bfseries\scshape\centering
+   \ifodd\c@page\relax
+     \hspace*{-1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{-90}{Summary}%
+   \else
+     \hspace*{1ex}\rotatebox[origin=cb]{90}{Summary}%
+   \fi
+   \par
+ }
+
+\fi
+
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\RequirePackage{pifont}
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{ifpdf}
+\RequirePackage{url}
+\RequirePackage[french]{datetime}
+\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
+\RequirePackage{makeidx}
+
+% html package conflicts with varioref+hyperref, so emulate it:
+\RequirePackage{comment}
+\specialcomment{htmlonly}{}{}
+\excludecomment{htmlonly}
+\newenvironment{latexonly}{\ignorespaces}{\ignorespacesafterend}
+\newenvironment{makeimage}{}{}
+\newcommand{\latex}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand{\latexhtml}[2]{#1}
+\newcommand{\html}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\htmlimage}[2]{}
+\newcommand{\mathorit}[1]{\ensuremath{#1}}
+
+\RequirePackage{varioref}
+\RequirePackage{xr-hyper}
+\RequirePackage[hyperindex=false]{hyperref}
+\RequirePackage[toc,subentrycounter,
+   sanitizesort=false,
+   acronym,indexonlyfirst,
+   counter=section,numberedsection=nolabel,savewrites]{glossaries}
+\usepackage{glossary-inline}
+
+% Redefine \htmladdnormallinkfoot so that it typesets the url in
+% typewriter font for the book, but does not footnote for report and
+% screen versions:
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+  \renewcommand*{\htmladdnormallinkfoot}[2]{\href{#2}{#1}\footnote{\texttt{#2}}}
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\htmladdnormallinkfoot}[2]{\href{#2}{#1}}
+\fi
+
+% don't check for makeindex special characters, as they're dealt
+% with explicitly
+\let\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@gobble
+
+\longdate
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \hypersetup{draft}
+\else
+  \hypersetup{colorlinks,plainpages=false,
+  linkcolor=blue,menucolor=blue,citecolor=blue,
+  urlcolor=magenta,filecolor=magenta}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\vfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\vref{#1}}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+ \newcommand{\figureref}[1]{\figurename~\vref{#1}}
+ \newcommand{\tableref}[1]{\tablename~\vref{#1}}
+ \newcommand{\listingref}[1]{Listing~\vref{#1}}
+\else
+  \newcommand{\figureref}[1]{\hyperlink{#1top}{\figurename~\ref*{#1}}}
+  \newcommand{\tableref}[1]{\htmlref{\tablename~\ref*{#1}}{#1}}
+  \newcommand{\listingref}[1]{\htmlref{Listing~\ref*{#1}}{#1}}
+\fi
+
+\extra@stuff
+
+\robustify\htmlref
+
+\newcommand{\listofexamples}{%
+  \chapter*{Listings\@mkboth{Listings}{Listings}}%
+  \@starttoc{loe}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\headfont}{\em}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISscreen\relax
+  \renewcommand*{\footfont}{\small\scshape}
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\footfont}{\em}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\leftfootmark}{}
+\newcommand*{\rightfootmark}{}
+\renewcommand*{\ps@headings}{%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{\normalfont\headfont\thepage\hfill\leftmark}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{\normalfont\headfont\rightmark\hfill\thepage}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\leftfootmark\@leftfoothook\hfill}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\hfill\normalfont\footfont\rightfootmark\@rightfoothook}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\ps@plain}{%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddhead}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenhead}{}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\mbox{}\hfill\thepage\@rightfoothook}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@evenfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\thepage\hfill\mbox{}\@leftfoothook}%
+}
+
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+\newcommand*{\@leftfoothook}{}
+\newcommand*{\@rightfoothook}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\setleftfootmark}[1]{}
+
+\newcommand*{\@setleftfootmark}[1]{%
+  \gdef\leftfootmark{#1}%
+  \global\let\setleftfootmark\@gobble
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\setrightfootmark}[1]{}
+
+\newcommand*{\@setrightfootmark}[1]{%
+  \gdef\rightfootmark{#1}%
+}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \newcommand*{\enablefoothooks}{%
+    \let\setrightfootmark\@setrightfootmark
+    \let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    \renewcommand*{\@rightfoothook}{%
+      \global\let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    }%
+    \renewcommand*{\@leftfoothook}{%
+      \global\let\setleftfootmark\@setleftfootmark
+    }%
+  }
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\enablefoothooks}{}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\disablefoothooks}{%
+  \global\let\leftfootmark\@empty
+  \global\let\rightfootmark\@empty
+  \global\let\setrightfootmark\@gobble
+  \global\let\setleftfootmark\@gobble
+  \global\let\@leftfoothook\@empty
+  \global\let\@rightfoothook\@empty
+}
+
+\providecommand{\abstractname}{Abstract}
+
+\newcommand*{\@edition}{}
+\newcommand*{\edition}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@edition}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\theversion}{}
+\newcommand*{\version}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theversion}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\thevolume}{}
+\newcommand*{\volume}[1]{\renewcommand*{\thevolume}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\theseries}{}
+\newcommand*{\series}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theseries}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\theseriesurl}{}
+\newcommand*{\seriesurl}[1]{\renewcommand*{\theseriesurl}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\navigationbar}{{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\thepage}{a}}{\textcolor[gray]{.75}{Previous}}{%
+\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}{Previous}}\enspace
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{lastpg}}{\textcolor[gray]{.75}{Next}}{%
+\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}{Next}}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}{First}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{LastPage}{Last}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{GoBack}{Back}\enspace
+\Acrobatmenu{GoForward}{Forward}\enspace
+\htmlref{Summary}{ch:glossary}\enspace
+\htmlref{Index}{ch:index}}}
+
+\newcommand{\ps@online}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{{\normalfont\headfont\rightmark}\hfil}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{{\normalfont\hfil\headfont\leftmark}}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar
+\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+
+\ifscreen
+\pagestyle{online}
+
+\renewcommand{\ps@plain}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar
+\hfill\thepage}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+\renewcommand{\ps@empty}{%
+\renewcommand{\@oddhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@evenhead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\normalfont\footfont\hfill
+\navigationbar \hfill\mbox{}}
+\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}}
+
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISscreen\relax
+  \renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+  \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\textup{\thechapter}.\enspace}
+  \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering\rmfamily\scshape}
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+  \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\thechapter}
+  \addtokomafont{chapter}{\raggedleft\rmfamily\scshape}
+\fi
+
+\addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\large\rmfamily\scshape}
+\addtokomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}{\large\rmfamily\upshape}
+\addtokomafont{section}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{subsection}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{subsubsection}{\rmfamily\bfseries}
+\addtokomafont{minisec}{\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISreport
+  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstartvskip}{%
+    \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}%
+  }
+\fi
+
+\renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+  \ifnum\c@tocdepth>\m@ne
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty<20010
+      \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+    \fi
+    \vskip 1.0em \@plus \p@ 
+    \setlength \@tempdima{2em}%
+    \if@tocleft
+      \ifx\toc@l@number\@empty
+      \else
+        \setlength \@tempdima{0\toc@l@number}%
+      \fi
+    \fi 
+    \begingroup
+      \raggedchapterentry
+      \parindent\z@
+      \advance\rightskip\@pnumwidth 
+      \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+      \interlinepenalty\@M
+      \leavevmode
+      \advance\leftskip \@tempdima
+      \null\nobreak
+      \hskip -\leftskip
+      \usekomafont{chapterentry}%
+      {%
+        #1\nobreak
+        \usekomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}%
+        {%
+          \hfill
+          \nobreak
+          \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}%
+        }%
+      }%
+      \par
+      \ifnum\scr@compatibility>\@nameuse{scr@v@2.96}%
+       \relax
+       \endgroup
+       \penalty 20009
+     \else
+       \penalty\@highpenalty
+       \endgroup
+     \fi
+   \fi
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\l@section}{%
+  \bprot@dottedtocline {1}{1.5em}{3em}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand*{\captionformat}{\space}
+
+\renewcommand{\title}[2][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdftitle}{#2}}{
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@pdftitle}{}}{\renewcommand{\@pdftitle}{#1}}{}}%
+\renewcommand{\@title}{#2}}
+
+\renewcommand{\author}[2][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@pdfauthor}{}}{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdfauthor}{#2}}{}}{\renewcommand{\@pdfauthor}{#1}}%
+\renewcommand{\@author}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\keywords}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pdfkeywords}{#1}}
+
+\providecommand{\subject}[1]{%
+\renewcommand{\@pdfsubject}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\@affiliation}{}
+\newcommand*{\thepublisher}{\@affiliation}
+\newcommand*{\@affiliationurl}{}
+\newcommand*{\@affiliationaddress}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\affiliation}[3]{%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliation}{#1}%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliationurl}{\url{#2}}%
+  \renewcommand{\@affiliationaddress}{#3}%
+}
+
+\ifpdf
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg}
+\else
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.ps,.eps}
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  % book doesn't have sidepanel
+\else
+  % get the dimensions of sidepanel (values are stored in \ffareax, \ffareay, \ffareawidth and \ffareaheight)
+  \getdynamicbounds*{sidepanel}
+
+  % set the margin width to be the same as the width of sidepanel
+  \setlength{\marginparwidth}{\ffareawidth}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\index@preamble}{}
+\newcommand{\indexpreamble}[1]{%
+  \renewcommand{\index@preamble}{#1}%
+}
+
+% renew theindex environment so that it appears in the table of contents
+% and set up index frames
+
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+{%
+  \clearpage
+  \begingroup
+   \normalfont\sectfont
+   \chapterheadstartvskip
+   \phantomsection
+   \size@chapter{\indexname}%
+   \thispagestyle{plain}%
+   \label{ch:index}%
+   \par
+  \endgroup
+  \markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+  \parindent\z@
+  \index@preamble\par
+  \enablefoothooks
+%  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+  \let\item\@idxitem
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+    \setleftfootmark{\doindextopmark}%
+    \setrightfootmark{\doindexbottommark}%
+  \else
+    \setdynamiccontents*{sidepanel}{%
+      \hfil\ifscreen\normalsize\else\large\fi\indexbar\hfil}%
+  \fi
+  \ifscreen\small\fi
+  \newpage
+  \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+{%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endindex{\thepage}}%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@old@last@idx@page{\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \setrightfootmark{\doindexbottommark\disablefoothooks}%
+  \setleftfootmark{\doindextopmark\disablefoothooks}%
+}
+
+\newcount\@first@idx@page
+\newcount\@last@idx@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endindex}[1]{\global\@last@idx@page=#1\relax}
+
+\newcommand*{\@old@last@idx@page}{-1}
+\newcommand*{\@flow@old@last@idx@page}[1]{%
+  \gdef\@old@last@idx@page{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcount\@last@summary@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endsummary}[1]{%
+  \global\@last@summary@page=#1\relax
+  \global\@first@idx@page=\@last@summary@page
+  \global\advance\@first@idx@page by 1\relax
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+    \ifodd\@first@idx@page
+      \relax
+    \else
+      \global\advance\@first@idx@page by 1\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcount\@first@summary@page
+
+\newcount\@last@acr@page
+\newcommand*{\@flow@endacr}[1]{\global\@last@acr@page=#1\relax}
+
+\newcommand*{\@flow@startsummary}[1]{%
+  \global\@first@summary@page=#1\relax
+   \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+     \ifodd\@first@summary@page
+       \relax
+     \else
+       \global\advance\@first@summary@page by 1\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% Put glossary in double-column
+
+\newcommand*{\setdoublecolumnglo}{%
+  \let\glossarysection\dblglossarysection
+}
+
+\newcount\tmp@count
+
+\newcommand{\@setup@pages}{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+    \setdynamicframe*{summarytab}{pages={\number\@first@summary@page-\number\@last@summary@page}}%
+    \setdynamicframe*{indextab}{pages={\number\@first@idx@page-\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \else
+    \setdynamicframe*{sidepanel}%
+      {pages={\number\@first@summary@page-\number\@last@summary@page,%
+              \number\@first@idx@page-\number\@last@idx@page}}%
+  \fi
+  \ifnum\@first@summary@page>0\relax
+    \@ff@tmpN=\@first@summary@page
+    \advance\@ff@tmpN by 1\relax
+    \tmp@count=\@first@idx@page
+    \advance\tmp@count by 1\relax
+    \edef\@nv@set@flf{\noexpand\setflowframe*{left,right}%
+      {pages={\number\@ff@tmpN-\number\@last@summary@page
+             ,\number\tmp@count-\number\@last@idx@page}}}%
+    \@nv@set@flf
+    \setflowframe*{main}%
+      {pages={2-\number\@last@acr@page,\number\@last@acr@page,>\number\@last@idx@page}}
+    \setflowframe*{header,leftshort,rightshort}%
+      {pages={\number\@first@summary@page,\number\@first@idx@page}}
+  \fi
+}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\@setup@pages}
+
+\newcommand*{\dblglossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+  \doifnotbook
+  {%
+    \setdynamiccontents*{sidepanel}{%
+      \hfil\ifscreen\normalsize\else\large\fi\summarybar\hfil}%
+  }%
+  \clearpage
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@startsummary{\thepage}}%
+  \begingroup
+  \normalfont\sectfont
+  \chapterheadstartvskip
+  \phantomsection
+  \size@chapter{#2}%
+  \thispagestyle{plain}%
+  \label{ch:glossary}%
+  \par
+  \endgroup
+  \markboth{\glossarytoctitle}{\glossarytoctitle}%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+  \vskip\baselineskip
+  \noindent
+  \emph{\summarypreamble}\par
+  \newpage
+}
+
+\def\summarypreamble{}
+
+\newif\iflastpg
+\AtEndDocument
+{%
+  \lastpgtrue
+  \ifnum\@last@idx@page=\@old@last@idx@page
+    \relax
+  \else
+    \ClassWarningNoLine{thesis}{Rerun required to get frames up-to-date}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\maketitle}{%
+  \pagenumbering{alph}% for PDF bookmarks
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfinfo
+    {%
+       /Author (\@pdfauthor)
+       /Title  (\@pdftitle)
+       /Keywords (\@pdfkeywords)
+       /Subject  (\@pdfsubject)
+       /ModDate (D:\pdfdate)
+       /CreationDate (D:20040706000000)
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \begin{titlepage}%
+   \@maketitle
+  \end{titlepage}%
+  \thispagestyle{empty}%
+  \newpage
+  \bgroup
+    \thecopyrighttext
+    \par
+  \egroup
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+  \global\let\thetitle\@title
+  \global\let\theauthor\@author
+  \global\let\thanks\relax
+  \global\let\maketitle\relax
+  \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+  \global\let\@author\@empty
+  \global\let\@date\@empty
+  \global\let\@title\@empty
+  \global\let\title\relax
+  \global\let\author\relax
+  \global\let\date\relax
+  \global\let\and\relax
+  \normalfont
+}
+
+\providecommand{\theauthoryear}{}
+\providecommand{\theauthorsurname}{}
+\providecommand{\theauthorforenames}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\authordetails}[3]{%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthoryear}{#1}%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthorsurname}{#2}%
+  \renewcommand*{\theauthorforenames}{#3}%
+  \renewcommand*{\@author}{#3\ #2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand\thetitle{\@title}
+
+\providecommand*{\maketitlehook}{}
+
+\providecommand{\thecopyrighttext}{}
+
+\newcommand{\copyrighttext}[1]{%
+  \appto\thecopyrighttext{#1}%
+}
+
+\ifcase\thesismedia
+
+  % report version
+  \newcommand{\indexbar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|c}
+      \idxheaderlink{Symbols} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{A} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{B} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{C} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{D} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{E} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{F} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{G} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{H} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{I} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{J} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{K} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{L} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{M} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{N} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{O} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{P} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Q} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{R} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{S} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{T} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{U} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{V} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{W} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{X} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Y} \\
+      \idxheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\summarybar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|c}
+      \glsheaderlink{glssymbols} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{A} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{B} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{C} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{D} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{E} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{F} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{G} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{H} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{I} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{J} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{K} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{L} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{M} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{N} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{O} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{P} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Q} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{R} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{S} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{T} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{U} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{V} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{W} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{X} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Y} \\
+      \glsheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \renewcommand{\@maketitle}{%
+  \let\footnotesize\small
+  \let\footnoterule\relax
+  \let \footnote \thanks
+  \null\vfil
+  \vskip 60\p@
+  \begin{center}%
+    {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+    \vskip 2ex%
+    {\large Version \theversion\par}%
+    \vskip 3em%
+    {\large
+     \lineskip .75em%
+      \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+        \@author
+      \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large 
+       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}
+       \@affiliation\\
+       \@affiliationurl
+       \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large \@date \par}%       % Set date in \large size.
+  \end{center}\par
+  \@thanks
+  \vfil\null
+}
+
+\or
+  % screen version
+  \newcommand{\indexbar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|cc}
+    \multicolumn{2}{|c}{\idxheaderlink{Symbols}}\\
+    \idxheaderlink{A} &
+    \idxheaderlink{N} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{B} &
+    \idxheaderlink{O} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{C} &
+    \idxheaderlink{P} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{D} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Q} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{E} &
+    \idxheaderlink{R} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{F} &
+    \idxheaderlink{S} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{G} &
+    \idxheaderlink{T} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{H} &
+    \idxheaderlink{U} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{I} &
+    \idxheaderlink{V} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{J} &
+    \idxheaderlink{W} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{K} &
+    \idxheaderlink{X} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{L} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Y} \\
+    \idxheaderlink{M} &
+    \idxheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\summarybar}{%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{|cc}
+    \multicolumn{2}{|c}{\glsheaderlink{glssymbols}}\\
+    \glsheaderlink{A} &
+    \glsheaderlink{N} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{B} &
+    \glsheaderlink{O} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{C} &
+    \glsheaderlink{P} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{D} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Q} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{E} &
+    \glsheaderlink{R} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{F} &
+    \glsheaderlink{S} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{G} &
+    \glsheaderlink{T} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{H} &
+    \glsheaderlink{U} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{I} &
+    \glsheaderlink{V} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{J} &
+    \glsheaderlink{W} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{K} &
+    \glsheaderlink{X} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{L} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Y} \\
+    \glsheaderlink{M} &
+    \glsheaderlink{Z}
+    \end{tabular}%
+  }
+
+  \renewcommand\@maketitle{%
+  \let\footnotesize\small
+  \let\footnoterule\relax
+  \let \footnote \thanks
+  \null\vfil
+  \begin{center}%
+    {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+    \vskip 2ex%
+    {\large Version \theversion\par}%
+    \vskip 3em%
+    {\large
+     \lineskip .75em%
+      \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+        \@author
+      \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+      {\large
+       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}
+       \@affiliation\\
+       \@affiliationurl
+       \end{tabular}\par}%
+      \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large \@date \par}%       % Set date in \large size.
+  \end{center}\par
+  \@thanks
+  \vfil\null
+}
+
+\or
+ % book version
+
+ \let\indexbar\relax
+ \let\summarybar\relax
+
+ \renewcommand\@maketitle{%
+   \null\par
+   \vskip4ex
+   \centering
+   \bfseries\scshape
+   \Huge
+   \@title
+   \vskip4ex
+   \Large
+   \@author
+   \par
+   \vfill
+   \normalsize
+   Volume~\thevolume~of\par
+   \theseries
+   \par
+   \vfill
+   \maketitlehook
+   \Large
+   \mdseries
+   \vskip2ex
+   \@affiliation
+   \par
+   \vskip1ex
+   \small
+   \@affiliationaddress
+   \par
+   \vskip4ex
+   \par\null
+ }
+
+\fi
+
+\newlength\indexheaderskip
+
+\setlength{\indexheaderskip}{2ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+
+\newcommand{\indexheader}[1]{%
+ \par\noindent
+ \vskip\indexheaderskip
+ \makebox[\linewidth][c]%
+ {%
+   \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+     \textbf{#1}%
+   \else
+     \hypertarget{idx:#1}{\textbf{#1}}%
+     \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\idx@header{#1}}%
+   \fi
+ }%
+ \\*[\indexheaderskip]%
+}
+
+
+\newcommand*{\idx@header}[1]{%
+  \csgdef{idx@header@#1}{\hyperlink{idx:#1}{\textbf{#1}}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\gls@header}[1]{%
+  \csgdef{gls@header@#1}{\hyperlink{gls:#1}{\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{#1}}}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\idxheaderlink}[1]{%
+  \ifcsdef{idx@header@#1}%
+  {\csname idx@header@#1\endcsname}%
+  {\textbf{\color{gray}#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsheaderlink}[1]{%
+  \ifcsdef{gls@header@#1}%
+  {\csname gls@header@#1\endcsname}%
+  {\textbf{\color{gray}\glsgetgrouptitle{#1}}}%
+}
+
+\newtoks\indexmarktok
+
+\newcommand{\doindexmark}[1]{%
+  \def\@indexmarker{#1}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@indexmarker
+  \edef\do@writeout{%
+     \noexpand\protected@write\noexpand\@auxout{}{%
+       \string\indexmarker{\noexpand\thepage}{\@indexmarker}%
+     }%
+  }%
+  \do@writeout
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexmarker}[2]{%
+  \ifcsundef{@index@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}%
+  {\csgdef{@index@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}}%
+  {}%
+  \csgdef{@index@bottom@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doindextopmark}{%
+  \csname @index@top@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doindexbottommark}{%
+  \csname @index@bottom@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand{\summarymarker}[2]{%
+  \ifcsundef{@summary@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}%
+  {\csgdef{@summary@top@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}}%
+  {}%
+  \csgdef{@summary@bottom@marker@\romannumeral#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\dosummarytopmark}{%
+  \csname @summary@top@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\dosummarybottommark}{%
+  \csname @summary@bottom@marker@\romannumeral\c@page\endcsname
+}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+
+  \newcommand{\mainindexitem}[2]{%
+    \vbox{\item #1\doindexmark{#1}\space\hfill#2}%
+    \par
+  }
+
+\else
+  \newcommand{\mainindexitem}[2]{\vbox{\item #1\space\hfill#2}\par}
+
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\subindexitem}[2]{\vbox{\subitem #1\space\hfill #2}\par}
+\newcommand{\subsubindexitem}[2]{\vbox{\subsubitem #1\space\hfill #2}\par}
+
+% put headers and footers into the dynamic frames labelled
+% 'header' and 'footer'
+\renewcommand{\@dothehead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dothefoot}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthehead}{}
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthefoot}{}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+  \setdynamiccontents*{header}{\vfill\ifodd\c@page\relax\@oddhead\else\@evenhead\fi\vfill}
+  \setdynamiccontents*{footer}{\vfill\ifodd\c@page\relax\@oddfoot\else\@evenfoot\fi\vfill}
+\else
+  \setdynamiccontents*{header}{\vfill\@oddhead\vfill}
+  \setdynamiccontents*{footer}{\vfill\@oddfoot\vfill}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\@frontmatter}{\mbox{}\par\vfill\framebreak\clearpage
+\pagenumbering{roman}%
+\setflowframe*{title}{pages=none}}
+
+\@ifundefined{frontmatter}
+ {%
+   \let\frontmatter\@frontmatter
+ }
+ {%
+   \let\orgfrontmatter\frontmatter
+   \def\frontmatter{\@frontmatter\orgfrontmatter}
+ }
+
+\newwrite\tf@hloe
+
+\newcommand{\listofexercises}{%
+  \chapter*{List of Exercises}
+  \@starttoc{loe}
+  \immediate\openout\tf@hloe \jobname.hloe\relax
+  \immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\begin{exerciselist}}%
+}
+
+\AtEndDocument{\immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\end{exerciselist}}}
+
+\newcommand{\l@exercise}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+
+\newcommand*{\htmlexerciseref}[4]{\htmlref{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\htmlexerciseitem}{\item \htmlexerciseref}
+
+\newenvironment{exerciselist}{\begin{enumerate}}{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\newcommand*{\@html@nodename}{\jobname}
+\newcommand*{\setnode}[1]{\renewcommand*{\@html@nodename}{#1}}
+
+\newcounter{exercise}
+%\begin{exercise}[html backref]{title}{label}
+\newenvironment{exercise}[3][\@htmlex@backref]{%
+  \def\@htmlex@backref{\@html@nodename}%
+  \vskip10pt plus 5pt minus 1pt\relax
+  \par\noindent
+  \refstepcounter{exercise}\label{#3}%
+  \textbf{\large Exercise \theexercise\ (#2)}%
+  \par\nopagebreak
+  \vspace{10pt}\nopagebreak
+  \def\@the@exercisetitle{#2}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@the@exercisetitle
+  \immediate\write\tf@hloe{\string\htmlexerciseitem{\@the@exercisetitle}{#3}{#1}{\theexercise}}%
+  \addcontentsline{loe}{exercise}{\protect\numberline{\theexercise}{\@the@exercisetitle}}\nopagebreak
+}%
+{%
+  \vskip5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\relax
+  \par\noindent\null\hfill
+  \rule{1in}{1pt}%
+  \hfill\null\par
+  \vskip5pt plus 5pt minus 1pt\relax
+}
+
+\newcommand{\faqlink}[2]{%
+  \href{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=#2}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\faq}[2]{%
+  \marginpar
+  {%
+    \parbox[t]{\marginparwidth}{%
+      \raggedright
+      \ifcase\thesismedia
+        \small
+      \or
+        \footnotesize
+      \or
+       \footnotesize\em
+      \fi
+      [FAQ: \faqlink{#1}{#2}]%
+    }\par
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\ukenglishdate}{%
+  \renewcommand{\fmtord}[1]{##1}%
+  \renewcommand*{\formatdate}[3]{%
+  \@day=##1\relax\@month=##2\relax\@year=##3\relax
+  \ordinalnum{\the\@day}\ \monthname[\@month] \the\@year}%
+}
+
+\DeclareMathOperator{\card}{card}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\diag}{diag}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{\mode}{mode}
+
+\newcommand*{\refname}{References}
+
+\newcommand*{\backslashcircumsort}{%
+  \string\~%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\backslashtildesort}{%
+  \string\~%
+}
+
+% option format
+\newcommand*{\optfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+% display and index class files:
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\icls}[1]{%
+  \cls{#1}%
+  \index{class files (.cls)@class files (\texttt{.cls})!#1@\cls{#1}|hyperpage}%
+  \index{#1@\cls{#1} class|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\clsopt}[1]{%
+ \optfmt{#1}%
+ \index{class file options!#1@\optfmt{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\let\nxclsopt\clsopt
+
+% display and index bibtex style files
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ibst}[1]{%
+  \bst{#1}%
+  \index{bibtex styles (.bst)@bibtex styles (\texttt{.bst})!#1@\bst{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bst}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+% display and index package:
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\isty}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1 package@\sty{#1}
+package|hyperpage}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istystart}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1
+package@\sty{#1} package|(hyperpage}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istyend}[1]{\sty{#1}\index{#1
+package@\sty{#1} package|)hyperpage}}
+
+% display option, index package and option
+% \istyopt{package}{option}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\istyopt}[2]{\optfmt{#2}%
+\index{#1 package@\sty{#1} package!#2@\optfmt{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+% KOMA Script class option
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\scrclsopt}[2][]{%
+ \ifstrempty{#1}%
+ {%
+   \optfmt{#2}%
+ }%
+ {%
+   \optfmt{#2\discretionary{}{}{}=\discretionary{}{}{}#1}%
+ }%
+ \index{KOMA Script class options!#2@\optfmt{#2}|hyperpage}%
+ \index{class file options!#2@\optfmt{#2} (KOMA)|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\let\nxscrclsopt\scrclsopt
+
+% Command key-val option
+% \ikeyvalopt{csname}{key}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ikeyvalopt}[2]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}!#2@\texttt{#2}|hyperpage}\texttt{#2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\keyvalopt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\iglskey}[1]{%
+ \ikeyvalopt{newglossaryentry}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\iglslinkkey}[1]{%
+ \ikeyvalopt{glslink}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ipglskey}[1]{%
+ \ikeyvalopt{printglossary}{#1}%
+}
+
+% display and index bib entry
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ibibentry}[1]{%
+  \bibentry{#1}%
+  \index{bib entry types!#1@\bibentry{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bibentry}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+% display and index bib field
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ibibfield}[1]{%
+  \bibfield{#1}%
+  \index{bib entry fields!#1@\bibfield{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bibfield}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+% index page style
+\newcommand{\idxpagestyle}[1]{\index{page
+style!#1@\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+% display and index page style
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ipagestyle}[1]{\pagestylefmt{#1}\idxpagestyle{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\pagestylefmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\pagenumberingfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% index page numbering
+\newcommand{\indexpagenumbering}[1]{%
+  \index{page numbering!#1@\pagenumberingfmt{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+% display page numbering
+\newcommand{\ipagenumbering}[1]{%
+  \pagenumberingfmt{#1}\indexpagenumbering{#1}%
+}
+
+% display and index unit of measurement
+\newcommand*{\iunit}[2]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 (#2)@\texttt{#1}
+(#2)|hyperpage}\index{units!#1 (#2)@\texttt{#1} (#2)|hyperpage}}
+
+\renewcommand{\see}[2]{\par\qquad\emph{\seename} #1}
+
+\newcommand{\ibackslashcircumdef}{\cmdname{\textasciicircum}%
+\index{\string\^@\protect\cmdname{\protect\textasciicircum}|indexdef}}
+
+\newcommand{\ibackslashtildedef}{\cmdname{\textasciitilde}%
+\index{\string\~@\protect\cmdname{\protect\textasciitilde}|indexdef}}
+
+\newcommand{\iquestiondowncmd}{\glsi{questiondown}}
+\newcommand{\iexclamdowncmd}{\glsi{exclamdown}}
+
+\newcommand*{\boldc}{\ensuremath{\boldsymbol{c}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\supdag}{\textsuperscript{\dag}}
+\newcommand*{\supddag}{\textsuperscript{\ddag}}
+\newcommand*{\supdagddag}{\textsuperscript{\dag\ddag}}
+
+\edef\percentsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\%}
+\edef\hashsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\#}
+\edef\ampsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\&}
+\edef\dollarsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\$}
+\edef\underscoresym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\_}
+\edef\circumsym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\^}
+\edef\tildesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\~}
+\edef\leftbracesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\{}
+\edef\rightbracesym{\expandafter\@gobble\string\}}
+\edef\dbbackslashsym{\string\\}
+\edef\backslashsym{\expandafter\@gobble\dbbackslashsym}
+
+% protected makeindex special characters
+\newcommand*{\pleftbracesym}{"\leftbracesym}
+\newcommand*{\prightbracesym}{"\rightbracesym}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\quotecs}{\cmdname{"}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\umlautaccent}[1]{\"{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\doublebar}[1]{\ensuremath{\|}}
+
+\newcommand*{\mathdoubleprime}{\ensuremath{''}}
+\newcommand*{\mathsingleprime}{\ensuremath{'}}
+\newcommand*{\mathtilde}{\ensuremath{\sim}}
+\newcommand*{\mathvee}{\ensuremath{\vee}}
+\newcommand*{\mathwedge}{\ensuremath{\wedge}}
+\newcommand*{\mathequiv}{\ensuremath{\equiv}}
+\newcommand*{\mathsum}{\ensuremath{\sum}}
+\newcommand*{\mathlvert}{\ensuremath{\lvert}}
+\newcommand*{\mathrvert}{\ensuremath{\rvert}}
+\newcommand*{\mathepsilon}{\ensuremath{\epsilon}}
+\newcommand*{\mathleftarrow}{\ensuremath{\leftarrow}}
+\newcommand*{\mathcalS}{\ensuremath{\mathcal{S}}}
+
+\newcommand{\exclamsym}{!}
+\newcommand{\questionsym}{?}
+\newcommand{\atsym}{@}
+\newcommand{\xatsym}{"@}
+\newcommand{\vbarsym}{|}
+\newcommand{\doublequotesym}{"}
+\newcommand{\slashsym}{/}
+\newcommand{\emDashcs}{-{}-{}-}
+\newcommand{\enDashcs}{-{}-}
+\newcommand{\dashcs}{-}
+\newcommand{\pluscs}{+}
+
+\newcommand{\quoteleftcs}{`}
+\newcommand{\quotedblleftcs}{`{}`}
+\newcommand{\quoterightcs}{'}
+\newcommand{\quotedblrightcs}{'{}'}
+\newcommand{\questiondowncs}{?{}`}
+\newcommand{\exclamdowncs}{!{}`}
+\newcommand{\opensqsym}{[}
+\newcommand{\closesqsym}{]}
+\newcommand{\openparensym}{(}
+\newcommand{\closeparensym}{)}
+\newcommand{\commasym}{,}
+\newcommand{\colonsym}{:}
+\newcommand{\semicolonsym}{;}
+\newcommand{\lesssym}{<}
+\newcommand{\greatersym}{>}
+\newcommand{\periodsym}{.}
+\newcommand{\equalsym}{=}
+
+\newcommand{\dash}{\,---\,}
+
+\newcommand{\doublequestionmark}{%
+  ??\index{"?"? (undefined reference)}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\symbolcmddef}[1]{%
+ \cmdname{#1}%
+ \indexsymbolcmddef{#1}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexsymbolcmddef}[1]{%
+ \index{\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbolcmddef}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\cmdname{"#1}|indexdef}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbolcmd}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\cmdname{"#1}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\symbolcmd}[1]{%
+ \cmdname{#1}%
+ \indexsymbolcmd{#1}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexsymbolcmd}[1]{%
+  \index{\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+% index a command definition, but don't display it in the text
+\newcommand{\indexComdef}[1]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|indexdef}}
+
+% index a command name, but don't display it in the text
+\newcommand{\indexCom}[1]{\index{#1@\protect\cmdname{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\indexspsymbol}[1]{%
+{\edef\sortkey{\expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname}%
+\index{\sortkey @\protect\texttt{"#1}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\keywordfmt}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\keyword}[2][\keywordtext]{%
+ \def\keywordtext{#2}%
+ \keywordfmt{#1}\index{#2|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+  \def\@gls@title{#2}%
+  \protected@edef\do@def@glo@section{\noexpand\chapter[#1]{#2}}%
+  \do@def@glo@section
+}
+
+\newcommand{\enter}{\scalebox{0.8}{\input{pictures/entersymbol}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cmdname}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\parg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt(#1\texttt)}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\meta}[1]{\textnormal{\ensuremath{\langle}\emph{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}{%
+  \@ifstar\@smeta\@meta
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@meta}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\glsni{leftbracechar}#1\glsni{rightbracechar}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@smeta}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt{\leftbracesym}#1\texttt{\rightbracesym}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}{%
+  \@ifstar\@soarg\@oarg
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@oarg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\glsni{opt.opensq}#1\glsni{opt.closesq}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@soarg}[1]{%
+  \discretionary{}{}{}\texttt[#1\texttt]}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\comma}{,\discretionary{}{}{}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\envname}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cls}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\counter}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iappname}[2][\appnamesort]{%
+{\def\appnamesort{#2}%
+\appname{#2}%
+\index{#1@\appname{#2}|hyperpage}}}
+
+\newcommand{\texdistro}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\itexdistro}[2][\distrosort]{%
+{%
+  \def\distrosort{#2}%
+  \texdistro{#2}%
+  \index{#1@\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#1@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\perldistro}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\menuto}{\discretionary{}{}{}$\rightarrow$\discretionary{}{}{}}
+
+\newcommand{\startmenu}[1]{\begin{center}\sffamily Start$\rightarrow$ Programs $\rightarrow$ #1\end{center}}
+
+\newcommand{\menu}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BiBTeX}{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
+\newcommand{\PDFLaTeX}{PDF\LaTeX}
+
+\newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''}
+\newcommand{\sq}[1]{`#1'}
+
+\newcommand{\footnotesymbols}{%
+\@fnsymbol1 \@fnsymbol2 \@fnsymbol3 \@fnsymbol4 \@fnsymbol5
+\@fnsymbol6 \@fnsymbol7 \@fnsymbol8 \@fnsymbol9}
+
+\newlength\imgHeight
+\newlength\maxImageHeight
+
+\setlength{\maxImageHeight}{0.8\textheight}
+
+\newlength\imgWidth
+\newlength\maxImageWidth
+\setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\textwidth}
+
+\define@key{Gin}{alt}{}
+
+\newcommand{\incGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+  \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+      \includegraphics[#1,height=\maxImageHeight]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+      \includegraphics[#1,width=\maxImageWidth]{#2}%
+    \else
+     \includegraphics[#1]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newsavebox{\boxcontents}
+
+\newcommand*{\includeteximage}[2][]{%
+  \setlength{\maxImageWidth}{\linewidth}%
+  \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+    \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+    \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+  \begingroup
+    \@tempswafalse
+    \let\input@path\Ginput@path
+    \toks@{\InputIfFileExists{#2}{}{\@warning{File `#1' not found}}}%
+    \setkeys{Gin}{#1}%
+    \Gin@esetsize
+    \sbox\boxcontents{\the\toks@}%
+    \settoheight{\imgHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \settodepth{\@ff@tmp@y}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+    \addtolength{\imgHeight}{\@ff@tmp@y}%
+    \ifdim\imgHeight>\maxImageHeight
+      \ifdim\maxImageHeight<\maxImageWidth\relax
+        \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+          \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \else
+          \resizebox{!}{\maxImageHeight}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \settowidth{\imgWidth}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \ifdim\imgWidth>\maxImageWidth
+       \resizebox{\maxImageWidth}{!}{\usebox\boxcontents}%
+      \else
+        \usebox\boxcontents
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\incPgfOrGraphics}[2][]{%
+  \IfFileExists{#2}{\includeteximage[#1]{#2}}{\incGraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\incFboxPgfOrGraphics}[2][]{%
+ \fbox{\incPgfOrGraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexdef}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+
+% footnotes for minipage examples
+\newcommand{\mpexfootnote}[1]{%
+\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\textcolor{black}{\alph{mpfootnote}}}%
+\footnote{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\labelledbox}[2]{\begin{tabular}{r}\doublebox{#1}\\\scriptsize\textsf{#2}\end{tabular}}
+\newcommand{\labelled}[2]{\begin{tabular}{r}#1\\\scriptsize\textsf{#2}\end{tabular}}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \definecolor{inputcol}{gray}{0.1}
+  \definecolor{outputcol}{gray}{0.1}
+\else
+  \definecolor{inputcol}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0}
+  \definecolor{outputcol}{rgb}{0.6,0,1}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\inputlabelformat}[1]{\textcolor{inputcol}{\scriptsize\sffamily #1}}
+\newcommand{\outputlabelformat}[1]{\textcolor{outputcol}{\scriptsize\sffamily #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\toparrow}{\ensuremath{\overline\uparrow}}
+\newcommand{\botarrow}{\ensuremath{\underline\downarrow}}
+
+\newlength\minremainspace
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+
+  \newcommand*{\marginblocklabel}[2]{%
+    \ifthispageodd
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][l]{#1 #2}%
+    }%
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][r]{#2 #1}%
+    }%
+  }
+
+ \newcommand*{\marginlabel}[1]{%
+    \ifthispageodd
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][l]{#1}%
+    }%
+    {%
+      \makebox[\marginparwidth][r]{#1}%
+    }%
+ }
+
+ \setlength\minremainspace{50pt}
+
+\else
+ \newcommand*{\marginblocklabel}[2]{#1 #2}
+ \newcommand*{\marginlabel}[1]{#1}
+ \setlength\minremainspace{42pt}
+\fi
+
+% Changing the colour in the margin occasionally causes problems
+% so store the coloured marginal text in save boxes.
+
+\newsavebox\Input
+\newsavebox\Output
+\newsavebox\InputT
+\newsavebox\OutputT
+\newsavebox\CodeT
+\newsavebox\InputB
+\newsavebox\OutputB
+\newsavebox\CodeB
+\newsavebox\Code
+
+\sbox\Input{\inputlabelformat{Input}}
+\sbox\Output{\outputlabelformat{Output}}
+\sbox\Code{\inputlabelformat{Code}}
+
+\sbox\InputT{\inputlabelformat{%
+   \toparrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\OutputT{\outputlabelformat{%
+  \toparrow
+ }}
+
+\sbox\CodeT{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \toparrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\InputB{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\OutputB{\outputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\sbox\CodeB{\inputlabelformat{%
+  \botarrow
+}}
+
+\newcommand{\inputruleB}{%
+ \vspace*{-5pt}\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\outputruleB}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{outputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\coderuleB}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\inputruleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\outputruleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{outputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\coderuleT}{\par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}{\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}}}
+\newcommand{\labelledinputruleT}[1]{%
+  \par\noindent
+ \textcolor{inputcol}%
+ {%
+    \rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}\rule{1em}{.4pt}\fbox{#1}\leaders\hrule\hfill\rule[-5pt]{0.4pt}{5pt}%
+ }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\xminisec}[1]{%
+ \@check@remainingspace[3.5\baselineskip]%
+ \minisec{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\@check@remainingspace}[1][\minremainspace]{%
+  \par
+  \mbox{}%
+  \@tempdimc\pagegoal
+  \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
+  \penalty -100\noindent
+  \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\@tempdimc\relax
+   \pagebreak
+  \else
+   \vskip-\baselineskip
+  \fi
+}
+
+% define commands governing how input code and 
+% corresponding output should be displayed
+
+\newenvironment{bcode}%
+ {%
+   \@check@remainingspace
+   \par\vspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}%
+   \coderuleT
+   \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+     \marginblocklabel{\usebox\CodeT}{\usebox\Code}}}%
+   \ttfamily\frenchspacing\obeyspaces\par\raggedright\noindent\ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {%
+   \par\coderuleB
+   \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+     \marginblocklabel{\usebox\CodeB}{\usebox\Code}}}%
+   \par\vspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}%
+   \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+ }
+
+%Single line of input
+\newenvironment{codeS}[1][0.9\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \par
+  \vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \begin{minipage}{#1}\ttfamily\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+ \par\end{minipage}%
+ \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+ \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+%Multiple lines of input
+\newenvironment{code}[1][0.9\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \@check@remainingspace
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \inputruleT
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputT}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \nopagebreak
+  \begin{ttfamily}\nopagebreak\par\noindent\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+  \par\end{ttfamily}\nopagebreak
+  \inputruleB
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputB}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\let\thesis@org@chaptermark\chaptermark
+\let\thesis@org@sectionmark\sectionmark
+\let\thesis@org@subsectionmark\subsectionmark
+
+\newcommand{\currenttitle}{}
+
+\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{
+ \thesis@org@chaptermark{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\currenttitle}{#1}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{
+ \thesis@org@sectionmark{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\currenttitle}{#1}%
+}
+
+\renewcommand{\subsectionmark}[1]{
+ \thesis@org@subsectionmark{#1}%
+ \renewcommand*{\currenttitle}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\l@listing}{%
+  \bprot@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{3em}%
+}
+
+\newcounter{codelisting}
+\newenvironment{codelisting}[2][]%
+{%
+  \@check@remainingspace
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \refstepcounter{codelisting}%
+  \def\codelisting@arg{#1}%
+  \ifdefempty{\codelisting@arg}{}{\def\codelisting@arg{ (#1)}}%
+  \addcontentsline{loe}{listing}{%
+    \protect\numberline{\thecodelisting}\currenttitle\codelisting@arg}%
+  \labelledinputruleT{\color{black}\htmladdnormallink{Listing
+\thecodelisting\codelisting@arg}{\baseurl/latex/thesis/html/examples/#2}\doifbook{\footnotemark}}%
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputT}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \doifbook{\footnotetext{\url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/html/examples/#2}}}%
+  \nopagebreak
+  \begin{ttfamily}\nopagebreak\par\noindent\raggedright\frenchspacing\ignorespaces
+}%
+{%
+  \par\end{ttfamily}\nopagebreak
+  \inputruleB
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\InputB}{\usebox\Input}}}%
+  \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\examplecode}[1]{%
+ \htmladdnormallinkfoot{\texttt{#1}}{\baseurl/latex/thesis/html/examples/#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\ltxresultwidth}{0.9\linewidth}
+
+%Single line of output
+\newenvironment{ltxresultS}[1][]%
+{%
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \par\noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \begin{minipage}{\ltxresultwidth}%
+}%
+{%
+  \end{minipage}%
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+%Multiple lines of output
+\newenvironment{ltxresultM}[1][]%
+{%
+  \@check@remainingspace
+  \vskip5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\relax
+  \outputruleT
+  \nopagebreak
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{-8pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\OutputT}{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \nopagebreak
+  \par\nopagebreak
+}%
+{%
+  \nopagebreak\outputruleB
+  \marginpar{\raisebox{4pt}{%
+    \marginblocklabel{\usebox\OutputB}{\usebox\Output}}}%
+  \par\vspace{5pt plus 4pt minus 2pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newenvironment{htmlresult}[1]{\ignorespaces}{\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{definition}[1][\linewidth]%
+{%
+  \par\vspace{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}%
+  \noindent
+  \marginpar{\mbox{\marginlabel{\scriptsize\sffamily Definition}}}%
+  \begin{lrbox}{\boxcontents}
+  \begin{minipage}{#1}\ttfamily\raggedright\frenchspacing
+}%
+{%
+  \par
+  \end{minipage}\end{lrbox}%
+  \usebox{\boxcontents}%
+  \par\vspace{10pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}%
+  \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\csentryargitem}[1]{\item{\meta{#1}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BeginArgList}{\begin{description}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\EndArgList}{\end{description}}
+
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+\string\html{\string\gdef\string\newlabelxx
+\string#1\string#2\string#3\string#4\string#5\string#6{%
+\string\oldnewlabel{\string#1}{{\string#2}{\string#3}}%
+\string\sectionlabel{\string#1}{\string#4}}}}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\appendixref}[2][]{Appendix~\ref{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\chapterref}[2][]{Chapter~\ref{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\sectionref}[2][]{Section~\ref*{#2}}
+\else
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\appendixref}[2][]{\htmlref{Appendix~\ref*{#2}}{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref*{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\chapterref}[2][]{\htmlref{Chapter~\ref*{#2}}{#2}
+    (\protect\nameref*{#2})}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\sectionref}[2][]{\htmlref{Section~\ref*{#2}}{#2}}
+\fi
+
+\renewcommand*{\thefootnote}{\thechapter.\arabic{footnote}}
+
+\let\@mkboth\markboth
+
+\newcommand*{\warning}{%
+ \marginpar
+ {%
+  \marginlabel
+  {%
+    {%
+      \LARGE
+      \fontencoding {U}%
+      \fontfamily{futs}\selectfont
+      \char 66\relax
+    }%
+  }%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\wrong}{\marginpar{\marginlabel{\LARGE\color{red}\ding{56}}}}
+\newcommand*{\correct}{\marginpar{\marginlabel{\LARGE\color{green}\ding{52}}}}
+
+% Computer Modern maths fonts
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathit}{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathtt}{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathsf}{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\cmmathbf}{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cmmathcal}{symbols}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cmmathnormal}{letters}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cmmathrm}{operators}
+
+\newcommand*{\cmr}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont #1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexglsindex}[1]{%
+  \index{\glsindex{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+% \newacr{label}{short}{long}{url}
+
+\newcommand*{\newacr}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}{%
+    type=acronym,
+    sort={#2},
+    name={#2\gloindex{#2}},
+    text={#2\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}\latex{~\cite{#1}}},
+    first={#3\protect\footnote{\protect\url{#4}}\protect\index{#2|hyperpage}
+(#2)},
+    description={\makefirstuc{#3}. \protect\url{#4}}
+  }%
+}
+
+\newglossarystyle{acronyms}{%
+  \setglossarystyle{list}%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
+  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
+    {\begin{description}}
+    {%
+      \end{description}%
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endacr{\thepage}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+% Code optimized for book, but some tweaking may be required
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\bookpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\booklinebreak}{\linebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\bookcontinueline}{\continue@symbol\newline}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\bookpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\booklinebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\bookcontinueline}{}
+\fi
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISreport
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\reportpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*{\reportlinebreak}{\linebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\reportcontinueline}{\continue@symbol\newline}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\reportpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\reportlinebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\reportcontinueline}{}
+\fi
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISscreen
+  \newcommand*{\screenpagebreak}{\par\pagebreak}
+  \newcommand*{\screenlinebreak}{\linebreak}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\screencontinueline}{\continue@symbol\newline}
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\screenpagebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\screenlinebreak}{}
+  \newcommand*{\screencontinueline}{}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand{\continuesymbol}{$\hookleftarrow$}
+
+\newcommand*{\continue@symbol}{%
+ \smash{\raisebox{-1.6ex}{\makebox[0pt][r]{\continuesymbol}}}}
+
+% index and display application name with hyperlink to application's
+% home page
+ \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+
+  \newcommand{\iappnamelink}[3][]{%
+   \appname{#2}#1\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+   \index{#2@\appname{#2}}}
+
+  \newcommand{\iperldistro}[3][]{%
+    \perldistro{#2}#1\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+    \index{#2@\protect\perldistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }
+
+  \newcommand{\itexdistrolink}[3][]{%
+  {%
+    \texdistro{#2}#3\footnote{\url{#3}}%
+    \index{#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+    \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }%
+ }
+
+ \else
+  \newcommand{\iappnamelink}[3][]{%
+   \htmladdnormallink{\appname{#2}}{#3}#1%
+   \index{#2@\appname{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+  \newcommand{\iperldistro}[3][]{%
+   \htmladdnormallink{\perldistro{#2}}{#3}#1%
+   \index{#2@\protect\perldistro{#2}|hyperpage}}
+
+  \newcommand{\itexdistrolink}[3][]{%
+  {%
+    \htmladdnormallink{\texdistro{#2}}{#3}#1%
+    \index{#2@\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+    \index{TeX Distributions@\protect\TeX\ Distributions!#2@\protect\texdistro{#2}|hyperpage}%
+  }%
+ }
+
+ \fi
+
+\newcommand{\suppmaterial}[2][]{#2#1\footnote{\url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/supplemental.html}}}
+\newcommand{\suppref}[3][]{#2#1\footnote{\url{\baseurl/latex/thesis/#3.html}}}
+
+\newcommand{\objectref}[2]{\htmlref{#1~\ref*{#2}}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\xfigureref}[1]{\figurename~\ref{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\xpageref}[2]{\vpageref{#2}}
+
+\newcommand{\figuretop}[1]{\hypertarget{#1top}{}}
+\newcommand{\makeimg}[2]{{#2}}
+\let\oelig\oe
+
+\newlength\rightmargini
+\newlength\rightmarginii
+\newlength\rightmarginiii
+\newlength\rightmarginiv
+
+\def\itemize{%
+  \ifnum\@itemdepth>\thr@@
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \setlength{\rightmargini}{5em}%
+    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+    \expandafter\list\csname\@itemitem\endcsname
+     {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\enumerate{%
+  \ifnum\@enumdepth>\thr@@
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \advance \@enumdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+    \expandafter\list\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname
+      {% 
+         \usecounter\@enumctr
+         \setlength{\rightmargin}%
+            {\csname rightmargin\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth\endcsname}%
+         \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+      }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fwitem}[1]{\item[{\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{#1}}]}
+
+\newenvironment{fwlist}[1]{%
+\begin{list}{}{%
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
+}{
+\end{list}}
+
+\newcommand{\exerciseref}[1]{\objectref{Exercise}{#1}%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+   \space (page~\pageref{#1})%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\modification}[1]{\textbf{\ttfamily #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\comptexttex}{\texttt{comp.text.tex}~\cite{comptexttex}}
+\newcommand{\texhax}{\texttt{texhax}~\cite{texhax}}
+
+ \ifcase\thesismedia
+ % report
+   \newcommand{\latexnovices}{%
+     \htmladdnormallink{\emph{\LaTeX\ for Complete Novices}}%
+       {\baseurl/latex/novices/index.html}~\cite{novices}%
+   }
+ \or
+ % screen
+
+   \newcommand{\latexnovices}{%
+     \htmladdnormallink{\emph{\LaTeX\ for Complete Novices}}%
+       {\baseurl/latex/novices/index.html}~\cite{novices}%
+   }%
+ \or
+ % book
+
+   \newcommand{\latexnovices}{%
+     \emph{\LaTeX\ for Complete Novices}~\cite{novices}%
+   }
+ \fi
+
+\newcommand*{\novices}[2][\nov@sec@lab]{%
+  \def\nov@sec@lab{sec:#2}%
+  \htmladdnormallink{Volume~1}{\baseurl/latex/novices/html/#2.html}%
+  ~\cite[\S\ref*{nov-#1}]{novices}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\xrsectionref}[3][\nov@sec@lab]{%
+  \def\nov@sec@lab{sec:#3}%
+  \S\ref*{nov-#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\latexpdfdoc}{%
+ \htmladdnormallink{Volume~4}{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}~\cite{pdfdoc}%
+}
+
+\newenvironment{resultS*}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultS}}%
+{\end{ltxresultS}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{resultS}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultS}}%
+{\end{ltxresultS}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{result}[1][]%
+{\begin{ltxresultM}\ignorespaces}%
+{\end{ltxresultM}\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newcounter{object}
+
+\newenvironment{inlinedef}{\begin{ttfamily}}{\end{ttfamily}}
+
+% \casemedia{A4}{screen}{book}{html}
+\newcommand{\casemedia}[4]{%
+  \ifcase\thesismedia#1\or#2\or#3\fi%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\download}[1]{%
+\casemedia
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% report
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% screen
+ {download\footnote{\url{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}}% book
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}% html
+}
+
+\newcommand{\downloadorview}[1]{%
+\casemedia
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% report
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% screen
+ {download\footnote{\url{\exerciseurl/#1.tex}}}% book
+ {\htmladdnormallink{download}{\exerciseurl/#1.tex} or
+\htmladdnormallink{view}{\exerciseurl/#1.html}}% html
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ifbookorother}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+   #1%
+  \else
+   #2%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\ifscreenorother}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISscreen\relax
+   #1%
+  \else
+   \ifpdf
+    #2%
+   \else
+    #1%
+   \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifreport}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISreport\relax
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifbook}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\doifnotbook}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \else
+   #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\breakenumi}{%
+  \xdef\currentenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+  \end{enumerate}
+  \begin{enumerate}
+  \setcounter{enumi}{\currentenumi}
+}
+
+%\dosidewaysfigure{label}{image}{caption}
+\newcommand*{\dosidewaysfigure}[3]{%
+  \ifscreenorother
+  {%
+    \begin{figure}
+      \figuretop{#1}
+      \rotatebox{90}%
+      {%
+        \begin{minipage}[c][\textwidth]{0.75\textheight}%
+         \centering
+         #2% image
+         \caption{#3}% caption
+         \label{#1}%
+        \end{minipage}
+      }
+    \end{figure}
+  }%
+  {%
+    \begin{sidewaysfigure}
+      \figuretop{#1}
+      \centering
+      #2% image
+      \caption{#3}% caption
+      \label{#1}%
+    \end{sidewaysfigure}
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\degrees}[1]{\ensuremath{#1^{\circ}}}
+
+\newcommand*{\idxcrossref}[2]{\see{#1}{#2}}
+
+% display and index a counter:
+\newcommand{\icounter}[1]{%
+\counter{#1}\index{counters!#1@\counter{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index BibTeX:
+\newcommand{\iBiBTeX}{\BiBTeX\index{BibTeX@\BiBTeX|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index PDFLaTeX:
+\newcommand{\iPDFLaTeX}{\PDFLaTeX\index{PDFLaTeX@\PDFLaTeX|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index text:
+\newcommand{\Index}[1]{#1\index{#1|hyperpage}}
+
+% index monospaced text:
+\newcommand{\indextt}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+
+% display and index monospaced text:
+\newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\indextt{#1}}
+
+% command definition: display and index
+\newcommand*{\cmddef}[1]{\cmdname{#1}\indexComdef{#1}}
+
+% index and display a command name
+\newcommand*{\icmdname}[1]{\cmdname{#1}\indexCom{#1}}
+
+% index an environment definition, but don't display it
+\newcommand*{\indexEnvdef}[1]{\index{#1@\envname{#1} environment|indexdef}}
+
+% index an environment, but don't display it
+\newcommand*{\indexEnv}[1]{\index{#1@\envname{#1}
+environment|hyperpage}}
+
+% environment definition: display and index
+\newcommand*{\envdef}[1]{\envname{#1}\indexEnvdef{#1}}
+
+% index and display environment
+\newcommand*{\ienvname}[1]{\envname{#1}\index{#1@\envname{#1} environment|hyperpage}}
+
+\newtoks\argsummarytok
+
+\newcommand*{\indexglo}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gloindex}[1]{\index{#1|indexglo}}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsi}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glshyperlink[\glsentrytext{#1}]{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsni}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glshyperlink[\glsentryuseriv{#1}]{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\glsnl}[1]{%
+ \glsdoifexists{#1}{\glsentryuseriv{#1}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexuservi}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\index\expandafter{\glsentryuservi{#1}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\indexdefuservi}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\index\expandafter{\glsentryuservi{#1}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+% \defgcs[extra][label]{name}{arg syntax}{location of definition}{summary}{arg
+% summary}
+\newcommand{\defgcs}[1][]{%
+ \def\@gcs@extra{#1}%
+ \@defgcs
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@defgcs}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     sort={#2},
+     name={\cmdname{#2}},
+%     first={\protect\cmdname{#2}\indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}\indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\cmdname{#2}},
+     user5={\@gcs@extra},
+     user6={#2@\protect\cmdname{#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgchar[extra]{label}{char}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchar}[7][]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+   {
+     name={\texttt{#3}},
+     sort={#3},
+%     first={\texttt{#3}\indexdefuservi{#2}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#2}},
+     user1={#4},
+     user2={#5},
+     user3={#7},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#6},
+     user5={#1},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgchildchar{label}{parent}{char}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildchar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     description={#4},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \defgxchildchar{label}{parent}{char}{summary}{extra}
+\newcommand{\defgxchildchar}[5]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     description={#4},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}%
+      \protect\index{#5|hyperpage}%
+     },
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}%
+      \protect\index{#5|hyperpage}%
+     },
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+  }%
+}
+
+% \defgactivechar[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgactivechar}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+     \noexpand\newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+        name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand\protect\noexpand#3}},
+        sort={\@gcs@sort},
+%        first={\noexpand\texttt{#3}%
+%         \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+        text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{#3}%
+         \indexuservi{#2}},
+        user1={#4},
+        user2={#5},
+        user3={#7},
+        user4={\noexpand\texttt{#3}},
+        description={#6},
+        user6={\expandonce\@gcs@sort @\texttt{\protect#3}}
+      }%
+   }%
+   \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgchildactivechar{label}{parent}{cs}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildactivechar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     first={\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#4},
+     user6={#3@\texttt{#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgactivecharcs[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgactivecharcs}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+     \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+        name={\noexpand\cmdname{\noexpand\protect\noexpand#3}},
+        sort={\backslashsym#1},
+%        first={\noexpand\cmdname{#3}%
+%         \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+        text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\cmdname{#3}%
+         \indexuservi{#2}},
+        user1={#4},
+        user2={#5},
+        user3={#7},
+        user4={\noexpand\cmdname{#3}},
+        description={#6},
+        user6={\backslashsym#1@\protect\cmdname{\string#3}}
+      }%
+   }%
+   \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgidxactivechar[sort]{label}{cs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgidxactivechar}[7][]{%
+  \ifstrempty{#1}
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#3}%
+  }%
+  {%
+    \def\@gcs@sort{#1}%
+  }%
+  \toks@{#6}%
+  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
+    \newglossaryentry{#2}%
+     {%
+       name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+       sort={"\expandonce\@gcs@sort},
+%       first={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+%        \indexdefuservi{#2}},
+       text={\noexpand\protect\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+        \indexuservi{#2}},
+       user1={#4},
+       user2={#5},
+       user3={#7},
+       user4={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+       description={\the\toks@},
+       user6={"\expandonce\@gcs@sort @\texttt{\string#3}}
+   }%
+  }%
+  \@do@newglossaryentry
+}
+
+% \defgchildidxactivechar{label}{parent}{cs}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildidxactivechar}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     name={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}},
+     first={\noexpand\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\texttt{\noexpand#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\texttt{#3}},
+     description={#4},
+     user6={"#3@\texttt{\string#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgidxactivecharcs{label}{charcs}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgidxactivecharcs}[6]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+   {%
+     name={\cmdname{\protect#2}},
+     sort={"\backslashsym"#2},
+%     first={\cmdname{#2}%
+%      \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     user3={#6},
+     user4={\cmdname{#2}},
+     description={#5},
+     user6={"\backslashsym"#2@\protect\cmdname{\string#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgsymcs[label]{sym}{syntax}{location}{summary}{arg summary}
+\newcommand{\defgsymcs}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     name={\cmdname{#2}},
+     sort={\backslashsym#2},
+%     first={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+%       \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{#2}%
+       \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\cmdname{#2}},
+     user5={},
+     user6={\backslashsym#2@\protect\cmdname{#2}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgchildsymcs{label}{parent}{cs}{summary}
+\newcommand{\defgchildsymcs}[4]{%
+  \newglossaryentry{#1}%
+  {%
+     sort={#3},%
+     parent={#2},
+     name={\cmdname{#3}},
+     sort={\backslashsym#3},
+     first={\noexpand\cmdname{#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\cmdname{\noexpand#3}%
+      \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user4={\cmdname{#3}},
+     description={#4},
+     user6={\backslashsym#3@\protect\cmdname{#3}}
+   }%
+}
+
+% \defgenv[label]{env name}{arg syntax}{location}{summary}{arg
+% summary}
+\newcommand{\defgenv}[6][\gcslabel]{%
+ \def\gcslabel{env-#2}%
+ \argsummarytok{#6}%
+ \expandafter\newglossaryentry\expandafter
+   {#1}%
+   {%
+     sort={#2},
+     name={\protect\cmdname{begin}\protect\texttt{\protect\marg{#2}}},
+%     first={\protect\envname{#2}%
+%        \indexdefuservi{#1}},
+     text={\protect\envname{#2}%
+        \indexuservi{#1}},
+     user1={#3},
+     user2={#4},
+     description={#5},
+     user3={\the\argsummarytok},
+     user4={\protect\envname{#2}},
+     user5={},
+     user6={#2@\envname{#2} environment}
+   }%
+}
+
+\newlength\summaryskip
+\newlength\summarypostskip
+\newlength\summarypredescskip
+\newlength\summarypostnameskip
+
+\setlength{\summaryskip}{2ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\setlength{\summarypostskip}{.5ex plus .1ex minus .1ex}
+\setlength{\summarypredescskip}{1ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\setlength{\summarypostnameskip}{1ex plus .25ex minus .25ex}
+
+\newglossarystyle{summary}% Summary glossary style
+{%
+  \setglossarystyle{inline}%
+    \renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{\raggedright\enablefoothooks
+      \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook\relax
+        \setleftfootmark{\dosummarytopmark}%
+        \setrightfootmark{\dosummarybottommark}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+    \renewcommand{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+      \gls@inlinesep\def\gls@inlinesep{}%
+      \noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]%
+      {%
+        \ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+          \textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}%
+        \else
+          \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\gls@header{##1}}%
+          \hypertarget{gls:##1}{\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}%
+        \fi
+      }%
+      \\*[\summarypostskip]%
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinenameformat}[2]{%
+    \def\glsentrylabel{##1}%
+      \par\noindent
+      \glstarget{##1}{##2\glsentryuseri{##1}}%
+      \gloindex{\glsentryuservi{##1}}%
+      \dosummarymark{\glsuseriv{##1}}%
+      \ifcsempty{glo@##1@userii}%
+      {%
+        \\*[\summarypredescskip]%
+      }%
+      {%
+        \\*[\summarypostnameskip]%
+        \textbf{Defined in: }\glsentryuserii{##1}.%
+        \par
+        \vskip\summarypredescskip
+      }%
+  }%
+  \renewcommand*{\glsinlinesubnameformat}[2]{\glstarget{##1}{\strut}}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinedescformat}[3]{##1%
+    \doifnotzero{##3}{\space[\S##3]}\glsentryuserv{\glsentrylabel}}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlineseparator}{\par\vskip\summaryskip\noindent}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubseparator}{;\space}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinesubdescformat}[3]{##1%
+    \doifnotzero{##3}{\space[\S##3]}}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlineparentchildseparator}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\glsinlinepostchild}{.}%
+  \renewcommand{\glspostinline}{%
+%    \gappto\rightfootmark{\disablefoothooks}%
+%    \gappto\leftfootmark{\disablefoothooks}%
+    \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@flow@endsummary{\thepage}}%
+  }%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\doifnotzero}[2]{%
+ {%
+  \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{##1}%
+  \def\glsnumberformat##1{##1}%
+  \def\setentrycounter[##1]##2{}%
+  \def\relax{}%
+  \protected@xdef\thesis@tmp{#1}%
+ }%
+ \ifdefstring{\thesis@tmp}{0}{}{#2}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxipagestyle}[1]{\protect\ipagestyle{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxisty}[1]{\protect\isty{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\nxicls}[1]{\protect\icls{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\nxiappname}[1]{\protect\iappname{#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxglsi}{\protect\glsi}
+\newcommand*{\nxglsni}{\protect\glsni}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxglslink}[2]{\protect\glslink{#1}{#2}}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxGls}{\protect\Gls}
+\newcommand*{\nxgls}{\protect\gls}
+
+\newcommand*{\nxicounter}{\protect\icounter}
+
+\newcommand{\dohtmlcolorbox}[2][]{#2}
+
+\newcommand*{\ocaron}{\v{o}}
+\newcommand*{\ocedilla}{\c{o}}
+\newcommand*{\obarunder}{\b{o}}
+\newcommand*{\odotunder}{\d{o}}
+\newcommand*{\omacron}{\={o}}
+\newcommand*{\odoubleacute}{\H{o}}
+\newcommand*{\odotover}{\.{o}}
+\newcommand*{\otilde}{\~{o}}
+\newcommand*{\ocircum}{\^{o}}
+\newcommand*{\obreve}{\u{o}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\oumlaut}{\"{o}}
+\newcommand*{\uring}{\r{u}}
+\newcommand*{\rbarunder}{\b{r}}
+\newcommand*{\xytie}{\t{xy}}
+\newcommand*{\dotlessj}{\j}
+
+\newcommand{\indexEPS}{%
+ \index{Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file|hyperpage}%
+ \index{file formats!eps@\texttt{.eps}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexDVI}{%
+  \index{Device Independent (DVI) file|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!dvi@\texttt{.dvi}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexPDF}{%
+  \index{Portable Document Format (PDF) file|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!pdf@\texttt{.pdf}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexTOC}{%
+  \index{table of contents file (.toc)@table of contents file (\texttt{.toc})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!toc@\texttt{.toc}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOF}{%
+  \index{list of figures file (.lof)@list of figures file (\texttt{.lof})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!lof@\texttt{.lof}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOT}{%
+  \index{list of tables file (.lot)@list of tables file (\texttt{.lot})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!lot@\texttt{.lot}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexLOG}{%
+  \index{log file (.log)@log file (\texttt{.log})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!log@\texttt{.log}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexAUX}{%
+  \index{auxiliary file (.aux)@auxiliary file (\texttt{.aux})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!aux@\texttt{.aux}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\iauxfile}{auxiliary (\texttt{.aux}) file\indexAUX}
+
+\newcommand{\indexSYNCTEX}{%
+  \index{synctex file (.synctex.gz)@synctex file (\texttt{.synctex.gz})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!synctex.gz@\texttt{.synctex.gz}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexCLS}{%
+  \index{class files (.cls)@class files (\texttt{.cls})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!cls@\texttt{.cls}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\indexSTY}{%
+  \index{packages files (.sty)@package files (\texttt{.sty})|hyperpage}%
+  \index{file formats!sty@\texttt{.sty}|hyperpage}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\TO}{\ensuremath{\Rightarrow}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexaux}{%
+ \index{file formats!aux@\texttt{.aux}|indexdef}%
+}
+
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexsentencespacing}{%
+ \index{spacing!French|indexdef}%
+ \index{spacing!English|indexdef}%
+ \index{French spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, French}}%
+ \index{English spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, English}}%
+ \index{inter-sentence spacing|idxcrossref{spacing, inter-sentence}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexshortlong}{%
+  \index{short command|idxcrossref{command, short}}%
+  \index{long command|idxcrossref{command, long}}%
+  \index{command!long|indexdef}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexfragile}{%
+ \index{moving argument|idxcrossref{argument, moving}}%
+ \index{argument!moving|indexdef}%
+ \index{fragile command|idxcrossref{command, fragile}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexoptional}{%
+  \index{optional argument|idxcrossref{argument, optional}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexmandatory}{%
+  \index{mandatory argument|idxcrossref{argument, mandatory}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexrobust}{%
+  \index{robust command|idxcrossref{command, robust}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexarg}{%
+  \index{parameter|idxcrossref{argument}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexgroup}{%
+  \index{scope|idxcrossref{group}}%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\extraindexterminal}{%
+  \index{command prompt|idxcrossref{terminal}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\historyitem}[1]{\section*{#1}}
+
+\ifnum\thesismedia=\THESISbook
+  \newcommand*{\backcoverheading}{%
+    \newpage\thispagestyle{empty}%
+    \section*{Back Cover Text}%
+  }
+\else
+  \newcommand*{\backcoverheading}{\chapter*{Back Cover Text}}
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\glstoc}[1]{#1}
+
+\ifcase\thesismedia
+% report
+ %\externaldocument[nov-]{../novices/novices-report}
+ \externaldocument[nov-]{../novices/dickimaw-novices}
+\or
+% screen
+ \externaldocument[nov-]{../novices/novices-book}
+\or 
+% book
+ \externaldocument[nov-]{../novices/novices-book}
+\fi
+
+% default qedsymbol used by amsthm
+
+\newcommand*{\openbox}{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to.77778em
+ {%
+   \hfil
+   \vrule
+   \vbox to.675em{\hrule width.6em\vfil \hrule }%
+   \vrule \hfil 
+ }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\vellipsis}{\vdots}
+
+\newenvironment{simtheindex}%
+{
+  \parindent\z@
+  \setlength{\parskip}{\z@ \@plus .3pt}%
+  \setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ \@plus 1fil}%
+  \let\item\@idxitem
+}%
+{}
+
+% Theorem styles:
+
+\theoremstyle{plain}
+\newtheorem*{plainremark}{Remark}
+\newtheorem*{plainnote}{Note}
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[chapter]
+\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+\newtheorem{Exercise}{Exercise}
+\newtheorem{Suppexercise}[Exercise]{Supplementary Exercise}
+
+\newtheorem{Theorem}[theorem]{Theorem}
+\theorembodyfont{\normalfont}
+\newtheorem{Definition}[defn]{Definition}
+\newtheorem{Example}{Example}
+\newtheorem{Remark}{Remark}
+
+\theoremstyle{marginbreak}
+\theorembodyfont{\normalfont}
+\newtheorem{note}{Note}[chapter]
+
+\theoremstyle{break}
+\newtheorem{algorithm}[algocf]{Algorithm}
+
+\theoremstyle{nonumberplain}
+\theoremheaderfont{\scshape}
+\theorembodyfont{\normalfont}
+\theoremsymbol{\ensuremath{_\blacksquare}}
+\RequirePackage{amssymb}
+\newtheorem{Proof}{Proof}
+\qedsymbol{\ensuremath{_\blacksquare}}
+
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/glsentries.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/glsentries.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7d831206a9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/glsentries.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2816 @@
+\renewcommand{\summarypreamble}{Commands or environments defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel are always
+available.}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {backslashchar}
+ {\backslashsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Escape character indicating a~command. (See \novices{command}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {dbbackslashchar}
+ {\dbbackslashsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Starts a new row in \nxgls{env-tabbing} or tabular-style
+environments. (See \novices{rowscols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tabularnewline}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Behaves like \nxglsi{tab.dbbackslashchar} in a
+   \nxglsni{env-tabular}-like environment but helps to disambiguate a
+    \nxglslink{newline.dbbackslashchar}{line break} in a paragraph
+    cell from a \nxglslink{tab.dbbackslashchar}{row separator}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {leftbracechar}
+ {\leftbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Marks the beginning of a group. (See \novices{group}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {rightbracechar}
+ {\rightbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Marks the end of a group. (See \novices{group}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {leftbrace}
+ {\leftbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Left brace \{ character. In math mode may be used as a delimiter.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {rightbrace}
+ {\rightbracesym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Right brace \{ character. In math mode may be used as a delimiter.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ [!Z]
+ {visiblespace}
+ {\textvisiblespace}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {A visual indication of a space in the code. When you type up 
+   the code, replace all instances of this symbol with a space via the space bar on your 
+   keyboard.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{begin}
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{env-option}}\marg{\meta{env-arg-1}}\ldots\marg{\meta{env-arg-n}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Starts an environment. (Must have a matching \nxglsi{end}.
+   See \novices{environment}.)
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The name of the environment. (\emph{No
+      backslash.})
+    \csentryargitem{env-option} An optional argument that may be 
+      passed to the environment. Not all environments have optional
+      arguments.
+    \csentryargitem{env-arg-1}\ldots\meta{env-arg-n} Any mandatory
+      arguments required by the environment. Not all environments
+      require arguments.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{end}
+  {\marg{\meta{env-name}}}
+  {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+  {Ends an environment. (Must have a matching \nxglsi{begin}. 
+   See \novices{environment}.)}
+  {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{env-name} The name of the environment.
+    \EndArgList
+  }
+
+\defgcs{documentclass}
+ {\oarg{\meta{option-list}}\marg{\meta{class-name}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Loads the document class file, which sets up the type of document
+   you wish to write. (See \novices[ch:simpledoc]{simpledoc}.)\relax
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{option-list} A comma-separated list of options to
+     pass to the class file or any packages that will later be
+     loaded.
+    \csentryargitem{class-name} The name of the document class. This
+    corresponds to a file called \meta{class-name}\texttt{.cls},
+    which must be installed. 
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{usepackage}
+ {\oarg{\meta{option-list}}\marg{\meta{package-list}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Loads the listed package(s). (See \novices{packages}.)\relax
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{option-list} A comma-separated list of options to
+     pass to the package.
+    \csentryargitem{package-list} A comma-separated list of package
+     names (without the \texttt{.sty} extension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\underscoresym]
+ {underscorechar}
+ {\_}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays its argument as a subscript. (See
+\novices[sec:scripts]{subsupscripts}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The subscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {dollarchar}
+ {\dollarsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches in and out of in-line math mode. (See
+\novices[sec:inline]{inlinemaths}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {hashchar}
+ {\hashsym}
+ {\meta{digit}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Replacement text for argument \meta{digit}. (See
+\novices[ch:newcom]{newcom}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {percentchar}
+ {\percentsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Comment character used to ignore everything up to and including
+  the newline character in the source code. Sometimes comments are
+used to provide information to applications that build your
+document, such as \appname{arara}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {percentchar.arara}
+ {\percentsym{} arara:}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {Instruction to \appname{arara} indicating how to build the
+document. This is ignored if you are not using \appname{arara}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ {ampchar}
+ {\ampsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Alignment tab.}
+ {}
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\circumsym]
+ {circumchar}
+ {\textasciicircum}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays its argument as a superscript. (See
+\novices[sec:scripts]{subsupscripts}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The superscript.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgactivechar
+ [\tildesym]
+ {tildechar}
+ {\textasciitilde}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Unbreakable space. (See \novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{left}
+ {\meta{delimiter}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Indicates a left stretchable delimiter. Must have a matching
+  \nxglsi{right}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{openparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{langle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{right}
+ {\meta{delimiter}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Indicates a right stretchable delimiter. Must have a matching
+  \nxglsi{left}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{delimiter} A delimiter symbol, such as
+    \nxglsni{closeparen}, or a delimiter command, such as \nxglsni{rangle}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgchar
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {sentence.periodchar}
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {period (full stop) or decimal point}
+
+\defgchildchar
+ {delimiter.periodchar}
+ {periodchar}
+ {\periodsym}
+ {invisible delimiter}
+
+\defgcs{author}
+ {\marg{\meta{name}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {Specifies the document author (or authors). This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{name} The name (or names) of the document author
+     (or authors).
+   \EndArgList
+   Note that some classes, such as those supplied by journals or
+   conference proceedings, may also define an optional argument
+   that can be used to specify an abbreviated author list for the
+   page headers.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{title}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {Specifies the document title. This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The title of the document.
+   \EndArgList
+   Note that some classes, such as those supplied by journals or
+   conference proceedings, may also define an optional argument
+   that can be used to specify an abbreviated title for the page
+   headers.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{date}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {Specifies the document date. This command doesn't
+  display any text so may be used in the preamble, but if it's not
+  in the preamble it must be placed before \nxglsi{maketitle}. If omitted, most
+  classes assume the current date.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The document date.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{thanks}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {Inserts a special type of footnote in one of the titling fields,
+  such as \nxglsi{author} or \nxglsni{title}. Usually used for some form of
+  acknowledgement or affiliation.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{today}
+ {}
+ {Most of the commonly-used classes}
+ {Inserts into the output file the date when the \LaTeX\ 
+  application created it from the source code.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{titlehead}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt}, \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {Specifies the title header (typeset at the top of the title page).}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The title header text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subtitle}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt}, \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {Specifies the subtitle (set just below the title).}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The subtitle text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subject}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt}, \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {Specifies the subject (set just above the title).}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The subject.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{publishers}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt}, \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {Specifies the publisher (set after all the other titling
+   information).}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} The publisher text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{maketitle}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {Generates the title page (or title block). This command is usually
+  placed at the beginning of the document environment.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{titlepage}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of a title page}
+ {The contents of this environment are displayed on a 
+  single-column page with no header or footer and the page counter
+  is set to 1.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mathbf}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Renders \meta{maths} in the predefined maths bold font. (Doesn't
+  work with numbers and nonalphabetical symbols. See \novices{mathsfonts}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textbf}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Renders \meta{text} with a bold weight in the current font family,
+if it exists. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{texttt}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Renders \meta{text} in the predefined monospaced font. 
+ (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font
+change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{emph}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Toggles the upright and italic\slash slanted rendering of
+\meta{text}. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text on which to apply the font change.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{normalfont}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the default font style. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{large}
+ {}
+ {Most document classes}
+ {Switches to large sized text. (See \novices{fontsize}.)}
+ {\relax
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bfseries}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the bold weight in the current font
+  family. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{scshape}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the small-caps form of the current font 
+  family, if it exists. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rmfamily}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the predefined serif font. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{ttfamily}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the predefined monospaced font. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{itshape}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches to the italic form of the current font family, if it
+exists. (See \novices{fontstyle}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{chapter}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Book-style classes (such as \cls{scrbook} or \cls{scrreprt}) that have 
+  the concept of chapters}
+ {Inserts a chapter heading.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the chapter counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{section}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts a section header.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the section counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subsection}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts a subsection header.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the subsection counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subsubsection}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts a subsubsection header.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the subsubsection counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{paragraph}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts a subsubsubsection header. Most classes default to an 
+  unnumbered running header for
+  this sectional unit.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the associated counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{subparagraph}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short title}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts a subsubsubsubsection header. Most classes default 
+  to an unnumbered running header for
+  this sectional unit.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{short title} An abbreviated form of the title to
+       go in the table of contents or the page header.
+     \csentryargitem{title} The title.
+   \EndArgList
+   The starred form of this command doesn't have an optional
+   argument and doesn't increment or display the associated counter.
+ }
+
+\defgcs{minisec}
+ {\marg{\meta{heading}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt} and
+  \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {An unnumbered heading not associated with any structuring level.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{heading} The heading text.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{addtokomafont}
+ {\marg{\meta{element name}}\marg{\meta{commands}}}
+ {\cls{scrartcl}, \cls{scrreprt} and
+  \cls{scrbook} classes}
+ {Sets the font characteristics for the given \koma\ element. 
+  (See \novices[sec:section]{sectionunits}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{element name} The element's name, for example
+      \texttt{chapter}. See the \koma\ manual for a full list
+      of defined elements.
+     \csentryargitem{commands} The font changing commands to apply
+      to that element.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{appendix}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Indicates (but doesn't print anything) that the document is
+  switching to the appendices. If chapters exist, the chapter
+  numbering is reset and switched to a different format
+  (usually upper case letters) otherwise the section numbering
+  is reset and switched to a different format.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{tableofcontents}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts the table of contents. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{label}
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Assigns a unique textual label linked to the most recently
+  incremented cross-referencing counter in the current scope. 
+  (See \novices{crossref}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} A unique label that can be referenced
+     elsewhere in the document with \nxglsi{ref}. (It's best to 
+     just use alphanumerics and non-active punctuation characters in
+     the label.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ref}
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {References the value of the counter linked to the given label.
+  A second (possibly third) run of \LaTeX\ is required to ensure the cross-references
+  are up-to-date.
+  (See \novices{crossref}.)
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pageref}
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Similar to \nxglsi{ref} but inserts the page number where the given
+  label was defined.
+  A second (possibly third) run of \LaTeX\ is required to ensure the cross-references
+  are up-to-date.
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{vref}
+ {\marg{\meta{string}}}
+ {\sty{varioref} package}
+ {Like \nxglsi{ref} but also adds information about the location, such
+  as \dq{on page~\meta{n}} or \dq{on the following page}.
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{string} The required label that was used in the
+     corresponding \nxglsi{label}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bibitem}
+ {\oarg{\meta{tag}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Indicates the start of a new reference in the bibliography. May
+  only be used inside the contents of \nxglsi{env-thebibliography}
+  environment. (See \novices[sec:bib]{biblio}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{tag} If present, overrides the marker at the
+    start of the reference.
+    \csentryargitem{key} A unique key that identifies this reference so
+    it can be cited elsewhere in the document using \nxglsi{cite}.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{cite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{text}}\marg{\meta{key list}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts the citation markers of each reference identified in the
+  key list. A second run is required to ensure the reference is
+  correct. When used with \sty{biblatex}, this command has two
+  optional arguments.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{text} Additional text to insert into the citation
+       (such as the chapter number, or a particular page or
+       page range within the citation).
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys used in
+      the corresponding \nxglsi{bibitem}.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Cite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Like \nxglsni{cite} but for use at the start of a sentence.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{prenote} a prenote, such as \dq{see}.
+      \csentryargitem{postnote} a postnote, such as the chapter or
+         section within the work.
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys
+       identifying the entries.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{parencite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Like \nxgls{cite} but the citation is enclosed in parentheses.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{prenote} a prenote, such as \dq{see}.
+      \csentryargitem{postnote} a postnote, such as the chapter or
+         section within the work.
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys
+       identifying the entries.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Parencite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Like \nxglsni{parencite} but for use at the start of a sentence.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{prenote} a prenote, such as \dq{see}.
+      \csentryargitem{postnote} a postnote, such as the chapter or
+         section within the work.
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys
+       identifying the entries.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{textcite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Like \nxgls{cite} but designed for use in the flow of text.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{prenote} a prenote, such as \dq{see}.
+      \csentryargitem{postnote} a postnote, such as the chapter or
+         section within the work.
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys
+       identifying the entries.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Textcite}
+ {\oarg{\meta{prenote}}\oarg{\meta{postnote}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Like \nxgls{textcite} but for use at the start of a sentence.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{prenote} a prenote, such as \dq{see}.
+      \csentryargitem{postnote} a postnote, such as the chapter or
+         section within the work.
+      \csentryargitem{key list} A comma-separated list of keys
+       identifying the entries.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{caption}
+ {\oarg{\meta{short caption}}\marg{\meta{caption text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts the caption for a float such as a figure or table. 
+ (See \novices[ch:floats]{floats}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{short caption} If provided, an abbreviated caption
+      to go in the list of figures\slash tables etc.
+    \csentryargitem{caption text} The caption contents.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{listoffigures}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts the list of figures. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{listoftables}
+ {}
+ {Most classes that have the concept of document structure}
+ {Inserts the list of tables. A second (possibly third) run
+  is required to ensure the page numbering is correct.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{par}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Insert a paragraph break.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newcommand}
+ {\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Defines a new command. (See \novices[ch:newcom]{newcom}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cmd} The new command name (including initial backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new command
+     should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{text} What actions the command should perform.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{renewcommand}
+ {\marg{\meta{cmd}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Redefines an existing command. (See \novices{renewcom}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{cmd} The command name (including initial backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this command
+     should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{text} What actions the command should perform.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newenvironment}
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{\meta{end-code}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Defines a new environment.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The new environment name (\emph{no} backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new
+     environment should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{begin-code} Actions to perform at the start of the
+      environment.
+    \csentryargitem{end-code} Actions to perform at the end of the
+      environment.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{renewenvironment}
+ {\marg{\meta{env-name}}\oarg{\meta{n-args}}\oarg{\meta{default}}\marg{\meta{begin-code}}\marg{end-code}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Redefines an existing environment.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{env-name} The environment name (\emph{no} backslash).
+    \csentryargitem{n-args} The number of arguments this new
+     environment should have.
+    \csentryargitem{default} If the first argument should be optional,
+     the default value if omitted.
+    \csentryargitem{begin-code} Actions to perform at the start of the
+      environment.
+    \csentryargitem{end-code} Actions to perform at the end of the
+      environment.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{makeindex}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Preamble Only)}
+ {Enables \nxglsi{index}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{index}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Adds indexing information to an external index file. The command
+   \nxglsi{makeindex} must be used in the preamble to enable
+   this command. The external index file must be post-processed with
+   an indexing application, such as \nxiappname{makeindex}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} The text to go in the index.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{printindex}
+ {}
+ {\sty{makeidx} package}
+ {Prints the index. Must be used with \nxglsi{makeindex} and \nxglsi{index}.
+ (The external index file must first be processed by an indexing application.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{makeglossaries}
+ {}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Activates \nxglsi{printglossaries} (and \nxglsi{printglossary}).}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{printglossary}
+ {\oarg{\meta{key-val option list}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Prints the glossary identified in the optional argument or the
+default glossary if none identified.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{key-val option list} A comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{printglossaries}
+ {}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Prints all of the defined glossaries.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newglossaryentry}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{\meta{key-\reportlinebreak val list}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Defines a new glossary entry or term.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} A unique label identifying this entry.
+     \csentryargitem{key-val list} A comma-separated list that
+define this entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newacronym}
+ {\oarg{\meta{key-val list}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{label}}\booklinebreak\marg{\meta{abbrv}}\marg{\meta{long}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Shortcut that uses \nxglsni{newglossaryentry} to define an acronym.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{key-val list} A comma-separated list (same as
+for \nxglsni{newglossaryentry}) that can be used to override
+\cmdname{newacronym} defaults or add additional information.
+     \csentryargitem{abbrv} The acronym.
+     \csentryargitem{long} The long (expanded) form of the acronym.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsreset}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} and \sty{datagidx} packages}
+ {Resets a glossary term's first use flag.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label identifying the term that
+needs resetting.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsunset}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} and \sty{datagidx} packages}
+ {Unsets a glossary term's first use flag.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label identifying the term that
+needs unsetting.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{gls}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays a glossary term according to its first use flag.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glspl}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the plural form of a glossary term according to its first use flag.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Gls}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays a glossary term according to its first use flag. The
+first letter of the term is converted to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Glspl}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the plural form of a glossary term according to its first
+use flag. The first letter of the plural text is converted to
+uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glssymbol}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the symbol element of a glossary entry.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acrshort}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the short form of the given acronym.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the acronym (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Acrshort}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the short form of the given acronym, the first letter
+converted to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the acronym (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acrlong}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the long form of the given acronym.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Acrlong}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the long form of the given acronym, the first letter
+converted to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acrfull}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the long and short form of the given acronym.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Acrfull}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the long and short form of the given acronym, the first letter
+converted to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acs}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {A synonym for \nxglsni{acrshort}. This command is only available if
+the package option \optfmt{shortcuts} is used.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acl}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {A synonym for \nxglsni{acrlong}. This command is only available if
+the package option \optfmt{shortcuts} is used.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acf}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {A synonym for \nxglsni{acrfull}. This command is only available if
+the package option \optfmt{shortcuts} is used.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ac}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {A synonym for \nxgls{gls}. This command is only available if
+the package option \optfmt{shortcuts} is used.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Ac}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}\oarg{\meta{insert}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {A synonym for \nxgls{Gls}. This command is only available if
+the package option \optfmt{shortcuts} is used.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{options} a \meta{key}=\meta{value} list of
+options.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+acronym (as defined by \nxglsni{newacronym}).
+    \csentryargitem{insert} text to insert after the term (but
+inside the hyperlink, if used with the \sty{hyperref} package).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsentrytext}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the value of the \optfmt{text} key for a glossary entry.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsentryfirst}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Displays the value of the \optfmt{first} key for a glossary entry.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newglossary}
+ {\oarg{\meta{log-ext}}\marg{\meta{name}}\marg{\meta{in-ext}}\marg{\meta{out-ext}}\marg{\meta{title}}\oarg{\meta{counter}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Defines a new glossary.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{log-ext} the extension of the associated log
+file.
+     \csentryargitem{name} a label that uniquely identifies this
+new glossary
+     \csentryargitem{in-ext} the associated glossary input file extension.
+     \csentryargitem{out-ext} the associated glossary output file extension.
+     \csentryargitem{title} the title used when the glossary is
+displayed.
+     \csentryargitem{counter} the default counter to use in this
+glossary's location lists.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsadd}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Adds the given entry to the glossary without displaying any text.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} a comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{glsaddall}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} package}
+ {Adds all the defined entries without displaying any text.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} a comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[beginmath]{\openparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Equivalent to \nxglsni{begin}\marg{math}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[endmath]{\closeparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Equivalent to \nxglsni{end}\marg{math}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {openparen}
+ {\openparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Opening parenthesis in text mode or left round bracket
+   delimiter in math mode.\relax
+ }
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {closeparen}
+ {\closeparensym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Closing parenthesis in text mode or right round bracket
+   delimiter in math mode.\relax
+ }
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[begindispmath]{\opensqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (inconsistency corrected in \sty{amsmath})}
+ {Starts an unnumbered single-line of displayed maths.}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[enddispmath]{\closesqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (inconsistency corrected in \sty{amsmath})}
+ {Ends an unnumbered single-line of displayed maths.}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {opt.opensq}
+ {\opensqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Open delimiter of an optional argument. (See \novices{optional}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {opt.closesq}
+ {\closesqsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Closing delimiter of an optional argument. (See \novices{optional}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{document}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {The body of the document.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{thebibliography}
+ {\marg{\meta{widest entry label}}}
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}
+ {Bibliographic list. (See \novices[sec:bib]{biblio}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{widest entry label} The widest label in the
+     bibliography list.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{frontmatter}
+ {}
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \cls{scrbook}}
+ {Switches to lower case Roman numeral page numbering. Also suppresses
+   chapter and section numbering, but still adds unstarred sectional
+   units to the table of contents. (See also \nxglsi{mainmatter}
+   and \nxglsi{backmatter}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mainmatter}
+ {}
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \cls{scrbook}}
+ {Switches to Arabic page numbering and enables
+   chapter and section numbering. (See also
+   \nxglsi{frontmatter} and \nxglsi{backmatter}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{backmatter}
+ {}
+ {Most book-style classes, such as \cls{scrbook}}
+ {Suppresses chapter and section numbering, but still adds unstarred
+  sectional units to the table of contents. (See also \nxglsi{frontmatter}
+  and \nxglsi{mainmatter}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{abstract}
+ {}
+ {Most article- or report-style classes, such as \cls{scrartcl} or
+  \cls{scrreprt}. Not usually defined in book-style classes, such
+  as \cls{scrbook}, but is defined in \cls{memoir}}
+ {Displays its contents as an abstract.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{pagenumbering}
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Sets the style of the page numbers.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The page numbering style (e.g.\
+      \texttt{roman} for lower case Roman numerals).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{pagestyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Sets the style of the headers and footers.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The name of the page style. The \LaTeX\
+     kernel defines only two styles: \nxipagestyle{empty} and
+     \nxipagestyle{plain}. Most of the standard classes also provide
+     the \nxipagestyle{headings} style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{thispagestyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Like \nxglsi{pagestyle} but only affects the current page.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{style} The name of the page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ihead}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the inner heading area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{chead}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the centre heading area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ohead}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the outer heading area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ifoot}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the inner footer area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{cfoot}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the centre footer area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ofoot}
+ {\oarg{\meta{scrplain}}\marg{\meta{scrheadings}}}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Indicates what to put in the outer footer area for the
+  \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{scrplain} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrplain} page style.
+     \csentryargitem{scrheadings} The text used by
+       \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page style.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{headfont}
+ {}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Determines the font used by the header and footer with the
+ \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{pnumfont}
+ {}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Determines the font used by \nxglsni{pagemark} with the
+ \pagestylefmt{scrplain} and \pagestylefmt{scrheadings} page styles.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{pagemark}
+ {}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Used in commands like \nxglsni{ihead} to insert the current page
+  number.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{headmark}
+ {}
+ {\sty{scrpage2} package}
+ {Used in commands like \nxglsni{ihead} to insert the current 
+   running header.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{include}
+ {\marg{\meta{file name}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Issues a \nxgls{clearpage}, creates an associated auxiliary file,
+  inputs \meta{file name} and issues another \nxgls{clearpage}.
+  (See also \nxglsni{input}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{file name} The name of the file to be included.
+    (The \texttt{.tex} extension may be omitted.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{input}
+ {\marg{\meta{file name}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Reads in the contents of \meta{file name}. (See also
+  \nxglsni{include}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{file name} The name of the file to be read in.
+    (The \texttt{.tex} extension may be omitted.)
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{includeonly}
+ {\meta{\meta{file list}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Preamble Only)}
+ {Lists which of the files that are included using \nxglsni{include}
+  should be read in. Any files not in the list won't be included.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{file list} Comma-separated list of file names.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+
+\defgcs{excludeonly}
+ {\meta{\meta{file list}}}
+ {\sty{excludeonly} Package}
+ {Lists which of the files that are not to be included using \nxgls{include}. 
+  Only those files not in the list will be included. (The opposite
+  effect of \nxgls{includeonly}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{file list} Comma-separated list of file names.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{clearpage}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts a page break and processes any unprocessed floats}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{raggedsection}
+ {}
+ {\koma\ classes, such as \cls{scrbook} and \cls{scrreprt}}
+ {Governs the justification of headings. Defaults to
+\nxglsni{raggedright}}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{raggedright}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Ragged-right paragraph justification. (See
+\novices{declaration}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{centering}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Switches the paragraph alignment to centred. (See
+\novices{declaration}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{singlespacing}
+ {}
+ {\sty{setspace} package}
+ {Switches to single line-spacing.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{onehalfspacing}
+ {}
+ {\sty{setspace} package}
+ {Switches to one-half line-spacing.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{doublespacing}
+ {}
+ {\sty{setspace} package}
+ {Switches to double line-spacing.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{hspace}
+ {\marg{\meta{length}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts a horizontal gap of the given width.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{length} The width of the horizontal gap.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{vspace}
+ {\marg{\meta{length}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts a vertical gap of the given height.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{length} The height of the vertical gap.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{hfill}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts a horizontal space that will expand to fit the available
+width.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vfill}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inserts a vertical space that will expand to fit the available
+  height.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{verbatim}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Typesets the contents of the environment as is. (Can't be used in
+  the argument of a command.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{lstset}
+ {\marg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\sty{listings} package}
+ {Sets options used by the \sty{listings} package.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} comma-separated list of
+      \meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{lstlisting}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\sty{listings} package}
+ {Typesets the contents of the environment as displayed code.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} comma-separated list of
+      \meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{lstinline}
+ {\oarg{\meta{opts}}\meta{char}\meta{code}\meta{char}}
+ {\sty{listings} package}
+ {Typesets \meta{code} as an inline code snippet.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{opts} comma-separated list of
+      \meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+     \csentryargitem{char} single character delimiter that doesn't
+occur in \meta{code}
+     \csentryargitem{code} the code snippet
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{lstinputlisting}
+ {\marg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{filename}}}
+ {\sty{listings} package}
+ {Reads in \meta{filename} and typesets the contents as displayed
+  code.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} comma-separated list of
+      \meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+     \csentryargitem{filename} the name of the file to input.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{lstlistoflistings}
+ {}
+ {\sty{listings} package}
+ {Prints a list of listings for those listings with the caption set.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sqrt}
+ {\oarg{\meta{order}}\marg{\meta{operand}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays a root. (See \novices{roots}.)}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{order} The order of the root. (If omitted, a
+       square root).
+     \csentryargitem{operand} The operand.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {doublequote}
+ {\doublequotesym}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\relax
+   Umlaut over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \quotecs\marg{o} produces \oumlaut. (See
+\novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)\relax
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires an umlaut
+     over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgchar
+ {quotedblright}
+ {\quotedblrightcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Closing double quote \textquotedblright\ symbol in text mode
+  or double prime \mathdoubleprime\ in math mode. 
+(See \novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quotedblleft}
+ {\quotedblleftcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Open double quote \textquotedblleft\ symbol. (See
+\novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgchar
+ {quoteright}
+ {\quoterightcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Closing quote or apostrophe \textquoteright\ symbol in text mode 
+  or prime symbol \mathsingleprime\ in math mode. 
+(See \novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[hyphen]{\dashcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildsymcs
+ {hyphen-discretionary}
+ {hyphen}
+ {\dashcs}
+ {Outside \nxgls{env-tabbing} environment inserts a discretionary hyphen}
+
+\defgchildsymcs
+ {hyphen-tab}
+ {hyphen}
+ {\dashcs}
+ {Inside \nxgls{env-tabbing} environment shifts the left border by one tab stop}
+
+\defgsymcs[equals]{\equalsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\nopostdesc}
+ {}
+
+\defgchildsymcs
+ {macron}
+ {equals}
+ {\equalsym}
+ {Outside \nxgls{env-tabbing} environment puts a macron accent over the
+  following character\relax
+ }
+
+\defgchildsymcs
+ {tabstop}
+ {equals}
+ {\equalsym}
+ {Inside \nxgls{env-tabbing} environment sets a tab-stop.\relax
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[plus]{\pluscs}
+ {}
+ {\nxgls{env-tabbing} environment}
+ {Shifts the left border by one tab stop to the right.}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[lessthan]{\lesssym}
+ {}
+ {\nxgls{env-tabbing} environment}
+ {Jumps to the next tab stop.}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[greaterthan]{\greatersym}
+ {}
+ {\nxgls{env-tabbing} environment}
+ {Jumps to the previous tab stop.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{tabbing}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Allows you to define tab stops from the left margin.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{kill}
+ {}
+ {\nxgls{env-tabbing} environment}
+ {Sets the tab stops defined in the line but won't typeset the
+  actual line.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{a}
+ {\meta{accent symbol}\marg{\meta{character}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Used in the \nxgls{env-tabbing} environment to create accented characters.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{accent symbol} the symbol you would usually
+        use in the normal accent command.
+      \csentryargitem{character} the character that requires the
+        accent
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newtheorem}
+ {\marg{\meta{name}}\oarg{\meta{counter}}\reportlinebreak\booklinebreak\marg{\meta{title}}\oarg{\meta{outer counter}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Defines a new theorem-like environment. The optional arguments are
+  mutually exclusive. Some packages, such as \sty{ntheorem}
+  and \sty{amsthm}, redefine this command to have a starred variant 
+  that defines unnumbered theorem-like environments.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{name} the name of the new environment
+     \csentryargitem{counter} the counter to be used by the new environment
+     \csentryargitem{title} the title for the new environment
+     \csentryargitem{outer counter} the parent counter
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{listtheorems}
+ {\marg{\meta{list}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} package}
+ {Inserts a list of theorems for the theorem types given in \meta{list}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{list} a comma-separated list of theorem types.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{theoremstyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{style name}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} and \sty{amsthm} packages}
+ {Changes the current theorem style to \meta{style name}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{style name} the name of the theorem style
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{theoremheaderfont}
+ {\marg{\meta{declarations}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} package}
+ {Changes the current theorem header fonts to \meta{declarations}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{declarations} font declarations (such as
+        \nxgls{normalfont})
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{theorembodyfont}
+ {\marg{\meta{declarations}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} package}
+ {Changes the current theorem body fonts to \meta{declarations}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{declarations} font declarations (such as
+        \nxgls{normalfont})
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{theoremnumbering}
+ {\marg{\meta{style}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} package}
+ {Changes the current theorem numbering style to \meta{style}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{style} counter style, such as \texttt{arabic}
+        or \texttt{roman}.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{sim}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Relational \mathtilde\ symbol.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vee}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Operator \mathvee\ symbol. (See \novices{mathssym}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{wedge}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Operator \mathwedge\ symbol. (See \novices{mathssym}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{equiv}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Relational \mathequiv\ symbol. (See \novices{mathssym}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{sum}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Summation \mathsum\ symbol. (See \novices{mathssym}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{vec}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Typesets its argument as a vector. (See \novices[sec:vec]{vectors}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character or symbol that represents a vector.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{lvert}
+ {}
+ {\sty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}
+ {Left vertical bar \mathlvert\ delimiter. (See \novices{delimiters}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{rvert}
+ {}
+ {\sty{amsmath} (Math Mode)}
+ {Right vertical bar \mathrvert\ delimiter. (See \novices{delimiters}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{frac}
+ {\marg{\meta{numerator}}\marg{\meta{denominator}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Displays a fraction. (See \novices{fractions}.)}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{numerator} The numerator (above the line).
+     \csentryargitem{denominator} The denominator (below the line).
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{parindent}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {A length register that stores the indentation at the start of
+paragraphs. (See \novices{length}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newline}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Forces a line break.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{epsilon}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Greek lower case epsilon \mathepsilon. (See \novices{greek}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{algorithm}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {A floating environment for typesetting algorithms.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{placement} floating placement specifier
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{algorithm2e}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {Replacement for \nxglsni{env-algorithm} when used with the 
+   \optfmt{algo2e} package option.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{placement} floating placement specifier
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{figure}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}
+ {\relax
+   Floats the contents to the nearest location according to the
+   preferred placement options, if possible. Within the environment,
+   \nxglsi{caption} may be used one or more times, as required. 
+   (See \novices{figures}.)
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{placement} The preferred placement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{table}
+ {\oarg{\meta{placement}}}
+ {Most classes that define sectioning commands}
+ {\relax
+   Floats the contents to the nearest location according to the
+   preferred placement options, if possible. Within the environment,
+   \nxglsi{caption} may be used one or more times, as required. 
+   (See \novices{tables}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{placement} The preferred placement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[space.semicolon]{\semicolonsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Thick space.}
+ {}
+
+\defgsymcs[algo2e.semicolon]{\semicolonsym}
+ {}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {When used in the body of one of the environments defined by
+   \sty{algorithm2e}, such as \nxglsni{env-algorithm}, marks the end of
+   the line. Outside those environments, this is a math spacing
+   command.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{DontPrintSemicolon}
+ {}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {Switches off the end of line semi-colon. (See also
+  \nxgls{PrintSemicolon}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{PrintSemicolon}
+ {}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {Switches on the end of line semi-colon. (See also
+  \nxgls{DontPrintSemicolon}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{For}
+ {\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{body}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate a for-loop}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{condition} the for-loop condition.
+    \csentryargitem{body} the for-loop body.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{While}
+ {\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{body}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate a while-loop}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{condition} the while-loop condition.
+    \csentryargitem{body} the while-loop body.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{If}
+ {\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{block}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate an if-statement}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{condition} the if-statement condition.
+    \csentryargitem{block} the true-part of the if-statement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{uIf}
+ {\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{block}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {Like \nxgls{If} but doesn't put \dq{end} after \meta{block}}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{condition} the if-statement condition.
+    \csentryargitem{block} the true-part of the if-statement.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ElseIf}
+ {\marg{\meta{block}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate an elseif-block}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{block} the elseif-block.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{uElseIf}
+ {\marg{\meta{condition}}\marg{\meta{block}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {Like \nxgls{ElseIf} but doesn't put \dq{end} after \meta{block}}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{block} the elseif-block.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Else}
+ {\marg{\meta{block}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate an else-block}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{block} the else-block.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwIn}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate the algorithm
+input}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} the algorithm input
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwOut}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate the algorithm
+output}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} the algorithm output
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwData}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate the algorithm
+input data}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} the algorithm input data.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwResult}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate the algorithm
+output}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} the algorithm output.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwTo}
+ {}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate ``to'' keyword}
+ {\relax
+ }
+
+\defgcs{KwRet}
+ {\marg{\meta{value}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate a value
+returned}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{value} the return value.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{Return}
+ {\marg{\meta{value}}}
+ {\sty{algorithm2e} package}
+ {For use in algorithm-like environments to indicate a value
+returned}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{value} the return value.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{leftarrow}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Left arrow \mathleftarrow. (See \novices{mathssym}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{num}
+ {\marg{\meta{number}}}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Typesets \meta{number} with appropriate spacing.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{number} the number to typeset
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ang}
+ {\marg{\meta{angle}}}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Typesets \meta{angle} where \meta{angle} is a single number or
+  three semi-colon separated values.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{angle} the angle (degrees) to typeset or
+      \meta{degrees}\texttt{;}\meta{minutes}\texttt{;}\meta{seconds}
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{si}
+ {\marg{\meta{unit}}}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Typesets the given unit.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{unit} the unit to typeset
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{SI}
+ {\marg{\meta{number}}\marg{\meta{unit}}}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Typesets a number and unit, combining the functionality of
+  \nxgls{num} and \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{unit} the unit to typeset
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{metre}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates the metre unit for use in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{second}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates the second unit for use in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{per}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates a divider in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{square}
+ {\meta{unit}}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates a squared unit in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{squared}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates a squared term in commands like \nxglsni{si} after a unit command such as \nxgls{metre}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{kilo}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates a kilo multiplier in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{gram}
+ {}
+ {\sty{siunitx} package}
+ {Indicates a gram in commands like \nxglsni{si}.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{MakeUppercase}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Converts its argument to upper case.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+       \csentryargitem{text} the text to be converted.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {endash}
+ {\enDashcs}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {En-dash \textendash\ symbol.  (Normally used for number ranges. 
+See \novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{bibliographystyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{style-name}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Specifies the bibliography style to be used by bibtex.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{style-name} the name of the bibliography style
+(corresponds to a file called \meta{style-name}\texttt{.bst}).
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{bibliography}
+ {\marg{\meta{bib list}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Inputs the \texttt{.bbl} file (if it exists) and identifies the
+  name(s) of the bibliography database files where the citations are
+  defined.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{bib list} a comma-separated list of database names
+     (without the \texttt{.bib} extension).
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{citep}
+ {\oarg{\meta{pre}}\oarg{\meta{post}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{natbib} package}
+ {Parenthetical citation.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{pre} prefix text
+      \csentryargitem{post} suffix text
+      \csentryargitem{key} key identifying required citation or
+       comma-separated list of keys.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{citet}
+ {\oarg{\meta{pre}}\oarg{\meta{post}}\marg{\meta{key}}}
+ {\sty{natbib} package}
+ {Textual citation.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{pre} prefix text
+      \csentryargitem{post} suffix text
+      \csentryargitem{key} key identifying required citation or
+       comma-separated list of keys.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{addbibresource}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{resource}}}
+ {\sty{biblatex} package}
+ {Adds a resource, such as a \texttt{.bib} file}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{options} comma-separated list of
+        \meta{key}=\meta{value} options
+      \csentryargitem{resource} the file name or URL of the resource
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{printbibliography}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\isty{biblatex} package}
+ {Prints the bibliography.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} comma-separated list of
+       \meta{key}=\meta{value} options
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgidxactivecharcs
+ {at}
+ {\atsym}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Used when a sentence ends with a capital letter.
+   This command should be placed after the letter and before the
+   punctuation mark. (See \novices{intersentencespacing}.)}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {atchar}
+ {\atsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {\relax
+   Used in the argument of \nxglsi{index} to separate the sort key
+   from the term being indexed.\relax
+ }
+ {}
+  
+\defgcs{AE}
+ {}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {\protect\AE\ ligature.}
+ {}
+
+\defgenv{proof}
+ {\oarg{\meta{title}}}
+ {\sty{amsthm} package}
+ {Typesets its contents as a proof.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{title} replacement for the default title.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgenv{Proof}
+ {\oarg{\meta{title}}}
+ {\sty{ntheorem} package with \optfmt{standard} package option}
+ {Typesets its contents as a proof.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{title} if supplied this is appended in
+parentheses to the proof title.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{qedhere}
+ {}
+ {\sty{amsthm} package}
+ {Overrides default location of QED marker in \nxglsni{env-proof}
+   environment.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{qedsymbol}
+ {}
+ {\sty{amsthm} package}
+ {QED symbol used at the end of the \nxglsni{env-proof} environment.}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{newtheoremstyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{name}}\marg{\meta{space 
+above}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{space below}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{body 
+font}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{indent}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{head
+font}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{post head punctuation}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{post head
+space}}\reportlinebreak\marg{\meta{head spec}}}
+ {\sty{amsthm} package}
+ {Defines a new theorem style called \meta{name}.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{name} the name of the new theorem style
+      \csentryargitem{space above} the amount of space above the
+theorem-like environment
+      \csentryargitem{space below} the amount of space below the
+theorem-like environment
+      \csentryargitem{body font} the font to use in the main theorem
+body
+      \csentryargitem{indent} the amount of indentation (empty means
+no indent or use \nxgls{parindent} for normal paragraph indentation)
+      \csentryargitem{head font} the font to use in the theorem
+header
+      \csentryargitem{post head punctuation} the punctuation to use
+after the theorem head
+      \csentryargitem{post head space} the space to put
+after the theorem head (use \marg{ } for normal interword space or
+\nxgls{newline} for a linebreak)
+      \csentryargitem{head spec} the theorem head spec
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {index.barchar}
+ {\vbarsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {When used in \nxglsi{index}, this symbol indicates that the rest
+of the argument list is to be used as the
+encapsulating command for the page number.}
+ {}
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {makeindex.exclamchar}
+ {\exclamsym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {\nxiappname{makeindex} sublevel special character}
+ {}
+
+
+\defgidxactivechar
+ {makeindex.doublequote}
+ {\doublequotesym}
+ {}
+ {}
+ {\nxiappname{makeindex} escape special character}
+ {}
+
+\defgcs{mathcal}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel (Math Mode)}
+ {Typesets its argument in the maths calligraphic font.
+  Example: 
+  \nxglsni{dollarchar}\protect\cmdname{mathcal}\marg{S}\nxglsni{dollarchar} 
+  produces
+ \mathcalS. (See \novices{mathsfonts}.)}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{maths} The maths to be displayed in a calligraphic
+      font.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{ensuremath}
+ {\marg{\meta{maths}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Ensures that its argument is displayed in maths mode. (If it's
+already in maths mode, it just displays its argument, but if it's
+not already in maths mode, it will typeset its argument in in-line
+maths mode.) This command is usually only used in definitions, such as in
+\nxgls{newglossaryentry}, where it may be used in either text or
+math mode.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{maths} The maths to be displayed.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgsymcs[acute]{\quoterightcs}
+ {\marg{\meta{c}}}
+ {\LaTeX\ Kernel}
+ {Acute accent over \meta{c}. Example:
+   \cmdname{'}\marg{o} produces \protect\'{o}. (See
+\novices[sec:chars]{symbols}.)\relax
+ }
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{c} The character that requires an acute
+     accent over it.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newgidx}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}\marg{\meta{title}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Defines a new index (or glossary) database.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} a label uniquely identifying this
+database.
+     \csentryargitem{title} the title to be used when this index (or
+glossary) is displayed.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newterm}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{name}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Defines a new index or glossary term.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} a comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options.
+     \csentryargitem{name} the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{newacro}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}\marg{\meta{short}}\marg{\meta{long}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Defines a new acronym.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} a comma-separated list of
+\meta{key}=\meta{value} options (same as \nxgls{newterm}).
+     \csentryargitem{short} the abbreviation.
+     \csentryargitem{long} the long form.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{DTLgidxSetDefaultDB}
+ {\marg{\meta{database label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Sets the default indexing database.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{database label} the label uniquely identifying
+the required database.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{acronymfont}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{glossaries} and \sty{datagidx} packages}
+ {Font used to display acronyms.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{text} the acronym.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{DTLgidxAcrStyle}
+ {\marg{\meta{long}}\marg{\meta{short}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Formats the long and short form of an acronym.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{long} the long form of the acronym.
+      \csentryargitem{short} the abbreviation.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+\defgcs{MakeTextUppercase}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{textcase} package}
+ {Converts \meta{text} to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+    \BeginArgList
+      \csentryargitem{text} the text that needs to be uppercased.
+    \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{capitalisewords}
+ {\marg{\meta{text}}}
+ {\sty{mfirstuc} package}
+ {Converts the initial letter of each word in \meta{text} to
+uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{text} the text that needs capitalising.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.gls]{gls}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays a glossary or index term.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.glspl]{glspl}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays the plural form of a~glossary or index term.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.Gls]{Gls}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays a glossary or index term with the first letter converted
+to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.Glspl]{Glspl}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays the plural form of a~glossary or index term with the first
+letter converted to uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.acr]{acr}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays an acronym. On first use the full form is displayed. On
+subsequent use only the short form is displayed.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.Acr]{Acr}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {As \nxglsni{datagidx.acr} but the first letter is converted to
+uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.acrpl]{acrpl}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays the plural of an acronym. On first use the full form is displayed. On
+subsequent use only the short form is displayed.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.Acrpl]{Acrpl}
+ {\marg{\oarg{\meta{format}}\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {As \nxglsni{datagidx.acrpl} but the first letter is converted to
+uppercase.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{format} the name of the formatting command
+\emph{without} the initial backslash to be used for this location.
+    \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the term.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{printterms}
+ {\oarg{\meta{options}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Displays the index or glossary or list of acronyms.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{options} a comma-separated list of options.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.glsadd]{glsadd}
+ {\marg{\meta{label}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Adds the given entry to the glossary or index without displaying any text.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{label} the label uniquely identifying the
+entry.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs[][datagidx.glsaddall]{glsaddall}
+ {\marg{\meta{database name}}}
+ {\sty{datagidx} package}
+ {Adds all the defined entries in the named database without displaying any text.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+     \csentryargitem{database name} the label uniquely identifying
+the required database.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
+
+\defgcs{afterpage}
+ {\marg{\meta{code}}}
+ {\sty{afterpage} package}
+ {Indicates code that should be implemented at the next page break.}
+ {\relax
+   \BeginArgList
+    \csentryargitem{code} the relevant code.
+   \EndArgList
+ }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/imgsource/titlepage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/imgsource/titlepage.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fd5fcd43376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/imgsource/titlepage.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook}
+
+\pagestyle{empty}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{titlepage}
+ \centering
+ \vspace*{1in}
+ \begin{Large}\bfseries
+  A Sample PhD Thesis\par
+ \end{Large}
+ \vspace{1.5in}
+ \begin{large}\bfseries
+  A. N. Other\par
+ \end{large}
+ \vfill
+ A Thesis submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
+ \par
+ \vspace{0.5in}
+ School of Something
+ \par
+ University of Somewhere
+ \par
+ \vspace{0.5in}
+ July 2013
+ \par
+\end{titlepage}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/helloworld.c b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/helloworld.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0e1c0c96429
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/helloworld.c
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */
+
+int main()
+{
+   printf("Hello World\n");
+
+   return 1;
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/sqrt.c b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/sqrt.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..422d466557d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/listing-samples/sqrt.c
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+#include <stdio.h> /* needed for printf */
+#include <math.h> /* needed for sqrt */
+
+int main()
+{
+   double x = sqrt(2.0); /* $x = \sqrt{2}$ */
+
+   printf("x = %f\n", x);
+
+   return 1;
+} 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/arara-installer.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/arara-installer.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b9291feca14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/arara-installer.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/bibertool.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/bibertool.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59d9f56f15c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/bibertool.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/doibutton.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/doibutton.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2c9a5542ec4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/doibutton.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/generatekey.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/generatekey.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a41fc29d933
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/generatekey.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1b3473eecdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c6178790c53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-dataprop.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4ea3f81d007
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69ea6254f1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-pref.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8c20ce837e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2671fef123e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f4cb8ad42e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e3ab694c6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..01beff3fa87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d71ecd3b47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref-textimport3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cfa4064e1c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..84db6648b73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref1.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..52bfcfc5724
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1f7d5a72018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref10.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref11.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref11.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dd7142c8a1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref11.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c9d1bb76073
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6c91c5a0045
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref12.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..955c59b8e8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..89316f1c7b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..19e935efcb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref3.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2558105fc5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..47ca5c7fbcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref4.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..07c9967fe46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..82243721faf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref5.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..71601d60186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ff2a677394
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref6.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ef82baa1678
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..83e2c35bd1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref7.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e98cad10909
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6bef759f3f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref8.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9-thumbnail.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9-thumbnail.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..48fc98d9163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9-thumbnail.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c550c711ef9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/jabref9.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/pagestyle.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/pagestyle.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..166b5400ccf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/pagestyle.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+% /home/nlct/Documents/nonfiction/latex/thesis/imgsource/pagestyle.ajr
+% Created by Jpgfdraw version 0.5.7b
+% 01-Oct-2012 15:17:43
+\begin{pgfpicture}{0bp}{0bp}{341.0bp}{341.0bp}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{340.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{200.5bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{41.31857bp}{118.792815bp}}{\pgfpoint{217.166667bp}{270.5bp}}{\pgfpoint{340.5bp}{200.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{340.5bp}{340.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{340.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{140.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{0.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{340.5bp}{0.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{340.5bp}{140.5bp}}
+\pgfpathcurveto{\pgfpoint{284.802986bp}{228.825787bp}}{\pgfpoint{50.208825bp}{55.916831bp}}{\pgfpoint{0.5bp}{140.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{100.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{100.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{60.5bp}{305.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}ihead}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{280.5bp}{305.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}ohead}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{210.5bp}{290.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{210.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{320.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{170.5bp}{305.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}chead}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{100.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{100.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{60.5bp}{35.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}ifoot}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{240.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{280.5bp}{35.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}ofoot}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{210.5bp}{20.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{210.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{130.5bp}{50.5bp}}
+\pgfclosepath
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgftransformcm{1.0}{-0.0}{0.0}{1.0}{\pgfpoint{170.5bp}{35.5bp}}
+\pgftext[center,center]{\rmfamily\mdseries\upshape\Huge
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}cfoot}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetroundcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{180.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{280.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{280.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{210.5bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\begin{pgfscope}
+\pgfsetlinewidth{1.0bp}
+\pgfsetbuttcap 
+\pgfsetroundjoin 
+\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{121.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{20.5bp}{60.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{60.5bp}}
+\pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{320.5bp}{159.5bp}}
+\color[rgb]{0.0,0.0,0.0}
+\pgfusepath{stroke}
+\end{pgfscope}
+\end{pgfpicture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-addbutton.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-addbutton.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1fac032b626
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-addbutton.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..27f6c290b56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b130e5cd189
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-arara2.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-bibtex.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-bibtex.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a91a2dc8a29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-bibtex.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cf488b65abf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmk.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmkbibtex.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmkbibtex.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2628f50b92c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-latexmkbibtex.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-makeglossaries.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-makeglossaries.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc5ef617ed5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-makeglossaries.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pdflatex.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pdflatex.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fae10b17eed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pdflatex.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pref.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pref.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..384a1a32c07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-pref.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-texindy.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-texindy.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e0770518280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/texworks-texindy.png
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/titlepage.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/titlepage.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2370e8f3ec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/pictures/titlepage.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-a4paper.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-a4paper.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d86756cdd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-a4paper.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+% This is part of the source code for "Using LaTeX to Write a PhD Thesis"
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{thesis-a4paper}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\PassOptionsToPackage{final}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{rotate}{\PassOptionsToPackage{rotate}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{norotate}{\PassOptionsToPackage{norotate}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbtitle}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbtitle}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnotitle}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnotitle}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnum}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnum}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{ttbnonum}{\PassOptionsToPackage{ttbnonum}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{color}{\PassOptionsToPackage{color}{flowfram}}
+\DeclareOption{nocolor}{\PassOptionsToPackage{nocolor}{flowfram}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{flowfram}
+\RequirePackage{pgf}
+\RequirePackage[a4paper,portrait]{geometry}
+\geometry{lmargin=72.0bp,rmargin=72.0bp,tmargin=72.0bp,bmargin=72.0bp}
+\newflowframe[none]{454.599976bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.5bp}{-1.008956bp}[title]
+
+\newflowframe[all]{411.496185bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.535362bp}{-1.008956bp}[main]
+
+\newdynamicframe[none]{87.388458bp}{699.400024bp}{424.311615bp}{-1.008956bp}[sidepanel]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{sidepanel}{valign=t}
+\newdynamicframe[all]{411.529968bp}{22.599998bp}{-0.561401bp}{711.79107bp}[header]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{header}{valign=t}
+\newdynamicframe[all]{411.529938bp}{22.600037bp}{-0.562958bp}{-37.008956bp}[footer]
+
+\setdynamicframe*{footer}{valign=t}
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{699.400024bp}{-0.189491bp}{-1.008956bp}[left]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.863831bp}{699.400024bp}{215.810486bp}{-1.008956bp}[right]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{411.268066bp}{162.321106bp}{-0.430183bp}{535.4442bp}[header]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{522.889465bp}{-0.189491bp}{-1.157531bp}[leftshort]
+
+\newflowframe[none]{194.866699bp}{522.889465bp}{215.810516bp}{-1.157531bp}[rightshort]
+
+\renewcommand{\@dothehead}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthehead}{%
+\@dynamicframeid{header}%
+\expandafter
+\def\csname @dynamicframe@\romannumeral\ff@id\endcsname{%
+\vfill\@thehead\vfill}%
+}%
+\renewcommand{\@dothefoot}{}%
+\renewcommand{\@dodynamicthefoot}{%
+\@dynamicframeid{footer}%
+\expandafter
+\def\csname @dynamicframe@\romannumeral\ff@id\endcsname{%
+\vfill\@thefoot\vfill}%
+}%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-index.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-index.ist
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4405ddbea8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis-index.ist
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+% MakeIndex style file thesis-index.ist
+heading_prefix "\\indexheader{"
+heading_suffix "}\\relax "
+headings_flag 1
+
+group_skip ""
+item_0 "\n  \\mainindexitem{"
+delim_0 "}{"
+item_x1 "}\\relax\n   \\subindexitem{"
+delim_t "}\\relax "
+item_1 "\n     \\subindexitem{"
+item_2 "\n       \\subsubindexitem{"
+item_01 "\n    \\subindexitem{"
+item_12 "\n      \\subsubindexitem{"
+
+delim_1 "}{"
+delim_2 "}{"
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..09f19b5d9ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dickimaw/src/thesis/thesis.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+@preamble{"\latex{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}}
+\label{ch:bib}"}
+
+@book{lamport94,
+  author = "Leslie Lamport",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space: a document preparation system",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  edition="2nd",
+  year = 1994
+}
+
+@book{kopka95,
+  author = "Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly",
+  title = "A guide to {\LaTeXe}: document preparation
+           for beginners and advanced users",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1995
+}
+
+@book{goossens94,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1994
+}
+
+@book{goossens97,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space graphics companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1997
+}
+
+@book{goossens99,
+  author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and others",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space web companion",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1999
+}
+
+@book{kottwitz,
+  author = "Stefan Kottwitz",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space Beginner's Guide",
+  publisher = "Packt Publishing",
+  year = 2011
+}
+
+@book{vandongen,
+  author = "Marc van Dongen",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space and Friends",
+  publisher = "Springer",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@book{oxford,
+  author = "R. M. Ritter",
+  title = "Oxford Style Manual",
+  publisher = "Oxford University Press",
+  year = 2003
+}
+
+@book{turabian96,
+  author = "Kate L. Turabian",
+  title = "A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and
+    Dissertations",
+  edition = "sixth",
+  publisher = "The University of Chicago Press",
+  year = 1996
+}
+
+@book{texbook,
+  author = "Donald Ervin Knuth",
+  title = "The {\TeX{}book}",
+  publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+  year = 1986
+}
+
+@book{novices,
+  author = "Nicola L. C. Talbot",
+  title = "{\LaTeX}\space for Complete Novices",
+  volume = 1,
+  publisher = "Dickmaw Books",
+  series = "Dickimaw {\LaTeX}\space Series",
+  note = "\url{\baseurl/latex/novices/}",
+  isbn="978-1-909440-00-5",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@book{pdfdoc,
+  author = "Nicola L. C. Talbot",
+  title = "Creating a PDF Document Using PDF\LaTeX",
+  volume = 4,
+  publisher = "Dickmaw Books",
+  series = "Dickimaw {\LaTeX}\space Series",
+  note = "\url{\baseurl/latex/pdfdoc/}",
+  year = 2004
+}
+
+@misc{koma,
+  author = "Markus Kohm and Jens-Uwe Morawski",
+  title = "{KOMA-Script} a versatile {\LaTeXe}\space bundle",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space koma}",
+  year=2012
+}
+
+@misc{listings,
+  author = "Carsten Heinz and Brooks Moses",
+  title = "The Listings Package",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/listings/listings.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space listings}",
+  year = 2007
+}
+
+@misc{ntheorem,
+  author = "Wolfgang May and Andreas Schedler",
+  title  = "An Extension of the {\LaTeX}-Theorem Environment",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ntheorem/ntheorem.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space ntheorem}",
+  year= 2011
+}
+
+@misc{algorithm2e,
+  author = "Christophe Fiorio",
+  title = "algorithm2e.sty \dash package for algorithms",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithm2e/doc/algorithm2e.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space algorithm2e}",
+  year = 2013
+}
+
+@misc{siunitx,
+  author = "Joseph Wright",
+  title = "siunitx\dash A comprehensive {(SI)} units package",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/siunitx.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space siunitx}",
+  year = 2013
+}
+
+@misc{bibtex,
+  author = "Oren Patashnik",
+  title = "{BibTeXing}",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/base/btxhak.pdf} or
+\texttt{\texdoc\space bibtex}",
+  year = 1988
+}
+
+@misc{biblatex,
+  author = "Philipp Lehman and Audrey
+Boruvka and Philip Kime and Joseph Wright",
+  title = "The biblatex Package",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space biblatex}",
+  year = 2013
+}
+
+@misc{biber,
+  author = "Philip Kime and Fran\c{c}ois Charette",
+  title = "biber: A backend bibliography processor for biblatex",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space biber}",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@misc{glossaries,
+  author = "Nicola L. C. Talbot",
+  title = "User manual for glossaries.sty",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries/glossaries-user.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space glossaries-user}",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@misc{datatool,
+  author = "Nicola L. C. Talbot",
+  title = "User Manual for datatool bundle",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/datatool/datatool-user.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space datatool-user}",
+  year = 2013
+}
+
+@misc{latexmk,
+  author = "John Collins and Evan McLean and David J. Musliner",
+  title = "latexmk\dash generate {\LaTeX}\space document",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/support/latexmk/latexmk.pdf} or \texttt{\texdoc\space latexmk}",
+  year = 2012
+}
+
+@misc{pakin09,
+  author = "Scott Pakin",
+  title = "The Comprehensive {\LaTeX}\space Symbol List",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/symbols/comprehensive} or
+    \texttt{\texdoc\space symbols}",
+  year = 2009
+}
+
+@misc{l2tabu,
+  author = {Mark Trettin and J\"urgen Fenn},
+  title = "An essential guide to {\LaTeXe}\space usage: obsolete commands
+           and packages",
+  year = 2007,
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/english} or
+    \texttt{\texdoc\space l2tabu-en}"
+}
+
+@misc{texarchive,
+  key = "UKTeX",
+  title = "The {UK} {\TeX}\space {Archive}",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}\index{TeX Archive@\TeX \ Archive}"
+}
+
+@misc{comptexttex,
+  key="comp.text.tex",
+  title = "The \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group",
+  note = "\url{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex}"
+}
+
+@misc{texhax,
+  key="texhax",
+  title = "The \texttt{texhax} archives",
+  note = "\url{http://tug.org/pipermail/texhax/}"
+}
+
+@misc{fontcat,
+  key="font",
+  title = "The {\LaTeX}\space Font Catalogue",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/}"
+}
+
+@misc{ukfaq,
+  key="UKFAQ",
+  title = "{UK} List of {\TeX}\space Frequently Asked Questions",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq} or \texttt{\texdoc\space faq}"
+}
+
+@misc{tds,
+  key="TDS",
+  title = "What is the TDS?",
+  note = "\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds}"
+}
+
+@misc{ctan,
+  key="CTAN",
+  title = "The Comprehensive {\TeX}\space Archive Network",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{tug,
+  key="TUG",
+  title = "The {\TeX}\space User Group",
+  note = "\url{http://tug.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{uktug,
+  key="UKTUG",
+  title = "The {UK} {\TeX}\space User Group",
+  note = "\url{http://uk.tug.org/}"
+}
+
+@misc{texcat,
+  author = "Graham Williams",
+  title = "{\TeX}\space Catalogue",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/}"
+}
+
+@misc{texcattopic,
+  author = {J\"urgen Fenn},
+  title = "The {\TeX}\space Catalogue OnLine, Topic Index",
+  note = "\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html}"
+}
+
+@misc{sargentiii,
+  author = "Murray {Sargent III}",
+  title = "High-Quality Editing and Display of Mathematical Text in
+Office 2007",
+  note =
+"\url{http://blogs.msdn.com/b/murrays/archive/2006/09/13/752206.aspx}",
+  month = SEP,
+  year = 2006
+}
+
+@misc{voss,
+  author = "Herbert {Vo\ss}",
+  title = "Math Mode",
+  note =
+"\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/math/voss/mathmode/Mathmode.pdf}
+or \texttt{\texdoc\space mathmode}",
+  year = 2010
+}
+
+@misc{thesistemplates,
+  author = "{\LaTeX}\space for Humans",
+  title = "Thesis and Dissertation Templates for {\LaTeX}",
+  note =
+"\url{http://latexforhumans.wordpress.com/2011/03/10/thesis-templates-for-latex/}",
+  year = 2011
+}
+
+@article{latexcommunitygloss,
+  author = "Nicola Talbot",
+  title = "Glossaries, Nomenclature, Lists of Symbols and Acronyms",
+  journal = "The LaTeX Community's Know How Section",
+  month = mar,
+  year = 2009,
+  note =
+"\url{http://www.latex-community.org/know-how/latex/55-latex-general/263-glossaries-nomenclature-lists-of-symbols-and-acronyms}"
+}